IB 







'-^^.:-i;^^X.-,^ 








A^-^ 






'Mm 



9.% % 









^^1 






•V .■Q> 






s "^ ' ' ^ /. 



V N^-"^^ 
^ ..>^ -^^ 









^' 






% .^^ 



*>. 






'"V'Vy 






« ^ ^<p. 









^. %, c*" 



■i' 



^ 



^ 






'%. 



\ -^ 



^^ 









'^^ * n 



The New Common School 



QUESTION BOOK 



A GENERAL REVIEW OF 



COMMON SCHOOL STUDIES. 



TO BE USED IN SCHOOLS IN CONNECTION 
WITH TEXT BOOKS. 



BY ASA H. CRAIG. 



-..,..,.Jf ' 



ONE HUNDRED AND TWENTY-EWHTH THOmAND. 



CLEVELAND, O.: 
J. R. HoLCOMB & Co., Publishers. 

1888. 



Entered According to Act of Congress, in the Year 1888, by 

ASA H. CRAIG, 

In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 



PREFACE. 



Reviews should be one of the most important features 
of any school, for by it the pupil is called upon to answer 
from real memory, instead of the momentary memory 
direct from the text-books. ^ 

I have sometimes thought that the majority of teachers 
of our district schools do not realize the importance of 
daily, weekly and monthly reviews. Their greatest zeal 
appears to be in the advancement of their pupils in their 
studies. They labor to stimulate them to pass over a cer- 
tain course, or reach a given point, and it is with pride 
that they note the rapid progress of their classes. We all 
know that students are few who can retain the lessons of 
to-day, without the thought of to-morrow on the same sub- 
ject. 

It is more essential for us to direct a part of our thoughts 
upon what we have learned, than it is to be continually 
pressing farther. Far better it is for us to fully understand, 
and be capable of practically using a part of a science, 
than to have studied the whole and forgotten the necessary 
part. If teachers would adopt the plan of asking some 
questions on previous lessons, at the close of each recita- 
tion, a more thorough knowledge would be obtained ; their 
memories would be continually refreshed, until those facts 
or principles wiU be so indelibly fixed upon their minds 
that they cannot be forgotten. It is with this idea of 
refreshing the memory, that the author collected and 
formed systematicaUy the general and essential principles 



4 PREFACE. 

of the Common School studies. The object is to facilitate 
the means of reviews, and if, through the publication of 
this work, teachers are induced to direct the attention of 
their scholars to questions promiscuously, then much good 
will be accomplished. The answers which are given are 
formed of few words, but the intention was to make them 
clear and concise, and as it is to be used in connection 
with text books, reference should be made when the 
teacher or pupil does not fully understand the whole mean- 
ing. Errors may be found, and the author will consider 
it a great favor to be informed of them, that the correction 
3nay be made. ^g^ jj^ CRAIG. 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



United States History. 



1. What is History? 

2. By what terms are the divisions of history expressed ? 

3. What is Ancient History ? Modern? Civil? Sacred? 
Profane ? 

4. What are the great events of Ancient History ? 

5. For what is Modern History distinguished ? 

6. How was America first settled ? 

7. What proofs show that America was inhabited by a 
race of men previous to the Indians ? 

8. What name have we applied to these people ? 

9. Why should we suppose that the Indians were a 
distinct race of men from those of the prehistoric times ? 

10. What records show that America was discovered 
previous to the discovery of Columbus ? 

11. Who were the Northmen ? 

, 12. What lands did they discover and what evidences 
exist of their explorations ? Were they of any benefit ? 

13. Into how many chief epochs can the history of the 
United States be divided ? 

14. What idea led to the discovery of America by 
Columbus ? What results were sought ? 

15. What land did Columbus first discover, and when ? 

16. Give some account of Columbus' trials and his 
final success ? 

17. How many vessels composed his fleet ? 

18. When and where did Columbus discover the main- 
land ? How many voyages did he make ? 

19. Who discovered the continent before Columbus, 
and where ? 5 



6 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

20. Why was the continent named America instead of 
Columbia ? 

21. What reward did Columbus receive for his dis- 
coveries ? Where was he buried ? 

22. What nations explored the future United States ? 

23. Where did the Spaniards make their claims ? The 
French? The English ? The Dutch ? 

24. Name the most important Spanish discoverers and 
explorers ? 

25. What induced Ponce de Leon to come to the New 
World ? Where were his discoveries ? 

26. What discoveries were made by Vasco de Balboa ? 

27. What was the object of De Narvaez explorations ? 

28. What of Ferdinand de Soto and his explorations? 

29. When and by whom was Mexico discovered ? 

30. Give an account of the expeditions of Pedro 
Melendez. Of De Ayllon. Of Magellan. 

31. When and where was the first colony founded on 
the continent ? 

32. When, where, and by whom, was the first perma- 
nent settlement made in the United States ? The second ? 

33. What sections were explored by the Spaniards ? 

34. Who first attempted to form English settlements in 
America ? 

35. When and where was the first permanent English 
settlement made in the United States ? 

36. Who sent out the settlers to Jamestown ? 

37. What territory was granted the London Company ? 

38. How many charters had the London Company ? 

39. Name the most important French discoverers? 
What sections did they explore ? 

40. Who were the most important English discoverers 
and explorers ? 

41. Of whom was the Plymouth Company composed? 
What territory was granted them ? 

42. Who were the first Spanish, French, English and 
Dutch discoverers ? 

43. Where was the first permanent settlement made by 
the Dutch ? By the French ? 

44. Where was the first white child of English parents 
bona in America ? What was her name ? 

45. What region of country was called Acadia ? 

46. What of note can be mentioned of. Sir Francis 
Drake ? 

47. What name did Raleigh give the lands he explored ? 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 7 

48. Who was Champlain ? What of interest by him ? 

49. Who were the Jesuit Missionaries ? 

50. Who were the first partial explorers of the Missis- 
sippi and its branches ? 

51.^ Who were La Salle and Father Hennepin ? 

52. Who discovered the Hudson River ? 

53. What was the object of Hudson's explorations ? 
64. What is said of the fate of Hudson ? 

55. What was that country called explored by Hudson ? 

56. What nations claimed it ? 

57. How was the dispute settled ? 

58. At the close of the sixteenth century, where were 
the only permanent settlements ? 

59. Name five of the first permanent settlements in the 
New World, at the beginning of the seventeenth century. 

60. Who were the English Puritans ? 

61. How many Puritans came on the first voyage ? 

62. Who was their first Governor ? 

63. Was the colony prosperous ? 

64. Who was Roger Williams ? 

65. What was the treatment by the Puritans of the 
t^uakers ? 

66. Who was Mrs. Anne Hutchinson ? 

67. What was the United Colonies of New Engiand ? 

68. What was the object of this league ? 

69. Why was Providence, Rhode Island, so named ? 

70. When, and by what nation was negro slavery intro- 
duced into the United States ? 

71. Who was Captain John Smith ? 

72. Who were Pocahontas and Powhatan ? 

73. What became of Pocahontas ? 

74. When did the first English women come to 
America ? 

75. What valuable plants were discovered in America ? 

76. When was the first Indian plot to massacre the 
English ? 

77. When was the first massacre ? The second ? 

78. Who was Nathaniel Bacon ? What was the cause 
of Bacon's rebellion ? 

79. When was the first Colonial Assembly ? 

80. What colonies composed the United Colonies of 
New England ? 

81. When was King Phillip's war? Who was King 
Phillip? 

82. What was the Navigation Act ? 



8 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

83. What was the effegt of these laws ? 

84. Was this Act observed in Massachusetts ? 

85. Who was Sir Edmond Andros ? 

86. From what was derived the appellation of Charter 
Oakf 

87. Who was Sir William Phipps ? 

88. What was the cause and result of the Salem witch- 
craft? 

89. What was the cause of the Pequot war ? How did 
it terminate ? 

90. What name did the Dutch give their colony on 
Manhattan Island ? 

91. How was this island obtained ? 

92. Give a short history of the early government of 
New York. 

93. When and by whom was Connecticut settled ? 

94. By whom was the first settlement in New Hamp- 
shire made ? 

95. Who made the first settlement in Maine ? 

96. From what did its early colonists greatly sufi'er ? 

97. Why were the Indians so hostile and barbarous ? 

98. When, and by whom, was Philadelphia founded ? 

99. Who was WilHam Penn ? 

100. Why did Lord Baltimore obtain a tract of land 
north of the Potomac River ? 

101. What was the cause of Clayborne's rebellion ? 

102. After this rebellion, what was the condition of 
Maryland ? 

103. To whom does the honor of having first estab- 
lished religious freedom in America belong ? 

104. By whom was Delaware settled? Where and 
when? What transpired a few years after their settle- 
ment? 

105. What European^ war^ disturbed the American 
colonies ? 

106. What were the causes of King William's war? 
How long did it last ? 

107. What was the condition of the colonies during 
Queen Anne's war ? ' 

108. Were the colonies much affected by King George's 
war ? 

109. What part did the Indians usually take in these 
wars ? 

110. Which of the colonies suffered most in early war- 
fare? 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 9 

111. Which of the colonies was free from Indian war- 
fare ? 

112. Which was the only treaty never sworn oo, and 
the only one never broken by the Indians ? 

113. Name the thirteen colonies. 

114. When and where were Harvard and Yale Colleges 
founded ? 

135. When, and by whom, was the first newspaper 
started in America ? Who was the first American editor ? 

116. In 1741, what caused great excitement in New 
York city ? 

117. Who was John Ehot ? 

118. Who was William Kidd ? 

119. By whom was North Carolina settled? 

120. When was South Carolina settled ?^ 

121. In 1700, what valuable plants were introduced into 
this country ? 

122. When, and by whom, was Georgia settled ? 

123. Why was it called Georgia ? 

124. From what nation came the great mass of the ear]y 
settlers of the United States ? 

125. Where were the different nationalities found in 
the colonies ? 

126. In what were the settlers of New England en- 
gaged? The Middle States? Virginia and Maryland? 
Georgia and Carolina ? 

127. Which was the most commercial colony ? Town ? 

128. What was the population of New York? Phila- 
delphia ? Boston ? 

129. Why had Virginia no large towns ? 

130. In these times how was trade carried on ? 

131. What was used instead of currency? 

132. In what money were accounts kept ? 

133. How did the use of dollars and cents become es- 
tablished ? 

134. What were the general manners and customs of 
the early settlers ? 

135. What religious beliefs existed in the colonies ? 

136. Give an account of religious persecutions. 

137. Under what dominion were the colonies? 

138. What were proprietary governments ? Give ex- 
amples of them. 

139. Describe royal government. Charter government. 
Voluntary association. 

140. Name two strange delusions in colonial history. 



10 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

141. Who were the founders of American literature? 

142. What influence had the pulpit in the education 
of the people in colonial times ? 

143. When were post-offices first established? How 
many post-offices at the present time ? 

144. What great men did the colonial times produce ? 
What great sentiment was uttered by James Otis ? 

145. Where and when was the first permanent settle- 
ment made in the Mississippi River valley ? 

146. What was the cause of the French and Indian war ? 
What parties were engaged in it ? ^ 

147. Where was the disputed territory? 

148. Who was sent to request the French to withdraw 
from the territory on the Ohio ? 

149. What was the result of Washington's endeavor to 
compel the French to abandon the Ohio ? 

150. How were Col. Washington and his soldiers re- 
warded by the legislature of Virginia ? 

151. After Washington's retreat, what general was sent 
in his place against the French ? 

152. What was the result of Gen. Braddock's expedi- 
tion ? 

153. Who was the only mounted officer saved in this 
expedition ? 

154. Was the next expedition against Fort du Quesne 
•successful ? 

155. At what other points besides the Ohio did the 
■colonists attack the French ? 

156. What success had the English in their attack on 
Acadia ? 

157. What was their success at Crown Point and Ticon- 
■deroga ? 

158. Describe the attack on Ticonderoga. 

159. Were they successful at Niagara ? 

160. Who were the commanders at the battle of 
Quebec ? 

161. How was Quebec taken? 

162. What generals were killed at the capture of Que- 
bec ? What were their dying words ? 

163. What was the treaty of peace between France and 
England ? 

164. What was the cause and result of Pontiac's war ? 

165. In the French and Indian war, what was the most 
remarkable battle ? 

166. What were the effects of this war ? 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 11 

167. At the close of the French and Indian war, what 
ivas the population of the colonies ? 

168. What were the chief causes which led to the 
American Revolution? 

169. What were Writs of Assistance ? 

170. What was the Stamp Act ? When passed ? 

171. Who was Patrick Henry ? 

172. After the repeal of the Stamp Act, what attempt 
was made to tax the colonies ? 

173. Who were the " Sons of Liberty" ? 

174. What was the Mutiny Act? 

175. What occurred in Boston in relation to the tea tax ? 
Who received the name " Boston Tea Party" ? 

176. What was the Boston Port Bill ? What effect did 
this have ? 

177. What was the Boston Massacre ? 

178. When and where did the first General Congress of 
the colonies assemble ? What action did it take ? 

179. Why do we cherish the name Faneuil Hall? 
Where is it ? By what other name is it known ? 

180. What was the public feeling in England ? 

181. Were the people all united in their protestations 
against the English government ? By what party names 
were they known ? 

182. Who was Paul Revere? 

REVOLUTIONARY WAR. 

183. Who had command of the British army at the 
commencement of the Revolution? 

184. When and where was fought the first battle of the 
Revolution ? 

185. Describe the battle of Lexington. 

186. What effect had this battle? . 

187. Who was Israel Putnam? What nickname was 
given him ? 

188. What were some of Putnam's narrow escapes ? 

189. When and where was fought the battle of Bunker 
Hill ? Describe that battle. 

190. Who were the commajiders in this battle ? What 
"was the force of each army, and the loss ? 

191. What American general was killed in this battle ? 

192. How did the Americans regard the battle of 
Bunker Hill? 

193. What two forts were captured by the Americans 
in May, 1775? 



12 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

194. To whom did these forts surrender ? 

195. What did Allen say when asked by what authority 
he demanded the surrender of Ticonderoga ? 

196. Who were termed " Green Mountain Boys "? 

197. When did the second Continental Congress as- 
semble ? What did this Congress do ? 

198. When did Gen. Washington take command of the 
American army, and how large was his force ? 

199. What was the result of the American attack on 
Canada ? 

1776. 

200. How did Washington force the British to evacuate 
Boston ? 

201. Describe the attack on Fort Moultrie. 

202. What daring feat was accomplished hy Sergeant 
Jasper in his attack ? 

203. Who introduced measures into Congress that " The 
United Colonies are, and ought to he, free and independent 
States'' f 

204. Who were appointed to draw up a declaration of 
rights ? 

205. When was the Declaration of Independence ac- 
cepted by Congress ? 

206. What did this declaration declare? 

207. When were these articles signed, and by how many 
persons ? 

208. What became necessary after this declaration ? 

209. What were these articles called, and when were 
they to take effect ? 

210. Were they ratified by Congress immediately ? 

211. Which State was last to give her consent ? 

212. Why were the articles of confederation not adapted 
to the general wants of the government ? 

_ 213. When was fought the battle of Long Island, and 
with what result ? 

214. In the retreat of Washington, through what place 
did he pass ? 

215. When was fought the battle of White Plains, and 
-who was victorious ? 

216. What was the feeling of the colonists at this 
time ? 

217. What daring exploit was made by Washington 
near the close of the year 1776 ? 

218. What was the effect of this brilliant feat ? 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 13 

219. Why did Washington choose Christmas night to 
attack the Hessians ? 

220. When and by whom was Rhode Island captured ? 

1777. 

221. At the opening of the year 1777, how many British 
armies in America ? 

222. What battle soon followed Washington's success 
at Trenton? 

223. What was Cornwallis' mistake in this brilliant 
achievement of Washington ? 

224. What great compliment was given to Washington 
by Frederick the Great of Prussia ? 

225. During the summer following the battle of Prince- 
ton, what transpired between the British and Americans ? 

226. What was the force of Washington's army ? 

227. What noted French Marquis joined the Americans 
at this time ? Describe the obstacles which he overcame 
in order to offer his services to the American Congress. 

228. When was fought the battle of Brandywine, and 
who was victorious ? 

229. When did Philadelphia surrender to the British ? 

230. Where did Washington attack the British soon 
after his retreat from Philadelphia, and with what result ? 

231. What was one of the most daring and remarkable 
exploits during the war, and how accomplished ? 

232. What was the chief object of taking Gen. Prescott ? 
Was the exchange made ? 

233. Where did the British army go into winter 
quarters, and what was their condition in the spring.'' 
What did Dr. Franklin wittily remark of them ? 

234. Who was Lydia Darrach ? 

235. What cheering offset to Washington's defeat 
greeted the Americans ? 

236. Who invaded the United States from Canada? 

237. AVhat success did Burgoyne have? 

238. Who commanded the northern division of the 
American army ? Who the British ? 

239. What stratagem did Arnold resort to, in order to 
rout the British, and relieve Fort Stanwix ? 

240. At the battle of Bennington, how did Gen. Stark 
inspire his troops, and with what res alt? 

241. What battles were fought by Gates and Burgoyne ? 
Who was victorious ? 



14 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

242. When, where and to whom did Burgoyne sur- 
render ? 

248. What was the agreement in this surrender ? 

244. In this campaign, what noted foreigner tendered 
his assistance " to fight as a volunteer for American inde- 
pendence?" 

245. What patriotic remark did Gen. Stark make when 
informed, after the battle of Bennington, that one of his 
five sons had been unfortunate ? 

246. What was the Conway Calal plot ? 

247. When did Congress adopt the Articles of Confed- 
eration ? 

248. Where did Washington quarter his troops during 
the winter of 1777-1778, and what was their condition ? 

1778. 

249. What move was now made by England to effect a 
reconciliation ? 

250. When Gen. Keed, of Pennsylvania, was offered ten 
thousand guineas and high honors to seek a negotiation of 
peace, what did he say ? 

251. Who were appointed by Congress to solicit aid 
from the French government? 

252. When and where was a treaty of alliance formed ? 

253. In the Spring what assistance was sent by France ? 

254. How long did the British hold Philadelphia ? 

255. Where did Congress assemble while the British, 
held Philadelphia? 

256. When and where was fought the battle of Mon- 
mouth, and who were victorious ? What heroic achieve- 
ment was performed by a woman in this battle ? 

257. How was Mary Pitcher rewarded by Congress for 
her courage and patriotism ? 

258. What can be said of Gen. Lee in the battle of 
Monmouth ? 

259. Describe the campaign in Rhode Island ? 

260. When did the massacre of Wyoming occur ? Who 
directed it ? 

261. Describe this massacre. 

1779. 

262. Who had charge of the American forces in the 
south, in 1779? Who the British ? 

263. At this time, where were Washington and Clinton ? 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 15 

264. What important posts on the Hudson were sur- 
rendered to the Americans in 1779 ? 

265. How were these posts taken, and by whom ? 

266. What was the result of the American attack on 
Savannah ? 

267 In the siege of Savannah, what nobleman was 
mortally wounded ? 

268 Up to this time, what had been the successes of 
the American navy and privateers ? 

269 Who was Paul Jones ? 

270 During this year what Indian attack was made by 
General Sullivan ? 

271. What was the condition of the country at the 
close of the year 1779 ? What was the condition of the 
finances of the government ? 

272. What was Continental Money? 

1780. 

273. In 1780, where were the military operations mostly 
carried on ? 

274. What was the result of the siege of Charleston ? 

275. Who succeeded Lincoln in the command of the 
Southern forces, and who had command of the British ? 

276. When and where was the battle of Camden, who 
commanded, and who was victorious ? 

277. Who received command of the Southern army 
after the unsuccessful operations of Gen. Gates ? 

278. What massacre was perpetrated by Col. Tarleton 
and a body of British ? 

279. What was the condition of the South after these 
reverses ? 

280. What fleet came to assist the Americans in July ? 
281 Who was Benedict Arnold ? 

282. Who was Major Andre ? 

283. What were the names of the captors of Andre, 
and how were they rewarded ? 

284. What were the words of Washington when the 
proofs of Arnold's treason were placed in his hands ? 

285. What became of Arnold and Andre? 

286. How was Arnold rewarded for his treachery ? 

287. Who rendered gallant assistance in the South in 
the lawless attacks of the Tories, and often successfully 
routed small detachments of the British soldiers ? 

2S8. What can be said of the courage, privations and 
hardships of these men? 



16 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

289. What was the condition of the British armies at 
the close of the year, 1780 ? 

290. What valuable assistance was rendered by Robert 
Morris, of Philadelphia ? 

1781-1788. 

291. When and where was fought the battle of Cow- 
pens, and who was victorious ? 

292. What successful operations under Gen. Greene in 
September ? 

293. Did Gen. Greene ever gain a decided victory ? 

294. How was the war conducted at the North ? 

295. What event brought the war to a close ? 

296. When and to whom did Cornwallis surrender ? 

297. When and where was the treaty of peace signed ? 
Who were the commissioners who signed it ? 

298. When was peace proclaimed to the American 
army ? 

299. When and where did Washington resign his mili- 
tary commission ? 

300. What was the condition of the country at this 
time? 

301 What noted persons from foreign powers gave 
their assistance to the Americans ? 

302. What was the cause of Shay's rebellion ? 

303. When was the national flag adopted ? Describe it. 

304. When was the Constitution adopted ? 

305. After the adoption of the Constitution, where did 
Congress first meet ? 

306. What were the difficulties with which the new 
government had to contend ? * » 

Washington's administration — 1789-1797. 

307. When was Washington inaugurated as President 
of the United States ? 

308. Where was the second session of Congress held ? 

309. When did the city of Washington become the 
capital of the United States ? 

310. Who were Washington's Cabinet ? 

311. How was the credit of the United States put upon 
a firm basis ? 

312. What did Daniel Webster say of Hamilton ? 

313. Who was appointed Minister to the United States 
from France ? Why was he recalled ? 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 17 

314. What great calamity visited the people of America 
in August, 1793? 

315. What was the whisky rebellion? 

316. What difficulties now arose with the Indians, and 
what expeditions were sent against them ? 

317. What was the condition of foreign affairs ? 

318. What treaty was made with England in regard to 
English debts? How was this treaty received by the 
American people ? 

319. What two political parties were now organized? 
Who were the leaders of these parties ? 

320. What were the principles advocated by these 
parties ? 

321. By what majority was Adams elected ? 

ADAMS' ADMINISTRATION — 1797-1801. 

322. When was John Adams inaugurated President ? 

323. During Adams' administration, what memorable 
occurrences transpired ? 

324. What was the nature of the Alie a and Sedition 
Laws f 

325. What were the difficulties with France, and what 
prevented war with that nation ? 

326. Why was France so hostile to the United States 
when she had previously rendered such valuable services ? 

327. In the midst of these events, what memorable 
event transpired ? 

328. When was the seat of government removed from 
Philadelphia to Washington ? 

329. What was the political feeling during this admin- 
istration ? 

330. Who were nominated in this campaign? 

331. What tie vote existed in this election? 

Jefferson's administration. 

332. How was Thomas Jefferson elected President? 

333. What was the most important event of Jefferson's 
administration ? -to 

334. What was the cause of the war with Tripoli ( 

335. What daring exploit was accomplished by Lieut. 

336. What difficulties arose between England and the 
United States? 

337. What was the American doctrine in regard to na- 
turalized foreio-ners ? W hat the English ? 



18 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

338. After the capture of the Chesapeake, what did Jef- 
ferson order? 

339. What was the Embargo Act ? 

340. What was the Milan Decree? 

341. What disastrous event transpired between Aaron 
Burr and Alexander Hamilton ? 

342. What was " Burr's Conspiracy "? 

343. For what is Robert Fulton noted ? 

344. At the close of Jefferson's second term what was 
the political sentiment of each party ? 

345. When was James Madison inaugurated President ? 

Madison's administration — 1809-1817. 

346. What Indian disturbances occurred in the year 
1811? 

347. What acts did England continue to impose upon 
the United States ? What was the result of these depre- 
dations ? 

348. When was war formally declared against Great 
Britain ? How long did it last ? 

WAR OF 1812. 

349. What was the opening event of the war of 1812 ? 

350. Describe the surrender of Detroit. 

351. What other attempt was made to invade Canada, 
and with what result ? 

352. What were some of the most important naval 
victories for the Americans in 1812? 

353. During this year, how many prizes were captured 
by the Americans ? 

354. What effect did these remarkable naval victories 
have upon the people ? 

1813. 

355. What was the plan of the campaign of 1813 ? 

356. What successes had these divisions ? 

357. Describe Perry's victory on Lake Erie. 

358. What daring exploit was performed by Perry ? 

359. In writing to Gen. Harrison of the victory gained, 
what memorable words did Perry use ? 

360. What course did Harrison pursue after hearing of 
the Erie engagement ? 

361. What were the principal American naval victories 
in 1813 ? 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 19 

362. What were the important British naval victories 
in 1813 ? 

363. In what engagement, and by whom, was used the 
sentence, " don't give up the ship '"? 

364. What Indian disturbances occurred, and who was 
sent to punish them ? 

365. What ravages were committed by Admiral Cock- 
burn ? 

1814. 

366. In the third invasion of Canada, what battles were 
fought ? 

867. Describe the battle of Lundy's Lane. Who com- 
manded ? 

368. Describe the battle of Lake Champlain. 

369. What w^ere some of the ravages of the British on 
the Atlantic coast ? 

370. How did the term " Hartford Convention Federal- 
ist " originate ? What was the sentiment of the Hartford 
Convention ? 

371. When and where were the articles of peace signed ? 

1815. 

372. After this treaty, what terrible battle was fought, 
and with what loss ? 

373. What was the national debt at this time ? 

374. At the close of Madison's term of office what was 
the political feeling ? 

375. When was James Monroe inaugurated ? 

Monroe's administration — 1817-1825. 

376. What was the Missouri compromise bill ? Who 
proposed this compromise? 

377. What foreigner visited this countrv as "The 
Nation's Guest"? 

378. What was the nature of the Monroe doctrine ? 

379. How was Florida obtained ? 

380. What political parties were now before the people ? 
What principles did they represent ? 

381. From what originated the term " loco-foco "? 

382. What is a protective tariff? 

383. How was J. Q. Adams elected President ^ 



20 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

J. Q. ADAMS' ADMINISTRATION — 1825-1829. 

384. What important events occurred during Adams' 
administration ? 

385. Where was the first railroad in the United States ? 

386. How long is the Erie Canal ? 

387. Why was the "American System " (a protective 
tariff) popular in the East and unpopular in the South ? 

388. Why was J. Q. Adams not elected to a second 
term of office ? 

389. What sentiment was often applied to Mr. Adams ? 

390. When and by whom was the corner-stone of 
Bunker Hill Monument laid ? 

Jackson's administration — 1829-1837. 

391. What was the character of Jackson's administra- 
tion ? What was his " rotation in office "? 

392. What was the Nullification Ordinance ? 

393. Who were the strongest supporters of nullifica- 
tion ? 

394. What action did Jackson take ? 

395. What was Henry Clay's " Compromise Bill "? 

396. , Who said " I would rather be right than Presi- 
dent "? Why did he say this? 

397. What important bill did Jackson veto during his 
first term ? What did he do in 1833 in regard to the pub- 
lic money in the United States Bank ? 

898. What can be said of speculation at this time ? 

399. What Indian troubles occurred during Jackson's 
administration ? 

400. What demands were made of the French govern- 
ment ? 

401. What were the leading principles of the Demo- 
cratic party in the election of Martin Van Buren ? Who 
was the Whig candidate ? 

van buren's administration — 1837-1841. 

402. What were some of the memorable events during 
Van Buren's administration ? 

403. What were some of the causes of the Financial 
Crisis f 

404. Mention some of the results of this crisis. 

405. What was the " Patriot War "? 

406. What occurred during the Patriot war ? 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 21 

407. What disturbance occurred between Maine and 
New Brunswick ? How was it settled ? 

408. At the close of Van Buren's administration, what 
was the political feeling ? 

409. What party was now successful ? 

HARRISON AND TYLER 's ADMINISTRATION — 1841-1845. 

410. How long did Harrison remain in office ? 

411. Did Tyler carry out the principles of the party 
which elected him ? 

412. What bill was vetoed by Tyler, to the great dis- 
gust of the men who elected him ? 

413. What was the cause of the Dorr Rebellion ? 

414. What were the Anti-Rent difficulties ? 

415. What occurred in relation to the Mormons ? 

416. ^ W hen was Texas admitted into the Union ? Why 
was their petition at first rejected ? 

417. Where was the first telegraph, and what was the 
first message sent by it ? 

418. When and by whom was the cotton-gin invented? 

419. What were the political sentiments during the 
campaign for Tresident ? Who were nominated ? 

JAMES K. folk's ADMINISTRATION 1845-1849. 

420. What were the causes which led to the war with 
Mexico ? 

421. Who had command of the American army ? 

422. What prominent battles were won bv Taylor? 
What by Scott? 

423. Who was John C. Fremont, and what part did he 
take in the Mexican war? 

424. What was the treaty of peace between the United . 
States and Mexico ? 

425. What was the " Wilmot Proviso "? 

426. When was gold discovered in California ? 

427. What political parties were now in the field, and 
who were nominated by them ? 

TAYLOR AND FILLMORE's ADMINISTRATION — 1849-1853. 

428. How long was Taylor in office ? 

429. What important question arose at the commence- 
ment of Taylor's administration ? 

430. What was the " Omnibus Bill "? 



22 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

431. Who was the " Great Pacificator "? 

432. What was the Fugitive Slave Law ? 

433. What can be said of the Invasion of Cuba ? 

434. What two great men died in 1852 ? 

435. Who were the candidates in the next presidential 
election ? What principles did they advocate ? 

Pierce's administration — 1853-1857. 

436. What was the Kansas-Nebraska Bill? Who pre- 
sented it ? 

437. How did this bill affect the inhabitants of Kansas ? 

438. What was the Gadsden purchase ? 

439. What treaty was made with Japan ? 

440. What was the political situation? Who were 
nominated ? 

Buchanan's administration — 1857-1 861. 

441. What was the Dred Scott Decision f 

442. What did John Brown attempt to do ? 

443. In the fall elections, who were the candidates for 
the Presidency ? 

444. What did each of the parties advocate ? 

445. What were the causes which led to the Civil war? 

446. Which State first passed ordinance of secession? 

447. What other States followed this example ? 

44 S. What government was formed by these States ? 
When and where was it organized ? 

449. Who was elected President, and when inaugurated ? 

Lincoln's administration — 1861. 

450. What event signalized the commencement of the 
^var? 

451. What was the result of this bombardment? 

452. What did Lincoln do in regard to troops ? 

453. Where was the first blood shed in this war ? 

454. What valuable stores were seized by the Confeder- 
ates ? 

455. How did Col. Elmer E. Ellsworth meet his death ? 

456. When was fought the battle of Bull Run, and with 
what result ? 

457. What effect had this defeat on the Northern 
people ? 

458. Give an account of the battle of Ball's Bluff. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 23 

459. What colonel was killed in this battle ? 

460. What was the condition of Missouri ? 

461. When and where was Gen. Lyon killed? 

462. What proclamation was issued by Davis ? In re- 
ply, what did Lincoln declare ? 

463. At the commencement of the year, how many 
vessels were in the United States Navy ? How many at the 
close of the year ? 

464. What did England and France do by way of en- 
couraging the rebellion ? 

465 Who were James M. Mason and John Slidell? 

466. What occurred of much interest in relation to the 
commissioners ? 

467. When did Gen. Scott retire from active service ? 
Who succeeded him? 

468. Give a general review of the first year of the war? 

1862. 

469. What was the plan for the campaign of 1862 ? 

470. What was the size of each army ? What successes 
had the Union forces earl}^ in this year ? 

471. When and to whom did Forts Henry and Donel- 
son surrender ? 

472. What was now the plan of operations ? 

473. When was fought the battle of Shiloh, and who 
commanded ? 

474. Describe the battle of Shiloh. What was the 
strength of each army? 

475. Where is Island No. 10 ? When and by whom was 
it captured ? 

476. When was fought the battle of Perryville, and 
who were the commanders ? 

477. When was fought the battle of Murfreesboro ? 
Which army was victorious ? 

478. What effect had this battle? 

479. What was the plan of the first expedition against 
Vicksburg, and how did it terminate ? 

480. What fighting occurred in Missouri ? 

WAR ON THE SEA AND ON TPIE COAST. 

481. Describe the capture of New Orleans. 

482. After the capture of New Orleans, what course 
did Commodore Farragut pursue ? 



24 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

483. What was gained by the capture of Roanoke 
Island ? 

484. What vessels were sunk by the Merrimac ? 

485. Describe the encounter between the Merrimac 
and Monitor. 

486. What would undoubtedly have been the final re- 
sult if the Merrimac had been successful ? 

487. After this engagement, how was the United States 
Navy looked upon by European powers ? 

488. What became of the boats Merrimac and Monitor ? 

489. Who was John Morgan ? Quantrell ? 

WAR IN THE EAST. 

490. In the war in the East, what was the objective 
point ? 

491. Who commanded in the Peninsular Campaign ? 

492. Describe the siege of Yorktown. 

493. When was fought the battle of Williamsburg ? 

494. What were McClellan's plans ? How foiled? 

495. What were the movements of Stonewall Jackson ? 

496. What was the effect of, this movement ? 

497. While these events were transpiring in the Shen- 
andoah Valley, what were the movements of McClellan ? 

498. After the battle of Fair Oaks, what course did 
McClellan pursue, and what desperate fighting occurred ? 

499. What is the distance from Fair Oaks to the James 
River ? 

500. What was the effect of this campaign? 

501. What orders did McClellan now receive? 

502. Describe Lee's campaign against Pope. 

503. What was the effect of this campaign? 

504. What did Lee do ? 

505. Who assumed command of the Army of the Poto- 
mac after Pope's defeat ? 

506. What battles were fought soon after he took com- 
mand? 

507. After these battles, what course did Lee pursue? 

508. What was the effect of Lee's defeat ? 

509. Why was McClellan again superseded ? Who took 
command ? 

510. When was fought the battle of Fredericksburg, and 
with what result ? 

511. What were the Confederate victories during this 
year ? 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 25 

512. What were the Union victories ? 

513. What terrible Indian massacre occurred ? 

1863. 

514. What was the plan of the war of 1863 ? W^hat 
was the force ? 

515. When was issued the Emancipation Proclamation ? 

516. Describe the second expedition against Vicksburg. 

517. When did the garrison of Vicksburg surrender? 

518. What effect had this campaign ? 

519. After the battle of Murfreeyboro what were the 
movements in Tennessee ? 

520. What was now the feeling in the North in regard 
to the Army of the Cumberland? 

521. By what means was the army of the Tennessee 
relieved ? 

522. Where was Hooker, and how did he so suddenly 
appear before the Confederate army at Chattanooga ? 

523. Describe the battles of Lookout Mountain and 
Missionary Ridge. Who commanded? 

524. What effect had these successes ? 

525. After the battle of Fredericksburg, who took com- 
mand of the Army of the Potomac? 

526. When was fought the battle of Chancellorville ? 

527. In this battle, what valuable Confederate jofficer 
was killed? 

528. Who succeeded Hooker after the battle of Chan- 
cellorville ? 

529. Wliat were the movements of Lee ? 

530. How was his progress arrested ? 

531. At the battle of Gettysburg, what was the loss ? 

532. The loss of Vicksburg and the battle of Gettys- 
burg had what effect on the Confederacy ? 

533. How did Admiral Dupont attempt to take 
Charleston? 

534. W^hat were the Confederate successes for the year 
1863 ? 

535. The Union successes ? 

536. What was the Draft Riot ? 

1864. 

537. Describe the raid made by Gen. Kilpatrick at the 
beginning of 1864. 

538. VV'hat was accomplished by this expedition ? 



26 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

539. What befell Col. Dahlgren and his command? 

540. When was Gen. Grant appomted Lieutenant Gen- 
eral of all the Union forces ? 

541. Where was the main strength of the Confederacy ? 

542. What plan was now adopted ? 

5^3. Describe Sherman's advance to Atlanta. 

544. When did Atlanta surrender? 

545. What had been the loss during this campaign of 
four months' fighting ? 

546. What movement was made by Hood, and why ? 

547. What became of Hood's army ? 

548. Describe Sherman's "March to the Sea," after 
burning Atlanta. 

549. What effect had this march on Georgia ? 

550. At the time of Grant's move towards Richmond, 
what battles were fought ? 

551. Describe the battle of the Wilderness. 

552. What did Grant do, and what battle followed ? 

553. Where was the next engagement ? 

554. What was the result of the attack on Petersburg ? 

555. What was the loss in this campaign ? 

556. What memorable words were written by Gen. 
Grant to the President on the 11th of May, 1864 ? 

557. During the siege of Richmond, what two impor- 
tant events occurred ? 

558. What was the result of the mine explosion ? 

559. What raids were made by Gen. Early ? 

560. What was secured by these expeditions ? 

561. What did Gen. Sheridan do ? 

562. What was the effect of Sheridan's successes ? 

563. Describe the Red River expedition. 

5G4. When was the massacre of Fort Pillow, Ky.? 

565. W^hat brilliant naval victory did Admiral Farragut 
achieve ? 

566. Describe the expedition against Fort Fisher. 

567. What occurred at St. Albans, Vermont, on the 
19th of October, 1864? 

568. Describe the attempt of Confederate emissaries to 
burn New York. 

569. What was the Alabama? What damage did 
she do? 

570. When, where, and with what result was the en- 
counter between the Kearsarge and the Alabama ? 

571. AVhat other interesting naval operation occurred 
during this year ? 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 27 

572. At the close of 1864, what was the political condi- 
tion of the North ? 

573. What was gold worth in greenback currency ? 

574. What were the Confederate victories during this 
year ? 

575. What were the Union victories ? 

1865. 

576. What was the plan of the campaign for 1865 ? 

577. What were the movements of Gen. Sherman? 

578. Describe the siege of Richmond. 

579. Describe the battle of Five Forks. 

580. What effect had this brilliant victory ? 

581. Describe the capture of Petersburg and Richmond. 

582. When and to whom did Lee and Johnston sur- 
render ? 

583. When was Jefferson Davis captured, and how? 
What was done with him ? 

584. How long did the war last ? 

585- When and by whom was Abraham Lincoln assas- 
sinated ? 

586. What became of Booth ? 

587. Give an account of the attack on Secretary Seward. 

588. W^ho w^ere the accomplices of Booth, and what 
became of them ? 

589. What was the total number of troops called for? 
The total number obtained ? 

590. How many men were lost in the war ? 

591. What was the cost of the war ? 

592. How was slavery abolished in the United States ? 

593. After the death of President Lincoln, who then 
became President? When was he inaugurated? 

594. What caused trouble between Johnson and Con- 
ess? 

595. What were the most important bills passed over 
the President's veto ? 

596. What is the nature of these bills ? 

597. For what was Johnson impeached ? 

598. Wliat is the fourteenth amendment to the Consti- 
tution ? When adopted ? 

599. What demand was made by the United States 
government of France ? 

600. What States were added to the Union during the 
war ? 



28 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

601. What was the Reconstruction Policy of Johnson? 

602. When was Universal Amnesty declared ? 

603. What was the Reconstruction Folic/ of Congress? 

604. What was the " iron-clad oath "? Who were called 
" carpet-baggers "? 

605. How long was the government in establishing its 
reconstruction policy ? 

606. What proclamation was issued by Johnson in re- 
gard to the Fenians ? 

607. How was Alaska obtained ? 

608. What treaty was made with China? What de- 
mand was made of the French government ? 

609. When was the Atlantic cable completed ? 

610. What was the political situation ? 

grant's administration — 1869-1877. 

611. When was the U. P. R. R. completed? How far 
is it from New York to San Francisco ? 

612. When was the fifteenth amendment formally an- 
nounced ? 

613. What is the nature of this amendment? 

614. Describe the important conflagrations of 1871-2. 

615. What was the difficulty with England? How 
settled ? 

616. How was the dispute regarding the northwestern 
boundary between the United States and British America 
settled ? 

617. What was the proposed annexation of San 
Domingo ? 

618. At the close of Grant's first term, what was the 
political condition ? 

619. Give a short history of Horace Greeley. 

620. Describe the difficulties with the Modoc Indians. 

621. Describe the Railroad Panic of 1873. 

^ 622. What Centennial Anniversaries were observed 
with great enthusiasm ? 

623. Describe the main features of the Centennial Ex- 
hibition of 1876. 

624. What was the war with the Sioux Indians ? What 
terrible defeat occurred ? 

625. In 1876, who were nominated by their respective 
parties for President? 

626. What was the result of the general election ? 

627. How was Rutherford B. Hayes elected President ?' 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 29 

628. What was the feeUng among the people m regard 
to the settlement of this question ? 

629. When Samuel J. Tilden was asked if his party 
should stand by his election, what reply did he make? 

HAYES' ADMINISTRATION — 1877-1881. 

630. What promise was made by Hayes in regard to 
" rotation in office "? 

631. What was President Hayes' Southern Policy? 

632. What railroad strike occurred in 1877 ? 

633. What is the Bland Silver BiU? 

634. Describe the yellow fever of 1878. 

635. When was the resumption of specie payments ? 

636. What Indian difficulties in 1879? 

637. In 1880, what was the population of the United 
States? 

638. What were the Fishery Awards ? 

639. What was the treaty with China in 1880 ? 

640. Was President Hayes' administration favorable to 
his party ? 

641. Who were nominated for President to succeed 
President Hayes? 

642. What were the principal issues between the Repub- 
lican and Democratic parties ? 

643. What were the principles advocated by the Green- 
back-Labor party? 

GARFIELD AND ARTHUR'S ADMINISTRATION. 

644. W^hen was Garfield inaugurated President ? 

645. What gigantic scheme of fraud was detected in the 
Post-office Department ? Were these frauds punished ? 

646. When was President Garfield assassinated? 

647. What was the feeling of the country in regard to 
this assassination ? What became of Charles J. Guiteau ? 

648. What testimony of deep respect was shown by 
the Queen of England to Mrs. Garfield ? 

649. When did Chester A. Arthur become President of 
the United States? 

650. What was the extent of the disastrous flood in 
the Mississippi Valley in 1882 ? 

651. Describe the Brooklyn bridge. 

652. What is the Civil Service Bill? When passed? 
653.' When was letter postage reduced from three cents 

to two cents ? 



80 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

654. How was Alaska organized into a territory ? 

655. What important event occurred at New Orleans ? 

656 How was Chinese immigration regulated ? 

657 Who were nominated for President ? 

658. What were the chief issues discussed in this cam- 
paign ? 

659. What State held the deciding vote in this election ? 
What majority was given to decide this election ? 

660. What was the feeling of the people in regard to 
change of administration ? 

661. What were the principles advocated by the Pro- 
hibition party. 

Cleveland's administration — 1885-1889. 

662. Who were chosen for President Cleveland's Cabi- 
net? 

663. What political charges were made against Cleve- 
land's appointments? 

664. When did Gen. Grant die? What success did 
the sale of his book meet ? 

665. When did Vice President Hendricks die ? How 
many times has this office been made vacant by death ? 

666. W^hat other noted men died shortly after? 

667. How many post-offices were there in the United 
States in 1887 ? What is the extent of the post routes ? 

668. What is the extent of the cotton produced in the 
States ? 

669. What is the value of the woolen manufactures of 
this country? 

670. What is the length of our railroads ? Estimated 
valuation of cost and equipment ? 

671. What is the capacity of the model printing press 
of the present time ? 

672. What are some of the most noted inventions of 
which, our country can boast ? 

673. How many patents have been issued in a single 
year ? 

674. Of what can we boast in regard to the cause of 
education ? 

675. How many acres of land have been given by the 
general government to the States for educational purposes ? 

676. How inany colleges are there in the United States ? 

677. What is the cost of supporting our system' of free 
schools? How many children attend? 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 31 

678. Who was the first author to secure general recog- 
nition at home and abroad ? 

679. How many newspapers and periodicals are pub- 
lished ? 

680. Name some of the most noted American histori- 
ans, poets, writers of romance and miscellaneous matter. 
Orators. 

681. What notable events have occurred in 1886? 

682. What noted man died Dec. 26th, 1886? 

683. Name the Presidents in their order. How long in 
office? Who died in office? 

684. Which three ex-Presidents died on the 4th of 
July?^ 

685. What father and son were Presidents ? 

686. Name the rebellions which have occurred in our 
history ? 

687. When, where, and by whom were each of the 
States settled, and when admitted as a State? 

6S8. What are the acquisitions of territory to the United 
States? 

EVENTS OF 1887. 

689. When did Gen. W. B. Hazen die? What posi- 
tion did he occupy? 

690. What important commercial bill was passed by 
Congress in January of this year ? 

69 1 . What bill originated in the Senate in regard ta 
the Canadian fishery question? 

692. Which Cabinet officer resigned ? 



ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS 



ON 



United States History, 



1. A recital of what has happened respecting nations 
and countries. 

2. By Ancient and Modern, and these are divided into 
Civil, Sacred and Profane. 

3. An account of all the events that have taken place 
from the creation of the world to the birth of Christ. 

Accounts from the birth of Christ to the present time. 

It pertains to the rise and fall of the civil government of 
man, his empires, kingdoms and States. 

That which is contained in the Sacred Scriptures. 

The history of imaginary gods and heroes of antiquity. 
It is sometimes applied to any history not Sacred. 

4. The rise and fall of the four great empires: Assyria, 
Persia, Greece and Rome. 

5. By the great inventions which now govern our people, 
such as of gunpowder, the control of steam and electricity, 
the printing press and the thousands of devices which 
lead to the civilization and progress of mankind. 

6. Of course it is but a matter of conjecture who first 
settled America, but in all probability these settlers came 
from Asia by the way of Behring Straits in search of new 
adventures, or the coasting vessels of China may have 
been driven by storms and shipwrecked on the shores of 
the new continent, but nothing among the relics of antiquity 
shows from what source these people came. 

7. In Mexico and Central America there are ruins of 
ancient cities, which must have been erected during a high 
state of civilization, and the Indians have no traditions as 
to their origin. Thousands of curiously constructed earth 



34 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

mounds, which are scattered through the Mississippi River 
Valley, and from the gulf to the lakes, are evidences of a 
different race of men which inhabited the continent pre- 
vious to the Indians. 

8. The Mound Builders, although the mound relics 
would indicate that these builders were not of the same 
order of civilization as is represented in the Mexican 
and Peruvian ruins. 

9. The natural instincts of the Indians are opposed to 
the improvements of the arts and sciences. They detest 
work, glory in battle, and are content to live in their rude 
structures where fish and game abound. From these char- 
acteristics, which for two hundred years we know have 
remained the same, it would be but natural for us to look 
beyond this race of beings for those who have shown a 
marked degree of industry and civilization. 

10. The historical records of Iceland show that America 
was discovered by the Northmen in 1002. 

11. The inhabitants of Norway and Sweden. 

12. Their records, or traditions, describe the entire At- 
lantic coast, and the old tower at Newport, R. I., the in- 
scriptions on the rocks at Deighton, Mass., and minor 
other relics are evidences of their claims. But admitting 
these claims no benefits arose from them as the voyages 
were discontinued and the country forgotten. 

13. Six: First, from the discovery of the continent to 
the first settlement. Second, from the first settlement to 
the breaking out of the Revolutionary war. Third, from 
the commencement of this war to the adoption of the Con- 
stitution. Fourth, from the adoption of the Constitution 
to the commencement of the civil war. Fifth, from the 
beginning of this war to the surrender of Lee's army. 
Sixth, from the close of the rebelhon to some future period 
of more than ordinary importance. 

14. That the earth was round, and upon this belief 
Columbus attempted to find a near route to India. 

15. The island of Guanahani or San Salvador, on Fri- 
day, Oct. 12th, 1492. _ 

16. Columbus being too poor to fit out an expedition 
himself, first applied to his own countrymen for aid, and 
then to the king of Portugal. He next turned to Spain, and 
in the meantime sent his brother to England, but these 
people had no time to listen to a poor sailor at whom 
everybody laughed, and the children mocked him as he 
passed in the streets. Success came at last. Eighteen 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 35 

years had now passed since he conceived his great design, 
seven of which were spent in waiting for the answer of 
Ferdinand. Saddened by his continued faihires, he was 
leaving Spain, begging a little food at convent doors and 
resolving to apply to the king of France. At a lonely 
mountain pass he was overtaken by a messenger from the 
queen, Isabella, asking him to return to the capital. Urged 
by a desire to spreacl the Catholic faith throughout the 
world, and to see Spain the mistress of lands in Asia, the 
queen had changed her mind. To the cold objections of 
Ferdinand she nobly answered. " I undertake the enter- 
prise for my crown of Castile, and will pledge my jewels to 
raise the necessary funds." 

17. Three small vessels, the Pinta, Santa Maria and 
Nina, and sailed from Palos, Spain, August 3d, 1492. 

18. At the mouth of the Oronoco River, in 1498. Four. 

19. John Cabot and his son Sebastian, who discovered 
the coast of Labrador in 1497. 

20. A German, who published a description of the new 
world, suggested that it should be called America in honor 
of Americus Vespucius, who made great claims to the first 
discoveries. 

21. Others "were jealous of his successes; treachery was 
planned; false statements w^ere made; and he died without 
reward, almost broken-hearted. 

He was buried at Valladolid, Spain, where he remained 
until 1513; he w^as then transported to Seville; and again 
in 1536, his remains were removed to the city of Saint 
Domingo, Hayti, and there interred; but in 1796, they 
were taken to their final resting place, in the cathedral at 
Havana, with imposing ceremonies. 

22. The Spaniards, English, French and Dutch. 

23. The West Indies and southern part of the United 
States. 

They claimed the northern part of the United 
States and Canada, having explored the great lakes, the 
Mississippi River, from the falls of St. Anthony to the gulf, 
the Illinois, Wisconsin, Wabash, Maumee, Fox, and many 
other rivers. 

Having discovered and explored the Atlantic coast at 
various points, they claimed this vast territory, naming it 
Virginia, in honor of Elizabeth, the Virgin Queen. 

In New York, which they called the New Netherlands. 
These claims were based upon the explorations of Hudson. 

24. Columbus, Vespucci, De Leon, Balboa, Grijalvah, 



36 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

De Ayllon, De Narvaez, Magellan, De Soto and Melendez. 

25. He was a Spanish explorer, who, being a disgraced 
soldier, sought the glory of conquest to restore his tarnished 
reputation. He also went in search of a fountain, the ele- 
ments of which were supposed to restore youth to all who 
drank of its waters. He discovered Florida in 1512. 

26. He crossed the isthmus of Panama, and from the 
summit of the Andes discovered the Pacific Ocean, Sept. 
26th, 1513. 

27. Eeceiving a grant of Florida in 1528, he with 300 
men attempted its conquest, allured by the prospect of 
gold. The exploration proved a failure. Many perished 
while wandering in the swamps. After arriving at the 
Gulf of Mexico, they hurriedly constructed boats and put 
to sea; they were shipwrecked and De Narvaez was lost. 
Six years afterward, the only, survivors (four) reached the 
Spanish settlements on the Pacific coast. 

28. A Spanish nobleman, who invaded Florida in 1539,, 
with the prospect of gold and conquests. He discovered the 
Mississippi River, and was shortly after buried in its waters. 

29. By Grijalvah in 1518. 

30. He was sent out by Philip II in 1565, to colonize 
Florida, but more particularly to destroy a colony, of 
French Protestants, called Huguenots, who the year before 
had made a settlement near the mouth of the St. John's- 
River. On being attacked the Huguenots put to sea in 
their vessels, but a furious storm destroyed their fleet and 
they were washed ashore, where Melendez brutally butch- 
ered all who came near him — only a few escaped. 

In 1520 Vasquez de Ayllon, a wealthy Spaniard, under- 
took an expedition to America, and, landing on the pres- 
ent coast of South Carolina, decoyed a number of natives 
on board his fleet and sailed for home, intending to sell 
them in Europe as slaves, but three of his vessels were 
wrecked and most of the Indians were drowned. On 
reaching home he was honorably received by his govern- 
ment and sent on another kidnapping expedition, but 
being unsuccessful, De Ayllon was financially ruined, and 
thus ended the first attempt to enslave the Indians, who^ 
by this treachery, lost all confidence in Spanish honor. 

Magellan was the first European to sail upon the Pacific 
and the first to sail around the world. This voyage took 
nearly three years, 1519- to 1521. The Pacific was named 
by Magellan on account of its calm and peaceful appear- 
ance when first traversed. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 37 

31. At Darien, by the Spaniards in 1510. 

32. At St. Augustine, in 1565, by Melendez, a Spaniard. 
The second was also founded by the Spaniards, at Santa 
Fe, in 1582. 

33. Central America, Mexico, Peru, Florida, the Mis- 
sissippi valley, New Mexico and the coast of California. 

34. Sir Walter Raleigh and Sir Humphrey Gilbert. 
Their labors were unsuccessful. 

35. At Jamestown, Virginia, in 1607. 

36. The London Company, composed of noblemen, 
gentlemen, and merchants of London. 

37. All of the country between the southern limit of 
Maryland and Cape Fear. 

38. Three: the first charter contained no idea of self- 
government. The people chose none of their officers; the 
king was to appoint two councils; one to reside in London, 
and have control of all the colonies, and the other to reside 
in each colony, and have control of its local affairs. The 
second charter vested the authority in a governor instead 
of a local council; this change gave the colonists no ad- 
ditional rights, neither were they consulted with regard to 
the change. The third charter gave the stockholders power 
to regulate the affairs of the company themselves. 

39. Verrazani and Cartier. Verrazani was sent out by 
the French king in 1524. He first touched the coast at 
North Carolina and explored as far north as Newfoundland, 
having entered the harbors of New York and Newport. In 
1534, James Cartier discovered and explored the Gulf and 
River of St. Lawrence. 

. 40. The Cabots, Sir Francis Drake, Sir Humphrey 
Gilbert, Sir Walter Raleigh, Bartholomew Gasnold, Martin 
Pring, and George Waymouth. 

41. Jt was composed of persons fi^om Plymouth, in the 
west of England. 

The grant was that tract of country lying between the 
forty-first and forty-fifth degrees of latitude. This was 
called North Virginia. 

42. Columbus was the first Spanish, John Verrazani 
the first French, John Cabot the first English, and Hudson 
the first Dutch discoverer. 

43. At New York in 1613. At Port Royal, Nova Scotia, 
in 1605. 

44. At the temporary settlement on the island of 
Roanoke, in 1587. Virginia Dare. 

45. The tract lying between the present cities of Phila- 



88 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

clelphia and Montreal. The name has since been confined 
to New Brunswick and the adjacent islands. 

46. He was an English sea captain who explored the 
coast of California and Oregon in 1579, and returned home 
by the way of Cape of Good Hope, having made the 
second voyage around the world. 

47. Virginia, in honor of Elizabeth, who was called the 
Virgin Queen. 

48. A famous pioneer, who in 1609 discovered Lakes 
Champlain and Huron. He afterwards led a party of 
Canadian Indians against the Iroquois, in northern New 
York, which region he was the first white man to enter. 

49. They were French Priests, who sought to convert 
the Indians to the Catholic faith; they were the explorers 
of the Mississippi valley. In 1668, they founded the mis- 
sion of St. Mary, the oldest European settlement in Michi- 
gan. 

50. Joliet and Marquette. 

51. They were Jesuit Missionaries, and early explorers 
of the northern lakes and rivers. 

52. Henry Hudson, in 1609, who sailed up the river 
116 miles, to where the city of Hudson now stands. 

53. To find a northeast passage to the East Indies. 

54. In 1610, after discovering the strait and bay which 
bears his name, he was placed in an open boat by his com- 
panions and abandoned. 

55. The New Netherlands. 

56. The English and Dutch. The English based their 
claims upon the discoveries of the Cabots, "and the Dutch 
upon the discoveries of Hudson. 

57. By force of arms. The English maintained posses- 
sion. 

58. The Spanish settlements of St. Augustine and 
Santa Fe. 

59.' Port Roval, N. S., in 1605, by the French James- 
town, in 1H07, by the English. Quebec, in 1608, by the 
French. New York, in 1613, by the Dutch. Plymouth, 
in 1620, by the English Puritans. 

60. They were a religious denomination not in sym- 
pathy with the Church of England, and in order to wor- 
ship in accordance with their creed they went to Holland, 
but believing in the future prosperity of the New World, 
decided to face all hardships and danger and found a 
colony where they would be free from all restraint and un- 
molested in their religious devotions. They landed at 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 89 

Plymouth, December 21st, 1620, which was the first settle- 
ment founded in Massachusetts. 

61. One hundred and two. They came in a vessel 
called the iMay Flower. 

62 John Carver. 

63. Nearly one-half of the number died during the first 
four months, and all would have perished but for the aid 
of fishermen oft' the coast. Their sufferings continued four 
years, after which they were prosperous. 

64. A Puritan, who for liberal religious opinions was 
banished from Massachusetts. He afterward formed the 
first settlement in Rhode Island. This was in 1636. 

65. The Quakers were banished from the colony^ many 
were imprisoned, and four put to death. 

66. During the year in which Roger Williams was 
banished, this woman declared that she had special revela- 
tions from God, and with great fluency of speech ex- 
pounded them to crowded congregations of women, causing 
much disturbance among the clergy and people. They 
finally banished her from the settlement. 

67. In 1643, the colonies of Massachusetts Bay, Plym- 
outh, New Haven and Connecticut, were formed into a 
general league, or one government. 

68. To protect themselves against the Indians and the 
encroachments of the French and Dutch. 

69. When Roger Williams escaped from the hands of 
the Puritans he fled to Rhode Island and took refuge 
among the Indians. Canonicus, the Narragansett Chief, 
gave him land to found a settlement, which he gratefully 
named Providence. 

70. By the Dutch, in 1620. 

71. One of the founders of Jamestown who succeeded 
RatclifFe, and governed the affairs of the colony with great 
energy and success. 

72. The daughter of the Indian chief, Powhatan. She 
saved the life of Capt. John Smith, who had been sentenced 
to death by her father. 

78. She married a young English planter, John Rolf. 
Three years after she visited London, was takeii sick and 
died. She left an infant son, whose posterity are many 
of the leading families of Virginia. 

74. In 1608, to Jamestown. 

75. Indian corn, potatoes and tobacco. 

76. In 1609, but the massacre was prevented by Poca- 
hontas, who revealed the plot to the people of Jamestown. 



40 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

77. In 1622, when in one hour 347 men, women and 
children were massacred. The second was in 1644, when 
300 were killed; this plot was originated by Opechancan- 
ough, and was intended to exterminate the English settlers. 

78. A patriotic young lawyer, who rallied a company 
and defended the settlements against the Indians; he was 
denounced by Governor Berkley as a traitor for acting with- 
out orders. During the contest which followed, Berkley 
was driven out of Jamestown, and the village burned. In 
the midst of this struggle Bacon died. 

79. At Jamestown, June 28, 1619. It consisted of the 
governor, council and deputies or "burgesses," chosen from 
the various plantations. 

80. Massachusetts, Plymouth, Rhode Island and Con- 
necticut. 

81. The war commenced in 1675, continuing about one 
year. King Phillip was an Indian chief, the son of Mas- 
sasoit; he became jealous of the intrusion of the whites, 
and planned a confederation of the Indian tribes against 
their intruders. He. was shot by an Indian, an ally of the 
EngHsh, in 1676. 

82. In 1660, the British Parliament ordered that the 
commerce of the colony should be carried on in English 
vessels, and their tobacco and all other products shipped 
to England. In fact, American manufactures were pro- 
hibited, and nothing allowed to be done that would enter 
into competition with the people of England. 

83. These laws bore very heavily on the people causing 
great discontent, and were one of the causes which led to 
the revolution. 

84. It was not, and an officer was sent to enforce the 
act, but without success. Charles II. seized upon the ex- 
cuse thus offered, and made Massachusetts a royal province. 
The King died before his plan was completed, but James 
II, in 1686, declared the charters of all the New England 
colonies forfeited. 

85. The first royal governor of New England. He was 
sent by James II. The colonies endured his oppressions 
for three years, when learning that his royal master was 
dethroned, they rose against him, and he was put in jail. 

86. When James II. declared that the charters of all 
the New England colonies were forfeited, Connecticut re- 
fused to surrender hers. Governor Andros demanded the 
charter of the assembly then in session at Hartford, and 
during the debate which ensued, the lights were suddenly 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



41 



■extinguished, the charter was seized by William Wads- 
worth" and hidden in the hollow of an old oak, which, since 
that time has been called the " Charter Oak." 

87 The second royal governor of Massachusetts, or a 
province embracing Massachusetts, Maine and Nova Scotia. 

88 A superstition prevailed that persons Avere subject 
to the control of invisible evil spirits, and it^is the received 
opinion that 200 persons were accused, 150 imprisoned, 28 
condemned, 19 hanged, and one pressed to death. 

89. The Indians had become troublesome and danger- 
ous to the earlv settlers of Connecticut, who resolved to 
make war upon the Pequots. The battle took place at 
Myotic River, where the tribe was annihilated; those who 
were not killed were captured and made slaves, or escaped 
and joined other tribes. 

90. New Amsterdam. 

91. It was purchased of the Manhattan Indians tor 

about S24. xi. av^.+ 

92 After the discovery of the Hudson Kiver, the \\ Cbt 
India Company obtained of the Dutch government a grant 
of New Netherlands, and settlements were made at New 
Amsterdam and Fort Orange (Albany). For twenty yeai^s 
New York was subject to Indian butcheries, varied by 
difficulties with the Swedes on the Delaware, and the J^ng- 
Hsh on the Connecticut. In September, 1664, an English 
fleet came to anchor in the harbor of New Amsterdam, 
find demanded the surrender of the town. Peter fetuyve- 
sant, the last and the ablest of the four Dutch governors, 
plead with the council to fight, but in vaim They wished 
for Eno-lish rule. The surrender was signed, and the 
colony was named New York. The English governors did 
not satisfy the people, so that when, after nine years of 
English rule, a Dutch fleet appeared m the harbor, the 
people went back quietly under their old i'^;^lers. Ihe next 
year peace was declared between England and Holland, 
and New Amsterdam became New York again Andros 
now became governor, and New York was a royal province 
until the revolution. ^r ^oo 

93. In 1636, by a company of persons from Massa- 
chusetts, with their minister, Mr. Hooker Their settle- 
ments were at Windsor, Hartford and W^^^^^f ^^f.^^^^^^ 
94 By the Rev. Mr. AVheelright, and a few followers 
who were also banished from Massachusetts on account ot 
their religion. . ^„^ 

95. It was made by Ferdinand Georges m Ibdb. 



42 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

96. From the hostilities of the Indians. 

97. Because of the treachery of the early discoverers 
and explorers. Several attempts were made by the whites 
to kidnap them and take them to Europe as slaves. By 
various means of deceit and dishonesty the Indians sought 
revenge in their annoying hostilities. 

98. It was founded in 1683, by William Penn, who pur- 
chased the land of the Swedes; the name signifies brotherly 
love. 

99. A Quaker, who with a band of followers settled in 
Pennsylvania in 1682, buying the lands of the Indians. 

100. To secure for the friends of this church a catholic 
refuge from the persecutions which they were then suffer- 
ing in England. 

101. The Virginia colonies claimed that Lord Balti- 
more's grant covered territory belonging to them. Clay- 
borne, a member of the Jamestown council, having estab- 
lished two trading-posts in Maryland, prepared to defend 
by force of arms. 

On the eve of the battle he fled to Virginia, and his 
party was defeated. Clayborne was tried for treason, but 
acquitted. Ten years afterward he came back, raised a re- 
bellion, and drove Calvert (Lord Baltimore) then governor 
of Maryland, out of the colony; Calvert returned with a 
large force, and Clayborne fled. 

102. The Protestants having obtained a majority in the 
assembly, 'excluded Catholics from their rights; assailed 
their religion; and even declared them outside the pro- 
tection of the law. Civil war ensued. At one time two 
governments were sustained, one Protestant and the other 
Catholic. In 1691, Lord Baltimore was entirely deprived 
of his rights as proprietor, and Maryland became a royal 
province. In 1715, the fourth Lord Baltimore recovered 
the government, and religious toleration was again restored. 

103. To the Roman Catholics of Maryland. 

104. By the Swedes and Finns, in 1630, near the en- 
trance of Delaware Bay, where they laid the founda- 
tion of Lewiston, the oldest town in the State. After a 
few years, Stuyvesant, the governor of New Netherlands, 
conquered their colony. 

105. King William's war in 1689, Queen Anne's in 1702, 
and King George's in 1744. 

106. In 1689 war broke out in Europe between England 
and France. The contest extended to the American, 
colonies, and lasted seven years. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 43 

107 The war lasted eleven years; the New England 
frontier was again desolated; remote settlements were 
abandoned; the people betook themselves to palisaded 
houses, and worked their farms with their gmis always at 

^To's They were not. The only event of importance 
was the capture of Louisburg, on the island of Cape 
Breton. Peace being established, England gave back 
Louisbura; to the French. _ i -n t t 

109. they assisted the French agamst th(f English. 

110. Virginia, Massachusetts, Connecticut and New 
York. 

111. Pennsylvania. 

112. William Penn's treaty with the Indians. 

113 Virginia, New York, New Jersey, Massachusetts, 
New Hampshire, Maryland, Connecticut, Rhode Island, 
Delaware, Pennsylvania, North Carolina, South Carolina, 

and Georgia. ^ ^ -, . i Tvr • 

114. Harvard was founded at Cambridge, Mass., m 
1638; Yale at New Haven, Conn , in 1701. ^ , ,. . , 

115 It was the Boston News Letter, and was estabhshed 
in 1704, by Bartholomew Green. John Campbell was the 
first American editor. 

116 The supposed negro plot, the plan being to burn 
New York and make one of their number governor. Many 
innocent persons suffered death. -, x t a 

117 A minister who labored among the Indians, anxl 
for his devotion was called the Indian Apostle; he also 
translated the Bible into the Indian language. 

118 He was a man sent out by England to suppress 
piracv in 1696, but turned pirate himself; he was captured 
m Boston in 1699, sent to England, condemned and exe- 

^^ 119. By a colony from Virginia in 1650, near Albe- 
marle Sound. 

120. In 1689, at Charleston. 

121. Cotton and rice. 

122. By Mr. Oglethorpe, in 1732, who commenced a 
settlement where Savannah now stands. 

123. In honor of George II., the king of England. 

124. From En^^land, though there were considerable 
numbers of the Dutch, French, Scotch Irish, Swedes and 

Germans. , . ,y^„^ v.^vir- 

125. The Dutch were most numerous m New York, 
the French, in New York and South Carolina; the Scotch 



44 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

and Irish, in East Jersey, the Carohnas and Georgia; the 
Swedes, on the Delaware; the Germans, in Pennsylvania 
and North Carolina. 

126. In New England they were engaged in farming, 
lumbering, manufacturing, ship-building, and fisheries. 
The Middle States chiefly farming. In Virginia and Mary- 
land farming, tobacco being the staple. In Georgia and 
Carolina, rice near the coast and farming on the high lands. 
Cotton was cultivated on a very small scale. 

127. The\3olony of Massachusetts. Boston. 

128. Boston and New York had about 18,000 each. 
Philadelphia about 25,000. 

129. The water communication, through Chesapeake 
Bay and many large rivers, brought ships almost directly 
in communication with the plantations, which facilitated 
the exchange of one product for another, and the colonists 
did not collect in large towns. 

130. Mainly by exchange or barter. 

131. In Virginia, for a long time, tobacco was used as 
money; in New England wampum, made of shells; in 
New York, beaver-skins. 

132. English — pounds, shillings and pence. 

133. By the demand for money in the Revolution. 

134. It was exceedingly simple. The people did 
their own weaving and made their own clothing, and all 
were required by law to dress within their means. Their 
food was simple but abundant, and their houses were 
mostly log cabins. Everything had the appearance of 
simplicity, industry and thrift. 

135. The population professed Christianity, though dif- 
fering greatly in beliefs. In Maryland, Catholics were nu- 
merous; in Virginia and South Carolina, the Church of 
England (Episcopal); in New England the people were 
Calvinistic in doctrine and Congregational in practice; 
while in New York the Dutch Reform was supreme. The 
Quakers predominated in Pennsylvania, Delaware, Rhode 
Island and New Jersey. Roger Williams established at 
Providence the first Baptist Church in America. The 
French Protestants, or Huguenots, were found in consider- 
able numbers in New York and Carolina. 

136. A war of sects was waged in several of the col- 
onies. The people forgot their ideas of tolerance and 
religious equality when power came to them. " New Eng- 
land Protestants appealed to Liberty; then they closed the 
•doors against her." It was a sad, strange picture of life. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 45 

The Puritans imprisoned Baptists and executed Quakers. 
The Churchmen in Virginia banished Puritans and impris- 
oned Baptists. The Protestants of Maryland disfranchised 
the Catholics. But as years passed away, a more kind, 
tolerant spirit prevailed, and long before the end of the 
colonial period, the illiberal sentiment of persecution had 
passed away. 

137. They were all under the dominion of the Crown 
of England. 

138. Where the rule and the province was under some 
proprietor, the same being a grant to the individual or 
association by the king. Pennsylvania under William 
Penn, and Maryland under Lord Baltimore, are examples. 

139. Royal government was directly under the domin- 
ion of the Crown, through the appointment of some royal 
governor. 

Charter government was wdiere the colony was governed 
by some code of laws passed expressly for them and called 
a charter. This written instrument, given by the king, 
granted certain political rights and privileges. 

Voluntary association was where the people organized 
themselves into a government without authority or privi- 
lege of the Crown. 

140. The Salem Witchcraft and the Negro Plot of New 
York. 

141. Increase Mather, one of the early presidents of 
Harvard College, and his son Cotton Mather. 

Cotton Mather's ^^Magnnlia,^^ a religious history of New 
England, was the first important book written by a native 
of this country. 

142. It had great influence over the people, as many 
of the ministers were men of superior scholarship They 
did not deal wholly in religious dogmas; they led and 
inspired the people; they kept patriotism atiame; they 
watched the encroachments of British despotism, and 
moulded national character. 

143. In the year 1693 Parliament voted to establish 
post-offices in the colonies, and Thomas Neale was author- 
ized to transmit letters and packets " at such rates as the 
planters should agree to give." 

Over 54,000. 

144. Jonathan Edwards, the theologian; Benjamin 
Franklin, the philosopher and statesman; James Otis and 
Patrick Henry, the great orators. 

After the passage of the Stamp Act by Parliament, 



46 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

James Otis said: " To my dying day I will oppose, with all 
the powers and faculties God has given me, all such instru- 
ments of slavery on the one hand and villainy on the other." 
" Then and there," said John Adams, " the trumpet of the 
Kevolution was sounded." 

145. At Kaskaskie, in Illinois, ahout 1690. 

146. The cause was disputed territory, and the parties 
were the French and Indians against the English. 

147. West of the Alleghany Mountains, along the Ohio 
Eiver and the northern lakes. 

148. George Washington. 

149. After some successes Washington marched to a 
place called Great Meadows, where he built Fort Necessity. 
Early in July, 1755, the fort was attacked by the whole 
French and Indian force, but was defended with such 
resistance that the French commander, Count de Villiers, 
sent in a flag of truce. Washington gave up the fort, but 
was permitted to march away with all the honors of war. 

150. A vote of thanks was passed, and each soldier was 
to receive a pistole. 

151. Gen. Braddock with a select force of 1,200 men. 

152. When within a mile of Fort du Quesne he was 
surprised by a body of French and Indians in ambush. 
Braddock was mortally wounded, and nearly all his offi- 
cers and one-half of his troops were killed. Braddock 
was buried during the retreat, and Washington ordered 
the wagons to pass over his grave that his body might not 
fall into the hands of the Indians. 

153. Washington, although four bullets pierced his 
€oat and two horses were shot under him. 

154. It was Gen. Forbes who led this expedition. 
Washington commanded the Virginia troops. After the 
capture of the fort it received the name of Pittsburg, in 
honor of William Pitt. 

1 55. At Louisburg. Quebec, Crown Point and Niagara. 

156. The French forts at the head of Fundy Bay were 
quickly taken, and the region east of the Penobscot fell 
into the hands of the English. Gen. Loudoun planned an 
attack on Louisburg, but learning that the French fleet 
contained one more ship "than his own, gave it up. The 
next year Gens. Amherst and Wolf captured the city after 
a severe bombardment, and took possession of the entire 
island. 

157. The English under elohnson met the French com- 
manded by Dieskau, near the head of Lake George, where 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 47 

a battle was fought, the English being victorons. Johnson, 
after building a fort which he called William Henry, feared 
defeat if he attempted to take Crown Point, and returned 
to Albany. 

158. On a calm Sunday morning, about four months 
before the fall of Fort du Quesne, Gen. Abercrombie, with a 
thousand boats full of soldiers, with waving flags and mar- 
tial music, swept down Lake George to attack Ticonderoga . 
The result was a disastrous repulse. The next year, 1759, 
at the approach of Gen. Amherst with a large army, both 
Ticonderoga and Crown Point were evacuated. 

159. When Gen. Shirley reached Oswego, and hearing 
of the disastrous defeat of Brad dock he was discouraged, 
and after building a fort came home. Four years after 
Niagara surrendered to the English. 

160. Gen. Wolf commanded the English, and Gen. 
Montcalm the French. 

161. Gen. Wolf, while reconnoitering, observed a narrow 
path winding among the rocks to the top. At night he 
descended the river, his men landed, climbed the steep 
cliff, seized the guards, and at break of day he stood 
with his entire army drawn up in order of battle on the 
plains of Abraham; a desperate battle ensued; five days 
after the city surrendered. 

162. Gens. W^olf and Montcalm. Wolf, when informed 
that the French were running, exclaimed: '• Now God be 
praised; I die happy!" Montcalm, when told that he could 
not live more than twelve hours, replied: " So much the 
better ; I shall not see the surrender of Quebec." 

163. France gave up all the territory west of the Mis- 
sissippi, except two small islands south of Newfoundland, 
retained as fishing stations. In this treaty Spain ceded 
Florida to England, and France ceded to Spain New 
Orleans, and all the territory she owned west of the Missis- 
sippi. 

164. When the English took possession of the western 
forts great discontent arose, for the French had won 
the hearts of the Indians. Pontiac, a chief of the Ottawas, 
formed a confederation of the tribes against the English. 
Eight forts were surprised and captured, thousands of per- 
sons fled fi'om their homes to avoid the scalping-knife. By 
a disagreement among the Indians the confederation was 
broken and a treaty signed. 

165. The capture of Quebec, the 13th of September, 
1759. 



48 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

166. It cost the colonists $16,000,000, and England 
repaid only 15,000,000. They lost thirty thousand men; 
they suffered the untold horrors of Indian barbarity; taxes 
were sometimes equal to two-thirds of the income of the 
tax-payers; they learned to think and act independently 
of the mother country. 

167. About 2,000,000 people. Boston and New York 
contained about 18,000 inhabitants each; Philadelphia, 
nearly 25,000. 

168. The colonies were .unjustly taxed, and not allowed 
the right of sending representatives to Parliament. 

169. Warrants authorizing the king's officers to search 
for smuggled goods. This gave the custom-house officers 
power to enter a man's house or store at pleasure. The 
colonists resisted such power as a violation of their rights. 

170. That all bonds, deeds, newspapers, pamphlets, 
etc., should be stamped. It was passed by Parliament in 
1765. 

171. A Virginian, who with boldness and eloquence 
distinguished himself by his opposition to the Stamp Act. 

172. A duty was laid on all tea, glass, paper, and 
painters' colors, which should be imported. 

173. In order to resist the Stamp Act, associations 
called the " Sons of Liberty " were organized and dele- 
gates from nine of the colonies met at New York and 
framed a Declaration of Rights, and a petition to the king 
and Parliament. The first of November was the date 
appointed for the law to go into effect, and on that day the 
people set aside all business, bells were tolled, flags at half- 
mast, and stirring speeches by the great orators of the times 
aroused the people over the whole land. 

174. That the colonies should furnish the soldiers with 
quarters and necessary supplies. This act aroused the indig- 
nation of the Americans. To be taxed was bad enough, but 
to shelter and feed their oppressors was unendurable. 

175. Vessels containing nearly 350 chests of tea were 
boarded by Americans disguised as Indians, and the tea 
was thrown into the harbor. 

176. An act of Parliament forbidding the landing of 
goods in Boston. 

177. A small guard of soldiers passing through the 
streets of Boston were so exasperated by the jeers and 
taunts of a crowd of men and boys, that they fired, killing 
three persons and wounding several others. 

178. The first Continental Congress was held at Phila- 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 49 

delphia, Sept. 5th, 1774. They voted not to obey the recent 
acts of Parliament ; they protested against standing armies 
being kept in the colonies without consent of the people ; 
they sustained Massachusetts in her resistance, and agreed 
to hold no intercourse with Great Britain. 

179. Because it was the rendezvous of the Revolutionary 
patriots. Great speeches were made in this hall for the 
cause of freedom, and it has ever been cherished as the 
" Cradle of Liberty." This hall is in Boston. 

180. Public feeling was generally against the colonies. 
" Every man," wrote Dr. Franklin, '' seems to consider him- 
self as a piece of a sovereign over America ; seems to jostle 
himself into the throne with the king, and talks of our sub- 
jects in the colonies." 

181. They were not. Those who still believed in Roy- 
alty were termed Tories, and those against as Whigs. 

182. A daring patriot, who at the outbreak of the Revo- 
lution performed valuable services in rousing the people in 
the country and villages. 

183. Gen. Gage. 

184. At Lexington, near Boston, April 19th, 1775. 

185. Gen, Gage, learning that the people were gather- 
ing military stores at Concord, sent eight hundred men to 
destroy them ; at Lexington a skirmish ensued, in which 
seven Americans were killed. After destroying the stores, 
they hastily retreated, followed by the militia, who were 
eager to avenge the death of their countrymen. In their 
retreat to Boston they lost nearly three hundred men. 

186. The effect was like wild-fire; American blood had 
been shed; patriots came pcuring in from all sides. Grey- 
headed men sent their boys to battle. The hearts of the 
wives and mothers were filled with the inspirations of 
liberty, and all were ready to join in the great declaration 
of Patrick Henry: '^ Give me liberty or give me death." 

187. A farmer who, when notified of the battle of Lex- 
ington, immediately left his plow, mounted his horse, rode 
to Bcston, a distance of 100 miles, without leaving his 
saddle. His great courage and patriotism was of vast assist- 
ance to the cause of freedom. He was familiarly known 
as " Old Put." 

188. The story of his entering a wolf's den and shooting 
the animal by the glare of his eyes, is known to every school- 
boy, but serves to shew his love of bold adventure. At 
Fort Edwards he alone, when all others had fled, saved a 
magazine containing three hundred barrels of gunpowder 



60 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

from approaching flames; he was terribly burned. In one 
encounter he received fourteen bullet holes in his clothing. 
The British offered him money if he would desert the Ameri- 
cans, but nothing could buy his honor or his patriotism. 
Bold, fearless and patriotic, he stands in American history 
as one of the grand lights in American independence, 

189. On Breed's Hill, June 17th, 1775. It was the 
intention of Gen. Ward, who had command of the patri- 
ots, to fortify Bunker Hill in the night, but by some mis- 
take Breed's 'Hill was selected, and was so near Boston that 
the sentinel's " All's well !" was distinctly heard. At day- 
light the British were startled by seeing the redoubt which 
had been constructed, and the officers immediately decided 
to drive them from their position. Three thousand troops 
under Gen. Howe were formed into line and slowly as- 
cended the hill. No move was made by the patriots until 
the British were within ten rods, when Prescott shouted 
" Fire!" A blaze of light shot from the redoubt, and whole 
ranks of the enemy fell. The survivors, unable to endure 
the terrible slaughter, broke and fled. 

The second charge was but a repetition of the first, 
but on the third the ammunition of the patriots became 
exhausted and they were driven from the field. 

190. Gen. Howe of the British army, and of the Amer- 
icans it is uncertain who commanded, but it is thought by 
some to have been Prescott. The British force was 8,000, 
loss 1,000; the American force 1,500, loss 450. 

191. Gen. Warren. This gallant soldier was among 
the last to leave the field of battle, and while trying to 
rally the troops a British officer who knew him, seized a 
musket and shot him dead. 

192. The effect was that of a victory, as their untrained 
farmer-soldiers had met the well-trained troops of the Brit- 
ish, had repulsed them twice with great slaughter, and but 
for the lack of ammunition would have been victorious. 

193. Ticonderoga and Crown Point. 

194. Ethan Allen and Benedict Arnold. 

195. " I demand it in the name of the Great Jehovah 
and the Continental Congress." 

196. During a controversy between New Hampshire 
and New York, over lands claimed by each party, Col. 
Ethan Allen became conspicuous in the cause of New 
Hampshire, and the recruits under him were called the 
" Green Mountain Boys." It is now applied to soldiers of 
Vermont. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 51 

197. It assembled May 10th, 1775, when they voted to 
raise and equip 20,000 men, and give the command to Gen. 
Washington. It was again convened at Philadelphia in 
May, 1776. 

198. June 15th, 1775. His force was 14,000 men. 

199. They were unsuccessful, suffering a defeat at Quebec, 
where Gen. Montgomery, the American general, was killed. 

200. By sending a force at night to fortify Dorchester 
Heights. These overlook Boston, and Howe, remember- 
ing the lesson of Bunker Hill, decided to leave. The next 
day, March 18th, Washington entered amid great rejoicing. 

201. June 28th, a British fleet under Admiral Parker 
opened fire on Fort Moultrie. The response from Moul- 
trie's guns was so fearful that the fleet was badly shattered 
and they withdrew and sailed for New York. 

202. Early in tho action the flagstaff was struck by a 
ball ; Jasper leaped over the breastworks, caught up the 
flag, and springing back tied it to a sponge staff, and 
hoisted it in its place. 

203. Richard Henry Lee, of Virginia, June 7, 1776. 

204. Thomas Jefferson, John Adams, Benjamin Frank- 
lin, Roger Sherman, and Robert R. Livingston„ 

205. July 4th, 1776. 

206. That the thirteen United States of America were 
free and independent. 

207. August 2d, 1776, by all the members of Congress, 
numbering fifty-six. 

208. That articles of government should be drawn. 

209. Articles of Confederation, and were to take effect 
when ratified by all the States. 

210. No ; delays and objections arose, but they were 
established in March, 1781. 

211. Rhode Island. 

212. Because it gave no real power to congress, which 
body could only recommend what should be done. Congress 
could borrow money, but was not empowered to pay it; 
could declare war and determine how many troops should 
be raised, but could not levy taxes to defray expenses, nor 
compel the States to raise the troops. 

213. August 27th, 1776, the Americans being compelled 
to withdraw, closely pursued by the British under Gen. 
Howe. 

214. North by way of Harlem, White Plains and 
Chester, then southwest through New Jersey to the Penn- 
sylvania side of the Delaware River. 



52 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

215. October 28th, 1776, neither side being victorious, 
although Washington retreated when the British received 
reinforcements. 

216. They were discouraged and heartsick. In the 
three weeks' retreat of Washington the soldiers were poorly 
clad, barefooted, and often their blood-stained footprints 
were left on the frozen ground. It was a season of great 
adversity, and tried the patriotism of the new government. 
Many people of wealth and influence went over to the 
enemy. 

217. He crossed the Delaware December 28th, pro- 
ceeded to Trenton, captured one thousand Hessians and a 
large quantity of arms, with the loss of only four men, 
two killed and two frozen to death. 

218. This was the great feat of the Revolution. The 
effect was electrical. It aroused the drooping spirits of 
the army and people. Recruits flocked to the standard of 
Liberty, and the troops whose term of enlistment had ex- 
pired, agreed to remain. Such brilliant achievements of 
Washington astonished the British commander, and Corn- 
wallis, who was about to return to England, under the im- 
pression that the rebels had been subdued, was ordered to 
return and prepare for a winter's campaign. 

219. Knowing that the Germans regarded this day as 
one of great festivities, he believed they would not expect 
an attack, and in the midst of their carousals could be 
surprised and routed. 

220. December 8th, 1776, by Sir Peter Parker. 

221. There were three, one of 35,000 men, under Gen. 
Howe, whose headquarters were in New York ; one of 7,000 
in Canada, under Sir Guy Carleton, and one of 5,000 in 
Rhode Island, commanded by Gen. Prescott. 

222. The battle of Princeton, Jan. 3d, 1777, which was 
one of the hottest fought battles during the whole war. 
The Americans were successful. That night Washington 
left his camp-fires burning to deceive the enemy, and jby a 
circuitous route passed the British, fell upon the troops 
near Princeton, routed them, took three hundred prisoners, 
and by rapid marches reached Morristown Heights in 
safety. 

223. He was urged by other officers to attack Washing- 
ton that night, but believing it an impossibility for him to 
escape, he declined, saying he could " catch the fox in the 
morning." At daybreak the sound of cannon in the direc- 
tion of Princeton aroused Gen. Erskine, who exclaimed. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 53 

*' To arms, General ! Washington has outgeneraled us ; let 
US fly to the rescue at Princeton !" 

224. He declared that the achievements of Washington 
and his little band, during the six weeks following Christ- 
mas, were the most brilliant recorded on the pages of mili- 
tary history. 

225. But little of importance transpired. Howe waited 
for an attack, but finding Washington apparently on the de- 
fensive set out to force an engagement, which by the adroit 
movements of the Americans was prevented. Finding 
these attempts unsuccessful, Howe suddenly changed his 
plans and embarked eighteen thousand men on his 
brother's fleet and set sail for Chesapeake Bay. 

226. It numbered only . 11,000 men. But with this 
small army Washington resolved to hazard a battle for the 
defense of Philadelphia. 

227. Marquis de La Fayette. This noble sympathizer of 
American independence desired to render assistance, though 
not yet twenty years of age ; j ust married to a woman 
whom he tenderly loved; brilliant social prospects ; objec- 
tions of his family ; protestations of the British minister ; 
refusal of the king to grant permission. But still 
undaunted, he purchased a vessel with his own money, 
fitted it out and by evading the officers sent to detain hin^, 
crossed the ocean and hurried before Congress where he 
asked permission to serve as a volunteer without pay. 
This valor won for him a commission as Major-general 
before he was twenty-one. 

228. September 11th, 1777, Washington was defeated, 
retreating to Philadelphia. 

229. September 26th, 1777, without opposition. 

230. At Germantown, October 4th, meeting with a 
defeat, losing 1,200 men. 

231. The capture of the British General Prescott by 
Col. Barton, with forty select soldiers, who crossed from 
Warwick in the night to the island of Rhode, where the 
British army was encamped, proceeded to Gen. Prescott's 
lodgings, captured him and returned. 

232. To have an officer of equal rank to Gen. Lee, that 
they might exchange. 

It was. 

233. At Germantown. The winter was spent in such 
continued festivities that they were sadly demoralized. 
Because of this demoralization, Franklin said that " Howe 



54 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

has not taken Philadelphia so much as Philadelphia has 
taken Howe." 

234. A Quaker woman, who revealed to Washington a 
plot that the British had arranged to attack him at White 
Marsh. 

235. The brilliant achievements of the Americans in 
the north. 

236. Gen. Burgoyne with 10,000 British and Indian 
troops. 

237. He captured Forts Crown Point, Ticonderoga, 
Edward, and the supplies at Whitehall. These successes 
created general consternation among the people. Militia- 
men from the neighboring States were rapidly collected, 
and under the command of Lincoln, Arnold, and Morgan, 
were dispatched to check the advance of the British. 

238. Gen. Gates commanded the Americans, and Gen. 
Burgoyne the British. 

239. He sent a half-witted boy into the camp of the 
British, who spread the report that a large body of Amer- 
icans was close at hand. When asked their number, he 
could only answer by pointing to the leaves of the trees. 
The Indians and the British were so frightened that they 
fled immediately. 

240. As the British lines were forming for the attack, 
he exclaimed: "There are the red coats! We must beat 
them to-day, or Mollie Stark is a widow." They gained a 
victory, and took six hundred prisoners. 

241. The battles of Stillwater (Saratoga), Sept. 19th, 
and Oct. 7th, 1777; the Americans were successful. 

242. To Gen. Gates at Saratoga, Oct. I7th, 1777. 

243. That the British should give up their arms and 
ammunition, return to England, and engage no more in the 
war. 

244. Gen. Kosciusko, a Pole of noble birth. To per- 
petuate his memory a monument was raised at West 
Point. 

245. " Has he proved a coward or a traitor ? " " Worse 
than that," was the answer, " He has fallen, but while 
bravely fighting." "Ah !" said the father, " then I am sat- 
isfied." 

246. A plot, originating in Congress, to put Washington 
out of command of the army. When the people heard of 
it they were so indignant that those who proposed it were 
glad to sink into silence. 

247. They were adopted in November, 1777. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 55 

248. In Valley Forge. The men were encamped in 
cold, comfortless huts, with little or no clothing, many 
were barefooted, few had blankets, and straw conld not be 
obtained; sickness followed, and for want of suitable food 
and medicines many died. 

249. They sent commissioners with liberal proposals, 
but the day was past for any negotiation that did not rec- 
ognize them free and independent. 

250. " I am not w^orth purchasing; but such as I am, 
the King of Great Britain is not rich enough to buy me !" 

251. Benjamin Franklin, Silas Dean and Arthur Lee. 

252. At Paris, February 6th, 1778, and Avas ratified by 
Congress May 4th. 

258. A French fleet under Count cl'Estaing. 

254. About nine months, withdrawing their forces June 
18th, 1778. 

255. At Lancaster and York, Pennsylvania. 

256. June 28th, 1778, in the eastern part of New Jer- 
sey. Both parties claimed the victory, but the British 
withdrew their troops. The day was sultry and hot. 
During this battle an artilleryman was shot at his post. 
His wife, Mary Pitcher, saw him fall, and heard the com- 
mander order the piece to be removed from the field; she 
hastened to the cannon, seized the rammer, and with great 
skill and courage performed her husband's duty. 

257. She was voted a sergeant's warrant with half-pay 
through life. 

258. Gen. Lee, in conducting the attack, became alarmed 
and ordered a retreat, which threw the troops into con- 
fusion. Washington coming up ordered a halt, bitterly 
rebuked Lee, and by his personal influence rallied the 
men and sent them back against the enemy. Lee being 
thus rebuked, wrote indignant letters to Washington, who 
gave them to Congress, which body dismissed him from tlie 
army. Lee retired to his estate in Virginia and mourned 
over his conduct. 

259. A combined attack on Newport was agreed upon 
by Gen. Sullivan and Count d'Estaing with the French 
fleet. Soon after the arrival of d'Estaing in Narragansett 
Bay, Howe appeared off the harbor with the English fleet. 
An engagement Avas about to commence, when a terrible 
storm came up and both fleets were badly shattered, and 
each retreated foi' repairs. Sullivan being thus deserted, 
was obliged to retreat to prevent an encounter with Gen. 
Clinton, who came from New York with reinforcements. 



56 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

260. July 3d, 1778, under the direction of John Butler, 
at the head of 1,600 Tories and Indians. 

261. After the capture of the fort the Indians com- 
menced the most barbarous massacre which their savage 
cruelty could devise. The entire valley was ablaze with 
burning buildings, and nothing that could be destroyed was 
allowed to remain. Butler tried to restrain this terrible 
butchery, but in vain. His savage allies knew no restraint 
until nothing remained for them to destroy. 

262. Gen. Lincoln. Gen. Provost of the British. 

263. In the Northern States. 

264. Stony Point and Paulus Hook. 

265. Gen. Wayne, in the night of July 15th, with un- 
loaded guns and fixed bayonets, attacked Stony Point, 
carrying the works. Paulus Hook was surprised and 
taken by Major Lee, July 19th. 

266. A great loss to the American and French forces. 

267. The Polish nobleman, Count Pulaski. 

268. They had captured over five hundred ships; they 
even cruised among the British Isles, and entering harbors 
seized and burned ships lying at the English wharves. 

269. A very successful naval commander of the naval 
forces. His most memorable exploit occurred off the coast 
of Scotland, Avhere the Bon Homme captured the Serapis- 
As the enemy carried heavier guns, he lashed the two vessels 
together, and for two hours they fought hand to hand with 
musket, pike and cutlass. As the Bon Homme Richard was 
about to sink, the captain of the Serapis struck his colors, 
and Jones transferred his men to the captured frigate and 
sailed off with his prize. 

270. He was ordered by Washington to attack the In- 
dians on the frontiers of New York and Pennsylvania. The 
savages Avere everywhere defeated and forty of their villages 
burned. 

271. There was a very despondent feeling. The Amer- 
icans had gained no important victory, while the British 
had gained control of much important territory. The 
finances of the government were in a very sad condition; 
the paper money was so greatly depreciated in value 
that it was almost useless in purchasing the necessaries of 
life. 

272. The paper currency issued by Congress. This 
issue amounted to $200,000,000, and became so depreciated 
that $40 in bills were worth only $i in specie. 

273. In South Carolina. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 57 

274. Gen. Lincoln was forced to surrender his troops, 
2,000 in number, May 12th, 1780. 

275. Gen. Gates succeeded Lincoln, and Lord Com- 
wallis had command of the British. 

276. Near Camden, South Carolina, Aug. 16th, 1780. 
The armies were commanded by Gates and Cornwallis, the 
Americans being defeated Avith a loss of 2,000 men. 

277. Gen. Greene. 

278. The massacre of Maxhaw Creek, where a body of 
400 Americans was surprised, and after surrendering were 
massacred. 

279. As the States had been overrun by the British, 
there was, no organized resistance to them. 

280. A French fleet, under De Ternay and Count De 
Eochambeau, with 6,000 troops. 

281. An American traitor, who secretly agreed to betray 
West Point into the hands of the British. 

282. A British officer, who was sent by Clinton to nego- 
tiate with Arnold. 

283. John Paulding, David Williams, and Isaac Van 
Wart. They received a pension of S200 each for life, and 
a silver medal bearing on one side the motto " Fidelity," 
and on the other, " The love of country conquers." 

284. " Whom can we trust now." 

285. Arnold escaped to the British and was given a 
command in the army. Andre was hanged as a spy, Oct. 
2d, 1780. 

286. He received about $30,000, a colonelcy in the 
English army, and the contempt of everybody. 

287. Marion, Sumter, Pickens, and Lee. 

288. They were brave ; patriotic in the defense of lib- 
erty, gallantly fighting without pay, food or clothing. So 
strong was their determination to protect their country, that 
all the hardships and privations of Avarfare w^ere received 
without a murmur or thought of retreat. A British officer 
who was sent to negotiate Avith Marion for the exchange of 
prisoners was asked to dine Avith him, nnd finding the fare 
so meagre, consisting only of roasted potatoes and salt, and 
that his host had neither bed nor blanket, he Avas so affected 
by this devotion to liberty, .that he resigned his commis- 
sion, declaring that he would never fight against a cause 
with such defenders. 

289. They had two large armies, Avell equipped, one 
under Sir Henry Clinton, Avhose headquarters Avere at NeAV 
York, and the other in the south, under Lord CornAvaUis. 



58 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

290. By the donation of three million rations to the 
soldiers. He loaned large sums of money and even pledged 
his entire property as credit for the government. He also 
organized soldiers' relief associations, where private sub- 
scriptions were received, clothing made, and encourage- 
ment given for continued enlistment of soldiers whose time 
had expired. It is said that this patriot, so often the 
resource of Washington, lost his fortune in his old age and 
was confined in prison for debt. 

291. In South Carolina, Jan. 17th, 1781. The Ameri- 
cans under Gen. Morgan were successful, with a loss of 
only 80 men. The enemy's loss was 800. 

292. He attacked the British at Eutaw Springs, Sept. 
8th, and the forces of the enemy were so crippled that they 
retired towards Charleston. 

293. He did not ; but his defeats had all the effects of 
success, and Congress voted the highest honors to him for 
his prudence, wisdom, and valor. 

294. With great brutality. Arnold, who had command, 
burned much of private as well as public property, and 
Cornwallis, after arriving and taking command, destroyed 
$10,000,000 worth of property. 

295. The surrender of Cornwallis at Yorktown. 

296. To Gen. Washington, Oct. 19th. 1781. 

297. At Paris, Sept. 3d, 1783. 

The American commissioners were John Adams, Ben- 
jamin Franklin, Henry Lawrence, John Fay. The British 
commissioners were Messrs. Fitzherbert and Oswald. 

298. April 19th, 1783, just eight years after the battle 
of Lexington. 

299. Before Congress, which was assembled at Annap- 
olis, Dec. 23d, 1783. He then returned to his home in 
Virginia. 

300. The Articles of Confederation could not meet the 
wants of the people. Bitter jealousy existed between the 
several States with regard to each other and the general 
government. Continental money was much depreciated, 
and bankruptcy seemed almost inevitable. 

301. The Marquis de LaFayette, Count de Grasse, 
Count de Rochambeau, Count d'Estaing, Count Pulaski, 
and De Ternay. 

302. In New England they refused to pay their taxes, 
and openly threatened to overturn the government. It 
was put down by militia under Gen. Lincoln. 

303. In 1777, by Congress. It is composed of thirteen 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 59 

stripes, alternate red and white, with a field of blue in the 
upper flag-staff corner, on which there is a star for every 
State. The breadth is two-thirds its length. 

304. In 1788. 

305. At New York, in April, 1789. 

306. The treasury was empt}^, and the United States 
had no credit; the Indians were hostile; pirates from the 
Barbary States preyed upon our commerce; Spain refused 
the navigation of the Mississippi; England had not sent a 
minister to our government, nor had she made a treaty of 
commerce with us. 

307. At New York, April 30th, 1789. 

308. At Philadelphia, where the seat of government 
was to remain until 1800. 

309. In the year 1800. 

310. Jefferson, Hamilton, Knox and Randolph. Jeffer- 
son was appointed Secretary of State; Hamilton, Secretary 
of the Treasury; Knox, Secretary of War; and Randolph, 
Attorney-General. 

311. By the advice of Alexander Hamilton, taxes were 
levied on imported goods, and distillation of spirits; also a 
mint and national bank were established at Philadelphia. 

312. " He smote the rock of the national resources and 
abundant streams of revenue burst forth. He touched the 
dead corpse of public credit, and it sprang upon its feet." 

313. Citizen Genet, in 1793. The war which broke out 
between France and England induced Genet to try and 
rouse the American people to espouse the cause of France,, 
and he even went so far as to fit out privateers in the ports 
of the United States to prey upon British commerce. 
Washington had great trouble in preserving neutrality. 
He saw that the true American policy was to keep free from 
European alliances, and therefore demanded the recall of 
Genet. 

314. The yellow fever broke out in Philadelphia, and 
raged with such virulence that in three months, out of a 
population of 60,000, no less than 4,000 perished. 

315. The inhabitants in Western Pennsylvania were 
determined that no tax should be paid on whisky, and 
they were so well organized that fifteen thousand troops 
were ordered out to subdue them 

316. The early settlers of Ohio were much annoyed by 
their depredations, and Gens. Warner and St. Clair were 
sent against them, but were defeated with great slaughter. 
Gen. Wayne was now put in command, who, in 1794, 



60 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

gained a complete victory, laying waste their whole 
country. 

317. Difficulties were arising with England in regard 
to the collection of debts in America, and the impressment 
of our seamen. A trejaty was made with Spain securing 
to the United States the free navigation of the Mississippi 
and fixing the boundary of Florida, still held by that 
nation. 

318. Chief Justice Jay was sent as envoy-extraordinary 
to England, where he negotiated a treaty which was rati- 
fied by the Senate in 1795, after a violent opposition. This 
treaty recognized the right to collect debts in the United 
States, but did not forbid the impressment of American 
seamen, so bitterly complained of. 

319. The Republican party under the leadarship of 
Jefferson, Madison and Randolph, and the Federalist by 
Hamilton and Adams. 

320. The Federalists favored the granting of power to 
the general government, which they thought should be 
strong, while the Republicans, fearing the strength of the 
government would lead to a monarchy, advocated States' 
rights as a safeguard against the usurpation of power. 
They also opposed the United States Bank, the English 
treaty and the assumption of the States' debts. In the 
election of Adams, the Federalists were accused of being 
the friends of Great Britain and the Republicans the 
friends of France. The Republicans declared themselves 
the only true friends of the people, and stigmatized all 
others as aristocrats and monarchists. 

321. By a majority of two electoral votes over Jeffer- 
son, the Republican nominee, who became Vice-President. 

322. March 4th, 1797. 

323. The passage of the Alien and Sedition Laws, and 
difficulties with France. 

324. Under the Alien Law, the President could expel 
from the country any foreigner whom he deemed injurious 
to the United States. Under the Sedition Law, any one 
libeling Congress, the President, or the government, could 
be fined or imprisoned. 

325. Our flag was insulted, our vessels were captured, 
and our envoys were refused audience by the French gov- 
ernment. Hostilities were commenced on the seas, but 
when Napoleon became First Consul of France the dif- 
ficulty ceased. Peace was declared in 1800. 

326. Having rendered assistance many of her people 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 61 

believed that the United States should return favors, and 
becoming desperate in her home difficulties, sought revenge 
by insults, and piracy upon our commerce. The recall of 
Genet they considered an insult to them. 

327. The death of George Washington. He died Dec. 
14th, 1799, at Mount Vernon, at the age of sixty-eight 
years. 

328. In the year 1800. 

329. Strong party feeling prevailed during the entire 
administration. The unpopularity of the Alien and Sedi- 
tion Laws resulted in a victory at the Presidential election 
of the Republican nominees. 

330. The Federalists nominated Adams and Pinckney. 
The Republicans Thomas Jefferson and Aaron Burr. 

331. That of Jefferson and Burr. 

332. He was elected by Congress on the thirty-sixth 
ballot, there being no ejection by the people, he and Aaron 
Burr receiving an equal number of votes. 

333. The purchase of Louisiana from Napoleon for 
$15,000,000. This secured over one million square miles 
of land, and the full possession of the Mississippi. This 
tract had just been ceded by Spain to France. 

334. American commerce suffered greatly from the 
inhabitants of the Barbary States, who were known as 
pirates. They also held the crews of captured vessels 
until ransomed. The war occurred in 1805. 

335. The frigate Philadelphia had unfortunately 
grounded while in the harbor of Tripoli, and fell into the 
hands of the Bashaw. Decatur entered the harbor with a 
small vessel, apparently in distress, he having concealed his 
men below, boarded the Philadelphia, swept the crew into 
the sea, set the ship on fire, and amid a tremendous can- 
nonade from the batteries, escaped without the loss of a man. 

336. England claimed the right of stopping American 
vessels on the high seas, searching for seamen of English 
birth and pressing them into the British navy. Accord- 
ingly the British frigate Leopold fired into the American 
frigate Chesapeake off the coast of Virginia, and her com- 
mander going aboard, seized four of the crew, three of 
which were Americans by birth. These were taken on the 
pretense of being deserters. 

337: That when naturalized they were American citizens 
and entitled to the same protection as any citizen. The 
English doctrine, "Once an Englishman, always an English- 



62 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

338. That all British war vessels should quit the waters 
of the United States. 

339. An Act of Congress forbidding American vessels to 
leave port. As this was so injurious to our commerce the 
Act was removed, but all intercourse with England and 
France was forbidden. 

340. An Act by Napoleon that confiscated all vessels 
that submitted to a search by an English ship, or had 
paid tribute. 

341. A duel in which Hamilton was killed. This 
occurred July, 1804, and was greatly lamented by the 
American people. 

342. In 1806 Aaron Burr was arrested for a supposed 
attempt to form an independent government west of the 
Alleghanies. He was tried for treason, but acquitted. 
Undoubtedly his ambition was to be president of an inde- 
pendent republic, to conquer Mexico and establish a strong 
government. 

343. For inventing the steamboat. The first voyage 
was made from New York to Albany in 1807. 

344. The bitterness existing between the United States 
and England was fast leading to a declaration of war. 
The Republicans, under the leadership of James Madison, 
advocated the enforcement .of American rights, while the 
Federalists were opposed to a war policy. 

345. March 4th, 1809. 

346. The British emissaries had aroased the Indians to 
war, and Tecumseh formed a confederacy of the North- 
western tribes. Gen. Harrison was sent against them, 
who, at the battle of Tippecanoe, routed them with great 
slaughter. 

347. They continued to impress our seamen, capture 
our ships, and even went so far as to send war vessels into 
our waters and seize our ships as prizes. The British gov- 
ernment refusing to relinquish its offensive course, all hope 
(Tf peace was abandoned and the people prepared for war. 

348. June 19th, 1812, and lasted two years and. a half 

349. The government proposed to invade Canada. 
Accordingly Gen. Hull crossed over from Detroit, but 
learning that the British and Indians were gathering to 
attack him, retreated, pursued by a force of British under 
Gen. Brock, and Indians under Tecumseh. 

350. As Gen. Brock marched to attack the fort, Hull 
seemed to lose all presence of mind, and dare not risk a 
battle. He raised the white flag, surrendered Detroit with 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 6o 

its garrisons and stores, and the whole of Michigan, with- 
out even stipulating for the honors of war. 

351. In October of the same year Gen. Van Rensselaer 
sent a small body of men across the Niagara River to 
attack the British at Queenstown Heights. The English 
were driven ft'om their position, and Gen. Brock killed. 
Gen. Van Rensselaer now returned to bring over the rest 
of his army, but the militia had lost their courage, and 
refused to go. The troops on the Canadian shore, thus 
basely abandoned, were compelled to surrender. 

352. The capture of the Guerriere by the Constitution, 
Aug. 19th; of the Frolic by the Wasp, Oct. 18th; of the 
Macedonia by the United States, Oct. 25th; of the Java by 
the Constitution, Dec. 29th. 

353. Over three hundred. 

354. It aroused great enthusiasm and inspired confi- 
dence. Enlistments were rapid, and the course of the 
government generally approved. In the midst of these 
successes Madison was re-elected with but little opposition. 

355. Three armies were raised with the intention of 
invading Canada. The division under Harrison was sent 
to the west shore of Lake Erie; the division under _ Dear- 
born between Erie and Ontario; and Hampden's division 
on the shore of Lake Champlain. 

356. They accomplished but little. 

357. The American fleet consisted of nine vessels, car- 
rying fifty-four guns, and the British fleet of six vessels and 
sixty-three guns. Perry's flag-ship, the Lawrence, engaged 
two'of the heaviest vessels of the enemy, and fought until 
but eight of his men were left. Leaving the Lawrence he 
passed to the Niagara, and within fifteen minutes after 
mounting the deck won the victory. 

358. It was while passing from the Lawrence to the 
Niagara. The enemy's guns were directed upon him, and 
although he passed within pistol-shot of the British, he 
escaped without injury. 

359. " We have niet the enemy, and they are ours." 

360. Harrison was at Sandusky Bay, preparing to in- 
vade Canada, and at the news of this victory crossed the 
lake, landed at Maiden, where, on the approach of Ham- 
son the British retreated, but were overtaken on thg 
Thames River and compelled to surrender. Proctor 
escaped by the fleetness of his horse. In this engagement 
Tecumseh was killed. 

361. The capture of the Peacock by the Hornet, Feb. 



64 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

24th; of the Boxer by the Enterprise, Sept. 5th; of Bark- 
ley's fleet by Perry's fleet, Sept. 10th. 

362. The capture of the Chesapeake by the Shannon, 
and the Argus by the Pelican. 

363. It was the last command of Capt. Lawrence as he 
was carried below during the engagement between the 
Chesapeake and Shannon. 

364. A rising of the Alabama Indians. They fell upon 
Fort Mims and massacred the garrison. Gen. Jackson 
took command, drove them from place to place, and at 
Horseshoe Bend, where they had fortified themselves, the 
soldiers with fixed bayonets scaled their breastworks, and 
a desperate battle ensued. Six hundred Creeks were 
killed. Those who escaped were glad to make peace on 
any terms. 

365. Early in the spring Cockbura commenced devas- 
tating the southern coast. In Virginia and Carolina he 
burned bridges, farmhouses, and villages, robbed the 
inhabitants, plundered churches, and murdered the sick 
in their beds. 

366. They attacked the British at Chippewa, July 5th^ 
and gained a brilliant victory. A second engagement was 
at Lundy's Lane, July 25th. 

367. It was one of the bloodiest battles of the war. 
Gen. Scott commanded the American forces of one thou- 
sand men, and maintained the unequal contest until dark. 
A battery located on a height was the key to the British 
position. Scott asked Col. Miller if he could take it. "I'll 
try, sir," was the reply. The battery was taken. Three 
times the British rallied for its recapture, but were unsuc- 
cessful. This victory, though glorious to the American 
army, was barren of direct results. 

368. In this contest the British fleet on Lake Champlain 
attacked the American squadron under Com. McDonough 
and was nearly annihilated. Prevost, with twelve thousand 
men, advanced against Plattsburg, but when he found that 
his ships were lost, he fled, leaving his sick and wounded, 
and large quantities of military stores. 

369. Gen. Ross marched to Washington, burned the 
capitol and other public buildings, libraries, records, and 
several private dwellings. 

370. A convention of delegates from the New England 
States met at Hartford, December 15th, 1814, and bitterly 
opposed the administration because of its mode of con- 
ducting the war. The meeting w^s branded with odium 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 65 

by the friends of the administration, and the name was 
long used as a term of reproach. 

871. At Ghent, December 24th, 1814. 

372. The battle of New Orleans, January 8th. Gen. 
Jackson commanded the American forces, numbering 
6,000, and Gen. Pakenham commanded the British, num- 
bering 12,000. The American loss was seven killed and 
seven wounded. The British loss was 2,500. 

373. $127,000,000. 

374. The Federalist party was almost entirely broken up 
by its opposition to the war, and James Monroe, the 
Republican candidate for President, was almost unani- 
mously elected. He was generally beloved, and all parties 
united in his support. 

375. March 4th, 1817. 

376. A bill defining the limits of slavery; all States 
north of latitude 36° 30', and all territories west of the 
Mississippi should be free. It was proposed by Henry Clay. 

377. La Fayette. 

378. Any attempt by a European nation to gain domi- 
nation in America would be considered by the United 
States as an unfriendly act. 

379. By a treaty with Spain, in 1819. 

380. The Whig party, which was formed in Jackson's 
time, was fast coming to the front as an opposition to the 
Republican party. The opposition being so strong, the 
name Republican was dropped, and thenceforth the party 
was known as the Democratic party. The Whigs were in 
favor of a protective tariff and a general system of internal 
improvements. The Democrats opposed these measures. 
John Quincy Adams and Henry Clay were the champions 
of the Whigs, and Andrew Jackson and John C. Calhoun 
of the Democrats. 

381. It was a name applied to the Democratic party in 
1835, and originated because of a contention in a Demo- 
cratic meeting, Avhere the lights were all put out and re- 
lighted by loco-foco matches which some of the members 
carried in their pockets. 

382. A duty on imported goods for the purpose of en- 
couraging home manufactures. 

383. There being four candidates, no majority of votes 
was obtained. He was chosen by the House of Represent- 
atives. 

384. The first railroad was completed, and the Erie 
Canal was opened. 



66 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

385. The first railroad in the United States was built 
in 1833, from Albany to Schenectady. 

386. The Erie Canal is about 363 miles in length. 

387. Protection for the East meant a shutting off of 
foreign manufactures from a direct competition with their 
products, while in the South, agricultural pursuits being 
the chief employment of the people, they desired goods 
brought to them as cheaply as possible. 

388. Because of the principle of a protective tariff 
which was advocated by his party, Andrew Jackson, the 
hero of New Orleans and the Democratic nominee, was 
elected. 

389. He was called " the old man eloquent." 

390. It was laid by Gen. LaFayette, on the fiftieth an- 
niversary of the battle, June 17th, 1825. 

391. It was noted for his inflexible honesty, sturdiness 
of purpose and excellent judgment. He surrounded him- 
self at once by his political friends, thus establishing the 
principle of " rotation in office." During his first year in 
office there were nearly seven hundred removals from 
office, not including subordinate clerks, while in the forty 
years preceding there had been but seventy-four. 

392. It declared the tariff laws " null and void," andr 
that the State (South Carolina) would secede from the 
Union if force should be employed to collect any revenue. 

393. John C. Calhoun and Robert Y. Hayne. 

394. He issued a proclamation announcing his deter- 
mination to execute the laws, and ordered troops under 
Gen. Scott to Charleston. 

395. In order to prevent an open rupture between 
South Carolma and the government, he advocated a gen- 
eral reduction of the tariff. This compromise was ac- 
cepted by both sides and quiet restored. 

396. It was an expression of Henry Clay when his 
friends insisted that to advocate the compromise would 
lessen his chances for the presidency. This step of Henry 
Clay demanded great moral courage, as it required a partial 
surrender of his cherished principles of protection and 
the breaking away from political friends, but the patriotic^ 
sentiment of peace overcame these inducements of party 
favors and triumphs, and he advocated what his noble 
nature pointed out was for the best interests of his country. 

397. He vetoed the bill renewing the charter of the 
United States Bank. In 1833 he withdrew the public 
money from this bank and deposited it in the local banks. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 67 

By withdrawing this money the bank contracted its loans, 
money became scarce and commercial distress ensued. 
The measure excited violent clamor, but he was sustained 
by the Democratic majority in the House of Representa- 
tives. When the money was deposited in local banks it 
became easy to borrow, and speculation extended to every 
branch of trade. 

398. The land speculation was the great craze of the 
times. New cities were laid out in the wilderness, fabu- 
lous prices were charged for building lots, and fortunes 
seemed to be in the reach of everyone. These hot-house 
schemes, which existed only on paper, at last came to an 
end and a disastrous relapse ensued. 

399. The Black Hawk War broke out in the North- 
west Territory. After some skirmishing they were driven 
off and their leader, Black Hawk, was captured. The 
Florida War with the Seminoles grew out of an attempt to 
move them, in accordance with a treaty, to lands west of 
the Mississippi. 

400. They had promised to pay $5,000,000 for damages 
to our commerce during Napoleon's war. Jackson urged 
Congress to make reprisals on French ships. By the medi- 
ation of England, the debt was paid and war prevented. 

401. No United States Bank; no Protective Tariff. 
Gen. Harrison was the Whig candidate. 

402. The Financial Crisis of 1837, and the Patriot War. 

403. (1) The specie circular, which was issued bj^ 
Jackson, directing that payments for public lands should 
be made in gold and silver. 

(2) The surplus public money, amounting to about 
$28,000,000, which was ordered by Congress to be with- 
drawn from the local banks and distributed among the 
States. The banks could not meet this demand. 

(3) Heavy importations of European goods, which had 
to be paid for in gold and silver. 

(4) A terrible fire in New York City on the night of 
Dec. 16th, 1835, which burned six hundred valuable 
stores, and property to the amount of $18,000,000. 

404. Business men could not pay their debts and failures 
were eyery-day occurrences. In New York City alone dur- 
ing March and April, failures amounted to over $100,000,- 
000. Property of all kinds declined in value. Eight of 
the States failed, wholly or in part, and even the United 
States government could not pay its debts. Consternation 



68 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

seized upon all classes, confidence was destroyed and trade 
stood still. 

405. The Canadian Rebellion against England. 

406. The Canadian Rebellion stirred the sympathies of 
the American people. Meetings were held, volunteers 
offered and arms contributed. The President issued a 
proclamation, and Gen. Scott was sent to the frontier to 
preserve the peace. A body of American sympathizers 
took possession of Navy Island, in the Niagara River, but 
was dislodged by British troops. The steamer Caroline 
was taken by a body of British troops and sent, with her 
crew, over the Falls. 

407. The people of each section threatened to take up 
arms to support their respective claims as to the boundary 
lines. For some time there was great peril of a war with 
England, but the matter was settled during Tyler's adminis- 
tration by what is called the Ashburton treaty of 1842, 
Lord Ashburton and Daniel Webster acting as com- 
missioners. 

408. The financial difiiculties weakened the faith of the 
people in the Democratic party and Van Buren failed of a 
re-election. 

409. The Whig party elected William Henry Harrison 
by an immense majority. 

410. One month. 

411. He did not. 

412. A bill for establishing a United States Bank. 

413. The people of Rhode Island organized by force a 
new constitution and elected Dorr Governor. Dorr was 
arrested, tried for treason, and sentenced for life. He was 
afterwards pardoned. 

414. The tenants on some of the old patroon estates in 
New York refused to pay the rent. Some assumed the dis- 
guise of Indians, tarred and feathered those who paid their 
rents, and CA^en killed officials who served warrants upon 
them. 

415. They were settled at Nauvoo, 111., but having in- 
curred the enmity of the people about them, were com- 
pelled to leave. Joseph Smith, their leader, was killed by 
a mob. 

416. December 27th, 1845. She applied for admission 
in 1836. The objections were of two reasons: 1st, the 
boundary line was in dispute and if annexed there would 
most likely be a war with Mexico ; 2d, Texas held slaves 
and if admitted would add another slave State. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 69 

417. From Baltimore to Washington. The message was 
the announcement of Polk's nomination for President of 
the United States. 

418. It was invented in 1792 by Eli Whitney, but did not 
come into great prominence until the raising of cotton had 
become an important feature in the agriculture of the 
Southern States.. 

419. The question of the annexation of Texas went be- 
fore the people for their decision. The Whigs, who opposed 
the annexation, nominated Henry Clay, and the Democrats 
who favored its admission, nominated James K. Polk. 
After a close contest Polk was elected. 

420. The annexation of Texas by the United States, and 
a certain tract of land claimed by Mexico. 

421. Gen. Taylor in 1846, and Gen. Winfield Scott in 
1847. Scott was successful in many engagements, enter- 
ing Mexico Sept. 14th, 1847. 

422. Taylor won the battles of Palo Alto May 8th, 
Monterey Sept. 24th and Buena Vista Feb. 23d, 1847. Gen. 
Scott won the battles of Vera Cruz March 29th, Cerro 
Gordo April 18th, and the capture of the entire forces of 
the City of Mexico. 

423. He was sent out by the United States government 
with a small exploring party, to seek a new route to Oregon. 
While in California, in 1844, he received instructions from 
the government to protect the interests of the United States 
in that territory. Troops were quickly raised and the 
Mexicans compelled to retire southward. By the advice 
of Fremont the American settlers in California declared 
their independence of Mexico, July 5th, 1846. 

424. A withdrawal of United States troops ; that Mexico 
should cede to the United States the territories of New 
Mexico and Upper California for the sum of $15,000,000, 
and pay $3,500,000 to American citizens due them by 

M^exico. 

425. * David Wilmot offered in Congress, August, 1846, a 
bill forbidding slavery in any territory which should be 
acquired. This was to prohibit slavery in the territory of 
Texas. It excited violent debate, but did not become a 

^ 426. February, 1848, by a workman in digging in a mill- 
race in the Sacramento Valley. . 

427 Three parties were in the field. The Whigs nomi- 
nated General Taylor ; the Democrats, Lewis Cass ; and 
the Free-soilers, who were opposed to the extension ol 



70 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

slavery, and believed that, as Taylor was a slave-holder, 
the principle of slavery would be fostered by him, formed 
a new party and nominated Martin Van Buren. Taylor 
was elected. 

428. He was inaugurated President, March 4th, 1849, 
and died July 9th, 1850, after an illness of only five 
days. 

429. California applied for admission to the Union as a 
free State. This brought the question of slavery into an 
intense agitation and for a time it seemed as though a ter- 
rible crisis was at hand. 

430. The compromise of 1850 presented by Henry Clay 
and proposed (1) that California should come in as a free 
State; (2) that the territories of Utah and New Mexico 
should be formed without any provision concerning slavery; 
(3) that Texas should be paid $10,000,000 to give up its 
claim on the territory of New Mexico ; (4) that the slave 
trade should be prohibited in the District of Columbia ; 
and (5) that a Fugitive Slave Law should be enacted. 

431. Henry Clay, as he was ever ready to surrender a por- 
tion of his political convictions in order to establish peace. 

432. It provided for the return of slaves to their owners, 
who had escaped to a free State. 

433. About five hundred adventurers undertook the 
annexation of Cuba to the United States, but were defeated 
and Lopez, the leader, was executed at Havana in 1851. 

434. Henry Clay and Daniel Webster. 

435. The Democrats and Whigs declared that they stood 
by the provisions of the Omnibus Bill, but the Free-soilers 
were outspoken against it. Franklin Pierce, the Demo- 
cratic nominee, was elected by a large majority over Gen. 
Scott, the Whig candidate. 

436. Its nature was a repeal of the Missouri com- 
promise bill, allowing th^ people of the territories to decide 
whether it should be bond or free. It was proposed by 
Stephen A. Douglas, and had relation to the territories of 
Kansas and Nebraska. It became a law, May, 1854. 

437. A bitter contest arose between the pro-slavery and 
anti -slavery men. Each party sent bodies of armed emi- 
grants to the territory. Disturbances arose, mobs w^ere 
formed, houses were attacked and pillaged, men were 
murdered in cold blood, and for several years Kansas was 
a scene of lawless violence. 

438. A dispute arose between the United States and 
Mexico, with regard to the boundary line. Gen. Gadsden 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 71 



negotiated a settlement, whereby $10,000,000 were paid to 
Mexico for additional territory. 

439. Commodore Perry's expedition to Japan, in 1854, 
resulted in a treaty by which that country opened two 
ports to the merchants of the United States. 

440. The compromise of 1820 and 1850 being now 
aboHshed, the slave question became the turning point of 
the election. New party lines were drawn to meet this 
issue. The Whig party now ceased to exist, and the Re- 
publican party, absorbing all who opposed the extension of 
slavery, nominated John C. Fremont, who carried eleven 
States. The Democratic party nominated James Buchanan, 
who was elected. The Know-Nothing, or American party, 
was organized to resist the influence of foreigners.^ It 
carried Maryland, but its existence was of short duration. 
Its motto was " America for Americans." 

441. The Supreme Court of the United States declared 
that slave-owners might take their slaves into any State 
in the Union without forfeiting authority over them. Dred 
Scott was a slave, and claimed fi'eedom on the ground that 
he had been taken into a free territory. 

442. Being an ardent lover of negro freedom, he con- 
ceived the wild scheme of taking the law into his own 
hands and liberating the slaves. He seized the United 
States arsenal at Harper's Ferry in 1859, and proclaimed 
freedom to all the slaves in the vicinity. He was taken by 
the United States and hung as a traitor. x i. r. 

443. Abraham Lincoln, Stephen A. Douglas, John C. 
Breckinridge, and John Bell. 

444. The Lincoln party held, that while slavery must 
be protected where it was, it ought not to be carried into 
any free territory. . 

The Douglas party favored squatter's sovereignty, the 
right of each State to decide whether it shall exclude or 
accept slavery. 

The Breckinridge party claimed that any citizen has a 
right to migrate to any territory, taking with him anything 
that is propertv (including slaves), and Congress is bound 
to protect the rights of slave-holders in all the territories. 

The Bell party had for their platform : " The Constitu- 
tion of the country, the union of the States, and the 
enforcement of the laws." 

445 The agitation of the slavery question. The South- 
ern States, believing they had a right to secede from the 



72 THE QUESTION BOOK, 

Union, seceded, but the Federal government, denying that 
right, raised armies and enforced its authority. 

446. South Carolina, Dec. 20th, 1860. 

447. Mississippi, Florida, Alabama, Georgia, Louisiana, 
Texas, Virginia, North Carolina, Arkansas, and Tennessee. 

448. The Confederate States of America, and the form 
of government was similar to the government of the United 
States. 

On the 4th of February, 1861, a convention of the 
seceded States met at Montgomery, Alabama, and there 
organized the Confederacy. 

449. Jefferson Davis, and was inaugurated Feb. 4th, 1861. 

450. The bombardment of Fort Sumter. 

451. Fort Sumter fell into the hands of the Confeder- 
ates under Beauregard, April 14th, 1861. Maj. Anderson, 
the commander of Sumter, was permitted to go north with 
his men. The effect of this event was electrical. It 
unified the North and also the South. Party lines van- 
ished. The Union men at the South were borne into seces- 
sion, while the Republicans and Democrats at the North 
combined to support the government. The war spirit 
swept over the country like wild-fire. 

452. He issued a requisition for 75,000 troops, and soon 
after for 300,000 volunteers. 

453. In Baltimore, April 19th, 1861, where Southern 
sympathizers attacked a Massachusetts regiment on its way 
to Washington. 

454. They seized the United States armory at Harper's 
Ferry, and the navy yard at Norfolk. At Norfolk there 
were twelve ships of war, two thousand cannon, two hun- 
dred and fifty thousand pounds of gunpowder, and great 
quantities of shot and shell. • 

455. After the seizure of Alexandria, Ellsworth, seeing 
the Confederate flag still flying from the roof of a hotel, 
went up and tore it down. As he descended he was shot at 
the foot of the stairs by the landlord, Jackson, who, in turn, 
fell at the hands of private Brownell. 

456. July 21st, 1861, in Northern Virginia. Gen. Mc- 
Dowell made the attack, and was defeated, after a severe 
engagement. 

457. At first they were much disappointed and dis- 
couraged ; then came a renewed determination. Congress 
voted $500,000,000 and five hundred thousand men, and 
Gen. McClellan was appointed to the command of the Army 
of the Potomac. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 73 

458. A party of' 2,000 Federals crossed the Potomac at 
Ball's Bluft'. They were attacked and forced down the 
slippery, clayey bluff, fifty to one hundred and fifty feet 
high, to the river below, where, in trying to escape, many 
were drowned, some were shot, and scarcely half their 
number reached the other bank. 

459. Col. Baker, United States Senator from Oregon. 

460. The State refused to pass an ordinance of secession, 
yet an effort was made to preserve an armed neutrality. 
Capt. Lyon foiled this attempt. Gen. Sigel was defeated 
in an engagement at Carthage. Gen. Lyon now took 
command, and was compelled to fight superior forces or 
abandon that part of the State. He chose the former. 

461. At Wilson's Creek, Aug. 10th, while gallantly lead- 
ing a bayonet charge. 

462. He issued a proclamation offering to commission 
privateers. Lincoln declared a blockade of the Southern 
ports. 

463. One on the Northern coast, and forty-two in the 
United States Navy. At the close of the year there were 
two hundred and sixty-four. 

464. They acknowledged them as belligerents, thus plac- 
ing them on the same footing with the United States. 

465. Southern commissioners sent to England and 
France to plead the cause of the Confederacy. 

466. They were taken from the British steamer Trent 
by Capt. Wilkes, and brought back to the United States. 
This produced much excitement in England. The United 
States Government, however, promptly disavowed the act 
and returned the prisoners. 

467. On the 1st of November, 1861, on account of age 
and physical infirmities. He was succeeded by Major- 
General McClellan. The office was Lieutenant-General of 
the Armies of the United States. 

468. The large vessels and stores at Harper's Ferry and 
Norfolk were captured by the Confederates. They were 
successful in the two great battles of the year. Bull Run 
and Wilson's Creek ; also in the minor engagements at B^ 
Bethel, Carthage, Lexington, Belmont and Ball s Bluti. 
The Federals had saved Fort Pickens and Fortress Monroe. 
The forts at Hatteras Inlet and Port Royal were captured. 
Thev had gained the victories at Philippi, Rich Mountam, 
Boonsville, Carrick's Ford, Cheat Mountam and Dranes- 
ville. West Virginia, Maryland and Missouri were saved 
to the Union. 



74 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

469. On the part of the North there were three mam 
objects : the opening of the Mississippi ; the blockade of 
the Southern ports ; and the capture of Richmond. 

470. The Union forces numbered about 500,000; the 
Confederates about 350,000. Gen. Thomas won an engage- 
ment at Mill Springs, and Commodore Foote and Gen. Grant 
captured Forts Henry and Donelson, in Northern Tennessee. 

47 1 . Fort Henry was evacuated Feb. 6, after a bombard- 
ment of one hour by Commodore Foote. Gen. Grant with 
his army intended to cut off the retreat, but the garrison 
escaped to Fort Donelson. The fleet now went back to 
the Ohio river and ascended the Cumberland, while Grant 
crossed to co-operate in an attack on Fort Donelson, which 
was captured with fifteen thousand men, after three days' 
hard fighting. 

472. The Confederates fell back to Corinth, the great 
railroad center of Mississippi and Tennessee, where their 
forces were gradually collected under the conmiand of Gens. 
Johnston and Beauregard, while Gen. Buell at once occu- 
pied Nashville. The Union army ascended the Tennessee 
to Pittsburg Landing. Grant was placed in command and 
Buell ordered to reinforce him. The Confederates deter- 
mined to rout Grant's army before the arrival of Buell. 

473. On the 6th and 7th of April. Gen. Grant com- 
manded the Union forces, and Gen. Beauregard the Con- 
federates. 

474. Sunday morning Johnston surprised the Union 
forces by a desperate assault. The Federals, having no 
time to form into order of battle, fought where they hap- 
pened to stand, slowly yielding, and for twelve hours they 
obstinately disputed every inch of the way. At last, 
pushed to the very brink of the river (Cumberland), Grant 
massed his artillery, and gathered around it the fragments 
for the final stand. By the aid of the gunboats below, and 
Buell's reinforcements, the tide of battle was stayed, and 
the Confederates fell back. They possessed, however, the 
Union camps, three thousand prisoners, thirty flags, and 
immense stores ; but they had lost their commander. Gen. 
Johnston. The next morning the Confederates were driven 
from the field. 

475. In the Mississippi River, between Kentucky and 
Missouri. It was taken by Commodore Foote and Gen. 
Pope, April 7th. 

476. October 8th, 1862. Gen. Bragg commanded the 
Confederates, Gen. Buell, the Federals. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 75 

477. Dec. 31 st. Gen. Bragg, with 60,000 troops, attacked 
the Union forces under Gen. Rosecrans, and was repulsed. 
Jan. 2d, the battle was renewed, but Bragg, being unsuc- 
cessful, retreated. This was one of the bloodiest contests of 
the war. The loss was one-fourth of the number engaged. 

478. The Confederates gave up the attempt to recover 
Kentucky. 

479. Grant was to move along the Mississippi Central 
Railroad, while Sherman was to descend the river from 
Memphis, with the gunboats under Porter. The plan was 
spoiled by Van Dorn's cavalry dash, which destroyed 
Grant's depot of supplies at Holly Springs. Sherman, 
ignorant of what had happened, pushed on and made an 
attack at Chickasaw Bayou, north of Vicksburg. After 
suffering a bloody repulse, and hearing of Grant's mis- 
fortune, he fell back. 

480. Gen. Curtis having command, attacked Gen. Price 
and drove him out of the State into Arkansas. Van Dorn 
now taking command, a desperate battle w^as fought at Pea 
Ridge March 7th and 8th, in which Van Dorn was totally 
defeated. 

481. The attempt was made with a fleet of forty-four 
vessels under Commodore Farragut, and 8,000 troops under 
Gen. Butler. Mortar-boats for six days stormed the oi^ter 
defenses, but with little effect. Farragut then boldly re- 
solved to carry the fleet past the defenses to New Orleans. 
At three o'clock in the morning, April 24th, they advanced, 
running a fearful gauntlet of shot and shell, and flames of 
fire rafts. They now encountered the Confederate fleet of 
thirty armed steamers. Twelve of the Confederate flotilla 
were destroyed. New Orleans now became an easy prey, 
and soon surrendered. 

482. He ascended the river, took possession of Baton 
Rouge and Natchez, and, running the batteries at Vicks- 
burg, joined the Union fleet above. 

483. It gave control to the outer defenses of Norfolk ; 
it opened .two sounds, eight rivers, four canals and two 
railroads. It was an excellent rendezvous for ships, and 
exposed a large country to attack. 

484. The Cumberland and Congress, March 8th. 

485. The morning after the ravages of the Merrimac, 
the Monitor made her appearance and commenced the 
attack. The Merrimac, confident of success, poured in a 
broadside, but the balls glanced harmlessly off the Moni- 
tor's turret, or broke and fell to pieces on the deck. The 



76 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

battle now opened; they fought side by side, iron rasping 
on iron. Five times the Merrimac strove to crush her 
antagonist by running her huge iron beak against the Mon- 
itor's side. At each dash her prow would rise above the 
water, and at the same instant heavy volleys from the 
Monitor would crash against the exposed parts. In this 
manner the Merrimac received severe injuries, gave up the 
contest and steamed back to Norfolk. 

486. She could have entered any port of the United 
States, destroyed cities, opened the blockade, and, un- 
doubtedly, would have secured the acknowledgment of the 
Confederacy by European nations. On this battle hinged 
the fate of the war. 

487. It was regarded as the most formidable naval 
power in the world. 

488. Just before the capture of Norfolk she was sunk 
by the Confederacy. The Monitor sunk, in a storm, off 
Cape Hatteras. 

489. He was a noted leader of a band of guerrillas and 
raiders in Tennessee. He repeatedly rode through Ken- 
tucky, spreading terror in his path, burning towns, levying 
tribute, destroying telegraphs and railroads, and carrying 
off prisoners. In one raid alone, he boasted of having 
taken seventeen towns and cities, with a very large amount 
of army stores. Quantrell was another famous guerrilla, 
although his raids were not so extensive as those of Mor- 
gan. 

490. Richmond. 

491. Gen. McClellan. 

492. Gen. Magruder, with only about 5,000 men, held 
such strong defenses along a line of thirteen miles, that 
Gen. McClellan was brought to a stop. Heavy guns were 
ordered from Washington, but as the siege began Magruder 
quietly withdrew, having delayed the Union army a month. 

493. May 5th. Gen. Hooker with his division main- 
tained the contest for nine hours, then being reinforced, he 
carried the works, and the pursuit was continued to within 
seven miles of Richmond. 

494. McDowell, with 30,000 men, was to meet him near 
Hanover Court House, and then commence the siege of 
Richmond ; but Gen. Johnston, suspecting this movement, 
ordered Gen. Jackson to move up the Shenandoah Valley 
and threaten Washington. 

495. After being reinforced by Gen. Ewell's division of 
10,000 men, he hurried down the valley and drove Banks 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 77 

across the Potomac. The excitement hi Washmgton was 
intense. The President took mihtary possession of all the 
railroads ; called upon the Governors of Northern States 
to send militia to the defense of the capital ; ordered 
Fremont at Franklin, Banks at Harper's Ferry, and 
McDowell at Fredericksburg, to capture Jackson. He now 
commenced his retreat, burning bridges as he passed, and 
escaped. 

496. With 15,000 men, Jackson had occupied the atten- 
tion of three Major Generals and 60,0()0 men, prevented 
McDowell's junction with McClellan, and saved Richmond. 

497. He had pushed his left wing across the Chicka- 
hominy, and before he could unite his army, a terrible 
storm flooded the swamps, and the Chickahominy Creek 
became a broad river. Johnston, seeing the exposed wing, 
commenced the attack. Johnston was severely wounded. 
The next day the Confederates were repulsed in great dis- 
order. 

498. Jackson making his appearance near Hanover 
Court House, McClellan resolved to " change his base " of 
supplies to the James River. A series of battles, lasting 
seven days, now occurred. The most important were those 
of Mechanicsville, Gaines' Mill, Savage's Station, Frazier's 
Farm, and Malvern Hill. In this famous retreat the army 
fought by day to give time for the baggage trains, and fell 
back at night to a new position. At Malvern Hill Lee 
received so bloody a check that he pressed no farther. 

499. Seventeen miles. 

500. The North was as much discouraged as the South 
was elated. Lincoln called for 300,000 troops. 

501. To transfer his army to Acquia Creek, and put it 
under the command of Gen. Pope. 

502. After some maneuvering. Pope was compelled to 
fight the entire Confederate army on the old battle-field of 
Bull Run. The shattered remains of the Army of the 
Potomac retreated and took refuge within the fortifications 
at Washington. 

503. The Union army lost 30,000 men and vast supplies. 
The capital was in great danger ; a victorious army with- 
out and only broken battalions within. 

504. He crossed the Potomac and entered Maryland. 

505. McClellan. 

506. South Mountain and the terrible battle of Antie- 
tam, September 17th. 

507. He retreated across the Potomac. 



78 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

508. It was a Union victory. The North was saved 
from invasion, and Washington from any danger of attack. 

509. For the slowness of his movements in pursuing 
the retreating army. Gen. Burnside took command. 

510. Dec. 13th. The Union forces were defeated, with 
a loss of 12,000 men. 

511. They had gained the victories of Jackson in the 
Shenandoah Valley ; of Lee, in the Peninsular campaign ; 
those against Pope ; Bragg's great raid in Kentucky ; the 
battles of Cedar Mountain, Chickasaw Bluff, and Fred- 
ericksburg. 

512. They had taken Forts Henry, Donelson, Pulaski, 
Macon, Jackson, St. Phillip, and Island No. 10. They had 
opened the Mississippi to Vicksburg ; taken New Orleans, 
Roanoke Island, Newbern, Yorktown, Norfolk, and Mem- 
phis. They had also won the battles of Pea Ridge, Wil- 
liamsburg, Fair Oaks, South Mountain, Antietam, luka, 
Corinth, and Murfreesboro, and silenced the Merrimac. 

513. In Minnesota, Iowa, and Dakota. Over seven 
hundred whites were slain, and many thousands driven 
from their homes. Col. Sibley routed them and took five 
hundred prisoners. Thirty-nine were hung on one scaffold, 
at Mankato, Minnesota, Dec. 26th. 

514. It was about the same as the preceding year. The 
Union force was about 700,000; the Confederate, about 
350,000. 

515. January 1st, 1863. 

516. After several weeks of fruitless efforts upon the 
north, Grant marched down the west side of the river, and 
crossed below the city. From May 1st to the 18th, he de- 
feated the Confederates at Fort Gibson, Jackson, Cham- 
pion Hills, and Big Black River, and within seventeen days 
after he landed, Pemberton's army was shut up within the 
intrenchments of Vicksburg. After three desperate as- 
saults, the Union troops threw up intrenchments and com- 
menced undermining the city. The siege lasted forty- 
seven days. 

517. On the 4th of July. 

518. The Confederates lost the cities of Vicksburg and 
Jackson ; 37,000 prisoners ; 10,000 killed and wounded, 
and immense stores. On the fall of Vicksburg, Port Hud- 
son surrendered to Banks. The Mississippi was now open 
to the Gulf, and one great object of the North accomplished. 

519. But little occurred until June, when Rosecrans, 
with 60,000 men, marched against Bragg and compelled 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 79 

him to evacuate Chattanooga. Sept. 8th, Sept. 19th and 
20th, was fought the battle of Chickamauga. The Union 
army was defeated and withdrew to Chattanooga, while 
Bragg occupied the heights commanding the city, and 
threatened them with starvation. 

520. The feeling was one of great interest and anxiety. 
The Army of the Cumberland had been defeated, and it 
seemed but a matter of time when a surrender must be the 
result of the Confederate victories. 

521. Grant was now appointed to succeed Rosecrans, 
and the relief was obtained by Hooker coming with two 
corps from the Army of the Potomac, and Sherman, who 
hastened by forced marches from luka, 200 miles away. 

522. He was in Virginia. They came by rail, 23,000 
strong, in seven days, a distance of 1,200 miles. 

523. The first movement was made by Gen. Thomas, 
who captured Orchard Knob, Nov. 23. The following day 
Hooker charged the fortifications of Lookout Mountain. 
With desperate determination the Union forces carried the 
heights and swept over the crest, driving the enemy before 
them. The next morning Hooker advanced on the south 
of Missionary Ridge. Sherman, during the whole time, 
was engaged on the northern flank. Grant, from his posi- 
tion on Orchard Knob, saw the effect of Sherman's assaults. 
The Confederate line in front of him was being weakened, 
and with a bold movement launched Thomas' corps on its 
center. The orders were to take the rifle-pits at the foot 
of Missionary Ridge, then halt and re-form; but in the 
excitement of successes, officers and men pushed forward 
and swept up the ascent. Grant caught the inspiration 
and the entire forces were ordered in one grand charge to 
engage in the conflict. Up they went, over rocks and 
chasms, all lines broken in the eagerness to reach the sum- 
mit. Without firing a shot, and heedless of the tempest 
hurled upon them, they gained the crest, captured the guns 
and turned them on the retreating foe. That night the 
Union camp-fires, glistening along the heights about Chat- 
tanooga, proclaimed the success of this, the most brilliant 
of Grant's achievements, and the most picturesque of the 
battles of the war. This battle has become famed as the 
"battle above the clouds." 

524. The Union forces possessed Chattanooga, Bragg's 
army was routed and that general resigned. It gave con- 
trol of East Tennessee, and became the doorway by which 



80 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

the Union army gained easy access to Virginia, North Caro- 
lina, South Carolina, Georgia and Alabama. 

525. Gen. Hooker, Jan. 26th. 

526. May 2d and 3d. The Union army was defeated 
with great loss. 

527. "Stonewall" Jackson. While returning from a 
reconnoissance at the front, he was fired upon by his own 
men, who mistook his escort for Federal cavalry. 

528. Gen. Meade. 

529. With the flower of the Confederate army he 
crossed the Potomac, passed through Maryland, entered 
Pennsylvania, and proceeded within four miles of Harris- 
burg. 

580. By the battle of Gettysburg, w^hich was fought the 
1st, 2d and 3d of July. Gen. Meade commanded the 
Union forces, Gen. Lee retreating to Virginia. 

531. The Union loss was 23,000; the Confederate, 36,000. 

532. These losses and defeats having occurred at the 
same time, caused the turning-point of the war, and the 
Confederacy began to wane. 

533. Having confidence in the ability of the iron-clads 
to resist cannon balls, he attempted to run the fortifications 
and force his way up to the city. The attempt was a dis- 
astrous failure. 

534. They had gained the great battles of Chickamauga 
and Chancellorville. The Union cause in Texas was de- 
pressed. Galveston was seized, and they successfully re- 
sisted every attack on Charleston. 

535. They had taken Vicksburg and Port Hudson, and 
won the battles of Chattanooga and Gettysburg. Arkan- 
sas, East Tennessee, large portions of Louisiana, Mississippi, 
and some portions of Texas were held by Union troops. 

536. Congress in 1863 passed the Conscription Act, and 
under this act the President ordered a draft for 300,000 
men. This led to a riot in New York City, July 13th, by 
which 150 lives were lost, and a very large amount of prop- 
erty was destroyed. 

537. On the 28th of February he made a bold and suc- 
cessful raid upon the exterior defenses of Richmond. Rail- 
road tracks were torn up, telegraph wires cut, six large 
grist mills destroyed, and heavy damage done. At a point 
three miles from Richmond he found the enemy's works 
too strong to be assailed by a force of cavalry, and Kilpat- 
rick withdrew, camping that night within six miles of the 
Confederate capital. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 81 

538. Many miles of railroads were cut, several hundred 
prisoners captured, and $7,000,000 worth of property de- 
stroyed. 

.^39. While attempting to return, after destroying the 
grist mills on the James River Canal, he fell into an ambush 
of the enemy and was killed. His remains were treated 
by the Confederates with indignity. 

540. March 3d, 1864. 

541. It la}^ in the armies of Lee in Virginia, and Joseph 
E. Johnston in Georgia. 

542. Grant was to march against Lee, and Sherman to 
attack Johnston and sweep through to the coast. 

543. He started with a force of 100,000 men. For one 
hundred miles there was continuous skirmishing. Sher- 
man would drive Johnston into a stronghold, and then with 
consummate skill would outflank him, when Johnston 
with equal skill would retreat to a new post and prepare 
to meet his opponent again. Several bloody battles were 
fought, and finally Johnston retired, July 10th, to the 
intrenchments of Atlanta. Hood was now put in com- 
mand. 

544. September 2d, 1864. _ 

545. There had been ten pitched battles, and scores of 
lesser engagements. It cost the Union army 30,000 men, 
and the Confederacy about 40,000. 

546. He turned to invade Tennessee, with the expecta- 
tion that Sherman would follow him, and Georgia be saved 
from invasion. 

547. He marched against Gens. Thomas and Schofield, 
at Nashville. After severe fighting, Thomas withdrew from 
the fortifications and remained two weeks. He then sud- 
denly burst forth and drove the Confederate forces out of 
their intrenchments into headlong flight. The army was 
completely demoralized, and, for further use, destroyed. 

548. Hood having moved from his path, there was but 
little to impede his progress. With 60,000 troops, in five 
weeks he had marched three hundred miles, and captured 
Savannah. 

549. A fertile region, sixty miles wide and three hun- 
dred miles long, was devastated, and three hundred miles 
of railroad were destroyed. 

550. The battles of the Wilderness and Spottsylvania. 

551. After crossing the Rapidan, the Union army 
plunged into the Wilderness, where they were attacked, 
May 5th, by the Confederate army. There was none of 



82 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

the pomp or glory of war, only its horrid butchery. The 
ranks dashed into the woods, and in the gloomy shad- 
ows, dense with smoke, this strangest of battles, which no 
eye could follow, was fought. The third day, both armies, 
worn out by this desperate struggle, remained in their in- 
trenchments. Grant lost 20,000 men ; Lee, 10,000. 

552. *He pushed his army by the Confederate right flank 
towards Spottsylvania Court House, where for five days. 
May 8th to 12th, terrible fighting occurred. Ten thousand 
men fell on each side. 

553. Grant now concluded to try the flank movement 
again, and pushed forward to Cold Harbor, a short distance 
from Richmond. Lee hastened by a shorter route, and 
arrived in time to prepare for the defense. Early on the 
morning of June 4th, the Union army made an assault on 
Cold Harbor. Twenty minutes after the first shot was 
fired, fully ten thousand Union men were stretched writhing 
on the sod, or still in death, while the enemy's loss was 
little over one thousand. 

554. The Confederate works could not be carried, so 
Grant threw up intrenchments, and prepared for a siege of 
Richmond. 

555. The Union army lost 70,000, and the Confederates 
40,000. 

556. " I propose to fight it out on this line, if it takes 
all summer." 

557. The Mine Explosion and the capture of the Wel- 
don Railroad. 

558. A mine was dug beneath a strong Confederate fort 
in front of Petersburg, and was fired with a blast of 8,000 
pounds of powder. The fort and garrison were destroyed. 
At the same time the Union artillery opened along the 
line, and an assaulting column rushed forward, but it 
stopped in the crater produced by the explosion. The 
Confederates, rallying, turned their artillery toward the 
seething mass within the demolished fort, and about 4,000 
were lost before they could retreat to the Union lines. 

559. He entered Maryland, threatened Washington and 
Baltimore, defeated Wallace, and then withdrew to Vir- 
ginia. In the same month, July, he crossed into Pennsyl- 
vania, his troops setting fire to Chambersburgh; after which 
he withdrew. 

560. A vast amount of stores, five thousand horses, and 
a withdrawal of part of Grant's army from before Peters- 
burg. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 83 

561. In September he defeated Early at Winchester 
and Fisher's Hill, and in a week destroyed half of his army 
and put the rest to flight. Early returned with reinforce- 
ments, and, under cover of a dense fog, surprised Sheri- 
dan's army at Cedar Creek, October 19th, and drove it in 
confusion. At this critical moment Sheridan arrived from 
Winchester, checked the retreating columns, turned and 
won the battle. 

562. This was the most brilliant campaign of the war. 
In one month he had virtually destroyed Early's army. 
Sheridan's loss was 17,000. 

563. Gen. Banks was sent up the Red River to destroy 
the Confederate authority in that region and Texas. This 
campaign was a Confederate triumph. Banks lost 5,000 
men, 18 guns, and large supplies. 

564. April 12th. The Confederates were maddened by 
the sight of negro troops opposing them, and a terrible 
massacre followed. 

565. The capture of Mobile Harbor, Aug. 5th, and 
closing it against blockade runners. The city of Mobile 
was not captured until April 12th, 1865. 

566. This fort defended the harbor of Wilmington, N. 
C. The expedition consisted of seventy vessels, under Com- 
modore Porter, and a land force under Gen. Butler. After 
a fierce bombardment, Dec. 24th and 25th, Butler decided 
that the fort could not be taken by assault, and the army 
returned to Fortress Monroe. Commodore Porter asked for 
another trial. The same troops were sent back under Gen. 
Terry. By a series of trenches a column of troops worked 
themselves up within two hundred yards of the fortifica- 
tions. At the word they rushed forward and burst into the . 
fort. The hand-to-hand conflict within lasted for hours. 
Late at night the garrison surrendered, Jan. 15th, 1865. 

567. A band of raiders from Canada assaulted the town, 
robbed the banks, and seized horses from the livery stables 
and returned to Canada before the inhabitants recovered 
from their surprise. The entire raid was accomplished in 
half an hour. 

568. On the night of November 25th, 1864, an attempt 
was made to burn New York by saturating beds in the prin- 
cipal hotels with a mixture of phosphorus and oil. The 
attempt was providentially discovered, and a great disaster 
averted. 

569. She was a British steamer, built in England, but 
officered and commissioned by the Confederate govern- 



84 ■ ^ THE QUESTION BOOK. 

ment. Her object was to prey upon Union commerce. 
She captured over sixty vessels. Her commander was 
Capt. Sernmes. 

570. The engagement was off the coast of France, in 
the English Channel, June 15th, 1864. The Alabama was 
sunk. Capt. Winslow, commander of the Kearsarge, res- 
cued a part of the sinking crew. The English yacht, 
Deerhound, picked up the remainder and steamed off to 
the British coast. Capt. Semmes was among the number. 

571. The destruction of the Confedetate iron-clad Albe- 
marle, at Plymouth, North Carolina. This was accom- 
plished by Lieut. Cushing, who fastened a torpedo to the 
Albemarle, which exploded and sunk her. 

572. There was much dissatisfaction at the North with 
the conduct of the war ; the debt was becoming enormous 
and paper money greatly depreciated. Grant had been re- 
pulsed at Cold Harbor and Early had made successful 
raids. In the midst of these calamities Abraham Lincoln 
was renominated by the Republicans and Geo. B. McClel- 
lan the nominee of the Democrats, who stood firmly for 
the prosecution of the war, but was not in full sympathy 
with the policy of the administration. Lincoln's majority 
was over four hundred thousand. 

573. In July, 1864, it required two dollars and ninety 
cents to buy one dollar in gold. 

574. They had gained the battles of Sabin Cross Roads, 
Wilderness, Bermuda Hundreds, Spottsylvania, New Mar- 
ket, and Cold Harbor. They had resisted the Red River 
and Florida expeditions ; two attacks upon Petersburg, and 
one against Fort Fisher. 

575. They had gained the battles of Atlanta and those 
preceding it — Dalton, Resaca, Dallas, and Lost and Kene- 
saw Mountain — Winchester, Fisher's Hill, Cedar Creek, 
and Nashville. They had captured Fort de Russy (this 
was taken by Banks in his Red River expedition) ; the 
forts in Mobile Harbor, and Fort McAllister ; Sheridan 
had annihilated Early's army; Sherman had marched across 
Georgia and taken Savannah ; Thomas had destroyed 
Hood's army, and the Confederacy was almost extin- 
guished ; only North and South Carolina were retained. 

576. The end of the war was clearly at hand. Sherman 
was to move north from Savannah against Johnston, and 
then join Grant in the final attack upon Lee. Sheridan 
had swept down from the Shenandoah, cut the railroads 
north of Richmond, and formed in line before Petersburg. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 85 

Wilson was in Alabama and Georgia, while Stoneman 
held the passes of the Alleghanies and waited in North 
Carolina for the issue in Virginia. 

577. Early in February he started north, meeting with 
untold difficulties; still, like a tornado, they swept on. 
Before them Avas terror ; behind them were ashes. Colum- 
bia was captured Feb. 17th, and on the following day 
Charleston was evacuated. Johnston fiercely opposed 
them at Averysboro and Bentonville, but was defeated. 
On the banks of the Neuse he met Schofield and Terry, 
where with an army of 100,000 men they waited for the 
final charge against the Confederacy. The distance trav- 
.eled was over 425 miles, one hundred of which was almost 
a complete swamp. 

578. Lee was now shut up in Richmond, and his only 
hope of prolonging the struggle was to cut his way out. 
He decided to attack Grant's lines, cause a concentration 
of troops, and retreat by other routes before the plan was 
discovered. His plans were failures, as Grant returned the 
advance with renewed vigor, capturing the outer defenses 
and preventing a retreat. 

579. Sheridan, with his cavalry and heavy columns of 
infantry, i^ushed out from Grant's left wing, and threw a 
heavy force behind the Confederate position at Five Forks. 
Assailed in every direction, the garrison was overwhelmed 
and five thousand men were taken prisoners. 

580. Lee's position was fast becoming untenable. His 
right was turned and his rear threatened. 

58L The next morning, April 3d, the Union army 
advanced in an overwhelming assault along the whole 
front. By noon the Confederate line of intrenchments, 
before which the Army of the Potomac had lain so long, 
was broken, and thousands* of prisoners captured. That 
night Petersburg and Richmond were evacuated. The 
next morning the Union troops took possession of the 
Confederate capital. 

582. Lee surrendered to Gen. Grant near Lynchburg, 
Va., April 9th, and Johnston to Sherman in North Caro- 
lina, April 26th. 

583. He was taken in disguise by a party of Union 
troops, in Georgia, May 10th, 1865, and imprisoned in 
.Fortress Monroe, but was afterwards bailed out. 

584. Four years. 

585. The 14th of April, 1865. by J. Wilkes Booth, at 
Ford's Theater. 



86 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

586. After shooting the President he sprang upon the 
stage. His spur caught in the American flag, and, throw- 
ing him heavily, broke his leg. He escaped, mounted his 
horse and fled into Maryland, where he was overtaken in 
a barn and shot. 

587. On the same night of the assassination of Lincoln 
an accomplice stabbed Mr. Seward while lying ill in bed. 

588. Harold, Payne, Atzerodt, and Mrs. Surrat were 
hanged ; Arnold, Mudd and O'Laughlin imprisoned for 
life, and Spangler was sentenced for six years. 

589. 2,942,748. The nnmber obtained was 2,690,401. 

590. The "Union armies probably lost in battle, or by 
its efl'ects, 300,000 men, and 200,000 were crippled for 
life. The Confederate loss is not known, but, undoubtedly, 
as heavy. 

591. The Union debt August 31st, 1865, was nearly 
$2,844,000,000. The daily expenses at one time reached 
the sum of $2,500,000. 

592. By an act of Congress, ratified by two-thirds of the 
States. This act is the thirteenth amendment, which was 
duly ratified Dec. 18th, 1865. 

593. Andrew Johnson. He was inaugurated the day of 
Lincoln's death, April 15th, 1865. 

594. The exercise of the veto power. 

595. The Freedmen's Bureau, the Civil Rights, and the 
Tenure of Office bills. 

596. The first provides for the establishment of a de- 
partment for the care and protection of the freedmen. 
The Civil Rights bill guarantees to the negroes the rights 
of citizenship. The Tenure of Office bill makes it neces- 
sary that the consent of the Senate shall be obtained for 
the removal, by the President, of any person from a civil 
office. 

597. The charge was misdemeanors, contempt of the ^, 
Senate for violation of the Tenure of Office bill by the 
attempt to remove Edwin M. Stanton, Secretary of War. 
He was acquitted, the two-thirds majority necessary for 
conviction lacking one vote. 

598. It guarantees equal civil rights to all, and bases 
representation in each of the States on the number of 
voters. It was adopted July 28th, 1868. 

599. The recall of the French from Mexico, under 
Maximilian. 

600. West Virginia and Nevada. 

601. He recognized the State governments that had 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 87 

been formed during the war under the protection of the 
Union army in Virginia, Tennessee, Arkansas and Louis- 
iana. In the other States he appointed provisional gov- 
ernors and authorized the calhng of conventions to 
form loyal governments. These conventions met, repealed 
the ordinances of secession, repudiated the Confederate 
debt, and ratified the thirteenth amendment. On these 
conditions Johnson claimed that the States, having never 
been legally out of the Union, should be restored to their 
rights in the Union. Pardon was proclaimed to those who 
had been engaged in secession, except to certain classes. 

602. On Christmas day, 1868. 

603. Congress decided that the President had no power 
to prescribe the conditions for the admission of the seceded 
States. His proclamations and orders were treated as of 
no value. Tennessee was admitted, but the other States 
were placed under military rule. After a bitter and pro- 
tracted struggle, governments were finally established in 
Arkansas, Alabama, Florida, Louisiana, North Carolina 
and South Carolina. 

604. Congress made a requirement that every candidate 
for holding office should swear that he had not partici- 
pated in the secession movement. As but few Southern- 
ers could take this oath it was called ■ '^ iron-clad," and 
the offices were filled by men coming from the North soon 
after the war, and these men were termed "carpet-bag- 
gers." 

605. It occupied three years. They were not 'repre- 
sented from 1861 to 1868. Virginia, Mississippi and Texas 
were not allowed to vote for President until after Grant's 
first, administration. 

60% The Fenians were making preparations to cross 
the "Canadian frontier at Buffalo and St. Albans, Vt. 
JohnsO^ issued a proclamation declaring the movement a 
J violation- of our neutrality, and sent Gen. Meade to exe- 
cute that law. 

607. By a purchase from Russia, in October, 1867, for 
$7,200,000 in gold. It contains 500,000 square miles. 

608. In 1868 an embassy from China, under the charge 
of Anson "Burlingame, embassador to China, visited the 
United States. This was the first event of its kind in the 
history of that nation. A treaty was formed granting 
valuable commercial privileges. 

During the war France attempted to establish an em- 
pire in Mexico, and Maximilian, archduke of Austria, was 



88 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

chosen emperor. The United States protested, but were 
unable to enforce the " Monroe doctrme." After the close 
of the war the government again demanded of Napoleon the 
recall of French troops. Maximilian, deprived of foreign 
aid, was defeated by the Mexicans, and on June 19th, 
1867, was shot. 

609. June, 1866. The first cable was attempted in 
1856, and laid from New York to St. Johns, Newfound- 
land. In 1857 a failure was made to cross the ocean. In 
1858 another cable was laid and apparently worked suc- 
cessfully, but on September 1st it ceased to work. Mr. 
Field, the projector of this great enterprise, was not dis- 
couraged and a third time organized a company which in 
June, 1866, successfully accomplished the feat. There are 
now several cable companies, and undoubtedly messages 
will not be much more expensive than by wires on the 
land. 

610. The Republican party nominated U. S. Grant and 
Schuyler Colfax; the Democrats, Horatio Seymour and 
Frank P. Blair. Virginia, Mississippi and Texas had not 
been " reconstructed " and were not allowed to vote. 

611. In 1869. The distance from New York to San 
Francisco is about 3,300 miles. 

612. March 30th, 1870. 

613. The right of the citizens of the United States to vote 
shall not be denied or abridged by the United States or any 
State, on account of race, color, or previous condition of 
servitude. 

614. A great fire broke out in Chicago, Sunday night, 
Oct. 8th, 1871. It was the most terrible conflagration in 
modern times. Three thousand acres of almost solid 
blocks were devastated. Twenty-five thousand buildings 
w^ere burned, $200,000,000 worth of property destroyed, and 
one hundred thousand persons were rendered homeless. 
Contributions to the amount of more than $7,500,000 were 
sent from nearly all parts of the world. During the same* 
autumn wide-spread conflagrations raged in the forests of 
Wisconsin, Minnesota and Michigan. Entire villages were 
consumed. In Wisconsin alone nearly one thousand five 
hundred people perished. 

On Nov. 9th, 1872, an extensive fire swept over sixty 
acres in the center of the wholesale trade of the city of 
Boston, and destroyed $70,000,000 worth of property. 

615. The refusal of the English government to pay the 
damages to American commerce, caused by the cruise of 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 89 

the Alabama. It was settled by arbitration, the English 
government paying $15,500,000. 

616. It was submitted to the Emperor of Germany and 
was decided in favor of the United States. 

617. This republic, comprising a large part of the island 
of Hayti, applied for admission to the United States, but 
was rejected. A commission appointed by the President 
to examine its condition, reported favorably, but the meas- 
ure was rejected by Congress. 

618. Grant was renominated by the Republicans, and 
the Democrats endorsed Horace Greeley, the Liberal-Repub- 
lican nominee. 

619. Horace Greeley was one of the great self-made 
men of our country. Born in poverty, he diligently 
worked from the lowest position in his profession to the 
most renowned editor of the age. Aiiwo years of age he 
manifested a natural tendency to study reading; at four 
years he could read anything, and at six could spell any 
word in the English language. At fifteen years of age he 
entered a printing office with wages at forty dollars a year. 
In 1841 he founded the New York Tribune, which was at 
one time the greatest political paper in the United States. 
When civil war seemed imminent, his keen foresight antic- 
ipated the terrible struggle, and to avoid this conflict he 
advocated that the sister States should go in peace, but 
when war was proclaimed he urged a vigorous prosecution. 
At the close of the war he pleaded for immediate concilia- 
tion, and was a signer of the bail-bond of Jefferson Davis 
Just before the close of the presidential canvass his wife 
died, and this, together with the desertion of his friends 
and the excitement of the contest, unsettled his mind. 
He was carried to a private asylum, where he died in 
1872. ^ . ^. . 

620. Having refused to stay upon their reservation m 
Oregon, troops were sent against them, whereupon they' 
retreated to their fastnesses in the Lava Beds. Peace com- 
missioners, proposing to arrange the difficulty, held a con- 
ference with the chiefs. In the midst of this council, the 
Indians treacherously murdered Gen. Canby and Rev. Dr. 
Thomas and wounded Mr. Meacham. The Modocs were 
then bombarded and forced to surrender. Captain Jack 
and several of the leaders of the band were executed at 
Fort Klamath, October 3d, 1873. o ^ -, i 

621. In the autumn of 1873 Jay Cooke & Co., bankers 
of Philadelphia, engaged too heavily in railroad schemes. 



90 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

especially the Northern Pacific, and failed. Their failure 
produced a financial crisis, and hundreds of prominent 
firms all over the Union were involved in ruin. The 
money market became stringent, and a stagnation of busi- 
ness followed. But for the timely aid of the government 
in throwing several million of dollars on the market of 
Wall street, the distress would have been much greater. 
" Black Friday " was applied to the day when almost every 
man, firm and business seemed to totter and tumble into 
ruins. 

622. The hundredth anniversary of the battle of Lex- 
ington, of Bunker Hill, and the signing of the Declaration 
of Independence. 

623. Fairmount Park, Philadelphia, was the scene of 
this imposing display. Over two hundred buildings were 
scattered over the extensive ground, the largest, the main 
Exhibition Building, covering over twenty acres. Exhibits 
from every country and clime were represented, and to 
describe the grandeur of such a display would be impos- 
sible. The exhibition lasted six months, from May to 
November, and the total number of visitors was 9,910,966. 

624. Troops were sent to force them to return to their 
reservation. On the 25th of June, 1876, Gen. Custer 
suddenly came upon the enemy and a desperate conflict 
ensued. Gen. Custer and his entire command were killed. 
The event was deeply lamented by the American people, 
as the General was beloved by all who knew him. 

625. The Republicans nominated Rutherford B. Hayes 
and Wm. A. Wheeler; the Democrats, Samuel J. Tilden and 
Thomas A. Hendricks; the'Greenback party, Peter Cooper 
and Samuel F. Cary. 

626. Both parties claimed the election, and at the 
counting of the electoral vote no decision was reached, as 
the Republicans contended that the States of South Caro- 
lina, Florida and Louisiana had been carried by fraud, and 
asked that the certificates of election be thrown out and 
the opposition accepted. 

627. In order to come to a settlement of the contested 
election returns a Joint Electoral Commission was ap- 
pointed, and composed of five United States senators, five 
representatives, and five judges of the Supreme Court. 
This body decided that 185 electoral votes had been cast 
for Hayes and Wheeler, and 184 for Tilden and Hendricks. 

628. The Republicans were jubilant, as it sustained 
their charges of fraud and intimidation, while the Demo- 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 91 

crats were loud in their denunciations against such a deci- 
sion, claiming that the office had been stolen, and that the 
commission had decided, not by evidence, but by party 
influence, as eight of them were Republicans and seven 
were Democrats ; therefore Hayes was termed by his oppo- 
nents as the eight by seven President. 

629. With a look of horror upon his face he waived his 
hand to the delegation who sought his advice and urged 
that no act of theirs should imperil the country. Like 
Horace Greeley, he instinctively saw a terrible vision and 
with the feelings of a true patriot waived it from him. 

630. To make " no dismissal except for cause, and no 
promotion except for merit." 

631. It was one of conciliation. The troops which had 
hitherto sustained the Republican State governments in 
South Carolina and Louisiana were withdrawn and Demo- 
cratic officials at once took control of the local affairs. He 
also appointed Key, a Southerner, as Postmaster General. 

632. On nearly all of the principal railroads in the 
Northern States a strike of its workmen occurred, the cause 
being a general reduction of wages. At Pittsburg, Pa., the 
strike became a terrible riot, destroying vast amounts of 
property, and was quelled only by an assault of the troops. 
In this riot over one hundred lives were lost, and the Penn- 
sylvania Railroad suffered the loss of nearly $3,000,000 
worth of property. 

633. In 1873 Congress demonetized silver, and made 
gold the sole standard of our currency. Opposition arose 
to this act, and in 1878 a bill was passed making silver a 
legal tender in the payment of debts. 

634. In the summer of 1878 it broke out in New Or- 
leans and spread with alarming rapidity northward along 
the Mississippi into Missouri and Tennessee. Over 7,0l)0 
deaths were reported. 

635. January 1st, 1879. On December 17th, 1878, 
gold, for the first time since January, 1862, sold in New 
York at par. 

636. The Ute Indians, at the White River Agency, be- 
came dissatisfied on account of the encroachnients of the 
miners and the non-payment of money promised by the 
government, took up arms and massacred the white men 
at the agency. They were suppressed by U. S. troops. 

637. The census of 1880 showed a population of over 
50,000,000. In 1887 it is estimated at nearly 60,000,000. 
The increase from 1870 to 1880 was 12,000,000. 



92 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

638. Difficulties between Great Britain and the United 
States occurred because of the fisheries of the northeast- 
ern coast. The matter was left to a commission, which 
awarded Great Britain the sum of $5,500,000. 

■ 639. One in relation to commerce, and the other grant- 
ing to our government the regulation of Chinese immigra- 
tion. 

640. A portion of the party were not satisfied with the 
question of conciliation with the South. They believed 
that, if the electoral vote had legally been cast for him as 
President, it must also have been cast for the Republican 
State officials, and that it was the duty of the President to 
protect those officials by the presence of United States 
troops. 

641. The Republicans nominated James A. Garfield 
and Chester A. Arthur. The Democrats nominated Win- 
field S. Hancock and William H. English. The Green- 
back-Labor party nominated James B. Weaver and* Benja- 
min J. Chambers. 

642. The principal issue was that Garfield was a Re- 
publican and Hancock a Democrat. The question of tariff 
and free-trade was discussed to some extent. 

643. They were opposed to the issue of money by any 
individual or corporation. That it should be delegated 
solely to the government of the United States and made a 
full legal tender and not a promise to pay. They believed 
that the depreciation of our greenback money was due to 
false legislation, whereby exceptions were placed upon it — 
"except duties on imports and interest upon the public 
debt." They claimed that these exceptions were virtually 
a repudiation by the government, that they would pay 
them out in one channel and refuse to receive them in 
another, thus producing a demand for gold to fill these 
exceptions, and as a natural consequence place this metal 
as a commodity to be bought and sold according to the 
demand. As a proof that a full legal tender would not 
depreciate they cited the first issue of $60,000,000 of 
paper money, which passed through the war at par with 
gold and even commanded one quarter per cent, premium 
because of its convenience in handling. They also advo- 
cated that monopolies were fast controlling all kinds of 
business and were leading to the consolidation of wealth 
in the hands of the few ; that labor was fast becoming a 
slave to avarice and greed ; that railroads, telegraphs and 
express companies were extortionate in their charge for 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 93 

transportation; that legislation was enacted for the rich 
without due regard for the poor ; that our factories were 
overburdensome to women and children ; that postofiices 
should be filled by a selection of the people in each dis- 
trict ; that politics had become but a system of spoils, and 
other abuses too numerous to mention. 

644. March 4th, 1881. 

645. The Star Route frauds, whereby contracts in the 
West for carrying the mails were so manipulated that great 
frauds were perpetrated. Within two months contracts to 
the amount of nearly $2,000,000 were annulled. The con- 
spirators were tried, but judgment was never rendered 
against them. 

646. On the morning of July 2d, 1881, by Charles J. 
Guiteau, at a railroad station, Washington, D. C. 

647. The assassination produced a great sensation and 
a profound and universal sorrow was felt among the people. 
So intense was the national grief that the preparations for 
the celebration of the approaching holiday were generally 
abandoned. President Garfield died on the 19th of Sep- 
tember following at Long Branch, N. J. He was buried at 
Cleveland, O. The assassin was tried, convicted and hanged. 

648. By her direction a wreath of flowers was placed 
upon his coffin, in loving sympathy with the martyred 
President's wife. 

649. Immediately on being legally informed of the 
President's death he took the oath of office. 

650. Nearly 100,000 persons were rendered homeless. 

651. It is a suspension bridge connecting New York 
and Brooklyn, and was opened to the use of the public in 
1883. This remarkable structure was begun January 3d, 
1870, and is 5,989 feet long. The height of towers is 278 
feet and the length of the suspended span from tower to 
tower, is 1,596 feet. The height from the water, at the 
center, is 135 feet. The four great cables are 151 inches in 
diameter, and each cable contains 5,296 parallel (not 
twisted) galvanized steel, oil-coated wires, closely wrapped, 
and weighing, with its covering, 897i tons. 

652. It was passed in 1883, and aimed to regulate, by 
means of examinations, instead of political preferments, 
the system of appointments and promotions in the civil 
service of the United States. 

653. October 1st, 1883. 

654. In 1884 a bill was approved by which a governor, 
judge, marshal and other officers were to be appointed for 



94 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

a term of four years, but no legislative assembly or con- 
gressional delegate was authorized. Sitka was made the 
temporary seat of government. 

655. An Industrial and Cotton Exposition from Decem- 
ber, 1884, to May, 1885. The Exposition was opened by 
President Arthur in the Executive Mansion at Washington 
by telegraph. 

656. It was forbidden, in 1882, for ten years. 

657. The Democrats nominated Grover Cleveland and 
Thomas A. Hendricks. Tlie Republicans, James E. Blaine 
and John A. Logan. The Greenback-Labor party, B. -F. 
Butler and A. M. West. The Prohibitionists, John P. St. 
John and William Daniel. 

658. Between the Democrats and Republicans, the 
tariff, individual slander and personalities. The People's 
party discussed the same measures as were adopted before, 
while the Prohibitionists were earnest in their convictions 
of prohibition by the general government. 

659. New York held the deciding vote, and its majority 
was about 1,045. 

660. Intense excitement prevailed until the official 
count of New York was given, when there came a relaxa- 
tion of this suspense. Republicans were gloomy, and many 
prophesied hard times, a depression of business and a gene- 
ral misfortune to the government, while the Democrats 
were wild with delight, bands of music were called out, 
processions formed and general feasting and rejoicing were 
the order of the day. 

661. They held that the dramshop was the great curse 
of humanity ; that license was but a co-operation of the 
government in crime ; that nrurder, arson, wretchedness, 
poverty and woe were but the fruits of this traffic ; that 
the protection of our political system, the protection of 
our sons and daughters, our husbands, our fathers, our 
brothers rested upon the downfall of this terrible demon 
which walked the halls of legislation — that grasped the 
throats of our legislators, that trampled beneath its feet 
the sacred truths of our Sabbath day, that boldly defied 
the law, that cruelly dragged its victims from the highest 
walks of life to the lowest depths of hell ; that it spared 
neither young nor old, matron or maiden ; that this liquid 
demon would burn the manhood of the most gifted ; would 
wring from the crushed or starved wife the last morsel of 
sustenance ; that it would pollute all channels, destroy all 
affection, degrade all aspirations ; that it would breed dis- 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 95 

ease, transmit misery, degrade mankind and ruin the souls 
of men. 

662. Secretary of State — Thomas F. Bayard, of Delaware. 
Secretary of the Treasury — Daniel Manning, of New York. 
Secretary of War — William E. Endicott, of Massachusetts. 
Secretary of the iSavy — WiUiam E. Whitney, of New York. 
Secretary of the Interior — L. Q. C, Lamar, of Mississippi. 
Postmaster-General — William F. Vilas, of Wisconsin. 
Attorney-General — A. H. Garland, of Arkansas. 

663. The Republicans declared that he was not living 
up to his own pledges of civil service; that his removals 
were partisan, under the cloak of pretended reasons; that 
offensive partisans were wholly on one side, and that his 
reform measures were all sham. Many of the Democrats, 
on the other hand, were impatient over the slowness of a 
change of offices, and declared that Jackson's motto of '' to the 
victors belong the spoils," should be applied by Cleveland. 

^ 664. He died at Mount McGregor, N. Y., July 23d, 1885. 
His book met an enormous salCo At one time the publish- 
ers sent Mrs. Grant a check for $250,000. 

665. At his home in Indianapolis, Nov. 25th, 1885. 
Five times. 

66(5. George B. McClellan, Winfield S. Hancock, 
Charles Francis Adams and Chester A. Arthur. 

667. About 54,000. Nearly 400,000. 

668. Nearly 7,000,000 bales a year. The United States 
now produces the cotton supply of the world. 

669. Nearly $200,000,000 a year. 

670. About 125,000 miles, and cost, with equipments, 
$7,000,000,000. 

671. 40,000 copies of a single sheet, printed on both 
sides, in one hour. 

672. The telegraph, the sewing-machine, the reaper, the 
mower, the horse-rake, -the steam fire-engine, the telephone, 
the steamship, the palace car, the elevator, the threshing 
machine, the safe, the breech-loading gun, and a thousand 
common devices that add to the convenience, the comfort 
and the progress of mankind. 

673. Over 22,000 are reported by the Patent Office. 

674. It is the grand foundation of our prosperity and 
our progress. Our free school system is the open channel 
by which all can acquire, if they choose, a fair knowledge 
of the principles of business, labor or trade. 

675. About 140,000,000 have been donated to the States 
for school purposes. 



96 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

676. In 1884 there were four hundred and fifty. The 
number in 1887 is some greater. 

677. Over 1100,000,000 per annum. Probably about 
12,000,000 children attend these schools. 

678. Washington Irving. 

679. Over 15,000. ' ^ 

680. Among the historians may be mentioned Prescott, 
Bancroft and Motley. Among the Poets — Bryant, Whittier, 
Simms, Holmes, Poe and Longfellow. Romance and Mis- 
cellaneous Writers — Cooper, Hawthorn, Irving, Channing, 
Bayard, and Lsegare. Orators — Clay, Calhoun, Webster, 
Benton, Everett, Seward, Phillips, Prentiss, Douglas, Choate 
and Stephens. 

681. ^he Haymarket riot in Chicago, May 3d. The 
riot of Milwaukee, May 6th. The earthquake of Charles- 
ton, South Carolina. The conviction of the eight Anarchists 
of Chicago. The organization of the Knights of Labor. 
The gales off the coast of Texas. The wrecks on the lakes 
of Michigan, Superior and extending to Ontario. And the 
unveiling of " Liberty Enlightening the World." 

682. John A. Logan, U. S. Senator from Illinois. 

boo. Presidents. Inaugurated. Years in Offlce. 

George Washington 1789 8 

John Adams 1797 4 

Thomas Jefferson 1801 8 

James Madison 1809 8 

James Monroe 1817 8 

John Quincy Adams 1825 4 

Andrew Jackson 1829 8 

Martin Van Buren 1837 4 

*William H. Harrison 1841 t\ 

John Tyler 1841 Shk 

James K. Polk 1845 4 

*Zachary Taylor "....1849 U 

Millard Fillmore... 1850 ' 2f 

Franklin Pierce 1853 4 

James Buchanan 1857 4 

^Abraham Lincoln 1861 4i 

Andrew Johnson 1865 3i 

Ulysses S. Grant 1869 8 

Rutherford B. Hayes 1877 4 

*JamesA. Garfield 1881 i 

Chester A. Arthur 1881 Si 

Grover B. Cleveland 1885 

* Died in office. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



97 



684. John Adams, Thomas Jefferson, and James Mon- 
roe. Adams and Jefferson expired the same day — July 
4th, 1826. Monroe died in 1831. 

685o John Adams and John Quincy Adams. 

686. Bacon's, Clayborne's, Shay's, Dorr's, Whisky In- 
surrection, and the Civil War. 

687. 



States. 


Where Settled. 


When. 


By Whom. 


M- 
niitted. 


Florida 


St. Augustine. 
Jamestown . . . 

Albany 

Plymouth 

Bergen 

Dover 


1565 
1607 
1614 
1620 
1620 
1623 
1630 
1633 
1634 
1636 
1638 
1643 
1650 
1669 
1670 
1670 
1688 
1685 
1690 
1693 
1699 
1702 
1699 
1724 
1733 
1775 
1757 
1769 
1770 
1788 
1811 
1833 
1838 


Spanish 


1845 


Virginia 

New York 


English 


t 
t 

t 
1820 


Dutch 


Massachusetts. . . 


English 


New Jersey 

New Hampshire. 
Maine 


Dutch and Danes. 
Enfflish ... 


York 


English 


Connecticut 


Windsor 

St. Mary's 

Providence. . . . 
Wilmington. . . 
Philadelphia. . 
Albermarle . . . 

Green Bay 

Port Royal.... 

Detroit 

Kaskaskia 

Arkansas Post 
Yincennes .... 
Bexar 


English 


t 

t 

t 
■f 


Maryland 

Rhode Island 

Delaware 


Enarlish 


Roger WiUiams.. 
Swedes 


Pennsylvania . . 


Swedes 


t 

t 

1848 


North Carolina . . 


English 


Wisconsin 


French 


South Carolina. . 


English 


t 
1837 


Michigan 

Illinois 


French 


French 


1818 


Arkansas 


French 


1836 


Indiana 


French 


1816 


Texas 


Snanish. . . 


1845 


Louisiana 


Iberville 

Mobile 

Biloxi 


French 


1812 


Alabama 


French 


1819 


Mississippi 

Yermont 


French 


1817 


Brattleboro . . . 

Savannah 

St. Genevieve. 
Fort London.. 

San Diego 

Boonsboro . . . 

Marietta 

Astoria 

Dubuque 

St. Paul 

Omaha 


English 


1791 


Georeria 


Enerlish 


t 
1821 


Missouri 


French 


Tennessee 


English 


1796 


California 

Kentucky 

Ohio 


Spanish 

Daniel Boon 

English 


1850 
1792 
1802 


Oregon 


Americans 

French 


1859 


Iowa 


1846 


Minnesota 

Nebraska 

Kansas 


Americans 

Americans 

Americans 


1858 
186T 
1861 


West Yirginia. . . 






1863 


Nevada 








1864 


Colorado 








1876. 













t Original States. 

688. At the close of the French and Indian war France 



98 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

yielded up her claims to territories on the mainland in 
North America, excepting the city of New Orleans, ceding 
all east of the Mississippi to England, and all west to Spain. 
This gave England the entire country east of the Missis- 
sippi, excepting Florida, which was a Spanish possession. 
In the treaty of peace which followed the Revolutionary 
war, the boundaries of the United States included all of 
the English claims east of the Mississippi and north to the 
Great Lakes. 

In 1800, Spain, by a secret treaty, restored to France the 
territory of Louisiana, comprising her possessions east of 
the Rocky Mountains, and north from Mexico to the British 
claims. The northern boundary of the Louisiana territory 
was never drawn. 

In 1803 the United States purchased the Louisiana ter- 
ritory of France for $15,000,000. 

In 1804, President Jefferson sent an exploration party 
under Lewis and Clark, to the headwaters of the Missouri, 
and thence across to the Pacific. Up to this time the 
North Pacific country did not belong to any nation, but, as 
the United States became interested, England became jeal- 
ous and claimed the same. The United States, however, 
continued to assert her rights, and a great deal of corre- 
spondence between the two governments resulted. At last, 
in 1818, the United States and England agreed to a joint 
occupancy of the whole territory for ten years. 

In 1828 the treaty of joint occupancy was renewed, to 
terminate on either party's giving a year's notice. No divi- 
sion was made until 1846. It was then agreed by a treaty 
that the American possessions should extend as far north 
as latitude 49^. From this acquisition was formed the 
State of Oregon, and the Territories of Washington, Idaho 
and Montana. 

In 1819 Florida was purchased from Spain for $5,- 
000,000. 

In 1845 Texas became a part of the United States by 
annexation. 

At the close of the Mexican war, in the treaty of Gauda- 
loupe Hidalgo, Feb. 2d, 1848, the Mexican government 
ceded to the United States California, Nevada, Utah, a 
part of Arizona, and New Mexico, for which the United 
States paid $15,000,000 and assumed the debts of Mexico 
to American citizens, amounting to $3,500,000 more. 

In 1854 the " Gadsden Purchase " gave to the United 
States the southwestern corner of New Mexico and that 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. -. 99 

Zmm^"^ """"'^ °^ "''^"" ^"'^^''^«- which was paid 
in gold^^^ ^^'^^'^ '^''' purchased of Russia for If7,200,000 

nal^cefoftl fe?sS. ''''■ «« ^^ «^^^^ «^^- 

by th^SLen^Sl^^sT"" ^"^- ^' ™^ ^'^-^ 

thetands*of th^? '''^*^! Retaliation Bill, and places in 
ine nands ot the President the power to prohibit the im 

~St t°o c env^Jn'"''*' '' thr^CanadiaS fisheriet o f 
necessaiy to deny all commerce with Canada until the dif 

6°92' ltZf\^' "'"'1? ^*'^*'^^ ^"<1 Canada are settled 
byj. Daniel Manning, Secretary of the Treasury. 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



GEOGRAPHY, 



1. From what did the term geography derive its name ? 

2. How many kinds of geography ? 
8. Define mathematical geography. 

4. Define physical geography. 

5. Define political geography. 

6. What is the shape of the earth ? 

7. Give proof of its rotundity. 

8. What is supposed to be the reason why the earth is 
flattened at the poles ? 

9. How much greater is the diameter at the equator 
than the diameter at the poles ? 

10. What is the area of the earth's surface ? 

11. What is its solid contents in miles ? 

12. What is its weight? 

13. What is its specific gravity ? 

14. What is the horizon? 

15. What is the axis of the earth ? What are its 
poles ? 

16. How many revolutions has the earth? Define 
each. 

17. Give proofs of the earth's rotation. 

18. Explain how falling bodies prove it. 

19. How do we know that the earth rotates fi-om west 
to east ? 

20. What is the exact time of its rotation ? 

21. What is the velocity of this rotation ? 

22. Where is the velocity least ? 

23. What causes day and night ? 

101 



102 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

24. What is called the Circle of Illumination ? 

25. On what does the relative length of the day and 
night depend ? 

26. What causes the seasons? 

27. What is the earth's orbit ? Its estimated length? 

28. What is the earth's motion around the sun called ? 

29. What is the exact time of a complete revolution ? 

30. Define a siderial year. 

31. Define a tropical year. 

32. Which value is taken for the civil year ? 

33. How great is the earth's annual motion ? 

34. What position does the earth occupy in the universe? 

35. What bodies compose the Solar System ? 

36. What position does the earth occupy in this sys- 
tem? 

37. What is the distance of the earth from the sun ? 

38. Has the sun any other motion than its movement 
through space ? 

39. To what theory has the uniformity of direction of 
the movements of the planets and sun given rise ? 

40. What governs the velocity of the different planets ? 

41. What causes the continual revolution of the earth 
and other planets ? 

42. What gives the earth's orbit its elliptical shape ? 

43. Why is it cold in winter and warm in summer? 

44. What are zones? How many? Their width? 
Where situated ? 

45. What is the Ecliptic ? 

46. Why is the Ecliptic so called ? 

47. What is the inclination of the earth's axis to the 
plane of its orbit ? 

48. Why are the zones given their respective widths ? 

49. What would be the climate, supposing the earth"'s 
axis to be horizontal to the plane of its orbit ? 

50. Why would the inclination of the earth affect the 
climate? 

51. Supposing the earth's inclination to be 30°, or any 
other degree, how would we ascertain the width of the 
several zones ? 

52. At what season is the earth nearest the sun ? 

53. Explain why it is nearer at one time than at another. 

54. When is the earth in its perihelion ? 

55. When at its aphelion ? 

56. What are Equinoxes ? How many and what are 
they caUed? 



GEOGRAPHY. 103 

57. On what days of the year do they occur? 

58. What are the Equinoctial Points? 

59. What are the solstices ? 

60. How many, and what are they called ? 

61. On what days of the year do they occur? 

62. What are the Solstitial Points ? 

63. What is a compass ? Its cardinal points ? 

64. What are the semi-cardinal points? 

65. Into how many circles is the earth divided ? What 
are they ? 

66. How may the circles of the earth be divided ? 

67. Define Great and Small Circles. 

68. Define circles of Position, or Measurement. 

69. Define Climatic Circles. 

70. Name the Circles of Position. 

71. Name the Climatic Circles. 

72. Define quadrant. 

73. How is every circle divided ? 

74. What is a map ? 

75. What are the lines, or circles, on a map ? 

76. What is the equator ? 

77. Through what countries does the equator pass ? 

78. What is a meridian circle ? A meridian ? 

79. What is longitude ? 

80. On what is longitude measured ? 

81. From what meridian do we reckon longitude ? 

82. How many degrees west of Greenwich is Wash- 
ington ? 

83. What is the greatest longitude a place can have ? 

84. Can a place have no longitude ? 

85. Reckoning from the meridian at Washington, what 
is the latitude and longitude of Quito ? 

86. What is the length of a degree of longitude ? 

87. Why does the length of a degree of longitude de- 
crease after leaving the equator ? 

88. What are prime meridians ? 

89. Where are these usually located ? 

90. Through what States does the meridian at Wash- 
ington pass ? 

91. What countries in Asia are crossed by the same 
meridian circle ? 

92. Explain how we reckon time when the difference 
of longitude of two places is given, or vice versa. 

93. What large city in Asia is nearly opposite Philadel- 
■ohia ? 



104 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

94. What is latitude ? How many kinds ? 

95. On what is latitude measured ? 

96.. What is the highest degree of latitude ? 

97. What is the length of a degree of latitude ? 

98. What is the basis of a geographical mile ? 

99. Through what countries and bodies of water does 
the Tropic of Cancer pass ? 

100. The Tropic of Capricorn ? 

101. The Arctic Circle? 

102. The Antarctic Circle ? 

103. Why is it colder at the Antarctic Circle than at 
the Arctic ? 

104. What part of North America is in the same lati- 
tude as England and Ireland ? 

105. Why does the climate of Labrador differ so ma- 
terially from that of England ? 

106. Why are the winters more mild at Puget Sound 
than in the region of Lake Superior ? 

107. Describe the Gulf Stream. 

108. Where and what is the Sargasso Sea ? 

109. What is the meaning of sargasso f 

110. What are the natural divisions of land ? Describe 
each. 

111. What are the natural divisions of water ? Describe 
each. 

112. How are straits divided ? 

113. What is the size of the Eastern Continent com- 
pared with the Western ? 

114. What is the area of the entire surface of the globe ? 

115. Which of the grand divisions is the largest? 
Smallest ? Most populous ? Richest in fertility ? 

116. What are the political divisions of North Amer- 
ica? 

117. Of what races does the population of the United 
States consist ? 

118. What is the number of the population of the 
United States? 

119. What are the leading forms of industry of the 
people ? 

120. What are exports and imports ? 

121. What are the leading exports and imports? 

122. With what countries does the United States have 
the greatest commerce ? 

123. What country contains the greatest number of in- 
habitants in proportion to its area ? 



GEOGRAPHY. 105 

124. How does England compare in size to the United 
States? 

125. Which is larger, Europe or the United States ? 

126. How does Europe compare in size and population 
to Asia? 

127. What is a frith, or estuary ? 

128. What is an archipelago? 

129. What is a delta ? 

130. Why is this tract of land called a delta? 

131. What is a road, or roadstead ? 

132. What is an oasis ? 

133. What is a valley, or basin of a river ? 

134. What river of the world has the greatest basin ? 
What is the extent of this basin ? 

135. What is the extent of the basin of the Mississippi ? 

136. What is the extent of the basin of the La Plata ? 
Nile? Obi? Yenisei? Yang-tse-Kiang ? Niger? Volga? 
Ganges? Mackenzie? St. Lawrence? Saskatchawan ? 
Orinoco ? Columbia ? 

137. How wide is the mouth of the Amazon ? 

138. Lito how many classes is mankind divided, in re- 
gard to social condition ? 

139. What nations are Enlightened ? Civihzed ? Half- 
civilized ? 

140. Who are Barbarians ? Savages ? 

141. What class of men are called Nomads ? What is 
the meaning of nomad ? 

142. What are the principal forms of government ? 

143. What is a republic ? A monarchy ? 

144. Name the republics of the world. 

145. What is an unlimited monarchy ? A limited ? 

146. What is the government- of Russia ? England ? 
Germany? Turkey? Spain? China? Brazil? 

147. What is a constitution ? 

148. What is the sovereign of an empire called ? 

149. What are the political divisions of the earth ? 

150. What is an empire, kingdom, republic, state, 
county ? 

151. What is the capital of a country? Metropolis? 

152. How many distinct races of men? 

153. What is the estimated number of inhabitants upon 
the earth ? How divided ? 

154. How many prevailing systems of religion ? 

155. What is the estimated number belonging to each 
system ? 



106 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

156. How many classes of Christians ? 

157. What is the Mohammedan religion ?. What is the 
Koran ? 

158. What are the principal points of worship of the 
Buddhists ? The Brahmins ? The Religion of Confucius ? 
The Shinto Religion ? 

159. What is the principal difference between the 
Christian and Jewish religions ? 

160. Who are termed Pagans ? 

161. Name and give the length of the longest four riv- 
ers in the world. 

162. Name and give the length of the longest four riv- 
ers of North America. 

163. What would be the length of the St. Lawrence 
through the chain of lakes to the head of the St. Louis 
River ? 

164. Name and give the length of the longest four riv- 
ers of South America. 

165. Of Europe. 

166. Of Asia. 

167. Of Africa. 

168. What is noticeable of the Amazon River ? 

169. Of the Mississippi ? 

170. Of the Missouri? 
17L Of the Nile? 

172. Describe the Rio de la Plata. 

173. Describe Egypt. 

174. By what two great commercial routes can we travel 
around the world, starting from New York ? 

175. What country in the world has the longest and 
most numerous lines of railroads ? 

176. Between what parallels does the United States lie ? 

177. What is the longitude of San Francisco, and about 
how far is it from New York City ? 

178. What State is the geographical center of the 
United States? 

179. What country produces the most cotton ? Sugar ? 
Coffee? Rice? Tea? 

180. What countries produce largely of the same pro- 
ducts ? 

181. What country produces the most spices ? 

182. What are cloves ? 

183. What are nutmegs ? Mace? 

184. What is a mountain system ? 

185. Name the mountain svstems of America. 



GEOGRAPHY. 107 

186. What is the length of the longest day at the equa- 
tor? At the Tropic of Cancer? Arctic Circle? North Pole? 

187. Why does so little rain fall on that part of South 
America west of the Andes Mountain range ? 

188. What large city in Europe is noted for the manu- 
facture of cotton cloth? For silks? Linen?' Cutlery? 
Laces ? 

189. What are the leading pursuits of the people of the 
New England States ? 

1 90. What are the products of the New England States ? 

191. Where are the manufactures carried on to the 
greatest extent in these States ? Name some of the most 
famous cities for the manufacture of cotton. 

192. What is remarkahle about the Merrimac River ? 

193. What is said of the climate ? Soil ? Agricultural 
products ? Commerce ? 

194. How do the New England States compare in size 
with California ? 

195. What noted colleges are located at Cambridge and 
New Haven ? 

196. What important industries are carried on at Lynn ? 
New Bedford ? Springfield ? Worcester ? Portland ? 

197. Where is Mount Washington ? Its height? 

198. Where is marble obtained ? 

199. What is granite, and where found ? 

200. What State is called the " Granite State '' ? The 
" Pine-tree State " ? The " Green Mountain State " ? The 
''Bay State"? 

20 L For what are Lexington and Concord famous ? 

(a) Where are the following mountains : White, Blue, 
Hoosick, Mt. Katahdin, Mt. Holyoke, Bunker Hill. 

(6) What are Nantucket and Martha's Vineyard, and 
to what State do they belong ? 

(c) Where are Rhode and Mt. Desert Islands, and to 
what States do they belong ? 

{d) Describe Lakes Memphremagog, Moosehead, Ches- 
uncook, Grand, Winnipiseogee, Sebago, and Umbagog. 

(e) Describe the bay of Passamaquodda, Massachusetts, 
Cape Cod, Penobscot, Casco, Narragansett, and Long Island 
Sound. 

202. How many square miles in the area of Rhode Isl- 
and, and how many States of the same size could be formed 
out of the State of Texas ? 

203. How does Maine compare in size to the other five 
New England States ? 



108 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

204. What is particularly noticeable about the northern 
boundary of Connecticut? 

(a) Locate Burlington, Belfast, Dover, Salem, Bath, 
Bennington, Bangor, Eastport, and Lowell. 

(b) Describe the following: Housatonic, Kennebec, 
Merrimac, Pawtucket, Connecticut, Thames, St. Croix, 
Taunton, Onion, White, and Androscoggin. 

205. What is the size of California ? 

206. What is the surface of this State ? 

207. What is the name of this valley, and from what 
did it derive its name ? 

208. What is the Golden Gate ? 

209. What is the climate of the Pacific Coast ? 

210. What natural curiosities do we find in California? 

211. What are the productions of this section ? 

212. What can be said of the fisheries of the Columbia 
River? 

213. What can be said of the valley of Puget Sound ? 
Its climate ? Its latitude ? 

214. Describe Alaska. 

215. What is its form of government? 

216. Is this possession valuable to the United States ? 

217. How are the seal fisheries conducted ? 

218. Which is the principal settlement, and where sit- 
uated ? 

219. When was gold discovered in California ? 

220. What is the climate? 

(a) Locate Vallejo, San Jose, Los Angeles, Stockton, 
Oakland, Mary sville. Ft. Yuma, Benicia, and San Francisco. 

(&) Locate Portland, Astoria, Walla M^alla, St. Paul 
(Alaska). 

(c) Locate Mt. Shasta, Mt. Hood, Mt. Baker, Mt. St. 
Helens, Mt. Pitt, Mt. Whitney, Mt. St. Elias, Mt. Fair- 
weather. 

(d) Describe the following rivers: San Joaquin, Sac- 
ramento, Columbia, Snake, Clarks, Bitter Root, Willamette, 
Kalmath, Yukon. 

221. What is the difference in latitude between San 
Francisco and Richmond ? 

222. How far north of Richmond is New York City ? 

223. What part of South America is in the same lati- 
tude south of the equator, that Central United States is 
north of it ? 

224. How does Brazil compare in size with the United 
States (not including Alaska)? 



GEOGRAPHY. 109 

225. What city in the AVest Indies is in the same lati- 
tude north of the equator that Rio Janeiro is south of it ? 

226. Describe South America. 

227. What are the llanos ? 

228. What are the selvas ? 

229. What are the pampas ? 

230. What are the wastes of Patagonia ? 

231. What is a plateau, or table-land ? 

232. How may the plateaus of South America be divided? 

233. Describe the plateau of the Andes. 

234. Describe Quito. 

235. What are Chimborazo and Cotopaxi? 

236. What is the Peruvian Balsa f 

237. Describe the Cassiquiare River. 

238. How far north does South America extend ? 

239. Into what divisions can the countries of South 
America be divided ? 

240. What does Portuguese South America comprise ? 

241. What does the Guianas comprise? 

242. What does Spanish South America comprise ? 

243. Why are these republics called the Spanish 
division ? 

244. Describe Venezuela. The United States of Colum- 
bia. Ecuador. Peru. Bolivia. Chili. 

245. What is the Argentine Confederation ? Describe 
Uruguay. Paraguay. 

246. What are the inhabitants of South America? 
How divided in regard to numbers ? 

247. What is the state of commerce? Civilization ? 

248. What are the natural resources ? The industries ? 

249. Which is the most important country for the com- 
merce of the United States? 

250. Which is the most progressive of the republics ? 

251. Describe the railroads of South America. 

252. What part of South America is in the same lati- 
tude as Cape Colony ? 

253. What city in Australia is in nearly the same lati- 
tude as Buenos Ayres ? 

254. What large city in the United States is in nearly 
the same longitude as Quito ? 

255. What part of the western coast of Africa is in the 
same latitude as Cape Gallinas ? 

(a) Describe the following islands -. Joanes, Desola- 
tion, Chiloe, Falkland, Staten, Wellington, Juan Fernan- 
dez, Trinidad, St. Felix, Hermit Margarita. 



110 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

(6) Locate the following places : Conception, Truxillo, 
Areguipa, Santiago, Villa Bella, Pernambuco, Popayan, 
Aspinwall, Villa Eica, Valparaiso, Cobija, Calloa, Chagres, 
Guayaquil, Para, Bahia, Barcelona, Angostura, Potosi, Pan- 
ama. 

(c) Name and locate the capital cities of South Amer- 
ica. 

256. Where is Cape Horn ? 

257. What is Terra del Fuego? 

258. Why was Patagonia so named ? • 

259. What cape in South America is the most northern, 
eastern, southern, western? 

(a) Locate the following capes : North, Frio, St. An- 
tonio, Blanco. 

(b) Where are the peninsulas of St. Joseph's and Tres 
Montes ? 

(c) Locate the Gulf of Darien, St. Mathias, All Saints, 
Choco, Blanco, Guayaquil, St. Georges, Paranagua, Pan- 
ama. 

(d) Where are Lakes Titicaca and Uros ? What river 
connects them? 

260. Where is Lake Reys, and what river is its outlet ? 

261. What is the general character of the lakes of South 
America ? 

(a) Locate Lakes Xarayes, Yber, and Maracaibo. 

262. Describe Lakes Titicaca and Maracaibo. 

(a) Where is the Desert of Atacama ? 

(b) In how many zones is South America ? 

(c) Between what two mountain chains is the basin of 
the Orinoco ? < 

(d) Of the countries of South America, which border 
on the Caribbean Sea? Which on the Atlantic Ocean? 
On the Pacific Ocean ? 

263. Where are the Lobos and Chincha Islands ? . For 
what are they valuable ? 

264. Which is the smallest division of South America, 
and what State is about the same size ? 

265. How does Brazil compare in size to the whole of 
South America ? Describe this country. 

266. What important enterprise is being pushed on the 
Isthmus of Panama ? 

267. What political interest does the United States hold 
in this enterprise ? 

268. What political relations exist between this govern- 
ment and United States of Columbia? 



GEOGRAPHY. 1 U 

269. Who is Count de Lesseps, and what notable works 
has he accompUshed ? 

(a) What are the foUowmg : San Francisco, Geral. 
Magellan, Port Stanley, De los Patos, Madeira, Pichincha^ 
Essequibo, Despoblado, Maranham, Tobago, Margarita? 

(6) Describe the following rivers : Orinoco, Magda- 
lena, Rio Negro, Para, Tocantins, Araguay, Tapajos, Xingu, 
Mamore, Purus, Pilcomayo, Salado, Rio Colorado. 

270. Describe the Andes Mountains. 

271. What does British America comprise? What are 
its chief divisions ? 

272. What are the divisions of the Dominion of Canada ? 

273. Describe the climate of the Dominion. The sur- 
face. The trade. 

274. How does the Dominion compare in size to the 
United States ? What is its population ? 

275. What island forms a part of the province of Nova 
Scotia? 

276. Describe Newfoundland. For what is it noted ? 

277. Describe Nova Scotia. Prince Edward Island. 
New Brunswick. Quebec. Ontario. 

278. Describe Manitoba. British Columbia. 

279. Describe the Northeast and Northwest Territories, 
or Districts. 

280. What is the government of the provinces of the 
Dominion ? • 

281. For what is the great Saskatcha wan Valley noted? 
What is the extent of this valley ? 

282. What is the Bras d'Or? 

283. What are the French possessions near these 
provinces ? 

284. What are the banks of Newfoundland ? 

285. Where is Anticosta Island ? Is it valuable ? 

286. Which of the United States is about the size of 
New Brunswick ? Prince Edward Island ? 

287. How is Montreal situated ? 

288. For what is the basin of the St. Lawrence remark- 
able? 

289. For what is the Bav of Fundy noted? 

290. What are tides? Neap tides? Springtides? 

291. What are the chief causes of tides ? 

292. What are the three distinct movements of the 



ocean 



293. What are waves ? 

294. What are ocean currents, and how are they caused ? 



112 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

295. How are ocean currents divided ? 

296. What is a counter current? 

297. Why are the tides of Fundy Bay so much greater 
than at other ports ? 

298. What are the chief productions of the Canadian 
provinces? 

299. Name and locate the capital cities of these prov- 
inces. 

(a) Locate the following cities : Prescott, Kingston, 
St. John, Liverpool, Toronto, Quebec, Pictou, Hamilton, 
Bathurst, Three Rivers, Yarmouth, Harbor Grace, Sydney, 
Louisburg, Chatham, Windsor, Truro, Victoria, Winnipeg, 
Regina, Battleford. 

(6) Describe the capes : Sable, Canso, North, Race, 
Bauld, Ray, St. Lewis, Rozier. 

(c) Describe the following gulfs and bays : James, 
Hudson, St. Lawrence, Chaleurs, Georgian, Fundy, Notre 
Dame, Placentia, Fortune, Bonavista, Trinity and St. 
George's. 

(d) Locate the Straits Belle Isle, Northumberland and 
Canso. 

(e) Describe some of the principal lakes : Abbitibbe, 
Mistissinnie, St. John, Grand, Nipissing, Sinco, Winnipeg, 
Manitoba, Gulf of Georgia. 

(/) Describe the following rivers : Albany, Moose, 
Ottawa, East Main, St. Maurice, Saguenay, Rupert's, Sev- 
ern, Grand, Richelieu, St. Francis, St. John, Fraser. 

300. To what province does Labrador belong ? 

301. What are the obstructions to navigation from the 
Gulf of St. Lawrence to Lake Superior? 

302. How are these obstructions avoided ? 

303. How is Nova Scotia joined to New Brunswick ? 

304. W^hat islands are in the Niagara River ? 

305. What difficulties of a political nature have lately 
arisen between Canada and the United States ? 

306. What are the commercial routes of the Dominion ? 

307. How is Oceanica divided ? 

308. What does Malasia comprise ? 

309. Which are the principal Sunda Isles ? 

310. What are the productions of these islands ? 

311. What is said of the animals of Malasia ? 

312. What are the inhabitants ? 

313. What nations have possessions here? 

314. Which are the most important cities of this archi- 
pelago ? Where are they situated ? 



GEOGRAPHY. • 113 

(rt) Locate Acheen, Macassar, Bencoolen. 

(6) What strait separates Sumatra from Java ? 

(c) What strait separates Sumatra from Asia ? Borneo 
from Celebes? 

(d) Where is Mt. Ophir? 

815. How large is Borneo ? Sumatra ? Java ? Celebes? 
Phillippine Isles? 

316. What State is about the size of Celebes ? 

317. In which zone are these islands situated? 

318. What is the surface of these islands? 

319. Are these islands thickly inhabited ? 

320. How is Australasia divided ? 

321. What race is called Papuans? Where are they 
found and what is noticeable of them ? 

322. To what country does Australia, New Zealand, and 
Tasmania belong ? 

323. What possessions has France in these divisions ? 

324. How is Australia divided ? 

325. How large is Australia ? 

326. What is the surface of this island ? 

327. What are the inhabitants? 

328. What are the chief pursuits of the people? The 
chief exports? 

329. What is the government of Australia? 

330. What is the climate ? Vegetation ? 

331. How is Australia connected, by means of the 
telegraph, with the countries of Europe? 

332. W^hat is said of the native animals of Australia ? 

333. Which are the principal cities ? Locate them. 

334. Is this country thickly settled ? 

335. Describe Tasmania. 

336. Where is New Zealand ? 

(a) Locate Auckland, Hobarton, Cook Strait. 

(6) Where is Bass Strait, Torres, Molucca Passage ? 

337. What is said of Papua and the other islands ? 

338. What does Polynesia include ? 

339. Name the principal groups. 

340. W^hat is the surface of the islands of Polynesia ? 

341. What are the inhabitants? 

342. What is said of the animals ? 

343. Which is the only important town in Polynesia? 
(a) Locate Timor, Sumbawa, Kangaroo, Hawaii. 

(6) To what divisions of Oceanica do the following 
islands belong : Luzon, Feejee, Lombock, Chatham, Min- 
danao, North and South Sooloo, Banca? 



114 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

(c) Describe the Gulf of Carpentaria, Spencer, Shark, 
Plenty, Botany and Great Bay. 

(d) What seas are scattered among these islands ? 

344. Name the Middle States. How do they compare 
in size to the New England States ? 

345. Which is the larger, New York or Pennsylvania ? 

346. What is the surface of these States ? 

347. What can be said of New York? 

348. For what are Rochester, Syracuse, West Point, and 
Saratoga noted ? Locate them. 

" 349. What is noticeable of Pennsylvania? 

350. What is said of its minerals ? 

351. For what are Pittsburg and Philadelphia noted? 

352. Where is Fairmount Park? What great event 
was celebrated there ? 

353. What is the estimated population of the City of 
New York during the day ? What is the population within 
a radius of thirty miles ? 

354. Describe the Brooklyn Bridge. 

355. What great gift of the French people is located in 
the New York harbor ? Describe it. 

356. What are the pursuits of the people of New 
Jersey ? 

357. What fashionable resorts for sea-bathing in this 
State? Locate them. 

358. How large is Delaware ? What are the chief pur- 
suits of the people ? 

(a) Where are Capes May and Henlopen, Charles and 
Henry? 

(6) Name and locate the capitals of the Middle States, 

(c) Locate Sing Sing, Poughkeepsie, Hudson, Troy, 
Buffalo, Gettysburg, Erie, Newark, Paterson. 

(d) Which one of the States is called the " Empire 
State"? Which one the " Keystone State "? 

(e) Describe the Hudson, Mohawk, Susquehanna, Del- 
aware, Genesee, Tioga, Juniata, and the rivers which form 
the Ohio. 

(/) Locate Pottsville, Rome, Utica, Wilmington, Cam- 
den, Jersey City, Reading, Alleghany, Scranton, Oswego, 
Lockport, Ithaca, Ticonderoga. 

(^) Locate the following : Lake George, Oneida, 
Cayuga, Seneca, Delaware Bay, Egg Harbor, Manhattan 
Island. 

(h) Where is Sandv Hook, Blackwell's Island, East 
River ? 



GEOGRAPHY. 115 

(i) Locate New Castle, Titusville, Oil City, Ogdensburg, 
Flushing, Whitehall, Albion, Lebanon, Schoharie, Auburn. 

359. Describe the District of Columbia. 

360. How great a fall has the cataract of Niagara ? 

361. How are the West India Islands divided? 

362. What islands belong to the Greater Antilles ? 

363. What do the Lesser Antilles include ? 

364 What and where are the Bahama Islands ? 

365. To what country do these islands belong ? 

366. What are the inhabitants of these islands ? 

367. What is the surface of the Antilles ? 

368. What are the productions ? 
369= What is rum? 

370. How is Hayti divided ? 

371. What is the history of this republic? 

372. Where are the Bermuda Islands? To whom do 
they belong ? 

373. How large are Cuba and Hayti ? 

(a) Name and locate the capital cities of the West Indies. 
(6) Locate Mantanzas, Kingston, Falmouth, Ponce, 
Manzanillo, Nuevitas, Samana, Gonaives. 

(c) Describe the following capes : Maysi, Morant, St. 
Antonio, Negril, De Cruz, Engano. 

(d) Describe the Straits Mona Passage, Windward Pas- 
sage Channel of Yucatan, and Florida Strait. 

{e) To what divisions do the following islands belong : 
Barbadoes, Dominica, Guanahani, Antigua, Tobago. Trini- 
dad, Tortuga, St. Thomas, Guadaloupe, Grenada, Isle of 
Pines, Orchilla ? 

374. What are keys? 

375. What is a reef? 

376. Describe the southern coast of Florida. 

377. Where is Key West? What are its exports? 

378. How is salt made in Key West ? 

379. What is sponge ? 

380. What is the general surface of Florida ? 

381. What are the productions of this State? 

382. What is Lake Okeechobee, and where is it ? 

383. What scheme is proposed by civil engineers in 
regard to this great central swamp of Florida ? 

384. Why has this State so few good harbors ? 

(q^ Locate the following cities : Pensacola, Apalachi- 
cola, Tallahassee, St. Augustine, St. Marks. 

(6) How is the Apalachicola River formed ? Describe 
these rivers. 



116 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

385. Which State is separated by the Mississippi 
River? 

386. On which side of the river is New Orleans ? De- 
scribe it. 

387. What is the soil of Louisiana? 

388. How many territories in the United States ? Nam/? 
them. 

389. What does Danish America include ? 

390. Has Greenland been fully explored ? 

391. Why was Greenland so named? 

392. Describe Iceland. 

393. What natural curiosities here ? 

394. What is supposed to be the cause of this phe^ 
nomenon ? 

395. What gave the name of Iceland f 

396. W^hich are the principal towns of Danish America ? 

397. How much larger is Asia than Africa? 

398. What is the greatest length and breadth of Africa ? 

399. Give a short description of Africa. 

400. What are the inhabitants ? 

401. What does Barbary include? 

402. To what nation do these countries belong ? 

403. How large is the Desert of Sahara ? 

(a) Describe the following mountains : Atlas, Mount- 
ains of the Moon, Snow Mountains, Kong, Crystal and 
Mocambe. 

404. Describe Soudan. What are the exports, and how 
is commerce carried on ? 

405. How is Southern Africa divided ? 

406. How are these countries governed ? 

407. Where and what is Liberia ? 

408. Where is the colony of Sierra Leone ? 

409. What are the principal exports of Africa? 

(a) Locate Morocco, Monrovia, Free Town, Cairo, Cape 
Town, Mozambique, Cobbe, Tripoli, Sego, Condar, Sokoto, 
Algiers, Antananarivo, Petermaritzburg, Timbuctoo, Wara, 
Mesna, Coomassie, Kouka, Zanzibar, Graham Town, and 
Port Natal. 

(6) What capes project from the four extremities of 
Africa ? 

(c) Describe the Mozambique Channel, Gulf of Aden, 
Guinea, Sidra, Niger River, Senegal, Orange, and Congo. 

id) Locate the following islands : Azores, Canary, Cape 
Verd, Ascension, Helena, Madeira, Peak of Teneriffe. 

410. Describe Madagascar. 



GEOGRAPHY. 117 

411. What city is the largest in Africa ? The second 
in size ? 

412. Where are Port Said and Suez? 

413. How long is the Suez Canal? To what nation 
does it belong ? 

414. Locate the capital cities of the territories of the 
United States. 

415. For what are Idaho and Montana noted ? 

416. Where is the Yellow Stone Park? What is it? 

417. Describe Dakota. 

418. Describe the Union Pacific Railroad. 

419. Locate the principal towns on this railroad. 

420. How is Salt Lake City situated ? 

421. Describe Utah. 

422. What people settled Utah ? 

423. For what are the southern territories and Texas 
especially adapted ? 

424. How is the western part of Texas occupied ? 

425. What are the productions of Texas ? 

426. What is the climate? 

(a) Locate Austin, Houston, Matagorda, Brownsville, 
Corpus Christi, Colorado City, Greeley, Fillmore City, 
Portland, Ft. Benton, Ft. Union, Sioux City, Ft. Laramie, 
Silver City, Dallas, Preston, Pembina, Vermillion. 

(6) Describe the following rivers : Columbia, Snake, 
Humboldt, Colorado, Gila, Rio Grande, Brazos, Trinity, 
Arkansas, Smoky Hill Fork, Platte. 

(c) Locate Pike's Peak, Mt. Hood, Mt. Baker, Mt 
Shasta, Diamond Peak, Long Peak, Spanish Peaks, Fre- 
mont's Peak, Mt. Fairweather, Mt. St. Elias. 

427. Which of the States and Territories border on 
British America? 

428. Which of the States are separated by the Missis- 
sippi River? 

429. Which are separated by the Ohio River? 

430. What is the general outline of Europe, and what 
advantages does it offer ? 

431. What is the surface? 

432. What are the principal European parts of this 
great mountain system? Describe each part. 

433. What part of Europe is included in the Great 
Plain ? 

434. What is the cHmate? 

435. Name the political divisions. How are they 
classified ? 



118 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

436. Which divisions are called the " Five Great Pow- 
ers"? 

437. Name and locate the peninsulas of Europe. 

438. Describe the Scandinavian peninsula. 

439. What are the exports of this peninsula ? 

440. How much farther north can grain be raised in 
Norway than on the Atlantic shore of America ? 

441 !^ What point on the American continent is in the 
same latitude as Christian! a? 

442. Where is Lapland ? 

443. Is this country inhabited ? 

444. What is the size of the Russian Empire ? 

445. What is the surface of this empire ? 

446. How are the inhabitants divided ? 

447. What is the government? Religion? 

448. What are the inhabitants called ? Their monarch ? 

449. What subject is strongly agitating the minds of 
the Russian people ? 

450. Who are the Nihilists? What do they seek to 
accomplish ? 

451. What political relations, of a strained character, 
exist between Russia and England ? 

452. In what does the principal wealtli of Russia con- 
sist ? 

453. Where are the great wheat-growing regions of 
Europe ? 

454. What is the nature of the country around the 
Caspian Sea? 

455. Describe the Caspian Sea. 

456. What are steppes, and where found ? 

457. Where is Poland ? Circassia ? 

458. Describe Moscow. When was it burned? 

459. For what is Sebastopol famous ? 

460. What was the cause of this siege ? 

461. Who inhabit the steppes, or barren plains of Rus- 
sia? 

462. Where is Niznei Novgorod, and what takes place 
there every year? 

463. Which are the principal ports for foreign com- 
merce? Locate them. 

464. What seas and gulfs wash the shores of Russia? 
Describe each. 

465. What do the British Islands comprise? 

466. What does Great Britain include? 

467. What is the surface of the British Islands ? 



GEOGRAPHY. 119 

468. How is Scotland divided ? 

469. What is the nature of the sea coast? 

470. What is the climate ? 

471. In what does the chief wealth of Great Britain 
consist ? 

472. How does she rank with other nations in the 
amount of her manufactures and commerce? 

473. What is the extent of the merchant vessels of 
Great Britain ? Her seamen ? How is the English navy 
regarded, and how does it compare with other countries? 

474. How do the armies of Europe compare with that 
of the United States ? What is the natural result of such 
immense defenses ? 

475. What is the government of Great Britain? What 
is Parliament ? Who is the Prime Minister ? 

476. What is the population of the several divisions ? 

477. Where is tin obtained ? 

478. What is the chief article of fuel in Ireland ? 

479. What is the extent of the British Empire ? 

480. Which are the principal possessions of Great 
Britain in Europe ? 

481. Which in Asia? 

482. In Africa? 

483. In Oceanica ? 

484. In America ? 

(a) Locate Malta, Gozo, Ceylon, Singapore, Hong Kong, 
Aden, Mauritius and Seychelle Islands. 

(6) Where are the Hebrides, Orkney, Shetland, An- 
glesea, Man, Isle of Wight, Skye, Mull, Lewis, Uist, Islay, 
Arran ? 

(c) Describe St. George's Channel, North Channel, 
English Channel, Bristol Channel, Dover Strait, Menai, 
The Minch, Little Minch, Jura Sound. 

(d) Describe the following capes : Land's End, Lizard 
Pt., Dunnet Head, Kinnaird Head, Malin Head, Mizzen 
Head, Flamborough Head, Butt of Lewis, and .Cape 
Wrath. 

485. For what are Liverpool, Leeds and Bradford, 
Birmingham, Limerick, and Merthyr Tydvil noted ? Lo- 
cate them. 

486. How large an area is covered by the City of Lon- 
don? 

487. What questions agitate the people of Ireland, and 
what measures have been proposed in Parliament to satisfy 
these demands ? 



120 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

4SS. Describe the Spanish Peninsula. 

489. What are the productions of Spain? 

490. What parallel crosses the central portion of Spain, 
and through which of the United States does the same 
parallel pass ? 

491. What other countries in Europe does the same 
parallel cross ? 

492. Were we to follow this parallel, what countries in 
Asia would we pass through ? 

493. Where is the Republic of Andorra ? 

494. What is noticeable of this republic ? 

495. What are the foreign possessions of Spain? Of 
Portugal ? 

496. How wide is the Strait of Gibraltar ? 

497. What is noticeable of the Fortress of Gibraltar? 

498. How large is France? 

499. How does she rank with other countries ? 

500. What is the surface ? 

501. What and where are the landes f 

502. What are the principal exports ? • 

503. What influence has Paris throughout the civilized 
world ? 

504. Name and locate the principal possessions of 
France. 

(a) Where is Pondicherry? 

(b) Locate Minorca, Majorca, Sardinia, and Ivica. 

(c) Describe Bay of Biscay, Gulf of Lyons, Gulf of 
Genoa, and Strait of Bonifacio. 

505. What are the pursuits of the people of Holland 
and Belgium ? What is Holland now called ? 

506. What is the condition of much of the coast of this 
country ? 

507. How is internal communication promoted? 

508. What is the Zuyder Zee ? 

509. What people are called Dutch ? 

510. What are the colonial possessions of Netherlands ? 
How valuable are they regarded ? 

511. What are the occupations of the people? The 
commerce ? Exports ? Wealth ? 

512. What is the surface of Denmark? 

513. How is Copenhagen situated ? 

514. What are the colonial possessions of Denmark ? 

515. What does the German Empire comprise ? 
616. Which are the free cities ? 

517. Where is the State of Alsace? 



GEOGRAPHY. 121 

518. What are the capitals of the four divisions? 

519. Describe the government of Germany. 

520. What can be said of its military power ? 

521. What of its school system ? Its manufactures ? 

522. Which are the chief ports of Germany ? 
/)23. What are the productions? 

524. What are heaths f 

525. What are the inhabitants of Austria ? 

526. What is the proper title of Austria ? 

527. How is this empire divided? What is the govern- 
ment ? 

528. What are the exports of Austria ? 

529. What can be said of the Danube River? 

530. How is Vienna situated ? 

531. What was Poland formerly? 

532. Which is the most mountainous country of Europe? 

533. Of how many States is Switzerland composed? 
How large is it ? 

534. For what are the Swiss noted? What language 
do they speak ? 

535. For what is Geneva noted ? 

536. How is Italy governed ? 

537. In ancient times, for what was this country cele- 
brated? 

538. For what are the towns and cities noted ? 

539. Where is San Marino? 

540. To what country do the Islands of Sardinia and 
Sicily belong ? 

541. What is the extent of the Ottoman Empire? 

542. Describe the Turk. 

543. How does Turkey compare with other European 
countries in regard to civilization, agriculture, and the arts 
and sciences? 

544. What are Roumania, Servia and Montenegro? 

545. How is Bulgaria governed? 

546. What are the exports of Turkey? 

547. What was Greece in ancient times? 

548. What is the shape of Greece ? 

549. Name and locate the capital cities of Europe. 

(a) Locate Matapan, Spartivento, De Gata, St. Vin- 
cent, Finisterre, Ortegal, St. Matthew, The Naze, North, 
Sviatoi. 

(b) Describe the following straits : Otranto, Messina, 
Bosphorus, Dardanelles, Enikale, Vaigatch, Skager Rack, 
and Catteo-at. 



122 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

(c) Name and describe the seas which wash the shores 
of Europe. 

{d) Describe the following gulfs : Taranto, Salonica, 
Dantzig, Liibeck, Murray Frith, The Wash, Frith of Solway. 

(e) Locate the principal seaports of Europe : Lon- 
don, Marseilles, Elsinore, Amsterdam, Venice, Aberdeen, 
Rotterdam, Palermo, Lisbon, Liibeck, Naples, Genoa, 
Hull, Oporto, Southampton, Brest, Constantinople, Bre- 
men, Hamburg, Limerick, Dundee, Bordeaux, Galway, 
Dublin, Bristol, Port Mahone, Havre, Waterfotd, Belfast, 
Portsmouth, Cork, Liverpool, Stettin, Antwerp, London- 
derry, Barcelona, Dantzig, Dover, Leith, Swansea, Kings- 
ton, St. Petersburg, Riga, Odessa, Archangel, Malaga, 
Navarino, Sebastopol, Trieste, Aalborg, Salonica, Calais, 
Cronstadt. 

(/) Describe the mountains of Kiolen, Carpathian, 
Balkan, Apennines, Pyrenees, Cevennes, Cantabrian, Sierra 
Morena, Sierra Nevada, Jura, Alps, Ural, Valdai Hills, 
Cheviot Hills, Grampian Hills, Cambrian, Mt. Etna, Mt. 
Vesuvius, Ben Nevis, Ben Lomond, Mt. Snowdon. 

550. With what country is England most extensively 
engaged in trade ? 

551. Which is the most northern town in Europe? 
Why is this port never frozen? 

(a) Locate the principal inland cities, not capitals : 
Moscow, Warsaw, Dresden, Metz, Manchester, Birming- 
ham, Sheffield, Nottingham, Nancy, Orleans, Grenada, 
Saragossa, Cologne, Hanover, Adrianople, Sophia, Flor- 
ence, Turin, Milan, Geneva, Waterloo, Kilkenny, Killarney, 
Bradford, Norwich, Oxford, Pesth, Munich, Versailles, 
Rouen, Breslau. 

552. Name the four most important rivers of Europe. 

553. What countries are termed Spanish America? 

554. What part of Spanish America is still in posses- 
sion of Spain ? 

555. What is the surface of Mexico? 

556. Are the tablelands accessible from the Gulf? 

557. What is the climate ? 

558. What are the inhabitants ? 

559. How are the seasons divided ? 

560. What are the productions ? Its commerce ? 

561. What are the principal minerals ? 

562. How is the City of Mexico situated ? 

563. What two volcanoes are visible from the city? 
What do their names signify? 



GEOGRAPHY. 123 

564. What is cochineal ? Pulque ? 

565. What is the history of Mexico ? 

566. What peninsulas belong to this republic ? 

567. What is the government of Mexico ? 

568. What political differences occurred between Mex- 
ico and the United States in 1886 ? 

569. What does Central America comprise ? 

570. Locate the capital cities. 

571. Where is Balize? To what country does it be- 
long? 

572. What are the exports of Balize ? 

(a) Locate the following cities : Vera Cruz, Matamo- 
ras, Monterey, Merida, Belize, San Luis Potosi, Puebla, 
Acapulco, Guatemala. 

573. What three routes were projected from the Atlantic 
to the Pacific? 

574. How does Mexico compare in size to the United 
States? 

575. In what zones is Mexico ? 

576. Where are the greatest copper regions in the 
United States? 

577. Where is lead found most abundantly? 

(a) How many Western States? Name them. 

(b) How many Southern States ? Name them. 

578. What are the great staple productions of the 
Southern States ? 

579. Which State produces the most cotton? Rice? 
Sugar? Tobacco? Potatoes? Corn? Wheat? 

580. Which State has the greatest number of swine ? 
Cattle? Horses? Mules? Sheep? 

581. Which State produces the greatest quantity of 
gold? Silver? Iron? Copper? Lead? Coal? Pine 
lumber? Turpentine, resin and tar? 

582. How is turpentine, resin and tar manufactured ? 

583. From what does North Carolina derive her chief 
wealth ? 

584. What is South Carolina often called ? 

585. What article can be raised extensively in all the 
States and Territories ? 

586. Into w^hat sections is the United States divided ? 

587. What does the Atlantic Slope embrace ? 

588. What does the Pacific Slope embrace ? 

589. What division is included in the Central Plain ? 

590. Into what divisions may the United States be di- 
vided with reference to its drainage ? 



124 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

591. What is the surface of Asia ? 

592. What divisions can we apply to this country ? 

593. What portion is inchided in Arctic Asia? In Des- 
ert Asia? In Peninsular Asia? In Insular Asia? 

594. What portion of the population of the human 
race are in Peninsular Asia? 

595. What can be said of the productions of Asia ? 
696. Where is the longest inland commercial route on 

the globe ? 

597. How are the tablelands divided? What is said 
of them ? 

598. What countries constitute the Great Northern 
Plain of Asia? 

599. Describe the mountain system of Asia. 

600. Where is the Great Desert of Gobi ? 

601. How may the climate be described ? 

602. What is the climate of Northern Asia ? 

603. Describe Siberia. 

604. What is the climate of Central and Southern 
Asia? 

605. To what three races do the inhabitants of Asia 
belong ? 

606. What people belong to the Mongolian race? 

607. What nations, or tribes, living in Asia, belong to 
the Caucasian race ? 

608. What countries are occupied by the Malay race ? 

609. What is the estimated number of inhabitants of 
the several races ? 

610. For what has Siberia long been used ? 

611. To what country does Georgia belong? What is 
noticeable of the inhabitants ? 

612. How is Turkestan divided? What is the govern- 
ment of each? 

613. What is the Khan ? 

(a) Locate the following cities : Tobolsk, Irkoutsk, 
Tashkend, Bokhara, Yarkand, Khokan, Khiva, Tiflis, 
Smyrna, Jerusalem, Damascus, Medina, Mecca, Mocha, 
Aden, Muscat. 

614. What does the Chinese Empire include? 

615. What is said of the population of China ? 

616. What are the productions of China? 

617. What is the government ? 

618. What about the education of the Chinese ? 

619. How are all government officers below the emperor 
selected ? 



GEOGRAPHY, 125 

620. What can be said of these people in regard to their 
trades, arts and sciences ? 

621. Describe the great wall of China. For what pur- 
pose was it built ? 

622. Which are .the most important seaports for foreign 
trade ? Locate them. 

623. Name the principal islands of Japan. 

624. What are the chief productions of these islands ? 

625. What is the government of Japan ? 

626. What is the emperor called ? 

627. How do the Japanese compare in enlightenment 
with the Chinese ? 

628. What two peninsulas comprise India ? 

629. What does British India include ? 

630. How is Indo-China divided ? 

631. What peculiarity is found in the literature of the 
Hindoos ? 

632. What is the government of British India ? 

633. Where is Ceylon, and what is it ? 

634. Where is the country of Cochin-China ? 

635. Where do the French hold possessions ? 

636. Name and locate the capitals of India. 

637. What are the productions of India? 

(a) Locate Singapore, Rangoon, Monchobo, Bombay, 
Madras, Benares, Mandalay, Cabul, Candahar, Herat, 
Kelat, and Lassa. 

638. Describe Afghanistan. 

639. What can be said of Beloochistan? 

640. What is the government of Persia i 

641. What is the surface of Arabia ? 

642. Who are the inhabitants ? 

643. For what is Mecca noted ? Medina ? 

644. What is the general appearance of the Persians ? 

645. What is the ruler of Persia called ? 

646. What can be said of the past history of Persia ? 

647. Describe Arabia. Its government. 

(a) Locate Teheran, Ispahan, Sana, Tokio, Hakodadi, 
Kauagawa, Pekin. 

(6) Name and describe the seas which wash the shores 
of Asia: Kara, Behring, Ochotsk, Japan, Yellow, China, 
Arabian, Red, Mediterranean, Marmora, Black, and Cas- 
pian. 

(c) Where are the Aral and Dead seas ? 

Id) Describe Bay of Bengal, Persian, Siam, Tonquin, 
Fetchelee, Lena, Obe, Martaban, and Cambay. 



126 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

(e) Describe Lake Baikal, Tchany, Balkash, Tenting. 

(/) Describe the following rivers: Lena, Obe, Yene- 
sei, Irtish, Amoor, Hong Ho, Yang tse Kiang, Hong 
Kiang, Euphrates, Tigris, Amoo, Indus, Ganges, Brahma- 
putra, Irrawadda, and Cambodia. • 

648. Name and locate the peninsulas of Asia. 

649. Where is the Isthmus of Kraw ? 

650. Which is the most elevated lake in the world ? 
(a) Locate Formosa, Hainan. Socotra, Nova Zembla, 

Ceylon, Laccadive, Maldive, Hong Kong, Lew Chew, 
Saghalien, Kurile, Aleutian, New Siberia. 

(6) Describe the following straits and capes: Babel- 
Mandel, Ormus, Tartary, Corea, Formosa, Manaar, Ma- 
lacca, Comarin, Ras-al Gat, Cambodia, Lopatka, and 
Vastochnoi. 

651. Where is Palestine ? Jerusalem? 

652. How wide is Behring Strait ? Gibraltar ? Dover ? 

653. How wide* is the Isthmus of Panama? Suez? 
Tehuantepec ? 

654. Which are the largest five islands in the world ? 

655. What is the size of the oceans ? 

656. What is the highest point reached by Arctic ex- 
plorers ? By the Antarctic ? 

657. Name four of the largest cities in the world, in 
order of population. 

658. Name the next four in order. 

659. Name the five largest cities of the United States. 

660. In the production of what minerals does Great 
Britain exceed every other country ? 

661. Name the largest seven rivers in the United States. 
Describe them. 

662. What is the population of the Chinese Empire? 
Japan? Hindoostan? United States? 

663. How does China compare, in size and population, 
to the United States? 

664. What are the principal uses of rivers ? 

665. What important places of the globe are situated 
on or near the 40th parallel north latitude ? 

666. What part of the United States is in the same 
latitude north of the equator, that the southern part of 
Africa is south of it ? 

667. What is the latitude of Cape Horn ? Cape Good 
Hope? 

668. What is the diff'erence between the location of 
commercial and manufacturing cities ? 



GEOGRAPHY. 127 

669. Why is the water of Great Salt Lake not fresh? 

670. Name five of the principal .articles exported by the 
people of the United States. 

671. Name five of the principal articles imported. 

672. What are the great waterways for the internal 
commerce of the United States ? 

673. What obstructions are usually found in the At- 
lantic system to prevent large boats from traversing them ? 

674. Describe the Mississippi system. 

675. What does the St. Lawrence comprise ? 

676. Where are the chief canals located ? 

677. What can be said of the railroads of the United 
States ? 

678. What are called Trunk Lines ? 

679. Into what systems may these roads be divided? 

680. Name the principal roads of the Eastern Trunk 
Lines. 

681. Which of these transacts the most business ? De- 
scribe it. 

682. Name the Central Trunk Lines. 

683. How many compose the Southern System ? 

684. Mention the most important of the Western Sys- 
tem. 



ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS 



ON 



GEOGRAPHY, 



1. From the two words geo (earth) and graphy (descrip- 
tion). 

2. Three : Mathematical, Physical and Political. 

3. It treats of the form, magnitude and motions of the 
earth, and of the various imaginary lines on the surface. 

4. It treats of the solid and fluid parts of the earth's 
surface, the atmosphere, and all animal and vegetable life. 

5. It treats of the various countries on the earth's sur- 
face, the people, customs, religion and government. 

6. A sphere flattened at the ends. 

7. By journeying around the earth. 

The approach of vessels shows their masts first, while 
the larger part, the hull, is still outside the line of vision. 

The shape of the earth's shadow, as cast on the moon 
during an eclipse, is always round. 

By the measurement of astronomers. 

8. By the revolution of the earth while in a plastic 
condition. 

9. About twenty-six miles, the diameter at the equator 
being 7,925 miles. 

10. Nearly 200,000,000 (196,900,278) square miles. 

11. 260,000,000,000 cubit miles. 

12. 5,852,000,000,000,000 of tons. This weight is be- 
yond our conception. 

13. 51 times heavier than water. 

14. That part of the heavens which appears to meet 
the earth. 

15. An imaginary line on which it performs its daily 

129 



130 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

revolutions ; its poles are the points where its axis meets 
the surface. 

16. Two : diurnal and annual. The diurnal is its mo- 
tion from west to east ; its annual is its revolution around 
the sun. 

17. The motion of falling bodies is one of the most con- 
vincing proofs, while the sun and distant planets appear to 
revolve around the earth once in twenty-four hours is a 
reasonable proof of the phenomena of the earth's rota- 
tion. 

18. If the earth had no motion then a ball dropped 
from a high tower would strike the base at a point exactly 
vertical from the place of starting, but as the earth has a 
motion, then the top of the tower must move faster than 
the bottom, and the ball wdll strike outside of a line with 
the base, the difference being about the proportion of the 
velocity of the top being greater than that of the base. 

19. Because of the appearance of the sun rising in the 
east, and also the falling ball will strike outside of the 
base on the east side of the tower and on inside of the base 
on the west side. 

20. The exact time is 23 hours, 56 minutes, 4.09 sec- 
onds. 

21. On the equator it is about 1.042 miles per hour. 

22. The velocity diminishes from the equator to the 
poles, where it is nothing. 

23. The revolution of the earth on its axis. 

24. The great circle which separates the dark side ol 
the earth from the light side, or in other words, it is the 
dividing line between night and day. 

25. It depends upon the position of the earth to the 
sun in its annual revolution. The sun apparently moving 
north in the summer, produces in the northern hemis- 
phere an increased circle of illumination, while in wintei 
the same movement exists in the southern hemisphere, 
decreasing with us this circle of light, producing the in- 
crease and decrease of the lengths of days and nights. 

26. The revolution of the earth around the sun. 

27. The course it takes in its annual motion ; its esti^ 
mated length is about 600,000,000 miles. 

28. Its revolution. 

29. It is 365 days, 6 hours, 9 minutes, 9.6 seconds. 

30. It is the exact time of a revolution. 

31. The time from one March equinox to the next, and 
is 365 days, 5 hours, 48 minutes, 49.7 seconds. 



GEOGRAPHY. 131 

32. 'The tropical year, or 3651 days, nearly. 

33. About 68,000 miles an hour. 

34. The earth is one of a group of non-luminous bodies 
which revolve around the sun, accompany him through 
space, and reflect his light. 

35. The sun, eight large bodies called planets, and as 
far as is now known, about one hundred and seventy-five 
smaller bodies called planetoids, or asteroids, besides 
numerous comets and meteors. Some of thp planets have 
bodies called moons or satellites moving around them. 

36. It belongs to the group nearest the sun, and is third 
from the sun in position. 

37. About 92,000,000. 

38. The sun, all the primary planets, and their satel- 
lites, rotate from west to east. 

39. To a theory by LaPlace called the nebular hypoth- 
esis, which assumes that originally all material of which 
the solar system is composed was scattered throughout 
space in the form of very tenuous matter called nebula. 
It being granted that this matter began to accumulate 
around a center, and that a motion of rotation was acquired, 
it can be shown on strict mechanical principles that a sys- 
tem of our own might be evolved. 

40. As the circumference of the orbits of the planets 
increases with their distance from the sun, their velocity at 
the same time diminishes, and the time of revolution, or 
length of year, increases correspondingly. 

41. On the supposition that the earth was given a pro- 
jectile fo7xe when separated from the nebulous sun it would 
have continued to move in one direction, but for the attrac- 
tion of the sun it was retained in its orbit. There being 
no resistance to the projectile force, the motion of the earth 
remains constant and unchanged. 

42. It is the unequal attraction of the neighboring 
planets and those of the sun. In its revolution the posi- 
tions are such that at points the earth is drawn from the 
sun and thus produces an orbit longer one way than 
another, or as is termed elliptical in shape. 

43. It is due to the direction of the sun's rays, and is 
on the same principle that morn and eve are cooler than 
midday. 

44. "^ Belts, or divisions of the earth, bounded by the 
Tropic and Polar Circles, of which there are five — two frigid, 
two temperate, and one torrid. The north frigid lies be- 
tween the Pole and Arctic Circle, and is 23*^ in width; 



132 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

the north temperate lies between the Arctic Circle and the 
Tropic of Cancer, and is 43*^ in width; the torrid lies be- 
tween the Tropic of Cancer and the Tropic of Capricorn, 
and extends 23^ ° north and south of the equator ; the 
south temperate is of the same size as the north, and lies 
between the Tropic of Capricorn and the Antarctic Circle ; 
the south frigid is all of the earth's surface south of the 
Antarctic Circle. 

45. A great circle whose plane coincides with that of 
the earth's orbit. 

46. Because solar and minor eclipses can only take 
place when the moon is very near its plane. 

47. It is 66 J ° , or 23J° out of a perpendicular direction. 

48. During the revolution of the earth around the sun 
a part of the earth's surface comes directly perpendicular 
to the sun's rays. This belt, 47° wide, is enclosed by 
the tropics, and termed torrid, meaning great heat. Geog- 
raphers have decided that the limit of the temperate zones 
should be to that line where the length of the longest day 
is twenty-four hours, and as the inclination of the earth is 
23^° that line should be 231° from the poles, where the 
Polar Circles have been drawn. 

49. What the exact influence upon the earth's climate 
would be, might be difficult to determine, but during the 
annual revolution of the earth the entire surface would 
come directly perpendicular to the sun's rays, and become 
torrid. When one pole would come perpendicular to the 
sun's rays, the other would necessarily be in darkness, and 
frigid. The length of the longest day at the equator would 
be twenty-four hours, and would occur every six months. 
This would give, at the equator, four zones in one year — 
two torrid and two temperate. 

50. If the earth was perpendicular to the plane of its 
orbit there would be no change of seasons, but as it be- 
comes inclined the position of the earth to the sun is 
changed in its annual revolution, consequently this change 
must produce a diversity of climate. It is by this inclina- 
tion that the temperate zones have four seasons. 

51. The inclination of the earth will vary that line 
where the length of the longest day is twenty-four hours, 
1° for every degree of inclination. As it is now 
23i°, the line must be 23i° from the poles, or the 
boundary of the frigid zones. If the inclination should 
be 20°, the frigid zones would extend 30°, and 30° 
each side of the equator would become perpendic- 



GEOGRAPHY. 133 



■ular to the :^iin's rays, making the torrid 60° , the tem- 
perate 30° iid the frigid 30° ; and so on of any other 
degree of inclination. The frigid zone would be in width 
the number &{ degrees of the inclination of the earth ; the 
torrid would be the same each side of the equator, and 
the temperate what lies betw^een. 

52. About January 1st. 

53. As the orbit is proved to be oblong, or an ellipse, 
then in its revolution around the sun the earth passes 
those points nearest together in its circuit, and con- 
sequently must be nearer the sun. 

54. When it is nearest the sun. 

55. When it is farthest from the sun. 

56. They are the times of the year when the sun's ver- 
tical rays fall exactly on the equator. There are two, the 
vernal and the autumnal. 

57. The vernal equinox takes place on the 20th of 
March and the autumnal on the 22d of September. 

58. Where the ecliptic intersects the equator at two 
points diametrically opposite to each other. 

59. They are the times wdien the vertical rays of the 
sun reach their farthest northern or southern limit and 
fall vertically on one or the other of the tropics. 

60. Two, the summer and winter solstice. 

61. The summer solstice on the 21st of June, and the 
winter solstice on the 21st of December. 

62. They are the points midway between the equi- 
noxes. 

63. A magnetic needle, resting upon a pivot, enclosed 
in a circular box. It always points nearly north. The 
cardinal points are north, south, east, and west. 

64. North-east, North-west, South-east, South-west. 

65. Into great and small circles. The great circles are 
the meridians and the equator ; the small circles are the 
tropic and polar circles, and the parallels of latitude. 

66. Into great circles and small circles, and into circles 
of position and climatic circles. 

67. All circles which divide the surface of the sphere 
into two equal parts are great circles ; all others are small 
circles. 

68. They are the circles used to determine the geo- 
graphical positions of places. 

69. Those circles to mark important climatic bound- 
aries, and are termed climatic parallels. 

70. The equator, meridians and parallels. 



134 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

71. The tropics and polar circles, and the ecliptic. 

72. It is one quarter of a circle, or 90^. 

73. Into 360 equal parts, called degrees. 

74. A drawing representing a part or the whole of the 
earth's surface. 

75. The equator, meridians, parallels, tropic and polar 
circles. 

76. A great circle equally distant from the poles. 

77. It crosses the mouth of the Amazon River, Brazil, 
United States of Columbia, Ecuador, Pacific Ocean, East 
Indies (Celebes, Borneo, Sumatra), Indian Ocean, Zangue- 
bar, Ethiopia, Lower Guinea, Atlantic Ocean. 

78. Any great circle passing through the poles. A 
meridian is half a meridian circle. 

79. The distance either east or west from any given 
meridian. 

80. On the parallels and the equator. 

81. The one which passes through Washington, and 
the one near Greenwich. 

82. About 77°. 

83. 180° either east or west. 

84. If situated on the meridian from which we reckon^ 
it can have ilo longitude. 

85. It has no latitude, and but 1° of longitude, west. 

86. Sixty geographical miles at the equator, but they 
gradually grow less as they approach the poles ; in lati- 
tude 30° it is about fifty-two geographical miles ; in lati- 
tute 60° it is thirty, and at the poles it is nothing. 

87. All meridian lines terminate at the poles, and as a 
degree of longitude is enclosed by meridian lines, the 
length must decrease as the lines approach the poles. 

88. The meridian from which longitude is reckoned. 

89. Each nation usually takes the meridian of its own 
capital. 

90. New York, Pennsylvania, Maryland, Virginia, and 
North Carolina. 

91. Siberia, and Chinese Empire. 

92. As there are 360° of longitude it follows that in 
the earth's rotation one hour of time must pass through 
1-24 of 360°, or 15°. This reduced makes 1° in four min- 
utes. Then knowing the difference in longitude the time 
is easily found, or if the difference of time is known, an 
opposite solution must give the difference in longitude. 

93. Pekin. 



GEOGRAPHY. 135 

94. The distance north or south of the equator called 
north and south latitude. ' 

95. Upon the meridians. 

96. 90^, which is at the poles. 

97. Sixty geographical, or 69i statute miles. 

98. One minute of longitude at the equator. ^ 

99. Bahama Islands, Florida Strait, Gulf of Mexico 
Mexico, Pacific Ocean, Sandwich Islands, near Canton 
(Chnia), Burmah, Hindoostan, Arabian Sea, Muscat 
(Arabia), Egypt, Sahara Desert, and Atlantic Ocean. 

100. Near Rio Janeiro, Paraguay, the northern part of 
the Argentine Republic, the southern part of Bolivia, Pacific 
Ocean, Central Australia, Isle of Madagascar, Southern 
Atrica, and Atlantic Ocean. 

^ lOL Greenland, Brirish America, Alaska, Behring Strait, 
Siberia, northern part of Russia, Lapland, Sweden, Norway, 
and Atlantic Ocean. 

102. Discoveries of land have been made in this region, 
but the cold is so great that animal or vegetable hfe does 
not exist. 

103. In the northern hemisphere there are vast tracts of 
land to receive the rays of heat and warm the atmosphere; 
but towards the south pole the rays of heat are lost on the 
great bodies of water, and the air is not warmed. 

104. The southern part of British America. 

105. Cold winds from the north and the Arctic current 
which flows near the coast of Labrador, cause the climate 
to be too cold for cultivation, while in the same latitude in 
England snow is seldom seen, which is due to the nearness 
of the warm w^aters of the Gulf Stream, a branch of which 
flows into the Irish Sea, and the northeast current flows bv 
the coast of Norway. The stream renders the climate of 
Western Europe mild and moist. * 

106. It is by the presence of the Japan current, which 
brings the warm waters of the torrid zone. 

107. It issues from the Gulf of Mexico, spreads out a 
breadth of 150 miles, and sweeps along the shore of North 
America to Newfoundland. Here it meets the Arctic cur- 
rent and divides into two branches, one of which takes a 
southeasterly course towards the coast of Africa, while the 
other flows in a northeasterly direction tow^ardsthe British 
Isles and Norway. 

108._ It is situated in the middle of the Atlantic Ocean, 
consisting of seaweed, and occupies the eddy or whirl 
caused by the several ocean currents which surround it. 



136 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

109. It is a Spanish name, meaning grassy. 

110. Continents, islands, peninsulas, isthmuses, capes, 
promontories, mountains, hills, plains, and valleys. 

111. Oceans, seas, gulfs or bays, straits, lakes and rivers. 

112. Straits, passages, sounds, and channels. 

113. It is little more than twice as large. The Western 
Continent contains about 15,000,000 square miles. 

114. About 200,000,000 square miles. 

115. Asia. Europe. Europe. South America. 

116. They may be divided into six divisions : The 
United States, British America, Danish America, The Re- 
public of Mexico, The Republic of Central America and 
the West Indies. 

117. The white race, negroes and mulattoes, Indians 
and Chinese. 

118. About 62,000,000. 

119. Agriculture, manufacturmg and mining, com- 
merce, both domestic and foreign, forms the chief basis of 
prosperity. 

120. Exports are those commodities shipped out of the 
country, and imports those which come in. 

121. The leading exports are cotton, breadstuffs, pro- 
visions, petroleum, tobacco, and thousands of varieties of 
manufactured goods. The imports are dry goods, sugar, 
coffee, tea, hides, iron, tin, and cutlery. 

122. England, Germany, France, Canada, West Indies, 
Brazil, China, and Japan. 

123. England ; 22,500,000. 

124. It is about one-sixtieth as large, or about the size 
of Wisconsin. 

125. Europe is about one-tenth larger. 

126. Asia contains four times as many square miles and 
two and a half times as many inhabitants. 

1 27. A narrow arm of the sea into which a river empties. 

128. A sea interspersed with many islands. 

129. When a river discharges its waters by several out- 
lets, the tract of land embraced by these outlets is called a 
delta. 

130. From its resemblance to the fourth letter of the 
Greek alphabet, which is delta, and shape of a triangle. 

131. A place some distance from the shore where vessels 
can anchor in safety. 

132. A fertile spot in a desert. 

133. The tract of country drained by that river and its 
tributaries. 



GEOGRAPHY. 137 

134. The Amazon. It contains more than 2,275,000 
square miles. 

135. About 1,244,000 square miles. 

136. 1,242,000; 1,425,000; 1,250,000; 1,040,000; 950,000; 
800,000; 600,000; 416,000; 590,000; 480,000; 478,000; 
340,000; 298,000. 

137. One hundred and eighty miles. 

138. Into four: enlightened, civilized, half-civilized, and 
savage. 

139. Nearly all of the people of Europe, of the United 
States and Canada, and their numerous colonies. The civ- 
ilized are nearly all of the people of South America, Mexico, 
China, and Japan. The half-civilized would embrace a 
large portion of the people of Hindostan, Indo-China, 
Turkey, and Egypt. 

140*1 Many of the tribes, of Central Asia, the Barbary 
States, and the wandering tribes of Arabs. The savages 
are the Indians of America, many of the Negro tribes of 
Africa, and the Papuans of Oceanica. 

141. The Arabs. They are called Nomads because of 
their wandering nature, living in tents with no fixed loca- 
tion. 

142. They are republican and monarchical. 

143. A country governed by men who are chosen by the 
people. A monarchy is where one person succeeds to the 
chief power by inheritance, and holds it for life. 

144. United States, France, Switzerland, Mexico, Ven- 
ezuela, United States of Columbia, Ecuador, Peru, Bolivia, 
Chili, Argentine Confederation, Uruguay, Paraguay, Guate- 
mala, Honduras, San Salvador, Nicaragua, Costa Rica, 
Hayti, San Domingo, Transvaal, Orange Free State, Liberia, 
Andorra, San Marino, and Montenegro. 

145. Where the will of the monarch is the supreme law. 
A limited monarchy is one in which the will of tht mon- 
arch is limited by a system of laws called a constitution. 

146. Unlimited. England and Germany are limited ; 
Turkey, unHmited ; Spain, Hmited ; China and Brazil, 
unlimited. 

147. The written law of a nation, a society, or associa- 
tion. 

148. An emperor, sultan, shah, czar, or mikado. 

149. Empires, kingdoms, republics, states, counties, 
townships and cities. 

150. An empire is a country governed by an emperor ; 
a kingdom, one governed by a king ; a republic, one gov- 



138 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

erned by representatives chosen by the people; a State is a 
division of a republic, having laws of its own harmonizing 
with the general government ; a county is a division of a 
State or kingdom. 

151. It is the seat of government. The metropolis is 
the largest city. 

152. Five : Caucasian, Mongolian, American or Indian, 
African, and Malay. 

153. The estimated number is 1,380,000,000. The Cau- 
casian and Mongol races number more than four-fifths, or 
about 554,000,000 each ; the Ethiopian about one-seventh, 
or 200,000,000 ; the Malay about one twenty-fifth, or 56,- 
000,000; the Indian about one one-hundredth, or 13,000,000. 

154. Seven : Christians, Buddhists, Brahmins, Religion 
of Confucius, Shinto, Mohammedanism, and Judaism. 

155. Christians, 394,000,000; Buddhists, from 300 000,- 
000 to 500,000,000, Brahmins, 145,000,000; Religion of Con- 
fucius, from 60,000,000 to 100,000,000; Shinto, 12,000,000 
to 20,000,000 ; Mohammedanism, 199.000,000 : Judaism, 
7,000,000. 

156. Three: Protestants, Roman Catholics, and adher- 
ents of the Greek Church. 

157. The Mohammedans are followers of the false 
prophet Mohammed, who lived in Arabia about six hun- 
dred years after Christ. They believe in one God ; they 
consider Moses and Christ as true prophets, but Moham- 
med as the greatest and last. The Koran is the Moham- 
medan bible. 

158. The Buddhist religion was originated by Buddha 
in the sixth century, B. C, and was characterized by admir- 
able humanity and morality, with the idea that death was 
the great sough t-for principle of our existence. Later the 
religion became mixed with an idolatrous worship of its 
founder and other supposed kindred beings. 

The Brahmin worshippers believe that Brahma was the 
creator of the world and that he was the first deity of the 
Hindoo triad. Their idols represent this union of three . 
deities, and their worship is idolatrous. 

The religion of Confucius is the political morality as 
taught by Confucius and his disciples, and forms the basis 
of the Chinese jurisprudence and education. It can hardly 
be called a religion, as it does not inculcate the worship of 
any God. 

The Shinto Religion is one of the religions of Japan, and 



GEOGRAPHY. 139 

its belief is in ancestral worship and sacrifice to departed 
heroes. 

159. The Jews reject Christ and his Gospel, and expect 
a Messiah yet to come. 

160. The greater part of the inhabitants of Asia and 
Africa, nearly all of the tribes of the islands of the Pacific, 
and the Indians of America. 

161. Mississippi, with the Missouri, 4,200 ; Nile, 4,000 ; 
Amazon, 3,750 ; Yenisei, 3,400. 

162. Mississippi proper, 2,800 ; Missouri, to the Missis- 
sippi, 2,900; Mackenzie, 2,300; Arkansas, 2,000 ; Saskatch- 
awan, 1,900. 

163. 2,000. 

164. Amazon ; La Plata, 2,300 ; Orinoco, 1,550 ; San 
Francisco, 1,550. 

165. Volga, 2,000; Danube, 1,600; Don, 1,000; Dnieper, 
1,000. 

166. Yenisei; Yang-tse-Kiang, 3,320; Obi, 3,000; Lena, 
2,700. 

167. Nile; Niger, 3,000; Zambesi, 1,800; Senegal, 1,200. 

168. It is a broad, deep river, and navigable for large 
vessels about 2,400 miles, and for steamboats to the foot of 
the Andes. The tide flows up 600 miles. Its waters teem 
with alligators, and its banks are lined with almost impen- 
etrable forests, filled with huge serpents, ferocious beasts, 
troops of monkeys, swarms of insects, and flocks of gaudily- 
colored birds. 

169. It rises in Lake Itasca, and is navigable to the 
Falls of St. Anthony, which are very heavy rapids. The 
upper part of the river, in many places, has very high and 
rugged banks, while in Louisiana levees, or banks, are built 
to prevent inundations. Its mouth is not favorable for the 
navigation of large vessels. Instead of being broad and 
clear it has many outlets, and sand-bars are continually 
forming. 

170. This river is very rapid. It is much larger than 
the Mississippi above, and is navigable to the Great Falls 
above Ft. Benton, where there are some of the grandest 
cataracts in the world. 

171. Its source, until recently, was not definitely 
known, but through the explorations of Livingston and 
Stanley it has been ascertained, together with the mysteri- 
ous overflow through Egypt. At Khartoom, in Soudan, 
the river divides and these divisions are called the Blue 
Nile and the White Nile. The Blue rises in Abyssinia 



140 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

and the White, the real source of the Nile, rises in Lake 
Victoria Nyanza. The overflow of the Lower Nile is from 
June to December, and is caused by the tropical rains in 
Abyssinia and those of the interior. The river gradually 
rises for three months and as slowly subsides, leaving a 
narrow river for the remainder of the year. By this over- 
flow the lands from ten to twenty miles become one of the 
most fertile valleys in the world. Above its mouth for 
nearly 1,500 miles there are no rivers or creeks which 
flow into it. 

172. It is a great estuary 200 miles long, and formed 
by the union of the Parana and Uruguay. For 1,000 miles 
on the Parana there is a continuous and safe navigation 
for vessels of three hundred tons burden. 

173. This country is nearly as large as Texas ; about 
three-fourths of its area consists of sandy deserts. The 
settled portions are principally in the valley of the Nile, 
which is from 10 to 20 miles in width. Egypt is noted 
for its wonderful ruins. The pyramids, temples, sphynxes, 
statues, and caves hewn in the rocks, are traces of its 
former civilization. 

174. Cross the Atlantic, enter the Mediterranean Sea ; 
pass through the Suez canal ; down the Red Sea into the 
Indian Ocean ; pass near the southern points of Asia to 
Canton ; thence across the Pacific to San Francisco ; then 
by rail across the continent to New York. 

2d. Sail southwest on the California route until nearly 
opposite Rio Janeiro ; cross the Atlantic ; pass Cape of 
Good Hope ; through the Indian Ocean to the East In- 
dies ; then up the China Sea to Canton ; cross the Pacific 
to San Francisco ; thence to Panama and across the Isth- 
mus; thence north through the West Indies, to New York. 

175. The United States. 

176. Between the 26th and 49th. The distance from 
the southern point of Texas to the British possessions is 
about 1,600 miles. 

177. It is about 45° west from Washington, and about 
3,000 miles from New York. 

178. Kansas. 

179. Cotton — United States. Sugar — West Indies. 
Coffee — Brazil. Rice and Tea — China. 

180. Cotton — South America and Egypt. Sugar — 
United States and South America. Coffee — Java Islands, 
West Indies, and United States. Rice — United States and 
Egypt. 



GEOGRAPHY. 141 

181. The Spice Islands are celebrated for the produc- 
tion of cloves, nutmegs, and other spices. Java produces 
more pepper than all other countries combined. 

182. The unexpanded flower dried. The clove tree 
grows to the height of from twenty to thirty feet. 

183. The fruit of the nutmeg tree. This tree is about 
the size of the common pear. 

J 84. Several ranges near each other and connected. 

185. The Rocky, Californian, AUeghanian, Andean, 
Parime, and Brazilian. 

186. At the equator the length of the days is equal, 
being twelve hours each ; at the tropics the longest day is 
about thirteen and one-half hours ; at the Polar Circles 
twenty-four hours ; at the Poles six months. 

187. Rains from the Pacific are of rare occurrence, and 
the height of the Andes range prevents the rain-clouds 
from the east. 

188. Manchester. Lyons. Belfast. Sheffield. Brussels. 

189. Agriculture, manufactures, lumbering, and com- 
merce. 

190. Grains, butter, cheese, wool, maple sugar, and live 
stock. 

191. On the Merrimac and Pawtucket Rivers. Lowell, 
Lawrence, Fall River, Pawtucket and Woonsocket. 

192. It is said to be more extensively used for manu- 
facturing purposes than any other river in the world. 

193. The winters are long and severe and the summers 
short but hot. The soil is generally stony and not very 
fertile, except in the valleys. The agricultural products 
are not sufhcient to supply the wants of the population. 
The many excellent harbors, the comparative nearness to 
Europe, and the abundance of ship timber have contribu- 
ted to establish an extensive foreign commerce. 

194. They are about two-fifths that of California. 

195. Harvard at Cambridge and Yale at New Haven. 

196. Lynn is famous for its manufacture of boots and 
shoes. New Bedford for its whale fisheries. Springfield, 
the greatest arsenal in the United States. Worcester, a 
great railroad and manufacturing center. Portland, for 
the termination of the Grand Trunk Railway of Canada. 

197. It is the highest peak of the White Mountains in 
New Hampshire, and is 6,288 feet high. 

198. From the extensive quarries in Vermont and Italy. 
It is also found in the States of Maine, Massachusetts, 
Rhode Island and Tennessee. 



142 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

199. It is very hard rock, and much used for millstones . 
It is found in the Eastern States. 

200. New Hampshire, Maine, Vermont, Massachusetts. 

201. For the opening engagements of the war of the 
Eevolution, April 19th, 1775. 

202. 1,300 square miles. 183. 

203. It is nearly as large. 

204. The boundary line varies by taking, as it appears 
to be, a township in one place and part of another Irom 
the State of Connecticut and giving it to Massachusetts. 

206. About 189,000 square miles. 

206. A large portion of it is traversed by mountain 
ranges. The great agricultural valley lies between the 
Sierra Nevada and coast range, and extends 50l) miles. 

207. It is the Sacramento and San Joaquin valley, 
and derives its name from the Sacramento River, which 
rises in the northern part of the State, and the San Joa- 
quin, which rises in the southern part. These rivers flow 
towards each other and empty into a branch of San 
Francisco Bay. 

208. A narrow strait about four miles long, which is 
the entrance from the Pacific Ocean to San Francisco Bay. 

209. It is mild and equable in temperature, but has 
great extremes of moisture. The seasons are termed the 
wet and the dry. At Puget Sound there is a greater rain- 
fall than any other part of the United States, except 
Alaska. 

210. The Big Trees and the Yosemite Valley are two of 
the chief wonders of nature. The Big Trees are gigantic 
evergreens, some of which are more than 100 feet around, 
400 feet high, and 3,000 years old. The Yosemite Valley is 
a remarkable chasm ten miles long and three in width, 
with perpendicular walls of granite from 3,000 to 5,000 feet 
high, over which the Merced River, in three leaps, falls 
more than 2,000 feet. 

211. Wheat, wool, lumber, salmon fisheries, gold, wine, 
and a great variety of fruits. 

212. They are an immense industry. 

213. It is very fertile, its climate mild, which is due to 
the warm ocean current which flows by its shores. The 
same latitude on the Atlantic is almost a cold, barren waste. 

214. It has an area of 577,000 square miles, or more 
than ten times that of Illinois. The climate is cold, and 
with the exception of the southern point, it is unfit for 
civilization. In the northern part the coast is low and 



GEOGRAPHY. 143 

marsh}'', while in the south it is mountainous. The Yukon 
and Pelly Rivers are remarkable for their size and length. 

215. It is organized into a territory, but has no represen- 
tation in Congress. 

216. It is already of considerable value, and may be- 
come of great interest, as the salmon fisheries are inex- 
haustible and mining is attracting much attention. The 
seal fisheries yield an annual revenue to the government of 
over $100,000. ^ 

217. A species of license is granted a company, who are 
allowed to kill so many seals each year and pay certain 
amounts to the government for this exclusive privilege. 

218. Sitka, on the Island of Sitka. The rain-fall at 
this point is about seven and a half feet a year. 

219. It was first announced at the close of the year 1848. 

220. The climate is noted for its periodical changes. 
There are two seasons, the wet and the dry. In the lati- 
tude of San Francisco the wet season lasts from the middle 
of November to the middle of May. 

221. Richmond is about twenty -five miles south. 

222. About 230 miles. 

223. The northern part of Patagonia. 

224. It is a little larger than the United States, contain- 
ing about 3,230,000 square miles. 

225. Havana. 

226. It is a vast peninsula, occupying the southern half 
of the Western Continent. Its length from north to south 
is about 4,000 miles, and its greatest breadth is about 3,000. 
Three great mountain systems diversify the surface, viz., 
the Andean, which stretches along the western coast ; the 
Parime, which consists of several parallel ranges extending 
from east to west, between the Orinoco and Amazon Rivers; 
and the Brazilian system, which consists of two ranges 
running parallel to the coast of Brazil, w^ith several diverg- 
ing chains. Between these mountain systems extends a vast 
plain. This plain may be divided into four parts — the^ 
region of the llanos, the selvas, the pampas, and ivastes of 
Patagonia. 

227. They are level grazing tracts, which occupy most 
of the region of the basin of the Orinoco. During the dry 
season they are parched and desolate, but with the return 
of rain rich pastures are abundant. 

228. They are the forest plains of the Amazon, occupy- 
ing the lower part of the basin, extending as far as the 
periodical inundation. 



144 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

229. These tracts are in the Argentine Republic, and 
are covered with a heavy growth of grass, which affords sus- 
tenance to great herds of cattle and horses. 

230. Sterile tracts covered with sand and gravel. 

231. An extensive level tract considerably elevated 
above the level of the sea. 

232. The Great Plateau of the Andes ; the elevated 
plains of Quito, Bogota, and Popayan ; and the tableland 
of Brazil. 

233. It is an extensive tract of lofty tableland, stretch- 
ing along the tops of the Andes between parallels 3° and 
15"" south latitude, with an elevation of nearly 13,000 
feet. 

' 234. It is situated under the equator, on the side of a 
volcanic mountain, 9,500 feet above the sea. The climate 
is that of continued spring. Earthquakes are frequent. 
There are in sight eleven summits of the Andes covered 
with perpetual snow. 

235. Volcanoes of Ecuador. Chimborazo is a peak of 
the Andes range, 21,440 feet high. Cotopaxi, 18,900 feet 
high, is the most tremendous volcano in the world. The 
flame sometimes rises 3,000 feet above the top. 

236. A light raft, which is formed of inflated skins cov- 
ered with a light platform. These are used for unloading 
vessels through the breakers, which continually dash upon 
the shores and prevent the approach of any ordinary boat. 

237. It is a connecting river between the Orinoco and 
Rio Negro Rivers. This tract of country is so level that a 
rise or fall of the Orinoco governs the course of that river, 
which flows during a portion of the year into the Amazon, 
and at other times in an opposite direction. 

238. Twelve and a half degrees north of the equator. 

239. Into three divisions : Portuguese South America, 
Spanish South America, and the Guianas. 

240. The Empire of Brazil. 

241. British, French and Dutch colonies. 

242. Nine independent republics, viz. : Venezuela, Co- 
lumbia, Ecuador, Peru, Bolivia, Chili, Argentine Confeder- 
ation, Uruguay and Paraguay. 

243. They were once colonies of Spain. 

244. Venezuela is the most northern country of South 
America, is tropical in climate, and exports coffee, cocoa 
and tropical fruits. 

United States of Columbia occupies the northwest por- 
tion, embracing the Isthmus of Panama, and is the most im- 



GEOGRAPHY. 145 

portant of the five northern repubhcs. By treaty it is 
under the protection of the United States. 

Ecuador lies south of Cohimbia, and its exports are 
cocoa, coffee, Indian-rubber and Peruvian bark. 

Peru hes south of Ecuador, and has more miles of rail- 
road than any other country of South America. Its chief 
exports are guano and saltpeter. Silver mining is an im- 
portant industry. 

Bolivia has but little commerce; its people are not so 
energetic and prosperous. The exports are Peruvian bark, 
saltpeter and silver ore. 

Chili occupies a narrow strip of sea-coast extending from 
Bolivia to Cape Horn. It is the most enterprising country 
of South America, and a large proportion of its inhabitants 
are Europeans. Its chief exports are copper-ore, silver and 
wheat. The climate is semi-tropical in the northern part 
and extends into the cold, barren regions on the south. 

245. This Confederation stands next to Chili in enter- 
prise. Its climate is semi-tropical, and its exports are 
hides, wool and flax. The country is almost an extensive 
plain with the finest grazing in the world. Large herds of 
cattle, horses and sheep are successfully handled here. 
Two-thirds of the hides are shipped to the United States. 
Education is rapidly advancing. The location of this 
country is to the southern hemisphere what the United 
States is to the northern. Uruguay and Paraguay formerly 
belonged to the Argentine Confederation, but are each now 
independent republics. Their exports and climate are 
similar to the Argentine Confederation. Paraguay is the 
weakest of the nine republics, and is the only country of 
South America having no sea-coast. 

246. It contains about 27,000,000 inhabitants, of which 
one-third belong to the Caucasian race, one-third Indians, 
and the remainder consists of Negroes and j)ersons of 
mixed blood called Mestizoes and Mulattoes. 

247. As South America is largely in the torrid zone the 
climate does not inspire activity, and commerce naturally 
drags, but as civilization advances the general prosperity 
increases. The country is fast feeling the influence of the 
enlightenment of the United States and Europe. 

248. There are no large gulfs or bays to indent the 
shores, and no great lakes for an inland commerce. The 
natural facilities for commerce and manufacturing are 
greatly inferior to those of North America. The great- 
central plain supports millions of cattle, horses and sheep. 



146 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

The industries are mostly of the productions of tropical 
climates. Gold, silver, copper and diamonds are found 
and extensively mined. 

249. Brazil. 

250. Chili. 

251. They are short. Chili has the best system and 
Brazil has about 2,000 miles. 

252. Uruguay. 

253. Sydney. 

254. Buffalo. 

255. Near Cape Verd. 

256. It projects from Horn Island, which is southwest 
from Hermit Island. Cape Horn has usually been given 
as projecting from the Isle of Hermit. 

257. The most southern part of the inhabited world, 
and is peopled by a race of miserable savages who live 
chiefly by fishing. These islands were discovered by 
Magellan, in 1520, and so named by him on account of 
the number of fires he saw along the coast, which he sup- 
posed to be eruptions of volcanoes. The meaning of Terra 
del Fuego is land of fire. 

258. It was taken from the Spanish word Patagon — a 
man with large feet. Magellan gave the inhabitants of 
this country the name of Patagonians on account of the 
apparent large size of their feet, which, being wrapped in 
skins, seemed much larger than they really were. 

259. Cape Gallinas, St. Roque, Horn, Parina. 

260. It is in Peru, and the Ucayle River is its outlet. 
This lake is the source of the Amazon. 

261. With the exception of Lake Titicaca and Lake 
Maracaibo, they are more like vast morasses than lakes. 

262. Lake Titicaca is a saltish lake, about half as 
large as Lake Erie, and is situated on the Great Plateau 
nearly 13,000 feet above the level of the Pacific Ocean. Its 
waters are inland, having no outlet to the ocean. Lake 
Maracaibo is, more properly speaking, a bay, being con- 
nected by a strait with the Caribbean Sea. 

263. They lie off the coast of Peru, and are of great 
value for the immense quantities of guano found upon 
them. 

264. French Guiana, which contains about 3,500 square 
miles, or about the size of Maine. 

265. It contains nearly one-half of the peninsula. It 
was once a colony of Portugal, .and Portuguese is the 
language of the civilized inhabitants. An ocean telegraph 



GEOGRAPHY. 147 

connects this country with Portugal and another with the 
United States by the way of the West Indies. Brazil 
furnishes the greater part of the coffee used in the world, 
more than one-half of which goes to the United States. 
Cotton, sugar, hides, dye-woods, Indian-rubber and dia- 
monds are also produced in large quantities. 

266. A ship canal. 

267. That it shall not become a possession of any for- 
eign government. 

268. A treaty of protection. The United States guaran- 
tees that no other power shall take possession of her lands 
or government. 

269. A great French engineer who conceived the idea 
of building the Suez Canal, and is now pushing to comple- 
tion the canal on the Isthmus of Panama. 

270. They form one of the grandest mountain ranges 
in the world. They commence in low hills on the Isthmus 
of Panama, and terminate in the Island of Cape Horn, 
which is a bleak and naked rock, rising 3,500 feet above 
the sea. In Patagonia they rise abruptly from the shore, 
but farther north they are from 60 to 100 miles from the 
coast. They consist generally of parallel ranges of lofty 
mountains, with high valleys and tablelands between. This 
system is from 30 to 400 miles wide. 

271. It comprises about one-third of the continent of 
North America, together with many adjacent islands. Its 
chief divisions are the Dominion of Canada, the Province 
of Newfoundland, the Bermuda Islands, the Bahamas, 
Jamaica, and numerous colonies in the West Indies. 

272. Quebec, Pntario, New Brunswick, Nova Scotia, 
Prince Edward Island, British Columbia, Manitoba, and 
the Northeast and Northwest Territories or Districts. 

273. The climate is severe, except in the southern parts 
of British Columbia and Ontario. The surface as a whole 
is considered level. British Columbia and the provinces 
east of Manitoba are great forest regions. Between the 
Rocky Mountains and Manitoba are extensive prairies. 
The trade is principally with Great Britain and the United 
States. The exports are fish, coal, grain, and lumber. 

274. It is nearly the same size and its population is 
4,375,000. Its area 'is 3,500,000. 

275. Cape Breton. 

276. The surface is generally rocky and barren. The 
coast is indented by deep inlets, which form many excellent 
harbors. It is noted for its fisheries. 



148 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

277. Nova Scotia has many good harbors and valuable 
fisheries. It is favorably located for commerce and exports 
fish, sheep, coal and gypsum. 

Prince Edward Island has a fertile soil, and agriculture 
is the leading occupation. 

New Brunswick is noted for its timber forests, and 
exports great amounts of lumber and fish. 

Quebec has a severe climate, and is noted for its pictur- 
esque scenery. Montreal, the largest city of this province, 
has an extensive commerce and ships large amounts of 
grain. 

Ontario has a mild climate, compared with Quebec, and 
produces a great amount of grain and lumber. 

278. Manitoba is in the basin of the great wheat grow- 
ing region of the North and is rapidly increasing in popu- 
lation. The Red River of the North, flowing from the 
United States, and the Winnipeg Lake with the Saskatcha- 
wan River, form 2,000 miles of inland navigation. 

British Columbia abounds in salmon, timber, coal, gold 
and other metals. It is soon to be connected with the 
great Canadian Pacific Railroad. 

279. They are divided into Provisional Districts : Atha- 
basca, AlSerta, Saskatchawan and Assiniboia. It will 
eventually be the greatest wheaL producing country in the 
world. 

280. The chief executive officer is the Governor-Gen- 
eral, who is appointed by the sovereign of Great Britain. 
The Legislature consists of two branches. The members 
of the lower branch are elected by the people, but the 
members of the other branch are appointed by the Gov- 
ernor-General. Each province has a similar government 
under a Lieutenant-Governor. 

281. For the production of wheat, and contains over 
300,000 square miles. 

282. It is an arm of the sea, which almost divides the 
Island of Cape Breton. 

283. The small islands of St. Pierre and Miquelon. 
These islands lie south of Newfoundland, and serve as 
fishing-stations. 

284. They are shallow places in the sea, the largest of 
which is Grand Bank, and lies to the eastward of the island. 
This bank is more than 600 miles long and 250 broad. 

285. It is situated at the mouth of the St. Lawrence 
River. It is a barren island and only occupied by keepers 
of light-houses upon the coast. 



GEOGRAPHY. ' 149 

286. South Carolina. Delaware. 

287. On Montreal Island. This island is 32 miles in 
length, and is situated at the junction of the Ottawa with 
the St. Lawrence. The Isle of Jesus lies north of it. 

288. For the grandeur and beaut}^ of its natural scenery. 
Niagara FaUs, the Thousand Isles, and Rapids of St. La^v»- 
rence, the falls near Quebec, and the grand scenery of the 
Saguenay River, are the admiration of thousands of tour- 
ists. 

289. For having the highest tides in the world, which 
rise to the height of seventy feet. 

290. Tides are elevations and depressions of the ocean 
at regular intervals, occurring twice in twenty-four hours . 
The neap tides are the least ebb and flow of the water, and 
are at the close of the first quarter and first of the last 
quarter of the moon. Spring tides are the greatest ebb and 
flow of the water, which occur at the time of the new and 
the full moon. 

291. The attraction of the moon and sun. Probably 
not one teacher in a thousand can explain to the satisfac- 
tion of his scholars this attraction. The fact that the 
water rises on opposite sides of the earth at the same time 
is the difficult part of the question. How the attraction 
on one side produces a similar attraction on the other, we 
leave for your study, as we frankly confess we dare not 
attempt its explanation in this review. 

292. Waves, tides and currents. 

293. The action of the winds on the surface of a body 
of water. On the ocean, the height of waves produced by 
storms averages from 10 to 20 feet. 

294. They are like vast rivers, transporting its waters 
from one part to another, and are caused by the heat of the 
sun, rotation of the earth, the saltness of the sea, by winds, 
tides, and melting ice. 

295. Into constant, periodical, and temporar3\ 

296. A stream which runs by the side of, or beneath 
another current, and in an opposite direction. 

297. The position of the bay is such, that the Atlantic 
tide is forced into it, and the waters are raised by this pres- 
sure above the adjoining sea. 

298. Grain, hemp, flax, potatoes, lumber, fish, coal, grind- 
stones, and gypsum. 

299. Halifax, Charlotte Town, St. John's, Fredericktown, 
Ottawa, and New Westminster. 

300. Newfoundland. 



150 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

301. The rapids of the St. Lawrence, Niagara Falls, and 
falls in the River St. Mary. 

802. In ascending the river, the rapids are avoided by 
canals on the left bank, but the downward passa^je, though 
perilous, is made by the river itself The Welland Canal 
connects Lakes Ontario and Erie, thereby avoiding the Falls 
of Niagara. The falls of the St. Mary River are passed by 
a ship canal. 
• 303. By an isthmus, fourteen miles in width. 

304. Grand, Navy, and Goat. 

305. The Canadians claim that American fishermen 
have gone into British waters. Several seizures were 
made, and the matter called the attention of the two gov- 
ernments. 

306. The great water route is the St. Lawrence River 
and the Great Lakes. By railroad, the Grand Trunk, 
which passes from Detroit, Michgan, through the principal 
cities of the Dominion to Quebec, with a branch to Port- 
land, Maine. 

307. Into three divisions: Malasia, Australasia, and Po- 
lynesia. 

308. The East India Archipelago, which lies to the 
southeast of Asia. The principal divisions are the Sunda 
Isles, Spice Islands, Philippine, and Celebes. 

309. Borneo, Sumatra, and Java. 

310. They are varied, for no part of the world is richer ' 
in its vegetable productions. The minerals are also valu- 
able. Nearly all of the spices that we use — such as cinna- 
mon, cloves, nutmegs, and pepper — are raised on these 
islands. The bread-fruit tree, sago, cocoanut palm, ba- 
nanas, yams, and various tropical fruits are grown exten- 
sively. Coffee is exported from Java ; gold and diamonds 
from Borneo ; tin from Banca ; sugar, hemp and tobacco 
from the Philippine Isles. 

311. They are among the largest and fiercest upon the 
earth. The tiger, rhinoceros, elephant, and ourang-outang 
are found in Sumatra. 

312. They are principally Malays. 

318. The Dutch, English, Spanish, and Portuguese. 
Java, the Spice Islands, Sumatra, Celebes, a part of Borneo, 
and most of Timor belong to the Dutch. The Philippine 
Isles to Spain. A part of Borneo and Papuan to the 
English, and a part of Timor belongs to the Portuguese. 

314. Batavia and Manilla. 

315. Borneo contains about 260,000 square miles, 



GEOGRAPHY. 151 

Sumatra 125,000, Java 52,000, Celebes 46,000, Philippine 
66,000. 

316. Pennsylvania. 

317. The torrid. The equator crosses Sumatra, Borneo, 
Celebes, and some of the Spice Islands. 

318. Most of them are mountainous, and many contain 
active volcanoes. Java alone contains forty-three. 

319. With the exception of Java, they are not. Java, 
which is about the size of Arkansas, contains 18,000,000 
people. 

320. This is the largest division of Oceanica, and com- 
prises Australia, Papua or New Guinea, Tasmania, New 
Zealand, New Caledonia, and many other islands. 

321. They are a cannibal negro race and inhabit a long 
group of islands extending from New Guinea to New Cal- 
edonia. 

322. To Great Britain. 

323. New Caledonia. 

324. North Australia, South Australia, West Australia, 
Queen's Land, New South Wales, Victoria, and Alexandra 
Land. 

325. About four-fifths as large as the United States. 

326. Near the coast are mountain ranges. The central 
regions have never been explored, but are supposed to con- 
sist of a low, barren plain. The Murray is the only river 
of much importance. 

327. The greater part of them are Europeans and their 
descendants. The natives are a race of negroes, called 
Papuans. 

328. Mining and raising wool. They also produce large 
amounts of wheat, indigo, cotton, sugar, coffee, tin and 
copper. 

329. The colonies are politically independent of one 
another, and are governed by representatives chosen by 
universal suffrage, and by executive officers appointed by 
the Crown. 

330. The northern part is tropical, while the southern 
part is subjected to sudden successions of floods and 
droughts. 

331. One line, from the principal cities, crosses the mid- 
dle of the continent to the northwest coast, and is continued 
by ocean cable to British India, and thence through Asia 
and Europe. Other lines and cables connect direct with 
London. 

332. The largest is the kangaroo. The most singular 



152 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

one is the platypus, which has the body of an otter, the 
bill of a duck, and lays eggs. 

333. Melbourne, Sydney, Adelaide, and Perth. 

334. It is not. The estimated number of inhabitants 
is two million. 

335. It is about one-half as large as England, and is a 
fine agricultural island, inhabited solely by European col- 
onists. . 

336. It is situated southeast of Asia. These islands 
are mountainous, and the inhabitants belong to the Malay 
race. 

337. They are but little known. There are no white 
settlements in any of them except New Caledonia. 

338. The great number of islands which are scattered 
throughout the wide expanse of the Pacific Ocean. 

339. The Sandwich, Society, Friendly, Marquesas, 
Caroline, and Ladrone. 

340. They are divided into two classes : The mountain- 
ous, which are principally of volcanic formation, and the 
low islands, which are the work of the coral insect. 

341 . Most of the natives belong to the Malay race. 

342. When first discovered, these islands contained 
neither insects nor reptiles, and no animal larger than a hog. 

343. Honolulu, on Oahu, one of the Sandwich Islands. 

344. New York, Pennsylvania, New Jersey and Dela- 
ware. They are about twice as large. 

345. New York contains 47,000 square miles, and Penn- 
sylvania 46,000. 

346. New York is somewhat undulating. The Cats- 
kill and Adirondack Mountains are in this State. Penn- 
sylvania is quite mountainous ; here the Alleghany system 
has attained its greatest breadth. The greater part of 
New Jersey, Delaware, and Maryland is a low and gener- 
ally sandy tract. 

347. In wealth, population, and commercial import- 
ance, it holds the first rank in the Union. 

348. Rochester has the most extensive flour-ni'ills in the 
East, and Syracuse the greatest salt-works in the country. 
West Point is the seat of the United States Military Acad- 
emy, and Saratoga is well-known as a fashionable watering 
place. 

349. It is one of the wealthiest States in the Union. 
Much of its wealth lies in mining and manufacturing ; but 
it is also rich in grain and live stock. 

350. The mines of iron and coal far surpass those of 



GEOGRAPHY. 153 

any other State. Petroleum in large quantities is found in 
the northwestern part. 

351. Pittsburg is the greatest iron manufacturing city, 
and Philadelphia is the second greatest manufacturing 
€ity in the Union. 

352. It is in Philadelphia, and the great celebration of 
1876, called the Centennial, was held there. 

353. It is estimated at 1,500,000. In a radius of thirty 
miles it is more than 2,500,000. 

354. See answer No. 651 on United States History. 

355. The Statue of Liberty Enlightening the World. 

356. Chiefly agricultural. They supply New York and 
Philadelphia with vegetables. 

357. Long Branch, Cape May and Atlantic City. 

358. With the exception of Rhode Island, it is the 
smallest State in the Union. It contains 2,120 square 
miles. 

359. It is situated on the Potomac River, and has an 
area of seventy square miles. It contains Washington and 
several small towns. It is under the government of Con- 
gress. 

360. One hundred and sixty-five feet. 

361. Into three divisions: the Greater Antilles, the 
Lesser Antilles, and the Bahamas. 

362. Cuba, Hayti, Jamaica, and Porto Rico. 

363. The chain of islands which extends from Porto 
Rico to South America. 

384. They are low islands of coral formation, and lie 
north of the Greater Antilles. 

365. Cuba and Porto Rico belong to Spain ; Jamaica, 
the Bahamas, and most of the Lesser Antilles belong to 
Great Britain ; Hayti is independent ; and the remamnig 
islands are owned by France, Denmark, Holland and 
Venezuela. 

366. They consist principally of whites, free negroes, 
and slaves. About one-sixth are white. 

367. They are mountainous, and are supposed to be the 
remains of a mountain chain which at some remote 
period connected North and South America. 

368. Tropical fruits, sugar, coffee, tobacco, rum, mahog- 
anv, and spices. 

369. Spirits distilled from molasses. 

370. Into two distinct states : the Republic of Domin- 
ica and the Republic of Hayti. ^ . 

371. The island once belonged to France and bpam. 



154 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

In 1791 the slaves in the western, or French division, rose 
against their masters, and after a bloody and cruel war 
succeeded in establishing themselves, first as an empire, 
then as an independent republic. In 1849, the President 
(Soulouque) proclaimed himself emperor, with the title of 
Faustin I. After a reign often years, iSoulouque was deposed 
and a republican form of government was again adopted. 
In 1821 the eastern division revolted from Spain and 
formed a republic. 

372. They are east of the United States and belong to 
Great Britain. There are about 400 of these islands. 
Most of them are so small and barren that they have neither 
name nor inhabitants. 

373. Cuba is about the size of Pennsylvania, and Hayti 
is about half as large as Michigan, containing 28,000 square 
miles. 

374. Small rocky islands of coral formation. 

375. A chain of rocks lying near the surface of the water. 

376. It is fringed with reefs, and as many of the rocks 
are just below the surface of the water, it becomes danger- 
ous to navigation. 

377. It is the most southern town in the United States, 
and is situated upon an island of coral formation, south- 
west of the mainland of Florida. Its exports are salt and 
sponge. 

378. By solar evaporation. 

379. A soft porous substance, which is found attached 
to rocks below the surface of the water, supposed to be the 
work of marine insects. 

380. It is generally level, there being no mountains in 
the State. In the south, dense marshy thickets called 
everglades cover the surface for a distance of 160 miles 
with an average breadth of 60 miles. 

381. Cotton, corn, sugar-cane, rice, and tobacco. Trop- 
ical fruits, such as oranges, lemons, figs, pomegranates, 
pineapples, olives, etc., are abundant. 

382. It is near the southern part of Florida, and is a 
great swamp connected with the everglades. 

383. They propose that capitalists shall drain these 
lands by a system of canals. As the lands when drained 
will be unsurpassed in fertility, it is reasonable to suppose 
that eventually it will be done. 

384. On account of the numerous reefs, or keys, which 
skirt the shores, and the lowness of the land as it approaches 
the sea. 



GEOGRAPHY. 155 

385. Louisiana. About one-fifbh part of the State is on 
the east side of the river. 

386. On the west side. It is the greatest cotton mart 
in the world, and is about 100 miles from the mouth of the 
Mississippi. It is built round a bend in the river, and 
therefore is called the " Crescent City." The foundation is 
artificial, having been built on a swamp. It lies below the 
level of the river, but is protected by the Levee, which at 
this place is a continuous quay, four miles long and 100 
feet wide. 

387. It is various. The richest tract in the State is a 
narrow belt of land, from one to two miles wide, on both 
sides of the river, extending from 150 miles above to 100 
miles below New Orleans. This tract is annually inun- 
dated by the spring floods. Only a small part of the State 
is under cultivation. 

388. There are ten : Washington, Idaho, Montana, 
Dakota, Wyoming, Utah, Arizona, New Mexico, and Indian 
Territory. Alaska is not an organized territory. 

389. Greenland and Iceland. 

390. It has not. The interior and northern parts are 
unknown, and the supposition by some is, that the island 
is only a projection of an Arctic continent not yet dis- 
covered. 

391. It was named by an Icelandic chief, who, for 
some crime, was obliged to flee from his native land. To 
induce his countrymen to follow him to Greenland, he 
falsely represented it to be superior in fertility to Iceland. 

392. It is of volcanic formation. Ranges of high, 
rugged mountains border the coast, while the interior is a 
dreary desert of volcanoes, ice-clad mountains, or fields of 
lava. 

893. The Geysers, or boiling springs. About fifty of 
these hot springs occupy an ar^a not exceeding twelve 
acres. Some are so powerful that they throw up water, 
and even large stones, to a great height. 

394. The nearness to Mount Hecla, which is thirty-five 
miles distant, or the volcanic commotion beneath. 

395. It was so called by a Norwegian pirate, who, on 
his first visit, saw a bay filled with ice, which had floated 
there from Greenland. 

396. Lichtenfels and Reikiavik. 

397. About 4,000,000 square miles. 

398. From north to south it is about 5,000 miles, and 
its greatest breadth is about 4,800. 



156 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

399. Large portions of it have not, as yet, been ex- 
plored. The shores are not indented by deep gulfs or in- 
lets, which is one of the principal reasons why the interior 
is so little known. The surface is various. There are 
mountain systems, sandy deserts, and elevated plateaus. 
The greater part is in the torrid zone, and, much of the 
country being desert land, it is, as a whole, the hottest and 
dryest grand division of the globe. 

400. Except the northern part and some settlements on 
the coast, the inhabitants are Negro tribes, whose religion 
is Paganism and their condition barbarous. 

401. Morocco, Algiers, Tunis, Tripoli and Barca. 

402. Morocco is an independent empire. Algiers is a 
colony of France. Tunis and Tripoli are subjects of 
Turkey. 

403. It is from 750 to 1,200 miles wide, and 3,000 in 
length. 

404. It occupies a large portion of Central Africa, ex- 
tending across the continent south of the Great Desert. 
The soil is fertile, climate tropical and similar to Amazon 
Valley. It contains a large number of semi-barbarous States 
with a large population. The religion is largely Moham- 
medan, although a great many tribes of Negroes are Pagans 
and combine with their religion a belief in evil spirits, 
witchcraft and magic charms, and is known as Fetichism. 
The exports are gold, ivory, ostrich feathers and gum arable. 
Commerce is carried on by caravans. 

405. Cape Colony, Natal, Caffraria, the Transvaal 
Eepublic, Orange Free States, and Zoolu, Bechuna, Nam- 
aqua, and Damara. 

406. Cape Colony and Natal are British colonies. The 
others are in possession of independent tribes. 

407. It is on the western coast of Africa, and is a Negro 
republic, with a government modeled after that of the 
United States. Liberia was founded in 1821, by the 
American Colonization Society, as a place of refuge for 
free blacks and liberated slaves from the United States. 

408. It is situated above Liberia, and was founded for 
the same purpose in 1787, by the British government. 

409. They differ in different parts. The southern por- 
tion exports corn, wine, wool, hides, horns, ivory, gold, and 
diamonds ; the western part, ebony, palm oil, gold dust, 
and ostrich feathers ; the northern, fruits, wool, hides, gums, 
indigo, salt, leather, cotton, rice, opium, coffee, and many 
other articles. 



GEOGRAPHY. 157 

410. It is the largest of the African islands, containing 
240,000 square miles. It is a mountainous country, and 
but little known. Part of the inhabitants belong to the 
African and part to the Malay race. 

411. Cairo is the largest and Alexandria the second. 

412. At the ends of the Suez Canal. 

413. It is 65 miles long and belongs to Egypt. 

414. Helena, Olympia, Boise City, Cheyenne, Salt Lake 
City, Prescott, Santa Fe, Tahlequah, Bismarck and Sitka. 

415. For their rich gold and silver mines, and the nat- 
ural advantages for grazing and stock-raising. 

416. The Yellowstone Park is in the northwest corner 
of Wyoming and contains 3,600 square miles. Its deep 
canyons, lofty falls, and numerous bathing pools, geysers, 
and lakes, make it in many respects the most wonderful 
portion of the continent, and even of the world. It has 
been set aside by Congress as a " perpetual reservation for 
the benefit and instruction of mankind." 

417. It has less mountains than Idaho or Montana. 
Much of its surface consists of rolling prairie land, well 
watered, and especially adapted for farming and cattle- 
raising. 

418. This name is given to that part of the great rail- 
road west of the Missouri River. It passes through the 
southern part of Nebraska, up the valley of the Platte 
River, touching the northern boundary line of Colorado 
and the southern part of Wyoming, through Northern 
Utah and Nevada, and thence through CaKfornia to the 
Pacific Ocean. 

419. Omaha, Fremont, Columbus, Kearne}^, Julesburg, 
Cheyenne, Laramie, and Ogden. 

420. It is on the Jordan River, near Great Salt Lake, 
south of the Union Pacific Railroad, on a branch of that 
road. 

421. It contains the Great Salt Lake and the eastern 
portion of the Great Basin, which is the most desolate 
region in the United States. Rain seldom falls in this 
basin, but some portions near the rivers and lakes have 
been made fertile by irrigation. ^ Gold, silver, iron, salt, 
coal and other minerals are plentiful. 

422. The Mormons, or Latter-day Saints. 

423. For grazing. 

424. By tribes of Indians, and large herds of wild 
horses. 

425. Cotton, corn, sugar, tobacco, rice, and tropical 



158 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

fruits. Stock-raising is the principal business of the in- 
habitants. 

426. A great portion of the State is much elevated, and 
therefore free from extremes of heat and cold. Snow is 
seldom seen, but from October to March, the " Northers " 
(violent winds) sweep over the prairies of Texas and plains 
of Mexico. 

427. Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, New York, Mich- 
igan, Minnesota, Dakota, Montana, Idaho, Washington'. 

428. Wisconsin, Illinois, Kentucky, Tennessee, Missis- 
sippi, on the east, and Minnesota, Iowa, Missouri, Arkan- 
sas, and most of Louisiana, on the west. 

429. Ohio, Indiana, and Illinois, from Kentucky and 
West Virginia. 

430. It is more irregular than that of any other division 
of the earth. Large seas and gulfs penetrate far into the 
interior, affording unequaled advantages for commercial 
intercourse. 

431. It is divided into extensive plains and mountain 
systems. Southern Europe is crossed from west to east 
by a great mountain system, which is continued, in Asia, 
to the Pacific Ocean. Northward from this system ex- 
tends a great plain, which stretches from the Atlantic to 
the Pacific. 

432. Caucasus, Balkan, Alps, Cevennes, Pyrenees, and 
Cantabrian. 

433. Russia, Northern Germany, Denmark, Holland, 
Belgium, and a part of France. 

434. It varies in the same latitude. In Eastern Europe 
the winters are excessively cold, while the summers are 
very hot. On the shores of the Atlantic the warm ocean 
current renders the climate mild and moist. 

435. Russia, Austria, Germany and Turkey are empires; 
Great Britain, Norway and Sweden, Denmark, Holland, 
Belgium, Spain, Portugal, Italy and Greece are kingdoms; 
France and Switzerland are republics. 

436. Great Britain, Russia, Germany, France and 
Austria. 

437. Scandinavian, Jutland, Iberian, Italian, Morea and 
Crimea. 

438. It comprises Sweden and Norway, two distinct 
States with separate governments, but united under 
one king. Nearly the whole of Norway and the eastern 
part of Sweden are mountainous. The southeastern part 
of Sweden is a level plain. 



GEOGRAPHY. 159 

439. Iron, copper, lumber, and fish. 

440. 1,400 miles. These grains are rye, oats and barley. 

441. The southern point of Greenland. 

^ 442. It is in that part of Europe north of the Arctic 
Circle, and between the White Sea and Atlantic Ocean. 
It belongs to Russia, Sweden and Norway. 

443. It is, by a tribe of the Mongolian race called 
Laplanders, who own numerous herds of reindeer, which 
supply them with food, clothing and means of traveling. 

444. It is next to the largest, in extent, in the world, 
comprising fully one-half of Europe, and more than one- 
third of Asia. The entire area is about 8,000,000 square 
miles. 

445. For the most part it is very level. The only 
mountainous section in European Russia, is between the 
Azov and Caspian Seas. 

446. Into four classes: 1, the nobles ; 2, the clergy; 
3, the merchants ; 4, the lately emancipated serfs. 

447. It is an absolute monarchy. The greater part of 
the inhabitants are adherents of the Greek Church. 

448. The inhabitants are called Sclaves, and their mon- 
arch the Czar. 

449. The question of a constitutional government. The 
Czar has recently signified his willingness to grant one, 
which if done will place the government among the list of 
limited monarchies. 

450. They are a people who believe in self-government 
and the overthrow of the empire. They resort to deeds 
of secret personal violence to accomplish their cause. 

451. England is fearful of the Russian advances in 
Asia and jealously watches every movement. It is believed 
that the situation is critical and may terminate in a decla- 
ration of war. 

452. In its forests (two-fifths of the country is covered 
with forests), and the products of agriculture and grazing. 

453. In Central and Southern Russia. 

454. It is mostly a sterile region, and has the appearance 
of having been subjected to volcanic fires. Salt lakes and 
fire-hills are numerous. 

455. It is an inland sea, containing 140,000 square 
miles, and below the level of the Mediterranean Sea, 
Several large rivers flow into it, but there is no visible outlet. 

456. Large, barren plains in southeastern Russia. 

457. Poland is that part of Russia lying north of Aus- 
tria. Circassia is the region of the Caucasus Mountains. 



160 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

458. Near Central Russia, on a branch of the Oka 
River. It is a railroad center, and one of the principal 
cities for trade. It was burned by the Russians during 
Napoleon's invasion of 1812, to defeat him, by depriving 
his troops of their expected winter quarters. This great 
sacrifice of the Russians saved their empire and compelled 
Napoleon to withdraw from the country. 

459. For the siege which it sustained for one 3^ear,, 
against the English, French, Turkish and Sardinian ar- 
mies. 

460. It was one of the strongest Russian fortifications, 
and was a perpetual menace to Turkey. Its destruction 
ended the Crimean war. 

461. The Cossacks are the inhabitants, and are of 
great service to the Russian army as light cavalry. 

462. A great fair is held there every year, which is at- 
tended by thousands of people who come from different 
parts of Europe and Asia to bu}^ and sell goods. 

463. St. Petersburg, Cronstadt, Riga, Archangel, and 
Odessa. 

464. Caspian, Azov, Black, Baltic, White and Kara ; 
Riga, Finland, Bothnia, Onega and Petchora. 

465. Great Britain, Ireland, and many small adjacent 
islands. 

466. England, Scotland and Wales. 

467. England and Ireland are generally level or undu- 
lating ; Scotland and Wales are rugged and mountainous. 

468. It is divided by the Grampian Hills into the High- 
lands and Lowlands. The Highlands lie north, and the 
Lowlands south of the mountains. 

469. It is very irregular, and abounds in fine harbors 
and roadsteads. 

470. It is moist and mild. The winters, even of Scot- 
land, are rarely severe. The moisture of the climate and 
low temperature in summer sometimes prevent crops from 
maturing. Corn will not ripen. 

471. In her commerce, manufactures and mining. 

472. She surpasses every other country in the world. 
The principal manufactures ar^ those of cotton, wool, and 
iron. 

473. They have 25,000 merchant vessels and more than 
200,000 seamen. The navy is regarded as the strongest in 
the world, although that of Russia is hardly inferior. 
Germany, France and Italy have powerful navies. The 
United States have practically none. 



GEOGRAPHY. 161 

474. Great Britain 150,000 men. 

German Empire 475,000 " 

France 500,000 " 

Italy 734,000 • '' 

Russia 975,000 " 

United States , 25,000 " 

Besides these immense armies they hold in reserve mill- 
ions subject to call. The result of such enormous defense 
is a distressing taxation and must eventually breed dis- 
content and civil revolution. No country can stand for a 
long period the terrible drain on the resources of the people. 

475. It is a constitutional monarchy. The Legislature, 
or Parliament, has two branches — the House of Lords and 
the House of Commons. The members of the House of 
Commons are elected by the people. The executive power 
and the entire responsibility of the government are in the 
hands of the Ministry, who are appointed by the sovereign 
through the influence of the Commons. The Prime Minis- 
ter is practically the real ruler of the empire ; if opposed 
by a majority of the House of Commons, he resigns, and 
the sovereign appoints his successor. 

476. Europe, 327,744,000; Asia, 795,591,000; Africa, 
205,800,000 ; North America, 80,000,000 ; South America, 
35,000,000 ; Australia, 4,500,000. 

477. Principally from Cornwall (England) and the Isl- 
and of Banca. The mines of Cornwall have been famous 
from remote antiquity. 

478. Peat, or bog turf, of which there are over 3,000,- 
000 acres. 

479. It has colonies in every quarter of the globe, and 
unites under one sovereign a greater number of people than 
are ruled by any other government. 

480. Gibraltar in Spain, and the Islands of Malta and 
Gozo. 

481. British India, including Ceylon, Hindoostan, a 
part of Farther India, and Singapore ; the Island of Hong 
Kong, and the City of Aden. 

482. Sierra Leone and other settlements on the 
western coast ; Cape Colony and Natal ; the Islands of 
Sychelle, Mauritius, Ascension and St. Helena. 

483. Australia, Tasmania, New Zealand, Norfolk, 
Labuan, and a part of Borneo. 

484. British America, Bermuda Islands, Balize, Jamaica, 
Bahama Islands, and many of the Lesser Antilles, British 
Guiana, and the Falkland Islands. 



162 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

485. Liverpool, for its great commerce ; its fine dock 
covers more than 400 acres. Leeds and Bradford, for 
their manufactures of wool. Birmingham, for hardware. 
Limerick, for the manufacture of gloves, laces, and fish- 
hooks. Merthyr Tydvil, for its iron-works. 

486. It covers 122 square miles. 

487. The question of Home Rule. In order to bring 
content, the great political leader of the English people, 
Mr. Gladstone, proposed a bill to grant them a Home Gov- 
ernment subject to the Crown. The bill was defeated, but 
still continues to agitate the people of England. Mr. 
Gladstone also proposed to have the government buy the 
great estates of Ireland and sell them in small farms, thus 
giving the Irish people a chance to own their own lands. 

488. It is the principal plateau of Europe, the whole 
central part of which consists of a series of lofty plains, 
divided from each other by parallel mountain chains. This 
plateau comprises 93,000 square miles, or nearly one-half 
of the peninsula. 

489. The vine, olive, mulberry, and orange. Large 
flocks of sheep are raised on the tablelands of the interior. 

490. The 40th parallel. It passes through Central 
United States, or New Jersey, Southern Pennsylvania, 
Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, Northern Missouri, Central Ne- 
braska and Kansas, Colorado, Utah, Nevada, and Northern 
California. 

491. Southern Italy and Turkey. 

492. Turkey, Georgia, Turkistan, Pekin, and the Em- 
pire of Japan. 

493. In the northeastern part of the Spanish Peninsula. 

494. The population is only 5,000 or 6,000, but the 
country has been independent for more than a thousand 
years. 

495. Cuba, Porto Rico, a part of the Philippines, La- 
drone, Caroline, and the Canary Islands. Those of Portu- 
gal are the Azores, the Cape Verd, and the Madeira 
Islands, and Lower Guinea in Africa. 

496. Twelve miles in its narrowest place. 

497. It is situated on a mountainous promontory, and 
is the strongest fortification in the world. 

498. It contains 204,000 square miles. 

499. As one of the richest and most powerful. The 
position of the country and the fertility of the soil give it 
great commercial and agricultural advantages. 

500. The eastern portion is mountainous, while the 



GEOGRAPHY. 163 

rest belongs to the Great Plain, which extends across the 
continent. 

501. They are plains of shifting sands in the south- 
western part of France. 

502. France exports more wine, brandy, and silk goods 
than any other country. 

503. The influence of fashions. 

504. Algeria, Senegal, Pondicherry, Isle of Bourbon, 
New Caledonia, Marquesas Islands, French Guiana, St. 
Pierre and Miquelon, Martinique, Guadaloupe, and Corsica. 

505. In Holland, stock-raising and dairying are the 
chief pursuits. Belgium is an agricultural and manufac- 
turing country ; ^ it also has extensive mines of coal and 
iron. Holland is now called Netherlands. 

506. It is so low that in many places dykes, or em- 
bankments, are necessary to prevent inundations. 

507. By numerous canals. In Holland especially, 
canals run through the principal streets of the towns, and 
form a complete network over the country. 

508. An arm of the sea, or gulf, which indents the 
northern part of Holland. 

509. The people of Holland. 

510. Next to Great Britain they are the most extensive 
and valuable in the world. They include the most impor- 
tant portions of the East Indian Archipelago, Dutch Guiana, 
and several islands in the West Indies. 

511. Agriculture is the principal occupation in the 
Netherlands and manufacturing and mining in Belgium. 
Their foreign commerce is one of the largest in the world 
and their exports are fine manufactured goods, including 
those of silk, cotton, wool, linen, leather and iron. Lace 
forms an important industry. Many of the people control 
great amounts of wealth. 

512. It is nearly flat ; some portions are below the sur- 
face of the sea, from which it is defended by dykes. 

513. On the eastern coast of the Island of Zealand, 
and partly on the adjacent Island of Amok. Many of the 
buildings are built above the water. 

514. Greenland, Iceland, Faroe Island, and several small 
islands in the West Indies. 

515. The kingdoms of Prussia, Bavaria, Wurtemburg, 
and Saxony, six grand duchies, five duchies, seven 
principalities, three free cities, and the new State of 
Alsace. 

516. Hamburg, Bremen and Liibeck. 



164 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

517. It was formerly a part of France, but since the 
late Franco-Prussian war it was ceded to Germany. 

518. Prussia is Berlin, Saxony is Dresden, Bavaria is 
Munich, Wurtemberg is Stuttgart. 

519. It is a limited monarchy, and all the States are the 
same, with the King of Prussia as the German Emperor. 
The Legislature of the empire consists of two bodies. The 
Federal Council somewhat resembles the English House of 
Lords and consists of 59 members; and the Reichstag, whose 
members, 397 in number, are elected by universal suffrage. 

520. It is the strongest in the world, and every move of 
the government is to strengthen its position, its armor and; 
its power. 

521. Prussia has the most complete and comprehensive 
system of public schools of any nation, and the general 
education of the whole empire is remarkably good. 

The manufactures are varied and extensive, and they 
export wheat, wine, zinc, and almost every description of 
manufactured goods. 

522. Hamburg and Bremen. 

523. Nearly the whole of Germany is under cultivation, 
and large crops of wheat, rye, barley, oats, tobacco, beet- 
root, and linseed are produced. 

524. Sandy tracts in Northern Germany and Denmark. 

525. They are' of different races. The Germans, 
Hungarians, Italians and Poles are most numerous. 

526. The Austro-Hungarian Empire. 

527. It is divided into two distinct and nearly inde- 
pendent groups of provinces. Each group has a govern- 
ment of its own, but the whole is under one general govern- 
ment. The Kingdom of Hungary and its dependencies 
constitute nearly one-half of the empire. The Emperor 
of Austria is King of Hungary. 

528. The chief exports are wheat, wine, salt, wool and 
the manufactures of linen, cotton, iron and glass. 

529. It forms an important system of waterways, ex- 
tending entirely across the empire. 

530. On eighty-two small islands, separated by 150 
canals crossed by 360 elevated bridges. 

531. An important kingdom of Central Europe, but, 
after suffering many reverses, it was divided between 
Russia, Germany and Austria. 

532. Switzerland. 

533. It is composed of twenty-two States, or cantons. 
It is about one-third as large as the State of New York. 



GEOGRAPHY. 165 

o34. For their love of liberty, and attachment to their 
native country. Most of the population speak the German 
language. Italian and French are spoken in the cantons 
adjoining Italy and France. 

535. For the manufacture of watches and jewelry. 

536. It was formerly divided into a number of States, 
but after a protracted struggle, the efforts of the people to 
obtam national unity were successful, and the whole coun- 
try is now united under a liberal and enlightened govern- 
ment. 

537. It was the central part of the Roman Empire, 
which ruled all the known world. 

538. Almost every place is connected with some re- 
markable event, which is renowned in history or art. 

539. It is a small republic, with an independent gov- 
ernment, on the Adriatic Sea. 

540. Italy. 

541. It comprises Turkey in Europe, Asiatic Turkey, 
Isle of Candia, and Egypt. Tripoli, Barca, and Tunis are 
nommally under the control of the government. Also a 
portion of Arabia, Crete and other small islands. 

542. They are a grave and solemn people, — ignorant, big- 
oted, and indolent. Their religion is Mohammedanism. 

543. She is inferior in every particular. The people are 
not energetic and their civilization is far below the stand- 
ard. 

544. They were formerly parts of the Turkish Empire, 
but are now independent Christian States. 

545. Bulgaria is a self-governing but tributary princi- 
pality to Turkey. 

546. Tobacco, wine, olive-oil, cotton, fruits, wool, car- 
pets, and morocco leather. 

547. This country was in advance of all other nations 
in civilization and learning. Athens was the birthplace 
of many renowned philosophers and orators. 

548. It is very irregular, projecting southward, and hav- 
ing many indentations from the sea, one of which, the Gulf 
of Lepanto, nearly separates it, forming the peninsula of 
Morea, which is connected with the mainland by the Isth- 
mus of Corinth. 

549. St. Petersburg, Stockholm, Copenhagen, Berlin, 
Hague, Brussels, Paris, Madrid, Lisbon, Rome, Vienna, 
Athens, Constantinople, Berne, London, Edinburgh. 

550. The United States. 

55L Hammerfest. It is due to the warm waters of the 



166 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

Gulf stream which flow by the coast of Norway, and the 
warm southwest return tradewmds. 

552. The Po, the Rhone, the Rhine and the Danube. 

553. Mexico, Central America, West Indies, and the 
greater part of South America. 

554. Cuba and Porto Rico. 

555. The interior consists of tablelands from 4,000 to 
9,000 feet high. The Pacific coast is abrupt and abounds 
in fine harbors, but upon the Gulf of Mexico it is flat 
and sandy, and deficient in good harbors. 

556. Only by two carriage roads ; one by Jalapa, from 
Vera Cruz ; the other by Saltillo, from Matamoras and 
Monterey. 

557. As Mexico contains high and lowlands, it exhibits 
a great variety of climate. In ascending from the coast to 
the s-urface of the plateau, there are three regions : the 
hot, swampy and pestilential lowlands ; the temperate re- 
gions ; and the cold, desolate plains above. 

558. Whites, Indians, mixed races and Spanish Creoles. 
The Indians and mixed races form the greater part of the 
population. 

559. The wet and dry. The rainy season continues 
from May to October, and the dry from October to May. 

560. They vary with climate. Wheat and barley are 
produced in the cooler regions, and cotton, tobacco, sugar- 
cane, tropical fruits and spices in the plains and valleys 
below. Commerce is limited and is mostly with England 
and the United States. 

561. Gold and silver, iron and copper. 

562. It is situated in a plain 7,000 feet above the level 
of the sea, enclosed by lofty mountains. The city is about 
two miles from Lake Tezcuco, is in the form of a square, 
and noted for its numerous churches, convents, and 
squares. 

563. Popocatapetl and Iztaccihuatl. The former is 
17,717 feet high, and its name signifies Smoking Mountain. 
The latter is 15,600 feet high, and is White Lady. 

564. The cochineal is an insect which feeds on a 
species of cactus. When killed and dried in the sun it 
yields a brilliant crimson dye. Pulque is a favorite Mexi- 
can beverage, manufactured from the Maquey plant. It is 
intoxicating. 

565. In 1521 Fernando Cortez, a Spanish adventurer, 
conquered the country. He found an extensive kingdom, 
with regular laws, and with cities, temples, public roads, 



GEOGRAPHY. 167 

and many of the arts of civilization. After the conquest 
the cruelty of the Spaniards drove the Indians back into 
a state of barbarism. In 1821 Mexico became independ- 
ent of Spain, and established first an empire, then a re- 
publican form of government. The people are restless, 
and revolutions have been common. By the war with the 
United States she lost valuable territory. 

566. Yucatan and Old California. These parts are but 
little known. Yucatan is noted for its ruins of ancient 
cities and temples. 

567. It is a federal republic of twenty-seven States, one 
territory, and a small federal district which contains the 
capital. It was for three centuries the most important 
colony of Spain. 

568. The question of difference is called the Cutting 
Case, the Mexican government claiming the right to ar- 
rest an American citizen for an act committed on Ameri- 
can soil. In this case Cutting published an article which 
was considered libelous by Mexican authority and on his 
crossing the line was arrested and thrown into prison. 
This act was condemned by the United States government 
and Cutting was released, but the question of the right to 
arrest has not been settled. 

569. Five independent republics : Guatemala, Hon- 
duras, San Salvador, Nicaragua, Costa Rica and the British 
colony of Balize. This country bears a general resemblance 
to Mexico. 

570. Comayagua, San Salvador, Managua, Nicaragua 
and San Jose. 

571. It is situated south of the eastern part of Yuca- 
tan. It belongs to the British. 

572. Mahogany and other hard cabinet wood, cochi- 
neal, tortoise shells, sarsaparilla and cocoa-nuts. 

573. Across the Isthmus of Panama ; by way of the 
San Juan River and Lake Nicaragua ; and by the Isthmus 
of Teh uan tepee. 

574. About one-fourth as large. 

575. North temperate and torrid ; the Tropic of Can- 
cer in the central part. 

576. In Northern Michigan and Wisconsin. 

577. In Southwestern Wisconsin and parts of Illinois 
and Iowa which adjoin ; also in Nevada and Colorado. 

578. Cotton, tobacco, rice, sugar, corn and sweet po- 
tatoes. 

579. The following, taken from the report of the Com- 



168 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

missioner of Agriculture of 1885, will be about the condi- 
tion of 1887 : 

COTTON. 

Texas 995,400 bales. 

Georgia 807,400 " 

Alabama 648,700 " 

Arkansas 531,400 " 

South Carolina 511,800 " 

Louisiana 485,200 '^ 

COEN. 

Iowa 252,600,000 bushels. 

Illinois 244,544,000 

Missouri 197,850,000 

Kansas 168,500,000 

Nebraska 122,100,000 

Indiana 105,757,000 

WHEAT. 

California 44,320,000 bushels. 

Minnesota 41,407,000 " 

Ohio 41,425,000 " 

Kansas 34,990,000 " 

Indiana 33,745,000 " 

IlHnois 32,374,000 " 

POTATOES. 

New York 33,904,000 bushels. 

Pennsylvania 16,337,000 

Michigan 13,192,000 " 

Iowa 12,518,000 " 

Ohio 12,090,000 " 

Illinois 10,699,000 " 

TOBACCO. 

Kentucky 208,692,000 pounds. 

Virginia 99,763,000 " 

North Carolina 34,858,000 

Pennsylvania 34,143,000 

Tennessee 31,392,000 

Maryland 31,255,000 

South Carolina produces the most rice ; Louisiana, su- 
gar ; and California, wine. 



GEOGRAPHY. 169 

580. SWINE. 

Iowa 4,800,998 in number. 

Missouri 4,210,193 " 

Illinois 4,090,681 '^ 

Indiana 2,801,211 " 

Ohio 2,467,128 " 

Texas 2,233,081 " 

CATTLE. 

Texas 4,937,779 head. 

loT^ 3,164,666 " 

New York 2,418,303 " 

Illinois 2,309,123 " 

Missouri 2,009,787 " 

Kansas ., 1,960,576 " 

SHEEP. 

Texas 7,558,461 head. 

California 5,892,911 " 

New Mexico 5,410,944 " 

Ohio 4,900,035 " 

Oregon 2,519,950 " 

Michigan 2,364,174 " 

HORSES. 

Illinois 1,038,375 head. 

Texas 933,516 '' 

Iowa 917,908 " 

Ohio 738,902 " 

Missouri 715,736 " 

New York 635,142 " 

MULES. 

Missouri 196,866 head. 

Tennessee 183,537 " 

Texas 164,033 " 

Mississippi 144,620 " 

Georgia 143,843 " 

Alabama 131,038 " 

581. Gold, California ; silver, Colorado ; iron, Penn- 
sylvania ; copper, Michigan ; lead, Illinois ; coal, Penn- 
sylvania ; lumber, Micliigan ; turpentine, etc., North 
Carolina. 

582. Turpentine and resin are made of |;he sap of the 
pitch pine, by boiling ; turpentine is the vapor, while resin, 



170 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

like sugar, is what remains. Tar is also made from the 
pitch, but by burning ; the timber having been placed in 
nearly a perpendicular position, and covered to prevent a 
flame, the heat causes the pitch to ooze out and run below 
where it can be saved. 

583. From her pine forests. 

584. On account of the abundance of palmetto trees 
which grow there, it is often called the " Palmetto State." 

585. Corn, 

586. The Atlantic Slope, the Pacific Slope, and the 
Central Plain. f 

587. The country which extends from the Alleghany 
Mountains to the Atlantic Ocean and Gulf of Mexico. 

588. The country between the Rocky Mountains and 
the Pacific Ocean. 

589. The Mississippi Valley, the Texas Slope, the 
basin of the St. Lawrence, and the small valley of the Red 
River of the North. 

590. The St. Lawrence Basin, Atlantic Slope, Missis- 
sippi Valley, Texas Slope, Pacific Slope, inland Basin of 
Utah, and Red River. 

591. It is crossed by a system of mountains, table- 
lands and plains. 

592. It may be divided into four divisions : Arctic 
Asia, Desert Asia, Peninsular Asia and Insular Asia. 

593. Arctic Asia represents the Great Siberian Plain. 
Desert Asia is that belt of high and dry plateaus, extend- 
ing through the central sections. Peninsular Asia is the 
most important division of the continent, and includes 
Hindoostan, Indo-China, Corea, with the projecting portion 
of China. Insular Asia includes the richest and most im- 
portant archipelagoes in the world. 

694. One-half of the human race. 

595. As it embraces all varieties of climates, so, too, are 
the productions of all descriptions, from those/ of the 
arctic regions to those of the tropical climate. 

596. The caravan trade from Pekin through Irkoutsk, 
Tobolsk, to Moscow and St. Petersburg. 

597. They are divided into two classes — those of 
Central and those of Southern Asia. They are the loftiest 
and most extensive in the world. 

598. Turkistan and Siberia. This is a continuation of 
the great plain of Europe. 

599. It commences with the Taurus Mountains, and is 
continued by the Elburz and Hindoo Koosh to the Balor 



GEOGRAPHY. 171 

Mountains. From this point it branches off into four 
great chains — the Himalaya, Kuen Lun, Thian Shan, and 
Alti — which are the grandest and most stupendous moun- 
tains upon the globe. 

600. It is near the central part of Asia, south of the 
Thian Shan Mountains. This desert is only a part of an 
immense beltw of desert land which extends almost across 
the continent from west to east. 

601. Into three divisions, that of Northern, Central, 
and Southern Asia. 

602. It is characterized by intense cold, with short in- 
tervals of great heat during summer. 

603. It is a great plain, comprising more than one-third 
of Asia. Near the Arctic Ocean it is a barren and deso- 
late region, and the cold is so intense that the spongy soil 
is frozen to the depth of several hundred feet. Near the 
Irtysh River the soil is rich and pasturage good, but there 
are few inhabitants. 

604. Central Asia has the climate of the temperate 
zone. It is subject to great extremes of heat and cold, 
and, except near the shores of the Pacific, is remarkably 
dry — for the mountain system intercepts the warm and 
moist winds of the Indian Ocean. Southern Asia has the 
climate of the torrid zone. 

605. Mongolian, Caucasian, and the Malay. 

606. Those nations living north of the Himalaya Moun- 
tains, those of Farther India, the Japanese, and Turks. 

607. The Georgians, Armenians, Arabs, Persians, 
Afghans, and Hindoos. 

608. The Peninsula of Malacca, and many of the 
islands of Oceanica. 

609. Caucasian race, 554,500,000 ; Mongolian, 554,- 
500,000 ; Ethiopian, 200,000,000 ; Malay, 56,000,000 ; 
American, or Indian race, 13,000,000. Total, 1,380,- 
000,000. 

610. As a place of banishment for exiles and crimi- 
nals. A large portion of the population consists of them 
and their descendants. 

611. It is a Russian province. The people are a vig- 
orous and handsome race. 

612. Into Russian and Independent Turkistan. The 
Russian division contains a number of districts called 
Khanates, which are ruled by native rulers, although only as 
vassals of Russia. 

Independent Turkistan includes those Tartar khanates 



172 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

that are not yet annexed by Russia, representing only a 
small area of what was formerly Turkistan. 

613. The name given to the rulers of the several inde- 
pendent States of Turkistan. 

614. It includes China, the dependent provinces of 
Mantchooria, Mongolia, Kashgaria and Thibet, and the 
tributary kingdom of Corea. 

615. So dense is the population in some "districts that 
great numbers of the inhabitants dwell constantly upon 
boats in the rivers, or on rafts in the lakes, which they con- 
vert into gardens by covering them with earth. They are 
a very industrious people, but deceitful and very immoral, 
and jealous of Europeans. 

616. The most important are rice, tea and silk. Rice 
is the chief article of food for the entire population. 

617. A despotic monarchy. The laws are severe ; for 
trifling offenses punishment with the bamboo is inflicted, 
while serious crimes almost always meet with death. 

618. Education is compulsory. All adult males are 
able to read and write and possess a knowledge of the 
elements of arithmetic. 

619. They are selected by means of a public competitive 
examination, and the humblest subject may be chosen to 
the highest position, except the Emperor. 

620. The domestic commerce is immense, but the 
foreign commerce is in the hands of foreigners. Their 
skill in their various occupations cannot be excelled, and 
many of our first inventions were known to them hun- 
dreds of years before being discovered by the Europeans, 
but these inventions were not put to a practical use. 

621. The wall is 1,200 miles long, from thirty to forty 
feet high, and twenty feet thick with numerous towers 
and equipments for defense. The wall was built about 
211 B. C. to keep the Mongol Tartars out of China. 

622. Canton, Shanghai, Ningpo, Fuchow, Amoy. 

623. Nipon, Sikoke, Kiusui, and Jesso. 

624. Rice, wheat, barley, tea, tobacco, and camphor. 

625. It is a constitutional monarchy. 

626. He is called the Mikado. 

627. They surpass the Chinese in intelligence and equal 
them in mechanical skill. Although of the same race, 
and having similar beliefs, yet they differ greatly in their 
language and political institutions. They are quick to 
adopt the great inventions of the Europeans, such as their 
military systems, lighthouses, steam powder and electricity. 



GEOGRAPHY. 173 

628. Hindoostan and Indo-China. 

629. Nearly all of Hindoostan and the western coast of 
Indo-China. It is the richest and most important depend- 
ency ever possessed by any nation. 

630. It includes Burmah, Siam, Anam and many 
smaller independent States. All have despotic govern- 
ments. 

631. It is written in a peculiar poetical and religious 
language which has been the custom long before the Chris- 
tian era. Besides being jDoetical, they are almost uni- 
versally musical. 

632. The country is under the control of a Governor- 
General and a Supreme Council appointed by the British 
government. The Queen of England is "Empress of 
India." 

633. It is a rich and populous island south of Hindoo- 
stan and a separate colony of Great Britain. 

634. The southeastern coast of Indo-China is called 
Cochin -China. 

635. They possess an important province in the south- 
western part of Indo-China, and Saigon is its capital. 

636. Calcutta, Colombo, Mandalay, Bangkok and Hue. 

637. Cotton, rice, wheat, opium, sugar, indigo, jute, fine 
silk fabrics and costly cashmere shawls. Ceylon is noted 
for it coffee and cinnamon. 

638. Persia, Afghanistan and Beloochistan occupy the 
desert plateau of Iran, between the valleys of the Tigris 
and the Indus. The people of Afghanistan are hardy, 
warlike, -and divided into numerous states or tribes. x\s 
this country is the chief route from India to Western Asia, 
it is of great commercial and military importance. 

639. This country is mostly a barren wilderness, and 
consists of a number of small States under the headship of 
the Khan of Kelat. 

640. A despotic monarchv. The sovereign is called a 
Shah. 

641. ^ The greater part is a desert plateau. The princi- 
pal fertile tracts are Oman and Yemen, and the mountain 
valleys. 

642. The greater portion of them are Bedouins, who 
are a wandering people and inhabit the deserts, devoting 
themselves to the care of their camels, horses, goats and 
sheep. They are generous and hospitable, but quarrel- 
so me, revengeful, and addicted to plunder. 

643. Mecca is regarded by the Mohammedans as a 



174 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

holy city, the hirthplace of Mohammed, and is amiually 
visited by vast numbers of pilgrims. Medina is the burial 
place of Mohammed. 

644. They are very polite in their manners, and having 
a comparatively high civilization, are often called the 
French of Asia. 

645. He is called the Shah. 

646. It was once one of the grandest and most formid- 
able governments of the world. 

647. Arabia is about one-third as large as the United 
States. It consists of three regions : A great plateau, hav- 
ing many large and fertile valleys, occupies the interior; 
surrounding this is a broad belt of deserts, covering more 
than one-third of the peninsula; along the coasts is a low 
and narrow sandy plain, containing a few fertile districts. 
There are several independent States governed by despots 
called Sultans. 

648. Arabia, Hindoostan, Farther India, Corea, and 
Kamtschatka. 

649. It connects Malacca with the mainland. 

650. Sirikol, the source of the A moo River, on the table- 
land of Pamer, is 15,600 feet above the level of the sea. 

651. Palestine is in the northeastern part of Arabia, on 
the Mediterranean Sea. Jerusalem is a city of Palestine. 

652. Behring 40 miles, Dover 30, Gibraltar 12. 

653. Panama 27 miles, Tehuantepec 130, Suez 65. 

654. Australia, Greenland, Borneo, New Guinea, and 
Madagascar. 

655. The Pacific Ocean contains about 82,000,000 square 
miles; greatest width, 10,000 miles. The Atlantic, 30,000,- 
000; width, 5,000. The Indian, 22,000,000; width 6,000. 
Antarctic, 12,000,000; and the Arctic, 4,000,000. 

656. By Capt. Perry, in 1827, 502 miles from the Pole. 
By Capt. Ross, in 1842, 803 miles from the Pole. 

657. London 4,100,000, Paris 2,500,000, Pekin 1,648,000, 
Canton 1,600,000. 

658. New York 1,400.000, Berhn 1,350,000, Vienna 
1,300,000, St. Petersburg 1,000,000. 

659. New York, Philadelphia 974,000, Chicago 724,000, 
Brooklyn 625,000, St. Louis 420,000. 

660. Coal, iron, salt, lead, and tin. 

661. Mississippi, Missouri, Arkansas, Rio Grande, Co- 
lumbia, Nebraska, and Red. 

662. Of the Chmese Empire 400,000,000, Japan 37,000,- 
000, Hmdoostan 225,000,000, United States 60,000,000. 



GEOGRAPHY. 175 

663. It is a little more than one-fourth as large as the 
United States, and contains about 420,000,000 people. 

664. For drainage, commerce and milling. 

665. Philadelphia, Columbus, Indianapolis, Spring- 
field, Denver, Pekin, Constantinople, and Madrid. 

666. The boundary line between the States of Missis- 
sippi, Alabama and Georgia, from Tennessee. 

667. Cape Horn is 53^ south, and Good Hope about 32^. 

668. Commercial cities require good harbors and water 
communication to facilitate commerce, while manufactur- 
ing cities depend very much upon water power to run 
their machinery. 

669. Lakes of this class lose water by evaporation only, 
and retain the salt and other materials carried into them 
by their affluent rivers. 

670. Cotton, wheat, pork, cheese, machinery. 

671. Wool, tea, coffee and spices, dry goods, sugar and 
Hquors. 

672. It may be divided as follows : The Atlantic sys- 
tem, the Mississippi system, the Great Lakes with the St. 
Lawrence River, and the canals. 

673. The rivers in the Atlantic system are usually 
rapid and form great manufacturing points, which prevent 
a free passage of large vessels. Besides these obstructions 
to navigation, large sand-bars are formed at the mouths of 
many of these streams, which prevent navigation only at 
high tide. 

674. ^ This system contains fifty-six great tributaries, 
containing 17,000 miles navigable to steamboats and more 
than 20,000 by barge. It carries an immense commerce, 
but in some localities the annual floods and droughts pre- 
vent a continuous shipment. Below the mouth of the 
Ohio the Mississippi sometimes rises more than fifty feet. 

675. It contains the Great Lakes, Superior, Michigan, 
Huron, Erie, Ontario and the navigable streams which 
flow into and through the St. Lawrence River. This 
system is closed for several months in the year on account 
of ice, but floods or droughts never affect it. 

676. The principal canals are those that lie at the 
entrance of Lake Superior, the Niagara Falls, the Rapids of 
the St. Lawrence and the Erie Canal. Besides these great 
commercial canals there is in contemplation the Hennepin 
to connect the Mississippi River system with Lake Michi- 
gan, the Fox River, the canals of North Carolina and 
Florida. 



176 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

677. They form one vast network of connections, to 
which the great prosperity of the country is due. It opens 
up inaccessible sections, calls for emigration and virtually 
annihilates distance. 

678. Like rivers, they form numerous systems, and the 
main lines of these systems are called Trunk Lines. 

679. The Eastern Trunk Lines, the Central, the South- 
ern and the Western. 

680. The Grand Trunk, New York Central, Erie, Penn- 
sylvania, and Baltimore & Ohio. 

681. The New York Central, which runs from Buffalo 
to Albany, and there is divided into two roads: the Hudson 
River Railroad to New York and the Boston & Albany to 
Boston. From Buffalo to Albany the road maintains four 
tracks. This road is known as the Trunk Line of the 
Vanderbilt System, and has heavy branches as feeders, the 
Lake Shore & Michigan Southern from Chicago to Buffalo 
being the most important. The traffic on this system is 
immense. 

682. They are the Michigan Central; Lake Shore & 
Michigan Southern; Toledo, Wabash & Western; Atlantic 
& Great AVestern; Nickle Plate; Pittsburg, Fort Wayne & 
Chicago; Pittsburg, Cincinnati & St. Louis; Marietta & 
Cincinnati; Ohio & Mississippi; Illinois Central; Chicago 
& Alton. 

683. These lines may be divided into three divisions : 
those of the Atlantic coast, connecting the Atlantic cities 
with those of the Eastern States ; those running from the 
Atlantic west, crossing the Mississippi River at New 
Orleans, Vicksburg and Memphis; and those running 
north and south connecting the cities of the South with 
the cities of the North. 

684. The Northern Pacific ; the Central Pacific ; Union 
Pacific ; Kansas Pacific ; Southern Pacific ; Atchison, 
Topeka & Santa Fe ; Texas Pacific ; New Orleans Pacific ; 
Galveston, Harrisburg & San Antonio; Chicago, Burlington 
& Quincy ; Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific ; Chicago & 
Northwestern ; Chicago & Alton ; Wabash, St. Louis & 
Pacific ; Chicago, Milwaukee & St. Paul. 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



READING, 



1. What is reading? 

2. What is elocution? 

3. What does elocution embrace ? 

4. What is expression ? 

5. What mental qualifications must a good reader pos- 
sess and employ ? 

6. What are the physical requisites for good reading ? 

7. What, then, does good reading demand? 

8. What objects are to be aimed at in the study and 
teaching of reading? 

9. What does orthoepy embrace ? 

10. Define articulation. 

11. What is correct articulation ? 

12. How can a good articulation be acquired ? 

13. What is Phonetic Analysis? 

14. What is an elementary sound ? 

15. What are oral elements ? How produced ? 

16. Into what classes are the elementary sounds of the 
English language divided? 

17. Define vocals. Sub vocals. Aspirates. 

18. Give a list of the most common faults in articula- 
tion. 

19. What is accentuation? 

20. What is accent ? 

21. How are accented syllables designated? 

22. Name and define the kinds of accent. 

23. When two s^dlables of a word are accented, which 
has the greater force ? 

24. What are the expressions of speech ? 

177 



178 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

25. What is emphasis? 

26. What is the object of emphasis ? 

27. How is it accomplished ? 

28. Define slur. 

29. How are emphatic words distinguished ? 

30. When should emphatic words be used ? 

31. How many kinds of emphasis are there? 

32. What is absolute emphasis ? 

33. Define antithetic emphasis. 

34. What are inflections ? 

35. How many inflections are there ? 

36. What is the circumflex ? 

37. What is a series ? 

38. What is a commencing series, and what a conclud- 
ing series ? 

39. What is the Monotone? 

40. What is Transition ? 

41. Define Monotony. 

42. When is the rising inflection used ? 

43. When is the falling inflection used ? 

44. In what is the circumflex mainly used ? 

45. What is modulation and its divisions ? 

46. What is pitch? How divided? 

47. Define force. What are its divisions ? 

48. Define rate. How classified ? 

49. What is quality, and how divided ? 

50. What is the difference between quantity and pitch ? 

51. What is the diflerence between force and emphasis ? 

52. What is cadence ? 

53. What is stress ? 

54. What is climax? 

55. Define grouping. 

56. What is pure a tone ? 

57. What is the orotund ? 

58. Describe the aspirated tone. 

59. What is the guttural quality? 

60. When is the trembling tone used ? 

61. What is personation ? 

62. What are pauses ? 

63. What are grammatical pauses ? 

64. Define rhetorical pauses. 

65. What are etymological points ? 

66. Explain the Apostrophe, Caret, Diaeresis, Marks of 
Quantity, Marks of Accent, Hyphen, Period. 

67. What are the points of reference? 



READING. 179 

68. What is suspensive quantity ? 

69. What does quantity embrace ? 

70. What is the difference between enunciation and 
pronunciation ? 

71. What quality of voice is mostly used in reading 
and speaking? 

72. What determines the proper accent of words? 

73. How is inflection sometimes affected by emphasis ? 

74. What is the diflerence between the construction of 
prose and poetry? 

75. What is a parenthetic clause, and how should it be 
read ? 

76. When melody comes in conflict with accent, which 
must yield ? 

77. Give a principle of reading that will admit of gen- 
eral application. 

78. What are some of the essential qualities of good 
reading ? 

79. Give rules for the use of capitals. 



ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS 



ON 



READING. 



1: The enunciation of written Ig^ngnage. 

2. The delivery of composition. 

3. Orthoepy and expression. 

4. It is the manner of delivery. 

5. A good reader or speaker must have : 

A clear conception. 
A vivid imagination. 
Real sympathy. 
Good imitation. 
Vocal power. 
Artistic skill. 
Good judgment. 

6. The physical requisites are : 

Distinct articulation. 
Full and free respiration. 

Perfect control of a clear, full, round, musical tone 
of voice. 

Graceful and expressive action. 
Cultivated taste and judgment. 

7. Articulation, Accent, Emphasis, Inflection, Modula- 
tion, and Pauses. 

8. The objects to be aimed at are : 

The acquisition of great knowledge. 
The acquisition of a love for reading. 
The improvement of the memory, judgment and 
taste. 

Improvement of the social faculties. 
Improvement of the health. 

181 



182 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

A graceful carriage and address. 

A preparation for public life. 

The prevention and co rection of improprieties. 

9. Articulation, Syllabication, and Accent. 

10. It is the distinct utterance of the oral elements. 

11. Accurate and distinct utterance of the elementary 
sounds. 

12. By continued practice of the utterance of the ele- 
mentary sounds, and an observance of the phonetic anal- 
ysis of syllables and words. 

13. It is the separation of syllables and words into the 
elementary sounds of which they are composed. 

14. It is a simple distinct sound made by the organs of 
speech. 

15. They are the elementary sounds that form syllables 
and words, and are produced by the positions of the organs 
of speech in connection with the breath. 

16. They are divided into vocals, subvocals, and aspi- 
rates. 

17. Vocals are pure tones, and are the prominent ele- 
ments of all words. 

Subvocals are those consonants which produce 
an undertone of voice when their sounds are uttered. 

The aspirates are mere whispers made by the or- 
gans of speech and breath. 

18. The faults most common are: 

Suppression of vocal sounds in unaccented sylla- 
bles. 

Suppression of subvocal and aspirate sounds. 

Incorrect articulation of vocal sounds 

Omission and addition of syllables. 

Blending the end of one word with the beginning 
of the next. 

19. The act of applying accents in reading and speak- 
ing. 

20. The force given to one or more syllables of a word. 

21. They are designated by a mark thus, (^'); as com- 
mand" -ment. 

22. They are primary and secondary. The primary 
the more forcible stress of voice, and the secondary the less 
forcible. 

23. The primary. 

24. Emphasis, Slur, Inflection, Modulation, Monotone, 
Personation, and Pauses. 

25. The force given to one or more words of a sentence. 



READING. 183 

26. The object is to attract particular attention to the 
word or phrase upon which it is placed. 

27. It is usually done by an increased stress or empha- 
sis, but sometimes by an unusual lowering of the voice, 
even to a whisper. 

28. It is that smooth, gliding, subdued movement of 
the voice used in parenthetic clauses, words contrasted or 
repeated, and in explanation. 

29. By italics, small capitals, and CAPITALS. 

30. When words and phrases are important in mean- 
ing, or when they point out a difference ; when emphatic 
words are repeated, or when a succession of important 
words or phrases occurs. 

31. There are two kinds : absolute and antithetic. 

32. It is used to designate the important words of a 
sentence, without any direct reference to other words. 

33. It is founded on the contrast of one word or clause 
with another. 

34. The upward or downward slides of the voice. 

35. Three : the rising inflection, falling inflection, and 
circumflex. 

36. A union of the rising and falling inflections, begin- 
ning with the one and ending with the other. 

37. A series is a number of words or phrases following 
one another in the same sentence. 

38. Where a succession of particulars occurs at the be- 
ginning or middle of a sentence it is called a commanding 
series. Where it concludes a sentence it is a concluding 
series. 

39. A sameness of tone. 

40. A change in the manner of expression. 

41. Monotony is a frequent occurrence of the same 
tone, without reference to the sense. 

42. It is generally used when the sense is incomplete; 
in questions which may be answered by yes or no; when 
a word or sentence is repeated as a kind of interrogatory 
exclamation; usally in negative sentences; and in the last 
but one of a passage. 

43. When the sense is incomplete; when language de- 
mands strong emphasis; in exclamations; and in questions 
which cannot be answered by yes or no. 

44. In the language of irony, sarcasm, and contrast. 

45. Modulation is the variation of the voice made in 
reading and speaking, and is divided into pitch, force, 
quality, and rate. ^ 



184 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

46. Pitch is the degree of elevation of the voice, and is 
divided into high, moderate, and low. High pitch is that 
which rises above the usal speaking key, and is used in ex- 
pressing joyous and elevated feelings. Moderate pitch is 
that which is heard in common conversation, and is used 
in expressing ordinary thought and moderate emotion. 
Low pitch is that which falls below the usual speaking key, 
and is employed in expressing emotions of sublimity, awe, 
and reverence. 

47. Force is the volume, or loudness of voice, and is 
divided into loud, moderate and gentle. Loud force in 
expressing violent passions and vehement emotions. Mod- 
erate force is a medium loudness of voice, and is employed 
in narrative, description, and ordinary assertion. Gentle 
or subdued force is employed to express fear, caution, 
secrecy, solemnity, and tender emotions. 

48. Rate is the speed, and is divided into quick, mod- 
erate, and slow. Quick rate is used to express joy, mirth, 
violent anger, and sudden fear. Moderate rate is similar 
to moderate force. Slow rate is used to express grandeur, 
vastness, pathos, horror, and consternation. 

49. Quality has reference to the kinds of sound uttered, 
and is divided into the pure tone, orotund, aspirate, gut- 
tural, and trembling. 

50. Quantity has reference to loudness or volume of 
sound; pitch to the elevation or depression of a tone. 

51. Force is the energy with which the whole is ut- 
tered ; emphasis is the stress on a particular portion. 

52. It is the dropping of the voice at the end of the 
sentence, which indicates that the sense is complete. 

53. Stress is the manner in which force is applied. 

54. Climax is an utterance gradually increasing in in- 
tensity, and changing in pitch and movement. 

55. Grouping is that nice modulation and adaptation 
of the voice to the sentiment expressed which renders the 
utterance not only more impressive, but more pleasing to 
the ear. 

56. A clear, smooth, flowing sound, with moderate pitch. 

57. It is the pure tone deepened, enlarged, and intensi- 
fied, and is adapted to the expression of the sublime and 
pathetic emotions. 

58. It is an expulsion of the breath, the words being 
spoken in a whisper. 

59. The guttural is a deep undertone, expressing hatred, 
contempt, loathing. 



READING. 185 

60. The trembling is a constant waver of the voice, 
used to express an intense degree of suppressed excitement, 
or to represent the tones of enfeebled old age. 

61. Changes of the voice necessary to represent two or 
more persons speaking. 

62. Suspensions of the voice in reading or speaking. 

63. Grammatical pauses are indicated by the punctua- 
tion marks. 

64. They are suspensions of the voice which the sense 
requires when a grammatical pause is not admissible. 

65. They are the points used to indicate something in 
regard to the formation, use, or omission of words or parts 
of words. 

66. The apostrophe ( ' ) is used to show the omission of 
a letter or letters; as, Sec'y. 

^-The caret ( v) is used to show some omissions in writ- 
ing; as, come 

" The king is v to marshal us." 

The diuresis marks the separation of contiguous vowels; 
as, preengage. 

Marks of quantity are used to show that the vowel is long 
or short, and is placed over the letter, ( " ^ )• 

The marks of accent express the tones of the voice and 
are the grave (^ ), the acute (0, and the circumflex ( a ). 

The hyphen ( - ). is used to separate syllables, or to unite 
the parts of a compound word. 

The period ( . ) is used to show the abbreviation of a 
word; as, lat. for latitude. 

67. The points of reference are used to refer the reader 
to some other place on the page or the book, and are as fol- 
lows : 

The Asterisk (*). 
The Obelisk or Dagger (t). 
The Double Dagger (J). 
The Section (§). 
Parallels (\\). 
The Paragraph (T[). 
If necessary, these points may be doubled. 

68. Prolongation of the voice at the end of a word with- 
out making an actual pause. 

69. Force and rate. 

70. Enunciation is the utterance of words; pronuncia- 
tion, the mode of utterance. 

71. The pure tone. 

72. General usage. 



186 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

73. It sometimes changes the falhng to the rising in- 
flection. 

74. Prose pays no attention to the melodious arrange- 
ment of its words, while poetry is written with regard to 
the rhyme and feet of each line. 

75. Something abruptly introduced into a sentence for 
the purpose of modifying, explaining, or adding to the lead- 
ing proposition, and should be read in a lower voice. 

76. Accent. 

77. Be sure you understand what you read, and en- 
deavor to express the sentiments of the author as you 
would express the same if they were your own, and you 
were talking. 

78. To read slowly, mind the pauses, give the proper 
inflections, speak plainly, and read as if talking. 

79. Capital letters are used: 

To begin the first word of a sentence. 

To begin all proper names. 

To begin all titles of honor. 

To begin the first word of every line of poetry 

To begin the names of objects personified. 

In writing the pronoun I, and interjection O. 

To begin appellations of the Deity. 

To begin the names of the days of the week and 
of the month. 

To begin direct quotations. 

To begin words derived from proper names. 

To begin the chief words in the titles of books, 
headings of divisions of books, chapters, discourses, 
etc. 

To begin words of special importance 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 



1. What is Physical Geography ? 

2. Into how many classes may the objects of which 
Physical Geography treats, be divided ? 

3. In what condition was the earth supposed to be in 
a remote period of its existence ? 

4. What are the proofs of this molten condition of the 
earth? 

5. How did the earth become solid ? 

6. What is the thickness of the earth's crust ? 

7. What is a shxi pie substance ? 

8. How many elements have been discovered ? 

9. How many elements mainly compose the crust of 

10. What is Oxygen? Silicon? Carbon? Hydrogen? 
Sodium? Chlorine? Sulphur? Potassium? Calcium? 
Magnesium ? Aluminum ? 

11. How are rocks classified ? 

12. What are stratified rocks ? 

13. How are these rocks formed into layers ? 

14. How did water originate on the earth's surface ? 

15. What are igneous rocks? 

16. What are metamorphic rocks ? 

17. What are fossils ? 

18. What are fossiliferous rocks? Non-fossiliferous ? 

19. Into how many ages does geology divide the globe ? 

20. What is the Azoic Age ? The Silurian Age ? De- 
vonian Age? Carboniferous Age? Reptilian Age ? Mam- 
malian Age ? Age of Man ? 

187 



188 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

21 . Where are minerals found ? 

22. Name the most important metals. 

23. How does the United States compare with other 
countries in mineral resources ? 

24. In precious stones ? 

25. Where is zinc found in the United States ? 

26. How much zinc is annually produced ? 

27. Where is salt found most abundantly? 

28. When was the first petroleum well sunk ? 

29. By what agencies are the changes of the earth's 
crust produced at the present time ? 

30. How does the atmosphere produce a change ? 

31. How does the water produce a change ? 

32. What is erosion ? 

33. Where is the greatest example of erosion? 

34. How much earthy matter is annually discharged 
by the Mississippi River ? 

35. What are the changes which are produced by the 
action of the heated interior ? 

36. Where are there illustrations of the slowly prog- 
ressing change? 

37. W^hat will eventually be the condition of the earth's 
surface ? 

38. What proportion of the whole volume of the globe 
is water? 

39. What is the position of the continents ? 

40. What proportion of the land surface do the islands 
form? 

41. How are islands divided? 

42. What are continental islands ? 

43. Give illustrations of continental islands. 

44. What are oceanic islands ? 

45 . What two classes of oceanic islands ? 

46. How do continental islands compare in size with 
oceanic islands ? 

47. What is the difference in the rock material of the 
two classes of islands ? 

48. What is coral? Where found ? 

49. Into how many classes are coral formations divided ? 

50. What are fringing reefs ? 

51. What are barrier reefs ? Encircling reefs ? 

52. What are atolls, or coral islands ? 

53. What is a lagoon ? 

54. What is the theory of the circular formation of 
atolls? 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 189 

55. Describe the common forms of coral islands. 

56. Upon Avhat are coral islands built ? 

57. Where are these islands found, and why are they 
confined to these regions ? 

58. Into how many great classes may we divide the 
surface ot the earth ? 

59. Where is found the highest elevation of the earth ? 
The lowest depression ? 

60. What is trend? 

61. What constitutes a relief of a country? 

62. What two forms of relief exist ? 

63. What influence has the relief of a country upon its 
climate, life and importance ? 

64. What elevation is given as necessary to become 
tablelands ? 

65. Where are the great plateaus of the world ? 

66. Where are the great low plains of the world ? 

67. Into how many classes are mountains divided? 

68. How are mountains supposed to have been formed ? 

69. In the manner of formation, what two kinds oif 
mountains do we find ? 

70. What is a longitudinal valley ? A traverse valley ? 

71. What are continental axes ? 

72. How many mountain systems in America ? 
78. What is the extent of the Rocky system ? 

74. Describe the Alleghany system. 

75. Describe the plateau of North America. How 
may this region be divided ? 

76. How may the plateaus of South America be 
divided ? 

77. Describe the plateau of the Andes. 

78. Into what divisions are the plateaus of Asia 
divided ? 

79. What does the central tableland of Asia embrace? 

80. W^hat tablelands does Southern Asia embrace ? 

81. What are the known tablelands of Africa? 

82. Describe the principal plateau of Europe. 

83. Where is the great plain of North America ? 

84. What does the great plain of South America com- 
prise ? How is it divided ? 

(a) What are llanos, selvas, pampas, and ivastes? 

lb) What are steppes, heaths, lands, and where found ? 

(c) What is a plain ? Plateau, or tableland ? 

(See Questions in Geography Nos. 227, 228, 229, 
230, 231.) 



190 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

85. What is the boundary of the great plain of the 
Eastern Continent ? 

86. What are some of the chief points in the physical 
geography of Siberia ? 

87. What are the principal known plains of Africa ? 
(a) Describe the Desert of Sahara. 

88. Of what is the interior of Australia supposed to 
consist ? 

89. What resemblance between North and South Amer- 
ica? 

90. What general law of relief has been observed from 
a study of the continents ? 

91. Where are the land masses of the globe located ? 

92. What is the common form of the land masses ? 

93. What difference between the Eastern and Western 
Continents in the direction of their length ? 

94. What difference in other respects result from this ? 

95. In outline, what is the difference? 

96. What influence has the articulation of the coast 
upon a country and its people? 

97. What fact is true of well articulated countries ? 

98. How do the continents compare in this respect ? 

99. From what do volcanic phenomena result? How 
are these phenomena divided ? 

100. What is a volcano? 

101. How are volcanoes classified ? 

102. What are intermittent volcanoes ? 

103. What is the crater of a volcano ? Lava? 

104. What is the width of craters ? 

105. Where may the crater be located ? 

106. Where is the largest known crater in the world V 

107. Into what classes are volcanoes divided? 

108. What is the central ? The lineal ?. 

109. Where are volcanoes most numerous ? 

110. How many volcanoes have been enumerated? 

111. What is the peculiarity in the distribution of 
volcanoes ? 

112. Explain this fact. 

113. Locate the two volcanic zones which encircle the 
earth? 

114. What theory is advanced as the cause, of volcanoes ? 

115. What are some of the volcanic phenomena ? 

116. What are mud volcanoes? Where found ? 

117. What are fields of ^ fire ? Where found ? 

118. What is a mountain pass ? 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 191 

119. What are earthquakes, and where confined? 

120. What are the movements of earthquakes ? 

121. What is the theory of earthquakes ? 

122. What is the dynamic force of earthquakes ? 

123. What is the duration? 

124. What connection exists between volcanoes and 
earthquakes ? 

125. What relation exists between earthquakes and 
atmospheric conditions ? 

126. What noted volcanic action occurred A. D. 79 ? 

127. How many eruptions of Mt. ^Etna are recorded ? 

128. Describe the eruption of Casequina in 1835. 

129. How many lives are estimated as having been lost 
by earthquakes ? 

130. By what signs is an earthquake usually preceded ? 

131. For what was the year 1868 remarkable ? 

132. Give an account of the earthquake at New Madrid. 

133. Of what does hydrography treat ? 

134. What are springs, and how may they be classified ? 

135. What are perennial springs ? Intermittent ? Peri- 
odical ? 

136. How are springs produced ? 

137. Where ^ are springs most numerous ? 

138. Upon what does the temperature of springs depend ? 

139. What are artesian wells ? 

140. What is bifurcation ? 

141. What is the composition of water ? 

142. What office do the waters of the earth perform ? 

143. What important peculiarity does water possess ? 

144. What is the great reservoir of water ? 

145. How are the waters dispersed over the earth ? 

146. What are the sources of springs ? 

147. Into what classes are rivers divided? Describe 
them. 

148. What are canyons ? 

(a) What is the basin of a river ? A watershed ? 

149. On what does the amount of water in a basin 
depend ? 

150. What is an avalanche ? 

151. What is a confluence ? 

152. Into what divisions may the United States be 
divided with reference to its drainage ? 

153; What are the divisions of Europe? 
154. What is a singular fact in regard to the watershed 
of Europe which separates the three systems of drainage ? 



192 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

155. Where do the largest streams of Africa flow ? Of 
Asia? 

156. Why do larger streams flow into the Atlantic than, 
into the Pacific? 

157. How are lakes divided? Describe each class. 

158. Why are most inland waters fresh ? 

159. What name is given to lakes without an outlet? 

160. Where are the principal steppe lakes ? 

161. Describe the Caspian Sea. 

162. Describe the most extensive lake region of the 
globe. 

163. What is said of the Great Lakes ? How large are 
they? 

164. Describe the lake regions of Europe. 

165. What are the Tundras ? 

166. What place have lakes in the economy of nature ? 

167. What is the cause of the saltness of some lakes ? 

168. What is the color of the ocean ? Depth? Trans- 
parency ? 

169. Which is heavier, fresh or sea-water? At what 
temperature will sea-water freeze ? 

170. What causes the phosphorescence of the sea ? 

171. What is constantly going on in the ocean? 

172. How many, and where are the great mediter- 
ranean seas? 

{a) What is a mediterranean sea ? 

173. Name the principal border seas. What separates 
these seas from the ocean ? 

174. What is the width and velocity of the Gulf 
stream ? 

175. What is the color of the Gulf stream ? 

176. What influence has this stream on the climate of 
Western Europe ? 

177. Describe the equatorial current of the Atlantic? 
Of the Pacific? 

178. Describe the Japan current. 

179. Describe the Arctic currents. 

180. Mention the Antarctic currents. 

181. What are whirlpools ? 

(a) What are three distinct movements of the ocean ? 

(6) What are tides? Neap tides? Spring tides? 
Flood tides? Ebbtides? 

(c) What are the chief causes of the tides ? 

(c?) What are waves ? Breakers ? How high do 
waves roll ? 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 193 

182. What causes the advance of the waves ? 

183. To what depth is the sea agitated by waves ? 

184. What is the height of tides ? 

185. Describe the great tidal wave. 

186. What are ocean currents ? How are they divided? 

187. What is the cause of currents ? 

188. What are temporary currents ? 

189. What are periodical currents ? 

190. What are constant currents ? 

191. What is a counter current? Where are thev 
found ? ^ 

192. To what three classes of currents does difference 
of temperature give rise ? 

193. What modifies the direction of the polar and 
return currents ? 

194. How are ocean basins divided ? 

195. Describe the Pacific basin. • 

196. Describe the Atlantic basin. 

197. Wherein do the ocean basins present great differ- 
ences ? 

198. How are coast waters classified ? 

199. What is known of the ocean bed 

200. How are the depths estimated in the absence of 
soundings ? 

201. Of what does meteorology treat? 

202. What is the composition of air ? 

203. What is the depth of the atmosphere ? 

204. How does air compare with water in weight ? 

205. To what is air essential ? 

206. What is temperature ? 

207. On what does the temperature of a place depend ? 

208. What is the depth of the limit of invariable tem- 
perature in the several zones ? 

209. What is the depth of the limit of invariable tem- 
perature in the ocean ? 

210. What is the mean temperature of a place ? 

211. Does the mean temperature of a place vary one 
year with another? 

212. What are isothermal lines ? 

213. Into how many zones of climate may the surface 
of the earth be divided by the isothermal lines ? 

214. What is wind ? How produced ? 

215. To what region must we look for the cause of the 
circulation of the winds of the globe? 

216. Explain the circulation of the atmosphere. 



194 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

217. What are trade- winds ? 

218. Why do these currents become distinct winds at 
30° of latitude? 

219. In what direction do the trade- winds blow ? Why ? 

220. Name some periodical and variable winds. 

221. How many wind-zones are there ? 

222. Where is the zone of calms f 

223. Where are the sub-tropical zones ? 

224. Where are the zones of variable winds ? 

225. What are monsoons ? 

226. Where are the principal monsoon regions ? 

227. Describe the monsoons of the Indian Ocean. 

228. What is the cause of the monsoons of the Carib- 
bean Sea ?. 

229. What are the " Northers " of Texas and Mexico ? 

230. What are land and sea breezes f 

231. Where are the Etesian winds ? To what do they 
owe their origin ? 

232. What are the most noted hot winds, and where 
do they prevail ? 

233. What are the most noted cold winds, and where 
do they prevail ? 

234. What are whirlwinds? Waterspouts? Sand- 
pillars? 

235. How are the tropical storms variously named ? 

236. Where are the three principal hurricane regions ? 

237. What is the nature of tornadoes ? 

238. What is dew, hoar-frost, fogs, clouds, rain, and 
snow ? 

239. How is hail formed? 

240. Upon what does the distribution of rain depend ? 

241. How are clouds formed ? 

242. Under what circumstances is dew formed? 

243. What is hoar-frost, and how is it formed ? 

244. What are vapors ? 

245. Mention some of the uses o£ snow. 

246. Into what classes are clouds divided? Describe 
each class. 

247. How may the surface of the earth be divided in 
reference to the quantity of rain that falls ? 

248. Where are the regions of periodical rains ? 

249. Describe the zone of calms. 

250. Describe the zones of the trade-winds. 

251. What are the characteristics of the sub-tropical 
zones ? 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 195 

252. Where are the regions of frequent rains ? 

253. Where are the rainless regions ? 

254. Why are the Pacific shores of Peru and Bohvia 
rainless ? 

255. What would be the condition of South America, 
providing the Andes were on the Atlantic coast ? 

256. Why is the Pacific shore of Mexico rainless ? 

257. Where is the largest rainless district of the globe ? 
Why are these regions rainless ? 

258. What is the cause of barrenness of the desert of 
Gobi? 

259. Where does the greatest amount of rain fall ? 

260. What particular place has the greatest annual 
rain-fall on the globe ? 

261. What is climate ? 

262. What circumstances affect the climate of a place ? 

263. What are the two chief classes of climate ? De- 
scribe them. 

264. Define Astronomical climate. 

265. Define Physical climate. 

266. What is the«general law of astronomical climate ? 

267. Why is temperature greater 'at the Equator, and 
why does it diminish towards the Poles ? 

268. What modifications of climate do the earth's 
motions produce ? 

269. Where are the general deviations from the astro- 
nomical climate most marked ? 

270. Where are the extreme deviations from astronom- 
ical climate found ? 

271. What difi'erence between oceanic and continential 
climate ? 

272. What effect has the soil on the climate of a 
country ? 

278. Why does California have but little rain between 
May and November ? 

274. Where are storms most violent ? 

275. What are glaciers ? 

276. What is the origin of glaciers ? 

277. Where is the most remarkable glacier region ? 

278. What evidence exists of former systems of glaciers ? 

279. What is the snow line ? 

280. What is electricity ? 

281. How many kinds of electricity are there ? 

282. What are conductors and non-conductors of elec- 
iricity ? 



196 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

283. Mention some of each. 

284. What is lightning ? 

285. What is heat-lightning ? 

286. How is thunder produced ? 

287. Why do we see the lightning before we hear the 
thunder ? 

288. Where are thunder-storms most frequent ? 

289. What is the aurora borealis ? 

290. How is it supposed to be produced ? 

291. What is mirage ? 

292. Name some electrical phenomena. 

293. What is organic life ? 

294. Under what three divisions is this department 
considered ? 

295. What is botanical geography ? 

296. What constitutes the flora of a country ? 

297. What gives varieties to the plant life of the globe ? 

298. What is indispensable to the existence of vegetable 
life? 

299. How many species of plants are supposed to exist ? 

300. What two lorms of distribution of vegetation do 
we find ? 

301. In what region is found greatest luxuriance, and 
why ? 

302. What similarity exists between the vertical and 
horizontal distribution ? 

303. What four regions are destitute of vegetation in 
consequence of the want of moisture ? 

304. Into what two great classes are vegetable forms 
divided ? 

305. What plants are flowerless ? 

306. How are flowering plants divided ? 

307. Describe the endogenous. The exogenous. 

308. About how many distinct plant species are there ? 

309. W^hich are the simplest forms of the plant species? 

310. Where are the lichens, algse, and mosses found ? 

311. Which are the most stately of all vegetable forms ? 

312. What are the principal food-plants of the torrid 
and hot zones ? 

313. What are bananas, bread-fruit, dates, cocoanuts, 
yams, cassava, and sago ? 

314. What are the principal food-plants of the warm 
and temperate zones ? 

315. What plants are the most valuable for furnishing 
clothing? / 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 197 

316. What spices are in common use in the various 
countries of the globe? 

317. What are the principal narcotics used in the dif- 
ferent parts of the globe ? 

318. What is opium, betel, haschish ? 

319. What is Zoological Geography? 

320. What constitutes the fauna of a country ? 

321. What law of distribution prevails? 

322. What exception to this rule in the case of marine 
animals ? 

323. What marks the range of animals ? 

324. What exception to this rule? 

325. What appears to be the basis of distribution of 
animals ? 

326. What modifies the fauna of each continent ? 

327. Where does the musk-deer live? The cashmere 
goat? The elephant? 

328. How have the animals upon the globe been classi- 
fied? 

329. What are vertebrates ? How have they been divi- 
ded? 

330. What are mollusks ? Articulates ? Radiates ? 

331. What is the mammalia ? 

332. How have the mammalia been classified ? 

333. Of what does Ethnology treat ? 

334. What evidences exist as to the unity of the 
human race ? 

335. What three strongly marked types exist? 

336. What three secondary races are found ? 

337. What is supposed to have produced the diversity 
of races? 

338. What is the law of perfection of type in man ? 

339. Which is the typical or normal race ? 

340. From what race of people did the people of Eu- 
rope descend ? 

341. Mention the chief European divisions of this 
race. 

342. What nations are descendants of the Celtic 
race? 

343. The Teutonic? 

344. The Slavonic ? 

345. The Gaulic ? What country was ancient Gaul? 

346. The Pelasgians ? 

347. The Northmen, or Normans? 



198 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

348. Who were the Saxons? Who the Anglo- 
Saxons ? 

349. From whom have the Italians derived their 
origin ? 

350. The Spanish and Portuguese ? 

351. Write a brace description of these races, giving 
their order of descent. 



ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS 



ON 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 



1. That science which treats of the natural divisions ol 
water, the atmosphere, and all organic life ^ 

2. Into Land, Water, Air, Plants and Annuals. 

3 In a state of igneous fluidity. All the elements ot 
the earth were one molten mass, surrounded by a thick at- 
mosphere, charged with vapors and gases 

4 A dn-ect proof is the ball-like form of the earth, 
which but for its plastic condition, would not have been. 
Afctronomy furnishes us with examples of like condition. 
Our sun is even now in a state of intense ignition, and the 
stars of the firmament are burning suns. The moon was 
once a fiery ball, but is now cooled, and covered with ex- 
I'lnct craters 

5 In the course of countless ages the earth lost heat 
and cooled sufficiently to form a solid crust, while the in- 
terior, even now, is liquid lava, gradually losing its temper- 
ature, which in time will cause a solid earth . . . 

6 It is variously estimated at from fifty to one hundred 
miles. At the depth of 60 feet, water obtains its greatest 
degree of cold ; at 2,200 feet the temperature rises to 
90§ Fahrenheit; at 8,000 feet water would boil, and 
as the temperature increases regularly from the surface 
downward, at a depth of twenty-eight miles iron would 

'""^T.' An element that cannot be separated into other coni"- 

^°T'' S?xty-three, and of these only fourteen have been 
found in a pure state, as gold, silver, copper, platinum. 



199 



200 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

9. Twelve : oxygen, silicon, aluminum, magnesium, 
calcium, potassium, sodium, iron, carbon, sulphur, hydro- 
gen, chlorine. 

10. Oxygen is a gas, and a constitutent of all rocks, 
and composes about one-half by weight of the earth's 
crust. 

Silicon is the element next in abundance ; combined 
with oxygen it forms silica or quartz, sandstone, and ordi- 
nary sand. 

Carbon is an element which, combined wdth oxygen, 
enters largely into the composition of various rocks. Char- 
coal and diamonds are pure carbon. 

Hydrogen is a gas, and combined with oxygen, consti- 
tutes water. 

Sodium is a metal, and with oxygen forms soda. It is 
the basis of salt. 

Chlorine with sodium forms common salt. 

Sulphur is a simple mineral substance, and united with 
oxygen and lime makes gypsum. 

Potassium is a metal which, combined with oxygen, 
forms potash. 

Calcium is a metal which, with oxygen, forms common 
quicklime, and with carbon limestone. 

Magnesium is also a metal which, combined, with oxy- 
gen, forms magnesia. 

Aluminum is a white metal, and with oxygen forms 
alumina, the basis of clay. 

11. As stratified and unstratified,the unstratified being 
divided into igneous and metamorphic. 

12. Those which are made up of a series of layers, as 
sandstone, slate-rock, limestone. 

13. By the waters of the globe removing materials from 
one place and depositing them in another, as stratified 
sediment. 

14. When the surface of the earth had become cooled, 
or fallen below the boiling point of water (212° Fahrenheit), 
the vapors of the atmosphere were condensed and gathered 
as water in the depressions of the earth. 

15. Those which, instead of being a sedimentary de- 
,posit, were forced in a melted condition from the burning 
depths below. 

16. These rocks were at first stratified, but by the 
igneous lava breaking forth and flowing near them, a sub- 
terranean heat was produced, thus destroying the sedimen- 
tary or stratified condition. 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 201 

17. Petrified remains of animals or plants that lie im- 
bedded in the rock formation of the earth's crust. 

18. Stratified rocks that contain fossils. Non-fossilifer- 
ous rocks are those without fossils, or igneous rocks. 

19. Into seven: The Azoic Age, the Silurian Age, 
Devonian Age, Carboniferous Age, Reptilian Age, Mam- 
malian Age, and the Age of Man. 

20. The Azoic Age is the earliest, and includes the 
time from the first forming of a solid crust to the appear- 
ance of animal life. Rocks of this age contain no animal 

■ fossils. 

The Silurian Age succeeded the Azoic, and the rocks 
abound in fossils of the simplest animals and plants. 
Star-shaped animals and animals that consist of joints or 
segments, as worms, make their first appearance on the 
earth ; but the mollusks, animals like our oyster, predom- 
inate. 

The Devonian Age, or Age of Fishes, succeeds the 
Silurian. Rocks of this age contain fossils of higher and 
more developed animals and plants than those of the pre- 
ceding age. Of fishes, the shark and gar-fish predominate. 

The Carboniferous Age was the Age of Vegetation. Great 
forests and jungles covered the land from the poles to the 
equator. It was a period of unceasing change. Destruc- 
tive floods undermined the dense vegetation, which fell, 
layer upon layer, gradually changing into vast coal-fields 
under the pressure of the waters. 

The Reptilian Age is remarkable as the era of the cul- 
mination of reptiles and mollusks. Among the former 
were the gigantic ichthyosaurus, a marine animal with the 
teeth and head of a crocodile, and from ten to thirty feet 
long ; the plesiosaurus, a huge reptile with the head and 
neck of a snake, and the pterodactyl, a flying reptile. 

In the Mammalian Age many of the lower animals and 
vegetable forms become extinct, and more perfect ones 
appear. The gar-fishes give place to the salmon, perch, 
and herring ; the cycads among plants, to the oaks, willows, 
and palms. Animals of great size tread the earth, which 
are now known only by their remains. 

The Age of Man is the present era. The animal ele- 
ment is no longer dormant. The majority of the large 
beasts, that during the preceding era were the chief deni- 
zens of the world, have become extinct, and made room 
for smaller but higher creatures. Man, as the most highly 
organized being, appears latest upon the earth, which has> 



202 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

by means of successive changes in the past, arrived at that 
stage of development which renders it a fit dwelling-place 
for him. The earth, in this last stage, has reached a state 
of comparative stability. Changes take place, but they 
are less sweeping and less violent than those of the pre- 
ceding ages. 

21. The greater part lie deep in the earth, and require 
much labor to obtain them. Some are found in the soil 
and sandy beds of rivers. 

22. Gold, silver, platinum, mercury, iron, lead, copper, 
tin, nickel, zink, and antimony. 

23. It surpasses all others. 

24. There are no well-defined localities where precious 
stones are found. Some have been found in Alaska, Cali- 
fornia, Arizona, and occasionally one picked up, apparently 
out of place, or lost. The largest diamond found in the 
United States was picked up by a workman on the banks of 
the James River, opposite Richmond. It weighed 24 carats. 

25. It is found in the Appalachian region, particularly 
Pennsylvania and New Jersey ; also in Wisconsin, Illinois, 
Missouri and Tennessee. 

26. The annual product is about 6,000 tons. 

27. It is produced most abundantly in New York and 
Michigan, but in a natural state Nevada has inexhaustible 
quantities of rock salt. In this state it can be obtained in 
blocks so perfectly pure and clear that a newspaper can be 
read through the thickness of a foot. A railroad cutting 
one of these immense mines graded its bed for a distance 
of three miles. 

28. It was sunk in 1859, in Pennesylvania, and yielded 
400 gallons a day. 

29. By the atmosphere, the water, and by the action of 
the heated interior. 

30. The moisture in the atmosphere crumbles the ex- 
posed rock-surfaces, and the dusty fragments are drifted by 
the wind, and in the course of time deep deposits of it are 
formed. 

31. Rivers and creeks are everywhere at work gradually 
moving the whole surface of continents towards the oceans . 
Rivers also produce important changes by erosion. 

32. Rivers wearing out deep channels in their courses. 

33. The Canon of the Colorado River, which is a nar- 
row chasm three hundred miles long, and with perpendic- 
ular walls of rock, from three thousand to six thousand 
feet in height, worn by the flowing river. 



PHYSICAL GEOGRPAHY. 203 

34. It is estimated that over 400,000,000 tons are carried 
into the Gulf of Mexico. This yearly discharge, if placed 
in one accumulation, would cover an area of ten square 
miles to the depth of twenty-five feet. 

35. Changes of level, which are slowly progressing by 
the century, or suddenly by the action of volcanoes and 
earthquakes. 

36. The northern part of the Scandinavian peninsula is 
slowly rising at the rate of four feet in a century, while the 
southern part, and Holland and Denmark, are gradually 
subsiding. It is by this subsidence that the greater part 
of Holland and Denmark is below the level of the sea, and 
should the dykes which protect these countries become 
broken, great inundation would follow. 

37. When the interior of the earth has cooled beyond 
the power to react and disturb its surface, the leveling of 
continents by the elements of nature will begin to be 
apparent. By the washings of rain the surface of the 
country is slowly moving to the bottom of oceans ; by the 
action of the moist atmosphere rocks crumble to dust and 
are borne away. Though the process of decomposition is 
slow, yet the all-devouring element of time will tear down 
the mountains of earth and fill up the valleys of the seas, 
until land shall disappear, and the earth shall be one wide 
expanse of ocean. 

38. About one-five-hundred-and-thirtieth part of the 
whole volume of the globe, or if the earth were a perfect 
sphere, without elevations and depressions, the volume of 
water would be about 10,000 feet in thickness. 

39. They lie with their masses about the Arctic and 
Atlantic Oceans, and narrow as they extend southward. 

40. About one-seventeenth, or 3,000,000 square miles. 

41. Into two classes, continental and oceanic. 

42. Those that lie near continents, and appear, by their 
position, to be detached portions. 

43. The West Indies, Bahamas, Aleutian, Japan, East 
Indies, and many others. 

44. Such as lie far removed from any continent. Nearly 
all of the islands of the Pacific Ocean belong to this class. 

45. They are mainly of two kinds, the volcanic and 
coral. 

46. Continental islands, as a rule, are larger than oceanic 
islands. 

47. The continental islands have the same formation 
as of the mainland, being composed of sandstone, slate, 



204 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

granite, and the various metamorphic rQcks, while the 
volcanic islands are composed of volcanic substances, or of 
limestone. 

48. It is the limy secretion or deposit of small marine 
animals that lie together in vast numbers. It is found in 
tropical seas, or where the temperature of the water is not 
below 68° (Fahrenheit). 

49. Four : fringing reefs, barrier reefs, encircling reefs, 
and atolls, or coral islands. 

50. Lines or ribbons of coral near the shores. 

51. They lie parallel to the shore, but are separated 
from it by a channel of water of considerable depth and 
varying greatly in width. The grandest example of coral 
formation known is the Great Australian barrier reef. Ex- 
ternally it rises, with little inclination, from a fathomless 
ocean — stretches upwards of 1,000 miles along the north- 
east shore — varies in breadth from two hundred yards to a 
mile, and in distance from the shore from twentv to seventy 
miles. There are many openings through the reef, by 
which vessels enter the interior ocean, which is everywhere 
safely navigable. An encircling reef is a barrier reef which 
encloses one or more islands. 

52. They consist of a low, narrow rim of reef surround- 
ing a lagoon. 

53. The vacant place enclosed by atolls or coral islands. 

54. It is based upon a regular and gradual subsidence 
of the bed of the ocean. A fringing reef is first formed 
near the shore of an island, which becomes an encircling 
reef, and as the ocean bed subsides, the coral deposits still 
continue to grow upward until by the subsidence the in- 
terior island disappears, and the atoll alone remains. 

55. Though of a great variety of shapes, they agree in 
one particular, viz. : They consist of a low narrow rim of 
coral rock, enclosing a body of water called a lagoon. 

56. As the reef-building polyps do not live below the 
depth of 100 or 120 feet, they select for a foundation the 
submarine mountains and plateaus, or the slopes of vol- 
canic cones, which come near the surface. 

57. They are found in tropical waters where they are 
protected from cold ocean currents, from the influence of 
fresh river waters, and are remote from active volcanoes. 
They are not found where the mean annual temperature of 
the water falls below 68^ Fahr. 

58. Into three classes : mountains, tablelands or plat- 
eaus, and lowlands. 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 205 

59. The Himalayas are the highest elevation, rising 
29,000 feet above the level of the sea. The lowest depres- 
sion is the Dead Sea, in Palestine, which lies 1,300 feet be- 
low the level of the ocean. 

60. The direction of a mountain chain. 

61. The shape, its elevation, plains, tablelands, moun- 
tains, and valleys. 

62. Elevations as a whole and linear elevations. 

63. As an elevation of 330 feet produces a difference of 
temperature of 1° Fahr., then the altitude of but a few 
thousand feet changes the character of a region, like a 
removal of it from torrid to temperate latitudes, or from 
temperate to frigid. The relief also controls the drainage 
of a continent, and influences to a certain extent the direc- 
tion and character of the winds, and the distribution of 
rain. 

64. Above an elevation of 1,000 feet. Low plains are 
below 1,000 feet. 

65. 

Mean elevation in feet. 

The Plateau of Thibet 14,000 

The Bolivian Plateau, in the Andes 13,000 

Plateau of Anahuac, in Mexico 8,000 

Arabian Plateau 7,000 to 8,000 

Colorado Plateau 7,000 

The Great Basin 4,000 to 5,000 

The Sahara 2,000 to 3,000 

Southern Africa , 3,000 tc 5,000 

Central Asiatic Plateau 2,000 to 4,000 

66. In the Western Continent there is the Mississippi 
Plain, the Arctic Plain, Atlantic Coast Plain, Llanos of the 
Orinoco, Selvas of the Amazon, and the Pampas of the La 
Plata. In Europe there is the Great Central Germanic 
Plain. In Asia, there is the Siberian Plain, the Plain of 
Turkistan, the Chinese Plain, and the Mesopotamian Plain. 
Africa has no great low plains. 

67. Into three: those rising to an elevation of 20,000 
feet or upwards ; those between 10,000 and 20,00U feet, 
and those between 2,000 and 10,000 feet 

68. By the pressure of the inner forces of the earth. 

69. Mountains by folding, which are generally of 
moderate elevation ; and mountains by fracture, to which 
belong the highest chains of the globe. 

70. Longitudinal valleys are those which separate par- 
allel ridges of mountain chains, and extend in the same 



206 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

direction. Transverse val%s cut the ridges at right angles, 
and extend in an opposite direction. 

71. The great dividing ridges of a continent. The sub- 
divisions are called secondary axes. 

72. Six : the Rocky Mountains, Californian, Allegha- 
nian, Andean, Parime, and Brazilian. 

73. This system, including the Californian system, oc- 
cupies the whole western part of the continent, extending 
from the Isthmus of Panama to the Arctic Ocean, a distance 
of 5,700 miles. 

74. It extends in a southwesterly direction from the 
shores of the Gulf of St. Lawrence to the northern part o- 
Georgia and Alabama. This system consists of many 
parallel chains, varying in height from 1,000 to 3,000 feet, 
enclosing fertile valleys. 

75. It extends from the 50th parallel of north latitude, 
between the Rocky Mountains and the coast range of the 
Pacific, through the central part of Mexico, to the Isthmus 
of Panama, and may be divided into the Great Basin of 
Utah, the Great Mexican Plateau, and the tablelands of 
Central America. 

76. The Great Plateau of the Andes ; the elevated 
plains of Quito, Bogota, and Popayan ; and the tableland 
of Brazil. 

77. It is an extensive tract of lofty tableland, stretch- 
ing along the top of the Andes between the parallels of 15^ 
and 3° south latitude, with an elevation of nearly 13,000 
feet. 

78. They are divided into Central, Southern and South- 
western Asia. 

79. The great desert of Gobi, and the tableland of 
Thibet. 

80. Those of Hindoostan, Iran, Asia Minor, and Arabia. 

81. Those of Abyssinia and South Africa. 

82. It is the Spanish peninsula, the whole central part 
of which consists of a series of lofty plains, divided from 
each other by parallel mountain chains. This plateau 
comprises 93,000 square miles, or nearly one-half of the 
peninsula. 

83. It extends from the Arctic Ocean to the Gulf of 
Mexico, and from the Rocky Mountains to the Alleghanies, 
and is divided about midway into a northern and southern 
slope. 

84. The entire peninsula east of the Andes, except the 
mountain systems and the Brazilian tableland, and is di- 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 207 

vided into the llanos, selvas, pampas, and wastes of Pata- 
gonia. 

S5. It extends from the Bay of Biscay and the North 
Sea, to Behring Strait. 

86. It contains a great plain, extending from the foot 
of the Ural Mountains to the Pacific Ocean, and from the 
Alti Mountains to the Arctic Ocean. This plain, near the 
Arctic, is a barren and desolate region, and the cold is so 
intense that the spongy soil is perpetually frozen to the 
depth of several hundred feet. Near the Irtysh River, the 
soil is rich and pasturage good, but there are few inhab- 
itants. 

87. Sahara, the plains of Egypt, Central Africa, and the 
region of Zambezi. 

88. Of vast, barren plains. 

89. Each have a predominant mountain system in the 
west, two secondary systems in the east, and vast, low 
plains intervening. 

90. That all of the long, gentle slopes descend to the 
Atlantic and Arctic Oceans, while the short and rapid 
slopes are directed towards the Pacific and Indian Oceans. 

91. They are crowded around the North Pole, their 
northern limit bedng about the 70th parallel. As they 
extend south they gradually diminish in area, until they 
terminate in points widely separated from each other. 

92. With the exception of Australia, they are more or 
less triangular. 

93. The western continent extends north and south, 
while the eastern has its greatest length somewhat opposite. 

94. The American continent extends about 9,000 miles 
and traverses all the climatic zones. Asia-Europe also 
extends about the same length, and has a general similarity 
of climate, vegetation and animals. 

95. They exhibit striking difierences. Some are deeply 
indented with gulfs and inland seas, while others are 
almost void of these indentations. 

96. The greater the indentations of a country the more 
moderate are the extremes of temperature, and the more 
convenient for the development of the industries of man- 
kind. The climate is subdued, and the enlightenment of 
man becomes but the natural tendency of nature. 

97. They become the abode of the most highly civilized 
nations. 

98. Europe, i\sia, and North America are most indented 
and its people are the most industrious and enlightened. 



208 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

Africa and South America have few indentations and the 
people are less ambitious and enterprising. 

99. From the reaction of the heated interior upon the 
solid crust. These phenomena are divided into three 
classes : volcanoes, earthquakes, and a rising or subsidence 
of portions of the earth's surface. 

100. A mountain which emits fire, smoke, and lava. 

101. As active, intermittent, and extinct. 

102. Those having periods of rest. 

103. It is the opening, or several openings, of a volcano. 
Lava is the matter thrown from a volcano. 

104. They differ greatly in size, the larger varying from 
2,000 to 18,000 feet. 

105.. They are sometimes on the sides. 

106. It is that of Mauna Loa, on the Island of Hawaii, 
4,270 feet high. This crater is over three miles long and 
one mile wide, and from 600 to 1,000 feet deep. Large 
pools of boiling lava may be seen from the brink. 

107. Two: the central and lineal systems. 

108. The central consists of several vents grouped 
together, one of which usually serves as a common point 
of eruption. The lineal consists of several vents extending 
in one direction, at no great distance from each other, 
forming, as it were, chimneys along an extended fissure. 

109. On the islands and shores of the Pacific Ocean. 

110. Humboldt has enumerated 225 still in action, 
and the number of extinct volcanoes is much greater. 

111. Nearly all of the volcanoes are situated along the 
mountain ranges which are near the shores of the conti- 
nents, while the interior is almost destitute of them. 

112. Volcanoes appear where .the earth's crust is 
weakest, and these mountain chains are a line of fracture 
formed by the gradual separation of the ocean's bed from 
the coasts of the continent. 

113. One is the vast array of mountain chains, or 
continents and islands, which encircle the Pacific Ocean ; 
the other, though less continuous, is a belt of broken 
lands and inland seas, which, extending around the globe, 
separates the northern from tlie southern continents. 

114. That the cooling of the earth's surface produces 
an eruption or vent that is seen in the freezing of a barrel 
of water. Volcanoes are the outlet of this expansion. 

115. Geysers, mud volcanoes, and fields of fire. 

116. Miniature volcanoes which emit steam and mud, 
but n-ever molten rocks. They are found in large numbers 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 209 

in Sicily, and on the shores of the Caspian Sea, near the 
base of the Caucasus Mountains. 

117. Regions where columns of fire break forth from the 
ground. These fires are classed with volcanic phenomena, 
although they may have their origin from the connection of 
the internal heat with large quantities of gases which ac- 
cumulate in the crevices of rocks and burst forth in flames. 

They are found to the greatest extent west of the Caspian 
Sea. 

118. A depression or valley crossing a mountain chain, 
through which a road is formed for traveling. 

119. Convulsions of the earth, and are most common in 
volcanic districts. 

120. Horizontal, vertical, and rotary. 

121. That the convulsions are the results of the heated 
interior seeking vent, and may be caused by the collection of 
steam and gases, or like congealed water, the crust of the 
earth may contain the property of expanding during its 
process of cooling, thus forming a pressure which is resisted 
by violent agitations to obtain relief. The movements of 
earthquakes appear to be on the principle that waves 
recede when any substance is thrown into the water; thus, 
when convulsions occur great waves of the fluid interior 
recede, by which the crust is uplifted and more or less 
violently shaken. 

122. They vary according to their power. The terrible 
earthquake of Lisbon, November 1st, 1755, in which 60,()U0 
persons lost their lives, disturbed an area of 7,500,000 square 
miles, or, as the earth's crust is about twenty-five miles in 
thickness, 187,500,000 cubic miles of matter were moved. 

123. .Some of the most destructive lasted but a few sec- 
onds. That of Lisbon produced its terrible effects in less 
than five minutes. 

124. Volcanoes are supposed to be outlets of the pres- 
sure of the subterranean forces, while earthquakes are the 
forces seeking vent. 

125. Li the tropics, especially, earthquakes are most 
frequent in that part of the year in which the greatest at- 
mospheric disturbances take place. They are most dreaded 
at the beginning or the rainy season, when the monsoons 
are changing directions. 

126. A terrific eruption of Mt. Vesuvius destroyed the 
cities of Pompeii, Herculaneum, and Stabise, and covered 
them with ashes and cinders to the depth of fifteen feet. 

127. About sixty of its eruptions are recorded. In 16G9, 



210 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

a stream of lava from this mountain overflowed the ram- 
parts of Catama, sixty feet in height, and destroyed a por- 
tion of the city. 

In 1832, several craters opened in the sides, and a stream 
of lava eighteen miles long, one male broad, and thirty feet 
deep, pom-ed over the adjacent fields. 

128. In 1835, a terrible eruption occurred. It lasted 
three days, during which the light of the sun was obscured 
over half of Central America; more than 40,000 square miles 
are said to have been covered with dust, ashes, and lava. 

129. It is estimated that 13,000,000 human beings havf^ 
lost their lives by these convulsions of nature, but the esti 
mate has no solid foundation for statistics. 

130. At times the electrical condition of the air seems 
to be changed and felt by man and beast — the former 
experiencing oppression and dizziness ; the latter uttering 
cries of distress and running wildly about. At these times 
the atmosphere is unusually still and hazy, and the sun 
seen through it looks like a ball of fire. 

131. One of the most terrible earthquakes on record 
occurred in South America, in August, 1868. Its center of 
activity seems to have been in Arica, a seaport of Peru, 
which was completely destroyed. The shock extended 
through the whole eastern shore of South America, and 
numerous towns and cities were laid in ruins. Probably 
50,000 people lost their lives. 

1 32. The most remarkable earthquake that has (Occurred 
in the United States is that of New Madrid, on the Mis- 
sissippi River, in 1811-12. For several months there was 
an incessant quaking of the ground, which for a distance 
of 300 miles rose and sank in undulations. The most of 
the town was submerged. 

133. The waters upon the earth. 

134. Fountains of waters which flow from reservoirs 
underneath the ground, and are classified as perennial or 
constant, intermitting, and periodical. 

1 35. Perennial springs are those which continue to flow 
at all seasons. Intermittent are those that alternately flow 
and stop. Periodical depend upon the prevailing character 
of the seasons. 

136. They depend upon the peculiar arrangement of the 
pervious and impervious stratification. The water pene- 
trates the pervious stratum and sinks to the impervious, 
where, if the stratification is tilted, the water will follow 
this layer until an outlet is found. Should the pervious 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 211 

stratum lie between two convex layers of impervious mat- 
ter, springs could be obtained at any place where the 
height is less than the highest points of the pervious stra- 
tum, by breaking through, whereby the water would rise 
to the surface and flow. 

137. In and around mountainous regions. 

138. It depends much upon the strata through which 
the water passes. Some are icy cold, particularly in moun- 
tain regions. Others coming from great depths are warm, 
hot, and even boiling. This heat, in some places, is due 
to volcanic action, and in some instances to chemical 
action. 

139. Artificial springs formed by boring to the pervious 
stratum, as explained above. 

140. When a river is so situated that it may divide and 
flow to two distinct river basins. The best known example 
is the Cassiquiare River, in Venezuela, which connects 
through its bifurcation the river systems of the Amazon 
and Orinoco rivers. 

141. It is composed of two gases, oxygen and hydrogen, 
chemically combined in the ratio, by weight of eight to one. 

142. It sustains vegetable and animal life, and in a large 
measure v\^as the principal agent in shaping what is now 
the solid land. 

143. Water contracts in volume with a falling of tem- 
perature, until reduced to 39.2° Fahr., where its density is 
greatest. Below this temperature it expands. 

144. The great reservoir is the sea. 

145. They are raised by evaporation and spread over 
the earth in the form of rain. 

146. A spring is the outlet of an underground current 
of matter which has for its source some reservoir or supply 
higher than where the spring comes from the ground. It 
is this pressure which produces the flow. 

147. Into oceanic and continental. The oceanic are 
those that flow into the ocean, and are divided into five 
classes, one for each ocean. The continental are those 
which never reach the ocean. 

148. A deep gorge, ravine or gulch between high and 
steep banks, worn by water-courses. 

149. Upon the extent of the territory which it drains ; 
the rains ; the physical features of the country — a well- 
wooded country impeding evaporation; and the climate. 

150. A large mass of snow, ice and earth, sliding or 
rolling down a mountain. 



212 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

151. The junction of two or more rivers. 

152. The St. Lawrence basin, Atlantic slope, Missis- 
sippi valley, Texas slope, Pacific slope, inland basin of 
Utah, and the Ked River basin. 

153. There are three classes : the Atlantic basin, the 
Arctic slope, and the inland basin of the Caspian Sea. 

154. They are entirely within the low plains of Russia. 

155. Into the Atlantic Ocean. 

156. The position of the several grand divisions partially 
enclose, and slope to the Atlantic, while mountain chains 
which form the divides between the river basins of these 
oceans are near the shores of the Pacific. 

157. Into four classes : first, those which receive no 
streams and have no outlets; second, those which receive 
no streams, but have an outlet; third, those which receive 
streams, but have no outlet ; fourth, those which both 
receive and discharge streams. 

158. As rivers and lakes are formed by rain or snow 
they are fresh because in the evaporation of water the im- 
purities are left behind. Salt lakes have no outlet which 
retains all of the salt which flows into them. 

159. Steppe lakes. 

160. Great Salt Lake of the United States, Lake Titicaca 
of South America, the Caspian Sea, Lake Tchad and 
Nagami of Africa, and numerous smaller ones throughout 
Central Asia. 

161. It is over 176,000 square miles in extent, and 2,957 
feet deep; its surface lies eighty-four feet below the level of 
the ocean, and is slowly diminishing in size. Several large 
rivers flow into it. 

162. This region is in North America, and sweeps in the 
shape of a broad belt around Hudson Bay, from Labrador 
to the shores of the Arctic Ocean. The lakes of Canada, 
those in the New England States, New York, Minnesota, the 
great northern lakes, and the many lakes in the great 
northern plain east of the Rocky Mountains, belong to this 
region. 

163. These lakes have been estimated to contain one- 
half of all the fresh water of the globe. Lake Superior con- 
tains about 32,000 square miles ; Lake Michigan about 
22,400; Lake Huron, 21,000; Lake Erie, 10,815; Lake On- 
tario, 6,300. 

164. In Europe there are two lake regions. The one 
surrounds the Baltic Sea and its branches. To it belong 
the countless lakes of Finland, the great Ladogo and 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 213 

Onega lakes of Russia, the numerous small lakes in North- 
ern Germany, and those of Denmark and Sweden. The 
other lake region is that of the Alps, containing 426 lakes, 
the largest of which lie along the base of this mountain 
system. 

165. They are the most extensive swamps on the globe, 
and belong to Northern Russia and Siberia. These 
swamps are frozen to a gre^it depth, and thawing during the 
summer months at the surface only, are covered with a 
dense covering of mosses. 

166. They form reservoirs, which, receiving the surplus 
waters in time of freshets, equalizes the flow of rivers and 
prevent destructive inundations. In their basins the wild 
mountain torrents find rest and the muddy waters deposit 
their sediment, and flow out pure and transparent with a 
gentle current. 

167. Because they have no outlets to carry off the salt- 
ness which is continually washed from the earth by rains 
or contact with beds of salt. 

168. The color is generally a deep, bluish green, which 
becomes clearer near the coast. The depth depends upon 
the formation of the bottom, which, like the land, is diver- 
sified by mountains and valleys, high and low plains. The 
greatest depth in the region of the Atlantic Telegraph 
Cable is about 12,700 feet; in the South Atlantic, 25,000 feet; 
in the Pacific, over 43,000 feet. The clearness and trans- 
parency vary in different localities. In the Arctic Ocean 
shells and animals are distinguishable at a depth of 500 feet; 
around the Lesser Antilles objects are distinctly seen 150 
feet below the surface. Sea-water, in general, is mor-e 
transparent than fresh water. 

169. By the presence of mineral substances, chieflv 
salt, sea-water becomes heavier. Fresh water congeals at 
32^ Fahrenheit, seawater at 28J°. 

170. It is due to myriads of minute animalcules which 
inhabit the water. 

171. The great body of the ocean is never at rest ; not 
only is the surface agitated by the winds, but even at great 
depths the water moves from one region to another. 

172. There are four : The Gulf of Mexico, Hudson 
Bay, Mediterranean Sea, and the Baltic Sea, with the Gulfs 
of Bothnia and Finland. 

173. Caribbean Sea, Gulf of St. Lawrence, North 
Sea, Behring Sea, Sea of Okhotsk, and the Japan, Yellow, 
and China seas. 



214 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

174. It is- from 25 to 150 miles wide, and moves with a 
velocity of from IJ to 5 miles an hour. 

175. A deep indigo blue, strikingly different from the 
green of the surrounding ocean. 

176. A branch of this stream flows by the shores of 
Western Europe, and being warm, tempers the winds which 
blow over it, making the climate mild and genial. 

177. The Equatorial current crosses the Atlantic from 
the coast of Africa to Cape St. Eoque, where it divides 
into two branches, a northwesterly and a southwesterly, 
€ach of which follow the South American coast — the 
former making its way into the Caribbean Sea and the 
Oulf of Mexico, where it takes the name of Gulf Stream. 

In the Pacific two Equatorial currents are found — one 
north and the other south of the equator. The former, 
turning to the northeast near the Loo Choo Islands, con- 
tinues under the name of the Japan current. 

The south Equatorial current of the Pacific consists of 
two branches, one of which, striking the Australian coast, 
divides into a northwesterly and a southwesterly branch, 
as does the Atlantic current on the coast of Brazil ; the 
other, farther north, turns near the Caroline Islands, and 
reverses its course, crossing the Pacific again in a direction 
nearly due east to South America, under the name of the 
Equatorial counter-current. 

178. The Japan current is the north branch of the 
Equatorial current, and bears a remarkable resemblance to 
the Gulf Stream. Its course is through the China Sea 
along the Asiatic Island chains, in a northeasterly direction 
toward the Aleutian Islands and Alaska, the climate of 
which it improves, as the Gulf Stream does that of North- 
western Europe. Between the Japan current and the main 
land a cold current sets in the opposite direction, as in the 
case of the Gulf Stream. 

179. From the Arctic Ocean two cold currents flow to 
the south, one on each side of Greenland. Uniting at the 
mouth of Davis Strait, they continue their southerly course 
as far as Newfoundland, where part of this broad Arctic 
River, as an under-current, flows beneath the Gulf Stream ; 
and the rest, as a surface-current, keeps inside of this 
stream, close to the American shore as far south as Florida. 
It is this Arctic current which chills Labrador and makes 
it a desolate region. 

180. There are three currents — one which flows into 
the Atlantic in a northwesterly direction along the coast of 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 2l5 

Africa, joining the Equatorial current near the Gulf of 
Guinea ; one flows into the Pacific along the South Ameri- 
can shore under the name of the Peruvian or Humboldt 
current, and with the Equatorial west of the Gulf of Guay- 
aquil ; one flows into the Indian Ocean along the western 
shore of Australia and unites Avith the Equatorial just 
north of the Tropic of Capricorn. 

181. Circular currents, which occur in certain localities 
and are caused by the action of the tides flowing against 
a peculiarly shaped shore or island. 

182. It is a movement communicated from one portion 
of the sea to another following in a line of succession. In 
shallow water, or the shore, these movements are broken 
and the last motion throws the water as if it came in 
the form of a current. 

183. Experiments show an agitation from 450 to 620 
feet. 

184. The great tidal-wave rises less than three feet in 
mid-ocean, but when it strikes against the shores of conti- 
nents its altitude is much greater, varying according to the 
formation of the inlets, sometimes rising as high as seventy 
feet. 

185. This vast tidal swell or wave, probably originates 
southeast of Australia, and, like other waves, it is not an 
onward flow of water, except over shoals and near the land. 
The reason assigned for giving this point as the place of 
commencement, is, the position of the continents. Beyond 
this commencement extends the great ocean, which con- 
sists of the Antarctic, Pacific and Indian Oceans. Over 
this vast water- area the flood-tide journeys westward around 
the earth, sweeping up against the African and Asiatic 
coasts into the Atlantic Ocean, and around Cape Horn into 
the Pacific Ocean. 

186. They are like vast rivers, transporting its waters 
from one part to another, and are caused by the heat of 
the sun, rotation of the earth, the saltness of the sea, by 
winds, tides, and melting ice. They are divided into con- 
stant, periodical and temporary. 

187. The winds, the rotation of the earth, the excessive 
evaporation of the ocean in the tropics, and the Polar cur- 
rents which flow to replace that evaporation. The waters 
of the Polar under-currents are heavier, because of their 
temperature, and in flowing into the tropics force the 
warmer waters to flow away as surface-currents. 

188. Those which continue for a limited time, and are 



216 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

caused by tides, melting ice, or gales of considerable dura- 
tion. 

189. Such as flow at regular intervals, and are occa- 
sioned by tides, and by periodical winds called monsoons. 

190. Those which flow throughout the entire year in the 
same direction, and have their origin in permanent causes. 
There are two kinds : Polar currents, flowing from the Poles 
to the equator, and Equatorial currents, flowing from east 
to west near the equator. The origin of constant currents 
may depend upon the rotation of the earth and enormous 
evaporation in the equatorial regions. By the evaporation 
currents are formed from beyond the equator to supply the 
loss, and by the rotation of the earth from west to east, the 
waters at the equator, where the velocity of the earth i& 
greatest, are inclined to flow or slide to the west, which 
produce currents in an opposite direction from the motion 
of the earth. 

191. A stream which runs by the side of, or beneath 
another current, and in an opposite direction. 

192. Polar, Equatorial, and Return Currents. 

193. If acted upon by no external forces, they would 
move in a direct line between the Poles and the Equator, 
but the rotation of the earth causes the Polar currents to 
tend towards the west and the Return currents towards the 
east. The prevailing winds also modify these directions, 
and the basins of the several oceans somewhat shape their 
course. 

194. The Atlantic and Pacific Oceans are subdivided, 
each having a northern and a southern basin ; the Indian 
Ocean has only a southern basin ; the Arctic is properly a 
continuation of the Atlantic ; the Antarctic, also, is not 
properly a separate ocean but is the common center 
from which the three great basins radiate. 

195. The Pacific is oval in outline and broadly open at 
the south, but is nearly closed at the north. 

196. The Atlantic basin has been likened by Humboldt 
to a long valley, with approximately parallel sides. This 
is the only basin widely open at the north and, stretching 
from pole to pole, it forms the only complete channel for 
the interchange of polar and equatorial waters. 

197. In regard to the position and character of the 
branches, by which the coasts of the continents are in- 
dented. 

198. According to their forms, they are classified as in- 
land seas, border seas, and gulf or bays. 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 217 

199. Numerous soundings have given an approximate 
idea of the ocean beds, especially of the Atlantic Ocean, 
the Mediterranean Sea, the Indian Ocean, and the Red Sea. 
In the Pacific these soundings are somewhat limited. 

2(J0. From the velocity of the tide-wave and earthquake 
waves. These waves depend upon the depth of the basin 
in which they move. 

201. Of the atmosphere, temperature, winds, and 
moisture (dews, fogs, rain, snow, and hail). 

202. It is composed of three gases, in the following 
proportion : Nitrogen, 76.84 ; oxvgen, 23.1 ; carbonic 
acid, 0.06. 

203. Estimates based upon the pressure of the atmos- 
phere in high and low localities, place the depth at 45 to 
50 miles. 

204. Experiments prove that air is 815 times lighter 
than water. 

205. To the transmission of sound, to combustion, and 
to life. 

206. The quantity of sensible heat which a body pos- 
sesses, as indicated by a thermometer. 

207. The direction of the sun's rays, its vicinity to the 
sea, the prevailing winds to which it is exposed, and its- 
elevation above the sea. 

208. In the tropical zone the limit is but one foot from 
the surface ; in the temperate zone it is from sixty to sev- 
enty feet ; and in the frigid zone it is about fifty. 

209. In the tropical zone, it is probably about 7,200 
feet ; 60° north and 56° south latitude, it reaches the sur- 
face, and in 70° about 4,500 feet. 

210. The average amount of heat a place receives dur- 
ing the year. 

211. The variation is but little. The variable produce 
of our harvests is owing more to the change in distribution 
of heat through the different months, than to any difference 
in the annual supply. 

212. Lines which are drawn through all places, which 
have nearly the same mean annual temperature. 

213. Six: the torrid, hot, warm, temperate, cold, and 
frigid. 

214. Air in motion. It is produced by the different 
amount of heat which the atmosphere receives in different 
localities. 

215. To the equatorial regions. 

216. Within the tropical regions the air is heated. It 



218 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

expands, becomes lighter, and rises. From both sides the 
colder air rushes in to restore the disturbed equilibrium, 
thus producing two lateral currents, one from the north, and 
the other /rom the south. But the air drawn by these cur- 
rents must be restored, else there would be an accumulation 
of atmosphere in these regions. This is effected by the as- 
cending current, which, on reaching a certain elevation, is 
pressed outward, forming two return currents, one flowing 
to the north, the other to the south. It is by these currents, 
one ascending current, two lateral Polar currents, and two return- 
ing Equatorial currents, that the general circulation is effected. 

217. They are the lateral Polar currents, although the 
name is generally applied only to that part of the currents 
between the equator and 30 ° of latitude, where they be- 
come distinct surface winds. 

218. The Equatorial currents, which in the tropics flow 
high above the Polar currents, become chilled in their tran- 
sit through the upper regions of the atmosphere, and have 
a tendency to descend and intermingle with the Polar cur- 
rents, which replace each other successively, thus prevent- 
ing constant currents above that latitude. 

219. They are northeast winds in the northern hemis- 
phere, and southeast winds in the southern hemisphere. 
The direction is due to the rotation of the earth, the veloc- 
ity of the surface of the earth being greater as the Polar 
currents approach the equator, which cannot acquire, sud- 
denly, the same velocity, and the earth moves under it, and 
the trades, in the northern hemisphere, by this reason blow 
from the northeast, instead of coming directly froji the 
north. By a similar reason the Equatorial currents flow in 
an opposite direction. As these currents commence to flow 
from the equator, they acquire the equatorial velocity, 
which cannot, suddenly, conform with the decreased veloc- 
ity of the earth's surface as thoy approach the Poles, but 
unlike the trades, which lag behii.d, they have acquired a 
velocity and flow beyond the meridian from which they 
started. 

220. The marked periodical winds are Monsoons, and 
Land and Sea Breezes. The variables are Whirlwinds and 
Hurricanes, Typhoons or Cyclones. 

221. Seven : the zone of calms, the two zones of the 
trade-winds, the two sub-tropical zones, and the two zones of 
the variable winds. 

222. It extends from li° to 11° north latitude. This 
place has the greatest mean annual temperature, conse- 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 219 

duently it is where the trade-winds cease, or rather, where 
they rise and flow back again as Equatorial currents, thus 
producing a series of calms. 

223 Those belts which lie between the summer and 
winter limits of the trade-zones. The trades prevail here 
during the summer, but in winter they recede, and the vari- 
able winds prevail. ,-,... . ., v. ^ • i 

224. They extend from the limits of the sub-tropical 

zones to the Poles. . -, i ^--e j 

22.^ Trade winds whose direction has been moditiecL 
by the unequal heating of the land and sea. The name 
was orio-inally restricted to periodical winds which blow m 
the Indian Ocean, blowing part of the year m one direc- 
tion, and part in the opposite. . r r. • 

226 In the Indian Ocean, along the coast ol C-ruinea, 
and in the Caribbean Sea and Gulf of Mexico. 

227 During the cooler months of the year, the mon- 
soons are the regular northeast trade-winds, but as the sun 
crosses the Equator, and the continent of Asia becomes 
intensely heated, an ascending current results, and the 
trades are deflected and rush to the continent to restore 
the equilibrium, thus turning the trades m almost an oppo- 
site direction. A similar deviation is also produced south 
of the Equator when Australia becomes heated. 

228. The northeastern trades are deflected by the over- 
heated Mississippi valley, and like the trades of the Indian 
Ocean, they are bent to supply the demand on the conti- 
nent. .I'-.p 

229 Violent winds which sweep over the prairies ot 
Texas and plains of Mexico. They prevail from October 
to March, and are considered as winter monsoons. 

230. Those winds which blow in summer from the sea to 
the land during the greater part of the day, and ffom the land 
to the sea at night. They are caused by the different tem- 
perature of the land and water, the land being warmer 
than the water in the day, and colder at night 

231 They are periodicals which blow on the Mediter- 
Tanean Sea in summer, and owe their origin to the Sahara 

desert. . , ^^ . ^-i 

232 The simoon, khamsin, harmattan, sirocco, and 
the soiano. The simoon prevails on the deserts of Arabia, 
Nubia, Persia, and Syria; the khamsin blows m Egypt, but 
is not so oppressive as the simoon ; the sirocco is a well- 
known hot wind of Greece and Italy, and the soiano of 
Spain which owe their origin to the vicinity of the Sahara. 



220 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

233. The pamperos and bora. The pamperos are cold 
southwest winds which originate among the snows of the 
Andes, and sweep with great violence over the level pampas 
of South America. The bora is a northeast wind, common 
on the eastern shores of the Gulf of Venice. 

234. A whirlwind is the meeting of two winds at an 
angle. Waterspouts are whirlings occurring on the sea or 
on lakes. They first appear in the form of an inverted cone 
attached to a dark cloud. The cone swings backward and 
forward, and gradually approaches the water, which be- 
comes violently agitated. The whirling eddy draws up 
masses of spray, which unite with the descending cone. 
When fully formed, they appear as tall pillars of cloud of 
sombre grey, stretching from the sea to the sky, whirling 
around an axis. They continue but for a short time, 
when the column breaks, and rain often descends from the 
cloud above. The drops of water forming this rain are 
never salt, as would be the case were they carried up from 
the ocean. They must, therefore, have been derived from 
the clouds, as in ordinary rain. 

Sand-pillars are produced by whirlwinds on a desert 
where columns of sand are drawn up in a body. 

235. As hurricanes, typhoons, cyclones, and tornadoes. 

236. In the West Indies, Indian Ocean, and the Chinese 
Sea. The wind revolves. 

237. They differ from the other tropical storms merely 
in their extent and duration. Their extent is quite limited, 
and their duration at any one place is seldom more than a 
few seconds. 

238. Dew is moisture collected on substances during 
the night. Hoar-frost is frozen dew. Fogs are masses of 
vapor resting on or near the surface of the earth. Clouds 
are masses of visible vapor, differing in no respect^ from 
fogs, except in position. Rain is water which, originally 
taken up in the atmosphere in the form of vapor, is re- 
turned to the earth in drops. Snow is the frozen vapor of 
the atmosphere. 

239. As they are composed of alternate layers of snow 
and ice, it is supposed that the wind revolves around a 
horizontal axis, by means of which the moisture of the air 
is successively carried into warm and cold clouds. In the 
cold clouds the particles of snow are collected, and by the 
whirl are carried into rain clouds, where they receive a 
coating of water, which when returned to the cold cloud 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 221 

becomes ice. In this manner the hailstones grow rapidly 
in size, and are finally hurled to the ground. 

240. The quantity of moisture depends upon its tem- 
perature, and its vicinity to the sea. The rain -fall decreases 
as we pass from the Equator to the Poles, .and from the 
coasts of the continents towards the interior. 

241. Clouds or fogs result whenever two bodies of air 
of different temperatures are mingled, especially if, as is 
generally the case, the warmer of the two is the moister. 

242. The cooling of a still moist atmosphere causes a 
portion of this vapor to fall or collect in the form of small 
drops of water. 

243. It is the freezing of the falling dew. 

244. The particles of water so fine and light that they 
float in the air unseen, except where they condense and 
become clouds. 

245. Being a non-conductor of heat, it protects the 
roots of vegetation from the severe frosts of winter. It 
also collects in great masses on lofty mountains and grad- 
ually thawing, it feeds streams, springs, and numerous 
underground currents, which are of great benefit in the 
economy of nature. 

246. The cirrus, cumulus, stratus, and nimbus. The 
cirrus occupy the highest position in the atmosphere, and 
resemble a lock of hair, being composed of parallel streaks. 
The cumulus resemble a mountain of snow, and are most 
common in summer. The stratus consist of horizontal 
bands near the surface of the earth, and belong to the 
night. The nimbus is the rain-cloud, and much more 
dense than the others, although the others may be changed 
to the nimbus. 

247. Into rainless regions, regions of periodical rains, 
and regions of frequent rains. 

248. In the zone of calms, the zone of trade-winds, and 
the sub-tropical zones. 

249. In this zone it rains daily. The ascending current, 
hot and highly saturated, is cooled when it reaches greater 
elevations. In the afternoon, usually, a ring of clouds 
appears, and, accompanied by thunder and lightning, tor- 
rents of rain descend. 

250. These zones are characterized by almost constant 
serenity, and a deep-azure sky. But as the sun stands over 
the zenith during a part of the summer in these zones, it 
carries with it the calms and rains of the first zone. Hence 



222 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

the serenity of the trade-zones is interrupted by a brief 
rainy season during summer, while the winters are dry. 

251. They are characterized by dry summers and rainy 
winters. Tliis is due to the trades which prevail there 
during the summer, and absorb rather than bring moisture. 
During the winter the variable winds prevail, and bring the 
irregular rains of the temperate regions. A large portion 
of the United States lies within this zone, and would have 
dry summers if it were not for the monsoons occasionally 
blowing from the Mexican Gulf far inland, and bringing 
thunder storms. 

252. A part of the temperate zone and the frigid. 

253. They lie almost entirely within the zones of xne 
trade- winds. 

254. The trade-winds coming across the entire continent, 
are intercepted by the Andes Mountains, and are forced to 
ascend their slopes, where they meet the cold air, which 
condenses their vapor, and the rain flows down the eastern 
slopes. The wind passes over the crest and reaches the 
western slopes dry and vaporless. 

255. The greater part wo aid be a barren desert. 

256. The trade-wind is here deprived of its vapor by 
the Plateau of Anahuac. 

257. The Great Desert, Arabia and Persia. The trades 
prevail here, but have lost their moisture on the passage 
across the mountains and plateaus of High Asia. 

258. It is found to be in the Himalayas, which intercept 
the prevailing southwest winds, and deprive them of almost 
all their moisture. 

259. In the tropics of the New World. This amount 
is about 115 inches, while in the tropics of the Old World 
the fall is about 77 inches. In the temperate parts of the 
Old World, 34 inches fall; in the New World, 35 inches. 

260. On the Khasia Hills in Farther India, which face 
the Bay of Bengal and receive winds heavily laden with 
vapor on their passage over the Indian Ocean. The annual 
fall is about 50 feet. 

261. The state of the atmosphere in regard to tempera- 
ture, winds, moisture and salubrity. 

232. The latitude of a plsice] its height above the level 
of the sea; the position and direction of the mountain 
chains ; its distance from the sea ; the slope of the coun- 
try ; the character of the soil ; the degree of cultivation 
and density of population ; and the quantity of rain that 
falls. 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 22S 

263. Oceanic and continental. Those regions which 
are open to the influence of the ocean are moist and mild, 
while those which are removed from the inflnence are 
commonly dry and suffer from great excesses of heat and 
cold. 

264. It is the climate based upon the latitude of a place 
and not the general conditions of that country. 

265. It is the modifications of the general law of climate 
by the action of winds, ocean currents, mountain ranges, 
deserts and the bodies of water. 

266. That the heat gradually decreases from the Equator 
to the Poles. 

267. It is due to the direction of the sun's rays. _ As 
the sun is perpendicular to the Equator the rays fall direct 
and the heat is retained, while the direction, as we approach 
the Poles, becomes more oblique, on the same principle 
that heat decreases from midday to evening. 

268. Because of the inclination of the earth's axis the 
position of the earth to the sun is continually changed 
ini ts revolution, which produces a constant change of 
climate. 

269. Chiefly in the middle latitudes. 

270. The extreme deviations occur on the coasts of the 
North Atlantic, those of Western Europe being warm 
and mild while the shores of Northeastern America are 
cold and desolate. These differences of temperature are 
due to the physical conditions, the Gulf Stream and the 
Arctic currents. 

271. Oceanic climate is characterized by uniformity of 
temperature, while continental climate is subjected to sud- 
den changes and great extremes of heat and cold, especially 
in the middle and higher localities. 

272. A country covered with a barren, sandy soil is 
subject to great and rapid changes in its temperature, 
owing to the readiness with which it receives and parts with 
heat, while marshy lands, or lands covered with forests or 
vegetation, are more salubrious. 

273. It is owing to the eastern or trade- winds which 
prevail, they having been deprived of moisture by crossing 
the continent and meeting the Rocky and Sierra Nevada 
Mountains. The westerly winds prevail from December 
to May, which produces the rainy reason. 

274. The most remarkable for violence, and for the 
regularity of their course, are the hurricanes of the West 
Indies and of Mauritius in the Indian Ocean; the typhoons 



224 THE QUESTION BOOK, 

of the South China Sea ; and the cyclones of the Gulf of 
Bengal. 

275. Immense masses of ice and snow, which move 
with extreme slowness down the higher mountain valleys 
or slopes. The upper parts are formed of soft snow, but 
the great weight and pressure condense the lower portions 
into clear hard ice. 

276. It is the weight of the great fields of snow press- 
ing downward and forcing the whole mass as explained 
above. 

277. The glaciers of the Alps. 

278. By the condition of the country ; masses of un- 
stratified rocks left behind ; deep grooves, or scratches, cut 
in the bottom or sides of the valleys by imbedded rocks. 
These cuts are parallel, and show the direction of the 
motion. 

279. It is the lower limit of perpetual snow. Within 
the tropics it is about three miles above the sea level, in 
the temperate latitudes about two miles, and at the north- 
ern limit of the continents about half a mile. 

280. One of the great forces of nature, with the origin and 
nature of which we are unacquainted. Like the power of 
gravitation it is a part of nature itself, indispensable in her 
organization, mild ana terrific, and last becoming the 
greatest agency in the advancement of civilization. 

281. There are two kinds — a positive and a negative. A 
substance charged with one kind will attract a substance 
charged with the other, but repel a body charged with the 
same. 

282. Conductors are those substances which transmit 
electricity freely; non-conductors do not. 

283. Water, metals, living plants and animals, smoke, 
steam and moist air are conductors. Silk, glass, India 
rubber, guttapercha, hair, feathers and dry air are non- 
conductors. 

284. Lightning is a discharge of atmospheric electricity, 
accompanied by a flash of light. 

285. It is the weak discharge of electricity from the 
clouds, producing a slight flash but not of suflicient strength 
to cause an explosion. 

286. Thunder is the sudden rushing of the atmosphere 
to fill the vacuum produced by the lightning. 

287. As light travels faster than sound, we see the flash 
before we hear the report. 

288. Within the tropics during the rainy season. 



•, PHYSICAL GEOGRPAHY. 225 

289. It is a beautiful exhibition of nature, at night, in 
the Polar skies. In the temperate regions it is known as 
northern lights. 

290. It is supposed to be electric currents passing 
through a strata of highly rarefied air. 

291. A reflection of some distant object plainly visible 
on the clouds. It is due to certain peculiarities of the 
atmosphere and conditions of the country. Vessels have 
been seen and recognized in this mysterious way. Sailors 
often regard this phenomena of nature as an evil omen. 

292. St. Elmo's fire and Aurora Borealis and Aurora 
Australis. The latter is the electric display in the South- 
ern Hemisphere. 

293. It is that department of Physical Geography 
which treats of all vegetable and animal life. 

294. Botanical Geography, Zoological Geography, and 
Ethnography. 

295. Botanical Geography treats of the different divis- 
ions of the vegetable kingdom and their geographical dis- 
tribution. 

296. The plants of any section of country taken to- 
gether are called its flora. 

297. They differ widely, by reason of the differences in 
heat, moisture, light, slope and soil — more particularly by 
the first two. 

298. Moisture, in the form of rain or dew. 

299. More than 250,000 difi^erent species of plants are 
supposed to exist on the earth, Over 120,000 have been 
named by botanists. 

^ 300. A horizontal and a vertical. The horizontal is the 
distribution arising from the influence of the heat and cold 
as we go from the Equator to the Poles. The vertical is 
the same influence from the base of a tropical mountain to 
the summit. 

301. In the equatorial regions, where heat and moisture 
are most abundant. 

302. Plants of the same species are found as we go from 
one elevation to another up the tropical heights, to corre- 
spond with the plant creation as we journey north or south 
from the Equator. 

303. The deserts of Gobi and Arabian in Asia, the 
Sahara in Africa, and the Atacama on the western slope of 
the Andes. 

304. Into the cryptogamous (flowerless) and the phen- 
ogamous (flowering). 



226 THE QUESTION BOOK. , 

305. The mosses, lichens, fungi, ferns and seaweeds. 

306. Into two classes : the endogenous and the exoge- 
nous. 

307. The endogenous are those plants which increase 
from within, as grasses, sugar-cane, corn, etc. The exoge- 
nous are those which increase by coatings from without, as 
the trees of the forest, etc. 

308. It is estimated that there are about 250,000 dis- 
tinct plant species upon the earth. Less than half of these 
have been described by botanists. 

309. The lichens, algse and mosses. 

310. Lichens cover the rocks in tropical deserts and in 
the regions of ice or snow. They are the most widely dis- 
tributed class of plants. Algae are sea and fresh water 
weeds, of the most varying forms and colors. Some 
attain an enormous size. One species, growing in the 
Straits of Magellan and near the Falkland Islands, is often 
400 feet long. Mosses are also found in all zones, wherever 
moisture is abundant. In our forests they are quite com- 
mon. 

311. The palms. The tall and slender shaft rears on 
high its crown of shining, fan-like leaves. Some are nearly 
200 feet high. They require a mean annual temperature 
of 78° to 82° Fahrenheit, and occur, therefore, chiefly in 
the hottest parts of the tropical zone. 

312. Rice, bananas, bread-fruit, dates, cocoanuts, yams, 
cassava and sago. 

313. Bananas are the fruits of tropical plants. This 
plant rises 15 or 20 feet high, with leaves six feet long and 
a foot broad. The fruit is four or five inches long, and an 
inch or more in diameter. They grow in large bunches, 
weighing fifty pounds or more. Bread-fruit is produced 
by the bread-fruit tree, which grows on the isles of the 
Pacific Ocean, of the size of the common apple tree. The 
fruit is of round or oval shape, as large as a small loaf of 
bread, which is eaten as food. Dates are a delicious fruit, 
produced by the date-palm of Asia and Africa. Cocoanuts 
are the fruits of the cocoa tree. These nuts hang in clus- 
ters of a dozen each on the top of the tree, and are bound 
together by tough, stringy filaments. Yams are roots 
resembling"^the potato, and are cultivated in a similar man- 
ner. Cassava is a kind of bread made from the roots of 
the cassada plant. Sago is obtained from the pith of sev- 
eral species of palm trees, which form entire forests in 
many of the Spice Islands. The pith is prepared into sago- 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 227 

meal by mixing it with water and straining. A tree com- 
monly yields from 300 to 500 pounds. 

314. Wheat, potatoes, corn, rye, oats, and barley. 

315. Cotton, hemp, and flax. 

316. Pepper, cinnamon, cloves, nutmegs, and vanilla. 

317. Tobacco, opium, betel, andhaschish. 

318. Opium is prepared from a species of poppy, and 
is very extensively used in China and Turkey. The betel 
plant is a cHmbing shrub, which grows in Hindostan and 
the islands of the Indian Ocean. The leaves are used by 
the natives as tobacco. Haschish is a powerful narcotic, 
obtained from a species of hemp-wort, and is used in India 
to produce intoxication. 

319. That department of physical geography which 
treats of the divisions of the animal kingdom and its 
geographical distribution. 

320. The animals found in any region of country are 
called its fauna. 

321. As a rule, the luxuriance and diversity of animal 
life decreases as we pass from the Equator to the Poles. A 
similar decrease is noticed in passing from the coasts of the 
continents towards the interior. 

322. In marine animal life it is the reverse ; both num- 
bers and size of the species increase from the Equator to 
the Poles. This is probably due to the more equable tem- 
perature of thej3cean in high latitudes. 

323. Large bodies of water, deserts, or mountain ranges 
mark the boundaries of animals, as their physical condi- 
tion in a great measure, draw the isothermal lines. 

324. Man, and his faithful friend, the dog. , 

325. The distribution of heat, moisture and vegeta- 
tion. . 

326. The physical condition of that country— its heat, 
moisture and vegetation, which are governed by its eleva- 
tion, mountains, deserts, winds, and ocean currents. 

327. The musk-deer and cashmere goat live in Thibit 
and other parts of High Asia. (The costly musk is formed 
in a gland about the size of a pigeon's egg.) 

The elephant lives in India, Ceylon, and the Eastern 
Archipelago. 

328. Into four classes : vertebrates, mollusks, articu- 
lates, and radiates. 



228 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

329. This division includes all animals which have an 
internal skeleton joined to the backbone. It comprises 
four classes : 1. Mammalia ; 2. Birds ; 3. Reptiles ; 
4. Fishes. 

330. MoUusks are animals of soft texture, and have no 
skeleton ; as the oyster, snail, and mussel. Articulates 
are animals consisting of a number of joints or rings, soft 
or hard, supplying the place of a skeleton ; as the lobster, 
worms, spiders, and insects. Radiates are so called because 
in many cases their organs are arranged like rays proceed- 
ing from a center. The coral and microscopic animals 
belong to this division. 

331. They are the most perfect of the animal creation. 
They differ greatly in appearance and habits, but corre- 
spond in one particular of suckling their young. They 
number about 3,000 species. 

332. Into eight classes : Quadrumana (four-handed), 
monkey, ape ; carnivora (flesh-eaters), bear, cat, dog ; 
Marsupialia (pouched), oppossum, kangaroo ; rodentia 
(gnawers), beaver, squirrel, rat ; edentata (toothless), sloth, 
armadillo; pachydermata (thick-skinned), elephant, horse, 
hog ; ruminantia (chewing the cud), camel, ox, sheep ; 
marine mammalia, whale, dolphin, seal. 

333. It treats of the varieties of the human race, their 
physical and intellectual characteristics, and their geo- 
graphical distribution on the earth. 

334. By a comparison of the difierent tribes and races 
of men we find the same general modification of types. 
The highest race will produce the same degraded forms of 
humanity as the lowest, there being no distinct species 
except that variety of modification produced by the 
enlightenment of man. 

335. The Caucasian, Mongolian, and the Negro. 

336. The Malay, or Brown Race ; the Australian, and 
the Indian, or Copper-colored. 

337. The ever varying external conditions. 

338. It is an exception to that observed in the lower 
orders of creation. The human family appears in its 
highest physical perfection, not within the Tropics, but in 
the Temperate Zones. 

339. The "White race seems to be the normal race from 
which the others have gradually deviated. 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 229 

340_. From the Aryans, a primitive people supposed to 
have hved in prehistoric times, in Central Asia, east of 
the Caspian Sea and north of the Hindu Koosh Moun- 
tains. 

341. The Celtic, Teutonic, Slavonic, Gaulic, Pelasgians, 
and the Northmen or Normans. 

342. The Celtics are an ancient race of people who 
formerly inhabited a great part of Central and Western 
Europe, and whose descendants at the present day occupy 
Ireland, Wales, the Highlands of Scotland, and the north- 
ern shores of France. 

343. The Teutons were a people of ancient Germany 
and are now represented by the Germans, Dutch, and 
Saxons. 

344. The Slaves were a people who anciently inhabited 
the country between the Rivers Save and Drave, and their 
descendants are people of Russia, Poland, Bulgaria, and 
Bohemia. 

345. The people of France. This country was anciently 
known as Gaul. 

346. The Pelasgians were the ancient people of Greece, 
but were largely supplanted by the conquests of the Hel- 
lenes, who now form the greater portion of the Greek 
ancestry. 

347. The people of Norway and Sweden are descend- 
ants of that ancient race of Norsemen, who formerly occu- 
pied the northern portion of Europe. These people were 
a bold, hardy race who conquered large portions of Europe, 
establishing a powerful monarchy in England in the 
eleventh century, which, in a large measure, is the foun- 
dation of the present kingdom. At this time they were 
known as Normans. 

348. The Saxons were an ancient people of the north- 
ern part of Germany, who, with other Teutonic tribes, 
conquered England in the fifth and sixth centuries. The 
people of England are largely descendants of this race, and 
all descendants of the English people are termed Anglo- 
Saxons, or English-Saxons. 

349. From the Romans, Germans, and Normans. 

350. A mixture of Celts, Romans, Germans and Arabs. 



230 



THE QUESTION BOOK. 



351. 



Aryan. 



Celtics. 



Teutonic. 



Slavonic. 



Gaulic. 

Pelasgians 
and 
Hellenes. 



r Irish. 

} Welsh. 

(Highlanders of Scotland. 



Germans. 

Saxons 
Dutch. 

Russians. 
Polanders. 
Bulgarians. 
Bohemians. 



r The English or 
I Anglo-Saxons. 



{ The people of France. 



The people of Greece. 



Northmen ( Inhabitants of Northern Europe, 
or -j 

^ Normans. (The Ancient Scandinavians. 

The Huns were a wild and barbarous race of Tartars 
who overrun Europe in its early history, but were finally 
defeated and driven out, except in the province of Hun- 
gary. These people and the Turks do not trace to Aryan 
ancestry. 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR 



1. What is English Grammar? 

2. What is the object of studying grammar ? 

3. What is language, strictly speaking? 

4. What can you say of the compositioU/.'of language? 

5. Into what parts is grammar divided '^ 

6. Of what does pronunciation treat? 

7. Define etymology. 

8. Of what does syntax treat ? 

9. Of what does prosody treat? 

10. What is the basis of grammar ? 

11. Of what does language consist? 

12. How are words classified ? 

13. How are words distinguished? 

14. By what general name are the different classes of 
words called? 

15. What is a part of speech ? How many i 

16. How are nouns divided? 

17. What is a collective noun? 

18. What is"' an abstract noun? ^ 

19. What is a participial noun ? 

20. When does a proper noun become a common noun i 

21. When does a common noun become proper? 

22. What is the office of a pronoun ? 

23. What is the antecedent of a pronoun? 

24. What is the subsequent of a pronoun ? 

25. What is the difference between the antecedent and 
the subsequent ? 



232 , THE QUESTION BOOK. 

26. Into what classes are pronouns divided ? 

27. What is a personal pronoun ? Name them. 

28. Where are thou, thy, thine, thee and ye used ? 

29. In parsing, how are the pronouns, ours, yours, hers, 
theirs and 7nine disposed of ? 

30. What peculiarity about the pronoun it f 

31. What is a compound personal pronoun ? 

32. What is a relative pronoun ? 

33. To what are the relatives ivho and which applied ? 

34. How is the relative what used ? 

35. When is as a relative pronoun ? AVhen is that f 

36. What pronoun is used when the antecedent is sup- 
plied ? 

37. What are the compound relative pronouns ? 

38. What is an interrogative pronoun ? 

39. What is a responsive, or indirect interrogative 
pronoun ? 

40. What is an adjective pronoun? How many? 

41. To what do distributive pronouns relate ? 

42. What is the difference between the demonstrative 
and indefinite pronouns ? 

43. What do the reciprocal pronouns denote? 

44. How should either, neither, each other, and one an- 
other be used ? 

45. How should this and that be used ? 

46. What properties have nouns and pronouns ? 

47. When are objects personified? 

48. In personified objects when is the masculine gen- 
der preferred ? 

49. When is the feminine gender preferred ? 

50. What are the methods of distinguishing the two 
sexes ? 

51. When and how are proper nouns made plural? 

52. What class of nouns is generally used in the singu- 
lar number ? How may they be used in the plural ? 

53. When is a collective noun singular? When 
plural ? 

54. How are most nouns made plural ? 

55- What is the origin of the use of the possessive 
sign 's ? 

56. How are most compound words made plural ? 

57. How are the titles Mr., Mrs., Miss and Dr. made 
plural? 

58. How is the plural of foreign nouns formed ? 

59. How are foreign words ending in a, us, um or on, is, 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 233 

X or ex changed to form the plural ? Form the plural of 
the folio whig words : Formula, larva, nebula, vertebra, 
focus, radius, sarcophagus, stimulus, phenomenon, datum, 
analysis, synthesis, axis, basis, crisis, emphasis, oasis, 
parenthesis, thesis. 

60. How are letters and figures made plural? 

61. How is the editorial loe used ? 

62. What is enallage as used in grammar? 

63. What is case ? Name them. 

64. When is a noun or pronoun used in the different 
cases ? 

65. When is a noun or pronoun used independently ? 

66. How is the possessive case denoted ? 

67. How can the possessive case be expressed without 
the apostrophe? 

68. When are two terms in apposition ? When is one 
predicated by the other? In what must these terms 
agree ? 

69. How is a compound term expressed in the posses- 
sive case ? 

70. When is a noun or pronoun in the same case as 
another ? 

71. In how many cases are compound personal pro- 
nouns used ? 

72. Decline who^ which, what, and that. 

73. When may that have two cases ? 

74. What is declension ? 

75. How are the articles the, a, and an used ? 

76. Why are a and an both called the indefinite arti- 
cles ? 

77. When should a be used? 

78. When should an be used ? 

79. What is an adjective ? 

80. How are the adjectives divided? Define each 
class. 

81. Into what smaller classes are adjectives divided? 

82. Define a common adjective. 

83. Define a proper adjective. 

84. What is a participial adjective? 

85. What is a compound adjective? 

86. What is a numeral adjective ? 

87. How are the numeral adjectives divided? Define 
them. 

88. What is a pronominal adjective ? 

89. Into what classes are the pronominals divided ? 



234 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

90. What modifications have adjectives? 

91. What is comparison ? How many degrees ? 

92. Why is this called comparison ? 

93. Define the positive degree. Comparative. Super- 
lative. 

94. What parts of speech have comparison ? 

95. How are degrees below the positive expressed ? 

96. When should more or most in comparison be pre- 
ferred ? 

97. What is the difference between comparison ascend- 
ing and comparison descending ? 

98. When are adjectives redundant? 

99. When adjectives of one syllable and those of sev- 
eral syllables come together, which are placed first and how 
are they compared? 

100. Must adjectives always agree with their substan- 
tives in number ? 

101. When does an adjective become a noun? 

102. What is a verb ? A regular verb ? An irregular verb ? 

103. What are the principal parts of a verb ? 

104. Why are these called the principal parts ? 

105. What is a redundant verb ? A defective verb ? A 
finite verb ? 

106. What parts of a verb are not finite ? 

107. What is a transitive verb? An intransitive 
verb ? 

108. When may a transitive verb become intransi- 
tive ? 

109. When may an intransitive verb become transi- 
tive ? 

110. What is a neuter verb ? 

111. What is a principal verb? An auxiliary verb ? 

112. Define a redundant verb. 

113. Give examples of redundant verbs. 

114. What properties have verbs? 

115. Define voice, mode, tense. 

116. W^hat are the person and number of a verb ? 

117. When is a verb in the active or passive voice ? 

118. How is a verb in the active voice changed into the 
passive ? 

119. To what verbs does voice belong? 

120. How many modes are there ? 

121. What does a verb in the indicative mode express ? 
In the subjunctive? In the potential? In the impera- 
tive? 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 235 

122. What is the difference between the indicative and 
subjunctive modes? 

123. How many tenses in each of the modes? 

124. What are the signs of the tenses ? 

125. What are the forms of a tense ? 

126. How is the emphatic form of a verb expressed? 

127. How is the passive form expressed? The pro- 
gressive ? 

1 28. What is the ancient form ? 

129. How is a proposition made interrogative ? How 
made negative ? 

130. When the subject consists of words differing in 
person, how is the form of the verb or pronoun deter- 
mined ? 

131. What is an impersonal verb ? 

132. What properties have auxiliary verbs ? 

133. Which are auxiliary verbs ? 

134. Which are sometimes principal verbs ? 

135. When is it proper to use shall and should f 

136. When is it proper to use will and would f 

137. When are do, be and have principal verbs ? 

138. What stands as an answer to lohatf or when f of a 
transitive verb ? 

139. How will you determine whether a verb is transi- 
tive or intransitive ? 

140. How many terms implied in a transitive verb ? 

141. How many terms implied in an intransitive verb ? 

142. What is a copulative verb ? - 

143. What is the principal copula verb ? 

144. What is the peculiarity of these copula verbs ? 

145. What is an infinitive? How many? 

146. How is the present infinitive formed, and what 
does it denote ? 

147. How is the perfect infinitive formed, and what 
does it denote ? 

148. When is to, the sign of the infinitive, omitted? 

149. What is a participle? How many? 

150. How is the present participle formed ? What does 
it represent ? 

151 . How is the perfect participle formed ? What does 
it represent ? 

152. What voice have participles ? 

153. What is a compound participle? 

154. What do being, having and having been express in 
relation to participles? 



236 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

155. What are some of the chief particulars in which 
participles and infinitives agree? Some in which they 
differ? 

156. What is the conjugation of a verb ? 

157. What is the inflection of a verb ? 

158. What is meant by the weak and the strong conju- 
gation of verbs ? 

159. What is the theme of a verb ? 

160. What is a paradigm ? 

161. What is it to make a verb ? 

162. What is the synopsis of a verb ? 

163. What forms of a verb are called composite? 

(a) Conjugate lie, to repose; lie, to speak falsely; dare, 
to venture; bear, to carry. 

(b) Give the principal parts of the following verbs: 
drink, lay, rose, build, eat, sow, dive, gone, set, sit, get, bid, 
dig, slay, thrust, was. 

(c) Give the synopsis of the verb eat, in the third per- 
son, singular number, indicative mode, passive voice. 

(d) Give a synopsis of the verb run, in the first person, 
singular number, interrogative form, in the indicative and 
potential modes. 

164. What is an adverb ? How are most of them 
formed ? 

165. What is a conjunctive adverb ? 

166. Into what classes are adverbs divided? 

167. What is the difference in the use of an adjective 
and an adverb ? 

(a) Classify the following adverbs : Now, much, more, 
so, well, here, whither, everywhere, to-morrow, forever, daily, 
enough, nearly, yesterday, aloud, hither, whence, forth, 
away, often, little, yet, too, nevertheless, together, to-day, 
yonder, out, somewhat. 

168. How can we ascertain to what class adverbs be- 
long? 

169. What is a preposition? An adjunct? To what 
does an adjunct relate ? 

170. What may a substantive, governed by a preposi- 
tion, be ? 

171. When does a preposition become an adverb ? 

172. What is a conjunction? Correlative connective ? 

173. What is the difference between analysis and syn- 
thesis ? 

174. .What is parsing? 

175. What is relation ? Agreement ? Government ? 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 237 

176. What is a sentence? Clause? Proposition? 
Phrase ? 

177. What is a declaratory sentence? Interrogatory.'* 
Imperative ? E xclamatory ? 

178. What is a simple sentence ? Compound ? Com- 
plex ? 

179. What is the subject and predicate of a sen- 
tence ? 

180. What is the logical and grammatical subject and 
predicate of a sentence ? 

181. What is discourse? Of what may it treat ? 

182. What is a paragraph ? 

183. What is analysis based upon ? 

184. What are elements of sentences ? 

185. What must every proposition have ? 

186. What is a modifier? How many kinds? 

187. By what may a noun and pronoun be modified? 

188. By what may a verb be modified ? 

189. When an infinitive or participle is used as a noun, 
what modifiers do they take ? 

190. What parts of speech are never modified ? 

191. What kinds of words are connectives ? 

192. In the analysis of phrases, what forms are given ? 

193. What part of a sentence is considered the most 
important ? 

194. When may a subordinate element occupy the chief 
place ? 

195. What is a period in Grammar ? 

196. In what do all the errors of language consist ? 

197. What is a figure in grammar ? 

198. Name the figures of grammar. 

199. What is a figure of orthography ? 

200. What is a figure of etymology ? 

201. What is a figure ot syntax? 

202. What is a figure of rhetoric ? 

203. How many, and what are the names of the most 
important figures of etymolog}^? 

204. What is apho^resis ? Syncope ? Apocope ? Pros- 
thesis? Parngoge? Tmesis? Diaeresis? Synaeresis? 

205. What is ellipsis ? Aposiopesis? Zeugma? Ple- 
onasm ? 

206. Whatis a simile? Metaphor? Allegory? Synec- 
doche ? 

207. What is antithesis? Irony? Paralipsis? Hyper- 
bole? 



238 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

208. What is euphemism? Interrogation? Exclama- 
tion? 

209. What is versification ? Verse ? 

210. What is a foot? 

211. What is rhyme? Blank verse? 

212. What is a couplet? Stanza? 



ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS 



ON 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR, 



1. The science of speaking and writing the English 
language correctly. 

2. To be able to understand, speak, and write a lan- 
guage correctly. 

8. Any method of communicating thought or feeling. 

4. It is of two kinds, prose and verse. 

5. Pronunciation, orthography, etymology, syntax and 
prosody. 

6. Of the sounds of letters and syllables. 

7. It treats of the different parts of speech, their deri- 
vation and modification. 

8. Of the arrangement and relation of words in sen 
tences. 

9. Of versification, punctuation, figures and utter- 
ance. 

10. The usage of the best authors. 

11. Of sounds which, combined, form words which 
represent ideas. 

12. They are classified : 

As names of beings, places, or things. 

As substitutes for names or facts. 

As qualifiers or limiters of names. 

To assert action, being, or condition. 

To modify an assertion or a quality. 

To express relations of things or of thought. 

To introduce or connect words and sentences. 

To express a sudden or intense emotion. 

For rhetorical effect. 

239 



240 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

13. They are distinguished as nouns, pronouns, adjec- 
tives, verbs, adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, exclama- 
tions, words of euphony. 

14. They are known by the general name of Parts of 
Speech. 

15. Classes of words, differing according to their usage 
and meaning. 

16. Into proper and common; and the common are 
divided into collective, abstract and verbal. 

17. One that denotes a collection. 

18. The name of some quality of a substance. 

19. A participle or infinitive used as a noun. 

20. When it is used to denote a whole class; as, " The 
Washingtons of the world are few." 

21. When personified, or used as a proper noun. 

22. To avoid the repetition of nouns. 

23. The word, phrase or clause which the pronoun rep- 
resents. 

24. Interrogatives or relatives of the interrogative kind, 
when they are used in asking questions, have no antece- 
dents, but relate to some word or phrase contained in the 
answer, which is called the subsequent. 

25. The antecedent and subsequent are opposed to each 
other in meaning; the former signifying going before, the 
latter following after. 

26. Personal, relative, interrogative and adjective. 

27. One which distinguishes the persons. /, thou or 
you, he, she and it, with their compounds and declined 
forais, are the personal pronouns. 

28. In the Bible and addresses to the Deity, and fre- 
quently in poetry. 

29. As these Words are equivalent to a noun and pro- 
noun, the parsing should correspond with the words which 
they represent. 

30. The antecedent of it is sometimes considered lost, 
when the pronoun denotes merely the state or condition 
of things, or a point of time, or when it introduces a sen- 
tence and is explained; as, It rains. It is twelve o'clock. 
It was moonlight. It is mean to take advantage of anoth- 
er's distress. Some authors consider it in the above exam- 
ples as having no antecedent, yet, if we observe closely there 
may be one somewhat remote; as, in the first example, we 
might use clouds for the antecedent; in the second example, 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. ' 241 

time; in the third, night; and in the last example we might 
use act for the antecedent: as, the act is mean, etc. 

^io.?o°?f """^^^^ ^^^^ of forming an antecedent for it has been given to Drovokfl 
discuBBion and impress the mincTwith the pecuHarity of this pronoun ^'^^'^^^^ 

31. My, thy, your, him, her, or it, compounded with self 
to iorm the smgular ; and our, your, and them, compounded 
with selves to form the plural. 

32. A pronoun that joins a descriptive clause to its 
antecedent. 

33. Who is applied to persons only ; which to persons 
or things. ^ 

34. What is used in place of that which or things which, 
and may denote persons or things. 

3-5. When preceded by such, many, or same, and relates 
to the objects thus specified. That is a relative pronoun 
when it IS equivalent to loho, whom oxivhich. 

36. The pronoun which. 

87. Who, which, and what, with ever and soever annexed 

38. One used to ask a question. 

39 One used indirectly as an interrogative ; as, '^ Tell 
me lohat truth is." o ; , 

40. An adjective that is sometimes used as a pronoun 
J hey are divided into four classes : distributive, demon- 
strative, indefinite, and reciprocal. 

41. They relate to objects taken singly, and are each, 
either, and neither. 

J }\ 7^^ demonstrative pronouns point out objects 
definitely, while the indefinite relate to objects indefinitely 
Ihe demonstratives are this, these, that, those, same, former, 
Latter. Ihe indefinites are one, ones, o^/ier, others, any, some, 
such, all, both, and none. ' 

43 The same signification, and consequently are con- 
vertible, and may be used for each other. 

44. In speaking of two, either, neither and each other 
should be used ; but in speaking of more than two, one 
another. 

45. That should be applied to the more distant, the first 
mentioned, or the absent ; this, to the nearer, the last 
mentioned, or the present. 

46. Gender, person, number and case. 

4^7 When they are regarded as persons. Nouns thus 
used have gender hj personification. 

48. When the character of the object denotes size 
power, or domineering qualities; as, "The Sun seemed 



242 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

shorn of his beams." "Lo, steel-clad War his gorgeous 
standard rears."' 

49. When the character of the object is noted for 
beauty, amiability, productiveness, or submission, as 
" Soon Peace shall come with all her smiling train." The 
earth, moon, and ship, when personified, are given the 
feminine gender. 

50. By different words, different endings, and by a dis- 
tinguishing word; as, father, mother; emperor, empress; 
ma/i-servant, maid-servant. 

51. When they refer to a class of the same character, 
they are made plural by adding s when it does not coalesce 
in sound, otherwise es; as, the Cherokees; the Napoleons; 
the twelve Caesars. 

52. The names of substances, actions, states, qualities, 
arts, sciences, and diseases, w^hen they refer to the kind of 
thing; but when different kinds are meant they are plural; 
as, nine, wines, tea, teas; fever, fevers; religion, religions. 

53. When the whole collection is regarded as one thing,, 
it is singular,but plural when different collections are meant, 
or when it refers to the individuals composing the collection; 
as, army, armies; congregation, congregations; most people are 
eager to succeed. 

54. By adding s to the singular; but those ending in i, 
0, u, y, and preceded by a consonant, and s, x, z,sh, and soft 
ch, add es. 

55. It is the abbreviation of the old English ending es 
or is; the sign (') being called an apostrophe, because it in- 
dicates the omission of the e or i. 

56. By making plural that part described by the restj 
as, mouse-traps, cupfuls. 

57. Mr., Dr. and Miss are made plural by annexations; 
as, Messrs., Drs., Misses. When the title is Mrs., or when 
a numeral stands before the title, the title is made plural; 
as, the Mesdames Brown, the two Misses Smith. 

58. Most of them retain their foreign plural when used 
in the English 'language. 

59. When the ending is a, it is changed to % or ata, us 
is changed to i, um or on to a, is to es or ides, x, or ex to ces 
or cies. 

60. By annexing 's. 

61. To represent one person. 

62. A change of words, or a substitution of one gender, 
number, case, person, tense, mode, or voice of the same 
word, for another. 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 243 

63. The property of nouns and pronouns siiows their 
relation to other words. They are nominative, possessive, 
and objective. 

64. In the nominative when it is the subject of a verb; 
in the objective when it is tjhe object of a verb or preposi- 
tion ; and in the possessive when it denotes possession. 

65. By direct address. ^^ John, your father is here." 
By exclamation, " Alas, poor Yorick ! " By pleonasm or 
specification, "//e that hath ears, let him hear." 

66. By adding the apostrophe and s, except when the 
word ends in s, when the apostrophe only is added. 

67.^ By using of, or by making the possessive word an 
adjective. "The death of Socrates." "Soldiers' Home." 

68. When a verb joins the terms, one is predicated of 
the other ; as, " He is president ; " but when no verb joins 
them, the latter term is in apposition with the former ; as, 
" Webster, the orator." These terms must agree in case. 

69. It takes the possessive sign but once ; generally at 
the end, or next to the name of what is owned. " The 
cour^mar^^a^s decision." ''^Daniel "H^efes^er's oration." 

70. When it denotes the same person or thing. 

71. Only in the nominative and objective cases, and 
then they retain the same form. 

72. Nominative who, possessive w;/iose, objective whom; 
which and what have the same form in the nominative 
and objective, but borrow whose for their possessive. That 
is not declined. 

73. When it is a relative, and equivalent to that ichich. 

74. A regular arrangement of the grammatical proper- 
ties of a noun or pronoun. 

75. The is used to point out a particular one, object or 
class ; while a or an is used to show that no particular one 
of a class is meant. 

76. They have the same meaning, therefore, used in the 
same class. One is a later and the other an earlier form 
of the same word. 

77. Whenever the next word begins with a consonant 
sound. 

78. Whenever the next word begins with a vowel 
sound. 

79. A word used to qualify or limit the meaning of a 
noun or pronoun. 

80. Into two chief classes : descriptive and definitive. 
The descriptive describes or qualifies ; the definitive speci- 
fies or limits. 



244 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

81. Into common, proper, numeral, pronominal, par- 
ticipial, and compomid. 

82. The common adjective expresses quality. 

83. A proper adjective is derived from a proper name. 

84. A participle used as an adjective.^ 

85. A compound word used as an adjective. 

86. One that expresses number. 

87. Into cardinal, ordinal, multiplicative, and indefinite. 
The cardinals are one, two, etc.; the ordinals, first, second^ 
etc.; the multiplicative, single, double; the indefinite, Jew^ 
many. 

88. One sometimes used as a pronoun. 

89. The distributive, demonstrative, and indefinite. 

90. Number and comparison. 

91. A variation in the form of adjectives and adverbs 
to denote the different degree of meaning. There are three 
degrees, positive, comparative and superlative. 

92. To give a variation of the degree of expressions. 

93. The positive expresses the quality of the adjective; 
the comparative expresses the quality in a higher or lower 
degree; the superlative expresses the quality in the highest 
or lowest degree. 

94. Adjectives and adverbs. 

95. Usually by adding less and least. 

96. Usually with adjectives of more than two syllables, 
or those of two syllables that do not end in le or y. 

97. One expands in volume of expression, or grows 
greater in its comparison, while the other decreases with 
the prefixes less and least. 

98. When they have more than one form for its super- 
lative, as, near, nearer, nearest or next. 

99. The monosyllables are placed first, and all are com- 
pared by prefixing more and most; as, " The more nice and 
elegant parts." 

100. Yes, although the substantive is not always ex- 
pressed. 

101. When it is used abstractly, or in place of a noun 
of which it expresses quality; as, the briny deep, the good. 

102. A word used to state the act or state of the subject. 
A regular verb is one that forms its past tense by adding 
ed; an irregular verb does not add ed. 

103. The present tense, past tense, present participial, 
and perfect participial. 

104. By the means of these and the auxiliary verbs all 
the other parts of the verb can be formed. 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 245 

105. A redundant verb is one that has more than one 
formfor some ofiLs principal parts. A defective verb is 
wantmg m some of its principal parts. A finite verb predi- 
cates the actor state of its subject. 

106. The infinitives and participles. 

107. One that has orrequires an object. An intransitive 
does not have or require an object. 

108. When it is the chief design to set forth the act, and 
leave the object unknown. " She reads well." 

109. In poetical expressions, in a causative sense, and in 
idiomatic expressions; as, to march armies, I laughed myself 

110. One that does not express action or state. 

111. ^ A principal verb expresses the chief act or state. 
An auxdnary verb helps other verbs to express their gram- 
matical properties. 

112. They are called redundant because they have more 
than one form for some of the modes and tenses. 

113. Am or be, awake, bereave, bet, dig, dwell, lean, 
keep, hang, gild, kneel, hew, knit. 

1 14. Voice, mode, tense, person and number. 

115. Voice shows whether the subject does or receives 
the act. Mode is manner of assertion. Tense expresses 
time. 

116. The form of the verb to agree with the subject. 

117. In the active, when the subject acts, in the passive 
when it receives the act. 

118. By using the object of a verb for the subject. 

119. To transitive verbs only. 

120. Four: indicative, subjunctive, potential and im- 
perative. Some grammarians add the infinitive mode. 

121. The indicative indicates or declares a fact. The 
potential expresses power, possibility, liberty, inclination, 
duty and necessity. The subjunctive expresses a wish, an 
uncertainty, or future contingency. The imperative com- 
mands or entreats. 

122. The only difference is in the third person singular 
of two of the tenses, the present and the present-perfect. 

123. Six in the indicative; three in the subjunctive — 
the present, past, and past-perfect; the potential, four— the 
present, present-perfect, past, and past-perfect; the im- 
perative, one — the present tense. 

124. In the indicative mode have is the sign of the pres- 
ent-perfect tense; had the sign of the past-perfect; shall or 
will, of the future; shall have or will have, of the future per- 



246 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

feet; the present or past tense is a verb in its simplest form, 
expressing present or past time. The signs of the present 
potential are may, can, must; of the present-perfect, may 
have, can have, must have; of the past, might, could, would, 
should; of the past-perfect, might have, could hive, would have, 
should have. The three tenses of the subjunctive mode are 
the same in form as the indicative, except in the singular 
number of the present and past tense, which takes the 
plural form without variation. The imperative has the 
same form as the present indicative. 

125. The different ways in which it can be expressed ; 
as the common form, the emphatic, the progressive, the 
passive and solemn. 

126. It denotes emphasis, and is expressed by do or did, 
as a part of the verb. 

127. By combining the verb he, or some of its variations, 
with the perfect participle. The progressive form repre- 
sents the continuation of the act or state, and is formed by 
combining the verb he, or some of its variations, with the 
present participle. 

128. The old common form that is still used in the 
solemn style. It uses thou or ye, and has the ending t, st or 
est for the second person singular; th or eth for the third 
person singular. 

129. By placing the verb, or part of it, before the nomi- 
native. It is made negative by placing 7iot after the verb, 
or after the first auxiliary. 

130. The first person is preferred to the second, and the 
second to the third. You, John and I are attached to our 
country. If the nominatives are taken separately, or con- 
nected by or or nor, the verb prefers the nominative next 
to it. He or I am to blame. 

131. A verb having person and number without a sub- 
ject; as, methinks, meseems. 

132. Voice, mode, tense, person and number. 

133. Be and its variations — do, did; can, could; have 
had; may, might, must; shall, should; will and would. 

134. Be, or am, was, do and have. 

135. When required to express a duty, command, de- 
termination, resolve; and in future propositions when the 
subject is of the first person and no reference is made to 
the will of the subject. 

136. When the expression is of willingness, inclination 
or in future propositions, when the subject is of the second 
or third person, and no compulsion required. 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 247 

137. When not combined with any other verb expressed 
or understood. 

138. The object or complement of the transitive verb 
stands as an answer to the question what? or whom? with 
the verb. 

139. By asking the question what? or whom ? and if 
it will carry an answer relating to some particular thing 
it is transitive, but if it does not carry the subject to some 
termination it is intransitive. 

140. It implies three terms — a subject, a predicate and 
an object. 

141. It requires but two terms, a subject and a predi- 
cate. 

142. One used to assert a condition of a subject; as, 
sugar is sweet. It is an incomplete verb using an adjective, 
noun or pronoun relating to the subject, and is often called 
a neuter verb. 

143. It is to be and those belonging to this class, as, 
hecome, seem, appear, grow, feel, look, smell, taste, etc. 

144._ They imply in their meaning the verb to be; thus, 
become is really to come to be ; appear is to be in appear- 
ance. 

145. The form of the verb generally preceded by to, 
expressing an act or state without predicating it. There 
are two infinitives — the present and perfect. 

146. By combining to with the simplest form of the 
verb, or to be with a simple participle. 

147. By combining to have, or to have been, with a 
simple participle. ^ It represents the completion of the 
act or state at the time referred to. 

148. When the infinitive is combined with an auxil- 
iary or after the active verbs bid, dare, let, make, need, see, 
hear, feel, and sometimes after have, help, please and find. 

149. ^ A word derived from a verb, participating in the 
properties of a verb and adjective, and is generally formed 
by adding ing, d or ed to the verb. There are two partici- 
ples — the present and perfect. 

150. By annexing ing to the simplest form of the verb, 
and represents the act or state as present and continuing 
at the time referred to. 

151 . By annexing ed to the simplest form of the verb, 
and it represents the act or state as completed at the time 
referred to. 

152. The simple present participle of a transitive verb 
is nearly always in the active voice. The simple perfect 



248 THE QUESTION BOOK, 

participle of a transitive verb is either active or passive ; 
it is in the active voice wiien have or any of its forms is 
combined with it ; in the passive voice when it stands by 
itself, or when be in any of its forms is combined with it. 

153. Being, having, or having been, combined with some 
other participle. 

154. Being expresses the present passive participle; 
having expresses the perfect active participle; having been the 
perfect passive participle. 

155. They have voice and tense, are annexed to auxil- 
iary verbs, they partake of the nature of nouns, adjectives 
and adverbs, and when nouns they assume case. A parti- 
ciple may become an adjective, it may govern the possess- 
ive case, it may become concrete and assume number, it 
may be used after prepositions; but an infinitive has none 
of these attributes. 

156. The regular arrangement of the modes, tenses, per- 
sons and numbers, and participles of verbs. 

157. It is called its conjugation. 

158. The weak conjugation is the regular formation of 
the verb, as, move, moved. The strong conjugation is its 
irregular formation, as, grow, grew, with the past participle 
ending in n or en. 

159. The theme of the verb is that form which admits 
of the preposition to before it. It is the infinitive form of 
the verb. 

160. A word given as a model by which to inflect other 
words. 

161. To make a verb in grammar is to place a word in 
the position of a verb where it will carry the properties of 
an action. 

162. An outline of its parts through the modes and 
tenses, in a single person and number. 

163. Those which consist of auxiliaries combined with 
participles or infinitives. 

164. A word used to modify the meaning of a verb, ad- 
jective, or other adverb. The most of them are formed from 
adjectives by adding ly. 

165. A word used to perform the office of a conjunction 
and adverb at the same time. 

166. Into adverbs of time, place, degree and manner. 

167. An adverb expresses manner, or describes the act; 
an adjective describes the object. 

168. Adverbs of time answer to the questions : ivhen f 
How long ? How often ? Adverbs of place answer to the 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 249 

questions: Where f Whence? Adverbs of degree answer 
to the questions: How much? To ichat extent? In what 
degree? Adverbs of manner answer to the question: 

169. A word used to show the relation between a fol- 
lowino-* noun or pronoun and some other word. An ad- 
junct is a preposition with its objects and modifiers, and 
may relate to a substantive, verb, adjective or adverb. 

170. A noun, pronoun, infinitive, participial noun, and 
o clfLuse. 

171. When there is no word to govern; as, The eagle flew 
up, then around, then down again. 

172. A word used to connect words, phrases or propo- 
sitions'. A correlative connective is one of a separated pan- 
that connect the same parts. Neither this nor that. ^ 

173. Analysis is the resolving of the whole into its 
parts. Synthesis is the combining of the parts to form the 

whole. . , ., 

174. The resolving of a sentence into its parts, giving 

their properties and syntax. ^ 

175 The relation of words is their relation or connec- 
tion with one another; agreement is their similarity in per- 
son, number, gender, case, etc.; government is the power 
one word has over another. . 

176. A sentence is an assemblage of words making com- 
plete sense ; a clause is a proposition that makes but part 
of a sentence ; a proposition is a subject combined with 
its predicate ; a phrase is two or more words, but not an 
entire proposition. +i.^ ,•„ 

177 The declaratory expresses a declaration ; the in- 
terrogatory asks a question; the imperative expresses a 
command or entreaty ; the exclamatory expresses an excla- 

^^m ' A simple sentence has but one proposition ; a 
compound has two or more propositions; a complex has 
one principal clause, with one or more dependent clauses. 
179 The subject is that of which something is said ; 
the predicate is that which denotes what is said ot the 

^^ 180 ' The grammatical subject and predicate are the 
subject and predicate words ; the logical subject and predi- 
cate are these words with all their modifiers 

181 A train of thought expressed m language, and 
may be description, narration, science or philosophy. 

182 A sentence or combination of sentences, complet- 



250 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

ing a train of thought, and distinguished by a new begin- 
ning. 

183. Three relations : the predicate relation, the ad- 
jective relation, and the adverbial relation. 

184. Words, phrases and clauses. 

185. A subject and predicate. 

186. A dependent word, phrase or clause, used to limit 
or vary the meaning of some other word or expression, 
and may be an adjective or adverbial modifier. 

187. By an article, adjective, a possessive, an appo- 
sitive, a participle, an infinitive, phrases and clauses. 

188. By an object, a predicate adjective, an adverb, a 
participle, an infinitive, phrases and clauses. 

189. The infinitive takes only the modifiers of a verb ; 
the participle either those of a verb or noun. 

190. Articles, prepositions, conjunctions, and interjec- 
tions. 

191. Conjunctions, prepositions, relative pronouns, 
responsive pronouns, and the conjunctive adverbs. 

192. Simple, complex, compound, mixed, and prepo- 
sitional. 

193. The beginning ; the next most important is the end. 

194. When it is uppermost in the speaker's mind, or 
denotes what is most striking. " Out flew millions of flam- 
ing words." "5?/ these we acquired our liberty." 

195. A sentence so constructed that the meaning is sus- 
pended till the close. 

196. In the improper arrangement of words, in the use 
of improper words, in the omission of words, and the 
use of unnecessary words. 

197. A deviation from the ordinary form ; a construction 
or application of words,, for the sake of brevity, force, or 
beauty. 

198. They are the figures of orthography, of etymology, 
of syntax, and of rhetoric. 

199. It is an intentional deviation from the ordinary or 
true spelling of a word. 

200. It is an intentional deviation from the ordinary 
formation of a word. 

201. It is an intentional deviation from the ordinary 
construction of words. 

202. It is an intentional deviation from the ordinary 
application of words. 

203. They are eight : aphseresis, syncope, apocope, 
prosthesis, paragoge, tmesis, diaeresis, synseresis. 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 251 

204. The shortening of a word by taking a letter or 
syllable from the beginning; as, 'gainst, there's. Syncope 
is the shortening of a word by taking a letter or a syllable 
from the middle; as, red'ning for reddening. Apocope is 
the shortening of a word by taking a letter or syllable 
from the end; as, th' for the. Prosthesis is the lengthening 
of a word by prefixing a syllable. Paragoge is the length- 
ening of a word by annexing a syllable. Tmesis is the in- 
serting of a word between the parts of a compound; as, on 
which side soever. Diaeresis is the division of two concur- 
rent vowels into different syllables, usually marked thus, 
cooperate, aerial. Synseresis is the joining of two syllables 
into one, as, dost, loved, learned, for do-est, lov-ed, learn-ed. 

205. Ellipsis is the omission of words, and elision the 
omission of letters. Aposiopesis the leaving of something 
unsaid. Zeugma is the referring of a word to two different 
ones, when in strict syntax it can agree with only one of 
them. Pleonasm is the using of more words than the sense 
of syntax absolutely requires. 

206. A comparison expressed. A metaphor is a com- 
parison implied. " Life is an isthmus between two eterni- 
ties." An allegory is a fictitious story about one thing, 
which is designed to teach some moral or practical wisdom 
about another. Synecdoche is the name of a part applied 
to the whole, or that of the whole applied to a part. 

207. A contrast : "Virtue ennobles, vice debases." Irony 
is the sneering use of words with a contrary meaning. 
Paralipsis is the pretended omission or concealment of 
what is meant. " I will not call him a villain, for it would 
be unparliamentary." Hyperbole is exaggeration. 

208. A softened mode of speech for what would be dis- 
agreeable or offensive if told in the plainest language. An 
appeal in the form of a question to strengthen a statement. 
An abrupt mode of speech, designed to express more strong- 
ly the emotions of the speaker. 

209. The art of making verse. Verse is the musical ar- 
rangement of words, according to some regular accent. 

210. A foot is two or more syllables, constituting a 
portion of a line. 

211. The similarity of sounds between the endings of 
poetic lines. Blank verse is verse without rhyme. 

212. Two poetic lines that usually rhyme together. A 
stanza is a regular division of the poem, and consists of 
three or more poetic lines with complete rhymes. 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



LETTER WRITING, 



1. What five important things are to be considered in 
writing a letter ? 

2. Of what does the heading consist? 

3. What important things should be considered in 
giving the name of the place ? 

4. Of what does the date consist ? 

5. How should the heading be written ? 

6. How capitalize and punctuate the heading? 
(Properly write the heading for the following :) 

(n) Caldwell; Ap. 1887. 1. Box 41. Wis. 
(6) ann arbor 5 July 1820 michigan. 
(c) P box 2678 1860 oct 49 Chicago. 
Id) Saint nicholas New york 1 hotel nov 1855. 
(e) Philadelphia 670 1850 chestnut st 16 apr. 

7. Of what does the introduction consist? 

8. What are the common titles in use, and to whom 
shoul d they be applied ? 

9. What is the most approved form of addressmg the 
President? 

10. If two literary or professional titles are added to a 
name, in what order should they be written ? 

11. Name the order of some of these common titles. 

12. How address the salutations ? 

13. How commence the address of a letter? 

14. Where begin the salutation ? 

15. How punctuate the salutation ? 

16. Where commence the body of the letter ? 

17. How should business letters be composed? 



254 



THE QUESTION BOOK. 



18. What should be the character of official letters and 
formal notes. 

19. How draw the conclusion? 

20. What can be said about the signature? 

21. Where commence the first word of the conclusion? 

22. What is the superscription ? 

23. How address an envelope and stamp it ? 

EORM OF LETTER WRITING. 

Milwaukee, Wis., April 14, 1887. 

Wm. A. Gault, 

Caldwell, 

Wis: 

My Dear Sir : — Yours of the 
10th received. I am surprised to hear of the failure of 
Mr. B , and will meet you as requested at Mukwonago, on 
the 18th inst. 

Yours respectfully, 

JAMES GILMORE. 

FORM OF ENVELOPE. 



stamp. 



Mr. Wm. A. Gault^ 

Caldwell^ 



Wis, 



Racine Co, 



ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS 



ON 



LETTER WRITING. 



1. They are the Heading, the Introduction, the Body 
of the letter, the Conclusion, and the Superscription. 

2. It consists of the name of the place at which the let- 
ter is written, and the date. 

3. If in a city, the name of the street and door number 
of the residence should be given. If at a hotel, school, or 
well-known institution, the name should be given. If in a 
village, or country place, the post-office address, the name 
of county and state. 

4. The name of the month, the day of the month, and 
the year. 

5. Begin about an inch and a half from the top of the 
page, on the first ruled line of commercial note, a little to 
the left of the middle of the page. If the heading occupies 
more than one line, let each line begin a little farther to 
the right than the other. The day of the month, year, and 
door number are written in figures. 

6. Each important word begins with a capital letter, 
each item is set off by the comma, and the whole closes 
with a i3eriod. 

7. It consists of the name, the title, and the place of 
business or residence of the one addressed. 

8. The prefix Mr. should be applied to a man's name; 
Mefisrs. to the names of several gentlemen; Master to that of a 
young lad; Miss to a young lady; Mrs. to a married lady; 
Misses to those of several young ladies; Mesdames to several 
married or elderly ladies; Dr. to a physician ; i?ev. to a clergy- 
man, or Rev. Mr., if name is unknown; Rev. Dr. if he is a 
Doctor of Divinity, or Reu. can be placed before the name 
and D. D. after it; His Excellency to the name of the Presi- 



256 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

dent, Governor, or Embassador; Hon. to the name of a 
Cabinet Officer, a Member of Congress, a State Senator, 
Judge and M^or. 

9. To the President, Executive Mansion, Washington, D. C. 
The salutation would simply be, 3Ir. President. 

10. In the order in which they were conferred. 

11. A. M.,Ph. D., D. D., l.L. D. The- higher implies 
the lower, and great care should be taken to guard against 
an excessive use of these titles. 

12. They vary according to the station of the one ad- 
dressed, or the degree of intimacy with him. Strangers 
may be addressed as Sir., Rev. Sir, General, Madam, etc, 
acquaintances as Dear Sir, Dear Madam; friends, as My 
dear Sir, My dear Madam, My dear Jones; near relatives and 
dear friends, as My dear Wife, My dear Boy, Dearest Ellen, 
etc. 

13. Commence the address on the next line below the 
heading, at the left side of the page, and if it contains 
more than one line it should be spaced as in the heading. 
If the letter is of an official character or is written to a 
very intimate friend, the address may be placed at the 
bottom of the letter. 

14. It should begin a little to the right of the address, 
unless the address is written below. 

15. Every important word should begin with a capital 
letter, and the whole followed by a comma, or a comma and 
a dash, as, Dear Sir, — . 

1 6. If the introduction is long, begin the body of the 
letter on the same line with the salutation, or below the 
line if the introduction is short. 

17. They should be brief, and the sentences short, con- 
cise, and to the point. Repeat nothing, and omit nothing 
needful. 

18. They should be more stately and ceremonious. In 
formal notes the third person is generally used instead of 
the first and the second, and there is no introduction, no 
conclusion, no signature: 

Mr. & Mrs. F. 

request the pleasure of Mr. K^s company 

at a social gathering 

on 

Tuesday evening. May 17th, 

at 8 o^clock. 

25 Kimball Ave., May 5th. 



LETTER WRITING. 257 

(Ans.) Mr. K. 

accepts with pleasure 
Mr. dc Mrs. F.^s kind invitation for 
Tuesday evening, May 1 7th. 
Monday morning, May 9th. 

19. The conclusion consists of the complimentary 
close, and the signature. The forms are many and varied 
accordmg to the relations of the writer to the one addressed' 
In letters of friendship use, Your sincere friend, Yours affec- 
tionately Your loving son or daughter, etc. In business letters 
Yours^ Yours truly. Yours respectfully. Very respectfully yours. 
In oihcial letters, //iwe the honor to he, Sir, your obedient 
servant; Very respectfully. Your most obedient servant, etc. 

20. It should consist of the christian name and sur- 
name. In addressing a stranger write the christian name 
in lull. A lady addressing a stranger should prefix to her 
signature her title, Mrs. or Miss, placing it within the marks 
ot parenthesis, as, (Miss), unless in her writing she has 
indicated which of these titles her correspondent is to use 
m reply. 

21. It should commence near the middle of the first 
line below the body of the letter and spaced according to 
the number of lines occupied, hke the heading and address. 

22. It IS the address on the envelope. 

23. The address should begin just below the middle of 
the envelope and near 1 he left edge. The spacing should 
slope to the right as in the heading and the last line near 
the lower right-hand corner. The name and title should 
occupy the first line ; if in a city, the door-number 
and name of street should be on the second line, the name 
ot the city on the third, and the name of the State on the 
lourth. In the country the name of the county may be 
written below the post-office address, or in the lower left- 
hand corner. ^ Every line should end with a comma except 
the last, which should be followed by a period. Care 
should be taken to write plainly and in a straight line. 
I he stamp should be placed in the upper right-hand corner. 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



ORTHOGRAPHY, ORTHOEPY 
AND PHONOLOGY. 



1. What is Orthography? 

2. Define Orthoepy. 

3. What is Phonology ? 

4. What is sound ? How are sounds classified ? 

5. What are tones ? What are noises ? 

6. What is a letter? 

7. What are elementary sounds ? 

8. How many elementary sounds in the English lan- 
guage ? How divided ? 

9. Are all of these elementary sounds distinct and true 
elements of our language ? 

10. How many true elements in our language ? 

11. How are these sounds produced ? 

12. What are the organs of speech ? 

13. How is voice produced? 

14. What are the organs of voice ? 

15. What is the difference between voice and speech ? 

16. Describe the organs of voice separately. 

17. What are the vocal chords ? 

1 8. What is the glottis ? The epiglottis ? What is in- 
spiration, or inhalation ? What is expiration ? 

19. What peculiar formation has the tongue? 

20. Describe the palate. The nasal passages. 

21. What connection has the ear with the production 
of voice ? 

22. How is speech produced ? 

259 



260 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

23. How are the letters divided ? 

24. What are vowels ? Consonants ? 

25. How are the consonants divided ? 

26. What is a mute? Name them. 

27. W^hat is a semivowel ? Name them. 

28. What divisions are formed from the semivowels ? 

29. What are the sub vocals ? Which of the elementary- 
sounds are represented by them ? 

30. What are aspirates ? What sounds do they rep- 
resent ? 

31. Name the combinations of the consonants. 

32. In the formation of the consonant sounds, how 
many classes are given them ? 

33. How are the labials formed ? Name them. 

34. How are the dentals made ? Name them. 

35. What are the Unguals ? How many ? 

36. How many palatals, and how made ? 

37. Why is the letter h not included in these divisions ? 

38. What are cognates? 

39. How do we analyze words ? 

40. How is th aspirate distinguished from th sub- 
vocal ? 

[The following table exhibits the properties of the consonants, and should, 
be committed to memory for use in analyzing words.] 

6 is a consonant, mute, labial, subvocal. 

d( is a consonant, mute, lingual, subvocal. 

/ is a consonant, semivowel, labial, aspirate. 

g hard is a consonant, mute, palatal, subvocal. 

^ is a consonant, semivowel, aspirate. 

j is a consonant, semivowel, dental, subvocal. 

h, g, and c hard, consonant, mute, palatal, aspirate. 

1 is a consonant, semivowel, lingual, subvocal. 
m is a consonant, semivowel, labial, subvocal. 
71 is a consonant, semivowel, lingual, subvocal. 
p is a consonant, mute, labial, aspirate. 

r is a consonant, semivowel, lingual, subvocal. 

s and c soft, consonant, semivowel, dental, aspirate. 

i is a consonant, mute, lingual, aspirate. 

V is Si consonant, semivowel, labial, subvocal. 

ly is a consonant, semivowel, labial, subvocal. 

2/ is a consonant, semivowel, lingual, subvocal. 

2 is a consonant, semivowel, dental, subvocal. 
</i is a consonant, semivowel, lingual, aspirate. 
th is a consonant, semivowel, lingual, subvocal. 



^. ORTHOGRAPHY, ORTHOEPY AND PHONOLOGY. 261 

ch is a consonant, semivowel, dental, aspirate. 
sh is a consonant, semivowel, dental aspirate 
zh IS a consonant, semivowel, dental, subvocal 
wh is a consonant, semivowel, labial, aspirate. 
ng is a consonant, semivowel, palatal, subvocal. 

[In analyzing words, the properties of the letters given in the tahl*^ ahnv« 
T^etXi^^A'^^Ll?.^^^^^^^^ '- whatever^word it'^rS^Tl'^ l^^l 

wordTf ^^^^°^^^^° i^ ^^ approved plan for analyzing the letters of any 

Shrine— Monosyllable, 
sh— cons., semi den., aspr., antecedent to its vowel i 
r— cons, semi., Img., sbv., antecedent to its vowel i 
1 — vowel, long som.d. 

n— cons semi., ling., sbv., consequent to its vowel i. 
e — vowel, silent. 

Veil— M onosy liable. 
V— cons., semi, lab., sbv., antecedent to its digraph ei 
ei— digraph, substitute for long a. ^ f ■ 

1— cons., semi, ling sbv., consequent to its digraph ei. 

Phrensy— Dissyllable. ^ 

ph-subs.for/, cons., semi., lab., aspr., antecedent to its 

vowel e. 
r— cons, semi., ling., sbv., antecedent to its vowel e 
e — vowel, short sound. 

n— cons., semi., Img., sbv., consequent to its vowel e 
s— subs, for 2, cons., semi., dent., sbv., antecedent to its 

vowel y. 
y— vowel, substitute for i, short sound. 

Machine— Dissyllable, 
m— cons semi., lab., sbv., antecedent to its vowel a 
a — vowel, long sound. 

ch— subs, for sA, cons., semi., den., aspr., antecedent to its 

vowel I. 
i — vowel, subs for e, long sound, 
n— cons., semi., ling,, sbv., consequent to its vowel i 
e — vowel, silent. 

Echo — Dissyllable. 
e — vowel, short sound. 
G\i-^nh^^^iork, cons., mute., pal., aspr., consequent to its 

o — vowel, long sound. 

Rose — Monosyllable, 
r— cons., semi., ling., sbv., antecedent to its vowel o. 



2B2 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

o — ^vowel, long sound. 

s — cons., semi , dent., aspr., consequent to its vowel o. 

e — vowel, silent. 

Kepjjblican — Polysyllable, 
r — cons., semi., ling., sbv., antecedent to its vowel e. 
e — vowel, long sound. 

p — cons., mute, labial, aspr., antecedent to its vowel u. 
u — vowel, short sound. 

b — cons., mute, labial, sbv., consequent to its vowel w. 
1- — cons., semi., ling., sbv., antecedent to its vowel i. 
i — vowel, short sound, 
c — subs, for A;, cons., mute, pal., aspr., antecedent to its 

vowel a. 
a — ^vowel, short sound. 
n — cons., semi., ling., sbv., consequent to its vowei a. 

The plan of the above example should be carefully ex- 
amined, and the table on page 260 should be studied so 
thoroughly, that the properties of all the consonants can 
be given without any hesitation. A little practice is 
required, after which any word can be analyzed readily. 

The following are test words for analyzing : People, 
guard, jewel, avoirdupois, due, grammar, contradictory, 
nephew, phosphorus, arduous, was, alien, quartz, century, 
lungs, wrangle, ascension, special, free, buy, ride, chuck, 
debt, sovereign, rhetoric, rhinoceros, column, calf, isle, 
knife, weight, neigh, daisy. 

For further practice let the student take any exercise in 
the spelling book, or any sentence which he may see or 
think of. 

41. How are the elementary sounds divided ? 

42. How many sounds have each of the vowels ? 

43. According to this classification of elementary 
sounds, how many letters would be required to form a full 
alphabet ? 

44. How is this deficiency filled ? 

45. What names are given to the symbols which rep- 
resent the different sounds ? 

46. Of all the elementary sounds, which represent the 
purest product of the human voice ? 

47. What can be said of all other vocals and sub- 
vocals ? 

48. What is a diphthong ? 

49. How many diphthongs are there ? 

50. How many sounds are represented b}^ these diph-* 
thongs ? '^ 



ORTHOGRAPHY, ORTHOEPY AND PHONOLOGY. 263 

51. What is a digraph? Triphthong? 

52. What are the elem ents of which orthoepy treats ? 

53. What is a syllable ? 

54. What is a word ? 

55. What are the words of one, two, three, four or more 
syllables c.vlled ? 

56. What is essential in every syllable ? 

57. By what is the principal sound in every syllable 
produced? 

58. To what does every consonant belong ? 

59. When is a consonant antecedent or consequent to 
a vowel? 

60. What is syllabication ? 

61. What is the guide for arranging words into sylla- 
bles? 

62. How may words be divided at the ends of the 
lines ? 

63. Why are words divided into syllables ? 

64. When is the hyphen used ? 

65. When two vowels come together, how are they dis- 
posed of in syllabication ? 

66. When is one letter a substitute for another ? 

67. What properties does a substituted letter assume ? 

68. Which letters have no substitutes ? 

The following table contains a list of the substitutes of 
the elementary sounds : 

A long has two substitutes : ei and ey, as in weight and 
they. 

A short has no substitutes. 

A circumflex has one substitute : e, as in there. 

A broad has one substitute: o, as in for. 

E long has one substitute-: i, as in machine. 

E short has two substitutes : a and m, as in says snidbury. 

I long has one substitute : y long, as in rhyme. 

I short has four substitutes : y, e, u, and o, as in hymn, 
England^ busy, and ivomen. 

long has two substitutes : eau and ew, as in beau and 
sew. 

short has one substitute : a, as in what. 

U long has one substitute : ew, as in new. 

U short has three substitutes : e, i, and o, as in her, stir, 
and son. 

Ucircumflez has one substitute: o, as in ivolf and wool. 

F has two substitutes : ph and gh, as in philosophy and 
rough. 



264 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

G has a part of a substitute : as x in exist. 

J has two substitutes besides g soft : di and (i, as in sol- 
dier and verdure. 

^ has two substitutes besides c hard and half of x: ch 
and gh, as echo and lough. 

S has two substitutes : c soft, z, as in ceiiter and quartz. 

T has one substitute : ed final after any aspirate except 
as in mixed. 

Fhas one substitute : /, in the word of. 

W has one substitute : u, as in quake. 

Y has one substitute : ^, as in alien. 

Z has three substitutes : s, c, and x, as in ?i'as, suffice, and 

C/i has two substitutes : ti and ^, as in question and nature^ 

Sh has a large number of substitutes of which the fol- 
lowing are the principal ones : ce, ci, si, ti, ch, and s, as in 
ocean, social, tnansion, nation, chaise, and sugar. 

Zh is represented by si, zi, and z and s before u, as in 
fusion, glazier, azure, razure. 

Ng has one substitute : n generally before the palatals, 
as in thank, uncle, finger, conquer, etc. 

Students should become familiar with the table above, for 
in it is a compilation of useful information in regard to the 
power of letters. 

69. When is i a consonant ? 

70. Is u ever a consonant ? 

71. When is g a vowel? Is i^ ever a vowel ? 

72. What is the use of silent letters ? 

73. Which letters are never silent? 

74. Which letters have no sound of their own ? 

RULES FOR SILENT LETTERS. 

A rule for silent letters is formed when a letter is always, 
or usually, silent in similar situations. 

75. When is e final silent ? 

76. What would be the result if e final was not silent ? 

77. When is 6 silent? 

78. When is c silent? 

79. When is d silent? 

80. When is ^silent? 

81. When is /i silent? 

82. When is k silent ? 

83. When is I silent? 

84. When is 91 silent? 



ORTHOGRAPHY, ORTHOEPY AND PHONOLOGY. 265 

85. When is p silent? 

86. When is t silent? 

87. When is lo silent ? 

88. When is (//i silent? 

89. In what words is ch silent ? 

90. In what words is s silent ? 

91. Is 771 ever silent? 

92. In how many ways are words designated ? 

93. What is a simple word ? • Compound ? 

94. What is a primitive word ? 

95. What is a derivative word ? 

96. What is a prefix ? Suffix? Root? 

97. Under what circumstances is a word primitive 
which is formed by the addition of prefixes or suffixes ? 

98. Give the general rules for spelling ? 

99. After ascertaining the syllabicalion of a word what 
is next to be observed ? 

100. When two accents occur in the same word which 
usually precedes the other ? 

101. Do w^ords ever have more than two accents ? 

102. What is the rule for accent of a word of two 
syllables ? 

103. What applies to compound words ? 

104. What is the rule where words change their parts 
of speech from verbs to nouns or adjectives ? 

105. Where is the accent when words end in sion or 
tion ? 

106. Words ending in ical or acal^ place the accent on 
what syllable ? 

107. What is ?i final letter ? 

108. What is the power of a letter ? 

109. What does the difference of accent sometimes 
serve to do ? 

110. Name and define the kinds of spelling. 

111. What is phonetic spelling? 



ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS 



ON 



ORTHOGRAPHY, ORTHOEPY 
AND PHONOLOGY. 



1. It treats of correct spelling, and the nature and 
power of letters. 

2. The art of a correct pronunciation of words. 

3. The science of uttering the elementary sounds. 

4. The sensation produced upon the auditory nerve 
hy vibration of the air or other conducting media. They 
are classified as tones and noises. 

5. Tones are harmonious sounds which are pleasing 
to the ear. Noise is a sound without any regularity of 
production and is devoid of the harmony of tones. 

6. A character used to represent an elementary sound. 

7. Distinct sounds, from which all of the words of 
our language are formed. 

8. Forty-five*. They are divided into three classes : 
vowels, subvocals, and aspirates. 

9. They are not true and distinct, as many of them are 
similarly formed, but they are as near the requirements 
of a pure articulation as Phonetists have been able to 
devise. 

10. On this question Phonetists have not united on any 
definite satisfaction, as this science is capable of being so 
minutely construed that only experts can detect the varia- 
tion. Webster gives fortj^-five. 

11. By the organs of speech, with the breath. 

12. The principal ones are the lips, teeth, tongue, palate 
and nasal passages. 

* Some authors give 43, some 41, and divide them into tonics, subtonics, and 
atonies. 

26T 



268 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

13. By the action of the breath on the larynx. 

14. They are the lungs, diaphragm, intercostal muscles, 
bronchi and trachea, larynx and pharynx. 

15. Voice is tone produced by the action of the breath 
on the larynx, while speech is the modulation of the voice 
to express thought, and may be given in a whisper. 

16. For description of the organs of voice see question 
on Physiology. 

17. They are the special vocal apparatus, and consist of 
two ligaments or bands of fibrous tissue situated within 
the larjmx. 

18. For definition see Physiology. 

19. It consists of a mass of muscular fibers so arranged 
as to admit of motion in every direction or several 
directions at once. 

20. The palate is the roof of the mouth continuing 
backward, where it becomes a yielding, muscular mem- 
braneous awning, separating the mouth from the nasal 
passages and the upper part of the pharynx. 

21. The ear receives the productions of the voice and 
by the communication of the auditory nerves with the 
brain it is understood. 

22. By the action of the diaphragm and other muscles 
the breath is forced from the lungs through the bronchi 
and trachea into the larynx, where it comes into contact 
with the vocal chords, which being called into action, pro- 
duce a vibration and by the resonating of the pharynx 
and other cavities, is communicated to the external air, 
and at length falls as a tone upon the listening ear. 

23. Into vowels and consonants. 

24. Vowels are letters that denote pure tones ; conso- 
nants are letters that represent the subvocal or aspirate 
sounds. 

25. They have three divisions formed from the whole : 
as single letters and combinations ; mutes and semivowels; 
sub vocals and aspirates. 

26. A letter which admits of no escape of breath 
while the organs of speech are in contact. The mutes are 
6, p, d, f, k, c and g hard. 

27. A letter which, in pronouncing, admits of an escape 
of breath. The semivowels are all the consonants except 
the mutes.* 

* The difference between the mutes and semivowels, is that the organs of 
speech are more closely imited in pronouncing the mntes than the semivowels. 



ORTHOGRAPHY, ORTHOEPY AND PHONOLOGY. 269 

28. Four of the semivowels, I, «i, n, r, are called liquids 
because of their soft sound, which easily unites with the 
sounds of other letters ; two of them, m and n, and one 
of the combinations, ng, are called nasals ; s and z are 
called sibilants, or hissing letters. These properties called 
liquids, nasals and sibilants, are not essential in analyzing 
words. 

29. Those consonants which produce an undertone of 
voice when their sounds are uttered. The subvocals are 
6, c?, g, j, I, m, 91, r, v, iv, y, z, th, zh, and ng. 

30. The aspirates are mere whispers made by the or- 
gans of speech and breath, and are c,f, h, k, p, s, U ^j th, ch, 
sh, and ich. 

31. They are th aspimte, th sub vocal, ch, sh, zh, v)h, 
and ng. :^'- 

32. Four : labials, dentals, Unguals, and palatals. 

33. They are made by the lips, and are b,f, m, p, v, w, 
and luh. The lips are assisted by the teeth in making the 
sounds of/ and v. 

34. The}^ are made through the teeth, and are j, s, z, 
ch, sh, zh, and c and g soft. 

35. They are made by the tongue, and are d, I, n, r, t, 
y, th aspirate, and ih subvocal. 

36. They are made by the palate, and are k, q, x, ng, 
and c and g hard. 

37. As the sound is formed by emitting the breath sud- 
denly with all the organs open, it does not properly belong 
to these divisions, as the organs of speech are not brought 
into action. 

38. Letters whose elements are produced by the same 
organs in a similar manner, as / and v. The aspirates 
(except h) are all cognates of some of the subvocals. 

39. Take each letter separately, state whether it is a 
vowel or consonant; if a vowel, what sound; if a consonant, 
give its divisions. 

40. To distinguish th subvocal from th aspirate, a dash 
is placed beneath the subvocal. 

41. There are twenty vowel sounds, fifteen subvocals, 
and ten aspirates. 

42. There are forty-five elementary sounds, represented 
as follows : 



270 



THE QUESTION BOOK. 



20 

vowel 
sounds 



a, a, a, a, a, ^, as in ale, add, air, arm, ark, all. 

e, e, e, as in eve, end, verge. 

i, 1, as in ice, ill. 

o, o, as in old, odd. 

oo, oo, as in moon, wool. 

u, u, u, as in use, up, urge. 



oi, as in oil. 

Sub VOCALS : 
b, d, g, j, 1, as in bet, dot, get, jet, lid. 
25 m, n, n, r, i/i,as in mit, not, finger, rat, that, 

conso- j V, w, y, z, zh, as in vat, woe, yet, buzz, azure, 
nant | Aspirates : 
sounds p, t, k, h, as in pet, tin, kit, hat. 

ch, th, f, wh, as in chin^ithin, fat, when. 
s, sh, as in sin, shot. 

43. It would require forty -five. 

44. By giving to some letters more than one sound. 
These sounds are represented by marks or symbols. 

45. r The Macron - 
The Breve ^ 

Vowel J The Circumflex ^^ 
marks. ] The Tilde, or Wave "^ 

Two Dots " 

One Dot • 

The Bar _ 

The Dotted Bar .^ 

The Cedilla , 

46. Italian a, as in ah. 

47. All others are considered modifications of this 
tone, as they require some portion of it. 

48. A union of two vowel sounds in the same syllable. 

49. Four : ou, ow, oi, oy. 

50. Two: ou and ow represent the same sound, and are 
called inseparable diphthongs, because they cannot be sep- 
arated into two distinct vowel sounds; oi and oy represent 
one sound, and are called separable diphthnngs,hecsi\ise their 
sounds can be separated into broad a and short i. 

To test the separable diphthongs, spell by sound the 
words oil and boy, using broad a and short i in each, and 
pronounce in quick succession. 

51. A digraph is the union of two vowels in the same 
syllable, one of which is silent. A triphthong is the union 



Consonant 
marks. 



ORTHOGRAPHY, ORTHOEPY AND PHONOLOGY. 271 

of three vowels in the same syllable, two of which are silent. 

52. Articulation, syllabication, and accent. 

53. A letter or combination of letters, uttered by one 
emission of the voice. 

54. A syllable or combination of syllables representing 
some thought or idea. 

55. Monosyllables, dissyllables, trisyllables, and poly- 
syllables. 

56. A vowel. 

57. By the vowel, except in unaccented syllables with 
e as the vowel sound. 

This may be observed in the careless manner in which 
many pupils spell such words as iahle^ label, center, etc. In 
these words the vowel is not as distinct as the consonant 
sounds. 

58. Unless it is silent, every consonant in a word be- 
longs to some vowel or diphthong. 

59. When it precedes the vowel in the same syllable, it 
is antecedent to it; when it follows in the same syllable, it 
is consequent to it. 

60. Dividing words into syllables. 

61. They must be arranged exactly as they are heard 
in correct pronunciation. 

62. Between the syllables. 

63. To assist in the pronunciation of words. 

64. Between compound words when first formed or 
when little used; between syllables and the ends of lines; 
and between syllables for the purpose of instruction. 

65. Unless it should be a diphthong, two syllables must 
be formed, or they may be used together with one vowel 
silent. 

66. When it has the sound that another letter usually 
represents. 

67 . Th ose of the letter which it represents . 

68. By d, g, h, I, m, n, p, r, th, and wh. 

69. When it begins a syllable and is immediately fol- 
lowed by a vowel sound ; as in alien. 

70. \Vlien it is preceded by g or s, and immediately fol- 
lowed by a vowel sound, it is a consonant and a substitute 
for w, as in language. 

71. When it represents the sound of i. Formerly lo 
was called a vowel when it represented the sound of u, but 
as it cannot form a syllable either alone or in connection 
with consonants, as all the other vowels do, it is proper to 
deny it the name of a vowel. 



272 THE QUESTION BOOK, 

72. To modify the sounds of other letters. 

73. F,j,q,rx,v,z. 

74. C, X, and q. 

75. When another vowel precedes it in the same sylla- 
ble; as in made, grape, ice, bride. 

76. Two syllables would be formed for one. 

77. Before t or after m in the same syllable; as in comb, 
tomb, debt, subtle. 

78. Before k in the same syllable; as in back, rack, luck. 
It is also silent in czar, indict muscle, victuals, and a few others. 

79. Before gr in the same syllable; as in bridge, pledge. 

80. Before m or 7i in the same syllable; as in phlegm, 
gnat, malign, design. 

81. After ^ or r in the same syllable; as in ghost, rhyme, 
rheumatism; when it is final, following a vowel-, as in oh, ah, 
Jehovah; when it is initial it is silent in a few words, as in 
herb, heir, honcf^t, hour; in asthma, phthisis, isthmus, Thomas, 
Thames, it follows t and is silent. 

82. Before n in the same syllable; as in knife, knee. 

83. After a when followed by /, m, k, or v, in the same 
syllable (except valve); as in folks, half^ palm, stalk, salve. 
L is also silent in could, would, and should. 

84. After I and m; as in kiln, solemn. 

85. When it is initial and before n, s, or t; as in psalm, 
pneumonia, psalter. 

86. Before ch in the same syllable; as in notch, latch. 
It is also silent in Christmas, eclat, mortgage, and a few 
others. 

87. Before r in the same syllable; as in wrap, wreck. 
In whole, sword, whoop, answer and two it is silent. 

88. After i in the same syllable; as in fright, neigh; 
after au and ow, as in aught, ought, bought, slaughter, and 
through. 

89. In yacht, schism, and drachm. 

90. In corps, isle, island, puisne, viscount, and belles- 
lettres. 

91. In the word mnemonic or mnemonics. 

92. In two ways: first, as simple or compound; second, 
as primitive or derivative. 

93. One that is not composed of two or more whole 
words; a compound word is composed of two or more sim- 
ple ones. 

9 1. One that is derived from no other word. 
95. One formed from a primitive by means of prefixes 
or suffixes. 



ORTHOGRAPHY, ORTHOEPY AND PHONOLOGY. 273 

96. A letter or letters joined to the beginning of a word- 
is called a prefix; when added to the end of a word, a 
suffix; and the root is the chief word without prefix or 
suffix. 

97. Whenever the meaning of the word is radically 
changed by the addition of prefixes or suffixes; as in re- 
proof, in which the meaning of neither re or proof is 
retained. 

In forming derivatives by means of suffixes, something 
more is required than merely to write the parts together as 
one word. Thus, if we desire to affix the suffix ed to the 
word suffer, we have only to unite, without change, the suf- 
fix with the radical; as suffered. If we take prefer, a change 
must be made by doubling the final letter r; as preferred. 
This and other changes of like nature are made, for the 
most part, in strict accordance with known rules. These 
rules should be committed to memory by repeated illustra- 
tions in order to fully understand when and how to apply 
them. 

98. RULES FOR SPELLING. 

Rule I. — The final e of a radical word is rejected when 
the suffix commences with a vowel, except words ending 
in ce or ge. Moving, salable, pleasure, peaceable, coura- 
geous. 

Rule II. — The finale of a radical word is generally re- 
tained when the suffix commences with a consonant; as, 
hopeless, movement. 

In abridge, acknowledge, argue, awe, due, judge, lodge, 
true, and whole, silent e is not retained. » 

Rule III. — Monosyllables and words accented on the 
last syllable, when they end with a single consonant, pre- 
ceded by a single vowel, double their final consonants 
before a suffix that begins with a vowel; as, baggage, spotted, 
beginner. 

Rule IV. — The final consonant, when not preceded by 
a single vowel, or when the word is not accented on the 
last syllable, remains single upon the addition of a suffix; 
as, spoiling, suffered, toiling, visiting. 

Rule V. — The final y of a radical word, when preceded 
by a consonant, is generally changed into i upon the addi- 
tion of a suffix; as happmess, trml, stor^ed. In a few 
instances y is changed into e before ous and its compounds; 
as, beauteous, beauteously. 

Rule VI. — The final -i of a radical word is omitted when 
the suffix begins with i; as, alkali, alkalize. 



274 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

Rule VII. — The final y of a radical word when preceded 
by a vowel, or when the suffix begins with i, remains un- 
changed; as, buyer, glorying. 

Rule VIII. — Words ending inforfe, commonly change 
/into V, when a suffix is added beginning with a vowel; as, 
wives, mischievous. 

Rule IX. — Words ending in le, preceded by a consonant, 
drop these letters upon receiving the suffix ly; as, ably, 
idly. 

Rule X. — Words ending in 6Ze, before the suffixes iiy and 

ities, take i between the letters b and I; as, ability, abdities. 

Rule XI. — Words ending in/r or or often drop the e or 

before a suffix commencing with a vowel; as, victrix, 

wondrous. 

Rule XII. — Monosyllables ending in/, I or s, jDreceded 
by a single vowel, double the final consonant; as staff y 
spell^ mill — except */, of, as, gas, has, was, yes, is, his, this, us, thus. 
Rule XIII. — Words ending in any other consonants than 
/, I or s, do not double the final letter — except add, odd, ebb, 
egg, inn, err, bunn, purr, butt, buzz, fuzz. 

The following is a list of prefixes, with their signifi- 
cations : 

A signifies on, in, at, to; as, abroad, abed, avert. 
AB signifies from; as, absolve, to free from. 
AD, AC, AF, AG, AL, AN, AP, AR, AT, signify to; as, adjoin; 
to join to. 

Accredit, to give credit to. 
Affix, to fix to. 
Agglutinate, sticking to. 
'Allure, entice to. 
Annex, join to. 
Append, hang to. 
Arrange, range to. 
Attune, tune to. 
ALL, AL, signify wholly; as, all-just, wholly just. 
Already, wholly, or completely ready. 
All, when not separated from the radical by a hyphen, 
rejects one I. 
ANTi, ANT, signify against; as antipathy, a feeHng against. 

Antarctic, opposite to the arctic. 
ANTE signifies before; as, antecedent, going before. 
BE signifies near; as, beside, near, or by the side of. 
Bi signifies two; as, bifold, twofold. 
ciRcuM signifies around; as, circumnavigate, to sail 
around. 



ORTHOGRAPHY^ ORTHOEPY AND PHONOLOGY. 275 

CON, COM, CO, COL, COR, signify with; as, conjoin, to join 

with. 

Commix, to mix with. 

Coequal, equal with. 

Collect, to place with or together. 

Correllative, relating with. 
CONTRA, COUNTER, signify opposite; as, 

Contradance, a dance opposite. 

Counterview, a view opposite. 
DE signifies from; as, depart, to depart from. 
DEMI signifies half; as, demi-wolf, half- wolf. 
DiA signifies through; as, diameter, the measure through. 
Di, Dis, signify two; as, 

Ditone, an interval of two tones. 

Dissyllable, a word of two syllables. 
Dis also signifies not or un; as, dissimilar, not similar, 

disband, unhand. 
E, EX, EC, EF, signify out; as. 

Emigrate, to move out. 

Export, to carry out of port. 

Eccentric, out of, or deviating from the center. 

Effluent, flowing out. 
EXTRA signifies beyond; as, extravagant, going beyond. 
EQUi signifies equal; as, equidistance, at an equal dis- 
tance. 
EN, EM, signify in; as, 

Enclose, to close in. 

Embroil, to put in a broil or tumult. 
EU signifies well or agreeable; as, euphony, agreeable 

sound. 
HEX signifies six; as, hexangular, six angles. 
HYPER signifies over; as, hypercritical, over-critical. 
IN, IM, IG, IL, IR, signify not or in; as. 

Incomplete, not complete. 

Imprudent, not prudent. 

Illegible, that can not be read. 

Ignoble, not noble. 

Irregular, not regular. 
INTRO signifies within ; as, introspection, looking within. 
INTER signifies between ; as, intervene, to come between. 
JUXTA signifies next ; as, juxtaposition, placed next. 
MAL signifies bad ; as, malpractice, bad practice. 
MI3 signifies wrong ; as, misguide, to guide wrong. 
MONO signifies one ; as, monosyllable, one syllable. 
MULTi signifies many ; as, multiform, having many forms. 



276 THE QUESTION BOOK.* 

NON signifies not ; as, non essential, not essential. 
OCT signifies eight ; as, octangular, eight-angled. 
OMNI signifies all ; as, omnipotent, all powerful. 
OUT signifies beyond ; as, outrun, to run be3^ond. 
OVER signifies above ; as, overshoot, to shoot over, 
ovi signifies an egg ; as, oviform, egg-shaped. 
PER signifies by ; as, perchance, by chance. 
PERI signifies around; as, perimeter, the measure around. 
PAR, PARA, signify from; as, parody, an ode or songwhicli 

is an alteration from another. 

parasol, a small canopy to shield from the sun. 
PEN signifies almost ; as, peninsula, almost an island. 
PLENi signifies full ; as, plenipotent, full of power. 
POLY signifies many ; as, polly syllable, many syllables. 
POST signifies after ; as postpone, to place after or put off. 
PRE signifies before ; as,^rejudge, to judge beforehand. 
PRETER signifies beyond ; as, preternatural, beyond the 

natural. 
PRO signifies for ; as, pronoun, for a noun. 
PROTO signifies first ; as; protomartyr, the first martyr. 
QUAD signifies four ; as, quadrangle, four-angled. 
RE signifies again ; as, review, to view- again. 
RECT, RECTI, signify right or straight ; as, 

rectangle, right angle. 

rectilinear, straight-lined. 
RETRO signifies back ; as, retrograde, to go backwards. 
SEMI, DEMI, HEMi, signify half, as, 

semicircle, half a circle. 

demitone, half a tone. 

hemisphere, half a sphere. 
STEREO signifies solid ; as, stereotype, solid type. 
SUB, sue, SUE, suG, SUP, SUBTER, signify under ; as, 

subcommittee, under committee. 

succeed, to follow after. 

suffix, to fix after. 

suggest, to put under notice. 

suppress, to press under. 

subterfluous, flowing under. 
SUPER, suR, signify over or niore ; as, 

superhuman, more than human. 

surcharge, overcharge, 
sus signifies up ; as, sustain, to hold up. 
SE signifies apart ; as, secede, to go apart. 
SINE signifies without ; as, sine die, without a day. 
SYM signifies with ; as, sympathy, with feeling. 



ORTHOGRAPHY, ORTHOEPY AND PHONOLOGY. 277 

TRANS signifies across ; as, transatlantic, across the At- 
lantic. 

ULTRA signifies beyond ; as, ultramontane, beyond the 
mountains. 

UN signifies not; as, unwise, not wise. 

WITH signifies against; as, withstand, to stand against. 

The following table contains the simple sufltixes with 
their definitions, and words to illustrate them. For want 
of space a full analysis of the words cannot be given, but 
the student can supply the want by giving a complete 
definition of the suffixes and primitive words combined. 

(a) Ize, tize, ze, ise, se, ish.fy, ifij, en, e, ate, iaie, uate, cate, 
icate,ite, signify to make, to give, to put upon or into; as 
civilize, stigmatize, glaze, criticise, cleanse, establish, satisfy, 
justify, soften, breathe, maturate, ampliate, actuate, impli- 
cate, duplicate, unite. 

(6) lag, ant, ent, ient, signify continuing to; as, watering, 
dormant, pendent, sufficient. 

(c) ed signifies did; as, preferred, did prefer. 

{d) Ate, ite, en, signify made, made of or like, possessed 
of; as, giobate, erudite, silken. 

(e) Ant, ent, ate, ite, ast, ist, ado, ard, on, oso, ar, ary, iary, 
er, ee, eer, ier, or, ive, ster, ner, yer, zen, isan, an, ian, tain, 
signify one, who, a person; as, servant, president, collegiate, 
favorite, encomiast, botanist, desperado, dotard, glutton, 
virtuoso, beggar, adversary, incendiary, payer, payee, 
charioteer, cannonier, executor, executive, teamster, part- 
ner, kwyer, citizen, artisan, veteran, grammarian, chief- 
tain. 

( /) Ess, ix, ine, ago, signify a female; as, lioness, media- 
trix, heroine, virago. 

{(() Ity, ety, ty, cy, ce, ice, ude, tiide, itude, ness, t, th, mony, 
signify the quality or state of being, the thing which or 
that which; as, publicity, variety, novelty, privacy, opu- 
lence, justice, quietude, plentitude, exactitude, meekness, 
restraint, truth, sanctimony. 

(h) Ion, ment, ament, iment, ure, iure, ature, iture, al, ade, 
signify the act of; that which; as, erection, ejectment, 
armam-nt, impediment, pressure, mixture, signature, 
expenditure, refusal, cannonade. 

(i) Al, eal, ial, ual, em, urn, iac, ic, tic, atic, etic, id, an, 
ean, ian, ane, ine, He, eth, th, ar, ary, iary, uary, signify per- 
taining, belonging, or relating to; as, central, corporeal, 
dictatorial, habitual, southern, taciturn, demoniac, patriotic, 
dyspeptic, emblematic, dietetic, stupid, Roman, marmo- 



278 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

rean, Newtonian, mundane, crystalline, infantile, fortieth, 
tenth, columnar, missionary, stipendiary, sumptuary. 

( j ) Ose, ous, eous, ious, uous, ceous, aceous, aneous, oneous, 
itious,ful,ey, y, signify full of; abounding in; having the 
nature or quality of; as, verbose, mountainous, righteous, 
robustious, tempestuous, cetaceous, lardaceous, instanta- 
neous, erroneous, cementitious, hopeful, clayey, juicy. 

(k) Kin, ling, ule, cule, cle, icle, ock, et, let, aster, signify 
little, small, minute, slight, petty; as lambkin, kingling, 
globule, animalcule, tubercle, particle, hillock, feveret, 
ringlet, poetaster. 

if) Ics signifies the doctrine, art or science of; as, optics. 

(m) Ism signifies that which is peculiar to; a doctrine; 
a state, or condition; as, savagism, Calvinism. 

(n) Er signifies more; as, wiser, more wise: 

(o) Est signifies most; as, wisest, most wise. 

(p) DojYi, ric, ate, hood, ship, age, cy, ry, signify the state, 
rank, oflfice of; the territory of jurisdiction of; as, Popedom, 
bishopric, electorate, childhood, township, peerage, cap- 
taincy, chieftainry. 

(g) Y, ry, ary, ery, ory, signify the art, practice, or busi- 
ness of; the place where; as, gluttony, bigotry, statuary, 
cookery, armory. 

99. To locate the accent. 

100. The secondary nearly always precedes the primary. 

101. Some very long words have two secondary accents. 

102. Words of two syllables, excepting ameri, never have 
more than one accent. 

103. In compound words each part retains its own 
accent, the same as two distinct words. 

104. When used as verbs the accent is usually on the 
last syllable, while when used as nouns or adjectives the 
accent is on the first syllable. 

105. The accent is on the syllable next to the last. 

106. They generally have the accent on the syllable next 
preceding it. 

107. It is the last letter of a word. 

108. The elementary sound which it represents. 

109. It changes the meaning of the word; as, Au'gust, 
the eighth month; august^ grand, majestic. 

110. There are three kinds of spelling, viz.. Phonic, 
oral, and written. 

111. It is spelling by sound. 



ORTHOGRAPHY, ORTHOEPY AND PHONOLOGY. 279 

-EXERCISES 11^ abbiieviatio:n-s used in wkitikg. 

Write out in full Abbreviate. 

^* A. S. In the year of our Lord. 

Cr. C. B. Member of Congress. 

Id. i. e. Before Christ. 

^- P- S. Keeper of the Seal. 

Norn. No. Justice of the Peace 
I- H- S- House of Representatives. 

A. B. or B. A. As if he would say. 

Col. Coll. Blessed Virgin. 

Min. Plen. In the same place. 

N. J. N. H. No one dissenting. 

Q- E. F. Which was to be demonstrated 

Q^' Qt- A sufficient quantity. 

I^t. Rev. Right Honorable. 

S. A. R. R. For the time being. 

Sec. Leg. Doctor of Divinity. 

V. P. vs. Superintendent. 

Nov. N. S. New Testament. 

Do. or Ditto. A hundred weight. 

H. B. M. District of Columbia 

M. B. M. D. Bachelor of Divinity. 

Acct. A. B. S. And so forth. 

E. J. e. g. See; refer to. 

U. T. Vt. United States Navy. 

C. S. A. Yd. The last, or last month. 

S. E. N. W. West Indies. 
Zool. Pwt. . By the hundred. 

N. T. N. Y. Attorney. 

Ill- Ind. Unknown. 

A. M. Md. / Manuscripts. 

^- P. Neb. Doctor of Laws. 

Co. Am. Love of learning. 

Com. Feb. Right Honorable. 

Wm. Wt. Old Testament. 

Wis. Vt. To-wit; namely. 

O. S. Oct. Postmaster; afternoon. 

P. 0. Pop. Take notice. 

U. S. A. Viz. Rhode Island. 

P. pp. Oz. Parliament. 

Va. V. Wed. Gentlemen; Sirs. 

N. E. Ky. Kans. Fellow of the Royal Society. 

Feb. Fahr. Cal. Professor, President. 

G. B. N. C. Neh. Texas, Territorv. 



280 



THE QUESTION BOOK 



Write out in full. 

Tim. Sp. Sam. 
Rep. Rev. S. 
La. lbs. Fern. 
Id. i. e. Gen. 
IVlt. N. A. Miss. 
Hhd. Hist. Gov. 
Hdkf. Cr. Dft. 
4to. L.L. p. 8vo. 
Sat. S. C. W. 
Inst. Int. lo. 
Dist. Diet. Cyc. 
Long. L. Lat. 
Minn. Mad. Masc. 
Gent. Fur. Ft. 
Jam. Inter. Dr. 
Conj. Agt. Al. 
E. Deut. Dea. 
Hon. Gr. U. S. 
Cor. Adj. Anon. 
Capt. Chron. C. 
N. Myth. Mo. 



Abbreviate. 

Postscript, Regiment. 
Mademoiselle, Major. 
Italy, Hundred, Dozen. 
Fellow of the Society of Arts. 
Assistant, Junior. 
Cash on delivery. 
Thursday, Schooner. 
Volume, Philadelphia. 
Geology, Louisiana. 
Place of the Seal. 
Meridian, Thousand. 
Legislature, Lieutenant. 
Long Island, Matthew. 
Executor, Barrel, Adverb. 
Mistress, Servant, Democrat. 
Alderman, Amount, Editor. 
Esquire, Geometry, History. 
Constable, Constitution. 
Chapter, Capitals, Avenue. 
Mexico, Michigan, Minnesota. 
Memorandum, Maine. 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 



1. What is Mathematics ? 

2. What is quantity ? 

3. Define arithmetic as a Science and as an Art. 

4. ^ Upon what is arithmetic founded, and how are its 
operations carried on ? 

5. What is arithmetical language ? How many kinds ? 

6. What is a unit? 

7. What is a number? A power of a number? Root? 

8. What is an integer ? 

9. What is an abstract number ? Concrete number? 

10. What is a sign? What is the sign of aggregation? 

11. What is a rule? Problem? Axiom? 

12. What is analysis in arithmetic ? 

13. What is notation ? Numeration ? 

14. How many systems of notation in general use ? 

15. Upon what is the Roman notation founded ? 

16. In how many ways may numbers be written ? 

17. In the Arabic system of notation numbers are ex- 
pressed according to what principle ? 

18. Why is the Arabic system of notation also called 
the Decimal system? 

19. What is the difference between the simple and local 
value of a figure ? 

20. What are the fundamental principles of arithmetic ? 

21. What is the effect of placing a bar over a letter? 

22. What is the fundamental synthetic process of arith- 
metic ? 

23. Give the principles of addition. 

281 



282 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

24. How many and what are the cases in addition ? 

25. Why do we write the numbers as suggested by the 
arithmetics, and why do we begin at the right hand to add ? 

26. What is the fundamental analytical process of 
arithmetic ? 

27. Give the principles of subtraction. 

28. Name and define the cases in subtraction. 

29. Name the principles of multiplication. 

30. Why are the multiplicand and multiplier taken to- 
gether called factors ? 

31. What are the terms of division ? 

32. Upon what does the quotient depend ? 

33. Show how the value of the quotient depends on the 
relation of dividend and divisor. 

34. What principles of division are deduced from these 
relations ? 

35. In division, what relation exists in regard to the 
quality of abstractness and concreteness ? 

36. How are numbers classified ? 

37. What is the minuend ? Subtrahend ? 

38. What is a composite number ? 

39. What is factoring? 

40. What are the component factors of a number? 

41. What is the first power of a number ? Second ? 
Third? 

42. What is the reciprocal of a number ? 

43. How find the true remainder by dividing by factors ? 

44. What is a prime number? When are numbers 
prime to each other ? 

45. What is common divisor? The greatest common 
divisor ? 

46- What is a multiple ? Common multiple ? Least 
common multiple ? 

47. What are fractions ? 

48. What is the value of a fraction ? 

49. What does the numerator show? The denomin- 
ator ? 

50. What is a proper fraction ? Improper ? Mixed ? 
Complex ? 

51. Is a fraction a number? 

52. Is a fraction a denominate number ? 

53. Why invert the divisor in division of fractions ? 

54. How find the greatest common divisor of fractions ? 

55. How find the least common multiple of fractions ? 

56. What are decimal fractions ? 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 2b6 

57. What is the first thing to be considered in the 
treatment of decimals ? 

68. What will the denominator of a decimal always be ? 

59. Upon what does the value of a decimal depend ? 

60. How do decimals increase and decrease ? 

61. What is a pure decimal ? 

62. What is a mixed decimal? 

63. What is a complex decimal ? 

64. From what are the names of decimal orders derived ? 

65. How find the product of two decimals by a con- 
tracted multiplication? 

66. How find the quotient of one decimal divided by 
another by a contracted division ? 

67. What are circulating decimals ? 

68. What is a repetend ? 

69. What are continued fractions ? 

70. What is the difference between decimal fractions 
and common fractions ? 

71. What is currency? 

72. From what was the sign $ derived ? 

73. What is an aliquot part of a number ? 

74. What is a bill? 

75. What is a compound number ? 

76. What is a denominate number? 

77. What is a simple denominate number? 

78. What is a compound denominate number ? 

79. What is a standard unit ? ^ 

80. Name the quantities of magnitude which give rise 
to denominate numbers? 

81. What is the standard unit of value? 

82. What is the standard unit of weight ? 

83. What is the standard unit of length ? 

84. What is the standard unit of surface ? 

85. What is the standard unit of volume ? 

86. What is the standard unit of capacity ? 

87. What is the standard unit of angles ? - 

88. What is the standard unit of time? 

89. What is a measure ? How divided ? 

90. How many dimensions have extension? Aline? 
A surface ? A solid ? 

91. Explain how distance is measured by time? 

92. How do you find the difference in time, correspond- 
ing to any difference in longitude? 

93. How do you find the difference in longitude, cor- 
responding to any difference in time ? 



284 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

94. How do you find the time at one place, when the 
time at another place and their difiference of time are 
known ? 

95. How do navigators determine their longitude at sea ? 

96. What is a scale? 

97. What is weight ? 

98. Describe the Gunter's chain ? 

99. What is the difference between a pound Troy and a 
pound Avoirdupois? 

100. What is linear measure ? 

101. What is a square ? A cube? 

102. How many inches in a wine gallon ? In a beer 
gallon ? In a bushel? 

103. What are duodecimals ? 

104. What is percentage? What is its base ? 

105. What do the words per cent, mean ? 

106. Name and define the elements involved in per* 
centage. 

107. What is the difference between rate and rate per- 
cent. 

108. Give the applications of percentage. ^ 
1()9. What is commission ? Brokerage ? 

110. What is a commission merchant? 

111. What is a consignee ? Consignor? 

112. What is a company ? Corporation ? 

113. What is a share? Stock? Stockholder? 

114. AVhat is the difference between a charter and a 
firm? 

115. When is stock at par ? When below par ? 

1 16. What is profit and loss ? 

117. How find the gain or loss per cent, when the cost 
and selling price are given ? 

118. How find the selling price when the cost and gain, 
or loss per cent, are given ? 

119. How find the cost when the selling price and the 
gain or loss per cent, are given ? 

120. What is an installment ? Assessment? Dividend? 

121. What is insurance ? A policy? A premium? 

122. Define underwriter. 

123. Name and define the kinds of insurance. 

124. What is a tax? Poll tax? Assessor? 

125. What is an inventory ? 

1 26. What is general average ? Jetson ? 

127. What are duties or customs ? What is a custom- 
house ? 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 285 

128. What is smuggling ? 

129. How many kinds of duties ? Define them ? 

130. What is interest ? Usury? 

131. What is tariff ?^ 

132. What is the difference between simple and com- 
pound interest ? 

133. The time, rate per cent, and interest being given, 
how find the principal? 

134. The time, rate per cent, and amount being given, 
how find the principal ? 

135. The principal, time and interest being given, how 
find the rate per cent. ? 

136. The principal, interest, and rate per cent, being 
given, how find the time ? 

137. What is a partial payment ? Indorsement? 

138. What is discount? Present worth of a debt? 
How find it? 

139. What is a bank? Bank discount ? Days of grace? 

140. What is a promissory note ? Bank note ? Nego- 
tiable note ? 

141. Name and define the kinds of notes. 

142. What is a notary-public ? A protest? 

143. What is a draft ? A check? 

144. What is a bond ? What is a coupon ? 

145. What do the terms five-twenties and ten-forties 
mean ? 

146. What is exchange ? How many kinds ? 

147. What is domestic exchange? Foreign exchange? 

148. What is a bill of exchange ? 

149. How many parties to a transaction in exchange ? 

150. What is a set of exchange ? Course of exchange ? 

151. What is equation of payments ? 

152. What is equated time? 

153. What is the focal date? 

154. What is partnership ? Partners ? 

155. What is the difference between simple and com- 
pound partnership ? 

156. What is an endorsement ? 

157. What is an acceptance ? 

158. How is this obligation acknowledged? 

159. What is a bankrupt ? 

160. What is the difference between a bankrupt and an 
insolvent ? 

161. Define bankruptcy. 

162. Whatisanalvsis? 



286 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

163. What is ratio ? Define each kind. 

164. What are the terms of a ratio ? 

165. What is the antecedent ? Consequent ? 

1 66. What is direct ratio ? Inverse or reciprocal ? 

167. In how many ways may the ratio of two numbers 
be expressed ? 

168. What is the difference between a simple ratio and 
a compound ratio ? 

169. What is proportion ? 

170. Which are the extremes "^ The means ? 

171. What is a continued proportion ? 

172. How many antecedents in a proportion? How 
many consequents ? 

173. How are ratio and proportion distinguished ? 

174. What is a simple proportion? 

175. What is a direct proportion ? 

176. What is an inverse proportion ? 

177. What is a compound proportion? 

178. Of what does allegation treat ? 

179. How many kinds of allegation ? Define each. 

180. Give the analysis of allegation. 

181. What is an annuity ? 

182. Name and define the kinds of annuity. 

183. What is involution ? 

184. What is a surd? 

185. What is the power of a number? 

186. What is a perfect power ? An imperfect power? 

187. What is the exponent of a power? 

188. Define evolution. 

189. What is the root of a number? 

190. How are the roots of numbers indicated? 

191. What is the square root of a number? 

192. What is the cube root of a number? 

193. What is arithmetical progression ? 

194. What is geometrical progression ? 

195. What five things are to be considered in arithmet- 
ical progression ? 

196. What things are to be considered in geometrical 
progression ? 

197. What is a duodecimal? 

198. What is mensuration ? 

199. What is magnitude ? 

200. What is the measuring unit of surfaces ? 

201. How do you find the area of a parallelogram and 
a square? 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 



28^ 



202. How the area of a rhombus? Trapezium? Tri- 
angle ? 

203. How do you find the area of a triangle when the 
three sides are given ? . 

204. How find the circumference of a circle when the 
diameter is given ? How find the diameter ? 

205. How find the area of a circle ? 

206. How find the side of the greatest square that can 
be inscribed in a circle of a given diameter ? 

207. How find a mean proportional between two num- 
bers? 

208. How find the solidity of bodies whose sides are 
perpendicular to each other ? 

209. How find the solidity of a prism ? 

210. How find the lateral surface of a right prism ? 

21 1 . How find the solidity of a pyramid or cone ? 

212. How do you find the lateral or convex surface of 
a regular pyramid or cone ? 

2 1 3. How find the solidity of a cylinder ? 

214. How find the convex surface of a cylinder? 

215. How find the surface of a sphere or globe ? 

216. How find the solidity of a sphere or globe ? 

217. How find the side of a square equal in area to any 
given surface ? 

218. How do we measure lumber? 

219. How find the solid contents of a stick of round 
timber ? 

220. What is gauging ? 

221. How find the contents of casks ? 

222. Define the metric system of measurement? 

223. What is the measure of the meter in inches ? 

224. From what was the meter obtained ? 



ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS 



ON 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 



1. The science of quantity. 

2. Anything that can be increased, diminished or 
measured. 

3. As a science, it logically investigates and philo- 
sophically classifies and arranges the principles and rules 
of the subject ; as an art, it applies these principles to the 
practical affairs of life. 

4. It is founded on notation, and its operations are 
carried on by means of addition, subtraction, multiplica- 
tion and addition. 

5. The method of expressing numbers. It is of two 
kinds, Oral and Written. The former is called numeration 
and the latter notation. 

6. One, or a single thing. 

7. A unit or a collection of units. The power of a 
number is the product produced by repeating a number 
any number of times as a factor. A root is a factor 
repeated to produce power. ^ 

8. A whole number. 

9. An abstract number is one used without reference 
to any particular thing. A concrete number is one that 
has reference to a particular thing. 

10. A character indicating an operation to be performed. 
The sign of aggregation is a parenthesis, or bar, which shows 
that the numbers enclosed by it are to be considered to- 
gether subject to the same operation. 

11. A rule is a prescribed method of performing an 
operation. A problem is something to be done. An 
axiom is any truth that is self-evident. 

289 



290 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

12. The process of investigating principles, and solving 
problems, independently of set rules. 

13. Notation is a method of writing or expressing nnm^ 
bers by characters. Numeration is a method of reading; 
numbers expressed by characters. 

14. Two : The Roman and Arabic. 

15. Upon five principles : first, repeating a letter repeats 
its value; second, if a letter of any value is placed after 
one of greater value, it is added to the greater; third, if a 
letter of any value is placed before a greater, it is to be 
taken from the greater; fourth, if a letter of any value is 
placed between letters of higher value, it is to be taken 
from their united values; fifth, if a bar or dash is placed, 
over a letter, it increases its value a thousandfold. 

16. By words, letters, and figures. 

17. By the position of the nine characters. 

18. Because of its increase and decrease in a tenfold 
ratio. Decern is a Latin word, meaning ten. 

19. The simple value of a figure is its value when taken, 
alone, while the local value depends upon the place it. 
occupies with other figures. 

20. Notation and numeration, addition, subtraction,, 
multiplication, and division. 

21. It increases its value a thousandfold. 

22. Addition, for by it we pass from unity to plurality; 
from the one to the many. This process, which gives rise- 
to numbers, becomes the primary operation of arithmetic. 

23. Only similar numbers can be added. 

The sum is a number similar to the numbers added. 
The sum is the same in whatever order the numbers- 
are added. 

24. They are represented by two modes of calculation i 
Mental Addition and Written Addition. 

25. Merely for convenience. 

26. Subtraction. 

27. Similar numbers, only, can be subtracted. 

The difference is a number similar to the numbers sub- 
tracted. 

If the two numbers are equally increased or dimin- 
ished the remainder will be the same. 

If the first number is equal to the sum of the second 
and the remainder, then the second must equal the differ- 
ence between the first and the remainder. 

28. Like the cases of addition, one is expressed in the' 
Arabic system, the other by some mental calculation. 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 291 

29. The multiplier is always an abstract number, 
ihe product of two numbers is the same, whichever is 
made the multiplier. 

ihJLfn- ^'.^^^\P^^^^^d be multiplied by all of the parts of 
the multiplier, the sum of all the partial products will be 
the true product. v ix u« 

A' "^J!! ?"ll'P^'^^?^ ^^^^^^ *^^ quotient of the product 
divided by thernultiplier; the multiplier equals the quo- 
^^n -D ^ product divided by the multiplicand. 
6u. Because they make the product. 

31. The dividend, divisor and quotient. 

32. It depends upon both dividend and divisor. 

66. it one of these terms is changed it changes the 
Tni'^^t' ^''^}{^''^^ are changed the changes neutralize 
each other and the quotient remain the same 

34. Multiplying the dividend or dividing the divisor 
by any number multiplies the quotient by that number. 

Dividing the dividend or multiplying the divisor by 
any number divides the quotient by that number. 

Multiplying or dividing both dividend and divisor by 
the same number does not change the quotient. 

65. The quotient may be either abstract or concrete 

it will be abstract when the dividend and divisor are 
both abstract, or both concrete. 

It will be concrete when the dividend is concrete and 
the divisor abstract. 

Either the divisor or quotient must always be an ab- 
stract number. 

numb f'^^^^^^ number cannot be divided by a concrete 

36. They are classified as follows : 

As even and odd. 
As prime and composite. 
As integral and fractional. 
As abstract and concrete. 
As simple and compound. 
As like and unlike. 

37. The minuend is the number to be subtracted from 
ihe subtrahend is the number which is subtracted. 

38. One that can be produced by multiplying two or 
more numbers together. 

f A Ju^ process of separating numbers into its factors 

40. The several numbers which, being multiplied 
together, produce the number. 

41. The number itself, or the root. The second power, 



292 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

or square, is the number multiplied by itself. The third 
power, or cube, of a number, is the product arising from 
using the number three times as a factor. 

42. It is 1 divided by that number. 

43. Multiply each partial remainder, except the first, 
by all the preceding divisors, and add these products to 
the first remainder. It will be noticed that after the first 
division, the remainder cannot be of the same denomina- 
tion as the first number divided ; and as each succeeding 
division increases the value of the remainders, therefore 
each remainder must be multiplied by all the preceding 
divisors to reduce it to its former denomination. 

44. One that cannot be resolved into factors. Num- 
bers are prime to each other when they have no common 
divisor. 

45. One that will divide two or more numbers without 
a remainder. The greatest common divisor is the greatest 
number that will divide two or more numbers without a 
remainder. 

46. A multiple is a number that is exactly divisible by 
a given number. A common multiple is one that is exactly 
divisible by two or more numbers. The least common 
multiple is the least number that is exactly divisible by 
two or more given numbers. 

47. Parts of a unit. 

48. The quotient of the numerator divided by the 
denominator. 

49. The denominator shows into how many parts a 
number is divided; the numerator shows how many parts 
are taken. 

50. A proper fraction is one whose numerator is smaller 
than its denominator. An improper fraction is one whose 
numerator is equal to or greater than its denominator. A 
mixed number is one expressed by an integer and fraction 
written together. A complex fraction is one that has a 
fraction in its numerator, or denominator, or both. 

51. The usual expressions are that they are not num- 
bers, but by a-n analysis of this question we find that a 
fraction is a number of equal parts of unity, and conse- 
quently must represent a subdivision of numbers ; thus, 
five feet is a number, and the fraction five-twelfths of a 
foot represents equal numbers of a lower order, as five 
inches. 

52. A fraction is not a denominate number. 

53. For convenience ; if not inverted they must be 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 293 

reduced to a common denominator, and one numerator 
divided by the other. 

54. Find the greatest common divisor of the given 
numerators, and the least common multiple of the denom- 
inators. 

55. Find the least common multiple of the numera- 
tors, and the greatest common divisor of the denominators. 

56. Fractions whose denominators are increased or 
decreased in tenfold ratio. 

57. The method of reading and writing them, or their 
numeration and notation. 

58. The unit 1 with as many ciphers annexed as are 
equal to the number of figures in the decimal or numerator. 

59. Its place from the decimal point. 

60. They increase from right to left, and decrease from 
left to right, in a tenfold ratio. 

61. A pure decimal consists of a decimal only thus, 
.35, which is read 35 hundredths. 

62. One with an integer and a decimal ; thus, 15.7. 

63. One with a fraction annexed ; thus, .0051. 

64. From the names of the orders of integers. 

65. Write the multiplier with the order of its figures 
reversed, and with units' place under that figure of the 
multiplicand which is the lowest decimal to be retained 
in the product. Find the product of each figure of the 
multiplier by the one above in the multiplicand and those 
to the left, increasing this multiplication by as many units 
as would have been carried had the rejected part of the 
multiplicand been used. Write these partial products 
with the lowest figure in the same column and add to- 
gether, pointing ofi" the required number of decimal 
figures. 

66. Compare the left hand figure of the divisor with 
the units of like order in the dividend, and determine how- 
many figures will be required in the quotient. For the 
first contracted divisor, take as many figures from the left 
of the divisor as there are places required in the quotient, 
and in each following division reject one place from the 
right of the last preceding divisor, using the remainder 
for a new dividend. 

67. A decimal in which a figure or set of figures are 
continually repeating. 

68. The figure or set of figures continually repeated. 

69. A fraction whose numerator is 1, and whose denom- 
inator is a whole num^ber, plus a fraction whose numerator 



294 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

is also 1, and whose denominator is a similar fraction, etc. 

70. The first has a denominator understood, showing 
that a unit is divided into ten equal parts, or subdivided 
in a tenfold ratio ; the second has a denominator showing 
that a unit is divided into any number of equal parts. 

71. The medium of circulation. 

72. From the initial letters of the United States, U. S. 
joined together as a monogram. 

73. Such a part as will exactly divide that number. 

74. A written statement of articles bought or sold, 
together with price of each and the whole cost. 

75. A concrete number, whose value is expressed in 
two or more different denominations. 

76. It is a concrete number in which the unit of meas- 
ure is established by law or custom. 

77. It is a denominate number composed of units of 
the same denomination; as 3 feet. 

78. When it is composed of two or more denominations 
which are related to each other ; as 3 feet 4 inches. 

79. A unit of measure from which the other units of 
the same kind may be derived. 

80. They are value, weight, length, surface, volume, 
capacity, angles, time. 

81. Money is the standard unit of value, and is of two 
kinds, coin and paper money. In the United States the 
standard unit is the dollar. ' In English money it is the 
pound. 

82. It is the Troy pound. 

83. The standard unit of length is the yard. 

84. It is the square yard for ordinary measurement, 
and the acre for land. 

85. It is the cubic yard for ordinary measurement, and 
the cord for wood. • 

86. The gallon for fluids, and the bushel for dry 
measure. 

87. It is the right angle, or, in practice, one degree of 
a circle. 

88. The standard unit of time is the day. This is 
determined by the revolution of the earth. 

89. That by which extent, dimension, capacity, or 
amount is ascertained. Measures are of eight kinds: 
Length, surface or area, solidity, weight, time, angles, 
capacity and money. 

90. Extension ^has three: Length, breadth, and thick- 
ness. 



WEITTEN ARITHMETIC. 295 

91. Every circle is supposed to be divided into 360 
equal parts called degrees. As the earth makes its revolu- 
tion once in 24 hours, the 24 hours must equal 360^, or one 
hour 15^ of distance. Then by subdividing we find 1^ 
would equal 4 minutes, and 1-60 of a degree would equal 
4 seconds. 

92. Divide the difierence in longitude, expressed in 
degrees, minutes and seconds, by 15, and the respective 
quotients will be hours, minutes, and seconds. 

93. Multiply the difference in time, expressed in 
hours, minutes and seconds, by 15, and its respective 
products will be degrees, minutes and seconds of longi- 
Ttude. 

94. When the second place is east of the first, add their 
difference of time; when it is west of the first, substract 
their difference of time. 

95. Taking with them a chronometer (an accurate 
watch) set to mark the time at a given place (as Greenwich 
or Washington), they ascertain by observation of the sun 
with the sextant the time at the place they are in, reduce 
the difference of time to the difference of longitude, and 
thus they find they are so many degrees east or west of the 
meridian of the place for which their chronometer is set. 

96. A series of numbers, descending or ascending, used 
in operations upon compound numbers. 

97. A measure of the quantity of matter a body con- 
tains, according to some fixed standard. 

98. It consists of 100 links, each link containing 7.92 
inches, or the whole length 66 feet, or 4 rods. 

99. Troy has 5,760 grains; avoirdupois has 7,000. 

100. That which is used in measuring lines or dis- 
tances. 

101. A square is a figure having four equal sides and 
four equal angles; a cube is a figure having six equal sides. 

102. In a wine gallon, 231 cubic inches; beer, 282; in 
a bushel, 2,150.4 cubic inches. 

103. The division and subdivision of a unit, resulting 
by continually dividing by 12. 

104. Such part of a number as is represented by the 
per cent. Its base is the number on which the percentage 
is reckoned. 

105. By the hundred. 

106. The elements are: 

Base, the number of which the per cent, is taken. 
Rate, the number of hundredths taken. 



296 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

Percentage, the amount taken. 

Amount, the sum of the base and percentage. 

Difference, the base less the percentage. 

107. The rate is the number of hundredths, and the 
rate per cent, is the fraction which denotes how many 
hundredths are taken. Thus, in 3 % , or rlo, 3 is the rate 
and Tffu the rate per cent. 

108. The rules of percentage are applied to the com- 
puting of interest, discount, commission, taxes, insurance^ 
duties, and especially profit and loss. 

109. The percentage allowed an agent, factor or com- 
mission merchant, is commission. Brokerage is the fee 
paid to a dealer in money, stocks, etc., for the transaction 
of business. 

110. An agent who buys and sells goods for another. 

111. A person who receives goods to sell for another. 
A consignor is a person who sends goods to another to be 
sold. 

112. Individuals united for the purpose of performing 
some business or undertaking. A corporation is a com- 
pany formed and authorized by law to act as one person. 

113. One of the equal parts into which capital stock i& 
divided. Stock is the amount of capital invested. Stock- 
holders are the owners of stock. 

114. A charter defines the powers of an incorporated 
body, while firm is the name under which an unincorpo- 
rated body transacts business. 

1 15. Stock is at par when it sells for its first cost ; below 
par, when it sells for less than first cost. 

116. A commercial term, used to express the gainer 
loss in business transactions. 

117. Divide the gain or loss by the purchase price. 

118. Multiply the purchase price by $1, increased or 
diminished, as the case may be, by the gain or loss per 
cent. 

119. Divide the selling price by $1, increased or di- 
minished, as the case may be, by the gain or loss per cent. 

120. A portion of the capital stock required of the 
stockholders as a payment on their subscription. An 
assessment is a sum required of the stockholders to meet 
the losses or the business expenses of the company. A 
dividend is a sum paid to the stockholders from the profits- 
of the business. 

121. Security on property guaranteed by one party to 
another, for a stipulated sum, against the loss of that prop- 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 297 

erty by any casualty. A policy is a written contract 
between the parties. Premium is the sum paid for insur- 
ance. 

122. The underwriter is the insurer — the person who 
takes the risk. 

123. There are six different kinds of insurance: Fire 
insurance, Marine insurance, Cyclone insurance, Accident 
insurance, Health insurance. Life insurance. 

124. A tax is a sum of money assessed on the person 
or property of an individual for public purposes. Poll 
tax is a sum required of each male citizen liable to taxa- 
tion, without regard to his property. An assessor is the 
person appointed to prepare the assessment roll, and 
apportion the taxes. 

125. A written list of articles of property with their 
value. 

126. A method of ascertaining the loss to be sustained 
by the proprietors of ships, freight, and cargo, where a 
portion of the property has been sacrificed or damaged for 
the common safety. Jetson is the portion of goods thrown 
overboard. 

127. Duties are taxes levied on imported goods. A 
custom-house is an office established by government for 
the transaction of business relating to duties. 

128. Carrying on foreign commerce secretly, without 
paying the duties imposed by law. 

129. There are two kinds: Ad valorem and Specific. 
Av valorem duty is the sum computed on the cost of the 
goods in the country from which they were imported. 
Specific duty is a sum computed on the weight or measure 
of goods, without regard to their cost. 

130. A sum paid for the use of money. Usury is illegal 
interest. 

131. A list of the rates of duties to be collected. 

132. Simple interest is the interest on the principal 
only. Compound interest is the interest on the principal 
and the previous interest added. 

133. Divide the given interest by the interest on $1 for 
the given time at the given rate. 

134. Divide the given amount by the amount of $1 for 
the given time at the given rate. 

135. Divide the given interest by the interest on the 
principal at 1 per cent, for the time. 

136. Divide the given interest by the interest on the 
principal for one year at the rate per cent. 



'298 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

137. Part payment of a note, bond, or other obligation. 
An endorsement is an acknowledgment written on the 
back of a note, or any obligation, stating the time and 
amount of a partial payment. 

138. Discount is an allowance made for the payment 
of a debt before it is due. The present worth of a debt is 
such a sum which, being put at legal interest, would 
amount to the debt when due. It is found by dividing 
the given debt by the amount of $1 for the given time and 
Tate. 

139. A bank is a corporation chartered by law for the 
purpose of receiving and loaning money, and furnishing a 
paper circulation. Bank discount is an allowance made 
to a bank for the payment of a debt before it is due. Days 
of grace are three days allowed a bank to pay its notes 
after they become due. 

140. A promissory note is a written agreement to pay 
a certain sum either on demand or at a specified time. 
Eank notes are paper circulation issued by banks as 
money. A negotiable note is one which may be bought 
:and sold, or negotiated, and is made payable to the hearer 
or to the order of the payee. 

141. They are classified as time notes, negotiable notes, 
joint notes, bank notes, drafts, stock, and bonds. 

142. An ofiicer authorized by law to attest documents 
or writings of any kind to make them lawful. A protest 
is a formal declaration in writing, made by a notary-pub- 
lic, at the request of the holder of a note, notiiying the 
makers and the endorsers of its non-payment. 

143. A draft is a note of exchange, issued by a bank 
payable on some other bank. A check is also a note of 
exchange, but issued by a person or company and made 
payable at some bank" where the person has deposits or 
credit. 

144. Bonds are interest-bearing notes issued by nations, 
states, cities, railroad companies, and other corporations 
as a means of borrowing money. The coupons are the 
due-bills for the interest, which, as they become due, are 
cut off and presented for payment. 

145. They are applied to government bonds and indi- 
cate the time when due. The five-twenties are due twenty 
years after issue, although the government can pay them 
any time after five if they choose to do so. The same is 
applied to the ten-forties. 

146. A method of remitting money from one person 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 299 

to another, or making payments by written orders. There 
are two kinds, domestic and foreign. 

147. Domestic or inland exchange is the exchange 
between different places in the same country. Foreign 
exchange is the remittance made between different coun- 
tries. 

148. It is a written request or order upon one person 
to pay a certain sum to another person, or to his order, at 
a specified time. A draft or check is one kind of bill of 
exchange. 

149. There are always three parties, and usually four, 
to a transaction in exchange. 

150. It consists of three copies of the same, made in 
foreign exchanges, and sent by different conveyances to 
provide against a loss ; when one has been paid the others 
are void. A course of exchange is the current price paid 
in once place for bills of exchange on another place. 

151. The process of finding the meantime of the pay- 
ment of several sums, due at different times, without 
interest. 

152. The date at which several debts may be paid at 
one time. 

153. The date by which all others are compared in 
averaging an account. 

154. A relation established by two or more persons in 
trade. Partners are the individuals thus associated. 

155. A simple partnership is one in which each of the 
partners has his capital invested for the same length of 
time. A compound partnership is that in which the capi- 
tal of the partners is employed for different periods of 
time. 

156. The endorsement of a bill is the writing upon its 
back, by which the payee relinquishes his title, and trans- 
fers the payment to another. 

157. The acceptance of a bill is the promise which the 
drawee makes to pay it at maturity. 

158. By writing the word " accepted," with his signa- 
ture, across the face of the bill. 

159. A bankrupt is a person who fails in business and 
has not property enough to pay his bills. 

160. Bankrupt is strictly applicable only to a trader, 
while the term, insolvent, applies to any person who is 
unable to pay his debts. 

161. It is the condition of the business of a bankrupt. 



300 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

162. It is the process of arriving at a required result 
by following a course of reasoning, and not by formal 
rules. 

163. The comparison of two numbers with each other. 
Arithmetical ratio is the difference between tAVO numbers. 
Geometrical ratio is one divided by the other. 

164. The two numbers compared. 

165. The antecedent is the first term of a ratio ; a con- 
sequent is the second term. 

166. Direct ratio is dividing the consequent by the 
antecedent. Inverse ratio is dividing the antecedent by 
the consequent. 

167. In two ways : By placing a colon between the 
terms, and by the form of a fraction, taking the antece- 
dent for the numerator and the consequent for the 
denominator. 

168. A simple ratio is the ratio of two numbers. A 
compound ratio is the product of two or more simple 
ratios. 

169. An equality of the ratio. 

170. The extremes are the first and fourth terms. The 
means are the other two. 

171. A proportion with more than two equal ratios;; 
as,3:5::6:10::9:15. 

172. As each ratio has an antecedent and consequent'- 
then every proportion must have two antecedents and two 
consequents ; the first and third terms being the ante- 
cedents, and the second and fourth the consequents. 

173. Ratio is the relation between two numbers, while 
proportion is the relation between two ratios. 

174. An equality between two simple ratios. 

] 75. One in which each term increases or diminishes,, 
as the one on which it depends increases or diminishes. 

176. One in which each term increases as the term^ 
upon which it depends diminishes, or diminishes as it 
increases. 

177. A proportion in which either ratio is compounds 

178. Of mixing or compounding two or more ingre- 
dients of different values. 

179. Two : Medial and Alternate. Medial is the process 
of finding the average price or quality of several ingredients 
whose prices or qualities are known. Alternate is the 
process of finding the proportional quantity to be taken 
of several ingredients whose prices are known. 

180. Allegation is but a short way of performing an 




WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 301 

analysis. To show the process we will unite 3, 4, 7, 10, to 
form a value worth 6. 

A It will be noticed that the 

1 difference between 10 and. 6 is 

2 a loss of 4, and to make a loss 
o of 1 will require i, also there 

will be a gain of i in the oppo- 
site connection. The proportion, then, if the two terms 3 
and 10, expressed in fractions, is i and i, which, re- 
duced to a common denominator, is y% and -y\^ or ex- 
pressed in whole numbers, 4 and 3, which, in allegation, 
is understood as an exchange of difference without the 
use of fractions and their reduction to whole numbers. 

181. A sum of money payable at certain periods of 
time. 

182. There are five kinds : 

A Certain Annuity, which continues for a fixed 
period of time. 

A Perpetual Annuity, continuing forever. 

A Contingent Annuity, depending upon certain 
occurrences, as on the death of a person. 

An Annuity. in Reversion, one that begins at a 
specified future time or event. 

An Annuity in Arrears, is one the payments of 
which have been allowed to accumulate in- 
stead of being paid. 

183. Involution is the process of raising a number to a 
given power. 

184. The indicated root of an imperfect power. 

185. A power of a number is the result obtained by 
using it a certain number of times as a factor. 

186. A perfect power is a number whose root can be 
found. An imperfect power is one whose root cannot be 
found exactly. 

187. The exponent of a power is a number placed at 
the right of theroot and just above it, to show the number 
of times the root is to be used, as 3*=3x3x3x3. 

188. Evolution is the process of extracting the root of 
any number considered a power. It is the opposite of in- 
volution. 

189. The root of a number is one of the equal factors of 
that num ber. 2 

190. By the sign called Radical Sign, V . The figure 
on the sign indicates the root. 

191. One of two equal factors that produce that number. 



302 THE QUESTION BOOK, 

192. One ox three equal factors that produce that number. 

193. A series of numbers increased or diminished by a. 
common difference. 

194. A series of numbers increased or diminished by a 
constant multiplier. 

195. The first term, the last term, the number of terms, 
the common difference and the sum of the series. Three 
of these being given, the other two can be found. 

196. They are the first term, the last term, the number 
of terms, the constant multiplier, and the sum of the 
series. Three of these being given, the other two can be 
found. 

197. A denominate number in which twelve units of 
any denomination make a unit of the next higher denom- 
ination. 

198. The art of measuring magnitudes. 

199. Any substance which has length, breadth and 
thickness, or all of them. 

200. It is customary to use a square as the measuring 
unit, as a square inch, foot, rod, etc. 

201. By inultiplying the length by the breadth. 

202. By multiplying the length by the altitude. 

By multiplying half the sums of the parallel sides by 
the altitude. 

By multiplying the base by half the altitude. 

203. From half the sum of the three sides subtract 
each side respectively ; then multiply together half the 
sum and the three remainders, and extract the square root 
of the product. 

204. To find the circumference multiply the diameter 
by 3.14159 ; to find the diameter, divide the circumference 
by the same number. 

205. By multiplying half the circumference by half 
the diameter ; or, by multiplying the circumference by a 
fourth of the diameter. 

206. Divide the square of the given diameter by 2, and 
extract the square root of the quotient. 

207. By multiplying the given numbers together, and 
extracting the square root of the product. 

208. By multiplying the length, breadth and thickness. 

209. By multiplying the area of the base by the height. 

210. By multiplying the length by the peremeter of 
the base. 

211. By multiplying the area of the base by i of the 
altitude. 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 303 

212. By multiplying the peremeter of the base by i 
the slant height. 

213. By multiplying the area of the base by the height 
or length. 

214. By multiplying the circumference of the base by 
the height. 

215. By multiplying the circumference by the diam- 
eter. 

216. By multiplying the surface by i of the diameter. 

217. By extracting the square root of the given surface. 

218. By multiplying the length, breadth and thickness. 
Boards are considered one inch in thickness, and are so 
reckoned, even if they are less. 

219. By multiplying the length by i the mean girt or 
circumference. 

220. The process of finding the contents or capacity of 
casks, barrels, etc. 

221. Multiply the square of the mean diameter into 
the length; then this product by .0034 to obtain the wine 
gallons. By using the decimal .0028 will give the beer 
gallons. 

222. The Metric System is a decimal system of weights 
and measures, having the meter for the base or unit. 

223. It measures 39.3708 inches. 

224. It is one ten-millionth part of a quadrant of the. 
earth's meridian. 

TEST EXAMPLES. 

[The following examples embody a great variety of practical principles, andl 
nave been selected especially to test the knowledge of the student.] 

1. One gentleman meeting another, and inquiring the 
time past 12 o'clock, received for an answer, -f|- of the time 
from now to midnight ; what o'clock in the afternoon 
was it? Ans. 5 h. 40 m. 

2. Where shall a pole 60 feet high be broken, that the 
top may rest on the ground 20 feet from the stump? 
Ans. 261 

3. Suppose a man owes $1,000. What sum shall he 
pay yearly so as to cancel the debt, principal and interest, 
at the end of three years, reckoning it at 6 per cent, simple 
interest? Ans. $371yV9- 

4. A gentleman has a garden 400 feet long and 300 feet 
wide which he would raise 9 inches higher by means of 
the earth to be dug out of a ditch that goes around it. 



304 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

To what depth must the ditch be dug, supposing its 
breadth to be everywhere 6 feet ? Ans. lOy^y^. 

5. Divide $1,000 among A, B and C, so that A may have 
$156 more than B, and B 862 less than C. Ans. A, 4161; 
B, $2601 ; C, $3221. 

6. If 21 cows eat up 8 acres of grass in 6 weeks, and 18 
cows eat up the same in 9 weeks, how many cows will it 
maintain for 18 weeks, if the grass grow uniformly dur- 
ing that time? Ans. 15 cows. 

7. Require the thickness of the lead of a pipe li inch 
bore, which weighs 16 lbs. a yard in length, a cubic foot 
of lead weighing 11,325 oz. avoirdupois. Ans. .2329 + in. 

8. If a cubic foot of brass were drawn into wire -^ 
of an inch in diameter, required the length of the wire, 
supposing no loss in the metal. Ans. 55 m., 4 fur., 104 
yds., 2 ft., 4 in. +. 

9. Divide $25 between 2 boys in such a proportion 
that, after it is divided, A shall have i more than B. 
Ans. A, $15; B, $10. 

10. A makes B a present of $100, on condition that he 
shall expend it in cows, sheep, and geese ; cows at $10 each, 
sheep at $1, and geese at 161 cents, so as to have just 100 
in the whole. How many must he purchase of each? 
Ans. 5 cows, 41 sheep, and 54 geese. 

11. If i of 6 be 3, what will i of 20 be ? Ans. 7i. 

12. How long must I keep $300 to balance the use of 
$500, which I lent a friend 4 months ? Ans. 61 months. 

13. If 800 men have provisions for 2 months, how 
many must leave that the remainder may subsist 5 
months on the same ? Ans. 480. 

14. A hare, running 36 rods a minute, has 57 rods the 
start of a dog; how far must the dog run to overtake him, 
running 40 rods per minute ? Ans. 570 rods. 

15. The hour and minute hands of a watch-are together 
at 12 o'clock; when are they next together ? Ans. 1 h., 5 
m., 27t't s- 

16. If a pole be i in the mud, f in the water, and 6 
feet out of the water, what is its length ? Ans. 90 feet. 

17. A man being asked how many geese he had, 
replied: if I had ^ as many as I now have, and 2i geese 
more, I should have 100; how many had he ? Ans. 65. 

18. The head of a fish is 4 feet long, the tail as long as 
the head and J the length of the body, the body as long 
as the head and tail; what is the length of the fish? 
Ans. 32 feet. 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 305 

19. A and B can build a wall in 4 davs, B and C in 6 
days, A and C in 5 days; require the time if they work 
together. Ans. 3/y. 

1 j^2; A^^^ ^^^^ ^^^ *^^ ^^^^' °^® 14' *^6 <^*her 18 years 
old, $1,000, so divided that their shares, being put at 6 
per cent, interest, should be equal when each should be 21 
years old; what was the share of each ? Ans. 8546.153 +• 
453.846+. ' 

21. A gentleman divided his fortune among his sons 
giving A $d as often as B $5, and C $3 as often as B $7: C 
received $7,442.10^; what was the whole estate? Ans 
$56,063.8571. 

22. Three horses, belonging to 3 men, do work to the 
amount of $26.45; A and B's horses are supposed to do f 
of the work, A and C's r\, B and C's U, on which suppo- 
sition the owners are paid proportionately; what does each 
receive? Ans. A, $11.50; B, $5.75; C, $9.20. 

23. A gay fellow spent f of his fortune, after which he 
gave $7,260 for a commission, and continued his profusion 
till he had only $2,178 left, which was f of what he had 
after purchasing his commission; what was his fortune? 

' Ans. $18,295.20. 

24. A general, placing his army in a square, had 231 
men left, which number was not enough by 44 to enable 
him to add another to each side; how many men in the 
army? Ans. 19,000. 

25. Suppose that a man stands 80 feet from a steeple, 
that a hne to him from the top of the steeple is 100 feet 
long, and that the spire is three times as high as the steeple; 
what is the length of a line reaching from the "top of the 
spire to the man ? Ans. 197 feet, nearly. 

26. How many acres in a square field measuring 70.71 
rods between the opposite corners? Ans. 151 acres. 

27. How long does it take sound to travel 120 miles'? 
Ans. 9 m. 14 sec. + 

28. A laborer dug a cellar, the length of which was 2 
times the width, and the- width 3 times the depth ; he 
removed 144 cubic yards of earth ; what was the length ? 
Ans. 36 feet. ^ ' 

29. A owes B $750, due in 8 months, but receiving 
$300 ready money, he extends the time of paying the 
remainder, so that B shall lose nothing; when was it 
paid ? Ans. 1 yr. 1 mo. 10 days. 

30. The sum of two numbers is 2661, and the product 
of the greater multipHed by 3 equals the product of the 



306 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

less multiplied by 5 ; what are the numbers ? Ans. 100,, 
and 1661. 

31. A park 10 rods square is surrounded by a walk 
which occupies yV% of the whole park; what is its width ? 
Ans. 8 ft. 3 in. 

32. How many square inches of leather will cover a 
ball 3J inches in diameter ? Ans. 38i sq. inches. 

33. How many solid inches in a globe 7 inches in 
diameter ? Ans. 1791 solid inches. 

34. What are the solid contents of a pyramid, the base 
of which is 4 feet square and the perpendicular height 9 
feet? Ans. 48 solid feet. 

35. What are the solid contents of a stick of timber 18 
feet long, one end of which is 9 inches square and the 
other end 4 inches square, uniformly diminishing through- 
out the whole length ? Ans. 5 solid feet 936 solid inches. 

36. What are the solid contents of a round log of wood 
36 feet long, 1.6 feet in diameter at one end, and diminish- 
ing gradually to a diameter of .9 of a foot at the other ?' 
Ans. 45.333+ solid feet. 

37. How many gallons of wine will a cask contain, the 
head diameter of which is 25 inches, and the bung diam- 
eter 31 inches, and the length 36 inches ?- Ans. 102.93+ 
gallons. 

38. Two men carry a kettle weighing 200 pounds ; the 
kettle is suspended on a pole, the bale being 2 feet 6 inches 
from the hands of one, and 3 feet 4 inches from the hands 
of the other ; how many pounds does each bear ? 
Ans 1 1141 pounds. 

^^^- 1 85f pounds. 

39. If a triangular piece of land 30 rods in length, be 
20 rods wide at one end and comes to a point at the other, 
what number of square rods does it contain ? Ans. 300. 

40. There are two globes; one of them is 1 foot in 
diameter, and the other 40 feet in diameter; how many of 
the smaller globes would it take to make 1 of the larger? 
Ans. 64,000. 

41. What is the area of a circle 1 mile in circumfer- 
ence? Ans. 50 a. 3 r. 28.7399 + r. 

42. A conical stack of hay is 20 feet high, and its base 
15 feet in diameter ; what is its weight, allowing 5 lbs. to a 
cubic foot? ^Tis. 5,890.5 lbs. 

43. How many bushels will a cubical bin contain whose- 
sides are 9 feet ? Ans. 585.80357 bushels. 

44. How many hogsheads will a cylindrical cistern 10' 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 307 

feet deep and GJ feet diameter contain ? Ans. 39.401 hhds. 

45. How far from the end of a stick of timber 30 feet 
long, of equal size from end to end, must a lever be placed 
so that 3 men, 2 at the lever and 1 at the end of the stick, 
may each carry i of its weight? Ans. 7i feet. 

46. If 100 eggs are placed in a straight line a rod apart, 
how many miles must a person travel to bring them one 
by one to a basket placed a rod from the first eersr ? Ans. 
31 m. 180 r. 

47. Said A to B: if I take one of your bags I shall 
have twice as many as you, and if I give you one of mine, 
we shall have an equal number? Ans. 5 and 7. 

48. Divide ^1 ,000 between A, B, and C, and give A 
$120 more than C, and C 195 more than B? Ans. $230 B's, 
$325 C's, $445 A's. • 

49. A man's desk was robbed three nights in succession: 
the first night half the number of dollars was taken and 
half a dollar more; the second, half the remainder was 
taken and half a dollar more; the third night, half of what 
was then left and half a dollar more, when it was found he 
had $50 left; how much had he at first ? Ans. $407. 

50. A owns f and B -j-V of a ship; A's share is worth 
$10,000 more than B's; what is the value of the ship? 
Ans. $32,000. 

51. A man gave his oldest son i of his property less 
$50; to the second he gave i; and to the youngest he gave 
the remainder, which was i less $10; what was the amount 
of his property ? Ans. $360. 

52. What number is that, y^^ and i of which being 
multiplied together, will produce the number itself? Ans. 
20. 

53. The difierence of two numbers is 53 and the dif- 
ference of their squares is 10,759 ; what are the numbers ? 
Ans. 75 and 128. 

54. The sum of two numbers is 120, and the difierence 
of their squares is 4,800 ; what are the numbers ? Ans. 
40 and 80. 

55. The diagonal of a square field is 120 rods ; what is 
its area? Ans. 7,200 rods. 

56. Find the side of the greatest square beam which 
can be hewn from a log 5 feet in diameter. Ans. 3.535519 
feet. 

57. A man wished to tie his horse by a rope so that he 
could feed on just an acre of ground ; how long must the 
rope be? Ans. 7.13645 rods. 



308 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

58. What number is that I of which exceeds f of it by 
45? Ans. 600. 

59. At what discount must I buy stocks, so that by 
selhng at 2 per cent, premium I may gain 20 per cent, on 
my investment ? Ans. 15 per cent. 

60. A debt was paid with interest August 18, 1857 ; 
had it been paid May 12, J 859, there would have been due 
$26 more ; what was the original debt? Ans. $250. 

61. Find the surface of a sphere whose solidity is 65.45 
cubic inches? Ans. 78.54 square inches. 

62. A man has a pile of wood 33 feet 9 inches long, 20 
feet wide, and 5 feet high; if it is piled in a cubical form, 
how high will it be ? Ans. 15 feet. 

68. Two merchants had each 40 gallons ofwineat$1.80 
a gallon; they wish to make it worth $1.20 a gallon; one 
pours in water, the other alcohol at 40 cents a gallon; 
how many more gallons in one mixture than in the other? 
Ans. 10 gallons. 

64. A contributed $1,400, B $2,200, C $1,875, B gained 
$27.30 more than C; require the total gain. Ans. $459.90. 

65. A owes B $2,500 due in 6 months; B wishes him to 
pay part now and retain the remainder 15 months; how 
much should he pay now? Ans. $1,500. 

66. After 5 gallons of water had been added to 45 
gallons of pure wine, the mixture was worth $1.26 per 
gallon; what was the pure wine worth per gallon? Ans. 
$1.40. 

67. At 10 per cent, premium, what bill of exchange on 
London can be bought for $3.30 ? Ans. £67 10s. 

68. What debt due in 4 months, together with $600 
due in 9 months, could be paid in 7 months, without loss 
to either ? 

69. A cistern is I full of water; after 35 gallons are taken 
out it is f full; how many gallons will it contain? Ans. 
120. 

70. I was married at the age of 21 ; if I live 19 years 
longer I shall have been married 60 years; what is my age? 
Ans. 62 years. 

71. A boat goes 161 miles an hour down stream, and 10 
miles an hour up stream; if it takes 22 J hours longer in 
coming up than going down, how far down did it go ? Ans. 
585 miles. 

72. I bought a horse for $156 due in 8 months, and 
sold him at once for $180; find the gain per cent., interest 
4J per cent. Ans. 18|^ per cent. 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 309 

73. After spending 2) per cent, of my money, and 25 
per cent, of the remainder, I had left $675; what had I at 
first? Am. $1,200. 

74. A man sold a house at 22 per cent, loss, losing 
$748; what did he receive for it? Ans. $2,652. 

75. To carry 7 t. 10 cwt. 25 miles costs $18.75; how 
much can be carried 125 miles for $131.25 ? Ans. 10 t. 10 
cwt. 

76. The base of a right-angle triangle is 42 feet, its 
hypotenuse 58; find the area? Ans. 84 square feet. 

77. At $1.47 a bushel, what cost 17 bushels, 3 pecks, 2 
quarts, 1 pint of fruit? Ans. $26.21. 

78. A boy hired to a mechanic for 20 weeks on condi- 
tion that he should receive $20 and a coat. At the end of 
12 weeks the boy quit work, when it was found that he 
was entitled to $9 and the coat ; what was the value of the 
coat? Ans. $7.50. 

79. A farmer sold 34 bushels of corn and 56 bushels 
of barley for $63.10, receiving 35 cents a bushel more for 
the barley than for the corn ; what was the price of each 
per bushel? Ans. 481, price of corn ; 831-, price of barley. 

80. Sold I of a lot of lumber for what I of it cost ; 
what per cent, was gained on the part sold ? Ans. 25 per 
cent. 

81. A, B and C can do a job of work in 12 days, C can 
do it in 24 days, and A in 34 days ; in what time can B do 
it alone ? Ans. Slf days. 

82. Of what principal is $150 the compound interest 
for 2 years at 7 per cent.? Ans. $1,035,196+. 

83. A man in Bufialo purchased a draft on St. Paul, 
Minnesota, for $5,320, drawn at 60 days, paying $5,141.78 ; 
what was the course of exchange? Ans. 2i per cent. 

84. What is the difference between half a solid foot and 
a solid half foot ? Ans. 648 cubic inches. 

S5. The bank discount of a certain sum for 6 months 
was $188.49 ; what would have been the true discount ? 
Ans. $180. 

86. The time since noon is -/y of the time to 4 o'clock 
p. M. ; what is the time ? Ans. 10 minutes past 1 o'clock p. m. 

87. A man gave f of an estate to A, f of the remainder 
to B, and the balance to C, who received $685 less than A ; 
require the value of the estate. Ans. $2,740. 

88. Bought some lemons for $7.20 ; had I received 30 
more, each would have cost f as much , how many did I 
buy? Ans. 90. 



310 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

89. The three sides of a triangle are 16, 63 and 65 ; find 
the area ? Ans. 504. 

90. A man having oranges at 4 cents each and apples 
at 2 for 1 cent, gained 20 per cent, by selling 5 dozen for 
$2.04 ; how many of each did he sell ? Ans. 40 oranges, 
20 apples. 

91. Interest $67.50, amount $217.50, time 5 years 7 
months 15 days ; require the rate. Ans. 8 per cent. 

92. A horse was tied by a rope 52 feet long, fastened to 
the top of a stake 20 feet high; over what area can he 
graze? Ans. 26.586+P. 

93. How many pencils must be bought for $1.00 so that 
20 per cent, may be gained by selling them 4 for 1 cent? 
Ans. 480. 

94. The square root of a certain number is 4,096; what 
is the cube root of the same number ? Ans. 256. 

95. The first term of an arithmetical series is 17, the 
common diff'erence 6, the last term 161; how many terms 
are there ? Ans. 25. 

96. A prism is 6 feet 4 inches high, on a base 3 feet 9 
inches square; find the solidity. Ans. 89 cubic feet, 108 
cubic inches. 

97. For a note of $340, discounted at 6 per cent., a bank 
paid $336.43; how many days had the note to run? Ans. 
60 days. 

98. If to a certain number its half he added, and the 
sum subtracted from 1,000, the remainder will be ten 
greater than the number itself; what is the number ? Ans. 
396. 

99. What is the area of a circle whose diameter is 1 
foot 1 inch ? Ans. 132.7326 square inches. 

100. A's income is 16 per cent, of his capital; he 
is taxed 2J per cent, of his income, and pays $26.04; 
what is his capital ? Ans. $6,510. 

101. The expense of building a public bridge was $1 ,- 
260.52, which was defrayed by a tax upon the property of 
the town. The rate of taxation was 3i mills on $1, and 
the collector's commission was 3J per cent.; what was the 
valuation of the property ? Ans. $401,920. 

102. A man received $33.25 interest on a sum of money 
loaned 5 years previous at 7 per cent. ; what was the sum 
lent? Ans. $95. 

103. A house that cost $8,250, rents for $750 a year; the 
insurance is -^jj per cent, and repairs i per cent, every 
year; what rate of interest does it pay ? A71S. 8 per cent. 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 311 

104. Bought $860 bank stock at 4 per cent, advance; 
sold at a discount of 2i per cent.: find the loss. Ans. 
^55.90. 

105. What is the difference between the true and the 
bank discount of $1,375.50 for 60 days, at 6 per cent.? 
Ans, $ .14. 

106. What per cent, will be gained by buying apples at 
the rate of 3 for 1 cent, and selling them at 3 cents each ? 
Ans. 800 per cent. 

107. Find two numbers whose difference equals 1,427, 
and f of the first equal I of the second. Ans. 12,843 and 
11,416. 

108. Find the solid contents of a globe whose diam- 
eter is 1 foot 3 inches? Ans. 1 cubic foot, 39.15 cubic 
inches. 

109. A, B and C bought a farm for $21,250, of which A 
paid $712 more than B, and $3,551 less than C; what sum 
did each pay? Ans. A, $6,137; B, $5,425; C, $9,688. 

110. At what time between 5 and 6 o'clock is the 
minute hand 14 minutes behind the hour hand ? Ans. 12 
minutes after 5 o'clock. 

111. What is the present worth of a debt due in 4 
years 8 months 10 davs, the true discount, at 6 per cent., 
being $169? Ans. $600. 

112. Divide 2,331 among A, B, and C, in the ratio of i, 

1 i. Ans. A, 945; B, 756; C, 630. 

113. From a piece of ground 30 rods wide and 50 rods 
long, a lot 25 feet wide and 100 feet long was sold for $275; 
find the value of the remainder at the same rate. Ans. 
$44,646.25. 

114. A man bought copper at 27 cents a pound; it lost 

2 per cent, in casting; at what price per pound must he sell 
the castings to gain 47 per cent.? Ans. 40J cents per 
pound. 

115. A man bought land at $30 an acre; how much 
must he ask an acre, that he may abate 25 per cent, from 
his former asking price and still make 20 per cent, on the 
purchase money? Ans. $48. 

116. A machinist sold 24 grain drills for $125 each; on 
one-half of them he gained 25 per cent., and on the remain- 
der he lost 25 per cent.; did he gain or lose on the whole, 
and how much ? Ans. $200 lost. 

117. A cistern has three pipes; the first will empty it in 
9 hours; the other two are equal to each other in size; if all 
three are left open the cistern will be filled in 6 hours; how 



312 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

long would it take the second or third alone to fill it. Ans, 
7^ hours. 

118. If 3 gallons of brandy, at $3 a gallon, and 5 quarts 
of alcohol, at 40 cents a gallon, be mixed with J gallon of 
water, for what must the mixture be sold a gallon to gain. 
37 per cent.? Ans. ^$2.7 A. 

119. Area of a circle 19,635 square feet; find the radius^ 
Ans. 2 feet 6 inches. 

120. Debt $245, discount $105, rate 8 per cent.; find the 
time. Ans. 9 years, 4 months, 15 days. 

121. The parallel sides of a trapezoid are 37 J feet and 
381 feet, and are 16 J feet apart; find the area. Ans. 627 
square feet. 

122. A horse costing $156.25 was sold for $256.25; what 
per cent, was gained ? Ans. 64 per cent. 

123. Principal $336, rate 10 per cent., amount $560; 
find the time. Ans. 6 years, 8 months. 

124. A can do a piece of work in 6 days, A and B can 
do it in 3f days, and A, B and C in 21 days; how long 
would it take A and C to do it? Ans. 4 days. 

125. To a certain number its fifth was added, and one- 
fifth of the result being added to the original number 
gave 6,076; find the number. Ans. 4,900. 

126. Find the area of a triangle whose sides are 10, 10^ 
andl4i. Ans. 52J. 

127. What number is that whose eighth exceeds its 
tenth by 14 less than its twelfth ? Ans. 240. 

128. What sum must I lend for 5 years 6 months, at 8 
per cent., to receive on settlement $957.24. Ans. $664.75. 

129. I gave A tV^ of my money, and B -jV of the 
remainder; if B received 18 cents more than A, how much 
had I at first? Ans. $36.48. 

130. Sold for a man 320 acres of land at $2.56i per 
acre, and sent him $779; what per cent, commission did 
I charge? Ans. 5 per cent. 

131. A man can do a piece of work in 45 days; if 
his son can work f as fast, how long will it take both 
to do it? Ans. 27 days. 

132. Divide $5,000 between A and B, so that A's share 
may be $400 less than twice B's. Ans. A's, $3,200; B's,, 
$1,800. 

133. Mix 2i pints at 37 cents a pint, with 7 pints at 
74 cents, and find the value of 1 pint of the mixture. 
Ans. 65 cents per pint. 

134. A globe 6 inches in diameter weighs 64 pounds; 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 313 

what will be the weight of another globe of the same ma- 
terial, the diameter being 1 foot 9 inches? Ans. 1 t., 
7 cwt., 1 qr.,191bs. 

135. Find the bank discount of a note of $825.50, 
payable in 3 months, rate at 6 per cent. Ans. $12.79. 

136. If i of a number be subtracted from i of the 
number, the remainder will be 6 less than i of the num- 
ber; what is the number? Ayis. 180. 

137. What must be paid for a draft on London for 
£256 10s, at 10 per cent, premium? Ans. $1,254. 

138. What is the equated time on the following debts: 
$180 due in 4 months, $540 due in 7 months, and $280 
due in 10 months ? Ans. 7 months and 9 days. 

139. If a certain number be diminished by its i, and f 
of the remainder be added to the first number, the sum 
wiU be 18.24 ; require the number? Ans. 11.52. 

140. If 2 ounces of silver, worth $1.10 an ounce, are 
melted with 2 ounces of gold worth 94 cents a pwt., what is 
the compound worth per ounce? Ans. $9.95. 

141. Two men are 90 miles apart and travel towards 
each other, A starting 1 hour before B ; A goes 9 miles in 
2 hours, B 11 miles in 4 hours ; how far will each travel 
before they meet ? Ans. A ■57|f miles, B 32f f miles. 

142. What date is 7 months 15 days before July 15th, 
1861? Ans. November 30, 1860. 

143. By selling at 33 cents a pound twice as much is 
gained as by selling at 29 cents a pound ; what per cent, is 
gained by selling at 32 cents a pound ? Ans. 28 per cent. 

144. What per cent, of I is f? Ans. 88f ? 

145. In how many years will the error of the Julian 
Calendar involve the loss of a day ? Ans. 128f years. 

146. At what time between 12 and 1 o'clock do the 
hour and minute hands of a clock point in directions ex- 
actly opposite ? Ans. 12 o'clock 32 -f-^ minutes. 

147. Suppose A, B and C to start from the same point 
and to travel in the same direction round a circular island 
73 miles in distance, A at the rate of 6, B of 10 and C of 16 
miles per day ; in what time will they be next together ? 
Ans. 36^ days. 

148. A blacksmith agreed to shoe a horse for 1 mill for 
the first nail in his shoe, 2 mills for the second nail, and so 
on; the shoes contain 32 nails; how much was he to receive? 
Ans. $4,294,967,295. 

149. Sold a horse for $37.05, losing 81 per cent.; what 
was the loss? Ans. $157.95. 



314 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

150. The mainmast of a ship is 95 feet long, the diame- 
ter of the base is Si feet, that of the top 2J feet ; what is 
its solidity? Ans. 677.73475 feet. 

151. A club spent £2 12s. Id ; on settling, each paid as 
many pence as there were individuals in the party ; how 
many were there in the party? Ans. 25 persons. 

152. A grocer divided a barrel of flour into two parts 
:so that the smaller contained t as much as the other ; how 
many pounds were there in each ? Ans. 78f pounds, 117f 
pounds. 

153. A man having spent i and i of his money, had 
£48t left; how much had he at first ? Ans. £292. 

154. Iff of a ton of chalk cost £f-, what wih ■§• of a 
ton cost? Ans. £1. 

155. A man was hired 50 days, receiving 75 cents for 
every day he worked, and forfeiting 25 cents for every day 
he was idle; he received $27.50; how many days did he 
work? Ans. 40 days. 

156. A gentleman paid $18.90 among his laborers; to 
each boy 6 cents, to each woman 8 cents, and to each 
man 16 cents; there were three women for each boy, and 
two men for each woman; how many men were there? 
Ans. 90. 

157. A man paid $82.50 for a sheep, a cow, and a yoke 
of oxen; for the cow 8 times, for the oxen 24 times as 
much as for the sheep; what did he pay for each? Ans. 
$2.50, $20, and $60. 

158. A, B and C commence trade with $3,053.25, and 
gain $610.65; A's stock + B's is to B's + C's, as 5 to 7; 
and C's stock — B's, is to C's + B's, as 1 to 7; what is 
each one's part of the gain? Ans. A's gain, $135.70; B's, 
$203.55; C's, $271.40. 

159. There is a windlass, the wheel of which is 60 
inches in diameter, and the axis, around which the rope 
coils, is 6 inches in diameter; how many pounds on the 
axle will be balanced by 240 pounds at the wheel ? Ans. 
2,4.00 pounds. 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



THEORY AND PRACTICE OF 
TEACHING. 



1. What is it to educate a human being aright? 

2. What is economy ? 

3. What is political economy ? 

4. What are some of the principles of a true political 
-economy ? 

5. Do individuals have instincts ? 

6. What should be the greatest accomplishment of 
all human beings ? 

7. How can these accomplishments be acquired ? 

8. How shall we judge a nation in the scale of civili- 
ization ? 

9. What does the theory of practice of teaching em- 
brace ? 

10. Of what does school economy treat ? 

11. Define methods of instruction. 

12. What do you understand by methods of culture ? 

13. Of what should we treat in the history of edu- 
cation ? 

14. To what must the American people give the praise 
for the wonderful development of the country's industries, 
and its arts and sciences ? 

15. What should we take into consideration in making 
preparations for the school ? 

16. What would embrace a suitable location ? 

17. What should be adopted as a proper arrangement 
for school-grounds ? 

18. What care should you exercise over the school 
liouse, the furuiture, the apparatus, the grounds ? 

315 



316 THE QUESTION BOOK, 

19. Should the teacher go to his boarding place for 
dinner ? 

20. State the objects of graded schools. 

21. How are schools graded ? 

22. What branches are taught in the higher depart- 
ment of these graded schools ? 

23. Upon what should the size of a school-house depend? 

24. Describe a suitable school-house for rural districts. 

25. How should a school-house be warmed? 

26. How should a school-room be ventilated ? 

27. What should be the furniture of a school-room ? 

28. How should the teacher's desk be arranged? 

29. With what apparatus should schools be supplied ? 

30. What should be the temperature of a school-room ? 

31. Of what use are school-records ? 

32. What should be the first step in the organization 
of a school ? 

33. Give an outline of work preliminary to the organ- 
ization of a school ? 

34. What benefits will arise by forming these acquaint- 
ances ? 

35. What should be the programme for the first day 
at school ? 

36. How prepare a programme for every day's work? 

37. What are the employments of a school? 

38. What are the objects of study ? 

39. By what principles should incentives to study be 
tested ? 

40. What incentives are often used to create ambition 
and interest? 

41. Should these artificial stimulations be employed? 

42. What are the proper incentives to study ? 

43. What are the objects of education ? 

44. What are the objects of recitations ? 

45. How should the recitation be conducted ? 

46. What is necessary for a good recitation ? 

47. What preparation should the teacher make for the 
recitation ? 

48. How would you teach grammar ? 

49. How would you teach geography ? 

50. What is a good plan for studying history ? 

51. Why is it necessary to take exercise ? 

52. Define school government. 

53. Under what heads may school government be 
embraced ? 



THEORY AND PRACTICE OP TEACHING. 317 

54. Define ethics. 

55. Define school ethics. 

56. Who are the important factors in the school ? 

57. What may be considered as some of the most 
important qualifications of the teacher ? 

58. What may be considered as the school-duties of 
pupils ? 

59. What is discipline ? 

60. What are the general species of school govern- 
ment ? 

61. What may be considered as proper penalties ? 

62. What may be considered improper penalties? 

63. What actions of the teacher should be specially 
denounced ? 

64. What things should every teacher perform ? 

65. What things should the teacher avoid ? 

66. What is good education ? 

67. What is teaching? 

68. What is learning ? 

69. Who will be successful in teaching ? 

70. Who will fail as a successful teacher ? 

71. In what divisions are the faculties of the mind 
comprised? 

72. What faculty comes first in the natural order of 
development ? 

73. How is the intellect developed ? 

74. What are the sources of knowledge ? 

75. What is empirical knowledge ? 

76. What is that knowledge called which is derived 
through reason ? 

77. What does this knowledge include ? 

78. What is the difference between teaching and talking ? 

79. What is a remedy for whispering ? 

80. What benefits arise from the practice of music ? 

81. What are the purposes of examinations ? 

82. V/hat relation does the school hold to the state ? 

83. What conditions does teaching presuppose ? 

84. What are the practical points to be attained by an 
education ? 

85. V/hat does education do for a people ? 

86. How should pupils be dealt with at the beginning 
of their school experience ? 

87. How secure a full, prompt and regular attendance? 

88. What benefits arise by reciting in concert ? 

89. How pronounce a word for spelling ? 



318 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

90. What are some of the most common evils of our 
schools ? 

91. What should form the foundation for a system of 
teaching ? 

92. What is meant by Language Lessons ? 

93. What is method ? 

94. How many methods are there in teaching ? 

95. What is the Socratic method of instruction ? 

96. When should a pupil commit to memory ? 
,7"^- What is the great end of school training ? 

98. J^hould a teacher confine himself to the text-book 
during recitation ? 

99. How much review work is necessary ? 

100. How do you wish to have your class located when 
reciting ? 

101. What should a person do who contemplates teach- 
ing for the first time ? 

102. How do you classify the elements of Pedagogics ? 

103. What other names are sometimes applied to these 
elements ? 

104. Of what does gymnastics treat ? 

105. Of what does didactics treat? 

106. Of what does pragmatics treat ? 

107. Into what divisions is intelligence divided? 

108. What is the preceptive faculty ? 

109. What is the conceptive faculty ? 

110. What is thinking ? 

111. What are the elements of success in teaching? 

112. Should a pupil be required to report on his own 
conduct? Why? 

113. What important branch of study is often neglected 
in our schools ? 

114. What co^imon branches should receive special 
attention ? 

115. What constitutes good reading ? 

116. Why would you place mental arithmetic as of 
special attention ? 

117. How should primary instruction be given ? 

118. How should parents talk to their children in in- 
fancy ? 

119. What is Kindergarten instruction? 

120. What does the Theory and Practice of Teaching 
embrace? 

121. Give the names of some of the most important 
educational reformers. 



ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS 



ON 



THEORY AND PRACTICE OF 
TEACHING. 



1. It is to direct the mind, the thoughts, the feehngs, 
the instincts, into the channel of truth, morality, enter- 
prise, determination and economy. 

2. It is the careful utilization of one's forces, and may 
relate to mind, strength, money, or any of the depart- 
ments of mind or nature by which the greatest attain- 
ments can be acquired with the least expense of those 
forces. 

3. It is the utilization of the forces of government, the 
revenues, and the establishing of those laws of economy 
by which the greatest good will be distributed among the 
people. 

4. To administer the laws without fear or favor, to 
prevent monopoly, to encourage thrift, to destroy the 
weeds of indolence and vice, to teach the principles of self- 
reliance, of co-operation, of manliness, and the grand and 
noble elements of truth and virtue. 

5. We are taught that reason is the great faculty by 
which man becomes the image of his Creator, and that 
instinct is nature's gift to the lower orders of creation. To 
us this teaching, although grand and noble in thought and 
purpose, does not make the true distinction between man 
and the brute. 

Man, although endowed with the power of reason, 
often displays another element of his being. He in- 

319 



320 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

stinctively laughs, he crys, he mistrusts, he is^ warned by 
some influence, and in many ways receives impressions 
which, like the instincts of animals, work without knowl- 
edge or reason. The same may be applied to the power of 
reason with the ape, the dog, the horse, and other animals 
by which the dividing line between reason and instinct 
cannot be measured. 

6. To strive to control his passions; to speak like a 
lady or gentleman; to rise above the vulgar and indifferent, 
and to be a Christian in thought, deed and purpose. 

7. By the right cultivation of the mind while young. 
"As the twig is bent so the tree is inclined." 

8. We can judge them by the history of their schools, 
the universal distribution of the same general knowledge. 
Knowledge is the lever that controls the progress of the 
world. It is the sword of success, the armor of defense, 
and the power that prevails. 

9. It embraces: School Economy, Methods of Instruc- 
tion, Methods of Culture, The History of Education. 

10. It treats of the best modes of the organization of 
the school, and of utilizing the means of instruction. 

11. The best means of imparting knowledge. 

12. The study of the physical and mental character of 
man by which his faculties may be developed and 
strengthened. 

13. We should compare the past with the present ; 
show the growth, the advancement and advantages which 
now mark the progress of that education. 

14. To the free gift of a national education. 

15. There should be a suitable location, properly 
graded, drained and shaded. The house should be built 
for comfort, health and pleasure. The furniture, appar- 
atus, records and studies should be carefully arranged and 
selected. The whole should be homelike and attractive. 

16. A spot that is convenient of access. Suitability of 
the grounds and surroundings. Healthiness of the neigh- 
borhood. Beauty of the location. 

17. They should be thoroughly drained, dry, level, 
sodded, ornamented with shade trees, house for fuel, neatly 
fenced and supplied with pure water. 

18. The teacher should consider the whole as his own; 
he should be thoughtful and vigilant ; he should caution 
when necessary, and always feel the deep responsibility 
which has been placed upon him. ' 

19. Under no consideration should he leave the school 



THEORY AND PRACTICE OP TEACHING. 321 

grounds, as his presence is required to keep peace, order, 
prevent teasing, protect property and strive to impress 
upon all the value of being ladies and gentlemen. 

20. They economize the labor of instruction ; lessen the 
cost; make teachers more effective; promj)te good order in 
school; prompt the ambition of pupils; provide instruction 
in the higher branches of learning; and remove the neces- 
sity of children's leaving home to obtain a good educa- 
tion. 

21. Into the Primary, the Grammar and the High 
School. 

22. The High School Course embraces algebra and 
higher mathematics, rhetoric, political economy, history, 
physiology, and the studies of nature, business and 
language. 

23. Upon the number of pupils in attendance. An 
ungraded school, to be taught by one teacher, should con- 
tain at least nine hundred square feet. A house designed 
for fifty to eighty scholars and one recitation room, 
fifteen hundred square feet. One for eighty to one hun- 
dred and twenty scholars and two recitation rooms, two 
thousand square feet. 

24. It should be rectangular in form, the door entering 
at the south end, while the north end should be without 
entrance or windows. The room should be from twelve 
to sixteen feet high. It should contain an apartment 
for clothing and necessaries. It should be well lighted, 
warmed and ventilated. 

25. In rural districts it would be useless to recom- 
mend the modern appliances for heating, but we can im- 
prove the stove often in use. Provide a good stove, pipe 
and chimney. Surround the stove with a tin casing 
made to extend from the floor to about one foot above the 
top. There should be a door in the casing for putting in 
fuel ; and a trunk for the conveyance of fresh air should 
start outside of the building, run under the floor and com- 
municate directly with the door. The object of a tin 
casing and trunk for conveying fresh air must be appar- 
ent to all, as one will prevent the burning of clothing and 
the other to supj)ly a pure current of air upon which com- 
bustion depends. 

26. Ventilation should be regulated by the lowering 
of the windows from the top instead of raising the bot- 
tom sash, especially in cool weather. This will prevent a 
direct draft upon the heads of the scholars. Openings in 



322 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

the ceiling and doors will also be a means of relieving^ 
the heated pressure. 

27. The desks should be of modern approval and set 
so as to enable all pupils to pass to and from their seats 
without creating confusion. There should be a library of 
reference books ; a complete dictionary ; a geographical 
gazetteer ; a biographical dictionary ; a popular ency- 
clopedia ; sets of historical and physiological charts | 
out-line maps. 

28. It should embody a plain business office desk,, 
with drawers, shelves, closets and book-rack. 

29. The most approved are: A set of cards for teach- 
ing the alphabet, pronunciation, spelling, and elementary 
reading, with a stand to hang them upon ; letter-blocks,, 
and a chart of elementary sounds ; writing charts ; drawing: 
cards and material ; a numerical frame, and sets of square 
and cube root blocks ; a globe, a set of outline maps, and 
a Tellurian ; charts of history ; a case of minerals and 
curiosities ; engravings ; a thermometer. 

30. In our estimation it should be 72° Fahr., although 
many claim this temperature is too high, but we must, 
remember that the moving teacher cannot judge by his 
feelings what would please his scholars. 

31. To aid the teacher in his work ; to give informa- 
tion to parents and school officers ; to furnish educational 
statistics ; to exert a beneficial influence upon the pupils. 

32. To produce a good impression. The language- 
should be mild, but interesting. There should be no show 
of superiority in power or knowledge. You should 
arrange so as to obtain the confidence and respect, holding 
at the same time a deep interest for the instruction of 
those placed in your charge. 

33. The young teacher should consider well his adap- 
tation to a particular school before engaging it. He should 
study the difficulties which he might encounter ; he 
should lay his plans before the school officers and ask 
their advice ; the contract should be made in writing, and 
if possible, the teacher should make the acquaintance of 
parents before opening of school. 

34. It will convince the people of an interest in the 
school, and draw out their sympathies and general interest. 
It will assist in forming calculations and how to organize. 
It will reflect the characters of those who are most fore- 
most in mischief and good behavior, and it will give a. 
better chance for the study of human character. 



THEORY AND PRACTICE OF TEACHING. 323 

^ 35. Furnish something from the beginning that will 
interest ; establish order in every movement ; enquire how 
studies have formerly been arranged and how conducted 
Mention the great principle of order, as though other rules 
ThZ^I^U Tu ^^J^^V^POseupon them stipulations 
that shall or shall not be done. Be moderate in demands, 
but impress upon their minds the necessity of walking 
orderly of studying orderly, and of keeping the school? 
room pleasant and quiet. 

36. By the advice and consent of the pupils form a s vs- 
tem of work; arrange the studies systematically ; be 
prompt m the recitations, in study and in exercise. 

67. btudy, recitations and exercise. 

, 38. To obtain knowledge, discipline, aspiration and effi- 
ciency. 

39. They should be continuous, and arise from the 

Teamin'' ""^ circumstances connected with 

sha£lTS;t""^^^ ^""'^*^^^' ^^^^ of punishment; 
• th .^f "^i condemn and some allow. One bad feature 
is that It often creates jealousies and ill-feelings. As an 
Illustration, the author will mention a circumstance which 
occurred in 1872 while teaching a district school. The 
term was within two weeks of completion, and by request 
a class of thirty-two scholars was organized for spelling 
each taking his place according to the number of ticket 
drawn there being thirty-two numbers. A record was 
kept of position drawn and compared the last day with 
the position then held. The contest was exciting, as each 
was stnving to hold his own and to get above his neigh- 
bor. The one drawing ticket No. 1 was avery poor speller 
and day by day found her way towards the foot! until 
she was so near that position that school became unbeara- 
ble, and she took her books home the day before school 
was out. 

42 They should have the approbation of the teacher 
and their parents and friends. There should be a stimu- 
lus for an honorable position in the school and in society 
a pleasure to overcome difficulties; to gratify curiositv • 
to succeed m life; to the enjoyment of knowledge and the 
hope of future rewards. 

43. It is the development of the faculties; the acquisi- 
tion ot knowledge and its wise application to the uses of 
liie. 



824 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

44. It is to test the knowledge, the power of speech, of 
explanation and the development of expressions. It gives 
confidence and demands a careful study of the subject 
under discussion. It induces thought and quickens percep- 
tion. 

45. It should cover the general points in the lesson by- 
brie f and comprehensive statements. The lesson preced- 
ing should be carefully reviewed, and in carrying 
this preceding action to the point of commencement a 
new examination of to-day's lesson should again be given 
and this carried into the study of to-morrow. 

46. A live, intelligent teacher ; recitation seats ; black- 
boards ; apparatus ; reference books ; call beU ; ventil- 
ation and proper temperature. 

47. He should have a thorough knowledge of the sub- 
ject, and depend upon a general discussion rather than 
quote the words of the book. 

48. Of all studies grammar is open to general explana- 
tions more than others. Books should be used only as a 
source from which to draw knowledge. No fixed plan of 
recitation should be followed. The elements of grammar 
should be given first and carefully illustrated. Definitions 
should be learned only as applied. There should be no 
rotation, no fixed laws of advancement. Analyzing should 
be introduced as soon as we have asked the first question. 
We should teach from observations, simple at first, or 
until the main principles are thoroughly comprehended. 
Do not commence too young, as grammar requires such 
comparisons that the mind must be able to see them. 

49. Quite similar to that of grammar. Give lessons 
which will compare one section with another. It is not 
necessary to be confined to one book, as the same prin- 
ciples are embodied in all of them. Have a variation of 
topics. Call for the various productions of South America 
and where produced. This is enough for one lesson, unless 
you prove its climate and position. Better have a full 
knowledge of a little than fail in big attempts. Follow 
with other questions of interest of the same country. The 
author once conducted a large class without a book for his 
reference, but in the class there were eight difi^erent geogra- 
phies. The plan worked admirably, although a case of 
necessity. Please bear this in mind ; do not give long and 
diflBcult lessons. Do not forget the apparatus. 

60. On this subject the teacher should be well posted. 
He should map out the points of greatest interest, and as 



THEORY AND PRACTICE OP TEACHING. 325 

the class advances, give the subdivisions. Do not be 
afraid to call up a subject at the beginning, the middle, or 
the end. Review is the great secret of success. 

51. Because it is necessary to health, strength and 
study. 

52. It is a proper organization of order, thought and 
action. It is the means of developing a love for study 
and improvement. . 

53. As School Ethics, Retributions, Legislation and 
Administration. 

54. The science which treats of human rights and 
duties. 

55. It relates to the rights and duties of persons con- 
nected with the school. 

56. The teacher. 

The general school-officers. 

The communities that found and support schools. 

The pupils. 

57. He should have common sense, knowledge, teach- 
ing power, government, and love of the work. 

58. It is given as duties to themselves, to one another, 
to the school property, to the teacher, to the school- 
officers, to visitors, to society, and to God. 

59. A close or thorough application to some particular 
subject or subjects. In school life it is often applied to 
the correction of particular errors and faults. 

60. They are considered as force, authority, and love. 

61. Privation of recitations, of recess, of position in 
class, reproof, reports to parents, suspension, expulsion, 
punishment, withholding favors, special penalties. 

62. Threatening, scolding, asking for excuses, whipping 
in anger, compulsory study as a punishment, physical or 
mental torture beyond the absolute demand of the case. 

63. Any sudden or violent action, as throwing rulers 
or slapping the head. Care should be taken not to punish 
for offenses done beyond the jurisdiction of the school- 
yard. 

64. Convince your scholars by your conduct that you 
are their friend ; take special care that the school-house 
and appendages are kept in good order ; be accurate ; 
punctual; cheerful ; study the art of aptly illustrating a 
difficult subject; teach honesty and morality, and strive 
at all times to win the esteem of your pupils. 

65. He should guard against prejudices ; he should 
ride no "hobbies;" never lose his patience while reason- 



THE QUESTION BOOK. 

ing with parents ; avoid wounding the feelings of a dull 
scholar ; never compare one child with another ; avoid 
making excuses to visitors ; have nothing to do with other 
business in school hours; do not attempt to teach too 
many things; do not allow pupils to direct their own 
studies. 

66. It is the cultivation of the nobler sentiments of 
man. It is the art that commands understanding, that 
subdues his passions, that extends the power of reason 
and begets a pure conscience. 

67. It is to communicate knowledge — to give instruc- 
tion. 

68. It is to acquire knowledge — to be instructed. 

69. Those who can comprehend human character," who 
can control their passions, and who have a love for the 
business. 

70. Those who teach b 3cause of the wages, and at the 
same time have their mind on other matters of business. 
A teacher cannot divide his thoughts and feehngs. It is a 
business, or profession, that requires the whole response of 
the faculties and will admit of no delays or thoughtless 
acts. 

71. They comprise three general divisions — the Intel- 
lect, the Sensibility and the Will. 

72. The development of the intellect. 

73. By the acquisition of knowledge. 

74. They are the Senses and the Reason. 

75. The knowledge of experience, derived through the 
senses, which includes all that we know through the senses 
of seeing, hearing, touching, tasting, smelling, and through 
the emotional feelings. 

76. It is called rational knowledge. 

77. All that comes from the power of study and 
thought. It is the development of the mind and under- 
standing. 

78. One communicates knowledge by a course of rea- 
soning, while talking is familiar or unrestrained conversa- 
tion. 

79. Whispering usually originates from a lack of in- 
terest. Produce a love for school and its advancement 
and whispering will be easily controlled. 

80. Music feeds upon the chords of love and builds up 
a course of friendship andrespect. It softens the thoughfe 
and inspires deeper and more sacred feelings. 

81. To test the knowledge of the pupil and determine 



THEORY AND PRACTICE OF TEACHING. 327 

if he nas made real progress in his studies. It is a 
review. 

82. It is the agent appointed by the state for the pur- 
pose of preventing ignorance, raising the standard of 
moral and literary culture, and increasing the general 
prosperity. 

83. A certain degree of capacity on the part of the 
pupil, a degree of knowledge and skill on the part of the 
teacher, and a knowledge to be acquired. 

84. It should induce each individual to be more indus- 
trious ; more ambitious ; • more trustworthy ; more active 
and systematic; more cheerful; more far-sighted ; more 
economical as producers or preservers of property. 

85. It tends to make them more orderly ; more sub- 
missive to good laws ; more independent in political 
thoughts ; more charitable ; more refined, and creates a 
higher plane of civilization. 

86. They should be received kindly, and every effort 
possible should be made to obtain their confidence. 

87. By making the school-room pleasant and at- 
tractive ; by preserving good order ; by genuine interest 
on the part of the teacher. 

88. It stimulates the timid to overcome their diffidence ; 
it cultivates the voice, and produces uniformity of 
expression. 

89. Exactly as it should be pronounced in reading. 

90. A want of interest on the part of parents and 
others ; frequent change of teachers ; diversity of class- 
books ; teachers not qualified ; defective supervision. 

91. It should be the capabihty of the pupil ; the 
educational means to be employed, and the manner of 
performing the work. 

92. A simple means of expressing the fundamental 
principles of some line of knowledge. 

93. It is the way of performing an act. 

94. Six: The Text Book, Oral, Socratic, Topical, 
Discussion, and Lecture. 

95. A system of questioning. 

96. Not until the subject is thoroughly understood. 
If it cannot be understood it will be folly to commit to 
memory. 

97. It is mental development ; the training of thought 
towards the practical pursuits of life ; to disperse ignor- 
ance and superstition, and to encourage a better mode of 
living. 



828 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

98. The book should be used as a guide for conducting- 
the recitation, but under no consideration should he 
depend upon it for the interest which should be given. 
As a general rule, a book teacher is an uninteresting 
individual, a telephone that only communicates what the 
sentence reads. 

99. This branch of study cannot be measured. It is 
too important to be limited, and should be continued in 
as much as circumstances will allow. 

100. They should be brought as closely together as 
possible, and in as convenient a position to the apparatus 
of the school-room as is practicable. 

101. He should lay out plans in accordance with the 
best efforts which he can recall in his experience as a 
scholar, or from other observations. 

102. The special elements are classified as : The 
Physical, the Intellectual, and the Practical. 

103. They are known as Gymnastics, Didactics, and 
Pragmatics. 

104. Of athletic exercises. The training of the muscular 
system. ,^ 

105. It is the art or science of teaching. 

106. It is the science of business. 

107. We may divide it into Preception, Conception,, 
and Thinking. 

108. It is the directing of the moral conduct, and is 
most sensitive to its teachings in the youth. 

109. The faculty of comprehending an idea. 

110. It is the faculty of thought, of calculation, of 
plans and of reasoning. 

111. It is the executive power, self-control, thorough 
knowledge, and the faculty of imparting that knowledge. 

112. He should not; it is a strong incentive to report 
incorrectly and might lead to untruthfulness. 

113. It is spelling. 

114. Reading, spelling, mental arithmetic and writing.. 

115. A clear, distinct utterance, interspersed with 
proper emphasis and expression. 

116.^ Because it requires the use of language to demon- 
strate ; it is a mental education; it cultivates memory and. 
is one of the necessary business principles of life. 

117. Largely by oral explanations. 

118. Their language should be as simple and as cor- 
rectly spoken as possible. They should not exaggerate 
nor be deceiving. Whatever is said, let it be the truth. 



THEORY AND PRACTICE OF TEACHING. 329 

119. It is the teaching of young children by the use of 
objects, solids, surfaces and outlines. It is a study by 
which the eye conveys the idea, rather than the thought. 
It is much practiced in cities, and considered a fine mode 
of instruction. 

120. It embraces the whole science of education. It 
trains the mind, develops thought, induces activity and 
builds up strength and harmony. 

121. Aschan, Montaigne, Ratich, Milton, Locke, Rous- 
seau Pestalozzi, Arnold, Mann, Huxley, Spencer and others. 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



ALCOHOL AND TOBACCO, 

And Their Effects Upon the Human System. 



1. How and by whom was alcohol discovered? 

2. What is alcohol? 

3. What must be the condition of fruits or grains to pro- 
duce alcohol? 

4. What are the chemical properties of alcohol ? 

5. How does alcohol preserve meats, insects or animals ? 

6. What are the various names of liquids which are 
largely composed of alcohol ? 

7. What are some of the liquids not so largely composed 
of this fluid? 

8. What is the difference between alcohol and whisky? 

9. What is intoxication ? 

10., What is the difference between food and alcohol? 
11.* What is the difference between fermentation and 
distillation ? 

12. What is a still ? 

13. What is the worm of the still ? 

14. What are malt liquors ? 

15. How is malt made ? 

16. What parts of the body are affected by the use of 
alcohol ? 

17 . Give the circulation of alcohol in the body ? 

18. Is there any nourishment in alcohol? 

19. How does this fluid assist in restoring the low 
pulsation of an invalid ? 

20. What does alcohol do to the stomach ? 

21. What experiment will prove this assertion? 

22. How is this proved by actual experience in man? 

23. Why do some people take a glass of liquor before 
eating ? 

24. What disease is liable to attack the person who 
continues in drinking ? 

331 



332 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

25. What effect do contagious diseases have upon, 
habitual drinkers ? Why ? 

26. What causes the redness of the nose and skin? 

27. What floes alcohol do to the heart? 

28. What does it do to the blood-vessels ? 

29. How does it act upon the lungs ? 

30. Describe how it affects the brain? 

31. Why does a drunken man have imperfect vision ? 

32. How does alcohol injure the liver? 

33. How does it affect the kidneys ? 

34. How does it injure the mind ? 

35. How do we know that alcohol is a poison ? 

36. Do habitual drinkers crave for the taste of liquors ?" 

37. Does alcohol protect from cold? 

38. What is the experience of sailors in cases of ship- 
wreck and great exposure ? 

39. How could alcohol be used under such circum- 
stances and become a benefit to those thus exposed ? 

40. Knowing the evil effects of drink, why do people' 
continue to harbor its presence, protect its sale and defend, 
its influence ? 

TOBACCO. 

41. When was tobacco discovered and when introduced 
to the people of civilization ? 

42. What is the difference in effect between alcohol and 
tobacco ? 

43. What poisonous elements are found in tobaccO' 
smoke ? 

44. What is the effect of the carbonic acid ? 

45. What are the effects from carbonic oxide ? 

46. What does the ammonia produce? 

47. What is nicotine ? 

48. What does nicotine produce ? 

49. Give some of the actions of tobacco on the human, 
body? 

50. (rive some of its actions on the mind ? 

51 . What forms of smoking are most injurious? 

52. What is opium ? 

53. Is it dangerous to use ? 

54. What is laudanum and morphine ? 

55. What is hashish ? 

56. What is the areca nut? Where found ? 

57. What caution should be observed in regard to the 
use of these liquids and drugs? 



ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS 



ON 



ALCOHOL AND TOBACm 

And Their Effects Upon the Human System. 



1. It is claimed that Paracelsus, a chemist of the four- 
teenth century, accidentally discovered alcohol, and upon 
testing its power boasted of having found the essence of 
life, the power to cure the weak and the great benefactor of 
mankind. 

2. A liquid obtained from the fermentation and distilla- 
tion of fruits and grains, 

3. They must pass into a stage of decomposition or rot. 
It occurs only where sugar or starch is one of the ingredi- 
ents. 

4. It will not freeze ; it burns without smoke ; it readily 
dissolves gums, oils and forms various mixtures ; it is used 
in preserving meats, in perfumery, in thermometers, in 
varnishes, in spirit lamps, and in various forms of the arts 
and medicines. 

5. It absorbs the w^ater in the meat an'd prevents decay. 

6. Whisky, brandy, rum and gin. These are the prin- 
cipal forms of distillations, although scores of mixtures are 
formed. 

7. They are wine, beer, ale and cider. 

8. Alcohol is the pure spirit and too strong for human 
drink, while whisky is doctored alcohol to meet the taste. 

9. It is drunkenness, a loss of brain power, a condition of 
mental stupor, a momentary fool. 

10. Food nourishes and sustains the body ; alcohol ex- 
cites the nervous system, clouds the intellect, poisons the 
blood and injures the body. 

11. Fermentation is the simple process of nature on 
the juices of fruits and grains. Distillation is the process 
of taking out the alcohol found in fermentation and is 
much stronger. 



334 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

12. It is a copper boiler in which a liquid containing^ 
alcohol is placed. The alcohol rises in a vapor and is car- 
ried by a tube through a cask of cold water and is con- 
densed, passing out of the tube in a liquid form stronger 
than the one boiled. 

13. It is the tube mentioned above which, in passing 
through the cold water, is coiled around like a spiral line 
or worm in order to have a greater surface for cooling. . The 
worm-tub is the cask holding the tube or worm. 

14. Those manufactured from malt (barley) and hops; 
they are beer, ale and porter. 

15. Malt is made by placing a quantity of wet barley 
in a warm room and allowed to sprout, after which it is 
dried in a furnace and ground. 

16. The stomach, the heart, the liver, the lungs, the 
muscles, the blood, the brain, the skin, the bones, in fact 
every part of the body. 

17 . After being taken into the stomach the organs reject 
it as of no use in nourishment and it is absorbed by the veins 
and carried to the liver, which in turn forces it on to the 
heart and from there it is driven to the lungs and by the ac- 
tion of the atmosphere a large proportion is drawn off with 
the breath and the body is relieved from the poison which 
it could not use, but a portion of this fiery fluid did not 
escape and the blood carries it to the brain where it pro- 
duces excitement, madness and stupefaction. 

18. There is none whatever. Its immediate effect is to 
quicken pulsation and arouse the vital forces of the 
body. 

19. Its effects being almost immediate the vital forces 
are quickened and by the use of medicines or nourish- 
ments the system is sustained, otherwise the excitement 
would die out and the system would fall to a lower standard 
than at the time of taking the stimulation. 

20. It prevents the proper action of the gastric juice on 
the food taken for nourishment. 

21. Take some of the juice from the stomach of a calf 
which has just been killed, and mix alcohol with it and 
you will notice a chemical action upon the pepsin, which 
prevents its work upon the food. In otheij words, the 
food is preserved until the stomach can throw it off and 
commence digestion. 

22. Some men were paid their week's wages just after 
dinner on Saturday. They got drunk and remained so 
until the next day at noon. On coming back to con- 



ALCOHOL AND TOBACCO. 335> 

sciousness they were very sick, and an emetic was given 
to them which brought up their Saturday'^s dinner just as- 
it had gone into their stomach. The food had been pre- 
served by the alcohol and relief could only come by tak- 
ing an emetic. 

23. Simply to gratify their taste. The idea that it is 
beneficial to the appetite is absurd and ridiculous. The 
plea is an excuse to cover up a practice they know to be 
not only dangerous morally, but a crime against the physic- 
al system. 

24. It is the terrible affliction, dyspepsia. 

25. The mortality is very great in cases of cholera and. 
yellow fever. The reason is that the body is not in con- 
dition to battle with disease. The stomach, kidneys,, 
liver, and lungs are weak, the blood is poisoned and the 
strength of the constitution wrecked. 

26. The skin is called into greater action to throw off 
a part of the alcohol taken into the system. The pores and 
blood-vessels of the skin become larger in this exertion, 
and the quantity of blood gives the color which is hung 
outside the body as a danger-signal against the use of the 
fiery poison which burns within. 

27. It overworks it, makes it tired, loads it with fat and 
weakens the power of action. 

28. It stimulates the circulation, hurries the blood in 
its course, stretches the small arteries and makes them 
unfit for work. 

29. It causes them to work too fast, it heats and in- 
flames them, it hardens the walls of the air-cells, it pre- 
vents the air from purifying the blood and like all other 
parts of the body this organ is polluted with the presence 
of this slow but deadly poison. 

30. Portions of the nerves, spinal cord and brains are- 
composed of a white substance called albumen (the white 
of an egg) ; when alcohol comes in contact with this sub- 
stance it absorbs the water and thickens the albumen, 
which action paralyzes these organs and they lose their 
power of action, the limbs cannot carry the body, the brain 
refuses to understand, and he who was created in the image 
of his Creator sinks into a drunken stupor. 

31. The nerves of the eye are strained by the excite- 
ment and stupor and do not report to the brain a correct 
vision. 

32. By hardening and preventing its action in remov- 
ing the waste matters that should be carried off. 



336 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

33. The kidneys become fatty in structure, wax-like in 
condition, and other conditions leading to dropsy. 

34. Whatever injures the brain, weakens the power of 
thought and destroys the intellect. 

35. If taken in sufficient quantities it almost immedi- 
ately produces death. In such cases the animal has all of 
the appearance of poison. Nature declares that it is a 
poison, although by slow and constant use the system be- 
comes used to its presence, holding in check the slow fire 
that is impairing the constitution, producing a poisoned 
blood, diseased kidneys, indigestion and the slow destruc- 
tion of the mind, the brain, the heart, the nerves and the 
very soul of man. 

36. It is often the case that the first glass in the morn- 
ing is hard to swallow; it is nauseating to the stomach, and 
the old toper braces his physical powers and with a gulp 
it is gone. Why, you may ask, does he seek to do that 
which his system loathes and often rejects ? It is for the 
efi'ect ; no longer is it a question of the palate and taste. 
There is a demand to rouse the sinking forces, to stimulate, 
to overcome the deadness of the heart and to produce a 
new excitement. 

37. It imparts a warmth only by imagination. No new 
heat is infused into the system, but by quickened pulsa- 
tion the blood rushes over the body and whatever heat is 
imparted to the outer surface is at the general expense of 
the internal heat and when this quickened pulsation 
returns to its normal condition the body has lost more heat 
and has become weaker in condition than it would have 
been if the excitement had not been given. 

38. It is the universal verdict that those who take 
liquor under these circumstances do not withstand the cold 
equal to those who refuse to drink. 

39. By turning it into their boots or against the parts 
liable to freeze. This would be a means of outward pro- 
tection by which the internal was not disturbed. 

40. It is a mystery which remains to be explained, but 
whatever view may be taken in regard to this evil, the fact 
remains that its influence is increasing, its effects are more 
dangerous, and its power more grasping. It is insolent in 
character, selfish in desires and damning in its touch. It 
is a curse that follows, more blighting than fire and more 
terrible than disease. It breathes desolation, misery and 
despair. It is without love, home or friendship. Its aim 
is to destroy the soul of man and to mock at virtue, truth 



ALCOHOL AND TOBACCO. 337 

and manhood. It smiles to deceive, and its deceit is but 
the sting of death. It is robed in the blood-money of all 
the crimes of the earth. It spares none who yield to its 
embrace, and it seeks to embrace all. It is the hell of all 
hells, the monster of all monsters and the fire of all fires. 
Its curse cannot be comprehended, nor the innocent tears 
of its victims be measured. But, however sad may be the 
picture of its pathway, man, the being it brings to the 
lowest depths of degradation, still gives its infamy license, 
and as his pen signs the right to scatter woe, misery and 
destruction, he lifts his eyes and cries unto his Maker, " O 
Lord, thy will be done !" Such mockery ! Such sacrilege 
to the Good of all Goodness ! Why, oh why, does not the 
wrath of God blot it from the face of the earth ? 

TOBACCO. 

41. It was discovered by Columbus in 1492. It was 
taken to Spain in 1496; to France in 1560; to England in 
1586. 

42. One excites, while the other soothes the nerves and 
often produces sleep. 

43. They are carbonic acid, carbonic oxide, ammonia 
and nicotine. 

44. It causes sleepiness and headache. 

45. It causes trembling of the muscles and heart. 

46. It bites the tongue and makes too much work for 
the salivary glands. 

47. It is a very poisonous element, strong in odor, bit- 
ter, and is the principal pain-soothing and sleep-producing 
portion of tobacco. It is a narcotic. 

48. It produces weakness, nervousness, dizziness, nau- 
sea, faintness, loss of strength, stupor, and if taken in large 
quantities it produces convulsions and death. 

49. It poisons the saliva. 

Injures the sense of smell, taste, sight and hearing. 

Causes'*' smokers' sore-throat.'' 

Injures the stomach, causing dyspepsia, etc. 

Often takes away the appetite for wholesome food. 

Irritates the air-cells of the lungs. 

Causes palpitation of the heart. 

Weakens the muscles, Causing trembling. 

Injures the eyes. 

Stupefies the brain and nerves. 

50. It makes the memory poor. 
Lessens the power to think. 



338 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

Weakens the will. 

Makes people grow in selfishness and impoliteness. 
Often leads to bad company. 
Sometimes causes insanity. 
51. The habit of smoking cigarettes. The reason for 
this is that they contain more nicotine and often opium. 

62. It is the juice obtained from the seed-vessel of the 
white poppy before they are ripe. When dried, it is some- 
what dark in color and bitter to the taste. 

63. It is the most dangerous of drugs when used as a 
habit, as few can resist its influence when once the system 
has become accustomed to it. Its first effects are pleasant 
and exhilarating but the after work is one of wretched 
misery and can be relieved only by another portion; 
thus the habit becomes' a cruel and unrelenting slavery. 

64. They are made from opium, and should be used 
only under the care of a physician. 

65. It is a very powerful narcotic, prepared from the 
hemp plant grown in hot countries. It is used quite ex- 
tensively among the people of warm climates, and is a 
terribly exciting poison. 

66. It is the seed from a kind of palm, and resembles a 
nutmeg. It is mixed with quick-lime and wrapped in a 
betel-leaf, which grows on a vine belonging to the pepper 
family. This mixture reddens the saliva and lips and 
blackens the teeth. It is chewed by millions of people in 
India. 

67. Touch not, taste not, handle not. They are all 
poisonous and mean the same thing — ■ 

A little pleasure, disease, and DEATH, 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT, 



1. What is a constitution ? 

2. What is a preamble ? 

3. What are legislative powers, and in what are they 
vested ? 

4. What is Congress ? 

6. What is the Senate ? House of Representatives? 

6. How are senators and representatives elected, and 
for how long a term of office ? 

7. How old must a representative be, and how long a 
citizen of the United States? 

8. What is an elector ? 

9. How are representatives apportioned among the 
states ? 

10. What is census ? How often taken ? 

11. If vacancies happen in the representation of any 
state, how is that vacancy filled ? 

12. What are writs of election ? 

13. What officers does the House of Representatives 
choose ? 

14. What sole power has this branch of Congress ? 

15. What is impeachment ? 

16. Into how many classes are the senators divided ? 

17. Who is president of the Senate? Can he vote? 

18. Should a vacancy occur in the Senate, what is to be 
done ? 

19. How old must a senator be, and how long a citizen 
of the United States ? 

20. Who becomes president of the Senate when the 
Vice-President is absent ? 



840 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

21. What sole power belongs to the Senate ? 

22. How may the President of the United States be 
punished for crime in office ? 

23. What judgment can the Senate declare against a 
convicted President? 

24. If an officer is removed from office by an impeach- 
ment trial, is he subject to the common law ? 

25. What is a judgment? Indictment? 

26. What is an oath ? An affirmation ? 

27. What officers does the Senate choose? 

28. What is the meaning of pro tempore f 

29. Who appoints the times, places, and manner of 
holding elections of senators and representatives ? What 
may Congress do ? 

30. If disputes arise in election returns, how are they 
to be decided ? 

31. How many does it require to do business ? What 
may a smaller number do ? 

32. What power has each House over its members? 

33. Can either House adjourn at pleasure ? 

34. Shall each House keep a journal of its proceed- 
ings? 

35. When shall the yeas and noes be entered on the 
journal ? 

36. When shall Congress assemble ? Can it assemble 
at any other time? 

37. How do members receive compensation ? 

38. Can a member be arrested while Congress is in 
session ? 

39. For what shall they not be questioned in any other 
place ? 

40. Can a person hold an office under the United States 
and be a member of Congress ? 

41. Where shall bills for raising revenue originate ? 

42. What is revenue? What is a bill ? 

43. When does a bill become a law ? 

44. What question does not require the sanction of the 
President ? 

45. What are the powers of Congress ? 

46. What is meant by high seas ? By law of nations ? 

47. What are letters of niarque and reprisals ? 

48. What are duties, imports, and excises ? 

49. What is the militia ? 

50. Over what district may Congress exercise exclusive 
legislation ? 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 341 

51. What are forts? Magazines? Arsenals? Dock- 
yards ? 

52. ^Vhatis the wiitoi habeas corpus f When can it be 
suspended ? 

53. What is a bill of attainder ? Is it allowed *? 

54. What is an ex post facto law? 

55. Can a tax or duty be laid on articles exported from 
any state ? ^ 

5Q,^ What is prohibited in regard to nobility and the 
receiving of presents ? 

57. Can any state enter into any treaty, alliance, or 
confederation ? ./ , 

58. Can a state engage in war ? 

^ 59. What are the states forbidden to do in regard to 
imposts or duties on imports or exports ? 

60. In whom is the executive power of the United 
States vested ? 

61. Who are eligible to this office ? 

62. How are the President and Vice-President elected ? 
bd. fe apposing the House of Representatives fail to 

elect a President whenever the right of choice shall devolve 
upon them, who shall act as President ? 

64. What may Congress determine in regard to the 
time of choosing the electors ? 

65. When does the Vice-President act as the chief 
magistrate ? 

^^- U^o^w is the President compensated for his services ? 

67. \\ hat oath must he take before he enters upon the 
execution of his office ? 

aa S^u ^ ^^ commander-in-chief of the army and navy ? 

by. \A hat offense is he not permitted to pardon ? 

70 Does he have a right to make treaties, appoint am- 
bassadors, judges of the Supreme Court, and officers of the 
United States? 

71. If a vacancy occurs during a recess of Congress, 
how is it filled ? & > 

72. What is the President's message ? 

73 For what crimes can the President, Vice-President, 
and all civil officers of the United States be impeached? 
74. What is treason ? Bribery ? 

75 In what is the judicial power of the United States 
vested ? 

76 How long do the judges of the Supreme Court hold 
office ? ^ 

77. To what cases does their power extend ? 



342 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

• 

78. In what cases has the Supreme Court original juris- 
diction ? 

79. Where shall a criminal be tried ? 

80. If the crime is not committed in the United States, 
where must the trial be held ? 

81. What crimes are not tried by jury ? 

82. What power declares the punishment of treason ? 
How shall a person be convicted ? 

83. What is meant by, "but no attainder of treason 
shall work corruption of blood or forfeiture, except during 
the life of the person attainted "? 

84. What faith and credit shall be given each state? 

85. Can a person charged with crime be taken from 
another state ? 

86. How are new states admitted into the Union ? 

87. How can new states be formed ? 

88. What power has Congress in regard to the territory 
and other property belonging to the United States ? 

89. What shall the United States guarantee to every 
state in the Union ? 

90. What is the supreme law of the land ? Who are 
bound by oath to support it ? 

91. Is a religious test required as a qualification to any 
ofiice or public trust ? 

92. How may the constitution be amended ? 

93. How many amendments to the constitution ? When 
were the first ten adopted ? 

94. What did Congress grant in the first amendment to 
the constitution ? 

95. What privilege was given the states in the second 
amendment? 

96. What is the law respecting the quartering of 
soldiers in any house in the time of peace ? 

97. What rights are secured to the people in the fourth 
amendment? 

98. Can a person be twice put in jeopardy of life ? 

99. Can a person be compelled to be a witness against 
himself? 

100. What is the law respecting the taking of private 
property ? 

101. In the sixth amendment, what right shall the 
accused enjoy in all criminal prosecutions ? 

102. When shall the right of trial by jury be preserved ? 

103. What shall not be required, nor imposed, nor 
inflicted, in the eighth amendment? 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 343 

104. In the tenth amendment, what powers are reserved 
to the states respectively, or to the people ? 

105. What is the thirteenth amendment ? 

106. In the fourteenth amendment, who is forbidden 
from holding certain offices ? How may the disability be 
removed? 

107. What is said of the public debt? What shall be 
held as illegal and void ? 

108. What is the fifteenth amendment ? 

109. What two important measures have been passed 
by the 48th and 49th Congress to fill a possible, deficiency 
m the constitution ? 

110. How is the electoral vote counted ? 

111. What is the law in regard to the Presidential 
succession ? 



ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS 



0>! 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT 



1. The established form of government in a state, 
kingdom or country. 

2. A formal and explanatory introduction. 

3. The right to make and enforce laws, and are vested 
in a Congress of the United States. 

4. An assemblage, especially applied to the two houses 
of legislative power in the United States. 

5. The Senate is the upper hoase of a legislature, or 
Congress. The House of Representatives is the lower 
branch of a legislature, or Congress. 

6. Senators are elected by the legislatures of the states 
for a term of six years, each state being entitled to two; 
representatives are elected by the people for a term of two 
years, each state being represented according to its popu- 
lation. 

7. Twenty-five years, and seven years a citizen. 

8. One entitled to vote. 

9. According to the population of the states. 

10. An official enumeration of the people, with the 
statement of their property, pursuits, age, etc. It is to be 
taken once in ten years, which forms a new basis of appor- 
tioning the number of representatives to the several states. 

11. By the executive authority of the state. 

12. A writing issued to an officer or officers to give 
notice of some election to be held. . 

13. The speaker, chief clerk, and sergeant-at-arms. 

14. The sole power of impeachment. 

15. An accusation or charge brought against a public 
officer for misconduct in office. 

345 



•346 THE QUESTION BOOK, 

16. Three: One class being elected every two years. 

17. The Vice-President of the United States, and is 
entitled to the casting vote. 

18. The executive of the state may make a temporary 
.appointment, until the next meeting of the legislature. 

19. Thirty years of age, and nine years a citizen. 

20. The Senate elects one pro tern. 

21. The sole power to try all impeachments. 

22. He shall be impeached by the House of Represent- 
atives, and tried by the Senate, sitting for that purpose, on 
oath or affirmation, and the Chief Justice shall preside. 
The conviction shall be by the concurrence of two-thirds 
-of the members present. 

23. It shall not extend further than to removal from 
office, and disqualification to hold and enjoy any office of 
honor, trust, or profit under the United States. 

24. He is liable and subject to indictment, trial, judg- 
ment, and punishment, according to law. 

25. Judgment is the sentence pronounced by the judge 
or court by which the person is tried. Indictment is a 
written accusation of crime made by a grand jury. 

26. An oath is a solemn declaration, made with an ap- 
peal to God for the truth of what is affirmed. An affirm- 
ation is a solemn declaration, made by one who is unwilling 
to take an oath. 

27. They choose all of their officers except the presi- 
dent of the Senate, but when absent or exercising the office 
of President of the United States, one shall be chosen pro 
tempore. 

28. For the time being. 

29. It is prescribed in each state by the legislature 
thereof ; but Congress may at any time by law make or 
alter such regulations, except as to the places of choosing 
senators. 

30. Each House shall be the judge of the elections, 
returns, and qualifications of its own members. 

31. A majority ; but a smaller number may compel the 
attendance of absent members, in such amanner and under 
such penalties as each House may provide. 

32. It may punish its members for disorderly behavior, 
and with the concurrence of two-thirds, expel a member. 

33. Not for more than three days, without the consent 
of the other House. 

34. It shall, and print the same, unless secrecy is re- 
quired. 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT. o4/ 

35. When one-fifth of those present shall require it. 

36. The first Monday in December ; but it may be con- 
vened by the President, when necessary, or Congress may 
adjourn from time to time. 

37. By law ; and are paid out of the treasury of the 
United States. 

38. Only for felony, treason, or breach of the peace. 

39. For any speech or debate in Congress. 

40. He cannot. 

41. In the House of Representatives. 

42. Revenue is the income of government, arising from 
taxes, duties, etc. 

A bill is a formal writing presented to the legislature 
for enactment. 

43. By passing both Houses of Congress, and receiving 
the sanction of the President ; but if returned within ten 
days, Sundays excepted, with his objections, it does not 
become a law, unless reconsidered and passed by a two- 
thirds vote of both Houses. 

44. The question of adjournment, except in case of 
disagreement between the two Houses with respect to the 
time of adjournment, w^hen the President can adjourn 
them to such a time as he shall think proper. 

45. Section 8. The Congress shall have power to lay 
and collect taxes, duties, imposts, and excises, to pay the 
debts and provide for the common defense and general 
welfare of the United States, but all duties, imposts, and 
excises shall be uniform throughout the United States ; to 
borrow money on the credit of the United States ; to regu- 
late commerce with foreign nations, and among the several 
states, and with the Indian tribes ; to establish a uniform 
rule of naturalization, and uniform laws on the subject of 
hankruptcies throughout the United States ; to coin money, 
regulate the value thereof, and of foreign coin, and fix the 
standard of weights and measures ; to provide for the pun- 
ishment of counterfeiting the securities and current coin 
of the United States ; to establish post-offices and post- 
roads ; to promote the progress of science and the useful 
arts, by securing for limited times to authors and inventors 
the exclusive right to their respective writings and discov- 
eries ; to constitute tribunals inferior to the Supreme Court; 
to define and punish piracies and felonies committed on 
the high seas, and ofi'enses against the law of nations ; to 
declare war, grant letters of marque and reprisal, and make 
rules concerning captures on land and water ; to raise and 



348 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

support armies, but no appropriation of money to that use 
shall be made for a longer term than two years ; to provide 
and maintain a navy ; to make rules for the government 
and regulation of the land and naval forces ; to provide 
for calling forth the militia to execute the laws of the 
Union, suppress insurrections, and repel invasions ; to pro- 
vide for organizing, arming, and disciplining the militia, 
and for governing such part of them as may be employed 
in the service of the United States, reserving to the states 
respectively, the appointment of the officers, and the 
authority of training the militia according to the disci- 
pline prescribed by Congress ; to exercise exclusive legisla- 
tion in all cases whatsoever, over such district (not exceed- 
ing ten miles square) as may, by cession of particular 
states, and the acceptance of Congress, become the seat of 
government of the United States, and exercise like authority 
over all places purchased by the consent of the legislature 
of the state in which the same shall be, for the erection of 
forts, magazines, arsenals, dockyards, and other needful 
buildings ; — and to make all laws which shall be necessary 
and proper for carrying into execution the foregoing powers 
and all others vested by this constitution in the govern- 
ment of the United States, or any department or officer 
thereof. 

46. The law of nations, the accepted or universal laws 
of all nations. 

47. Written authority from government to seize the 
property of an enemy, especially vessels and cargoes. 

48. Duty, a tax levied on imports. Imports, goods 
brought from other countries. Excise, a tax on anything 
made, used, or sold. 

49. The citizens of a state liable to military duty en- 
rolled for service. 

60. The District of Columbia. 

51. Fort, a place of defense. Magazine, a store where- 
ammunition is kept. Arsenal, a repository for arms and 
military stores. Dockyard, a place for containing all kinds 
of naval stores and timber. 

52. A writ for delivering a person from false imprison- 
ment, and can only be suspended in cases of treason, or 
when the public safety requires it. 

53. A special act of the legislature inflicting capital 
punishment upon persons supposed to be guilty of high 
crimes, without the process of law. It is not allowed by 
the constitution of the United States. 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 349 

55. It cannot. 

5Q. No title of nobility shall be granted by the United 
States ; and no person holding an office of nrofif or in.+ 
under them shall, without the cogent of Lng^^^^^^ 

e1erUrr\'"''^'^"^'^''' "^^^ ortitleof an/a whal 

e^ er liom any king, prince or foreign state. 
o7. It cannot. 

58, Kot unless in imminent danger from invasion 
59.^ o state shall, without an act of ConSIss ^a^ anv 

ye^rl'ofZ w'fn ^r^" '^ *^^ ^^^^^^ ^^^^^«' thirty-five 
•^ Jo T>^^' ^^^^ fourteen years a resident. " 

bJ. By electors chosen by the people. 

vot JbrdLt.'cVbil ir f^^ ^i' '^f^ '''^'''''-' states and 
vote Dy aistmct ballots for President and Vice-Presidpnt 

emmLToTthe ^^^^f -f/™^??"^*'^'^ *° the seato t- 
ernment ot the United States, directed to the president of 

^ fit; ^^^ P-^esident of the Senate shall ^in the wes 
eice of the Senate and House of Eepresenta vesonfn 
all the certificates, and the votes shalfthen be counted 
dent^slTbeP^d'^^ greatest number of votes S^sii 
wV,^U „ 1 President, if such number be a majority of the 
whole number of electors appointed; and if no person 
esTlumW ToT^' "^^"/^"'^ *^« P--«-^ havLg?he^^^^^^^^ 

TLaT. \ K-,'''""'^^''''^ ^'^^■'^'^ 0° the list of those 
voted for as President, the House of Representatives shall 
choose immediately, by ballot, the President ^ ^ 

Presi^tnt'sHl b'T ?^ v-*" ^'T^^'l i^nmber of votes as Vice- 
ma?oritv of thit I. f ^ ^^*^-P>^esident, if such number be a 
majority of the whole number of electors appointed and if 
no person have a majority, then from the two hLhestZm 
ident°'' '*' *''" ^'''^"' '^'^^ «^°°^« the vfce Pres- 

casf;f^tht r°t;^'^'''!t"* ^l^^U.^ct as President in the 
President °' constitutional disabUity of the 

64. Congress may determine the time of choosing the 

wScr'dTv ^h^fr^ii'^^'^'^ ^'^^y ^^^11 givetheiite! 
States. -^ '''™'' throughout the United 

6.5. In case of the removal of the President from office, 



350 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

or of his death, resignation, or inability to discharge the 
powers and duties of the said office. 

66. The President shall, at stated times, receive for his. 
services a compensation which shall neither be increased 
nor diminished during the period for which he shall have 
been elected, and he shall not receive within that period 
any other emolument from the United States, or any of 
them. 

67. " I do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will faith- 
fully execute the office of President of the United States, 
and will, to the best of my ability preserve, protect, and 
defend the Constitution of the United States." 

68. The President. 

69. Cases of impeachment. 

70. He has the right, with the advice and consent of 
the Senate, to make treaties, provided two-thirds of the 
senators present concur, and with the advice and consent of 
the Senate he shall appoint ambassadors, ministers, judges, 
and officers of the United States, and all appointments 
which shall be established by law. 

71. By an appointment by the President. 

72. An article directed to Congress, stating the condi- 
t4on of the country, and proposing such measures as he may 
judge necessary and expedient. 

73. For treason, bribery, and other high crimes and 
misdemeanors. 

74. Treason against the United States shall consist only 
in levying war against them , or in adhering to their ene- 
mies, giving them aid and comfort. 

Bribery is giving money or some other consideration to 
procure desired legislation, a judicial decision, or other 
official action. 

75. In one Supreme Court and such inferior courts as 
Congress may from time to time establish. 

76. During good behavior, or life. 

77. In all cases arising under the constitution, the laws 
of the United States, and cases that cannot be settled in 
the Supreme Court of any state. 

78. In all cases affecting ambassadors, other public 
ministers and consuls, and those in which a state shall be- 
a party. In other cases, the Supreme Court shall have 
appellate jurisdiction, or jurisdiction by an appeal from 
lower courts. 

79. In the state where the crime is committed. 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 351 

80. At such a place or places as Congress may by law 
have directed. 

81. Crimes subject to impeachment. 

82. Congress. No person shall be convicted of treason 
unless on the testimony of two witnesses +o the same overt 
act, or on confession in open court. 

83. That no posterity or person shall be denied any 
rights because of the punishment or conviction of another. 

84. Full faith and credit shall be given in each state to 
the public acts, records, and judicial proceedings of every 
other state. 

85. On demand of the executive authority of the state 
where the crime was committed. 

86. By consent of Congress. 

87. From territories having 30,000 inhabitants, or from 
states or parts of states with the consent of the states con- 
cerned. 

88. Congress shall have power to dispose of and make 
all needful rules and regulations respecting it. 

89. A republican form of government and protection. 

90. The constitution and laws of the United States. 
All government officers and representatives are bound by 
oath to support it. 

91. No religious test shall ever be required as a qualifi- 
cation to any office or public trust under the United States. 

92. By two-thirds vote of both Houses of Congress, or 
by the action of the legislatures of two-thirds of the states, 
ratified in either case by three-fourths of all the states. 

93. Fifteen ; the first ten were adopted at the first ses- 
sion of Congress. 

94. Freedom of religion, of speech, of the press, the 
right of the people peaceably to assemble, and to petition 
the government for a redress of grievances. 

95. The right of the people to keep and bear arms. 

96. No soldier shall, in the time of peace, be quartered 
in any house without the consent of the owner, nor in time 
of war, but in a manner to be prescribed by law. 

97. The right of the people to be secure in their per- 
sons, houses, papers, and effects, against unreasonable 
searches and seizures. 

98. Nor shall any person be subject for the same offense 
to be twice put in jeopardy of life or limb. 

99. He cannot. 

100. If taken for public use, he shall have just com- 
pensation. 



352 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

101. A speedy and public trial, by an impartial jury ; 
to be confronted with the witnesses against him ; to have 
compulsory process for obtaining witnesses in his favor, 
and to have the assistance of counsel for his defense. 

102. In suits at common law, where the value in con- 
troversy shall exceed twenty dollars. 

103. Excessive bail shall not be required, nor exces- 
sive fines imposed, nor cruel and unusual punishment 
inflicted. 

104. The powers not delegated to the United States by 
the constitution, nor prohibited by it to the states, 'are 
reserved to the states respectively, or to the people. 

105. Neither slavery nor involuntary servitude, except 
as a punishment for crime, whereof the party shall have 
been duly convicted, shall exist within the United States, 
or any place subject to their jurisdiction. 

106. Persons who have held office under the United 
States, or of any state, and shall have been engaged 
in insurrection or rebellion against the same, or given aid 
or comfort to the enemies thereof. Congress rnay, by a 
vote of two-thirds of each House, remove such dis- 
ability. 

107. The validity of the public debt of the United 
States, authorized by law, shall not be questioned. Any 
debt or obligation incurred in aid of insurrection or rebel- 
lion against the United States, or any claim for the loss or 
emancipation of any slave, shall be held illegal and 
void. 

108. The right of the citizens of the United States to 
vote shall not be denied or abridged by the United States 
or any state on account of race, color, or previous condi- 
tion of servitude. 

109. A bill for counting the electoral vote, and the 
Presidential succession bill. 

111. "In case of removal, death, resignation, or ina- 
bility of both the President and Vice-President, a member 
of the Cabinet shall, in the following order, act as Presi- 
dent until the disability is removed or a President 
elected: The Secretary of State, Secretary of the Treas- 
ury, Secretary of War, Attorney General, Postmaster 
General, Secretary of the Navy, Secretary of the Interior ; 
provided, that whenever the powers or duties of the office 
of President of the United States shall devolve upon any 
of the persons named therein, if Congress be not then in 
session, or if it would not meet in accordance with law 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 353 

within twenty days thereafter, it shall be the duty of the 
person upon whom the said powers and duties shall de- 
volve, to issue a proclamation convening Congress in 
extraordmary session, giving twenty days' notice of the 
time ot meeting." (Approved January 19, 1886.) 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND 
HYGIENE, 



1. What is Physiology ? 

2. Illustrate the value of understanding the knowl- 
edge of physiology. • 

3. Into what two bodies is nature divided? 

4. Define organic bodies. 

5. Define inorganic bodies. 

6. What is Anatomy ? 

7. What is Hygiene ? 

8. What law is impressed on all animal beings? 

9. What is the difference between food and living 
flesh? 

10. How are plants nourished ? 

11. How are animals nourished? 

12. What do animals always possess ? 

13. What functions are peculiar to animals alone ? 

14. What organs constitute the digestive apparatus ? 

15. What difference in the teeth of the carnivorous and 
herbivorous animals? 

16. How many teeth has man, and how divided ? 

17. Of what are teeth composed? 

18. How are the teeth set in the jaw ? 

19. What are salivary glands ? What is their function ? 

20. Where are the salivary glands situated ? 

21. Describe the pharynx, or second chamber of the 
mouth. 

22. What is the epiglottis ? 

355 



356 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

23. Describe the oesophagus. 

24. How does food find its way to the stomach ? 

25. Describe the stomach. 

26. By what is the food dissolved in the stomach ? 

27. Describe the process of digestion in the stomach 

28. Of what is gastric juice composed? 

29. Name the fluids of the body. 

30. Name the solids of the body. 

31. Give the list of chemical elements in the human 
body. 

32. Into what substances are these elements divided ? 
83. Name the metallic substances. 

34. Name the non-metallic substances. 

35. Give the arrangement of the parts of the body. 

36. Define a fibre. 

37. Define a fasciculus. 

38. Define a tissue. 

39. Define an organ. 

40. What is the action of an organ called ? 

41. Give an example of an organ and its functions. 
42. , Define an apparatus. 

43. Define a system. 

44. To what can every organ of the body be reduced? 

45. What tissue is the primary form of all others ? 

46. How is the cellular tissue formed? 

47. Where is the cellular tissue formed ? 

48. What is the chief use of this tissue ? 

49. What different names have been given to cellular 
tissue ? 

50. Describe the osseous tissue. 

51. Describe the muscular tissue. 

52. Describe the nervous tissue. 

53. Into what divisions may the human system be 
divided ? ' 

54. What is hunger? 

55. What is the relative position of the stomach, lungs, 
liver and diaphragm ? 

56. To what substance is all food reduced in the 
stomach ? 

57. Does the stomach digest fatty articles of food? 

58. What is the temperature of the stomach ? 

59. Can food be digested artificially ? 

60. What three kinds of food do we need ? 

61. What is nitrogenous food ? 

62. What is carbonaceous food ? 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 857 

63. Name the mineral matters which should be con- 
tained in our food ? 

64. Could a person live on one kind of food alone ? 

65. State the five evil results of rapid eating. 

66. Why should care be banished from the table? 

67. Will a regular routine of food be beneficial? 

68. Whnt are the principal causes of dyspepsia ? 

69. What is the best remedy for a bilious man ? 

70. What is the pyloric valve ? 

71. How long does it take our chief articles of food to 
digest ? 

72. What does organic food comprise? 

73. What does inorganic food comprise? 

74. What is the first work of the stomach in digestion ? 

75. Into what organ does the chyme pass from the 
stomach ? 

76. Describe the intestinal canal. 

77. What is the pancreas ? 

7^. What is the oflice of the pancreas ? 

79. What are the lacteal absorbments ? 

80. What is the lacteal duct ? 

81. What is called the lacteal system*? 

82. How is the digested food disposed of? 

83. What is chyle? 

84. When is a new supply of nutriment needed ? 

85. Will the stomach bear sudden changes in the time 
of eating? 

86. When does the body sustain labor and exposure 
best? 

87. Why do growing persons or convalescents require 
more food than adults or persons in health ? 

88. What is the common error in regard to eating ? 

89. When any organ of the body is in action, what 
changes occur ? 

90. What is the office of the liver ? 

91. Where is the bile emptied ? 

92. Where is the spleen ? 

93. What is the office of the spleen? 

94. What is fatigue ? 

95. What is rest? 

96. What terms are applied to the difference in the 
temperament of men? 

97. Describe the nervous temperament. 

98. Describe the sanguine temperament. 

99. Describe the bilious temperament. ^ 



358 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

100. Describe the lymphatic temperament. 

101. How does childhood differ from old age? 

102. Does this difference require a modification of diet ? 

103. What two things are to be considered in all kinds 
of food? 

104. What are the natural effects of stimulation ? 

105. Whas is the effect of alcohol ? 

106. W^hat becomes of the chyle? 

107. What is the apparatus of the circulation of the 
blood? 

108. Describe the heart. 

109. What is the beating of the heart? 

110. What are the valves of the heart? 

111. How do these valves act? 

112. How many sets of blood-vessels ? 

113. Describe the arteries. 

114. Describe the veins. 

115. Describe the capillaries. , 

1 16. What is the difference between the pulmonary and 
systemic circulation ? 

117. Give the circulation of the blood. 

118. What is the aorta? 

119. Where are the carotids? 

120. Where are the subclavians ? 

121. What arteries supply the stomach with blood? 

122. How is the liver supplied ? 

123. How are the kidneys supplied ? 

124. How is the spleen supplied ? 

125. How is the intestinal canal supplied ? 

126. How is the heart supplied? 

127. What are the chief divisions of the aorta? 

128. W^hat is the vena cava ? 

129. What are the names of the larger branches of the 
vena cava? 

130. How are the arteries or veins arranged in respect 
to each other ? 

131. How does the blood pass through the heart? 

132. How do the pulmonary arteries and pulmonary 
veins differ? 

133. Where are the largest arteries situated ? 

134. Where are the largest veins situated ? 

135. What prevents the blood in the veins from flow- 
ing backwards ? 

136. How does arterial blood differ from venous? 

137. fWhat action have the lungs upon the blood? 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 359 

138. What causes the blood to circulate in the veins ? 

139. How much blood in a man of average size? 

140. In what time does it circulate through the sys- 
tem ? 

141. What circumstances will affect the rate of circu- 
lation ? 

142. How do mental states affect the circulation ? 

143. Where is the living flesh made ? 

144. What materials of the body are obtained from 
the blood ? 

145. For what purposeis the circulation of the blood ? 

146. Give the elements of the blood. 

147. Give the use of the corpuscles of the blood. 

148. What law must be observed in regard to eating, 
if health is preserved ? 

149. How are the wasted particles of the body disposed 

150. What elements are selected by "^ the nutritive or- 
gans to form fat ? 

151. What elements are required to form hair ? 

152. What to form muscle ? 

153. Describe the lungs. 

154. Describe the air-cells. 

155. What is the organ of voice ? How is voice pro- 
duced ? 

156. Compare the lungs and heart, giving three points 
in common and three points of difference. 

157. Describe the spine. 

158. Describe a vertebra. 

159. How are the bones of the spinal column divided ? 

160. What is the pelvis? 

161. What is the sternum ? 

162. What is the coccyx? 

163. Describe the ribs. 

164. Describe the skull. 

165. What are the bones of the arm and forearm ? 

166. What are the bones of the wrist ? 

167. What are the bones of the hands? 

168. Name the bones of the lower extremities. 

169. How many different kinds of joints ? 

170. How are the joints held together ? 

171. Where is the clavicle? 

172. Where is the scapula ? 

173. What peculiarity about the joints of the neck ? 

174. How is the femur joined to the pelvis? 



360 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

175. What peculiarity about the elbow ana wrist 
joints ? 

176. Describe the hip joint ? 

177. Describe the shoulder joint. 

178. How many bones in the human body ? 

179. What three uses have the bones ? 

180. Of what is a bone made ? 

181. What is the structure of a bone ? 

182. What are the rickets ? 

183. What is a felon? 

184. What is the cause of bow legs ? 

185. What is a dislocation? 

186. Describe the three classes of levers. 

187. In what state do bones exist at first? 

188. How are they converted into bone? 

189. What is the strength of the human bone? 

190. Define ossification of the bone. 

191. What i^he only bone in the oody which is com- 
pletely ossified, or hardened at birth ? 

192. What are the chief uses of cartilage ? 

193. What is the membrane called that invests the- 
bones ? 

194. Into how many parts are the bones of the body 
divided ? 

195. Where are the synoval membranes situated? 

196. What is the function of the synoval membrane ? 

197. When is a joint said to be sprained? 

198. What is a muscle ? 

199. How many kinds of muscles ? 

200. What is the use of muscles ? 

201. How many muscles ? , 

202. How are the muscles under the control of the- 
will? 

203. What is the St. Vitus' Dance ? 

204. What is the locked jaw? 

205. Is the heart a muscle ? Voluntary or organic ? 

206. How do we breathe ? 

207. Describe the diaphragm ? 

208. Explain the process of inspiration ? 

209. Explain the process of expiration ? 

210. What is the cause of squinting? 

211. What is coughing ? 

212. What is sneezing? 

213. What is sighing? Snoring? 

214. What is laughing ? Crying? 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 361 

215. What is yawning? Hiccoughing? 

216. What is the effect of breathing the same air sev- 
eral times ? 

217. In how many ways is the air unfit for respira- 
tion? 

218. How much fresh air ought to be supplied to each 
person per minute ? 

219. How much air will the lungs hold ? 

220. What effect has an ill-ventilated school-room upon 
children ? 

221. How should we ventilate our bed-rooms and 
school-houses ? 

222. What is the average number of respirations per 
minute ? 

223. What animals are most active ? What most 
sluggish ? 

224. How does consumption waste the flesh and 
strength ? 

225. What is bronchitis ? Pleurisy? Pneumonia? 

226. How may a constitutional tendency to consump- 
tion be warded off in 3^outh ? 

227. What is the rule for pxevention and cure of a 
cold? 

228. What is the first step to be taken in the cure of a 
disease ? 

229. Why does sleep sometimes fail to refresh ? 

230. What is carbonic acid? 

231. What is a common source of danger from car- 
bonic acid ? 

232. How does drowning produce death? 

233. What necessity is imposed on all animals? 

234. What reciprocal offices do animals and vegetables 
perform ? 

235. What is the temperature of the human body ? 

236. What is the origin of heat in living bodies ? 

237. Into what classes are animals divided in relation 
to heat ? 

238. What prevents an increase of temperature in the 
body ? 

239. What is insensible perspiration ? 

240. What is sensible perspiration ? 

241. Which protects from cold best, alcohol or food? 

242. Which warms most, flesh or bread ? 

243. Why is more fat required for food in a cold cli- 
mate than in a warm ? 



-362 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

244. Of what use is fat to the body ? 

245. What is noticeable of the fat ? 

246. What are the oil glands ? 

247. Describe the skin. 

248. Name the three uses of the skin. 

249. What is the cuticle? 

250. What part of the blood flows through the skin ? 

251. Describe the hair. 

252. Describe the nails. 

253. Where is the seat of color in the skin ? 

2)4. What proportion of the waste of the body passes 
through the skin ? 

255. What connection exists between the internal or- 
gans and the skin? 

256. What is the office of the skin ? 

257. Name those organs which carry off waste matter 
from the body. 

258. Name those organs which bring fresh material to 
the body. 

259. Describe the minute structure of the perspiratory 
organs. 

260. Of what does the nervous system consist ? 

261. Describe the general outline of the brain. 
2o2. How is the brain protected ? 

263. What peculiarity of the brain in regard to the 
;sense of feeling? 

264. Describe the sense of feeling. 

265. Describe the sense of taste. 

266. Describe the organ of smell. 

267. What large nervous truaks have their origin in 
the brain ? 

268. What is the spinal cord, and its position ? 

269. How many kinds of nerves ? 

270. What three things are necessary for sensation ? 

271. Is the action of the different organs modified by 
the nerves ? 

272. Do the arteries have nerves ? 

273. If the nerve which governs the action of the heart 
should be severed, what would the heart do? 

274. When will motion be lost and feeling remain ? 

275. When will feeling be lost and motion remain ? 

276. What is reflex action? 

277. What is day-dreaming? 

278. Describe the eye. 

279. What is the sclerotic coat? Cornea? 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 363 

280. What is the choroid coat ? 

281. Where is the retina? Its office ? 

282. Where is the iris ? Its office ? 

283. Describe the lids. 

284. Where is the fluid prepared which moistens the 
€yes? 

285. What are the lachrymal glands? What is the 
nasal duct ? 

286. What moves the eye ? 

287. Describe the optic nerve ? 

288. How is vision produced ? 

289. What care should be taken in regard to the direc- 
tion of the light when we are at work ? 

290. How does the eye change as one grows old? 

291. What is the difference between a short-sighted 
man and one who is long-sighted? 

292. Why are some persons cross-eyed ? 

293. What does the organ of hearing include? 

294. Describe the external ear. 

295. Describe the internal ear. 

296. What is the eustachian tube? 

297. How is sound produced? 



ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS 



ON 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND 
HYGIENE. 



1. The science of the organic functions of animals or 
plants. 

2. By a proper knowledge of this subject lives may 
be saved, strength preserved, and life lengthened. In case 
of accidents, as of poison, drowning or bodily injuries, 
this knowledge may be of great value to us in relieving 
sickness and distress. 

3. Into organic and inorganic bodies. 

4. They are those bodies which possess organs, on 
whose actions depend their growth and perfection. It in- 
cludes minerals and plants. 

5. They are devoid of organs, or instruments of life, 
as the earth's minerals, etc. 

6. The science of the structure of animal bodies. 

7. That branch of medicine which treats of the pres- 
ervation of health. 

8. The law of constant change. 

9. Food is the material we eat, changed by the action 
of the system into living flesh. 

10. They are nourished by the inorganic elements 
found in the earth and air around them. This material 
is received in the form of liquid or a gas, already prepared 
for their use. 

11. They are nourished by the organic materials of 
vegetables or of other animals. 

12. They possess a stomach or digestive cavity, in which 



366 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

the food IS prepared before it can be absorbed by the 
machinery of the body. 

13. Sensation and voluntary motion, and are, therefore, 
called animal functions. 

14. The mouth, pharynx, oesophagus, stomach, pancreas, 
and intestinal canal. 

15. The carnivorous have sharp front teeth, and long, 
sharp and pointed canine teeth, and grinders with high 
and sharpened points. The herbivorous have short, blunt, 
and strong front teeth, small canine teeth, but their 
molars are very large, broad and flat, with slightly raised 
lines on their surface. 

16. Sixteen in each jaw : four incisors in the center ; one 
canine next to the incisors, on each side ; then two bicus- 
pids, and three molars. 

17. They are composed of soft bone within, but are 
covered on the outside with an enamel of very hard tex- 
ture, which admits of an exquisitively fine polish. 

18. With long fangs, so they are not easily started from 
their places. 

19. They are glands which empty their fluids into the 
mouth. Their function is to secrete fluid which moistens 
the food during mastication, and assists, in a measure, in 
digestion. 

20. The two larger ones, situated between the ear and 
tipper part of the jaw, are called parotid glands. Two 
smaller ones, situated about half way between the symphe- 
sis, or center, are called submaxillary. Smaller ones stilly 
underneath the tongue, are called sublingual. 

21. It is separated from the mouth by the palate. Four 
passages open out of it : one leads forward to the mouth ; 
a second, upward to the nose ; a third, downward to the 
lungs ; and a fourth, backward to the stomach. 

22. A small valve placed over the mouth of the trachea, 
admitting air, but excluding all foreign substances. 

23. It is a soft muscular tube, extending from the 
pharynx to the stomach, and is about nine inches in 
length, and some less than one inch in diameter. It is 
composed principally of two muscular coats ; the fibers of 
one run lengthwise of the tube, and the fibers of the other 
passing around it in a circular manner. 

24. Upon being forced back in the mouth to the phar- 
ynx it causes, by its presence, the muscles of the pharynx 
to contract upon it. This is the act of swallowing, and is 
bevond the control of the will. The circular fibers of the 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 367 

muscles of the oesophagus seize upon the morsel of food, 
and contracting, force it downward until it reaches the 
stomach. 

25. It is an oval-shaped sac, situated below the dia- 
phragm on the same plane with the liver, and lies mostly 
on the left side of the spine. It has two openings ; an up- 
per, or cardiac orifice, where the oesophagus enters ; and a 
lower, or pyloric orifice, which enters into the duodenum. 
It is composed of three coats : an outer or serous coat, 
which is the same as that which lines the whole abdomen; 
a middle, or muscular coat, composed of two layers of 
fibers, longitudinal and circular, the contraction of" which 
move the food about the stomach during digestion ; and an, 
inner, or mucous coat, containing the gastric tubules, which 
secrete the gastric juice. 

26. A powerful fluid called the gastric juice. 

27. The presence of food in the stomach causes the 
gastric juice to be thrown out. The muscles of the stomach 
move the food about, which causes the gastric juice to be 
thoroughly intermingled with it. The gastric juice re- 
duces the food to a pulpy mass, which occurs usually in 
three or four hours, and is then passed out of the stomach 
at the pyloric orifice. 

28. It is composed of an acid, supposed to be lactic 
or hydrochloric acid, and an organic substance cahed pep- 
sin. 

^ 29. They are the blood, chyle, lymph, saliva, gastric 
juice, pancreatic juice, synovia, mucus, and serum. Bile, 
sweat, and urine are excretions. 

30. The solids are the bones, teeth, cartilages, ligaments,, 
muscles, nerves, vessels, viscera, membranes, skin, hair, and 
nails. 

31. They are oxygen, hydrogen, carbon, sodium, potas- 
sium, chlorine, nitrogen, sulphur, phosphorus, calcium,, 
magnesium, fluorine, silicon, iron, manganese. 

32. Into metallic and non-metallic substances. 

33. They are potassium, sodium, calcium, magnesium, 
iron, and manganese. 

34. They are oxygen, hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, sili- 
cium, phosphorus, sulphur and chlorine. 

35. They are arranged into fibers, fasciculi, tissues,, 
organs, apparatuses, and systems. 

36. It is a thread of exceeding fineness, and may be 
round or flattened. 

37. It is the ternt applied to several fibres united. 



368 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

38. A tissue is a term applied to several different solids 
of the body. 

39. An organ is an instrument composed of tissues, 
and designed for action. 

40. It is called its function or use. 

41. The liver is an organ, and the secretion of bile its 
function. 

42. An apparatus consists of a number of different 
organs for the performance of some office. The teeth, 
mouth, Stomach, intestines, etc., belong to the digestive 
apparatus. 

43. It is a connected series of similar parts, such as the 
muscular or nervous system. 

43. They are supposed to be reduced to a few tissues, 
as the cellular, osseous, muscular, mucous, and nervous. 

45. The cellular or areolar tissue is regarded as the 
primary form of all others. 

46. It is formed by the crossing or interlacing of minute 
fibers, interwoven in every direction, so as to form a web- 
like membrane with innumerable small spaces, which com- 
municate with each other. 

47. It is formed in every part of the system, except in 
compact portions of bone, teeth and cartilage. 

48. Its chief use seems to be to connect together organs 
and parts of organs which require a certain degree of 
motion on each other. It possesses great power of elas- 
ticity. 

49. It differs according to its position in the body. 
Where it is not exposed to the air it is called the serous 
membrane, from a fluid secreted in it, called serum. In the 
lining of the respiratory passages and of the alimentary 
canal, it is called mucous membrane. Where it forms a 
covering for the body, it is called the dermoid membrane, 
or skin. 

50. This tissue, in composition and arrangement of 
matter, varies at different periods of lile, and in different 
bones. In some instances the bony matter is disposed in 
plates, while in other instances the arrangement is cylin- 
drical, and again it is spongy, or porous. 

51. This tissue is composed of many fibers that unite 
to form fasciculi, each of which is enclosed in a delicate 
layer of cellular tissue. 

52. The nervous tissue consists of soft, pulpy matter, 
enclosed in a sheath, called neurilema, and consists of two 
substances, the one a pulpy matter, gray in color, and is called 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 369 

Hneritious (ash-colored), while the other is of a fibrous 
character and white and called medullary (marrow-like). 

53. Though the body is harmoniously united into a 
single system, it can be dissected and the parts described 
separately. The following order is here adopted : 

Osteology, or an account of the bones or frame- 
work of the system. 

Myology, an account of the muscles or the mov- 
ing power of the system. 

Splanchnology, or the nutritive organs. 

Angiology, an account of the circulating system of 
the arteries and veins. 

Pneumonology, an account of the respiratory, 
vocal, and calorific organs. 

Chorology, the secreting system. 

Neurology, the history of the nervous system. 

The Inlets of the Soul, the senses. 

54. A sensation of want of more nutriment in the body, 
and is caused by the action of the blood on the terminal 
branches of the nerves in the mucous coat of the stomach. 

55. The lungs lie within the walls of the thorax, sep- 
arated from the abdomen by a broad muscle, the dia- 
phragm. Under the right lung, below the diaphragm, lies 
the liver, and to the left is the stomach. 

56. A pulpy substance, called chyme. 

57. It does not ; they are digested by the pancreatic 
and intestinal juices. 

58. About 100° F. 

59. It can. If food be thoroughly mixed with hydro- 
chloric acid and pepsin, and kept at an equal temperature 
of 100°, it will be reduced in a feiv hours to a homogeneous 
mass somewhat resembling chyme. 

60. Nitrogenous, carbonaceous, and mineral food. 

61. It is the food which contains much nitrogen. The 
most common forms are whites of eggs, lean meat, gluten, 
and caseine. 

62. Those kinds which contain much carbon, and con- 
sist of two kinds, viz.: the sugars and the fats. 

63. There should be limited quantities of iron, sulphur, 
magnesia, phosphorus, salt and potash. 

64. He could not. A person fed on starch would have 
nothing to make muscle of and if continued would die of 
nitrogen starvation. 

65. The evil results of rapid eating are : 

A lack of saliva with the food. 



370 



THE QUESTION BOOK. 



The coarse pieces resist the action of the digestive- 
fluids. 

Drinking too freely, which dilutes the gastric juice, 
and hinders digestion. 

Overcrowding the stomach by this rapidity. 

The use ot condiments to give taste to the food, 
which over-stimulates the digestive organs. 

66. Care or grief restrain digestion and should not oc- 
cupy the mind at such times. It is a nervous action and 
the nourishing organs of the system are held back, but 
with merriment and pleasant thoughts the opposite is the 
result. 

67. By a regular routine of food the appetite becomes 
insipid, and if continued in will generally produce a sick- 
ness to reject the food which has become disgusting to the 
stomach. The apparent simple feat of eating one quail a 
day for thirty successive days, at a stated hour of the day,, 
has never been accomplished but once. It is this sameness 
of taste which cannot be endured beyond a certain time, 
and although a great variety of food is taken, yet the little- 
quail finally upsets the whole system and the individual, 
cannot retain it on his stomach. 

68. By overtaxing the digestive organs. .This may be 
done by too much food, irregularity of eating, drinking 
strong drinks, etc. 

69. Work, work, work. . Not to a degree of physical 
prostration, but to such an extent that the body demands 
nourishment and the muscles to be recruited. Nature will 
then build herself up to supply this demand. 

70. It is no valve, but simply a narrowing or contrac- 
tion of the pyloric end of the stomach. 

71. 



ARTICLES. 



Apples, hard, sour 

Apples, sweet, mellow 

Barley 

Beef , fresh, rare 

Beet, steak 

Bread, wheat, fresh 

Cake, sponge 

Cheese, old 

Codfish, salt, dry 

Ducks, wild 

Eggs, fresh 

Eggs, fresh 



PREPARATION. 



Raw. 

Raw. 

Boiled. 

Roasted. 

Fried. 

Baked. 

Baked. 

Raw. 

Boiled. 

Roasted. 

Boiled, hard 

Roasted. 



Hrs. Min. 



50 
30 



30 
30 
30 

30 
30 
20' 



PHYrilOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 



371 



ARTICLES. 



Egg's, Iresh, whipped 

Milk, new 

Mutton, fresh 

Oysters, fresh 

Oysters, fresh 

Pigs' feet, soused.. . . . 
Pork, fat and lean. . 

Pork, salted 

Potatoes, Irish 

Potatoes, Irish 

Rice 

Sausage 

Soup, barley 

Soup, oyster 

Tripe, soused 

Trout, fresh 

Yeal, fresh 

Venison, steak 



PREPARATION. 



Raw. 

Raw. 

Roasted. 

Raw. 

Stewed 

Boiled. 

Roasted. 

Raw. 

Boiled. 

Roasted. 

Boiled. 

Broiled. 

Boiled. 

Boiled. 

Boiled. 

Fried. 

Fried 

Broiled. 



Ilrs. I Min. 



30 
15 
15 

30 

15 

30 
30 

20 
30 
30 

30 
30 
35 



72. Organic food comprises nitrogenous substances ; 
fats ; compounds of carbon and hydrogen, such as sugar or 
starch. 

73. Inorganic food comprises water and alkalies, such 
as salt, phosphates, etc. 

74. To get rid of the greater part of the fluid which has 
been swallowed with the food. 

75. Into the duodenum. 

76. It is composed of three coats, arranged in a manner 
similar to the stomach, and for similar purposes. The 
mucous coat secretes the intestinaljuice, which aids diges- 
tion. It is divided into the large and small intestines; the 
small intestine is subdivided into the duodem, jejunum, 
and ileum; between the ileum and the large intestine is a 
perfect valve, which allows nothing to pass back that has 
once entered the large intestine from the ileum. 

77. A long, narrow gland, situated immediately below 
and behind the stomach. 

78. It secretes the pancreatic juice, which is emptied 
into the duodenum, and digests the fatty parts of food. 

79. Numberless minute tubules in the intesthial mu- 
cous membrane, which take up by absorption the nutri- 
ments, and convey them to the blood. These tubules join 
together, forming other tubules, w^hich again join, and 
continue to do so until all are united in the thoracic duct. 

80. The duct into which all the lacteal absorbents 
empty, and is sometimes called the thoracic duct. It 



372 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

passes upward along the spine, and empties into the left 
subclavian vein. 

81. The lacteal absorbents, the tubes which they form 
by joining together, and the lacteal duct — all together form 
the lacteal system. 

82. In the duodenum the digested food is divided into 
tAvo kinds; that which is to enter the blood-vessels, and 
the waste. 

83. Food reduced to a whitish-colored fluid, and ready 
to be absorbed by the lacteals. 

84. When the lacteal absorbents have consumed the 
chyle and carried it into the veins, and the blood can no 
longer meet the demands of the wasting flesh. 

85. Not without some complaint. One's appetite re- 
turns at established periods ; then his stomach craves food, 
and the gastric juice is ready to flow and dissolve it. 

86. When it is best nourished. 

87. In order to meet the new conditions, and supply 
the new wants of the system. 

88. That to please the palate, food that is not easily 
digested is eaten, and more than the system requires. 

89. The nervous force of the part is increased, and the 
circulation of the blood quickened, to supply the waste 
and support its powers. 

90. To form the bile, the elements of which are sepa- 
rated from the blood. 

91. It is emptied through a duct into the duodenum, 
and serves to keep the intestiral contents in a healthy 
condition. 

92. On the left side of the spine. 

93. It is a ductless gland, and its office is not for a cer- 
tainty known. 

94. A waste of the particles of the system, by exercise 
greater than the new materials supplied by the blood. 

95. The restoration of the materials wasted by fatigue. 

96. The general classes are the nervous, sanguine, bil- 
ious, and lymphatic temperaments. 

97. Those in whom the nervous system predominates, 
who are easily elated or depressed, whose mental actions 
are performed with rapidity. 

98. Those in whom the circulatory system predomi- 
nates; who are strong, but at the same time active; who are 
bold and resolute, and always hopeful. 

99. Those in whom the physical system predominates; 



PHYSIOLOGY., ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 373 

who are strong in mind and body, but not quick; who are 
calm, steady and persevering. 

100. Those in whom the lymphatic system predomi- 
nates; who are indisposed to exertion and unexci table, 

101. In childhood the blood flows rapidly, the muscles 
are easily stimulated to action, the nervous system is irri- 
table, and the feelings and passions are readily quickened. 
In old age, all the powers, feelings, and passions are in an 
opposite direction. 

102. It does. The elastic period requires a mild and 
soothing diet, while the inactive period needs more stimu- 
lating food. 

103. First — The digestibility. Second — The quantity 
of nutriment contained in them. 

104. When any part of the body is rubbed with pep- 
per, mustard, or spirits, it creates an irritation ; the blood 
flows to the place more abundantly; there is greater action 
and quicker life; but these effects soon cease, and then the 
skin is pale, the circulation is more languid, for unusual 
action of the muscles causes fatigue. 

105. It is quick in action, both in excitement and 
exhaustion. To a healthy stomach it must be injurious, 
for it gives only temporary strength; it only quickens the 
action and expenditure of power already existing, leaving 
the stomach to fall below its natural standard. 

106. It is taken up by the lacteal absorbents, carried 
through the lacteal tubes to the thoracic duct, and from 
that emptied into the left subclavian vein near the heart. 

107. The heart, arteries, capillaries, and veins. 

108. It is a hollow, muscular organ of a conical form, 
placed between the lungs, lying more in the left than right 
cavity of the chest. It is about five inches in length, three 
inches and a half in breadth, and two inches and a half in 
thickness; and weighs from eight to twelve ouces. It is 
divided by a septum into two lateral halves; and a trans- 
verse constriction divides each half into two cavities, the 
upper cavity on each side being called the auricle, and the 
lower the ventricle. 

109. When the heart contracts, to send the blood out,- 
the apex is thrown forward and strikes against the ribs of 
the left side, near the breast bone, where the beating is 
very easily felt. 

110. In the passage-ways of the heart valves are placed, 
which open to allow the blood to pass downward, but they 
close, and prevent its passing upward. 



374 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

111. They act on the same principle as the valve in the 
common pump-box. 

112. Three: The arteries, veins and capillaries. 

113. They are tubular vessels, which serve to convey 
the blood from both ventricles of the heart to every part 
of the body. They are composed of three coats: internal, 
middle and external. The middle coat consists of muscu- 
lar and elastic fibers principally, which make the larger 
arteries very elastic. The arteries are supplied with nutri- 
ent arteries and nerves. 

114. The veins return the blood from the capillaries to 
the heart, communicating very freely with one another. 

115. They are minute terminal branches of the arteries, 
and pervade nearly every tissue of the body in a vast net- 
work. 

116. In the pulmonary circulation the blood is con- 
veyed to th3 lungs to be purified, and then brought back 
to the heart; in the systemic circulation the blood is car- 
ried to every part of the system, and returned by the veins 
to the heart. 

117. By a contraction of the heart the blood is forced 
from the left ventricle through the aortic valves into the 
aorta, and through all the arteries of the body, to the upper 
and lower extremities, and the internal organs. From 
these various points it enters the capillaries, where all the 
changes in the system are produced; and is then taken up 
by the veins, and returned as venous blood to the right 
auricle of the heart. From the right auricle it passes 
through a valvular constriction into the right ventricle; 
from the right ventricle it is forced through valves into the 
pulmonary arteries, which carry it to the lungs; and from 
the lungs returned again to the heart through the pul- 
monary veins, entering the left auricle of the heart, and 
passing to the left ventricle, the point of commencement. 

118. The largest artery in the systemic circulation. It 
passes upward from the heart at first, describes a curve, 
and goes downward, passing through the diaphragm and 
along the spinal column. The curved portion is called the 
arch of the aorta ; between the arch and the diaphragm it 
is called the thoracic aorta ; below the diaphragm, the 
abdominal aorta. 

119. The carotids are arteries carrying bloo I upwards 
along the neck ; the left carotid arises from the arch of the 
aorta ; the right from the arteria innominata, a large vessel 
springing from the aorta. 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 375 

^ 120. The subclavians carry blood to the arms. The left 
arises from the arch of the aorta ; the right from the arteria 
nominata. 

121. The gastric artery, arising from the coelic, which 
arises from the abdominal aorta ; also a branch from the 
splenic artery, and one from the hepatic. 

122. The liver is supplied by the hepatic artery, a 
branch of the coelic axis. 

123. The kidneys are supplied by the renal arteries. 
124 By the splenic artery, the third branch of the 

coelic axis. 

125. By the superior and inferior messenteric ar- 
teries. 

126. By the coronary arteries, small branches from the 
aorta. 

127. The subclavian, carotid, coelic, hepatic, renal, 
splenic, and where the aorta branches off to go to the ex- 
tremities, it is then called (the two branches that pass 
through the groins) the inguinal arteries, and where they 
enter the thighs, the femoral arteries. 

128. There are two vessels by this name — one called the 
superior, and the other the inferior vena cava. The 
superior vena cava is formed by the junction of the two 
innominate veins, which in turn are formed from the sub- 
clavian and j ugular veins. The inferior vena cava is formed 
from the junction of the two iliac veins, which are sup- 
plied by the femoral and other veins. Both vessels empty 
into the right auricle of the heart. 

129. The jugular, subclavian, and inguinal veins. 

130. The arteries begin at the heart, and end in all the 
parts of the body, in minute tubes. The veins, on the 
contrary, begin in the flesh of all parts of the body at 
the connecting link (the capillaries), and end in one large 
trunk, the vena cava, at the heart. 

131. By the contraction of the heart, which forces the 
blood from one chamber to another ; first, from the right 
auricle to the right ventricle, then to the lungs, and back 
to the heart, passing through the left auricle and left ven- 
tricle. 

132. The pulmonary arteries convey venous blood from 
the heart to the lungs, where it is purified, and then 
returned to the heart by the pulmonary veins as arterial 
blood. 

133. They are placed deeply within the flesh, where 
they are protected from injury. Some of them approacli 



376 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

the surface, and their pulsation can be felt at the wrist, at 
the sides of the neck and on the temple. 

134. Their great trunks are placed near the great 
arteries, but being less liable to injury, their branches are 
situated nearer to, and more of them on, the surface, than 
the arterial branches. 

135. Valves placed at proper intervals on the inner 
coat of the veins. The long veins are the best supplied ; 
some veins have no valves. 

136. Venous blood is of a dark purple color, loaded 
with the waste particles of the system. The arterial blood 
is of a bright scarlet color, purified of all waste matter^ 
rich in oxygen and nutritious elements. 

137. It purifies the venous blood by means of the air 
in the lungs, which gives up its oxygen, and absorbs the 
carbon and other impurities. 

138. The action of the heart, which is like a pump ; for 
when the arterial blood is forced out, it leaves a vacuum 
for the venous blood to flow in; also the pressure of the 
muscles on the veins by contraction ; and perhaps a power 
from behind, or capillary force, in the capillaries. 

139. It is estimated to be twenty -eight pounds. 

140. The left ventricle of the heart, in a man of average 
size, will contain about two ounces. Every time the heart 
beats this cavity is filled and emptied. In ordinary health 
the heart will beat about seventy-two times in a minute ; 
therefore, in three minutes, an amount of blood equal to 
the whole will pass through the heart, or system. 

141. The heart will beat faster when we are standing 
than when we are sitting, and faster when sitting than 
when lying down. The pulsation is more rapid in the 
morning than in the evening. All exercise increases the 
force of the circulation. 

142. When the mind is excited with anger, hope, cheer- 
fulness and love, the blood flows more freely, and he is^ 
capable of greater exertions. The depressing passions 
have the opposite effect. 

143. In the capillaries. 

144. All the tissues of the body — the bone, muscle,, 
brain, skin, fat, the hair and nails, the tears, saliva, and the 
perspiration. 

145. To carry nutrition to the body, and absorb the 
dead particles of the flesh. 

146. The elements of animal blood contain the follow- 
ing : Red and white corpuscles ; animal fibrine ; water i 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 377 

albumen. The first two form the clot, the remainmg two 
the serum. The blood contains dissolved within it three 
gases: Carbonic acid, oxygen, and a small quantity of 
nitrogjen. 

147. The red corpuscles are supposed to convey oxygen 
from the lungs to the tissues, while the w^hite are the 
agents which repair the body. This is shown in the heal- 
ing of a large wound, as the presence of the white are then 
most numerous. 

148. When exercise is light, eat but little, and at no 
tiTYie pat to excess. 

149. They are thrown out of the system by the lungs, 
by the skin, by the kidneys, and by the liyer and intes- 
tines. 

150. Seventy-nine parts of carbon, Hi parts of hydro- 
gen, and 9-2- parts of oxygen. _ . . 

151. Fifty parts of carbon, 6 of hydrogen, 17 of nitro- 
gen, and 26 parts oxygen and sulphur. 

152. Fifty-one parts of carbon, 7 of hydrogen, 15 of 
nitrogen, 21 of oxygen, and 4 parts of other matters. 

153. The lungs are placed, one in each of the lateral 
cavities of the chest, separated from each other by the 
heart, and are conical in shape. The right lung is 
larger than the other, and has three lobes ; the left lung 
has two. The weight of both lungs is about forty-two 
ounces ; the color, in young persons, is of a pinkish white, 
but mottled with dark spots as age advances. The sub- 
stance of the lungs is of a light, spongy texture. Passing 
throucrh it in every direction from the trachea are numer- 
ous tabes, called bronchial tubes, growing smaller as they 
subdivide. Each tube ends in a minute cell, or vesicle, 
the air-cell. 

154. The air tubes commence at the back part of the 
mouth and nostrils with a single cylinder, which leads 
through the neck to the chest ; but in the lungs they are 
divided and subdivided into smaller and smaller tubes, and 
at the minute termination of these tubes are found the air- 
cells. These cells are separated from the myriads of minute 
arteries only by an exceedingly thin membrane, so thin 
that gases can pass through it, and the blood itselt is 
almost in contact with the air, whereby it becomes purified 
and in condition to nourish the system. 

155. The larynx is the organ of voice, and is the upper 
part of the trachea, where small cords, called vocal cords. 



378 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

stretch across it. Voice is produced by the air rushing 
over the vocal cords. 

156. The three points in common are : 

Both operate by expansion and contraction. 
Both are involuntary organs ; that is, on ordinary 

occasions they act independently of the will. 
Both are indispensable to the maintenance of life. 
Three points of difference: 

The lungs contain air; the heart blood. 

The lungs contain air cells ; the heart is divided 

into compartments. 
The lungs purify the blood ; the heart propels it 

through the body. 

157. The spinal column is composed of twenty-four 
vertebrae — the sacrum and the coccyx; and is a little over 
two feet in length. The vertebrae are separated from one 
another by a thick piece of elastic cartilage, which saves 
the body from jars. Twelve of the vertebrae in the 
thoracic region support the twelve ribs on each side. 

158. It is somewhat circular and flattened on the sides, 
with tooth-like projections, which match one with another. 
They each have spinous processes extending backward. 
Through the center of each vertebra the spinal cord 
passes. 

159. They are divided into cervical (neck), seven bones ; 
dorsal (back), twelve bones ; lumbar (loin), five bones. 

160. It is a bony cavity at the lower part of the spine, 
composed of the sacrum, coccyx, and the two innominate 
bones, or hip-bones. 

161. A flat, sword-shaped bone, consisting of three 
pieces, which forms the front part of the thorax, and sup- 
ports the ribs by means of their cartilages. 

162. A small bone at the lower extremity of the sacrum. 

163. The ribs are curved, and join the spine behind 
and the sternum in front. The lower five are called false 
ribs, because their connection with the sternum is not so 
close as that of the others. 

164. The skull is divided into the cranium and face; 
the cranium is composed of eight bones, the face of four- 
teen. 

165. The humerus of the arm, and the radius and ulna 
of the forearm. 

166. In the wrist are eight small bones arranged in two 
layers. 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 379 

1G7. In the hands are five metacarpal bones and four- 
teen phlanges. 

168. ^ In the thigh, the femur ; in the leg, the tibia and 
:fibula; in the ankle, seven small bones; in the foot, five 
metacarpal bones and fourteen phlanges ; also, the patella, 
or knee-pan. 

169. Four : The hinge joint,*as in the elbow ; the ball 
and socket joint, as in the shoulder and thigh ; a combina- 
tion of the hinge joint with a rotary movement, as in the 
neck ; and a joint with a sliding movement, as between 
the clavicle and sternum. 

170. They are held together by ligaments. 

171. It is the collar bone, extending between tne ster- 
num and shoulders. 

172. The scapula is a broad, flat, triangular bone, called 
the shoulder-blade ; it forms part of the shoulder joint. 

^ 173. Between the head and the first vertebra is a hinge 
joint ; and between the first and second vertebrae is a joint 
with a rotary movement, formed by a tooth-like projection 
from the second vertebra, which serves as an axis for the 
first to play upon. The two joints combined give the 
various movements to the head. 

174. By a ball and socket joint. 

175. That a rotary movement is given to the hand by 
the radius rotating in a fibrous socket at the elbow, and 
corresponding movement at the wrist between the ulna and 
hand. 

176. The femur, or thigh bone, has almost a globular 
head at its upper extremity, which is fitted into a very 
deep socket in the side bone of the pelvis. The socket is 
called the acetabulum. 

177. The head of the bone of the upper arm is less 
than half a ball, and is fitted into a very shallow socket in 
the upper corner of the scapula or shoulder-blade. 

178. Two hundred and four, besides the teeth and the 
patellae, or knee-caps. 

179. To protect the delicate organs ; to serve as levers 
on which the muscles may act to produce motion ; to 
preserve the shape of the body. 

180. Of animal and earthy matter ; two-thirds earthy 
and one-third animal. The earthy matter is principally 
carbonate and phosphate of lime. 

181. Bone is made of two kinds of tissue : A dense, 
liard tissue, like ivory, which is on the outside, and forms 



380 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

the shell ; and a porous or cancellated tissue, always found 
on the inside of the bone. 

182. The rickets are caused by a lack of mineral mat- 
ter in the bones, which become soft and under the weight 
of the body become distorted, and of course are weaker. 

183. A felon is a swelling of the finger or thumb, gen- 
erally of the last joint. It is caused by the accumulation 
of matter beneath the periosteum and next to the bone. 

184. By children standing on their feet before the bones 
of the lower limbs are strong enough to bear their weight. 

185. It is the forcing of a joint from its socket. This, 
is done by breaking or straining the tissues of the joint. 

186. The movements of the head ; raising the body on 
tiptoe; lifting the hands from the elbow. 

187. They first exist in a state of cartilage. 

188. By nature's deposit of phosphates and carbonate 
of lime. 

189. Human bones, when used as levers, are twenty-two 
times as strong as sandstone ; three and one-half the 
strength of lead ; twice as strong as oak timber. 

190. It is the growth of bone from the cartilage. 

191. It is that bone which is called the petrous, which 
contains the organs of hearing. 

192. Their chief uses are the following : 

To give smooth surfaces to the joints, by which 
there is an easy friction, and to serve as a cush- 
ion in shocks. 

To fasten bones together without destroying free- 
dom of movement, as between its vertebrae. 

To serve as a firm yet not unyielding framework, 
as in the larynx and trachea. 

To adapt itself to all purposes where firmness, 
toughness, elasticity and strength are required. 

193. It is called the periosteum, a firm, whitish-yellow 
membrane, and encloses the vessels which convey nutri- 
ment into the bones. It is this membrane to which tha 
ligaments and tendons are attached, as they cannot be 
fastened to the bone itself. 

194. For convenience of study they are divided inta 
four parts : 

The bones of the head. 

The bones of the trunk. 

The bones of the upper extremities. 

The bones of the lower extremities. 

195. In joints. 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 381 

196. To secrete a liquid which lubricates the joint. 

197. When, by an accident, a ligament or some fibers 
of a ligament are torn or much stretched. 

198. The active organs of locomotion. They are 
formed of bundles of reddish fibers endowed with the 
property of contractility. 

199. Two. : those under control of the will, called the 
muscles of animal life ; and those over which the will has 
no control, called muscles of organic life. 

200. To produce all the motions of the body. 

201. About 527; the number varies. 

202. Through the nervous system. Every muscle of 
animal life is supplied with nerves through which the mind 
operates. 

203. A disease of the voluntary muscles, by which they 
obtain spasmodic motions. 

204. Lockjaw is a disease in which there are spasms 
and a contraction of the muscles, usually beginning in the 
lower jaw. It is sometimes caused by a very trivial in- 
jury, as a cut on the foot, a fish-hook in the finger, a 
bruise, etc. 

205. It is a muscle of organic life. 

206. Principally by the aid of the diaphragm, which 
contracting, produces a vacuum in the lungs, and air 
rushes in to fill the Bj)ace. 

207. It is a flat muscle, and is a flexible partition that 
divides the chest from the abdomen, and separates the 
respiratory from the digestive organs. Its edges are at- 
tached to the back-bone, to the lower edge of the lower 
ribs, to the breast-bone, and to the lower part of the chest. 
It forms an arch, upon the upper surface of which the 
lungs rest; and in the hollow below, the liver and stomach. 
When the diaphragm is at rest its upper point reaches as 
high as the fourth rib; but when it is in action it is drawn 
down to below the seventh rib. 

208. The muscles on the sides of the chest raise the 
ribs and extend their circle forward and outward. The 
diaphragm draws down its arch and thus enlarges^ the 
chest, and the lungs having room for expansion, the air is 
pressed into them to fill the vacuum left by the enlarging 
chest. This is the mech«,nical part of the process of *in- 
spiration. 

209. After the chest is thus sufficiently expanded, the 
muscles of the ribs and the diaphragm relax and lose their 
firmness. Then the action of other muscles carries the 



382 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

ribs downwara; and at the same time, the muscles that 
cover the abdomen press upon its contents, and force them 
against the diaphragm. This yields to the pressure and 
rises upward and presses upon the lungs, which retreat 
before it, and the air is expelled. This is the process of 
expiration. 

210. Most cases of squinting are caused by long-sight- 
edness, the muscles being strained in the effort to obtain. 
distinct vision. 

211. A spasmodic action of the muscles of expiration 
forcing the air out violently through the mouth. 

212. It is the same action as coughing, only the mouth 
is closed, and the air rushes through the nose. 

213. Sighing is a prolonged inspiraiion, followed by an 
audible expiration. 

Snoring is caused by the air passing through both nose 
and mouth, the palate in the meantime produces a vibra- 
tion of the air. 

214. Laughing and crying are very much alike in re- 
gard to the action of the muscles to produce it. The- 
sounds are produced by short, rapid contractions of the 
diaphragm. 

215. Yawning, or gaping, is like sighing, only the^ 
mouth is open wide to take in the deep inspiration. 

Hiccoughing is caused by a contraction of the dia- 
phragm and a constriction of the glottis. 

216. It poisons the system, the expired air being loaded 
with waste matter and carbonic acid. 

217. Three : By being deprived of oxygen ; by being 
loaded with carbonic acid ; by being filled with waste 
matter from the lungs, skin, etc., or other poisonous 
materials. 

218. About four cubic feet. 

219. About 384 cubic inches. 

220. They grow dull and sleepy from the action of the 
poisonous matter in the air. 

221. The windows should be opened in such a manner 
as to give fresh air and not blow directly on the sleeper 
or student. This is usually accomplished best by lowering 
the top sash and at the same time lowering the curtain, 
otherwise the obstruction would throw the current down- 
ward. Ventilation through the *ceiling is advisable, and 
can easily be arranged at time of building. 

222. Eighteen. 

223. Those which breathe most are the most vigorous,, 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. SSS 

lively, and active, while those which breathe least are the 
most sluggish, stupid and feeble. 

224. In this disease the lungs are more or less filled with 
tubercles and abscesses; the air-vessels are, to some 
extent, closed, so that the air cannot penetrate them and 
reach the blood, to purify it ; therefore, for want of pure 
blood, the system is not well nourished, the muscles grow 
thin and weak, and the body gradually wastes away. 

225. Bronchitis is an inflammation of the mucous mem- 
brane of the bronchial tubes. This inflammation causes 
a secretion of a mucus, and consequent coughing. 

Pleurisy is an inflammation of the pleura. 

Pneumonia is an inflammation of the lungs, afiecting 
chiefly the air-cells. 

^ 226. By plenty of pure air, exercise, and a careful diet. 
Rich pastry, unripe fruit, salted meat, and acid drinks 
should be avoided. A certain quantity of fat should be 
eaten at each meal. 

227. The rule for prevention and cure of a cold is to 
the blood upon the surface. 

228. The first step in the cure of any disease is to obey 
the laws of health which have been violated. Medicine is 
not taken to destroy the disease, but to hold it in check 
while nature repairs the injury, and again brings the sys- 
tem into harmonious movement. 

229. For want of sufficient air. 

230. This gas is known by many as damps, dead air, 
and is often found in wells and vats. It is heavier than 
air, and, therefore, falls to the bottom of a vessel or room, 
like water. 

231. A pan of coals is sometimes left burning in a bed- 
room which has no fire-place, while some one sleeps on the 
bed. The gas given out falls to the floor, and fills the bot- 
tom of the room, rising as fast as it is produced, until, 
like water, it reaches the sleeper's head, and suffocation is 
the result. 

232. It produces death, not, as is commonly supposed, 
by filling the lungs with water, but because the water pre- 
vents the access of air to the respiratory organs, and the 
sufferer dies of suffocation. 

233. The necessity of good air, though in an unequal 
degree. Yet every animal, the highest and the lowest, the 
man and the worm, must sustain life by their breath. 

234. The animal uses oxygen and gives out carbonic 



384 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

acid ; while, on the other hand, the plant uses carbonic 
acid, and gives out oxvgen. 

235. 98^ to 100^ F." 

236. The carbon of the food and the oxygen of the air. 
These two unite and produce heat similar to the way in 
which heat is produced by sensible combustion. 

237. Into two grand classes : the warm-blooded, and in- 
cludes man, birds, quadrupeds, etc. Their heat is ever of 
the same degree. The other class is called cold-blooded, 
and includes snakes, oysters, fishes, worms, toads, turtles, 
etc. Their heat is but little higher than that of the 
medium in which they live. 

238. Perspiration. 

239. That moisture which is absorbed by the air as fast 
as formed. 

240. When the moisture is exuded too fast to be imme- 
diately absorbed, and is left in small drops upon the skin. 

241. Alcohol stimulates the stomach, and excites the 
nervous system. It supplies to the flame carbon and 
hydrogen ; but these soon burn out, and the body is after- 
ward cooler than it otherwise would have been. Food, 
alone, can sustain a permanent fire. 

242. Flesh, containing more carbon and hydrogen, sup- 
plies more fuel to the fire than vegetable matter. 

243. Because it supplies more carbon, and gives more 
heat. 

244. It gives form to the body, and acts as a powerful 
non-conductor of heat. It collects around the joints and 
between the muscles and prevents an irritation by friction. 

245. It does not accumulate within the cranium, the 
lungs, or the eye-lids. 

246. The oil glands are clusters of tiny sacs which 
secrete an oil that flows along the duct to the root of the 
hair, and thence oozes out on the cuticle. 

247. It is composed of two layers ; the derma, or true 
skin, and the epidermis, or cuticle. On the surface of the 
former are the sensitive papillae; and within or beneath 
it are the sweat glands, hair follicles and sebaceous glands. 
This layer is a dense and thick membrane, and composed 
of firm and strong fibers, and is almost filled with minute 
blood-vessels. 

248. The skin is used to protect, to exhale, and to 
absorb. 

249. The cuticle, or scarf skin, is a thin layer for the 
purpose of protecting the derma. 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 385 

250. A large proportion. 

251. It is an outgrowth from the skin. It has a root 
which IS bulbous, and a shaft which is hollow. The hollow 
ceases near the point. 

252. The nails are also outgrowths from the skin 
Ihey are flattened, elastic structures of a horny nature and 

are firmly connected with the cutis. 

253. In the pigment cells, or the rete mucosum, which 
are situated in the innermost and last formed layer of the 
T i^^-. ^^^ contents of these cells give the different 
shades to the various races of mankind. 

254. About five-eighths. 

255. A most intimate connection. As the blood finds 
Its way freely through it, it serves to relieve internal organs 
when the circulation is disturbed. 

256. It protects the body; it regulates the heat of the 
body by means of its sweat follicles; and it throws out 
much waste matter. 

of I* mu^ ^^^'^' ^^^^^' kidneys, liver and intestines. 
Zb^ J- ne stomach and intestines particularly; and some- 
times the skin. The lungs bring oxygen. 

259. The perspired fluid is formed by the inner skin 
and conveyed to the surface through minute tubes which 
are attached to the glands. There are three thousand five 
hundred and twenty-eight of these little tubes on each 
square inch in the palm of the hand, and twenty-eight 
hundred on each square inch throughout the whole body 
making seven millions of perspiratory tubes on a man of 
average size. 

260. The brain, spinal cord and the nerves. 

261. It is divided into two principal parts, the cere- 
brum and cerebellum. The first is divided by a deep 
fissure into two lateral halves, called hemispheres The 
under part of the cerebellum is divided in the same way 
Ihe cerebrum is much the larger part of the brain, and 
occupies the anterior portion of the skull. Its surface is 
indented with numerous convolutions. The outer portion 
of gray color, is called the cortical substance. The inner 
portion, of light color, is called the medullary substance 
Ihe cerebrum is separated from the cerebellum by a strong 
fibrous tissue. ^ 

262. By three membranes which cover it. The inner 
and middle of these membranes are very delicate, and give 
the brain a soft cushion to lie between it and its bony 
enclosure. The outer membrane is thick and very strong 



386 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

and would hold the brain in its position, even when re- 
moved from the skull. 

263. Of itself there is no feeling, although capable of 
recognizing the sensations of all other parts of the body. 

264. In the sense of feeling the nerves are spread over 
the whole body. It is most delicate in the point of the 
tongue and the tips of the fingers. The surface of the 
cutis is covered with minute conical projections called 
papillse. Each of these contains its tiny nerve, which 
receives the impression and conveys it to the brain, where 
perception is produced. 

265. The sense of taste is located in the papillae of the 
tongue or palate. The papillae starts up when tasting, as 
you can see by placing a drop of vinegar on another per- 
son's tongue, or your own, before a mirror. These small 
hair-like projections absorb the liquid to be tasted and 
convey it to the nerves. 

266. The nose, the seat of this sense, is composed of 
cartilage covered with muscles and skin, and joined to the 
skull by small bones. The nostrils open at the back into 
the pharynx, and are lined by a continuation of the 
mucous membrane of the throat. The olfactory nerves 
enter through a seive-like bony plate at the roof of the 
nose, and are distributed over the inner surface of the 
two olfactory chambers. 

267. The olfactory nerve, the optic, the facial and audi- 
tory, the pneumogastric, and others, nine in all. Some 
authors divide the seventh and eighth pair, and make 
three more nerves. 

268. It extends from the brain, through the whole 
length of the spinal column. It gives off thirty pairs of 
nerves, which divide and subdivide until they reach every 
part of the body. 

269. Two: motor and sensory. 

270. The nerves upon which the impression is made, 
the trunk which conveys the impression, and the brain 
which receives it and perceives it. 

271. They are. The amount of blood they receive is 
regulated by the nerves. 

272. They do. 

273. The heart would cease beating. 

274. When the motory nerve is cut, motion will be lost 
while feeling remains. 

275. When the sensory nerve leading to any part is cut^ 
sensation in.thac spot is lost, while motion remains. 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 387 

276. It is a sudden action given without thought or 
meditation; as, we start at a sound, jump from sudden 
^^"IfrJ^ ^^"^ at a flash of light or threatened blow. 

277. Drawing beautiful imaginations of the future 
where all things which are unpleasant and disagreeable 
are excluded; where wealth, honor, fame, love and pleas- 
ure are begging at the dreamer's feet. It is but one de- 
Jightful re very, where all is beautiful and satisfactory It 
IS more commonly known as '' building air-castles." 

278. It IS placed in a deep, bony socket. It contains 
twonumors: the aqueous humor, a transparent fluid in 
the anterior portion of the eye; and the vitreous humor, 
transparent and jelly-like, in the posterior portion, and 
forms the greater part of the eye. Between these two 
humors is the crystalHne lens, a double convex lens. 

27\) It IS a dense, fibrous coat, covering the whole eye 
except m front, in which the cornea is placed, a transpar- 
ent and strong tissue. 

280. It is the middle coat, and contains a black pig- 
ment, which absorbs such rays of light as are not needed 
lor vision. 

281. A delicate nervous membrane, Hning the inner 
surface of the choroid coat. The images of external ob- 
jects are received upon it. Behind, it is continuous with 
the optic nerve. 

1. u^^A J* ^^ ^ *^^^' circular-shaped curtain suspended 
behind the cornea, in the aqueous humor, and connected 
at Its circumference with the choroid coat. A small open- 
ing in Its center admits the rays of light, and is called the 
pupil. 

283. They are composed of cartilages adapted to the 
shape of the eye, the skin without, and the lining mem- 
brane within. One circular muscle surrounds the open 
part of the eye, and closes the lids when it contracts. An- 
other muscle, attached to the upper eyelid by one end, and 
to the bone of the socket by the other, opens the eye. 

284. In the lining membrane of the lids. 

285. The lachrymal glands secrete the tears, and are in 
the upper and outer part of the orbit. The tears clean the 
eye of any particles of foreign matter ; and upon reaching 
the inner corner of the eye pass into the lachrymal canal 
and nasal duct into the nose. The nasal duct is a mem- 
branous canal, about three-quarters of an inch in length, 
extending from the inner corner of the eye into the nose. 

286. The eje is rolled by a set of muscles peculiar to 



388 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

itself. These are attached by one end to the bony socket, 
and by the other to the eyebalL By their contractions 
they roll the eye in every direction; and by their co-opera- 
tion, both eyes are directed to a single object. 

287. It passes from the base of the brain forward 
through the socket and into the eyeball. After passing the 
outer and middle coats, it is spread out on their inner sur- 
face, and forms the retina, which receives the rays of light. 

288. The light is reflected from objects, and passes 
through the transparent cornea and the pupil into the ball, 
The humors and the lens refract these rays, and give them 
Buch a direction that they fall upon the retina, where they 
form the image of the object. This impression is carried 
along the optic nerve to the brain, and there perception 
takes place and the object is seen. 

289. Care should be taken that the light should not 
reflect directly in our face, and if possible to come from 
behind. 

290. The lens loses its convexity in some degree, and 
the rays of light are not concentrated at short distances 
upon the retina; the person becomes far-sighted. 

291. In one who is near-sighted the lenses are too con- 
vex; in one who is long-sighted the lenses are not convex 
enough. 

292. Bscause the muscles that govern the movement of 
the eyeball do not act in harmony; one muscle is more 
powerful than another, and draws the eye to one side. 

293. The external ear, the internal ear, and the passage 
between them. 

294. It is composed principally of stiff cartilage; and 
its shape is that which is best adapted to catch sounds, and 
txansmit them to the internal ear. The canal leading 
inwards is about an inch in length, and is covered with 
hair and wax to protect it from insects. A thin membrane, 
the covering of the drum of the ear, is stretched across the 
canal, and separates it from the internal ear. 

295. It consists of a cavity filled with air behind the 
membrane of the drum, and three small bones, which reach 
li'om the membrane to the labyrinth, where the auditory 
nerve is spread out in numerous filaments to receive im- 
pressions of sound. 

296 . A canal passing from the internal ear to the back 
part of the mouth, and serves as vent to the air in the 
drum of the ear. 

297. The pulsations of air pass along the external canal, 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 389 

cause the membrane of the drum to vibrate, which trans- 
mits the vibrations by the air and three small bones to the 
labyrinth where, in some unexplained manner, the fila- 
ments of the auditory nerve receive the impression, which 
IS conveyed to the brain, and we hear. 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, 



1. What is Philosophy ? Chemistry? 

2. Define mattel*. A body. A substance. 

3. What are the two kinds of properties which belong 
to each substance ? 

4. Define a general property. A specific property. 

5. Name the general properties of matter. 

6. Define magnitude. Size. 

7. Define impenetrability. 

8. What is the principle of driving a nail ? 

9. What is divisibility ? 

10. What is the limit of divisibility? 

11. What is the Atomic Theory? 

12. What are molecules ? Atoms ? 

13. Define porosity. 

14. Define inertia. 

15. Give examples of the inertia of a substance. 
\ 16. What is indestructibility ? 

^ 17. Name the specific properties of matter. 

18. Define ductility. Mention some of the most duc- 
tile substances. 

] 9. Define malleability. 

20. Is copper malleable ? 

21. What is tenacity? Elasticity? 

22. How many kinds of elasticity ? Describe them. 

23. What is hardness ? Brittleness ? 

24. What is motion ? Force ? Velocity? 

25. What are the resistances to motion? 

26. What is friction ? Momentum ? 
-27. What are the three laws of motion ? 

391 



392 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

28. What is compound motion ? 

, 29. What produces circular motion ? 

^ 30. Define centripetal force. Centrifugal. 

31. What is the Gyroscope? 

32. What is reflected motion? 

33. What is the angle of incident ? Of reflection ? 

34. Define energy. ' How many forms of energy? 

35. What is meant by the term, conservation of energy ? 

36. What is attraction ? What are its forces ? 

37. How are the molecular forces divided ? 

38. What is cohesion ? Explain how it acts by uniting 
two pieces of iron by heat. 

39., What is nature's law in regard to liquids and 
solids ? Explain why the drop of water is round. 

40. Why is melted iron suddenly cooled brittle? 

41. What is annealing and tempering? 

42. Define adhesion. Give examples. 

43. What is capillary attraction ? 

44. What is the osmose of liquids ? 

45. What is the law of gravitation ? 

46. What is gravitation ? Gravity ? Weight ? 

47. What would be the weight of a body at the center 
of the earth? Why? 

48. Give the laws of weight. 

49. How do you reckon the velocity of falling bodies ?" 

50. How find the depth of a well by the use of this, 
knowledge of falling bodies ? 

51. Where is the center of gravity of any substance? 

52. Give some examples of the use of this principle of 
the center of gravity in our every-day life. 

53. Describe the pendulum. 

54. How find the time for the vibration ot any pendu- 
lum ? 

55. Does a clock gain or lose time in winter ? 

56. What is the length of a pendulum that beats a 
second of time ? 

57. What is a machine ? 

58. What are the mechanical powers ? 

59. What is the law of mechanics ? 

60. What is the lever? Power? Weight? Fulcrum?" 
The arms ? 

61. How many classes of levers are there? 

62. Describe the compound lever. 

63. What is the difference between the wheel and axle^ 
and the common lever ? 



NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 393 

64. What is the difference between the inclined plane 
and the screw ? 

65. What is the wedge ? Give examples. 

66. Describe the pulley. How are they classified ? 

67. How many principles are represented- in the six 
mechanical powers ? 

68. Define Hydrostatics. 

69. What is the law of the pressure of liquids ? 

70. Describe why water flows from an artesian well. 

71. Describe the Hydraulic Press. 

72. How reckon the power of the hydraulic press ? 

73. Describe the Hydrostatic Bellows. 

74. How find the pressure on the bottom of a vessel ? 

75. What would be the pressure on a square foot of a 
cask which was connected with a perpendicular pipe with 
an area of ^V of a square inch and to hold i lb. of water? 

"^ 76. What is specific gravity ? 

77. How find the. specific gravity of a solid? 

78. How find the weight of a given bulk of any sub- 
stance ? 





TABLE OF SPECIFIC 


GRAVITY. 




Iridium 


. . .21.80 


Silver 


.10.50 


Pme Wood... 


.. .66 


Platinum.... 


...21.53 


Copper 


. 8.90 


Cork 


.. .24 


Gold 


...19.34 


Cast-iron 


. 7.21 


Milk 


.. 1.03 


Mercury.. . . 


...13.59 


Diamond 


. 3,50 


Sea- water 


.. 1.03 


Lead 


...11.36 


Ice 


. .93 


Alcohol 


.. .79 



79. How much heavier is gold than water? What 
will a cubic foot of this metal weigh ? 

80. How find the volume of a body? 

81. Define Hydraulics ? 

82. What fall is required in a river to give it a current? 
What would be the flow of a river with a fall of 3 feet to 
a mile ? 

83. Define Pneumatics ? 

84. What is the pressure of the atmosphere ? 

85. How high will this weight cause water to rise 
in a vacuum ? Mercury ? 

86. Where do we use this power of atmospheric pres- 
sure to great advantage ? 

87. Describe the barometer. 

88. What are its uses ? 

89. How does the barometer foretell the weather? 

90. What opposing forces act upon the air? 

91. Describe the siphon. 



^94 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

92. At what height in the atmosphere will mercury- 
stand at 15 inches ? 

93. Why can a fly walk upon the ceiling of a room ? 

94. Define Acoustics. 

95. How is Bound transmitted ? 

96. How do we prove that air is necessary to transmit 
sound ? 

97. Upon what does the velocity of sound depend ? 

98. Explain why an elastic medium will carry the 
.sound waves faster than one not so elastic. 

99. How fast does sound travel ? 
• 100. How fast does sound travel in water? 

101. Why does it travel so much faster in water? 

102. What is refraction of sound ? 

103. What is the reflection of sound? 

104. What are echoes ? 

105. How can two sounds produce silence? 

106. How is the sound produced in wind instruments ? 

107. What are Harmonics ? 

1 108. What is the Phonograph ? 

109. What is the limit of vibrations for musical 
^sounds ? 

110. Define Optics. 

111. What is a luminous body ? A non-luminous? 

112. Define a medium. A transparent body. 

113. Give three laws of light. 

114. What is the velocity of light ? 

115. Define a translucent body. An opaque body. 

116. Explain the undulatory theory of light. 

117. Name and define the three kinds of mirrors. 

118. What is the general principle of mirrors ? 

119. What is the effect of looking through a concave 



mirror 



120. What is mirage? Give the cause of mirage. 

121 . Name the seven primary colors of the solar spectrum, 

122. What is the spectroscope? 

123. How is the rainbow formed? 

124. How are halos formed ? 

125. Explain spherical aberration. 

126. Explain chromatic aberration. 

127. What is the remedy? 

128. Describe the microscope. 

129. Describe the telescope. 

130. Describe the opera glass. 

131. Describe the camera. 



NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 395 

132. Why does a blow on the head make one "see 
stars?" 

133. Define luminous heat. Obscure heat. 

134. Define diathermanous body. What is cold? 

135. What are the sources of heat? 

136. Can force be destroyed? 

137. Give the theory of vaporization. 

138. Why does it require a higher temperature to boil 
salt water than it does fresh ? 

139. Define evaporation. 

140. What is a vacuum-pan ? 

141 . What is the relation between absorption and re- 
flection ? 

142. Why does ice sometime form at night on the 
Desert of Sahara? 

143. Describe the steam-engine. 

144. Describe the governor. 

145. What is the object of a fly-wheel ? 

146. What is meteorology ? 

147. What is the difl'erence between fogs and clouds ? 

148. What form of cloud precipitates rain ? 

149. At what temperature does water expand, either by 
heat or cold ? 

150. What causes the singing of a tea-kettle? 

151. What causes the snapping of wood when laid on 
the fire ? 

^ 152. What gives the blue color to the air? 

153. Define electricity. 

154. In what forms does this electric force manifest 
itself? 

155. Define magnetism. A magnet. 

156. Define magnetic induction. 

157. Describe the compass. 

158. Is the needle true to the pole ? 

159. Why are portions of country, especially Missouri, 
difficult to survey ? 

160. Define fi-ictional electricity. 

161. Define the electroscope. 

162. What is the theory of electricity ? 

163. Is it a polar force ? 

164. Define a conductor. An insulator. 

165. What is the best conductor? Best insulator? 

166. Can electricity be collected from an iron rod? 

167. Define electrical induction. 

168. Describe the Leyden jcar. 



396 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

169. How is the jar charged ? 

170. What is the cause of lightning ? 

171. What is the cause of thunder? 

172. Is there any relation between the aurora borealis 
and magnetism ? 

173. What is the value of lightning rods ? 

174. Does the lightning ever pass upward from the 
earth ? 

175. Has nature provided any lightning rods ? 

176. What is the velocity of electricity? 

177. What are the marked differences between frictional 
and galvanic electricity ? 

178. What is the effect of a voltaic current on a mag- 
netic needle ? 

179. What is a galvanometer ? 

180. What animals have a large amount of electricity ? 



ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS 



ON 



NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 



1. Philosophy is a knowledge of nature and nature's 
laws. Chemistry treats of the chemical changes of matter. 

2. Matter is anything that occupies space. A body is 
a separate portion of matter. A substance is any one of 
the various kinds of matter. 

3. General and Specific. 

4. General property is that which belongs to all sub- 
stances, as weight, divisibility. Specific property relates 
to the quality of a substance, as its color, its sweetness, its 
toughness. 

6. They are magnitude, impenetrability, divisibility, 
porosity, inertia, and indestructibility. 

6. Magnitude is the property of occupying space. Size 
is the amount of space a body fills. 

7. The property of occupying space so as to exclude 
all other bodies, for no two bodies can occupy the same 
space at the same time. 

8. The nail does not penetrate the wood but pushes 
aside the fibres and thus presses them close together. 

9. That property of a body which allows it to be sep- 
arated into parts. 

10. Practically it is limited only by the incompleteness 
of our means to make a division. 

11. That the smallest particle of matter one can see is 
composed of still smaller particles, and these particles 
divided into other divisions, each minute portion being 
called an atom. 

12. Molecules are tiny masses of any substance which 
contain the same properties of the substance. Atoms are 
still smaller divisions. 



398 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

13. The property of a substance to have pores. 

14. Inertia is the lack of power, as a body put in 
motion gradually comes to a point of rest, there being no 
power to go or to stop. 

15. A wagon at rest requires more power to start, as its 
inertia is to be overcome. Jumping from a train of cars 
while in motion proves that a body under motion cannot 
overcome the inertia by the simple jump. 

16. The property which renders matter incapable of 
being destroyed. 

17. They are ductility, malleability, tenacity, elasticity, 
hardness, and brittleness. 

18. The property of being drawn into a wire. Gold^ 
silver, and platinum. 

19. The property which admits of hammering, or rolled 
into sheets. Gold is one of the most malleable substances 
known. 

20. It is said that a workman with his hammer can 
beat out a kettle from a solid block of this metal. 

21. The property of a body which resists separation. 
Elasticity is the property of stretching, bending, com- 
pressing or twisting a substance. 

22. They are of four kinds : 

Elasticity of compression. 
Elasticity of expansion. 
Elasticity of torsion. 
Elasticity of flexure. 

23. Hardness is that property which does not depend 
upon density, but upon the character of the substance. 
Brittleness is the property which admits of an easy sep- 
aration of its parts, or easily broken. 

24. Motion is a change of place. Force, the power to 
move or stop a substance. Velocity, the rate a body moves. 

25. Friction and the resistance of air or water. 

26. Friction is the resistance a body meets in moving 
over another body. Momentum is the quantity of motion 
in a body. 

27. First — A bod}^ set in motion will move forever in a 
straight line, unless acted upon by some external force. 

Second — A. force acting upon a body in motion or at rest, 
produces the same effect whether it acts ajone or with 
other forces. 

Third — Action and reaction are equal. 

28. The action of two different kinds of motion at the 
same time, as throwing a ball from a moving train will 



NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 399^ 

have two motions, the forward movement of the train and 
the projecting force. 

29. There must be a projecting force and a restraining 
force ; the one seeks to throw the object in a straight line, 
the other to draw it back, while the combination of the 
two forces produces a curve. 

30. A ball suspended from a string and revolved around 
the head will illustrate these two forces. The centripetal is 
the force which holds the ball down, while the centrifugal 
is the power that would throw it off. 

31. An instrument to illustrate the composition of 
forces in rotary motion. To those who do not see the act- 
ing influences of these motions the instrument is astonish- 
ing. (See a Philosophy for diagram.) 

32. It is the reaction given to an elastic body thrown 
against another body. 

33. The angle of incident is the angle at which a body 
strikes another body. The angle of reflection is the angle 
made in its rebound. 

34. Energy is the power to work or accomplish an 
object. It is divided into active and latent. 

35. It means the changing of one form of energy into 
another without loss. 

36. The force which holds particles together. The 
forces of attraction are the Molecular .Forces and Attrac- 
tion of Gravitation. 

37. Into cohesion and adhesion. 

38. It is the force which holds together the molecules 
of the same kind. In uniting two pieces of iron the parts 
are heated to a white heat, and by placing them together 
and pounding the molecules are brought near enough for 
cohesion to grasp them. 

39. Liquids tend to form spheres and solids to form 
crystals. The drop of water is round because the center 
of the drop is the center of attraction, and all particles of 
the water on the outside must be the same distance from 
the center. 

40. Because nature has not had time to arrange the 
crystals as it is natural for them to be. 

41. It is the process of rendering metals hard, brittle, 
or flexible. This is done by heating and cooling. In iron 
a high heat suddenly cooled becomes brittle and hard, 
while with copper it is the opposite. 

42. Adhesion is the force which holds together mole- 



400 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

cules of different kinds. The action of glue, mortar, 
solder, etc., are examples of adhesion. 

43. It is a variety of adhesion in which the molecules 
of a substance lose a portion of its cohesion and adhere to 
another substance. 

44. It is the process of the exchange of liquids, that is, 
if two kinds of liquids are separated by a thin, porous 
substance, as that of a bladder, there will be an exchange, 
a portion of one going out and the other going in. 

45. Every particle of matter in the universe attracts 
every other particle of matter with a force directly pro- 
portional to its mass, and decreasing as the square of the 
distance increases. 

46. Gravitation is the general term applied to the at- 
traction that exists between all bodies in the universe. 
Gravity is applied to the attraction of the substances of 
the earth. Weight is the measure of the force of gravity. 

47. It is probable that a substance would have no 
weight, as the center of the earth would be a point where 
gravitation would be equal in all directions. 

48. A body weighs nothing at the center of the earth. 
The weight of a body above the earth decreases as the 

square of the distance from the center of the earth in- 
creases. 

The weight of a body varies on different portions of the 
surface of the earth. 

49. In the first second, a body gains a velocity of 32 
feet and falls 16 feet. At the end of any given second, the 
velocity is 16 feet multiplied by twice the number of the 
second minus one. In any number of seconds a body falls 
16 feet multiplied by the square of the number of seconds. 

50. Let a stone fall into the well and count the seconds 
that it takes to go to the bottom. Square the number of 
seconds and multiply 16 by the result. 

51. It is that point on which, if supported, the body 
will balance itself. 

52. In walking, we lean forward to create a balance, or 
in rising from a chair we do the same thing in order to as- 
sist the muscles; in carrying a pail of water we lean to one 
side; in running we lean still farther forward. 

53. The pendulum consists of a weight so suspended 
as to swing freely. Its movements to and fro are termed 
vibrations or oscillations. The path through which it 
passes is called the arc, and the extent to which it goes in 
either direction is styled its amplitude. 



NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 401 

54. The times of the vibrations of different pendulums 
are proportional to the square roots of their respective 
lengths. By comparing any length with a known length, 
as that of the vibration of one second, and we have the 
time required. 

55. As heat expands and cold contracts, a pendulum 
increases in length in summer and decreases in winter, 
therefore a clock loses time in the winter. 

56. At New York it is 39yV inches in length. It varies 
according to its place on the earth's surface, or rather 
according to the force of gravity. 

57. It is a combination of powers designed to accom- 
plish some object. Some are intricate and some are 
simple. 

58. They are the lever, wheel and axle, inclined plane, 
screw, wedge, and pulley. 

59. The power multiplied by the distance through 
which it moves, is equal to the weight multiplied by the 
distance through which it moves. 

60. The lever is the bar turning on a pivot. The 
power is the force used. The weight is the object to be 
lifted. The fulcrum is the pivot on which the lever rests. 
The arms are the parts of the lever each side of the 
fulcrum. 

61.. There are three classes : 

First class — The power is pressed against the end of the 
bar, the weight at the other end, and fulcrum between. 

Second class — The weight is between the fulcrum and 
power, and the power pulls upwards. 

Thittd class — The power is between the weight and ful- 
crum, and pulls upward, the fulcrum being above the bar. 

62. It consists of several levers so connected that the 
short arm of the first acts upon the long arm of the second, 
and so on. 

63. The principle is the same, the wheel and axle 
being a perpetual lever. 

64. The screw is an inclined plane wound around a 
cylinder. The principle is the same. 

65. The wedge is a double inclined plane, used in 
splitting wood. Nails, needles, knives, and axes are made 
on this principle. 

66. The pulley consists of a wheel, within the grooved 
edge of which runs a cord. They are classified as fixed, 
movable, and combinations. 

67. Three : the lever, inclined plane, and pulley. These 



402 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

could also be reduced as the pulley is but another form of 
the lever. 

68. Hydrostatics treat of liquids at rest. 

69. The pressure is equal in all directions. 

70. It is because the strata in which the water is found 
leads to a water supply higher than the surface where the 
well is bored. It is the principle of pressure, and is con- 
fined by a strata of clay above the current of water. 

71. It is a machine for pressing cotton, or any sub- 
stance desired. The substance to be pressed is placed 
above a large piston in a cylinder containing water. At 
the bottom of the cylinder a small tube runs to another 
cjdinder with piston and lever purchase, by which power 
water is forced through the tube into the large cylinder 
and the piston rises against the substance and a great 
pressure obtained. 

72. The pressure will be in proportion to the area of 
the tube and large cylinder. If the area of the tube is 1, 
and the cylinder 100, then the power will be 100. Then^ 
by the use of a lever in the small cylinder, we can increase 
this force in proportion to the power of the lever. 

73. The principle is the same as in the hydraulic press, 
only placed in a different form. 

74. Multiply the area of the base by the perpendicular 
height, and that product by the weight of a cubic foot of 
liquid. 

75. The pressure would be 2,880 pounds to the square 
foot. 

76. Specific gravity is the weight of a substance com- 
pared with the weight of the same bulk of anothtr sub- 
stance. Water is taken as the standard for solids and 
liquids, and air for gases. 

77. Weigh the body in air, and in water ; the differ- 
ence is the weight of its bulk of water ; divide its weight, 
in air by its loss of weight in water ; the quotient is the 
specific gravity. 

78. Multiply the weight of one cubic foot of water by 
the specific gravity of the substance, and that product by 
the number of cubic feet. 

79. By looking at the table we see that gold is 19.34 
times heavier than water. As a cubic foot of water weighs- 
1,000 ounces, then a cubic foot of gold must weigh 1,000' 
times 19.34, or 19,340 oz.— 1,2081 pounds. 

80. Weigh the substance in the water, and the loss in 
weight will be the weight of the displaced water. This 



NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 403 

loss will be that part of a cubic foot that it is of 1,000 oz. 
81. Hydraulics treat of liquids in motion. In this, 
as in hydrostatics, water is taken as the type. In theory, 
its principles are those of falling bodies, but they are so modi- 
fied by various causes that in practice they cannot be relied 
upon, excej)t as verified by experiment. The discrepancy 
arises from changes of temperature, which vary the fluidity 
of the liquid, from friction, the shape of the orifice, etc. 

_ 82. Three inches per mile will produce a current three 
miles per hour. Three feet will make a mountain current. 

83. Pneumatics treat of the general properties and the 
pressure of gases. 

84. It is about 15 pounds per square inch. 

85. Water will rise about 34 feet. Mercury 30 inches. 

86. It is used in our common well-pumps. 

87. The barometer is an instrument for measuring the 
pressure of the atmosphere, and is so arranged that the 
weight of the air will cause the mercury to rise in the tube. 
According to this weight, or pressure of the air, so does 
the mercury rise or fall in the tube. 

88. ^ It is used to indicate the weather, and to measure 
the height of mountains. 

89. When the air is light the barometer falls, as the 
pressure is less. It is by a " falling barometer " that we pre- 
dict a storm. One cause of a light atmosphere is the pres- 
ence of a large amount of vapor, and it is due to this 
moisture that rains occur. 

90. There are three forces: the centrifugal and heat 
forces, which tend to throw the air away from the earth, 
and gravity, which holds it down. 

91. It is a U-shaped tube, having one arm longer than 
the other. Insert the short arm in the water and then ex- 
haust the air from the long arm and water will flow until 
it is lowered to the bottom of the short arm. 

92. It will stand at 15 inches, 3.4 miles above the 
earth. 

93. The feet of the fly are so arranged as to produce a 
vacuum by which the pressure holds the foot until another 
step is taken. 

94. Acoustics treat of the philosophy of sound. 

95. It is transmitted by the vibrations of the air. 

96. A bell rung in a vacuum will make no noise. 

97. It depends upon the elasticity and density of the 
medium through which it jDasses- 

98. The higher the elasticity the more promptly and 



404 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

rapidly do the wave sounds transmit its motion from one 
set of molecules to another. 

99. At the freezing point sound travels at the rate of 
1.090 feet per second. In a rise of temperature it travels 
a little faster. 

100. It travels through water at the rate of 4.700 feet 
per second. 

101. Because of the greater elasticity of water. 

102. When a sound-wave goes obliquely from one me- 
dium to another it is bent out of its course, or refracted. 

103. Sound is reflected when the sound-waves strike 
against the surface of another medium, and a portion 
goes on while the rest is reflected. 

104. They are simply reflected sounds. 

105. If two sounds meet in exactly opposite phases, 
and the two forces are equal, they will balance each other, 
and silence will ensue. Thus, a sound added to a sound 
will produce silence, and in the same way, two motions 
may produce rest ; two lights may cause darkness ; and 
two heats may produce cold. 

106. In wind instruments the sound-waves run back- 
ward and forward through the tube, and act upon the sur- 
rounding air like the vibrations of a cord. 

107. Whenever a cord vibrates it separates into seg- 
ments at the same time. Thus, we have the full or funda- 
mental note of the entire string, and superposed upon it 
the higher notes produced by the vibrating parts. These 
are called overtones or harmonics. 

108. It is an instrument for recording sound vibra- 
tions. 

109. It is fixed at 38,000 vibrations per second for the 
highest, and 16 for the lowest. Below this the sounds are 
separate. 

110. Optics is that science which treats of light and 
visions . 

111. A luminous body is one that sends forth light. 

A non-luminous body is one that reflects light, but is 
visible only in the presence of a luminous body. 

112. A medium is any substance through which light 
passes. A transparent body is so clear that it does not 
obstruct much of the light which passes through it. 

113. Light passes off from a luminous body equally in 
every direction. 

Light passes through a uniform medium in a straight 
line. 



NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 405 

The intensity of light decreases as the square of the 
distance increases. 

114. It is estimated at 186,000 miles per second. 

115. A translucent body is one that lets some light pass 
through it. 

116. There is supposed to be a fluid termed ether, 
constitutmg a kind of universal atmosphere, diffused 
through all space. It is so subtle that it fills the pores of 
all bodies, eludes all chemical tests, passes through the glass 
receiver, and remains even in a vacuum. 

117. They are plane, concave, and convex. The first 
has a flat surface ; the second is raised on the inside ; the 
third is raised on the outside, like a watch crystal. 

118. The general principle is that the image is always 
seen m the direction of the reflected ray as it enters the 
eye. 

119. If standing near the glass the face or object is 
magnified, but walk backwards and the size decreases 
until we reach the focus, when it disappears ; but still 
receding from the focus, the image again appears, but in- 
verted. 

120. Mirage is an optical delusion, by which the mind 
really beheves certain objects, as water, trees, vessels, etc., 
are m sight, when in reality the refraction and reflection of 
the rays of light traversing layers of air of unequal density, 
bring a reflection of these objects before our vision, 
although many miles away. This phenomena has often 
been observed by mariners and travelers on large plains or 
deserts, and because of the delusion which it brings forth 
it is i)ronounced an optical delusion, when it is only an 
image reflected from beyond. 

121. They are violet, indigo blue, green, yellow, orange 
red. 

122. It is an instrument for examining a ray of light. 
The ray of light passes through a tube striking a prism, 
which in turn is taken up by an object glass, and being 
thus largely magnified, is easily analyzed by our vision. 

123. It is formed by the refraction and reflection of the 
sunbeam in drops of falling water. The water is a prism 
which gives out the reflection. 

124. Halos, coronas, sundogs, circles about the moon, 
the display of the reflection of sunrise and sunset, are 
produced by the refraction and reflection of the sun's rays 
by the clouds. The familiar phenomenon of the " sun's 



406 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

drawing water " consists merely of the long shadows of 
broken clouds. 

125. Rays which pass through a lens near the edge are 
brought to a focus sooner than those nearer the center ; 
therefore, when an image is clear around the edge, it will 
be indistinct at the center, and vice versa. This wandering 
of the rays from the focus is termed spherical aberration. 

126. Chromatic aberration is caused by the different 
refrangibility of the several colors which compose white 
light. The violet being bent most, tends to come to a 
focus sooner than the red, which is bent least. This causes 
the play of colors seen around the image produced by an 
ordinary glass. 

127. It is remedied by using a second lens of differ- 
ent dispersive power, which counteracts the effects of the 
first. 

128. Microscopes are of two kinds — simple and com- 
pound. The former consists of a double convex lens; the 
latter contains at least two lenses. 

1 29. Telescopes are of two kinds — reflecting and refract- 
ing. The former contains a large metallic mirror which 
reflects the rays of light to a focus ; the latter, like the 
telescope, contains an object-lens, which forms an image. 

130. The opera-glass contains an optic-glass and an 
eye-piece. The latter is a double concave lens ; this in- 
creases the visual angle by "diverging the rays of light, 
which would otherwise come to a focus beyond the eye- 
piece. 

131. The camera used by photographers contains a 
double convex lens which throws an inverted image of the 
object upon the ground-glass screen. 

132. Because the blow excites the optic nerve, and 
so produces the sensation of light. 

133. Luminous heat is that which radiates from a lumi- 
nous body. Obscure heat is that from a non-luminous 
source. 

134. A diathermanous body is one which allows the 
heat to pass through it readily. Cold is a term indicating 
the absence of heat in a greater or less degree. 

135. They are the sun, stars, mechanical and chemical 
forces. 

136. It cannot. If destroyed in one form it reappears 
in another without loss. 

137. If heat be applied to a liquid, the temperature 
rises until the boiling point is reached, when it stops. The 



NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 407 

expansion, however, continues until the motion is so vio- 
lent as to overcome the cohesive force and to throw off 
particles of the liquid. 

138. Anything which adds to the cohesive power of 
water elevates the boiling point. 

139. Evaporation is a slow formation of vapor, which 
takes place at all ordinary temperatures. It is hastened by 
an increase of surface and heat. This principle is made 
useful in the arts for separating a solid from the liquid 
which holds it in solution. 

140. It is a mode of boiling liquids at a low tempera- 
ture. The pan is made with an air-tight cover and the air 
is exhausted above the liquid, by which means, the pres- 
sure being taken from off the liquid, it commences to boil 
at a low temperature, and but little danger of burning. 
This is used in making sugar, etc. 

141. Absorption and reflection are intimately connected 
with radiation. A good absorber is also a good radiator, 
but a good reflector can be neither. Snow is a good reflector, 
but a poor absorber or radiator. Light colors absorb 
less and reflect more than dark colors. White is the best 
reflector, and black the best absorber and radiator. 

142. The extreme dryness of the air allows the heat to 
escape so fast that cold is produced. This principle is 
known to chemists, and is one of the agents to produce arti- 
ficial ice in our ice-machines. 

143. There are two classes of engines — ^thehigh pressure 
and the low pressure. In the first mentioned the steam, 
after being used as a direct power, escapes to the open air; 
-in the low pressure the steam is condensed by a spray of 
cold water and a vacuum formed behind the piston. En- 
gines of the high pressure are used on railroads and wher- 
ever there is a plentiful supply of water. The other is used 
where it is economy to condense the steam and save the 
water for using again. 

144. The governor is an apparatus for regulating the 
supply of steam. When the machine goes too fast, the balls 
fly out by centrifugal force and shut off a portion of the 
steam ; when too slowly, they fall back, and, opening the 
valve, let on the steam again. 

145. It serves to give a uniform motion to the machin- 
ery. 

146. It is that clepartment of philosophy which treats 
of the atmosphere aud its phenomena, particularly in its 
relation to heat and moisture. 



408 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

147. They differ only in their elevation in the atmos- 
phere. 

148. It is the nimbus. 

149. At 39° Fah. water commences to expand until it 
reaches 32°, when it freezes, or if we apply heat it will 
also expand. Water cooled from any considerable heat 
contracts until it reaches 39°, when it then expands, as first 
stated. 

150. The escaping steam is thrown into vibrations by 
the peculiar shape of the spout. 

151. It is caused by the expansion of the air in the 
cells of the wood. 

152. It is the vapor which it contains, reflecting the 
blue light of the sunbeam. 

] 53. Electricity is a force of nature, termed the electric 
fluid. As a science, it unfolds the phenomena and laws of 
that fluid. 

154. In the form of magnets, frictional, galvanic, ther- 
mal and animal electricity. 

155. Magnetism is that branch of science which treats 
of the properties of the msgnet. A magnet is a term 
applied to certain specimens of iron ore, which have the 
property of attracting other portions of iron, and, when 
freely suspended, point to the poles. 

156. It is the power which a magnet possesses to de- 
velop magnetism in iron. Jf a piece of soft iron be 
brought near a magnet, it immediately assumes the mag- 
netic state, which, however, it loses on being removed. 

157. It is a magnetic needle, resting upon a pivot, 
enclosed in a circular box, and points nearly north. 

158. It is ; although it shifts thus every hour in the 
day, and does so only in obedience to the laws which con- 
trol its action. 

159. It is because of great bodies of iron ore which 
nature has stored in the ground. 

160. Frictional electricity is developed by friction. This 
is often seen by combing the hair, by rubbing the back of 
a cat, etc. It is said that a person, in cold, frosty weather, 
by shuffling about in his stocking-feet upon the carpet, can 
develop so much electricity in his body that he can ignite 
a jet of gas by simply applying his finger to it. 

161. The electroscope is an instrument to detect changes 
in the electric state of bodies. 

162. It is a power of nature which contains a positive 
and negative force, and exists in every body in a state of 



NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 409 

equilibrium, out when disturbed by friction, chemical 
action, etc., these forces are set free, but we cannot develop 
one without the other. 

163. They are called a polar force, but the slightest 
cause disturbs the electric equilibrium. 

164. A conductor is a body which allows the electric 
force to pass freely through it. An insulator is a non- 
conductor. 

165. Copper is the best conductor, and is used in all 
electrical experiments. Glass is one of the best insulators. 

166. It can be collected only by means of insulation. 
It can be developed by rubbing an iron rod, but is lost as 
fast as formed by passing off through the metal to the 
hand. A glass rod does not conduct it to the body, so it 
is retained until.it gradually dissipates in the air. 

167. It is the influence of an electrified body over other 
bodies. 

168. It consists of a glass jar, coated inside and outside, 
nearly to the top, with tin-foil, which is fitted with a cover 
of baked wood, through which passes a wire with a knob 
at the top and below, a chain extending to the inner coat- 
ing. 

169. The jar is discharged by holding one knob of the 
discharger upon the outer coating, and the other upon the 
knob of the jar. The equilibrium will be restored with a 
sharp snap and a brilliant flash, while minute particles are 
detached from the solid conductors and, burning, give 
color and brilliancy to the spark. 

170. Lightning is only the discharge of a Leyden jar 
on the grand scale upon which nature performs her opera- 
tions. Two clouds charged with opposite electricities, and 
separated by the non-conducting air, approach each other. 
When the tension becomes sufficient to overcome the 
resistance, the two forces rush together with a blinding 
flash and terriffic peal. 

171. Thunder is the clashing of the atoms of displaced 
air, caused by its sudden separation as the lightning passes 
through it. The same principle exists in the firing of a 
gun. 

172. As the magnetic needle is disturbed while the 
aurora is visible, there seems to be an intimate relation 
between them. 

173. Outside of the possibility of saving a building 
from a stroke of lightning, it restores the equilibrium 
between the earth and the clouds by quietly conducting 



410 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

the fluid from the overcharged atmosphere to tne earth. 

174. It does, both quietly and by sudden discharges. 

175. It has. In the laws of nature we find that every 
leaf, twig and spire of grass is a harmless conductor. A 
common blade of grass, pointed by nature's exquisite 
workmanship, is three times more effectual than the finest 
■cambric needle, and a single pointed twig than the metallic 
point of the best constructed rod. 

176. It is estimated that through a copper wire its 
velocity is 288,000 miles per second. 

177. Frictional electricity is noisy, sudden and con- 
vulsive ; galvanic is silent, constant and powerfal. 

178. If a current of electricity be passed over a mag- 
netic needle, the needle will turn and tend to place itself at 
right angles to the wire. If the wire be brought over and 
beneath the needle, it doubles the effect, and the play of 
the needle becomes a very delicate test of the presence and 
direction of the electric force. 

179. It is an instrument for measuring the force, or 
detecting the presence of minute quantities of galvanic 
electricity. 

180. Electric fish are the most common, and among 
these the most noted are the torpedo and electric eel. 
These are so powerful that their shock is a means of de- 
fense. 



PARTICIPLES AND INFINITIVES 
MADE EASY, 



QUESTIONS. 



1. What construction have Infinitives and Parti- 
ciples ? 

2. When has an infinitive the construction of a noun ? 

3. Illustrate by example. 

4. When has the infinitive the construction of an 
adjective? 

5. Give examples. 

6. When has the infinitive the construction of an 
adverb ? 

7. Give examples. 

8. Have infinitives case ? 

9. Has the infinitive always a subject ? 

10. What is the subject of " to qoJ'^ in "/ wished to ao 
homer 

11. In what case is the subject of the infinitive? 

12. Has the participle always a subject? 

13. In what case is the subject of the participle? 

14. What is the rule for the construction of participles ? 

15. In the sentence, " To be honest with you, I was in 
error," parse "io 6e." 

16. In what manner do we determine whether the 
infinitive has the construction of the noun, or the adjective, 
or the adverb ? 

17. How do we determine what is the subject of the 
infinitive, when that is not apparent, as in " He was eager 
to depart?" 

18. In the sentence, " To die is gain," what is the sub- 
ject of ''to die r 

411 



PARTICIPLES AND INFINITIVES 
MADE EASY. 



ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS. 

1. All Infinitives and Participles have the construc- 
tion and use of the noun, or the adjective, or the adverb. 

2. When used as subject of a verb, or in apposition 
with a noun ; as a noun in the absolute case ; as the object 
of a verb or preposition. 

3. To play is natural. Real labor, to do good, is con- 
ducive to happiness. To lie, oh how base ! They love to 
laugh. What went ye out for to see ? 

4. When used to limit or modify the meaning of a 
noun. 

5. A desire to flay is natural. He gave orders to march. 
This rule is to he observed — adjective in predicate. This 
to-he-observed rule is, or exists. 

6. When used to limit the meaning of a verb, adjec- 
tive, adverb, or other infinitive. 

7. They came to see; i. e., for the purpose of seeing. 
They were anxious to go. That horse is strong enough to 
draw any load. I wish to go to town to trade to-day. 

8. They have not. Case belongs alone to nouns and 
pronouns. 

9. It has, but not always expressed. 

10. The subject of " to go " is " I," understood ; the 
meaning evidently is, I wished that I might go home. 

11. In the objective case, except when its subject is, or 
refers to, the same person or thing as the subject of the 
finite verb, or when the subject is any word but a noun or 
pronoun. 

12. It has, either expressed or implied. 

413 



414 THE QUESTION BOOK. » 

13. Usually in the possessive case ; sometimes in the- 
objective ; as : There is no harm in children's playing by 
the river (subj. poss.)- There is no harm in children play- 
ing by the river (subj. obj.).* 

14. It is used in all cases like the infinitive. 

15. To he: verb ; irreg., intrans., act., pres.,infin., with 
the construction of an adverb limiting the verb confess^ 
understood — [I confess] (in order) to be honest, etc. 

16. First, and mainly, by the sense or meaning ; when 
the infinitive has the construction of an adverb, the words 
" in order " can be placed immediately before the infinitive 
without destroying the sense ; as : They came [in order] 
to see. When it has the construction of an adjective it can 
be changed to its present participle, placed immediately 
before the word it limits and make good sense; as : He 
asked for money to spends i. e., spending-money. I want a 
place to study J i. e., studying-place. 

17. Change the infinitive to its equivalent subordinate 
clause, and the subject will appear. He was eager to depart^ 
i. e.,that he might depart. He is the subject. Be so good 
as to go^ i. e., that yoib should go. John was told not to goy 
i. e., that John should not go. 

18. Person, understood. Expanded, That any person 
should die is gain. 

* There is much dispute about this, many claiming that the possessive pro- 
noun "their," understood, is the subject of "playing," in the second sentence. 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



WRITING, 



1. Define Writing. 

2. What are the principal subjects to which attention 
should be given in teaching or learning the art of writing ? 

3. How many kinds of positions are recommendable, 
and what are they ? 

4. Describe the " left " position. 

5. Under what circumstances is the left position gen- 
erally used, and used with advantage? 

6. Describe the "front" position. 

7. W^hat particular advantage has the front position ? 

8. Describe the "right-oblique " position. 

9. Describe the *' right" position. 

10. What special caution should be kept in view in each 
and all of the above-mentioned positions ? 

11. Describe the manner of holding the pen. 

12. What is meant by movement ? 

13. How many kinds of movements are usually em- 
ployed in writing, and what are they ? 

14. Give a description of each, and state under what 
circumstances employed. 

15. What is meant by form f 

16. In what manner does a careful study of form aid in 
making a good penman? 

17. What is a line? 

18. How many kinds of lines are used in writing, and 
what are they ? 

19. How many kinds of curves are used in writing, and 
define each. 

20. Define horizontal, vertical and oblique lines. 

415 



416 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

21. When are lines parallel? 

22. What is meant by " base " line ? By head line? 
By top line ? 

23. What is an angle ? 

24. How many kinds are used in writing ? Define each. 

25. What is a degree ? 

26. What is meant by a slant of 52° ? Of 30° ? 

27. What is meant by main slant ? Connecting slant? 

28. In how many ways are the strokes of the pen united 
in forming letters ? 

29. What is the unit for measuring the height of letters ? 
The width ? 

30. What letters are but one space in height? 

31 . What is the height of r and s ? 

32. A part of what other letter has a similar height ? 

33. What is the height of t, d and p f 

34. How far do p and q extend below the line ? 

35. What letters extend two spaces below the line ? 

36. What letters extend three spaces above the line ? 

37. What is meant by principles ? 

38. What is the object of the study and practice of 
principles, as such, when learning to write ? 

39. In what other way may we assist the mind in obtain- 
ing a true idea or picture of the form of letters ? 

40. What is meant by the analysis of letters? 

41. Where should we begin in forming the small letters? 
Where end? 

42. What capitals should be commenced three spaces 
above the base line ? 

43. Which begin on the base line ? 

44. Which are commenced less than three spaces above 
the base line? 

45. What is meant by spacing ? 

46. What space should be allowed between letters in a 
word ? 

47. To what distance is the connecting line carried in 
writing letters with a d, g or q f 

48. When an oval is joined to a straight line, as in on, . 
from what points is the measurement taken ? 

49. When an oval is joined to an oval, as in oo, how is 
the measurement taken ? 

50. What space is allowed between capitals and first 
curve of small letter following it, where the capital does not 
join with the small letter? 



WRITING. 417 

51. What space is allowed between capitals used as 
initial letters? 

52. What space is allowed between words ? 

53. What space is allowed when following word begins 
with a capital? 

54. When one word ends with a right curve and the 
next begins with a left, or vice versa, what space i.s left ? 

55. What space is allowed between sentences ? 

56. What space is allowed between figures ? 

57. What is meant by shading? 

58. What letters should not ordinarily be shaded ? 

59. Where should the shade occur in t and d f 

60. How should p be shaded ? 

61. How should /be shaded ? 

62. Where should the shade occur in b and I f In ?l 
and k f 

63. When two or more letters requiring similar shading 
occur together, what rule should be observed ? 

64. What capital letters should be shaded on the first 
curve ? On the second curve ? 

65. Which should receive shade on the capital stem ? 

66. What letters receive shading below the base line ? 

67. What are figures ? 

68. How are figures formed ? 

69. What is the height of figures as compared with 
letters ? 

70. On what slant are figures written ? 

71. How far do the figures 7 and 9 extend below the 
line ? 

72. What is the width of the figures ? 

73. Where is the stroke commenced in forming the 
figures ? 



ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS 



OX 



WRITING, 



1. The art of expressing thought in legible characters ; 
to " form for the conveyance of meaning." 

2. Position; manner of holding pen; movement; form; 
rate; spacing and shading. 

3. Four — " left," '' front," " right-oblique," and 
" right." 

4. Sit, or stand, with the left side inclined toward the 
desk, the left arm lying on the book or paper, weight of 
body supported mainly by the left side and right arm, as 
well as book or paper at right-angles to the desk. 

5. When writing in large books, or when it is impossi- 
ble or inconvenient to turn the paper obliquely. 

6. Sit, or stand, directly facing the desk, near it, but 
not leaning over it; the forearms both on the desk and 
nearly at right angles to each other, the left holding in 
place the book or paper, which should be inclined so that 
the lines meet the right forearm at right angles. 

7. The weight of the body is not thrown to either side 
(in any other it is thrown upon one side or the other); and 
hence this position is best adapted to resist fatigue of the 
bodily muscles. 

8. Sit, or stand, with right side inclined towards the 
desk, right forearm resting wholly on the desk, left par- 
tially, and the copy placed obliquely on the desk. The 
weight of the head and shoulders is thrown on the left 
side. 

9. Sit, or stand, with right side turned to the desk, but 
not in contact with it, the right forearm as well as the copy 
being on the desk parallel with its edge; copy held in place 
by the fingers of the left hand. 

4n 



420 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

10. Keep the body erect; by no means permit the head 
to drop forward over the paper. Teachers should exercise 
the greatest care in this respect over those placed in their 
charge. 

11. There is considerable dispute in regard to this, but 
the manner most practiced by businessmen and taught in 
most of our commercial colleges is the one given by Mr. 
Spencer, viz., hold pen between first two fingers and thumb, 
the holder crossing the forefinger in front of the knuckle- 
joint and the second finger at the root of the nail; the end 
of the thumb touching the holder opposite the lower joint 
of the first finger. The other fingers should separate from 
first two at the middle joint and curve so that the ends of 
the nails rest upon the paper. 

12. The proper motion of the muscles of the shoulder, 
arm and hand in writing. 

13. Two; combined and whole-arm. « 

14. The combined movement is the motion of the mus- 
cles of the forearm and fingers together, resting upon the 
elbow and the nails of the third and fourth fingers; used in 
ordinary writing. The whole-arm movement is a motion 
of the muscles of the whole arm and shoulder, resting upon 
the nails of the third and fourth fingers, and upon the 
point of the pen ; used in making large capitals, flourishes, 
and in blackboard exercise. The wrist joint should in all 
cases be kept free. 

15. The exact shape and appearance of a character 
representing a thought preconceived in the mind. 

16. The mind directs the action of the muscles, and as 
writing is a result of muscular action, the mind must have 
a clear, concise and ready conception of what it wishes 
the muscles to do, before the action can be realized. 

17. A point moving in any direction leaves a path called 
a line. 

18. Two : straight and curved. A straight line is the 
path of a point moving in but one direction ; a curved line 
is the path of a point constantly changing its direction. 

19. Two : right and left. A right curve bends to the 
right of a straight line connecting its extremities, while 
a left curve bends to the left. 

20. A line parallel to the horizon; a line at right angles 
to the horizon ; a line neither horizontal nor vertical. 

21. When they are equi-distant, with respect to each 
other, throughout their entire length. 

22. The line upon which the letter rests. The line, 



WRITING. 421 

real or imaginary, that bounds the height of the small let- 
ters, or those bat one space in height. The line that 
bounds the height of the extended letters, or those three 
spaces in height. 

23. The space between two lines meeting in a point. 

24. Two : right and acute. A right angle is formed 
by a right line meeting another perpendicularly. An 
acute angle is one smaller than a right angle. 

25. A three hundred sixtieth part of the circumference 
of a circle. 

26. If from the centre of a circle a vertical and a hor- 
izontal line be drawn, meeting the circumference, and the 
smaller of the two arcs thus made be divided into ninety 
equal parts or degrees, a line drawn from a point on this 
arc 52° from where the arc meets the horizontal line, to the 
centre of the circle, is said to be on a slant of 52^. One 
drawn similarly from a point 30^^ above the horizontal is 
said to have a slant of 30°. 

27. A slant of 52*^, so called because the main or down- 
ward strokes of written letters have this slant. A slant of 
30'^, so called because generally used in upward or connect- 
ing strokes. 

28. Three : by angular juncture, as in the upper part 
of small i; by short curves, as at the base of small i; and 
by oval turns, as in large 0. 

29. The height of small i, commonly called a space. 
The horizontal distance between the two straight lines in 
the letter u. 

30. a, c, e, i, m, n, o, u, v, lo and x. 

31. One and one-fourth spaces. 

32. The final part, or small oval of the letter k. 

33. Two spaces. 

34. One and one-half spaces. 

35. j, g,f, I, y and z. 

36. 6,/, h, Jc, I, and all the capitals. 

37. Lines of a certain and established form, by combi- 
nations of which all letters may be formed. 

38. 1. By simplifying the forms of letters. 2. By teach- 
ing both mind and muscle this simplified form. ^ 3. By 
giving a standard for uniformity. ^ 4. By educating the 
taste to more pleasing proportions in the parts of letters. 

39. By analysis. 

40. To analyze a letter is to name the separate princi- 
ples employed in its construction, and to state their posi- 
tion and manner of connection. 



422 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

41. On the base line always. One space above the base 
line. 

42. A, E, M, N, 0, Q. 

43. C, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, Q, S, U, V, W, X, Y, Z. 

44. B, D, F, P, R, T, which begin two and one-half spaces 
above base line. D begins two spaces above. 

45. The proper distance left between letters, words or 
sentences. 

46. One and one-fourth spaces. 

47. Two spaces from the last straight line of the con- 
necting letter. Write the words, name, cinque, and notice 
the required distance from the bottom of the downward 
stroke ofn and the connecting point of a and q. 

48. From the middle of the oval to the straight line of 
the following letter* 

49. From the middle of first oval to the left side of 
second oval. 

50. One-lourth space, recrossing from base of capital. 

51. One space. 

52. Two spaces. 

53. The extreme left point of the capital should be one 
and one -half spaces from the last downward stroke of pre- 
ceding word* 

54. Between the straight lines, two and one-third spaces; 
between curves, one and one-third spaces; between final 
downward stroke of first and beginning of curve for next 
word, one and one-half spaces. 

65. Three spaces. 

56. One-third of a space. 

57. A proper use of light and heavy strokes, the latter 
formed by a gently-increasing pressure upon the points 
of the pen, being held and moved so that the pressure is 
consi'dutly alike on both points, until the middle of the 
stroke desired to be shaded is reached, and then as gently 
release the pressure as it was increased until the stroke is 
complete. 

58. All the letters but one space in height except a, 
which should receive a slight shade on first downward 
curve. 

59. The heaviest shade should be at the top of the last 
downward stroke. 

60. Shade should commence at base line and gradually 
increased to the end of the downward stroke. 

61. Only on that part of the downward stroke which is 
below the line. 



WRITING. 423 

62. On the lower half of the first downward stroke. On 
last downward stroke only. 

63. The last should receive but half as much shade as 
the first one. 

64. A, C, D, E, 0, Q, H, Z, Q, U, V, W, Y. 

65. A, B, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, P, R, S, T. 

66. /and p only. 

67. Characters to represent numbers. 

68. The same as letters, from a combination of straight 
and curved lines according to set principles. 

69. One and one-half spaces, except the 6, which is two 
spaces in height. 

70. A slant of 52°. 

71. One and one-half spaces. 

72. They are all one space in width, measured at the 
widest part, except the 1 and 0. The is but one space 
in width. 

73. At the upper extremity. 

[For a thorough, understanding of the "principles" of writing, see any 
Spencerian copy-book. Any system of princp'es is preferable to mere draw- 
ing. Our preference is for the Spencerian system, making all the letters of the 
alphabet, both small and capital, from the combination of seven primary prin- 
ciples. Unless those seven " principles " are studied by the student, the above 
-questions will be almost useless for instruction.— Author.] 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



ALGEBRA 



1. Define Algebra. 

2. Why is algebra called universal arithmetic ? 

3. Define mathematics. 

4. Define quantity. 

5. Define algebraic quantity. 

6. How many kinds of algebraic quantities are there? 
7.- What are known quantities ? 

8. What are unknown quantities ? 

9. How many kinds of symbols are there ? 

10. What are symbols of quantity ? 

11. What are the symbols of operation? 

12. What are the symbols of relation ? 

13. What are the signs of aggregation ? 

14. What are the terms of an algebraic quantity? 

15. What are positive terms ? 

16. What are negative terms? 

17. Distinguish between similar and dissimilar terms. 

18. Define coefficient. 

19. Define exponent. 

20. What are literal quantities ? 

21. Define monomial. 

22. Define polynomial. 

23. Define binomial. 

24. Define residual. 

25. What is a trinomial ? 

26. What is meant by the degree of a term ? 

27. What is a homogeneous quantity? 

28. Express the product of a and b, and explain. 

29. Express algebraically : A man sold a farm which 

425 



426 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

cost him a dollars for h times its cost ; after keeping back 
c dollars for himself, he divided the remainder equally 
among d children. How many dollars did he give to 
each 

30. In the following : a=r:4, b=:3, c=2, d=l. 

a^+b^+c^+d^ , -u ^ a 1 

— ^-^ — ^ ^1 — ha bed. bolve. 

a + b + C+ d 

31. Define algebraic sum. 

32. What is the method of finding the algebraic sum ? 

33. Define unit of addition. 

34. Give method of algebraic subtraction. 

35. How may a parenthesis be removed from an alge- 
braic expression? 

36. How may an algebraic expression be enclosed in a 
parenthesis ? 

37. Give law governing the sign of a product in 
algebraic multiplication. 

38. Give law of coefficients in multiplication. 

39. Give law of exponents in multiplication. 

40. Give formula for the square of a binomial. 

41. Give formula for the product of the sum and dif- 
ference of two quantities. 

42. Give law of signs in algebraic division. 

43. Give law of coefficients in division. 

44. Give law for exponents in division. 

45. Give general law relating to change of value result- 
ing from change of dividend or divisor by multiplication 
or division. 

46. Give principles relating to change of sign in divi- 
dend or divisor. 

47. Prove that any quantity having a cipher for an 
exponent is equal to unity. 

48. Prove that any quantity having a negative exponent 
is equal to the reciprocal of that quantity with an equal 
positive exponent? 

49. What are the factors of a quantity? 

50. A'^+b" is divisible by what ? Explain. 

51. A^ — b^ is divisible by what? Explain. 

52. A^^ — b* is divisible by what? Explain. 

53. A^°+b^° is divisible by what? Explain. 

54. 32a' +1 is divisible by what? Explain. 

55. Define common divisor ; greatest common divisor. 

56. Define multiple, common multiple, and least com- 
mon multiple. 



ALGEBRA. 427 

57. Give method for finding the greatest common 
-divisor of two or more quantities. 

58. Give method for finding the least common multi- 
ple of two or more quantities. 

59. What is substitution in algebra ? 

60. What is a fraction? 

61. Give general law relating to change of value, result- 
ing from change of numerator or denominator by multi- 
plication or division. 

62. What is an entire quantity ? A mixed quantity ? 

63. Distinguish between real and apparent signs. 

64. How may the real signs of a fraction be changed ? 

65. Changing all the signs of both numerator and 
denominator has what effect upon the real sign ? 

66. What is reduction ? 

67. Give method for reducing a fraction to lowest terms. 

68. Give method for reducing a fraction from fractional 
form to an entire or mixed quantity. 

69. Give method for reducing a niixed quantity to the 
form of a fraction. 

70. How may fractions be reduced to a common de- 
nominator ? 

71. Give method for adding fractions. 

72. Give rule for subtraction of fractions. 

73. Give rule for multiplication of fractions. 

74. Give rule for division of fractions. 

75. What is an equation ? 

76. What branch of mathematics treats most of the 
equations ? 

77. W^hat is the first member of an equation? The 
second member? 

78. Define arithmetical equation Algebraic equation. 

79. Define numeral equations. Literal equations. 

80. Define identical equation. 

81. How is the degree of an equation denoted ? 

82. Define simple equation. Quadratic, and cubic. 

83. What is meant by the transformation of an equa- 
tion ? 

84. How may an equation be cleared of fractions ? 

85. What is transposition? 

86. How may a term be transposed ? 

87. What is meant by the reduction or solution of an 
■equation ? 

88 Define indeterminate equation. 
89. What are simultaneous equations ? 



428 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

90. When two or more simultaneous equations are 
given, by what process are the values of the unknown 
quantities determined ? 

91. How many methods of elimination are there? 

92. Give method of elimination by addition or sub- 
traction. 

93. Give method of elimination by comparison. 

94. Give method of elimination by substitution. 

95. Give method of eliminating in simple equations 
contaimng more than two unknown quantities. 

96. When only can the value of the unknown quantity 
be determined ? 

97. What is an inequality ? Express a is greater than b. 

98. By what operation will the sign of an inequality be 
reversed ? 

99. What operations may be performed upon an in- 
equality and the result still subsist in the same sense ? 

100. What is a power ? A root ? 

101. Define involution. Evolution. 

102. What is meant by the square of a quantity ? The 
cube of a quantity ? 

103. Distinguish between perfect and imperfect power. 

104. How is evolution indicated ? What is a surd ? 

105. In raising a quantity to a given power, what are 
the principles relating to coefficients, exponents, and signs 
of the power? 

106. How may a fraction be raised to a given power? 

107. Give formula for the square of a trinomial. 

108. What is meant by leading terms ? By following 
term? 

109. Of what value is Newton's Binomial Formula? 

110. Give method of expanding by Newton's Binomial 
Formula. 

311. How may a binomial having coefficients be 
expanded without successive multiplication, as (2a — 3b) '^ ? 

112. What is a radical quantity.? 

113. How is the degree of a radical quantity indi- 
cated ? 

114. What are similar radicals ? 

115. On what are the operations in radicals based ? 

116. When is a radical in its simplest form ? 

117. By what method are radicals reduced to simplest 
form ? 

118. How may we reduce a rational quantity to a. 
radical ? 



ALGEBRA. 429 

119. How may we reduce radicals of different degrees 
to a common radical index ? 

120. Give method of adding and subtracting radicals. 

121. Give method of multiplying and dividing rad- 
icals. 

122. How may a radical sign be removed ? 

123. Give classes of quadratic equations. 

124. Define pure quadratic equations. 

125. What is an affected quadratic equation ? 

126. What is meant by the root of an equation? 

127. Why may the sign ± be prefixed to the root of a 
quadratic equation ? 

128. Speak of the roots of an affected quadratic 
equation. 

129. Give a method of forming a quadratic when the 
roots are given. 

130. How, then, may a trinomial in the form of 
x*^ + ax + b be separated into two binomial factors ? 

131. Give method for completing the square in equa- 
tions reduced to the form of x^ + 2 ax=:b. 

132. Give method for completing the square in equa- 
tions reduced to the form of ax^ +bx =c. 

133. How may the equation x^— 3x^=550 be solved? 

134. What is meant by the absolute term of an 
equation ? 

135. What is arithmetical progression ? 

136. What is geometrical progression ? 

137. What are the extremes ? The means ? 

138. Define ratio in geometrical progression. 

139. What letters are used as symbols of the different 
terms in progression ? 

140. Give formulas for problems in arithmetical pro- 
gression. 

141. Give formulas for problems in geometrical pro- 
gression. 

142. What is ratio ? Proportion ? 

143. Define couplet. Terms. 

144. What are the antecedents ? Consequents ? 

145. Define extremes. Means. 

146. Define mean proportional. 

147. Define proposition and give kinds. 

148. What is an axiom ? 

149. Define problem. 

150. What is a scholium ? 



430 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

151. Prove that the product of the means equals the 
product of the extremes. 

152. If we have three terms of a proportion, how may 
the fourth be obtained ? 

153. What is a logarithm ? 

154. What is a system of logarithms ? 

155. What are the important uses of logarithms ? 

156. Give method of multiplication by the use of log- 
arithms. 

157. Give method of division. 

158. Give method of involution. 

159. Give method for evolution. 

160. What are the integral and decimal parts of a log- 
arithm called ? 



ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS 



ON 



ALGEBRA. 



1. Algebra is that branch of mathematics ^n which the 
operations are indicated by signs, and the quantities are 
represented by letters. 

2. Because the object of algebraic notation is to abridge 
and generalize the analysis of mathematical problems. 

3. Mathematics is the science which treats of the rela- 
tions of quantities. 

4. Quantity is anything that can be measured or com- 
pared. 

5. An algebraic quantity is a quantity expressed in 
algebraic language. 

6. Two kinds — known and unknown. 

7. Known quantities are those whose values are given;, 
when these are not expressed by figures they are repre- 
sented by the leading letters of the alphabet, as a, b, c, d. 

8. Unknown quantities are those whose values are to 
be determined, and are represented by the final letters of 
the alphabet, as u, x, y, z. 

9. Four kinds — symbols of quantit}^, operation, rela- 
tion and aggregation. 

10. In arithmetic numbers are represented by the fig- 
ures 1, 2, 3, 4, etc. In algebra numbers or quantities are 
more frequently represented by the common letters of the 
alphabet. 

11. The signs of addition, subtraction, multiplication, 
division, involution, and evolution. 

12. The signs of equality, inequality, ratio, and pro- 
portion. 

13. The parenthesis ( ), brackets [ ], brace { j, vincu- 

431 



432 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

lum , and bar | . They indicate that the quantities 

within are to be taken together. 

14. The divisions made by the signs + and — . 

15. Those that have the pins sign. 

16. Those that have the minus sign. 

17. Similar terms are terms containing the same letters 
affected by the same exponents, while dissimilar terms are 
those which have different letters or exponents. 

18. The coefficient of a term is that factor which is con- 
sidered as denoting the number of times the remainder of 
the term is taken. 

19. An exponent is a small figure or letter written at 
the right, and a little above another figure, or letter, to 
denote how many times the latter is to be used as a 
factor. 

20. Literal quantities are those whose numbers or 
values are expressed by letters. 

21. A monomial is an algebraic quantity consisting of 
but one term. 

22. A polynomial is an algebraic quantity consisting 
of more than one term. 

23. A binomial is a polynomial of two terms. 

24. A residual is a binomial, the terms of which are 
connected by the minus sign. 

25. A polynomial of three terms. 

26. The degree of a term is the number of literal 
factors it contains, and is found by adding the exponents 
of the several letters. 

27. One whose terms are all of the same degree. 

28. ab. When two or more letters representing num- 
bers are written side by side, their product is indicated. 

29. ab— c 

31. The algebraic sum of two or more quantities is a 
quantity which, taken with reference to its sign, is equiva- 
lent to the given quantities each taken with reference to 
its particular sign. 

32. The algebraic sum of two or more similar terms, 
having like signs, is the sum of their absolute values taken 
with their common sign. When with unlike signs, is the 
difference of their absolute values taken with the sign of 
the greater term. 



ALGEBRA. 433 

33. The unit of addition is the quantity whose coeffi- 
cients are added. 

34. Conceive the signs of the subtrahend to be changed, 
and unite terms as in addition. 

35. When preceded by the plus sign a parenthesis may 
be removed and the enclosed terms, written with proper 
signs, but when preceded by the m'inus sign the signs of 
all the enclosed terms must be changed. 

36. Any number of terms with ' their proper signs 
may be enclosed by a parenthesis and the plus sign written 
before the whole, or the minus sign may be written before the 
whole, provided that all the signs of the given terms be 
changed. 

37. When the two factors have like signs the product 
is positive, and when the two factors have unlike signs the 
product is negative. 

38. The coefficient of the product is equal to the prod- 
uct of the coefficients of the two factors. 

39. The exponent of any letter in the product is equal 
to the sum of the exponents of this letter in the factors. 

40. The square of the first term, plus twice the product 
of the first and the second, plus the square of the second 
if both terms are positive ; if, however, the binomial be a 
residual the sign of the second term in the square should 
be minus. 

41. The product of the sum and difference of two 
quantities is equal to the difference of their squares. 

42. If the signs of terms are alike, prefix the plus sign 
to the quotient ; if they are unlike, prefix the minus sign. 

43. The coefficient of the quotient is found by dividing 
the coefficient of the dividend by that of the divisor. 

44. The exponent of any letter in the quotient is found 
by substracting the exponent of this letter in the divisor 
from its exponent in the dividend. 

45. A change in the dividend produces a like change 
in the quotient ; but a change in the divisor produces an 
opposite change in the quotient. A like change in both 
dividend and divisor does not alter the value of the quo- 
tient. 

46. Changing the sign of either dividend or divisor 
changes the sign of the quotient, but changing the signs 
of both dividend and divisor does not alter the value of 
the quotient. 



434 THE QUESTION BOOK. 



47. 


a_ 


= a^-"= 


=a° 








a 












a_ 
a 


-1=1. 

1 


Therefore a° = 


=1. 




48. 


a^ 
a^ 


1 
a^ 










a^' 


=a^-^= 


=a-^ Therefore 


a-^= 


. 1 

"a^ 



49. Those quantities which, multiplied together, will 
produce that quantity. 

50. By a+b. The sum of two equal odd powers is 
divisible by the sum of the quantities. 

51. By a — b. The difference of two equal odd powers 
is divisible by the difference of the quantities. 

52. By a — b and by a+b. The difference of two equal 
even powers is divisible by both the sum and difference 
of the quantities. 

53. By a2-j-b2. The sum of two equal even powers 
cannot be factored unless the exponent is composed of the 
factor 2 and an odd number, in which case it is divisible 
by the sum of the squares of the quantities. 

54. By 2a+l. This comes properly under questioa 
50, 1 being any power of itself. 

55. A common divisor of two or more quantities is a 
quantity which will exactly divide each of them. A 
greatest common divisor is the greatest quantity that will 
exactly divide each of them. 

56. A multiple of a quantity is a quantity exactly 
divisible by the given quantity. ' A common multiple of 
two or more quantities is one which is exactly divisible by 
each of them. A least common multiple of two or more 
quantities is the least quantity exactly divisible by each 
of them. 

57. Factor the given quantities, and affect each factor 
with the least exponent which it has in any of the quan- 
tities. The product of the factors thus obtained will be 
the greatest common divisor. 

58. Factor the given quantities and affect each factor 
with an exponent equal to the greatest which it has in any 
of the quantities. The product of the factors thus obtained 
will be the least common multiple. 

59. The process of putting one quantity for another in 
any given expression. 



ALGEBRA. 435 

60. A quotient expressed by writing the dividend above 
a horizontal line and the divisor below. 

61. The denominator, or quantity below the line, being 
the divisor, and the numerator, or quantity above the line, 
being the dividend, the principles here involved are the 
same as those given in answer to question 45. 

62. An entire quantity is an algebraic quantity which 
has no fractional part. A mixed quantity has both entire 
and fractional parts. 

63. The apparent sign of a fraction is the sign written 
before the dividing line to indicate whether the fraction is 
to be added or subtracted. The real sign is the sign of its 
numerical value when reduced to a monomial, and shows 
whether the fraction is essentially a positive or a negative 
quantity. 

64. By changing all the signs of the numerator or 
denominator, or by changing the apparent sign of the 
fraction. 

65. The real sign remains unchanged. 

66. Reduction in mathematics is changing the form of 
an expression without changing its value. 

67. Reject all common factors from both terms. 

68. Perform the division indicated. 

69. Multiply the entire part by the given denominator, 
and annexing the numerator of the fractional part, write 
the sum over the given denominator. 

70. The least common denominator is the least com- 
mon multiple of all the denominators. Divide this com- 
mon denominator by each of the given denominators, and 
multiply each numerator by the corresponding quotient. 
The products will be the new numerators. 

71. Reduce the fractions to forms having a common 
denominator, add the numerators and write the result over 
the common denominator. 

72. Reduce to common denominator, subtract the 
numerator of the subtrahend from that of the minuend, 
and write the remainder over the common denominator. 

73. Take the product of the numerators for a new 
numerator, and the product of the denominators for a new 
denominator. 

74. Invert the terms of the divisor and proceed as in 
multiplication. i • ^ 

75. An equation is an expression of equality between 
two quantities. 

76. Algebra treats of the nature and properties of the 



436 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

equation, and of its use as an instrument for conducting 
mathematical investigations. 

77. The first member is the quantity on the left of the 
sign of equality. The second member is the quantity on 
the right. 

78. An arithmetical equation is one which expresses the 
equality of numbers. An algebraic equation is one which 
contains one or more literal quantities. 

79. A numeral equation is one in which all the known 
quantities are expressed by numbers. A literal equation 
is one in which some or all of the known quantities are 
expressed by letters. 

80. An equation in which the two members are the 
same, or can be reduced to the same expression by per- 
forming the operations indicated. 

81. By the highest exponent of the unknown quantity 
in the equation. 

82. A simple equation is one of the first degree. A 
quadratic equation is one of the second degree. A cubic 
equation is one of the third degree. 

83. The process of changing its form without destroy- 
ing the equality of its members. 

84. Multiply each member by the least common mul- 
tiple of all the denominators. 

85. Changing a term from one member of the equation 
to the other without destroying the equality of its mem- 
bers. 

86. By dropping it from the member in which it 
stands, and inserting it in the other member with its sign 
©hanged. 

87. Finding the value of the unknown quantity. ^ 

88. An indeterminate equation is one which is satisfied 
by an infinite number of values of the unknown quantity. 
Every single equation containing two unknown quantities 
is indeterminate. 

89. Those which must be satisfied by the same values 
of the unknown quantities which enter them. 

90. By elimination, a process of combining equations 
in such a manner as to cause one or more of the un- 
known quantities to disappear. 

91. Three : by addition or subtraction, comparison 
and substitution. 

92. Multiply or divide the equation by such numbers 
or quantities that the coefficients of the quantity to be 
eliminated shall be made equal in the two equations. If 



ALGEBRA. 437 

these coefficients have like signs, subtract one of the pre- 
pared equations from the other ; if unHke, add the two 
equations. 

93. Find the value of the same unknown quantity, in 
terms of the other, from each of the given equations. 
Form an equation by placing these two values equal to 
each other. 

94. Find the value of one of the unknown quantities 
in terms of the other, from either of the given equa- 
tions. 

Substitute the value for the same unknown quantity in 
the other equation. 

95. Combine one of the given equations with each of 
the others, eliminating the same unknown quantity by 
each combination. Then combine one of the new equa- 
tions with each of the others, eliminating a second 
unknown quantity, and thus continue till a final equation 
is obtained containing but one unknown quantity. Sub^ 
stitute the value of this unknown quantity in an equation 
containing two unknown quantities, and thus find the 
value of a second. Substitute these values in an equation 
containing three unknown quantities, and find value of 
the third, and so on until the value of all are found. 

96. When its conditions furnish as many independent 
equations as there are unknown quantities employed in 
the notation. 

97. An expression signifying that one quantity is 
greater or less than another. a>b. 

98. If an inequality be subtracted from an equation 
member from member. If all the signs of the inequality 
be changed. If both members be multiplied by the same 
negative quantity. If multiplied by another inequality, 
subsisting in the same sense, member by member, when 
more than two of the members of both inequalities are 
negative. 

99. If another inequality subsisting in the same sense 
be added member to member. If another inequality 
established in a contrary sense be subtracted. If both 
members be multiplied or divided by the same positive 
quantity. If multiplied by another inequality subsisting 
in the same sense, when more than two of the members of 
both inequalities are positive. 

100. A power is the product obtained by taking a 
quantity several times as a factor. A root is the quantity 
repeated to produce a power. 



438 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

101. Involution is the process of raising a quantity to 
a given power. 

Evolution is the process of determining any root of a 
given quantity. 

102. The square of a quantity is its second power, and 
the cube is its third power. 

103. A perfect power is a quantity that can be exactly 
produced by taking some other quantity a certain number 
of times as a factor, while an imperfect power cannot. 

104. By the radical sign \/~~ . A surd is the indi- 
cated root of an imperfect power. 

105. The coefficient of the power is the coefficient of 
the quantity raised to the required power. 

The exponent of any letter in the power is the product 
of its exponent by the index of the required power. 

The odd powers of a negative quantity will have the 
minus sign ; the even powers of a negative quantity, and 
all powers of a positive quantity, are positive. 

106. Raise both numerator and denominator to the 
required power. 

107. Write the square of each term with twice the 
product of each term by the sum of all the terms which 
follow it, and reduce the result, if necessary. 

108. The leading term is the first, and the following 
term is the second term in a binomial. 

109. It enables one to write by inspection any power 
of a binomial, neither term of which has coefficients. 

110. Let (x+y) be any binomial and (x+y)™ equal 
any power indicated, then#x™+mx"'~ ^ y-}- ni(m — 1) x™" ^y 2-(- 
m (m— 1) (m— 2) x^'^ ys, etc. 2 

3 
There will always be m+1 terms in the power. 

111. Put the first term 2a equal to x and the second or 
3b equal to y. Expand (x+y)'' by Newton's Formula and 
restore the values of x and y ; or use French's Binomial 
Formula, which shows that the coefficient of the first 
term in any power is equal to the corresponding power of 
the coefficient ofthe leading term in the root ; and that the 
coefficient of any term may be found by multiplying the 
coefficient of the preceding term by the exponent of the 
leading quantity in that term and by the coefficient ofthe 
following quantity in the root, and dividing this result by 
the product of the coefficient of the leading quantity in 
the root multiplied by the number of terms from the first ' 



ALGEBRA. 439 

112. A root merely indicated by the radical sign, or by 
■a fractional exponent. 

113. By the radical index, or by the denominator of the 
fractional exponent. 

114. Those having the same quantity under a radical 
sign of the same index. 

115. On the most elementary principles of factoring. 

116. When it contains no perfect power corresponding 
to the degree of the radical. 

117 Resolve the quantity under the radical sign into 
two factors, one of which shall be a perfect power of the 
degree of the radical. Determine the root of that factor 
and place it before the radical sign as a coefficient to the 
other factor under the sign. 

118. Involve it to the same power as the required index 
and write the result under its corresponding radical sign. 

119. Reduce the indices to a common denominator. 
Perform upon the quantities the operations represented 
by the numerators (involution) and indicate the operations 
signified by the denominator (evolution). 

120. Reduce each radical to its simplest form. If the 
resulting radicals are similar add or subtract the coefii- 
cients as the case may be, and to the result annex the com- 
mon radical ; if dissimilar, indicate the addition or sub- 
traction by the proper signs. 

121. If necessary, reduce the given radicals to a com- 
mon radical index. 

Multiply or divide, as the case may be, the radical 
parts, and write the result under the common radical sign. 

122. Involve the radical quantity to a power corre- 
sponding to the radical index. 

123. Pure and affected. 

124. A pure quadratic equation is one which contains 
only the second power of the unknown quantity. 

125. One which contains both the second and the first 
powers of the unknown quantity. 

126. Such a value as when substituted for the un- 
known quantity will satisfy the equation. 

127. The second power of any quantity must be posi- 
tive, as it is the product of like signs, either plus or minus, 
hence every pure quadratic equation has two roots equal 
in numerical value, but of opposite signs. 

128. Every affected quadratic equation has two roots 
unequal in numerical value. 



440 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

129. Multiply together the binomial factors obtained by 
connecting each root with its contrary sign to an unknown 
quantity and place the product equal to zero. 

130. Place the trinomial equal to zero and reduce the 
resulting equation. 

Connect each root with its signs changed to the lowest 
power of the literal quantity. 

131. Add to both members of the equation the square 
of half the coefficient of the first power of the unknown 
quantity. 

132. Multiply the equation by 4 times the coefficient 
of x'' and add the square of the coefficient of x to both 
members. 

133. Represent x* as y^ and x^ as y ; solve and restore 
value of y. 

134. The term or quantity which does not contain the 
unknown quantity. 

135. A series of members or quantities increasing or 
decreasing by a common difference. 

136. A series of numbers or quantities increasing or 
decreasing by a constant multiplier. 

137. The extremes are the first and last terms. 
The means are the intermediate terms. 

138. The ratio is the constant multiplier. 

139. a, represents the first term ; b, last term ; n, the 
number of terms ; d, the common difference ; r, the ratio ; 
and s, the sum of the series. 

1^^- l = a±(n-l)d;s=|(a+l). 
141. i_^^.-.. „rl-a 



r— 1 

142. Ratio is the quotient of one quantity divided by 
another of the same kind, regarded as the standard of 
comparison. 

Proportion is an equality of ratios. 

143. A couplet is the two terms which form the ratio. 
The terms of a proportion are the four quantities com- 
pared. 

144. The antecedents in a proportion are the first 
terms of the two couplets. 

The consequents are the second terms. 

145. The extremes in a proportion are the first and 
fourth terms ; the means, the second and third terms. 

146. A mean proportional between two quantities is a 



ALGEBRA. 441 

quantity to which the first of the two given quantities has 
the same ratio as the quantity has to the second. 

147. A proposition is a statement of something to be 
done. 

Axioms, Theorems, Lemmas, Corollaries, Postulates, 
and Problems. 

148. A self-evident truth. 

149. A problem is a proposition to do some specified 
thing and is stated with reference to developing the 
method of doing it. 

150. A remark made at the close of a discussion and 
designed to call attention to some particular feature or 
features of it. 

151. If a:b::c:d then ad=bc. 

For a :b : :c :d is the same as _^ A or - = ^ clear- 

a c b d 
ing of fi^actions in either case ad=fc. Q. E. D. 

152. Either mean is equal to the product of the ex- 
tremes divided by the other mean, and either extreme is 
equal to the product of the means divided by the other 
extreme. 

153. The exponent by which a fixed number is to be 
afiected in order to produce any required number. 

154. A scheme by which all numbers can be repre- 
sented either exactly or approximately by exponents by 
which a fixed number (the base) can be affected. 

Negative numbers can have no logarithms. 

155. To facilitate the multiplication, division, involu- 
tion and evolution of large numbers. 

156. Add the logarithms of the two factors and the 
result will be the logarithm of their product. 

157. Subtract the logarithm of the divisor from that 
of the dividend and the result will be the logarithm of the 
quotient. 

158. Multiply the logarifhm of the number by the 
index of the power and the result will be the logarithm of 
the power. 

159. Divide the logarithm of the number by the 
number expressing the degree of the root and the result 
will be the logarithm of the root. 

160. The integral part is called the characteristic and 
the decimal the mantissa. 



TEST PROBLEMS 

PROMISCUOUSLY ARRANGED 



1. The sum of two numbers is 12, and their differ- 
ence is equal to i of the greater. What are the numbers ? 
. 2. A farmer made a mixture of barley, oats and 
peas, using two bushels of barley as often as 5 of oats and 
1 of peas ; the whole number of bushels in the mixture 
was 32. How many bushels of each kind did he use? 

3. A farm rents for 6 per cent, more this year than 
last. This year it rents for $1,060. What was the rent 
last year ? 

4. A steamer whose regular speed is twelve miles per 
hour in still water, can make a trip up stream in 7 hours 
and down in 5 hours. At what rate does the river flow ? 

5. A can do a piece of work in 6 days, B in 4 days. 
In what time can they both do it, working together ? 

6. What time is it when i of the time past noon 
equals ^ of the time to midnight? 

7. What fraction is that which if 1 be added to the 
numerator the fraction will be i but if 1 be added to the 
denominator the fraction will be i ? 

8. Divide the number n into two such parts that the 
greater, increased by a, shall equal the less, increased by b. 

9. A says to B : " Give me one dollar and I shall have 
twice as much money as you." B says to A : "No; you 
give me one dollar and I shall have just as much money 
as you." How many dollars have each ? 

10. What is the length of one edge of that cube which 
contains as many solid units as there are linear units in 
the diagonal through the opposite corners ? 

11. The sum of two numbers is 100, and the differ- 
ence of their square roots is 2. What are the numbers ? 

12. What number is that consisting of two digits, 
units and tens, which is equal to three times the sum of 

443 



444 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

its digits, and if 45 be added to the number, the order of 
the digits will be reversed ? 

13. James is i as old as John; 5 years ago he was^ as 
old ; how old are each ? 

14. What two numbers are those whose product is 
36, and the difference of their squares is 65 ? 

15. Divide the number 2000 into two such parts that 
the greater shall be to the less as 9 to 7. 

16. TJhere is a fish whose head is 9 in. long ; the tail is 
as long as the head and i the body ; and the body is as 
long as the head and tail together. What is the length 
of the fish ? 

17. A shepherd was met by a band of robbers who 
plundered him of i of his flock and i of a sheep over ; 
he afterwards met a second band who took i of the 
remainder and i of a sheep over ; and a third band took 
i of the last remainder and ^ of a sheep over, when ha 
had but 25 sheep left. How many sheep had he at first ? 

18. Simplify ^^^ '-^ ^ ^rZT' 

19. A tree 80 feet high is broken during a storm; the 
upper part clinging to the stump strikes the ground 40 
feet from the foot of the tree. How long is each part ? 

20. A picture 12 feet by 18 feet is set in a frame of 
uniform width containing the same area as the picture. 
What is the width of frame ? 

21. To find the area of a scalene triangle whose sides 
are a, b, and c. 

22. How are the above problems solved arithmetically ? 

23. How many strokes do the clocks of Venice, which 
go on to 24 o'clock, strike in a day ? 

24. A company of travelers at a hotel incurred a bill 
of $12. If there had been two more in the company 
each would have been charged 30 cents less. How many 
were there in the company ? 

25. The sum of three numbers in arithmetical pro- 
gression is 27, and the product of the extremes is 77. 
What are the numbers ? 

26. A tract of land in the form of a square is sur- 
rounded by a board fence, four boards high, each board 
16J feet long ; the number of acres in the tract equals the 
number of boards in the fence. How many acres of land 
are there ? 

27. A boy being asked how many fish he had, replied : 



TEST PROBLEMS. 445 

11 fish are 7 fish more than f of the number. How many 
had he ? 

28. A man purchased a house with 10 doors, giving $1 
for the first door, $2 for the second, $4 for the third, and 
so on. What did the house cost him ? 

29. A man holds an endowment policy payable in 30 
years, and * of the time past equals i of the time to come. 
How much time has past? 

30. One kind of wine is 40 cents a quart, and another 
24 cents. How much of each must be taken to make a 
quart worth 28 cents ? 

31. A farmer has two flocks of sheep, each containing 
the same number. From one he sells 39 and from the 
other 93, and then finds just twice as many in one flock as 
in the other. How many did each flock originally con- 
tain? 

32. A man being asked his age, replied : If to my age 
you add its half, and third, and then deduct 10, the result 
is 100. What was his age ? 

33. A merchant has sugar at 9 cents and 13 cents a 
pound, and he wishes to make a mixture of 100 pounds 
that shall be worth 12 cents a pound. How many pounds 
of each, quality must be taken ? 

34. A man was hired for a year for $100 and a suit of 
clothes ; but at the end of 8 months he left, and received 
his clothes and $60 in money. What was the value of 
the suit of clothes ? 

35. Determine the 5th root of 31152784.1 by means of 
logarithms, knowing that the logarithm of 31152784.1= 
7.493497. 

36. A man sold a horse for 8420, thereby gaining 25 
per cent. What was the cost of the horse ? 

37. Two men commenced trade together. The first 
put in $40 more than the second ; and the stock of the 
first was to the stock of the second as 5 to 4. What was 
the stock of each ? 

38. A man traveled 36 miles in a certain number of 
hours ; if he had traveled one mile more per hour he 
would have required 3 hours less to perform his journey. 
How many miles did he travel per hour? 

39. A person after spending $100 more than -J- of his 
income, had remaining $35 more than i of it. What was 
his income ? 

40. A boy engaged to carry 100 glass vessels to a 
certain place, and to receive 3 cents for every one he de- 



446 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

livered, and to forfeit 9 cents for every one he broke. On 
settlement he received 240 cents. How many did he 
break ? 

41. The shadow of a tree measures 42 feet ; a staff 40 
inches long casts a shadow 18 inches at the same time. 
What is the height of the tree ? 

42. Divide $360 in the proportion of 2, 3, and 4. 

43. What is the length of the sides of a rectangular 
field whose length is 3 times its breadth and contains an 
area of 10,800 square rods ? 

44. If 6 oranges and 7 lemons cost 33 cents and 12 
oranges and 10 lemons cost 54 cents, what is the price of 
one of each ? 

45. Divide the number 20 into two such parts that the 
product of their squares shall equal 9216. 

PROBLEMS OF PURSUIT. 

46. A sets out from a certain place and travels at the 
rate of 7 miles, in 5 hours ; and 8 hours afterwards B sets 
out from the same place, in pursuit, at the rate of 5 miles 
in 3 hours. How long before B will overtake A ? 

47. The hour and minute hands of a clock are together 
at 12 o'clock. When are they next together? 

48. At what time between 2 and 3 o'clock will the 
hour and minute hands of a clock be together ? 

49. What time between 2 and 3 o'clock will the hour 
and minute hands be at right angles to each other ? 

50. At what time between 5 and 6 o'clock will the two- 
hands of a clock be in the same straight line ? 



STATEMENTS AND ANSWERS 
TO PROBLEMS. 



1. The half sum of two numbers plus the half differ- 
ence equals the greater. 

The half sum minus the half difference equals the less. 
Let 2x=difference. 
6+x=greater. 
6 — x=less. 
2x=6+x 

3 Ans, Greater 7^. Less 4|. 

2. Let x=No. bushels peas. 

2x=No. bushels barley. 
5x=:No. bushels oats. 

8xr=32. Ans. 4 bushels peas, 8 bushels barley, 
20 bushels oats. 

3. Let xi=rent last year. 

^+^=1060. Ans. $1,000. 
100 

4. Let x=rate of river. 

Then 7(12— x)=5(12+x). Ans. 2 hours. 

5. Let x=time required by both. 
Thenx^_l_|__j_ ^„^ 2Jdays. 

6. Let x=tirae past noon. 
12 — x=time to midnight. 

Then x ^12— x ^ ^^^^^ jj^^^ ^^ 4 q,^,^^^^^ ^ ^^ 
3 5 ^ 

7. Let x=numerator of fraction. 

y=denominator. 
Thenx+1_^^^^^^_^^ ^m. A. 

y y+i 

447 



448 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

8. Let x=greater ; n — x=less. 
Then x+a=(n— x)+b. 

Ans. Greater ^1+^ less B±^. 

9. Let x=A's money ; y=B's money. 
Then x+l=:2(y— 1) and x— l=y+l. 

Ans. A's=S7. B's=$5. 

10. Let x=length of edge. 
/3x2 =the diagonal. 

4 

x3= v^3x2 . Ans. "f 3. 

11. Let x=greater ; y— less 

Then x+yr=100 and / x ~ v^ y =2. 

Square second equation and subtract. Ans. 64 and 86. 

12. The local value of the digit in ten's place being ten 
times that in unit's place, if we let x= units and y=tens 
the number will be lOy+x. Then 10y+x=3(x+y) and 
10y-|-x+45=10x+y. Ans. 27. 

13. Let x=James' age ; y=John's age. 

Then ^^y ^^^ ^_^^J^ j^s. James 10, John 30. 
3 5 

14. Let x=:one number and y the other. 
Then xy=36 and x^— y2z=65. ^ 

Find value of x^ in each equation and compare. 

Ans. 9 and 4. 

15. Let x=greater number and y the less. 
Then x+y=2000 and x:y::9:7 or 9y=7x. 
Multiply first equation through by 7 and subtract. 

Ans. 1125 and 875. 

16. Let x=length of body and 9-|-|x:=length of tail. 
Then 9-h9+Jxi=x, or x=18+ix. Ans. 72 inches. 

17. Let 12x=number he had at first. 

9x — i=first remainder. 
6x — J=second remainder. 
3x — |=third remainder. 
3x— 1=25. Ans. 103. 

18. In both numerator and denominator we have the 
product of the sum and difierence of two quantities. Ans. 

19. Let x=upper part and 80— x=:lower part. 

Then x^— 422=(80— x)2. Ans. Upper part 50 
feet. Lower 30 feet. 



TEST PROBLEMS. 449 

20. Let x= width of frame. 
Then 24x+36x+4x2=216. 
Transpose, unite and complete the square. 

Ans. 3 inches. 

21. From the vertical angle let fall a perpendicular to 
the base b. 

Let x=the segment adjacent to the side c ; 

b — x=the segment adjacent to the side a ; 

Then will c^ — x^^perpendicular. 

Also a^ — (b — x)2=rperpendicular. 

Then will c^— x^r^a^— (b— x)2. 

After finding the perpendicular multiply the base 
b, by J the perpendicular. 

~ 22. Add the three sides and divide this sum by 2. 
Subtract each side separately from the half sum. Multi- 
ply the several remainders and the half sum together and 
determine the square root of the result. 

23. s= |-(a+b). s=|x(l+24). ^„^_ gg^^ 

24. Let x=number in the company. 

Thenl?2?-30^1^0. 
X x+2 

Divide both members by 30. Clear of fractions 
and complete the square. Ans. 8. 

25. The formulas will not apply in this problem so let 
y=common difference. 

Then x — y=first ; x=second, and x+V=third. 
3x=27, x=9, x2— y2=77. Ans. 7, 9, 11. 

26. Let x=side of the square in rods. 

Then x^ , _ 

-— ^number of acres. 

160 
16x=number of boards, each board being 16^ feet 

x^ 
or 1 rod long. Then — =16x. 
^ 160 

After finding x, square it and divide by 260. 

o7 T + ,1. u ^''^' 40960. 

27. Let x=tne number. 

Then|'^-f-7=:ll. Ans. 10. 

28. lr=arii-i, 1=1x2^ . 

Substitute 1 in s==^i=i^ ^,rs. $1,023. 

29. Let x=time passed ; 30 — x=:time to come. 
_x_^30— X . 

2 4 Ans. 10 years. 



450 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

30. Let x=the amount required at 40 cents 
and yr=ithe amount required at 24 cents. 
Then x+y=r=l and 40x+24y=28. 

Ans. i at 40 cents, and f at 24 cents. 

31. Let x=original number in each flock. 
Then X— 39=2(x— 93). Ans. 147. 

32. Let x=his age. 

Then x+|+|-10=100. ^^^ 60 years old. 

33. Let x=number of pounds at 9 cents 
and yr=number of pounds at 13 cents. 
Thenx+y=100, and 9x+13y=l,200. 

Ans. 25 lbs. at 9c., and 75 lbs. at 13c. 

34. Let x=value of clothes. 
Then 10Q+x_ 60+x . 

12 8 Ans. $20. 

35. 7.493497-^5=1.498699, and by reference to the 
table of logarithms 1.498699 is the logarithm of 31.52. 

o. X . ^ x'l. ^ns. 31.52. 

36. Let x=:Cost ol horse. 

37. Let x=what the first put in. 
Then x — 40= what second put in. 

Then x :x— 40 : :5 :4. Ans. $200, and $160. 

38. Let x=number of miles traveled per hour, 
rr^ 36 o 36 

■^"^ ^^l' ^^^- Smiles. 

39. Let X =his income. 
Thenx=100+|-+35+|. ^„^. 450. 

40. Let x=number he broke, and 
100 — x=nuniber he delivered. 
Then3x— 9(100— x)=240, Ans. 5. 

41. Let x==height of the tree. 

Then42:-..x:_. ^^^^ 98^ feet. 

42. Let 2x=first ; 3x=second and 4xr=third. 
Then 9x^^360. Ans. $80, $20, $160. 

43. Let x=length, and 3x the breadth. 

Then 3x2=10,800. Ans. Length 180, breadth 60. 

44. Let x=price of one orange, and y=price of a lemon. 
Then 6x+7y=33 and 12x+10y=54. 

Ans. Oranges 2 cents ; lemons 3 cents. 



TEST PEOBLEMS. 45 j 

45. Let x=the greater and y=tbe less. 
Iben x+yz=20 and x2y2^92l6 

«..Prfi^'''''"'!-*^'^ 'S,'''^''^ ''^^^ °*' ^°^h members of tbe 
and 8 ^'^''''*''''' '''''^ compare witb tbe first. Ans. 12 

46. Let x^^number of bours before B will overtake A 
Then ^-I-L^=^^, Ans. 42 bours. 

47. Let x=distance traveled by bour band. 

12x=distance traveled by minute band. 
Tbere bemg 12 spaces for tbe minute band to gain on 
tbe bour band, 12x-x==12. Ans. 1 bour, 5 min., 27^ sec! 

48. Let x=distance traveled by bour band. 

12x=distance traveled by minute band 
Ihe minute band must gain two revolutions on tbe 
hour band. 

Tberi 12x-x:=24. Ans. 2 bours, 10 min., 54t«x sec. 

49. Let x^distance traveled by bour band. 

12x=distance traveled by minute band. 
Alter tbe bands are together between 2 and 3 o'clock, 

band^^^^ ™"^* ^^^"^ ^^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^^ ^^ ^^^ ^^^^ 

Then 12x— x=27. Ans. 2 bours, 27 min., 16A- sec. 
oU. Let x=distance traveled by bour band. 

12x=distance traveled by minute band. 
Here 5 revolutions and six spaces must be gained. 
Then 12x— x=66. Ans. 6 o'clock. 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES, 



1. What are Parliamentary Rules? 

2. From what source did we derive these recognized 
rules ? 

3. Why taken from the rules governing the British 
Parliament ? 

4. Are these rules binding upon the people in their 
assemblies ? 

5. Are these changes often made ? 

6. When such legislative manual is adopted by any 
particular legislature, does it become authority for the next 
body following it ? 

7. Would it be possible to establish a system of gov- 
erning rules which would agree in every particular with 
that of Congress or other legislative assemblies? 

8. Who is recognized as authority on parliamentary 
practice ? 

9. How is an assembly of the people called into an 
organized body ? 

10. Does this election of officers constitute the per- 
manent organization of the assembly ? 

11. How is the new organization usually taken up and 
acted upon ? 

12. Under such circumstances, is it usual to proceed in 
the election of permanent officers in the same manner as 
adopted in the election of temporary ones ? 

13. By what name is the presiding officer recognized? 

14. What name is applied to the recording officer ? 

15. Who are entitled to participate in the proceedings 
of an assembly ? 

453 



454 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

16. How are these electors or representatives recognized 
as lawful members of any assembly ? 

17. What are credentials ? How obtained ? 

18. When are the credentials or certificates of member- 
ship examined and acted upon? 

19. When rival claims are presented, how proceed ? 

20. Do the contesting members have the privileges of 
other members during the discussion of rights ? 

21. Does it become necessary that the president or clerk 
shall be a member of the assembly ? 

22. In our numerous societies and associations, what 
offices are usually sustained ? 

23. When an assembly has rightfully appropriated a 
room or place for its sessions, how can it protect itself 
from disorderly or improper conduct of any member or 
any person not entitled to be therein ? 

24. What authority has an assembly to employ suffi- 
cient force to remove such person or persons ? 

25. When a person or persons become disorderly, are 
they subject to prosecution ? 

26. How is the judgment, opinion, sense or will of a 
deliberative assembly expressed ? 

27. What object was in view when the various ways of 
disposing of a proposition or motion were adopted ? 

28. What is a quorum ? 

29. What number constitutes a quorum ? 

80. What is the duty of the presiding officer in regard 
10 a quorum ? 

31. Why is it necessary that a certain number should 
constitute a quorum ? 

32. By what are the various organized assemblies of 
the people governed ? 

33. How are changes made in the rules of any organ- 
ization ? 

34. When adopted rules are disregarded or infringed 
upon, whose duty is it to take notice thereof? 

35. Suppose it is not the sentiment or wish of the assem- 
bly that a particular rule be enforced ? 

86. How avoid any future enforcement of distasteful 
rules ? 

37. When there is no provision for the assembly to 
amend or repeal the rules governing them, when can 
changes be made ? 

88. Can a rule be dispensed with or suspended where 
there is no express provision on this subject ? ' 



^ PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 455 

39. What is meant by the term " general consent," as 
used in parliamentary practice? 

40. In taking a vote on any question, does it always 
require a majority to pass the question? 

41. When an assembly is not likely to finish its busi- 
ness at one sitting, when would be the most appropriate 
time to fix the time for reassembling? 

42. In the election of officers, why is it necessary that 
absolute majorities should be required ? 

43. What are the duties of the presiding officer ? 

44. In the absence of the president and vice-president, 
whose duty is it to preside ? 

45. Does the officer-elect have the same power con- 
ferred upon him as upon the regular officer? 

46. What is pro tempore ? 

47. In addressing an assembly , does the presiding offi- 
cer rise ? 

48. What is the duty of the recording officer ? 

49. What position should the secretary or clerk 
assume wliile reading or calUng the assembly? 

50. What is meant by calling the assembly ? 

51. What are the rights and duties of members of any 
assembly ? 

52. In cases of irregular or disorderly conduct, how 
proceed ?' 

63. What punishment can be inflicted upon a member 
for willfully violating the rules of the assembly? 

54. What misdemeanors are called high breaches of 
decorum ? 

55. Whenever a member desires to address the assem- 
bly, whether for debate or for the introduction of any com- 
munication, how proceed? 

56. When two or more persons rise at the same time, 
or nearly so, to address the assembly, how shall the pre- 
siding officer decide who shall be first heard ? 

57. Should this decision be called in question by any 
member saying that in his opinion such a member is 
entitled to the floor, what must be done ? 

58. What are communications ? 

59. What are motions ? Questions ? 

60. How prepare a petition for presentation ? 

61. What is the duty of a member presenting a peti- 
tion ? 

62. What deviation is usually practiced from this regu- 
lar method of proceeding ? 



456 THE QUESTION BOOK. * 

63. When petitions or other similar subjects are before 
the assembly for action, how are they usually disposed of? 

64. When any question is ordered to lie on the table^ 
when does it again come before the assembly ? 

65. Whenever a member introduces a proposition of 
his own for consideration of the assembly, how obtain the 
action of the assembly ? 

66. As motions are usually made orally, what indul- 
gence is extended to the mover by the presiding officer? 

67. When a motion is made and receives no second, 
does it command any further attention of the assembly ? 

68. When is a motion in the possession of the assem- 
bly? 

69. After a motion has been stated by the presiding 
officer, can the mover withdraw it from the assembly ? 

70. When a motion has been made and seconded, buti 
not yet stated by the presiding officer, can it be withdrawn 
or modified ? 

71. What is the duty of the presiding officer in regard 
to stating a motion when called upon to do so by any 
member ? 

72. When a motion is before the assembly, can another 
motion be made and acted upon ? 

73. Are members allowed to make remarks when there 
is no question before the house ? 

74. When a proposition is made, and the assembly is 
not willing to give it attention at that time, how dispose 
of the question? 

75. When a motion is under debate, what questions can 
be received ? 

76. By what name are these forms of questions dis- 
tinguished from the principal motion? 

77. What are subsidiary questions f 

78. How are subsidiary motions classified 

79. What is the previous question f 

80. What are the objects of the mover in making a 
motion for the previous question? 

81. What is the result of an indefinite postponement ? 

82. When should motions to postpone be made? 

83. What subsidiary motion is usually made when it 
is the desire of the assembly to postpone a question until 
the subject under consideration may suit their convenience 
better than when presented ? 

84. When a subject has been ordered to lie on the 
table, how is it recalled ? When? 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 457 

85. In what form should a motion be made when it is 
the desn-e to proceed with a matter which has been ordered 
to lie on the table ? 

^ 86. Suppose a question when voted to lie on the table 
IS never recalled, what becomes of that question? 

87. What are motions to commit ? 

88. What authority has the committee thus appointed ? 

«y. <-an more than one committee be appointed to per- 
lect any proposition ? ^^ t- 

90. What are motions to amend ? 

91. What is the division of a question ? 

92. When a motion is thus divided, what becomes of it ^ 
yd. Are these questions open to amendment *? 

94 What must be the condition of a proposition to 
admit of a division ? 

^11'^^' J"^}^^^^}?-^^"^^ bodies, propositions are known as 
fiUmg blanks. How are such propositions presented and 
acted upon ? 

96. Infilling blanks in a motion, does it require separate 
action for each blank filled, and are such motions amend- 
ments ? 

97. When several propositions are made for filHn^ 
blanks which relate to time or number,— as a day when 
postponement shall take place, the number of which a 
committee shall consist,— which proposition must be taken 
up first ? 

98. When the propositions relate to limitation,— as the 
amount of tax to be raised, the rate of interest, on what 
day the session of a legislature shall be closed by adjourn- 
ment, which propositions must be taken up first? 

^ 99, What are the terms addition, separation and transpo- 
sition, as they are used in legislative assemblies? 

100. After an amendment has been stated by the pre- 
siding officer, can the mover change the question? 

101. When an amendment is proposed, and them over 
of the original question signifies his consent to it, what 
digression is often practiced ? 

102. After a question, or amendment, has been sec- 
onded, can the mover withdraw his motion ? 

103. In how many ways is the form of a question 
afiected by amendments ? 

104. As all forms of amendments are subject to certain 
general rules, explain how these rules should be classified ? 

105. What is the First Rule? Second Rule"? Third 
Rule ? Fourth Rule ? Fifth Rule ? 



458 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

106. In Rule Fifth, if the proposition is fit for rejection 
by the assembly, why not be suppressed by the presiding 
officer? 

107. When an amendment is made by striking out a 
particular paragraph or certain words, and the amendment 
is rejected, can it again be moved to strike out the same 
words, or a part of them? 

108. When a question has been moved to amend, or an 
amendment to an amendment, how shall the presiding 
officer proceed in stating the question? 

109. In the third form of amending by striking out 
and inserting, how proceed ? 

110. When a motion to strike out and insert is carried, 
what changes can be made ? 

111. What is the manner of stating a question which is 
required to be amended by striking out, or inserting, or 
striking out and inserting other words? 

112. Can an amendment be made which will destroy 
the entire original motion? 

113. In deliberative assemblies, what motion can be 
made and take the place of a regular question ? 

114. Is a motion for adjournment always in order ? 

115. In order to entitle this motion to precedence over 
any before the assembly, how must it be given ? 

1 16. Can a motion to adjourn be amended ? 

117. When an assembly is adjourned without any par- 
ticular day or time, when does it assemble again ? 

118. When a question is interrupted by an adjourn- 
ment, and before any vote or question has been taken 
upon it, does it stand before the assembly at the next day 
of meeting ? 

119. To what do the questions of privilege relate? 

120. What are the orders of the day f 

121. When does the question for the orders of the day 
arise ? 

122. When the orders of the day is decided in the 
affirmative, how proceed ? 

123. What becomes of the original motion when inter- 
rupted by the orders of the day ? 

124. If the question is decided in the negative, what 
business can the assembly act upon ? 

125. If the business relating to the orders of the day is 
not disposed of on the day assigned, what becomes of it? 

126. What are incidental questions f 

127. How are incidental questions divided ? 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 459 

128. What is the duty of the presiding officer m rela- 
tion to questions of order f 

129. Can the presiding officer be questioned in regard 
to his decision of a breach of order or departure from 
rule? 

130. What is appealing from the decision of the chair? 

131. When an appeal is made, how state it to the 
assembly ? 

132. When an appeal is before the assembly, is the pre- 
siding officer entitled to express his own opinions ? 

133. What is the rule in regard to reading papers f 

134. Why must a member obtain the consent of the 
assembly before reading any book or paper, or his own 
speech prepared in writing ? 

135. When, in the course of a debate, or other proceed- 
ing, the reading of a paper is called for, and an objection 
is made upon it, how proceed ? 

136. When a motion has been regularly made, and the 
presiding officer has put the question formally to the 
assembly, can it be withdrawn? 

137. What is the suspension of a ride f 

138. In the suspension of a rule, does a majority vote 
decide ? 

139. How treat an amendment of an amendment ? 

140. Which of the subsidiary questions admit of no 
amendment ? 

141. Why do these questions not admit of amendment ? 

142. When the previous question is moved, can another 
be made to prevent its action? 

143. If the previous question is decided negatively, 
to-wit, that the main question shall not now be put, is the 
main question then subject to amendment, commitment, 
or postponement ? 

144. How are questions for postponement considered? 

145. Can this question be amended ? 

146. When the motion for an amendment to some other 
day is rejected, how can a change of day be obtained? 

147. If the motion for postponement is decided in the 
negative, what other means can be resorted to for suppress- 
ing it ? 

148. If a motion for commitment is decided in the 
affirmative, can the previous question, or postponement, 
be then used ? 

149. How may a motion to commit, or recommit, be 
amended ? 



460 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

150. What motion supersedes all the other subsidiary 
questions ? 

151. Of these subsidiary questions, what one can be 
superseded by others? 

152. By what reasoning are the motions for postpone- 
ment to a day certain and commitment, allowed to super- 
sede a proposed amendment ? 

153. How should business be brought before an assem- 
bly? 

154. When two or more subjects are placed on the 
table, and no priority has been given to one over the 
other, which should command the attention of the assem- 
bly first ? 

155. When any paper, which consists of several dis- 
tinct propositions is presented for the action of the assem- 
bly, how proceed in the most appropriate manner ? 

156. Where a paper consists of a preamble or title, 
does it become proper to proceed first with the heading ? 

157. When a paper has been referred to a committee, 
and is reported back to the assembly, how is it taken up 
for consideration ? 

158. When the resolutions or articles of the committal 
have been thus agreed upon, how enter the final question 
upon the records of the assembly ? 

1 59. When the paper referred to a committee is reported 
back in a new draft, which is often done when numerous 
changes are made, how is the new draft considered ? 

160. Give an example of how questions may grow 
out of each other, and in what order they may be 
decided. 

161. In a case like the preceding example, we have six 
questions before the assembly at one time; how dispose of 
them? 

162. When is a proposition in order for any member to 
discuss it ? 

163. What abusive proceeding is sometimes allowed in 
the moving of subsidiary motions ? 

164. Under such circumstances, what is the duty of the 
presiding officer? 

165. When a member has obtained the floor, what 
right belongs to him ? 

166. Can he be interrupted in his speech by any other 
member rising and moving an adjournment, or for the 
orders of the day, or by making any other privileged 
motion ? 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 461 

167. When a member has the floor, and calls are made 
for an adjournment, or the orders of the day, or for the 
question, how are such calls to be considered ? 

168. How shall a member address himself to the pre- 
siding officer when he wishes to call attention to some 
point of order, privilege or orders of the assembly ? 

169. When the time arrives for proceeding with the 
orders of the day, can a member be interrupted while 
speaking, and new subjects presented ? 

170. After a motion has been made, seconded and pro- 
posed, to whom is it customary to give the floor on open- 
ing the debate? 

171. When two or more members claim the floor, to 
whom should the presiding officer give the preference ? 

172. Has a member the right to discuss a subject before 
it is moved ? 

173. Is the discussion of a subject, not already moved, 
indulged in by the members ? 

174. When a member desires to address the assembly 
for the purpose of discussion, or to make a motion, how 
should he proceed ? 

175. What is the duty of a person in speaking in 
regard to mentioning the name of a member then pres- 
ent? 

176. When the presiding officer rises to speak, at the 
same time as another member, what shall be the duty of 
that member? 

177. How long is a member permitted to speak on any 
subject ? 

178. What are the rules in regard to speaking? 

179. Does the introduction of a subsidiary motion re- 
strain debate on the general question ? 

180. When a member Is called to order for departing 
from the subject under consideration, what privilege may 
be extended to him ? 

181. How many times can a member speak upon the 
same subject under debate? 

182. On what points may a member speak a second 
time in the same debate? 

183. What is the meaning of the phrase " to clear a 
matter of fact"? 

184. When a member wishes to make an explanation 
while another is speaking, and the speaker yields the floor 
for an explanation, does the speaker have the right to the 
floor after the explanation has been given ? 



462 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

185. What methods do assemblies adopt to prevent a 
continuation of lengthy and unprofitable debates ? 

186. When an assembly will not support the presiding 
officer in his efforts to maintain order and decorum, what 
will he be justified in doing? 

187. When disorderly words are used in speaking, 
which are personally offensive or insulting to another, or 
to the assembly, how proceed to check its continuance ? 

188. If offensive words are not taken notice of at the 
time spoken, or immediately after the speaker has finished, 
has any member the right to censure the member before 
the assembly ? 

1 89. Sometimes it occurs that a member while speaking 
does not command the attention of the assembly ; that his 
right to be heard is disregarded by improper disturbances, 
whispering, talking, and other evidences of no regard for 
the speaker. What would be the most prudent course of 
the member speaking? 

190. What is the order, resolution, or vote of the assembly?' 

191. In stating a question to an assembly, is it neces- 
sary for the presiding officer to give it in the precise form 
proposed ? 

192. In matters of trifling importance, such as receiv- 
ing petitions and reports, withdrawing motions, reading 
papers, etc., what form is often used in disposing of 
them? 

193. What is the form used by the presiding officer ia 
putting a question to the assembly ? 

194. If the presiding officer is unable to decide the 
vote ; or, after deciding according to his judgment, any 
member rises and says, " / doubt the vote,^^ what must be 
done ? 

195. If the assembly is equally divided on any ques- 
tion, how decide? 

196. Is it the duty of.the presiding officer to give the 
casting vote? 

197. When the expression of the assembly is taken by 
actual count, to whom does this duty belong? 

198. In legislative assemblies, how is the question 
taken by vote ? 

199. After the affirmative side of the question ha& 
been put, and voting commenced, is it open to debate ? 

200. What objects can be accomplished by an interrup- 
tion as above described? 

201. When a question is taken by ayes and noes, the 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 463. 

negative and affirmative taken at the same time, why can 
there be no opening of the debate, as in other cases ? 
^ 202. When, during a division, objections arise concern- 
ing the right of any members to vote, how settle the ob- 
jection ? 

^ 203. Suppose, in counting the assembly, on a division, 
it appears that there is not a quorum present, what shall 
be done? 

204. What is a motion for reconsideration ? 

205. Who has a right to make a motion to reconsider? 

206. Of what use are committees? 

207. What are the powers of a committee ? 

208. What names are usually applied to the different 
committees ? 

209. What is a select committee ? 

210. What is a standing committee ? 

211. In appointing a committee, how proceed ? 

212. How select a committee by ballot ? 

213. How elect by nomination and vote? 

214. When a subject is referred to a committee, what 
custom is usually adopted in the selection of that com- 
mittee? 

215. What is the duty of the secretary in regard to 
committees? 

216. Who is the chairman of a committee ? 

217. ^When and where does a committee meet for the 
trarlsaction of business ? 

218. Can a committee transact business without the 
attendance of all the members ? 

219. If a committee fails to meet at the particular time,, 
as ordered by the assembly, what is the result ? 

220. If disorderly words are spoken in a committee^ 
what is to be done ? 

22 1 . What is the difference in the action of a committee 
on a paper originating with, and one referred to them ? 

222. If a committee is opposed to the whole paper 
referred to them, can they reject it ? 

223. What should be the appearance of a paper origi- 
nating with a committee and reported to the assembly? 

224. How should a committee treat a paper referred to- 
it? 

225. When the committee has finished its work, what 
move is next in order ? 

226. When the report of a committee is to be made,, 
how proceed? 



464 THE (^UKSTfON BOOK. 

227. If the report is deferred to some future time, what 
is the manner of then disposing of it? 

228. If the report is of a paper with amendments, how 
proceed ? 

229. Is a motion and vote necessary in accepting a 
report? 

230. When a report is of considerable length, how is it 
usually presented to the members for their inspection ? 

231. When is a committee dissolved ? 

232. What is meant by recommitting a subject ? 

233. Does the action of a committee have any bearing 
upon a subject recommitted ? 

234. In how many forms may the report of a committee 
be presented? 

235. When the report of a committee is accepted, how 
is it regarded by the assembly? 

236. Do the terms accepting and adopting have the same 
meaning ? 

237. What is a committee of the whole ? 

238. How resolve an assembly into a committee of the 
whole ? 

239. What number is required to constitute a quorum ? 

240. If at any time the number present falls below a 
quorum, what is the duty of the committee ? 

241. Who acts as clerk in recording the business trans- 
acted by a committee of the whole? 

242. How are the records of this committee kept ? 

243. What is the difference between the proceedings of 
the assembly and the committee of the whole ? 

244. How avoid an improper discussion, which in the 
assembly can be governed by the previous question ? 

245. If the business of the committee is not concluded 
at the usual time for the assembly to adjourn, or if the 
committee have other reasons for not continuing, how shall 
they proceed ? 

246. What is a sub-committee ? 

247. Is the formality of a motion and question ever 
dispensed with as to the time of receiving a report? 

248. What special duty should be imposed upon every 
presiding officer in the discharge of business ? 



ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS 



ON 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES, 



1. A recognized code of systematic regulations, by 
which the people may be assembled for deliberation, and 
governed accordingly. 

2. From the British Parliament. 

3. Because of the early relationship between England 
and the United States. These rales have remained un- 
changed in the English Parliament for several hundreds 
of years, and have become a prominent system of parlia- 
mentary authority. 

4. Not binding, although this universal custom be- 
comes a general law, changed only when legislative bodies 
shall so specify. 

5. Not in the common assembling of the people. In 
the legislative branches of our government a different sys- 
tem of particular rules have been established, yet founded 
in and embracing all the essential rules of the common 
parliamentary law. Differences are adopted even in the 
two Houses of Congress, while in each state no prescribed 
rule is used in common. As a consequence of this dis- 
agreement, all legislative bodies provide themselves with 
a Legislative Manual, which becomes the standard author- 
ity for the government of that assembly. 

6. It does not. Each legislative assembly is free to 
adopt the rules of its predecessors or to create new ones. 
In Congress, the same privilege is accepted, which, unlike 
the standard laws of the British Parliament, are subject 
to change to suit the particular wants of that body. 

7. It would not. As a people, we have no- great 
respect for customs and precedents. This lack of respect 

46") 



466 ' THE QUESTION BOOK. 

for a permanent system is manifested in the endeavor of 
individuals to publish works which, in many particulars, 
are a departure from the general law. 

8. Luther S. Gushing, author of Cushing's Manual. 

9. There being no organization, it is effected by some 
individual in the assembly requesting the meeting to come- 
to order for the transaction of the business calling them 
together. He also requests that some person be nominated 
for presiding officer. Such nomination being made, he 
puts the question for a vote of the assembly. Should the 
nominee be rejected, other nominations are made, until a 
choice is effected, whereupon the officer elected takes the 
chair, and proceeds in the same manner to complete the 
organization of the assembly, by choice of a secretary and 
such other officers, if any, as may be deemed necessary. 

10. It does not, although in all conventions and meet- 
ings where the people are called together for special pur-- 
poses, no further organization is required ; but should a 
permanency be desired, these officers are regarded as 
temporary, and to govern until a permanent organization 
is obtained and other officers elected to take their places. 

11. By referring it to a committee, who report such- 
necessary articles for government as may have been sug- 
gested by the assembly, by individuals thereof, or upon 
their own judgment. Such report to be received or re- 
jected, as the assembly deem proper. 

12. It is not. A committee is often selected, who, after 
consultation, recommend the election of certain individuals 
as qualified to fill the different offices required. 

13. In organized societies or legislative bodies, president 
or speaker ; in political conventions, school meetings, or 
any of the numerous calls for an assembling of the people, 
chairman ; in secret societies, by whatever name adopted 
by that society. 

14. Secretary or clerk. 

15. When the assembling is a call for the whole people, 
all are entitled ; in political conventions or caucuses, those 
who are recognized as electors of that party ; in school 
meetings, electors of that school district ; in societies or 
associations, those who have been duly elected as members. 

16. Usually by a committee being appointed to exam- 
ine the credentials presented by the different individuals 
who desire to take part in the assembly. 

17. A certificate of qualification. In the Congress of 
the United States, certificates of membership are given by 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 467 

the presiding officers of the states where each member is 
elected ; in the legislatures of states, from the county or 
parish officers where each member is elected ; in political 
conventions, from state or local authority, according to the 
call. 

IS. The proper time for this investigation is after the 
temporary and before the permanent organization, by the 
committee appointed for that purpose. 

19. The committee report the claims, and such persons 
are entitled to a hearing, the decision of the matter being 
left with those whose rigiits of membership are not called 
in question. 

20. They do not. After being heard, it is their duty 
to withdraw, or if, by the courtesy of the assembly, they 
are permitted to remain, they have no right to further 
discuss or vote upon the subject. 

21. As these officers are to preside over and record the 
proceedings of an assembly, it does not become necessary 
that they shall, in all cases, iDecome members of the assem- 
bly. In legislative bodies, the clerk is seldom, or never, 
a member ; and in the Senate of the United States, and 
most state senates, the president is not a member. 

22. President, vice-president, secretary and treasurer. 
To these may be added one or more vice-presidents, one 
or more secretaries, and such other officers or committees 
*is the association shall see fit to adopt. 

23. By employing sufficient force to remove such per- 
son or persons from the meeting. 

24. This protection is guaranteed by the constitution 
of the United States, and all necessary resorts to the use 
of force are unquestionably recognized as just. 

25. They are, according to the extent of the offense. 

26. According to the nature of the subject, either by a 
resolution, order or vote. When it commands, it is an 
order; the expression of opinions, by a resolution; the result 
of a question decided by the assembly, a vote. 

27. As all questions were liable to be imperfect in form, 
objectionable in part, and not presented at the desired 
time, it was necessary that various ways should be 

^ invented by which the question could be retained, per- 
fected, presented when desired, or postponed from time to 
time, as the will of the assembly should decide. 

28. A sufficient number of members for the transac- 
tion of business. 

29. Usually, in councils, legislative bodies or associa- 



468 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

tions, rules are established determining this point, but 
should there be no established rules, it requires a majority 
of all members composing that association, society or 
assembly. 

30. He should not take the chair until he is satisfied a 
quorum is present ; and should, at any time in the course 
of the proceedings, notice be taken that a quorum is not 
present, it then becomes the duty of the presiding officer 
to count the members present, and should a quorum be 
wanting, the assembly must be immediately adjourned. 

31. In order to secure fairness of proceeding, and to 
prevent matters from being concluded in a hasty manner, 
or agreed to by so small a number of the members as not 
to command a due and proper respect. 

32. By a code of rules usually known as a constitution 
and by-laws. 

33. By a prescribed rule as given ; but when there is 
no prescribed rule, it becomes proper for the assembly to 
act at any time upon an amendment the same as in any 
question, but in the suspension of a rule there must be an 
unanimous consent. 

34. Any member has the right to report such offense, 
and require that the presiding officer should enforce the 
rule without debate or delay. 

35. It matters not ; so long as one member insists upon 
its execution, it must be done. It is then too late to alter, 
repeal or suspend the rule. 

36. By an amendment at the proper time. 

37. At any time when it is the will of the assembly to 
amend or repeal. 

38. It cannot, except by general consent. 

39. It denotes the unanimous opinion of the assembly. 

40. In all the common transactions- of the people, a 
majority rules ; but in legislative bodies, on some particu- 
lar questions or subjects, as the entering of the yeas and 
nays upon the records, one-fourth of the members present 
may carry the question, while on other subjects it may 
require a two-thirds vote, as in impeachment trials and the 
passing of laws previously vetoed. 

41. It would be -more satisfactory in all cases to decide 
this matter before the time to close has arrived. By doing 
so, the judgment of the assembly would be better 
expressed, as impatience is often manifested when the 
motion to adjourn is made. 

42. As all officers of a deliberative assembly are 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 469 

removable at the pleasure of the assembly, it is not rea- 
sonable to suppose that a person elected by a minority 
could retain his office when opposed by a majority. It is 
essential in the transaction of business that they should 
possess the confidence of the members, which they can- 
not be Slid to do unless they have the sufirages of at least 
a majority. 

43. To open the assembly at such times as provided 
for the meeting ; to announce the business necessary to be 
transacted in proper order ; to receive and submit all 
proper motions and propositions presented by the mem- 
bers ; to put to vote all regular questions that may be pre- 
sented for action, and to announce the result ; to enforce 
order and decorum, and to restrain the members, when 
engaged in debate, from the violation of these rules ; to 
receive all communications, and announce them to the 
assembly ; to sign his name to all acts, orders and proceed- 
ings of the assembly, when necessary ; to decide all points 
of order or practice when called upon to do so ; to name 
the members who are to serve on committees when no pro- 
vision has been made for their appointment ; and, in gen- 
eral, to obey the commands of the assembly, declare its 
will, and stand as its representative. 

44. It then becomes the duty of the secretary to open 
the meeting and conduct the proceedings until the 
appointment of a president and chairman is made. 

45. He does ; the only difference being that he does 
not hold powder beyond this particular session. 

46. The term applied to any officer appointed to fill, 
for the time being, the place of an absent one. 

47. To state a motion, or put a question, he should 
rise, but may read sitting. 

48. To take note of and record all the business trans- 
actions of the assembly ; but he is not required to take 
minutes of words used in debate, or of things proposed or 
moved without coming to a vote. It is also his duty to 
read all papers or communications ; to call the roll of the 
assembly ; to notify committees of their appointments 
and the business referred to them ; to sign, if necessary, 
with the president, all acts or orders of the assembly; and 
to hold and protect all papers and documents, letting none 
be taken from the table without permission of the assem- 
bly. 

49. He should stand, unless disabilities prevent. 

50. Calling, by name, each member, whose duty is to 



470 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

respond by expressing his choice, for or against, the ques- 
tion before the assembly. This mode of obtaining the 
opinion of an assembiy is often adopted in conventions 
where nominations for offices are made. It is quicker 
expressed than by ballot. 

51. Every member is entitled to the same equal rights 
in the business transactions of the assembly ; he is entitled 
to the respect of all other members while debating, or rec- 
ommending any proposition which he may present. It is 
the duty of every member to act the part of a gentleman, 
in manners and language ; to remove his hat upon entering 
the assembly-room, and to avoid, as far as possible, any 
unnecessary noise and confusion. 

52. It is the privilege of every member to report such 
conduct, and it is the especial duty of the presiding officer 
to take notice or complain of irregular or improper con- 
duct, calling the attention of the assembly to it, naming 
the individual censured. The member censured is entitled 
to a hearing, if he wishes to explain why he has thus con- 
ducted himself. It is then his duty to withdraw from the 
assembly, unless permission is granted that he should 
remain, but not to take further action, as no man is entitled 
to sit as his own judge. 

53. Only those which relate to the rights of that mem- 
ber in the assembly, such as being debarred from taking 
any action for a stated time; expulsion, or any prohibition 
which the assembly may declare. 

54. Assaults by one member upon another, threats, 
challenges, affrays, etc. 

55. The member must rise in his place, and, standing 
uncovered, address himself to the presiding officer, by his 
title, who, on being addressed, calls the member by his 
name, by w^hich permission is given to the member to pro- 
ceed with his business. 

56. He should give the floor to the member whose voice 
he first heard. 

57. In such a case, it becomes necessary for the presid- 
ing officer to refer his decision to a vote of the assembly. 
If decided in the negative, then the name of the member 
for whom the floor was claimed must be acted upon. 

58. They are of two kinds, namely, those which convey 
information of some general character, and those which 
contain request for some action on the part of the assembly. 
The latter form of communications embraces orders, reso- 
lutions or votes. 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. t71 

59. Propositions drawn up by any member and intro- 
duced for action in the assembly. Motions in all cases 
must be sanctioned or seconded by another member. 

60. A petition should contain a carefully constructed 
statement of what is desired, and be signed by the peti- 
tioner himself, except when sickness prevents, or he is 
attending in person ; but in no case should the petitioner 
state it to the assembly, but it should be presented by 
some member to whom it is entrusted for that purpose. 

61. He should inform himself of the nature and sub- 
stance of the petition prepared, and if, in his judgment, it 
contains nothing intentionally disrespectful to the assem- 
bly, he rises in his place, with the petition in his hand, and 
Informs the assembly that he has a certain petition, stating 
the substance of it, which he, or some other member, 
moves shall be received. This motion being seconded, the 
question is put whether the assembly will receive the peti- 
tion or not. 

62. The presiding officer, usually, taking for granted 
that there are no objections to its reception, orders it sent 
up to the clerk, or secretar}^, and it is then read, by which 
means it is brought before the assembly to be disposed of 
-as business ; but should objections be made to this devia- 
tion, the presiding officer must require a motion of recep- 
tion to be regularly made and seconded, or the subject will 
be dropped witiiout farther action. 

63. By being immediately considered or assigned to 
some future time, or ordered to lie on the table for exam- 
ination and consideration of the members individually. 

64. Not until the members require it. 

65. He puts it into the form desired, and then moves 
that it be adopted; after which, if it receives the approba- 
tion or second of any member, it comes before the assem- 
bly for action. 

66. By not requiring the motion to be presented in 
writing. If otherwise presented he is justified in refusing 
to receive it, except for adjournment, to lie on the table, and 
such motions as are always in the same form. 

67. It does not, and no notice should be taken of it by 
the presiding officer. To this rule exceptions occur, such 
as necessarily require the action of the presiding officer in 
'enforcing decorum, or to proceed with any order of the as- 
sembly. Sometimes a special rule is passed requiring 
more than one second on particular subjects. 



472 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

68. After it has been made and seconded, and stated by 
the presiding officer. 

69. He cannot, for it no longer belongs to him ; but, by 
special leave of the assembly, when acted upon as in any 
motion, it can be withdrawn. 

70. It is proper for the mover to withdraw or modify it, 
either of himself or on the suggestion of some other mem- 
ber, or of the presiding officer, and without any motion or 
vote for the purpose. 

71. Whenever a member desires the motion stated for 
his information, it becomes the duty of the presiding offi- 
cer to observe the request. 

72. Not unless it is one which is previous in its nature- 
to the question under consideration, and, consequently, 
entitled to take its place for the time being, and be first 
decided. 

73. When those remarks or suggestions relate to some- 
business not yet moved as a question, it is proper to state 
them, but the presiding officer should be careful to check 
and prevent all observations which may tend to excite 
debate, it being a general rule that no debate can be allowed 
to take place on any subject, unless there is a question 
pending at the time. 

74. For this purpose we have the previous question,, 
indefinite postponement, postpone to some future time, to 
lie on the table, or, if the motion is not in a satisfactory 
form, to refer to a committee. 

75. To adjourn ; to lie on the table ; for the previous 
question ; to postpone to a day certain ; to commit ; ta 
amend ; and to postpone indefinitely. These several 
motions shall have precedence in the order in which they 
are arranged. 

76. They are called subsidiary questions. 

77. Those which relate to the principal motion, and are 
made use of to enable the assembly to dispose of it in the- 
most appropriate manner. These motions are sometimes 
used to destroy the principal question, and even to dispose 
of one another. 

78. Into four classes, as follows : 

First. If the question is considered useless or inex- 
pedient, and the assembly desires to suppress it, either for 
a time or altogether, the subsidiary motions, for this pur- 
pose, are the previous question and indefinite postpone- 
ment. 

Second. When more information is wanted, or time for 



PAULIAMENTARY RULES. 47^ 

reflection and examination, or the asserT)bly has other mat- 
ter which has more pressing claims upon its present atten- 
tion, then the subsidiary motions to postpone to some 
future day or time, and to lie on the table, are called into 
use. 

Third. When the form is defective, or a more careful 
and deliberative consideration should be given than can 
be conveniently expressed by the assembly, then it would 
be most proper to refer the proposition to a committee. 

Fourth. When alterations or amendments are desired,, 
then the subsidiary motion is to amend. 

79. A motion intended to suppress debate and bring 
the question to a vote, or to remove it from before the 
assembly. In meaning it is known as, ^' Shall the main 
question now he putf^ If the previous question is lost, the 
question under debate is considered suppressed for the day, 
but if carried, then the question is put immediately, with- 
out any further debate. 

80. Either to suppress the motion or to bring it to an 
immediate vote of the assembly. 

81. The object is to suppress a motion entirely, and an 
indefinite postponement is equivalent to a dissolution. The 
effect of this motion, when carried, is to quash the propo- 
sition entirely ; if lost, the decision has no effect whatever. 

82. When the members individually want more infor- 
mation than they possess, or where there is something else 
which they are desirous of disposing of first. When a 
subject is postponed, it can be taken up at any time when 
it may suit the convenience of the assembly. 

83. The question most commonly in use is, to lie on th^ 
table. 

84. By a motion and vote, at any time when the assem- 
bly pleases, although, when any matter has been thus dis- 
posed of, in strictness it should not again become a subject 
on the same day, unless so specified when made. 

85. " I move that the assembly do now proceed to con- 
sider that matter or subject," (naming it). 

86. If no motion is made to take it up, it remains as 
dead matter, without life, as far as it concerns the future 
actions of the assembly. This motion is often used to 
suppress a question under debate. 

87. Whenever the proposition is defectively framed, and 
it is necessary to have a careful deliberation, the subject is 
referred to a committee, which is called a commitment, or,. 



474 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

if the subject has been in the hands of a committee, a 
recommitment. 

88. To follow out the instructions of the assembly. If 
no particular instructions are given, then the committee 
must re-frame according to the spirit of the subject, but 
cannot change the subject by means of an amendment. 

89. Different parts may be committed to different com- 
mittees. 

90. To unite to the subject matter of a proposition some 
points or propositions not therein contained. 

91. When a proposition is composed of two or more 
parts, which are so far independent of each other as to 
admit of a division into several questions, and it is sup- 
posed that the assembly will approve of some of these 
parts, but not all of them, a division may then take place 
t)y a separate motion for that purpose. 

92. It becomes a series of questions, to be considered 
and acted upon each by itself as ari independent matter, 
in the order in which the mover has divided the proposi- 
tion. 

93. They are the same as any other proposition. 

94. Its point must be so distinct and entire, that if one 
or more of them be taken away, the others may not be 
affected by the division. 

95. They are presented in regular form, but blank in 
regard to time, number, or amount, which the mover 
desires to be filled by the assembly; as, the time of post- 
ponement, the number of which a committee shall consist, 
the amount of fine to be imposed, etc. 

96 The blanks are to be filled by regular motions, and 
are not considered as amendments to the question, but as 
original motions, to be made and decided before the prin- 
cipal questions. 

97. The question must be first taken upon the greatest 
or farthest, and so on to the least or nearest, until the assem- 
bly comes to a vote. 

98. The question must be first taken upon the least or 
nearest, and so on to the greatest or most remote, until the 
assembly comes to a vote. 

99. They are used whenever a matter presented for 
action contains more than one proposition, which might 
be better in one; or when a proposition should be separated 
into parts; or when a paragraph or section requires to be 
transposed. But these modes of disposing of a proposition 
are better referred to a committee. 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 475 

100. He cannot; the same law controlling the amend- 
ment as on an original question. 

101. To incorporate the proposed amendment in the 
orighial motion, and proceed without a separate motion. 

102. If it is his desire to withdraw his motion it can 
only be done by general consent. Such motions not com- 
ing to a vote are not required to be recorded. 

103. In three ways, namely : either by inserting or 
adding certain words ; or by striking out certain words ; 
or by striking out c^'tain words and inserting or adding 
others. 

104. Amendments are classified into five rules, known 
^s First, Second, Third, Fourth, Fijth. 

105. Rule First. — When a proposition consists of 
several sections, paragraphs, or resolutions, the natural 
order of considering and amending it is to begin at the 
beginning and take up the paragraphs in the order in 
which they occur; and when, a latter part has been 
amended, it is not in order to then take up any former 
part and alter or amend. 

Rule Second. — There can be no amendment of an 
amendment to an amendment. Whenever a proposed 
amendment to an amendment does not meet the require- 
ments of the assembly, notice should be given by the one 
who desires to amend, that, if rejected, he shall move again 
in the form in which he desires to have it adopted. 

Rule Third. — Whenever a proposed amendment has 
been adopted or rejected by the assembly ,the subject in ques- 
tion cannot afterwards be altered or amended. In this rule, 
let it be observed that whenever an amendment has been 
voted upon by the assembly, it cannot again be amended ; 
but before the proposed amendment has been brought to a 
vote, it is susceptible to a change, as given in Rule Second. 

Rule Fourth.— Whatever amendment is disagreed to 
I)y the assembly cannot again become a question. ^ 

Rule Fifth. — When a proposed amendment is an in- 
fringement on one already adopted, it is a fit ground for 
its rejection by the assembly, but not for the suppression 
of it by the presiding officer, as being out of order. 

106. The object is to guard against the possibility of 
the presiding officer suppressing an important modifica- 
tion, which might embarrass instead of subserving the 
will of the assembly. 

107. The same words, or a part of them, if used with 
other words, and forming a different proposition, can be 



476 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

struck out the same as if no rejection had been made. 
The same is applicable to words that have been struck 
out and restored in connection with otlier words, pro- 
viding this proposition is substantially different from the 
first. 

108. The presiding officer should put the amendment 
to the amendment first ; then the amendment ; and lastly, ' 
the original question as amended. 

109. As the form is a combination of the other two, it 
may be divided into these two forms by a vote of the 
assembly. If the motion is divided, the question first to 
be decided is on striking out ; if carried, then the ques- 
tion for inserting. Should the question for striking out 
be lost, then of course there can be no question for insert- 
ing. When the motion is made to strike out and insert as 
one question, and the motion is lost, the same motion can- 
not be made again, but it may be moved to strike out the 
same words and insert nothing ; to insert other words ; to- 
insert the same words with others ; to insert a part of the 
same words with others ; to strike out the same words 
with others, and insert the same ; to strike out a part of 
the same words with others, and insert the same ; to strike 
out other words, and insert the same ; and to insert the 
same words, without striking out anything ; providing 
these new propositions are really different from the original 
motion. 

110. As the words struck out, or a part of them, can- 
not be inserted, or the words inserted, or a part of them, 
cannot be struck out, it becomes necessary, if changes are 
desired, to either insert the words struck out, or a part of 
them, with other words ; or to strike out the words in- 
serted, or a part of them, with other words. 

111. The passage to be amended should first be read ; 
then the words proposed to be struck out, or inserted, or 
struck out and inserted ; and lastly, the whole passage as 
it will stand if the amendment is adopted. 

112. It can, although the object of an amendment is for 
improvement ; yet it can be made to destroy. If the 
assembly so wills, the bill may be amended by striking out 
all after the enacting clause and inserting an entirely new 
bill wholly different in effect. 

113. There are certain motions or questions which, on 
account of superior importance, are entitled to take the 
place of any other subject or proposition then under con- 
sideration, and should first be acted upon and decided by 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 477 

the assembty. These are called Privileged Questions, and 
are of three kinds : first, motions to adjourn ; second, those 
that relate to the rights and privileges of the assembly or 
of its members ; and, thirdly, motions for the orders of the 
day. 

114. It is commonly said that it is always in order, but 
exceptions arise which do not make it so. When the 
assembly is voting by the ayes and noes, or a member is 
speaking, it is not in order. 

115. Simply to adjourn, Avithout the addition of any 
particular day or time. 

116. When it is the object of the motion to supersede 
a question already proposed, it does not admit of an amend- 
ment ; but when it is made and there is no other business 
before the assembly, it may be amended like other ques- 
tions. 

117. At the next regular day, as agreed upon by rule 
or by-laws of the assembly. But the adjournment of a 
meeting not organized for the transaction of business, frOm 
time to time, is equivalent to a dissolution. 

118. It does not. Such questions must be brought for- 
ward in the usual way; but if such question has been 
stated by the presiding officer, it stands before the assem- 
bly. 

119. To the rights and privileges of the assembly, or of 
its individual members, such as a disturbance of the assem- 
bly by members or strangers, or where a quarrel arises 
between two members. Tiie settlement of such rights or 
privileges supersedes the question pending, and must be 
first disposed of When settled, the question interrupted 
is to be resumed at the point w^here it was suspended. 

120. When a subject, or different subjects, have been 
assigned for a particular day by an order of the assembly, 
such matter becomes the order of the day. 

121. Whenever a proposition, except to adjourn, or the 
question of privilege, is presented for the action of the assem- 
bly, that does not relate to the orders of the day, then a 
motion to proceed with the business ordered will supersede 
the question before the assembly. 

122. The orders must then be read and gone through 
with in the order in which they stand. Should an order 
be assigned to a particular hour, a motion to proceed to it 
is not a privileged motion until that hour arrives ; but if 
no hour is fixed, the order or orders are for the entire day, 
and every part of it. 



478 THE QUESTION BOOK. i 

123. It is removed from the assembly the same as art 
interruption by an adjournment, as described in Question 
118. 

124. They can continue with the business before the 
assembly when interrupted, and are entitled to dispose of 
it before the orders of the day can again be moved, 

125. It no longer becomes an order of the assembly, 
and if acted upon in the future, must come up as any 
other business. 

126. Such as arise out of other questions, and are enti- 
tled to be decided before the questions which give rise to 
them. 

127. First, questions of order ; second, motions for the 
reading of papers, etc.; third, leave to withdraw a motion ; 
fourth, suspension of a rule ; and fifth, amendment of an 
amendment. 

128. To enforce the rules and orders of the body over 
which he presides, without question, debate or delay, in 
all cases where it is manifest that there is a breach of order 
or a departure from rule. 

129. He can. Questions may arise in which there is 
no breach of order or violation of rules. Such questions 
must be decided before a case can arise for the enforcement 
of the rules. 

130. Whenever the decision of the presiding officer is 
not satisfactory, any member can object to it, and have the 
question decided by the assembly. Such question is 
debatable, and to be decided in the same manner as any 
other question. 

131. " Shall the decision of the Chair stand as the 
decision of the assembly ? " 

132. He is entitled to take part in the debate, which, 
on ordinary occasions, he is prohibited from doing. 

133. Where papers are laid before an assembly for its 
action, every member has a right to have them read once 
at the table before he is compelled to vote upon them. 
When, therefore, a member calls for a reading of the 
papers, no question should be made as to the reading ; but 
where a member desires a repetition of the reading, or of 
some other paper, book or document on the table, or of his 
own speech prepared beforehand in writing, and there is 
an objection, he must obtain leave of the assembly for the 
reading, by a motion and vote of the assembly. 

134. Because of delay and interruption, which would 



PARLIAMEA'TARY RULES. 479 

Otherwise ensue, if the members were aUowed to use the 
time ot the assembly for that purpose. 

135 A new question, to decide whether the paper shaU 
be read or not can be made, which takes the place of the 
other, as incidental to it. 

il^' "f^?^^^' ^y ^^^ ^^nanimous vote of the assembly. 

137. W hen a proposition is debarred from the action 
of the assembly oy reason of some special rule, such rule 
may be removed for the time being by a vote, under the 
hea.do^ suspension of a rule, by which the proposition mav 
be admitted. "^ 

138. In most legislative bodies it requires two-thirds or 
three-fourths, according to the code of rules adopted, but 
if no provision is made, there seems to be no other mode of 
suspending or dispensing with a rule, except by general 
consent. 

139. Like other incidental questions, the sub-amend- 
ment supersedes the amendment until decided. 

140. The previous question, and to he on the table. 

141. Parhamentary usage has fixed the form of the pre- 
vious question, "Shall the main question now be put? " 
which calls for immediate action ; consequently, no change 
can be made. In the question to lie on the table, usage 
has decided it not susceptible to an amendment, as it is 
already as simple as can be. 

142. The subsidiary question to He on the table will 
supersede it. 

143. As this decision takes the main question out of 
the possession of the assembly for the day, there is noth- 
ing then before it to amend, commit, or postpone. 

144. As either indefinite, or to a day certain. 

145. When the postponement is indefinite, it can be 
amended to a day certain ; and when it is to a dav certain,, 
to some other day ; or an amendment to an amendment, 
when a different day is desired. 

146. The substituted day may be moved as an inde- 
pendent motion. 

147. By the use of the previous question ; or commit ;. 
or amend. 

148. When decided in the affirmative, the question is 
then removed from before the assembly, and, conse- 
quently, there is no ground for the previous question ; but 
if decided negatively, the question remains to be diposed 
of as the assembly shall declare. 

149. By the substitution of one kind of a committee 



480 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

for another, or by changing the number of the committee. 

150. To he on the table. 

151. The amendment question. This motion can be 
superseded by postponement to a day certain, or by a 
commitment. 

152. In either case the proposed amendment is not 
suppressed, but referred to a committee for careful delib- 
eration ; or, in case there was urgent business, a lengthy 
debate might delay ; consequently, the right to postpone to 
a day certain. 

153. In regular order. In " permanent organizations" 
of an assembly or society, a settled order of business is 
usually adopted, and whatever business is to be transacted 
comes' under that order ; but in assemblies where no defi- 
nite system has been established, subjects are taken up 
when appropriately presented. 

154. They are left to the discretion of the presiding 
officer, unless the assembly, by action, decide to take up a 
particular subject. 

155. The entire paper should first be read by the secre- 
tary or clerk, then by the presiding officer by paragraph, 
pausing at the end of each distinct article, for amending, 
if desired, and when the whole paper has been gone 
throuofh with in this manner, the presiding officer puts the 
final question on agreeing to or adopting the whole paper, 
as amended or unamended. 

156. It does not. The preamble, or title, is postponed 
until the residue of the paper is gone through with. 

157. The amendments only are first read, in course, by 
the recording officer. The presiding officer then reads the 
first, and puts it to the question, and so on until the whole 
is adopted or rejected, no amendments being made, except 
an amendment to an amendment, until all the amend- 
ments reported by the committee have been disposed of, 
when an opportunity is offered by the presiding officer to 
the assembly for amendments to the body of the paper; and 
when the whole has been thus acted upon, the entire paper 
is put to the question on agreeing to or adopting it as the 
resolution, order, etc., of the assembly. 

158. As the order, resolution, etc., of the assembly, and 
not as the report of the committee accepted. 

159. As an amendment, and is to be first amended, if 
necessary, and then put to the question as an amendment 
reported by the committee; or, the new draft may first be 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 481 

accepted as a substitute for the original paper, and then 
treated as such. 

160. First, a proposition is moved. 
Second, a motion to amend. 
Third, a motion to commit. 

Fourth, the debate results in a question for order. 
Fifth, the question of privilege'and rights of members in 
a debate, etc., is called up. 
Sixth, to lie on the table. 

161. The regular course of proceeding requires the mo- 
tion to lie on the table to be put first; if carried, the whole 
is removed from the assembly; if lost, the question of priv- 
ilege must then be settled; then the question of order; then 
of commitment — which, if lost, brings us to the question of 
amendment; and, lastly, the main question. 

162. After it has been moved and seconded, and pro- 
posed to the assembly by the presiding officer. Until this 
is done, it is not a question before the assembly, to be acted 
upon or considered in any manner. 

163. A member moves a principal question, and at the 
same time calls for the previous question, or that the reso- 
lution lie on the table. 

164. To take no notice of the subsidiary question, but 
propose the principal one in the usual manner, thus giving 
members the right of debate, etc., in relation to the subject. 

165. The right to express his opinions in the discussion 
of the subject under consideration. 

166. He cannot be interrupted, except by a call to or- 
der, which question being decided, he is entitled to be 
heard through. When any matter of privilege afi'ecting 
the assembly itself, or any of its members, of which the 
assembly ought to have instant information, — such as ob- 
structing the passage-way to the hall; quarreling of mem- 
bers; or when it becomes necessary to have lights, — it gives 
sufficient cause for interruption until the assembly is 
again in condition to have the speaker proceed. 

167. As breaches of order; for no motion can be made 
without the member rising and addressing the chair, and 
being recognized by the presiding officer. 

168. " Mr. President, I arise to a point of order.'' He 
should then proceed with the statement of his point, or 
other matter of order, or of privilege. 

169. He can, for if the debate or consideration of that 
subject were allowed to proceed, it might continue through 
the day, and thus defeat the order. 



482 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

170. To the mover of the question, in preference to 
others, if he rises to speak; also, on resuming debate after 
adjournment, to give the floor to the mover of the adjourn- 
ment, if he desires it. 

171. He should prefer the one who is opposed to the 
measure in question; but in all these cases the determina- 
tion of the presiding officer may be overruled by the as- 
sembly. 

172. If he states that he intends to conclude with a 
motion, and informs the assembly what that motion is, he 
may be allowed to speak. But if he speaks upon a 
subject not known to be or to become a motion before the 
house, he is liable to be called to a point of order. 

173. Often, when the subject to be brought before the 
assembly is not definitely understood, the expression of 
opinion is given. This promiscuous expression, or counsel, 
is allowed when no member raises an objection. Other- 
wise the subfect must come regularly before the meeting. 

174. He should rise and stand up in his place, un- 
covered, address the presiding officer as " Mr. Chairman," 
or '' Mr. President,"' according to title, and if in order, the 
presiding officer will respond by calling the speaker by 
name, by which means the assembly may take notice who 
it is that speaks, and may give their attention accordingly. 

175. To refer to him by some expression, or in some 
manner, without speaking his name, the object being to 
guard against the possibility of exciting personal feeling. 

176. To sit until the former has been heard. 

177. So long as he has the floor and keeps within the 
rule. (See Question 184.) 

178. No person is to use indecent language against the 
proceedings of the assembly, or to reflect on any of its 
prior determinations, unless he means to close his remarks 
with a motion to rescind such determination. No mem- 
ber is at liberty to digress from the matter of the question. 
Every member should clearly express his points of argu- 
ments, or the presiding officer may mistake them for a 
digression. Care should be taken in discussion that the 
speaker should follow the particular question, instead of 
the general question; for one moment it may be an amend- 
ment, at another time postponement, and again on order- 
ing the previous question. 

179. Sometimes it happens that the subsidiary motion 
involves in itself the merits of the original proposition, in 
which case the debate embraces both. 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 483 

180. By an aflfirmative vote of the assembly, he may 
continue, but if no question was made, or if decided in the 
negative, the speaker must abandon the objectionable 
course of remarks and return to the subject under debate. 

181. No member can speak more than once to the same 
question, but he may to the same subject as often as it is 
presented in the form of a different question ; as, when 
referred to a committee, or when subsidiary or incidental 
questions arise in the course of the debate. This rule 
applies to the technical points of this decision, and if 
enforced will prevent a member from speaking a second time 
unless he obtains leave of the assembly. 

182. To clear a matter of fact, or explain some material 
part of his speech, but carefully keeping within that line, 
and not falling into the matter itself. 

183. To explain a statement made by a member, but 
which was not so thoroughly discussed as to give a thor- 
ough comprehension. 

184. He does not. In yielding the floor he relinquishes 
it altogether. 

185. By the limitation of the time allotted to each 
speaker; by adopting beforehand a special rule in refer- 
ence to a particular subject, which at a specified time shall 
declare debating to cease, and all motions or questions 
pending in relation to it shall be decided. Besides these 
methods for putting an end to an unprofitable or tiresome 
debate, is the long-used previous question. 

186. In permitting every kind of disorder witiiout 
censure. 

187. By a member or members rising and calling to 
order, the objecting party repeating the words used exact- 
ly as he conceives them to have been spoken, in order that 
they may be reduced to writing by the recording officer. 
If the presiding officer thinks there is no foundation for 
deciding the language disorderly, he will prudently delay 
giving orders to the clerk to record them, until a further 
expression of the assembly, either by vote or calling out, 
is obtained. 

188. Such censure is not to be recorded, or any action 
f" taken thereon. 

189. To submit himself to the pleasure of the assem- 
bly, and to sit down, for it scarcely ever happens that the 
members of any assembly are guilty of this piece of ill 
manners, without some excuse or provocation, or that they 



484 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

are so wholly inattentive to one who says anything worth 
their hearing. 

190. An order is a command of the assembly ; a resolu- 
tion expresses the opinions or purposes ; and the term vote 
may be applied to the result of every question decided by 
the assembly. 

191. When the proposition is quite lengthy, as is usual 
with a petition, report, etc., the form in which it is usually 
presented to the assembly is, '' Shall the petition, or the re- 
port, be received V 

192. There being no objection expressed, the formality 
of taking a question by a vote is dispensed with, and the 
matter declared to be accepted; but should any member 
rise to object, the presiding officer shall consider every- 
thing that has passed as nothing, and at once go back and 
take the matter up in regular form. 

193. ^^As many as are of the opinion i/iai," repeating the 
words of the question, '' say ^aye'; as many as are of a differ- 
ent opinion, say ^no.'' " 

194. The members are requested to form a division, 
either in two separate parties, or by rising in their seats, 
or by roll-call. 

195. By a vote from the presiding officer. 

196. It is; but in doing so he may, if he pleases, gi^e 
his reasons. 

197. The presiding officer appoints tellers for each di- 
vision, and the members are required to rise, uncovered, 
and remain until counted. 

198. The one in general use in this country is by roll- 
call. The clerk is ordered to call the name of each mem- 
ber, who rises in his place and answers yes or no, and the 
clerk notes the answer as the roll is called. He then reads 
over, firpt the names of those who answered in the affirm- 
ative, and then the names of those who answered in the 
negative, in order that if he has made any mistake in not- 
ing, or any member has made any mistake in his answer, 
the mistake of either may be corrected. The clerk then 
counts the number on each side, and reports them to the 
presiding officer, who declares the result to the assembly. 

199. It is not a full question until the negative is 
reached; consequently it is in order for any member to rise 
and speak, make motions for amendments or otherwise, 
and thus renew the debate. In such a case, the question 
must be put over again on the affirmative. 

200. By obtaining the votes of members who were not 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 485 

in wnen the voting commenced; or those already voting 
may have changed their minds. 

201. Because the question becomes full, both sides be- 
ing acted upon at the same time. 

202. The presiding officer must decide it without de- 
bate, the act to be subject to revision and correction by 
the assembly after the division is over. The presiding 
officer may, if he please, receive the advice of members in. 
regard to the objection, which they are to give sitting, in 
order to avoid even the appearance of a debate. 

203. Suspend proceedings until a quorum is obtained, 
whether on the same or some future day, when the ques- 
tion must be taken up at that precise point. 

204. A question by which a matter which has been 
acted upon shall again come before the assembly in pre- 
cisely the same condition as it was before being considered. 

205. Any member, the same as of any other motion, 
although in legislative bodies special rules regulate by 
whom, when, and in what manner; but where an^ assem- 
bly is subject to no special rules concerning it, it is the 
privilege of any member to move a reconsideration. 

206. To bring into shape matters which require thought 
to construct, or investigation; or any business which can- 
not be as conveniently transacted in the assembly session 
as outside. 

207. It depends upon the general authority and par- 
ticular instruction given them by the assembly at the time 
of their appointment. A vote taken in committee is as 
binding as a vote of the assembly. A committee has full 
power over what may be committed to it, except that it 
is not at liberty to change the title or subject. 

208. They are, Select, Standing and Committee of the Whole, 

209. A committee especially selected to transact any 
business arising on a particular occasion. 

210. A committee appointed beforehand for the con- 
sideration of all matters of the same nature which may 
arise during the session. The standing committee contin- 
ues in existence, while the select is dissolved after the par- 
ticular business for which it was appointed is transacted. 

211 First decide upon the number of which the com- 
mittee* is to be composed. The number being settled, 
there are three modes of selecting the members, to- wit: 
appointing by the presiding officer; by baUot; and by 
nomination and vote of the assembly. 



486 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

212. The same as in other elections, and are elected 
singly or all together, as may be ordered. 

213. The names of the members proposed are put to 
the question, singly, and are approved or rejected by the 
assembly, by a vote taken in the usual way. 

214. That none be appointed who are directly opposed 
to the body of that subject, but rather those who are sup- 
posed to approve it. 

215. To make out a list of the members, together with 
a certified copy of instructions under which they are to 
act, and to give the papers to the person first named on 
the committee, if convenient; but, if otherwise, to any 
other member of the committee. 

216. Usually he is the first person named on the com- 
mittee, but this is a matter of courtesy, every committee 
having the right to select its own chairman, who presides 
over it, and makes the report of its proceedings to the 
assembly. 

217. When and wherever the members of the com- 
mittee shall decide. But if directions have been given by 
the assembly, they cannot regularly sit at any other time 
or place than in accordance with instructions. Sometimes 
these instructions are to sit immediately and make its 
report forthwith; but no committee has a right to sit while 
the assembly is in session, unless so ordered. 

218. Without some particular number has been des- 
ignated by the assembly, a majority constitutes a quorum 
for business. 

219. The committee is closed, and cannot act without 
being newly directed to sit. 

220. They must be written down and reported to the 
assembly for its consideration. A committee cannot pun- 
ish disorderly conduct of any kind, but must report it. 

221. Where a paper is referred to a committee, they 
proceed to the question of amendment; while a paper 
originating with them may be amended, as in the case of 
a paper referred, but at the close the question is put on 
the whole, for agreeing to the paper as amended or un- 
amended. 

222. They cannot. If in their judgment it cannot be 
made good by amendments, they have no authority to 
reject, but must report back to the assembly, and there make 
their opposition as individual members. 

223. It should be in a clear draft, fairly written, with- 
out erasing or interlining. 



PARLIA.MENTARY RULES. 487 

224. They are not at liberty to erase, interline, blot, 
disfigure or tear it in any manner, but must report all 
amendments in a separate paper, stating the exact parts 
to be amended and the words to be inserted. If the 
amendments agreed to are very numerous and minute, 
they may report them all together in the form of a new- 
draft. 

225. It is moved and voted upon that the committee 
rise, and that the chairman, or some other member, makes 
their report to the assembly. 

226. The chairman or member appointed to make the 
report, rises in his place and informs the assembly that 
the committee to whom was referred such a subject or 
paper have, according to order, had the same under con- 
sideration, and have directed him to make a report there- 
on, which he is ready to do when the assembly shall 
please. The person offering the report, or any other mem- 
ber, can then move that the report be now received. The 
assembly then decide whether it will receive the report at 
that time, or fix upon some time in the future for its re- 
ception. 

227. At the time when, by the order of the assembly, 
the report is to be received, the chairman reads it in his 
place, and then delivers it, together with all the papers 
connected with it, to the clerk or secretary, where it is 
again read, and then lies on the table until it suits the 
convenience of the assembly to take it up for consid- 
eration. 

228. The chairman reads the amendments in their con- 
nection with the paper, showing the alterations made 
therein, and the reasons assigned by the committee for 
their action; while in the reading of the report at the 
clerk's table the amendments only are read. 

229. It is usually dispensed with, although, if any 
objection is made, or if the presiding officer sees any 
informality in the report, he should decline receivmg it 
without a motion and vote. 

230. By being printed, and each member given a copy, 
by which means the reading of such papers by the clerk 
becomes unnecessary. . j ■, 

231. When the report has been made and received, the 
committee is dissolved, and can act no more without new 
power; but if the report is not received the committee is 
not discharged, but may be ordered to sit again, and a 
time and place for such session appointed accordingly. 



488 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

232. When any subject has once been in the hands of 
a committee, and the report made upon it is not satisfac- 
tory to the assembly, it may again be committed to the 
same, or some other committee^ by which act it is known 
as recommitted. 

233. None whatever, the whole question being again 
before the committee as if nothing had passed there in 
relation to it. 

234. In three different forms, namely: Firsts it may 
contain merely a statement of facts, opinions or reasoning, 
in relation to the subject of it, without any general con- 
clusion; second, by a statement of facts, etc., with a gen- 
eral conclusion; third, by resolution, or a general conclu- 
sion, without any introductory part. 

235. When the report is accepted it is adopted, as though 
it was originally done by the assembly without the ser- 
vices of a committee. 

236. They do, although the term '' accepting " should 
be used when the report contains merely a statement of 
facts, reasoning or opinion; and the term "adopting," 
when the report concludes with resolutions or propo- 
sitions. 

237. The whole assembly resolved into a committee. 

238. When the time arrives for the committee to sit,, 
the presiding officer puts the question, then made, that 
the assembly do now resolve itself into a committee of the 
whole, to take under consideration such a matter, — naming 
it. If this question is decided in the affirmative, he de- 
clares the result, and names some member to act as chair- 
man of the committee; if objections are made, then by 
nomination and vote. The elected chairman takes a seat 
(not in the chair of the assembly) at the secretary's table, 
and the presiding officer takes a seat elsewhere, like any 
other member. 

239. The same number as constitutes a quorum in the 
assembly. 

240. On motion, the chairman rises, and the presiding 
officer thereupon resumes the chair. The chairman then 
informs the assembly of the cause of the dissolution of 
the committee, but can make no report of business trans- 
acted. 

241. In legislative bodies, it becomes the duty of the 
assistant clerk. 

242. The same as in any committee, the report to the 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 489 

assembly, only, to be recorded in the journal of the as- 
sembly. 

243. In the committee of the whole the previous ques- 
tion cannot be moved; it cannot adjourn; every member 
may speak as often as he pleases, providing he can obtain 
the floor; it cannot refer any matter to another commit- 
tee; the presiding officer of the assembly has a right to 
take part in the proceedings, the same as any other mem- 
ber; and in case of a breach of order, the committee can- 
not punish offenders, but must write down and report to 
the assembly. 

244. To move that the committee rise; and if it is ap- 
prehended that the same discussion will be attempted on 
returning again into committee, the assembly can dis- 
charge the committee, and proceed itself with the busi- 
ness. 

245. A move should be made that the committee rise, 
report progress, and ask leave to sit again. If the motion 
prevails, the presiding officer resumes the chair of the 
assembly, and the chairman informs him that the commit- 
tee have, according to order, made some progress thereon, 
but, for want of time, ask leave for the committee to sit 
again. The presiding officer thereupon puts the question, 
by which the committee is given leave to sit again, and 
the time is also designated when the assembly will again 
resolve itself into a committee. If the request is not 
granted, the committee is dissolved. 

246. A committee appointed by a committee for the 
purpose of expediting their business. 

247. By general consent, it is. If the assembly are 
ready to receive it at the time, they cry out, ''Now, now" ; 
if not ready , some other time is proposed, as "To-morrow," 
or "Monday," and that is fixed by general consent; but 
any objection necessitates an agreement by a motion and 
vote. 

248. He should give the closest attention to the^ pro- 
ceedings of the assembly, and especially to what is said by 
every member who speaks. By so doing, confusion will 
be prevented, offensive language checked, and harmony 
obtained. Much depends upon the presiding officer for a 
careful, just and thorough transaction of the business -of 
the assembly. His attention, interest, and impartial acts 
inspire confidence, create union of feeling, and impress 
upon each member the necessity of legislation for the ben- 
efit of all. 



IIJDEX. 



Page. 

Preface g 

Questions on United States History 5 

Answers to Questions on United States History 33 

Questions on Geography j^Ol 

Answers to Questions on Geography 129 

Questions on Reading 17Y 

Answers to Questions on Reading 181 

Questions on Physical Geography 187 

Answers to Questions on Physical Geography 199 

Questions on Grammar ^ 231 

Answers to Questions on Grammar 239 

Questions on Letter Writing 253 

Answers to Questions on Letter AVriting 255 

Questions on Orthography, Orthoepy and Phonology... 259 
Answers to Questions on Orthography, Orthoepy and 

Phonology 267 

Questions on Written Arithmetic 281 

Answers to Questions on Written Arithmetic 289 

Questions on Theory and Practice of Teaching ..315 

Answers to Questions on Theory and Practice of Teach- 
ing 319 

Questions on Alcohol and Tobacco 331 

Answers to Questions on Alcohol and Tobacco 333 

Questions on Civil Government 339 

Answers to Questions on Civil Government , 345 

Questions on Physiology, Anatomy and Hygiene 355 

491 



492 INDEX. 

Page- 
Answers to Questions on Physiology, Anatomy and 

Hygiene 365 

Questions on Natural Philosophy 391 

Answers to Questions on Natural Philosophy 397 

Participles and Infinitives Made Easy — Questions 411 

Participles and Infinitives Made Easy — Answers to 

Questions , 413 

Questions on Writing 415 

Answers to Questions on Writing 419 

Questions on Algebra 425 

Answers to Questions on Algebra 431 

Test Problems, promiscuously arranged 443 

Statements and Answers to Problems 447 

Questions on Parliamentary Rules 453 

Answers to Questions on Parliamentary Rules 465 



.^' 



^^^^ 









,-.> s^ "" J-^ ""^r^ 












>^' :- .iM'^:^^ 



9.. 



sS' ^ V. I ii 



.A^' V 



x\' .^ .r' 



■>/r9^ 



^"V^^^ 






^^, ,^ 



y '' ' NK^*- 






.K^^^A 






f-<f>^ 



^. -'c- 






^^ ^.^'^'^i^" 






\' e-^' 






% -^^ 



^^ x> .-" 



'^^> .^^ 



\' * 



'J^^/% 






,0^ s^ '" ^^ C- 









av :^ 






VH^:^.' 






kxr^}^^s 



^^ "■ 






S^^. 



j"^' . 



•^^ v^ 



fo^ 



a\' '/'. 



le 



